OS/2 Warp 3 Documentation: Difference between revisions

From OS2World.Com Wiki
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page with "By IBM '''“Reprint Courtesy of International Business Machines Corporation, © International Business Machines Corporation”''' Version Notice 1/1 First Edition ...")
 
(44 intermediate revisions by 2 users not shown)
Line 3: Line 3:
'''“Reprint Courtesy of International Business Machines Corporation, © International Business Machines Corporation”'''
'''“Reprint Courtesy of International Business Machines Corporation, © International Business Machines Corporation”'''


Version Notice   1/1
==Version Notice 1/1==
First Edition (October 1994)


First Edition (October 1994)
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:  INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country
where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:  INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states
do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time.
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country.  Such references or information must not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products, programming, or services in your country.
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative.
publication at any time.
 
It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information
===Contributors 2/1===
about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are
:Authors c.
not announced in your country.  Such references or information must not be
::Linda S. Rogers
construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products, programming,
::Lisa DeMeo
or services in your country.
::Karla Stagray
Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM
:Contributing Authors c.
authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative.
::Su Hill
::Val Enright
::David Spicer
::Marion Lindsey
::Lana Meadows
::Kathy Hancock
:Editors c.
::Elizabeth Jean
::Tracey Marcelo
::Roger Didio
:Design c.
::Brian Black
::Jeff Lewis
:National Language Support c.
::Joseph Hunt
::Mike Cress
::Gene Ignatowski
:Publications Manager c.
::John D. Lloyd
:Managing Editor c.
::Dan Baker
:Publishing Assistant Editor c.
::Linda S. Rogers
:Editorial Assistant c.
::Victor Laird
:Production Coordinator c.
::Elyse Anchell
:Tools Support c.
::Gene Ignatowski
::Rick Goldsmith
:Usability Testing c.
::Lynn VanDyke
::Carol Righi
::Alan Rose
::John Tyler
 
===Welcome 3/1+===
Hello and welcome to OS/2. You're about to begin using your computer in an exciting new way-as a productivity aid that helps you get your work done quickly and easily.
This book is for anyone who uses OS/2, whether you're just beginning, are familiar with computers, or have lots of technical expertise. It contains all the information you need to install and use OS/2 effectively, from the basics to "know-how" information to expert tips and technical details.
* "Part 1: Installing OS/2" contains system preparation tasks and installation instructions.
* "Part 2: Exploring OS/2" offers a self-paced, interactive guided tour of the Desktop.
* "Part 3: Using OS/2" provides step-by-step instructions for using each object on the Desktop.
* "Part 4: Troubleshooting" includes technical tips and techniques for resolving problems and keeping your system running smoothly.
* "Part 5: Advanced Installation" is for technical users who want to customize their installation.
* Appendix A describes techniques for using a mouse or a keyboard.
You'll find this book easy to use if you look for these simple conventions:
* '''Boldface''' type indicates the name of an item you need to select.
* ''Italics'' type indicates new terms, book titles, or variable information that must be replaced by an actual value.
* <tt>Monospace</tt> type indicates an example (such as a fictitious path or file name) or text that is displayed on the screen.
* uppercase type indicates a file name, command name, or acronym.
So why not get started right away?  Here are some easy paths to follow, depending on what you want to accomplish:
* To install OS/2, go to Part 1.
* If you're new to OS/2 or just want to explore, go to Part 2.
* To access the extensive online information, go to Part 2.
* To learn how to use OS/2, go to Part 3.
 
===About OS/2 Version 3 4/2+===
OS/2* Version 3 is an advanced, 32-bit operating system that runs on 4MB systems and provides excellent response time to both 16-bit and 32-bit applications.
OS/2 Version 3 is easier to install and to use and has better performance than previous versions of the OS/2 operating system.


Contributors    2/1
===Installation Improvements in OS/2 Version 3 5/3===
OS/2 Version 3 includes an Easy Installation choice. You can choose Easy Installation to install OS/2 from diskette or CD-ROM. Easy Installation lets the system choose which options to install. After you select Easy Installation, you don't have to make any more installation decisions.
In addition, OS/2 Version 3 has the following installation improvements:
* It takes less time and fewer diskettes to complete an installation.
* The system automatically installs the Dual Boot feature when you install over DOS.
* You can install more than one printer during the initial installation.
* Multimedia installation is a part of the OS/2 installation.


      Authors c.
===Performance 6/3===
          Linda S. Rogers
Performance improvements make OS/2 Version 3 faster at displaying objects on the Desktop, moving from one window to another, and displaying information in the Master Help Index and Glossary.
          Lisa DeMeo
          Karla Stagray
      Contributing Authors c.
          Su Hill
          Val Enright
          David Spicer
          Marion Lindsey
          Lana Meadows
          Kathy Hancock
      Editors c.
          Elizabeth Jean
          Tracey Marcelo
          Roger Didio
      Design c.
          Brian Black
          Jeff Lewis
      National Language Support c.
          Joseph Hunt
          Mike Cress
          Gene Ignatowski
      Publications Manager c.
          John D. Lloyd
      Managing Editor c.
          Dan Baker
      Publishing Assistant Editor c.
          Linda S. Rogers
      Editorial Assistant c.
          Victor Laird
      Production Coordinator c.
          Elyse Anchell
      Tools Support c.
          Gene Ignatowski
          Rick Goldsmith
      Usability Testing c.
          Lynn VanDyke
          Carol Righi
          Alan Rose
          John Tyler


Welcome    3/1+
===New Features 7/3===
OS/2 Version 3 has the following new features that make the system easier to use:
* The LaunchPad provides a quick and easy way to get to commands and objects that you use often.
* The Using OS/2 tutorial is a vastly improved and expanded learning tool that provides basic, step-by-step information, including a Practice push button that takes you to the Desktop to try the task for yourself, as well as expert tips and special hints for Microsoft** Windows** users.
* Comet Cursor is a trail that follows your mouse pointer to help you see it on portable computer screens.
* The Pickup and Drop choices on the pop-up menu for an object let you use other Desktop functions while dragging and dropping objects.
* The Desktop page of the Desktop Settings notebook lets you arrange your Desktop the way you like it and have the system restore that Desktop each time you restart your system.
* The Archive page of Desktop Settings, together with the Recovery Choices screen, lets you save different versions of your system files and choose which version you want to use to restart your system.
* Undo Arrange now accompanies the Arrange feature available from the pop-up menu for an object.
* A redesigned Desktop now has new three-dimensional icons and animated icons.
* Two color palettes are available - Solid Color Palette and Mixed Color Palette. The Solid Color Palette was designed for use with systems that have VGA display support. The Mixed Color Palette was designed for use with systems that have SVGA display support. The paint roller has been changed to a paint bucket as an additional enhancement.
* An enhanced Scheme Palette with many new schemes to choose from.
* Newly designed mouse pointer options include the ability to change the look and size of the mouse pointer.
* The new Fastload option improves application loading time.
* Enhanced PCMCIA support enables you to switch devices and automatically reconfigures your system while you continue to work.


Hello and welcome to OS/2.  You're about to begin using your computer in an
==Part 1- Installing OS/2 8/1==
exciting new way-as a productivity aid that helps you get your work done quickly
and easily.
This book is for anyone who uses OS/2, whether you're just beginning, are
familiar with computers, or have lots of technical expertise. It contains all
the information you need to install and use OS/2 effectively, from the basics to
"know-how" information to expert tips and technical details.
  o  "Part 1Installing OS/2" contains system preparation tasks and
      installation instructions.
  o  "Part 2:  Exploring OS/2" offers a self-paced, interactive guided tour of
      the Desktop.
  o  "Part 3:  Using OS/2" provides step-by-step instructions for using each
      object on the Desktop.
  o  "Part 4:  Troubleshooting" includes technical tips and techniques for
      resolving problems and keeping your system running smoothly.
  o  "Part 5:  Advanced Installation" is for technical users who want to
      customize their installation.
  o  Appendix A describes techniques for using a mouse or a keyboard.
You'll find this book easy to use if you look for these simple conventions:
  o  Boldface type indicates the name of an item you need to select.
  o  Italics type indicates new terms, book titles, or variable information
      that must be replaced by an actual value.
  o  Monospace type indicates an example (such as a fictitious path or file
      name) or text that is displayed on the screen.
  o  uppercase type indicates a file name, command name, or acronym.
So why not get started right away?  Here are some easy paths to follow,
depending on what you want to accomplish:
  o  To install OS/2, go to Part 1.
  o  If you're new to OS/2 or just want to explore, go to Part 2.
  o  To access the extensive online information, go to Part 2.
  o  To learn how to use OS/2, go to Part 3.


About OS/2 Version 3    4/2+
===As You Begin 9/1+===
This chapter contains preliminary information to get you ready to install OS/2*.


OS/2* Version 3 is an advanced, 32-bit operating system that runs on 4MB systems
Complete all the procedures in this chapter. Then choose an installation method.
and provides excellent response time to both 16-bit and 32-bit applications.
OS/2 Version 3 is easier to install and to use and has better performance than
previous versions of the OS/2 operating system.


Installation Improvements in OS/2 Version 3   5/3
The OS/2 operating system can be installed over the following products:
* OS/2 for Windows
* OS/2 Version 1.3
* DOS Versions 3.3 or later
* Microsoft Windows Versions 3.1 or 3.11
* Windows for Workgroups 3.1 or 3.11
: Note: OS/2 does not enable the LAN connectivity function of Windows for Workgroups. For information on how to use the network function after installing OS/2, see the online book, Application Considerations.


OS/2 Version 3 includes an Easy Installation choice. You can choose Easy
If you do not need Windows function, you can install OS/2:
Installation to install OS/2 from diskette or CD-ROM. Easy Installation lets
* Without Windows
the system choose which options to install. After you select Easy Installation,
* With an earlier version of Windows
you don't have to make any more installation decisions.
:However, you will not be able to run Windows programs.
In addition, OS/2 Version 3 has the following installation improvements:
 
  o  It takes less time and fewer diskettes to complete an installation.
===Preparing Your System 10/2===
  o  The system automatically installs the Dual Boot feature when you install
Before installing OS/2, check the following:
      over DOS.
* If you are installing on a computer that has Windows on it, make sure you have the diskettes or the CD that was used to install Windows.<br />Note:
  o  You can install more than one printer during the initial installation.
*#Some computer manufacturers preinstall Windows on your computer, and then provide a utility program so you can create your own Windows diskettes. If Windows was preinstalled on your computer, create the Windows diskettes before you begin installing OS/2
  o  Multimedia installation is a part of the OS/2 installation.
*# If you used device drivers, fonts, or specific language information files different from those included on the Windows diskettes, or from those that were preinstalled on your computer, you might overwrite these files when installing OS/2. Reinstall those device drivers after installing OS/2.
* Be sure the files on your hard disk are not compressed. If you are using a DOS compression program, such as Stacker**, AdStor, or DoubleSpace, decompress the disk on which DOS and Windows are installed. Refer to the manual that came with the compression program for instructions.
Note:  If the compression program you are using does not specifically state that it works with OS/2, you will not be able to use the compression program after OS/2 is installed.
* See updates to the Installation program in the README.INS file on the Installation Diskette. Follow these steps:
# Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
# Turn on the computer. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.
# When prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1 into the drive; then press Enter.
# When the Welcome screen appears, press F3 to display a command prompt.
# Remove Diskette 1 from drive A and reinsert the Installation Diskette. Then do one of the following:
#*To view the README file online, type tedit readme.ins and press Enter. Press PF4 to quit the editor.
#*To print a copy of the README file, type copy readme.ins > LPT1 and press Enter. (LPT1 represents the port to which your printer is connected. If you are using another port, type the correct port.)
* Make sure you have the minimum hardware and software required to install OS/2:
** An Intel** 80386 SX (or higher) 32-bit microprocessor
** At least 4MB of random access memory (RAM)
** A hard disk with 35MB to 50MB of free space, plus an additional 10MB of hard disk space for multimedia support (for example, for a sound card)
** A 1.44MB diskette drive
** VGA video support
** An IBM-compatible mouse<br />Note: Both DOS and Windows provide programs that check and list your memory and installed hardware. To view this information, do one of the following:
*** If you have PC DOS 6.1 or later installed on your computer, type qconfig at the command line and press Enter.
*** If you have Windows installed on your computer, select Run from the File menu. Then type msd and press Enter.
* Refer to Special Hardware Considerations if you are using any of the following equipment:
:Gateway 2000**
:A system with Phoenix**, AMI**, or Micronics** BIOS
:ATI** Graphics Ultra** Pro display adapter
:An EISA system with an Adaptec** 1742A controller card
:IBM* PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
:IBM PS/2 Model 76
:IBM ThinkPad* with a Docking Station
:A system with an Aox upgrade
:Quantum** II Hard Card
:Sony**, Panasonic**, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips**, Mitsumi**, BSR, or Tandy non-SCSI CD-ROM drive
:Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM combination
:IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
:Sound Blaster**
:ProAudio Spectrum** 16
 
===Choosing Easy or Advanced Installation 11/2===
Use Easy Installation to install OS/2 with preselected settings, based on your current hardware and software. The Easy Installation program installs the operating system in the same partition as your DOS and Windows (if you have DOS and Windows installed on your computer), uses the File Allocation Table (FAT) file system, and installs the following OS/2 features on your computer:
 
Documentation, including:
:The OS/2 Tutorial
:Command Reference
:Windows in OS/2
:Application Considerations
:Performance Considerations
:Printing in OS/2
:Multimedia
All system fonts
 
Optional System Utilities, including:
:Backup Hard Disk
:Change File Attributes
:Manage Partition
:Restore Backed-Up Files
:Sort Filter
 
Tools and Games, including:
:Enhanced Editor
:Seek and Scan
:Chess
:Solitaire
:OS/2 DOS Support
:Multimedia Software Support (if required capabilities are detected on your computer)
:REXX
:Optional Bit Maps
:Advanced Power Management (if required capabilities are detected on your computer)
:PCMCIA (if required capabilities are detected on your computer)
To use Easy Installation, go to Using Easy Installation.
 
Important
 
Use Advanced Installation only if you are an experienced computer user.
This method lets you customize how OS/2 will be installed on your computer, including:
* Installing OS/2 on a drive or partition other than C
* Installing OS/2 in a logical drive
* Using the HPFS file system
* Selecting which of the OS/2 features you want to install
* Installing OS/2 so it can be used with Boot Manager
To use Advanced Installation, go to Using Advanced Installation.
 
===Using Easy Installation 12/1+===
This chapter describes how to install OS/2 on your computer using the Easy Installation method. Easy Installation was designed to help you install OS/2 without having to answer technical questions about your computer and its attached hardware. Throughout the installation process, the program will search and detect the type of hardware and software you are using on your computer.
Then, the Installation program will install a preselected set of the features of OS/2.
If you would prefer to customize the installation of OS/2 on your computer, and if you are experienced at installing operating systems, you might want to use the Advanced Installation method. Refer to Using Advanced Installation for more information about that method.
Easy Installation installs OS/2 using defaults (options that are preselected so you don't have to make decisions or selections). If you use this method, OS/2 will be installed as follows:
* If DOS and Windows are in a primary, drive C partition, OS/2 will be installed in that partition.
* The partition will not be reformatted.
* The Dual Boot feature will be automatically set up for you, so you can start your computer from either DOS or OS/2.
* If you are installing OS/2 Version 3 over a previous version of OS/2, your OS/2 Desktop will be preserved for you.
 
===Preparing for the Installation 13/2===
During Easy Installation, you will be asked to insert diskettes (or a compact disc (CD), if you are installing from a CD-ROM drive) and to remove diskettes.
Follow the directions you see on the screen. Be prepared to:
* Indicate the type of printer that is connected to your computer. If you do not know the type of printer you are using, refer to the documentation that came with your printer.
* Insert the original diskettes or CD that came with Microsoft Windows. Be sure to have your Windows diskettes or CD handy before you install OS/2.
If you have any problems during the installation, press the F1 key to view the online help that is available whenever you see F1=Help at the bottom of a screen. If you have problems with any of your hardware or if you receive error messages during the installation, refer to Solving Installation Problems.
 
===Installing the Operating System 14/2===
To install OS/2 using the Easy Installation method, follow these steps:
#If your computer is on, close all running applications.
#Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
#Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
#Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1. Then press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages asking you to wait, followed by a black screen. Then the screen appears.
#If you are installing OS/2 from diskettes, go to step 6. If you are installing from a CD, insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive; then press Enter.
#Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Easy Installation. Then press Enter.
#Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the installation progresses. If you are installing from a CD, you will not see any messages to remove diskettes.<br />After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then reinsert Diskette 1. Follow the instructions on the screen. After you remove Diskette 1 and press Enter, you will see the System Configuration screen.
#The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system. Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct. If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name. A screen will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using, refer to the documentation that came with it. Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need more information about any screen you see. If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on OK.<br />A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
#When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
#*If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or LPT3 button Then press Enter.
#*If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.<br />If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not install default printer and press Enter or click on OK.
#If you received a Warning message at the beginning of the Installation program telling you that you did not have enough free disk space to install OS/2, but you decided to continue with the installation anyway, you will see the OS/2 Setup and Installation screen. Go to step 11.<br />If you did not receive a Warning message at the beginning of the Installation program, go to step 12.
#The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.<br />The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the right of the feature. Follow these steps:
#:a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
#:b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
#:c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections
#Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. You will be asked to remove and insert diskettes, including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.
#If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the screen; click on Help if you need more information.
#When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part of the OS/2 installation.
#When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one of the following (if Windows was preinstalled on your computer when you bought it, you can skip this step and go to step 18):
#*If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
#:a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
#:b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
#:c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as requested.
#*If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
#:a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
#:b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
#:c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD, type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.<br />For example:<pre>e:\winsetup</pre> where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup is the directory that contains the Windows files.
#When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and press Enter.
#When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down and restart your computer. Click on OK or press enter.
#When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
View the Tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use your Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
For more help on using the operating system, you can access the online help system. Press F1 anytime to get help, or if you see a Help push button at the bottom of a screen, you can click on it to get more information about that screen.


Performance    6/3
===Switching between OS/2 and DOS with Dual Boot 15/2+===
When you install OS/2 using the Easy Installation method, a Dual Boot feature is automatically set up for you as well. Dual Boot lets you switch back and forth between OS/2 and DOS (you might want to do this because some DOS programs do not run under OS/2).


Performance improvements make OS/2 Version 3 faster at displaying objects on the
Dual Boot also keeps track of which operating system should start when you turn on your computer. Each time you shut down and restart your computer, it will start (boot) in whichever operating system was last being used. For example, if you shut down your system while DOS is running, your system will start in DOS the next time you turn on your computer.
Desktop, moving from one window to another, and displaying information in the
Master Help Index and Glossary.


New Features    7/3
===Starting the Dual Boot Feature 16/3===
Use the Dual Boot function to switch from one operating system to another:
*To switch from OS/2 to DOS:
*#Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
*#Open Command Prompts.
*#Open Dual Boot.
*#When a message appears asking if you want your system to be reset, type Y and press Enter.


OS/2 Version 3 has the following new features that make the system easier to
Note: If you want to run your DOS programs while OS/2 is running, you can use the DOS sessions that are part of OS/2 for most DOS programs. By using these sessions, you don't have to use Dual Boot, which shuts down your OS/2 session. To use a DOS session, open DOS Window or DOS Full Screen from the Command Prompts folder.
use:
*To switch from DOS to OS/2:
  o  The LaunchPad provides a quick and easy way to get to commands and objects
*# At the DOS command prompt, type c:\os2\boot /os2
      that you use often.
*# Press Enter.
  o  The Using OS/2 tutorial is a vastly improved and expanded learning tool
For more information about the BOOT command, refer to the Command Reference.
      that provides basic, step-by-step information, including a Practice push
The Command Reference is located in the Information folder on your OS/2 Desktop.
      button that takes you to the Desktop to try the task for yourself, as well
      as expert tips and special hints for Microsoft** Windows** users.
  o  Comet Cursor is a trail that follows your mouse pointer to help you see it
      on portable computer screens.
  o  The Pickup and Drop choices on the pop-up menu for an object let you use
      other Desktop functions while dragging and dropping objects.
  o  The Desktop page of the Desktop Settings notebook lets you arrange your
      Desktop the way you like it and have the system restore that Desktop each
      time you restart your system.
  o  The Archive page of Desktop Settings, together with the Recovery Choices
      screen, lets you save different versions of your system files and choose
      which version you want to use to restart your system.
  o  Undo Arrange now accompanies the Arrange feature available from the pop-up
      menu for an object.
  o  A redesigned Desktop now has new three-dimensional icons and animated
      icons.
  o  Two color palettes are available - Solid Color Palette and Mixed Color
      Palette. The Solid Color Palette was designed for use with systems that
      have VGA display support.  The Mixed Color Palette was designed for use
      with systems that have SVGA display support.  The paint roller has been
      changed to a paint bucket as an additional enhancement.
  o  An enhanced Scheme Palette with many new schemes to choose from.
  o  Newly designed mouse pointer options include the ability to change the
      look and size of the mouse pointer.
  o  The new Fastload option improves application loading time.
  o  Enhanced PCMCIA support enables you to switch devices and automatically
      reconfigures your system while you continue to work.


Part 1- Installing OS/2   8/1
===Installing DOS after Installing OS/2 17/3===
If you installed OS/2 on drive C, formatted the drive with the FAT file system, and you did not already have DOS installed, your system will still have the Dual Boot capability. However, you must install DOS to use the Dual Boot feature.
To add Dual Boot after installing OS/2, follow these steps:
#Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
#Open Command Prompts.
#Open Dual Boot. A Warning box appears reminding you that DOS was not installed and asking if you want to continue.
#Type Y and press Enter. You will see messages that your system is being prepared, and then a warning that you must shut down your system. Press Enter to close the window.
#Shut down your system:
#:a. Position the mouse pointer on a blank space on your Desktop and press mouse button 2.
#:b. Select Shut down... from the menu that appears.
#:c. When a message appears telling you to turn off your computer, do so.
#Install DOS on your computer. Follow the instructions that came in your DOS package.
#At the DOS command line, type <tt>c:\os2\boot /os2</tt> and press Enter to return to your OS/2 Desktop.


===What to Do if Dual Boot Does Not Work 18/3===
If the BOOT command is unsuccessful when you try to switch from DOS to OS/2, you might have programs running that take up too much of your computer's memory. If so, close the programs before you use the BOOT command. If the programs are loaded from your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you must deactivate the programs before using the BOOT command.


As You Begin    9/1+
===Using Windows Programs 19/2+===
When you install OS/2 on a computer that has Windows installed on it, all of your Windows functions are still available. If you installed OS/2 with the Easy Installation method, any Windows programs you had on your computer were automatically placed in folders on your OS/2 Desktop. You can also use the Windows Program Manager by opening a WIN-OS/2 command prompt from the Command Prompts folder in the OS/2 System folder.
To use your Windows programs after installing OS/2, use the following procedures:
*To run a Windows program from your OS/2 Desktop:
*#Open WIN-OS/2* Groups, or Windows Programs or Additional Windows Progams (whichever contains the program object you want to open).
*# Open the program you want to use.
*To run a Windows program from the Windows Program Manager:
*#Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
*#Open Command Prompts.
*#Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen or WIN-OS/2 Window.
*#Open the program you want to use.


This chapter contains preliminary information to get you ready to install OS/2*.
===Installing Windows after Installing OS/2 20/3===
Complete all the procedures in this chapter. Then choose an installation
If you installed OS/2 on a computer that did not have Microsoft Windows on it already, you can install Windows later if you have a partition formatted with the FAT file system. Follow these steps:
method.
#Start your computer with DOS. Do one of the following:
The OS/2 operating system can be installed over the following products:
#*Open Dual Boot in the Command Prompts folder.
  o  OS/2 for Windows
#*Select DOS from the Boot Manager menu.
  o  OS/2 Version 1.3
#:Note: If you have not installed DOS, refer to the procedure in Installing DOS after Installing OS/2.
  o  DOS Versions 3.3 or later
#When a message appears asking if you want your system to be reset, type Y and press Enter.
  o  Microsoft Windows Versions 3.1 or 3.11
#Install Windows in a FAT-formatted partition or logical drive.
  o  Windows for Workgroups 3.1 or 3.11
#Shut down your computer, and then restart it with OS/2.
      Note:  OS/2 does not enable the LAN connectivity function of Windows for
#Open System Setup in the OS/2 System folder.
      Workgroups. For information on how to use the network function after
#Open Selective Install
      installing OS/2, see the online book, Application Considerations.
#When the System Configuration screen appears, select OK.
If you do not need Windows function, you can install OS/2:
#On the OS/2 Setup and Installation screen, select WIN-OS/2 Support. Then select Install
  o  Without Windows
#When the Advanced Options window appears, select OK to continue.
  o  With an earlier version of Windows
#When prompted to do so, insert and remove the numbered OS/2 installation diskettes.
      However, you will not be able to run Windows programs.
#When prompted to do so, insert and remove the numbered Windows diskettes.
#When prompted to do so, shut down and restart your computer so the changes can take effect.


Preparing Your System    10/2
===What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation 21/2===
The installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most cases, you will not encounter any problems. However, if you do have problems either during the installation process or immediately afterwards, refer to Solving Installation Problems.
Problems you might encounter include:
*A blank screen after installation.
*An error message with a number and, sometimes, text.
*A hardware device that does not work. (This problem can occur if you are using hardware that is not supported by OS/2.)
If these or other problems occur, refer to Solving Installation Problems.


Before installing OS/2, check the following:
==Part 2 - Exploring OS/2 22/1==
  o  If you are installing on a computer that has Windows on it, make sure you
===Exploring the Desktop 23/1+===
      have the diskettes or the CD that was used to install Windows.
In this chapter you will learn about and explore computer terms you should know, the OS/2 tutorial (Using OS/2), the icons (small pictures) that are displayed on your Desktop, and the online information that is available. There will be times when you are sent from this book to your computer so that you can explore the Desktop. Be sure to have your computer on with the Desktop or the tutorial displayed.
      Note:
        1. Some computer manufacturers preinstall Windows on your computer, and
          then provide a utility program so you can create your own Windows
          diskettes. If Windows was preinstalled on your computer, create the
          Windows diskettes before you begin installing OS/2
        2. If you used device drivers, fonts, or specific language information
          files different from those included on the Windows diskettes, or from
          those that were preinstalled on your computer, you might overwrite
          these files when installing OS/2. Reinstall those device drivers
          after installing OS/2.
  o  Be sure the files on your hard disk are not compressed. If you are using a
      DOS compression program, such as Stacker**, AdStor, or DoubleSpace,
      decompress the disk on which DOS and Windows are installed. Refer to the
      manual that came with the compression program for instructions.
      Note:  If the compression program you are using does not specifically
      state that it works with OS/2, you will not be able to use the compression
      program after OS/2 is installed.
  o  See updates to the Installation program in the README.INS file on the
      Installation Diskette. Follow these steps:
        1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
        2. Turn on the computer. If your computer is already on, press
          Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.
        3. When prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and insert
          Diskette 1 into the drive; then press Enter.
        4. When the Welcome screen appears, press F3 to display a command
          prompt.
        5. Remove Diskette 1 from drive A and reinsert the Installation
          Diskette. Then do one of the following:
            -  To view the README file online, type tedit readme.ins and press
                Enter. Press PF4 to quit the editor.
            -  To print a copy of the README file, type copy readme.ins > LPT1
                and press Enter. (LPT1 represents the port to which your printer
                is connected.  If you are using another port, type the correct
                port.)
  o  Make sure you have the minimum hardware and software required to install
      OS/2:
        -  An Intel** 80386 SX (or higher) 32-bit microprocessor
        -  At least 4MB of random access memory (RAM)
        -  A hard disk with 35MB to 50MB of free space, plus an additional 10MB
          of hard disk space for multimedia support (for example, for a sound
          card)
        -  A 1.44MB diskette drive
        -  VGA video support
        -  An IBM-compatible mouse
        Note:  Both DOS and Windows provide programs that check and list your
        memory and installed hardware. To view this information, do one of the
        following:
        -  If you have PC DOS 6.1 or later installed on your computer, type
          qconfig at the command line and press Enter.
        -  If you have Windows installed on your computer, select Run from the
          File menu. Then type msd and press Enter.
  o  Refer to Special Hardware Considerations if you are using any of the
      following equipment:
          Gateway 2000**
          A system with Phoenix**, AMI**, or Micronics** BIOS
          ATI** Graphics Ultra** Pro display adapter
          An EISA system with an Adaptec** 1742A controller card
          IBM* PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
          IBM PS/2 Model 76
          IBM ThinkPad* with a Docking Station
          A system with an Aox upgrade
          Quantum** II Hard Card
          Sony**, Panasonic**, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips**, Mitsumi**,
          BSR, or Tandy non-SCSI CD-ROM drive
          Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM combination
          IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
          Sound Blaster**
          ProAudio Spectrum** 16


Choosing Easy or Advanced Installation    11/2
===Understanding Terminology 24/2===
Before you begin your exploration of the Desktop, it's important to recognize the terminology used in this book and in other OS/2 information. The following terms are used in addition to click and double-click to describe mouse actions.
;Select:Point to an item and click mouse button 1. Instructions explain which item to point to.
;Open:Point to an item and double-click mouse button 1. Instructions explain which item to point to.
For more information about click and double-click, review the "Using the Mouse" section of Using OS/2.


Use Easy Installation to install OS/2 with preselected settings, based on your
===Using the Tutorial 25/2===
current hardware and software. The Easy Installation program installs the
Begin your exploration by going through the OS/2 tutorial (Using OS/2). The Using OS/2 tutorial was created to teach you the basics of OS/2 step-by-step, and to provide advanced hints and topics for experienced DOS, OS/2, or Microsoft Windows users. Try It!
operating system in the same partition as your DOS and Windows (if you have DOS
If the tutorial is not displayed on the Desktop, you can find it on the LaunchPad.
and Windows installed on your computer), uses the File Allocation Table (FAT)
Use either of the following procedures to display the tutorial:
file system, and installs the following OS/2 features on your computer:
*If you don't know how to use a mouse:
      Documentation, including:
*#Press and release the Alt and Tab keys at the same time until you highlight the LaunchPad, and then press Enter to open the LaunchPad.
          The OS/2 Tutorial
*#Use the Left or Right Arrow key to highlight the Using OS/2 (its the icon with the question mark on it), and then press Enter.
          Command Reference
*If you know how to use a mouse: c.
          Windows in OS/2
*#Double-click on the LaunchPad icon if it is not already open on the Desktop.
          Application Considerations
*#Click on Using OS/2 (its the icon with the question mark on it), located in the Front Panel, to display the tutorial on the Desktop.
          Performance Considerations
Return to this book when the tutorial is displayed.
          Printing in OS/2
Look at the tutorial now. The information box at the bottom of the window describes how to start the tutorial. To the right of the box are push buttons that you can click on with your mouse. When the text or graphic on a button is black, the button is active and available for use. When it is grey, the button is not active and cannot be used. Try It!
          Multimedia
*If you don't know how to use a mouse, press the Spacebar on your keyboard to start the "Using the Mouse" instructions in the tutorial. These instructions explain mouse terminology and teach you how to use a mouse.
      All system fonts
*If you know how to use a mouse, press Enter or click on (select) the > button to begin the tutorial.
      Optional System Utilities, including:
Return to this book when you have completed this procedure.
          Backup Hard Disk
After you have viewed "Using the Mouse" or if you bypassed that section, the tutorial begins with the Introduction panel.
          Change File Attributes
Move the mouse pointer around the window and read the text in the information box to learn about the features in the tutorial.
          Manage Partition
The area on the left side of the tutorial window is the selection area. The selection area contains twelve push buttons that you click on to select.
          Restore Backed-Up Files
The tutorial topics are displayed on the first seven push buttons. Click on a push button to display the tutorial contents list. Double-click on the topic text to go directly to that topic, or click on the > button to continue through the topics.
          Sort Filter
The eighth push button is the tutorial index, which provides a list of all tutorial topics.  The topics are organized in groups that relate to the main topic push buttons. Corresponding subtopics are listed below. When you double-click on a topic in the index, you go directly to that topic. This can be helpful if you want to review a topic that you have already tried but are unable to remember where it is listed.
      Tools and Games, including:
          Enhanced Editor
          Seek and Scan
          Chess
          Solitaire
      OS/2 DOS Support
      Multimedia Software Support (if required capabilities are detected on your
      computer)
      REXX
      Optional Bit Maps
      Advanced Power Management (if required capabilities are detected on your
      computer)
      PCMCIA (if required capabilities are detected on your computer)
To use Easy Installation, go to Using Easy Installation.
    Important
    Use Advanced Installation only if you are an experienced computer user.
    This method lets you customize how OS/2 will be installed on your computer,
    including:
      o  Installing OS/2 on a drive or partition other than C
      o Installing OS/2 in a logical drive
      o  Using the HPFS file system
      o  Selecting which of the OS/2 features you want to install
      o  Installing OS/2 so it can be used with Boot Manager
    To use Advanced Installation, go to Using Advanced Installation.


  Using Easy Installation    12/1+
The remaining four push buttons are available when you are within certain tutorial topics. They provide the following information:
;Practice:Lets you to try a task for yourself. When you select Practice, the tutorial window moves to reveal the Desktop. The window provides instruction for a task you can perform on the Desktop. You will navigate through folders and objects to perform the task as you would from the Desktop.
;OS/2:Provides tips for using OS/2. The OS/2 tips are displayed automatically in the information box for each tutorial topic.
;Windows:Provides tips for the Microsoft Windows user. The Windows tips compare OS/2 tasks to similar tasks in Windows.
;Expert:Provides advanced tips for the more experienced OS/2 user.
You can move throughout the tutorial at your own pace and review the topics in any order.


This chapter describes how to install OS/2 on your computer using the Easy
===Using the Desktop and Its Objects 26/2+===
Installation method. Easy Installation was designed to help you install OS/2
The icons that you see on the Desktop are called objects. Some of these objects are foldersFolders are objects that contain other objects and folders. Think of the Desktop as one big folder or the main folder that contains everything you need to use OS/2. If you are familiar with DOS and Microsoft Windows you can think of the Desktop folder as a directory and the folders it contains as subdirectories. Other types of objects are data files, program files, or device files.
without having to answer technical questions about your computer and its
attached hardwareThroughout the installation process, the program will search
and detect the type of hardware and software you are using on your computer.
Then, the Installation program will install a preselected set of the features of
OS/2.
If you would prefer to customize the installation of OS/2 on your computer, and
if you are experienced at installing operating systems, you might want to use
the Advanced Installation method. Refer to Using Advanced Installation for more
information about that method.
Easy Installation installs OS/2 using defaults (options that are preselected so
you don't have to make decisions or selections). If you use this method, OS/2
will be installed as follows:
  o  If DOS and Windows are in a primary, drive C partition, OS/2 will be
      installed in that partition.
  o  The partition will not be reformatted.
  o  The Dual Boot feature will be automatically set up for you, so you can
      start your computer from either DOS or OS/2.
  o  If you are installing OS/2 Version 3 over a previous version of OS/2, your
      OS/2 Desktop will be preserved for you.


Preparing for the Installation    13/2
Note: Throughout this book, the Desktop is also referred to as the Workplace Shell.


During Easy Installation, you will be asked to insert diskettes (or a compact
When you look at the Desktop, you will see the following objects:
disc (CD), if you are installing from a CD-ROM drive) and to remove diskettes.
*The OS/2 System folder contains objects you can use to set up OS/2 the way you want it. You can use these objects to change your mouse for left-handed use or to speed up the click rate, as well as to change the colors and look of the Desktop.
Follow the directions you see on the screen.  Be prepared to:
*The Information folder contains online information, including Using OS/2 (the online tutorial), and the Master Help Index, and online books, including Command Reference, Glossary, Printing in OS/2, Application Considerations, Windows Programs in OS/2, Performance Considerations,Using Multimedia, and REXX Information. See Using the Information.
  o  Indicate the type of printer that is connected to your computer. If you do
*The Templates folder contains object models (templates) for the different types of objects in OS/2. These templates make it easy for you to create new objects for files, folders, programs, and other objects. See Using Templates.
      not know the type of printer you are using, refer to the documentation
*The LaunchPad contains the objects you use most often. You can also add other objects to the LaunchPad. For more information about using the LaunchPad, refer to "Using the LaunchPad" later in this chapter.
      that came with your printer.
  o  Insert the original diskettes or CD that came with Microsoft Windows. Be
      sure to have your Windows diskettes or CD handy before you install OS/2.
If you have any problems during the installation, press the F1 key to view the
online help that is available whenever you see F1=Help at the bottom of a
screen. If you have problems with any of your hardware or if you receive error
messages during the installation, refer to Solving Installation Problems.


Installing the Operating System    14/2
During installation, if OS/2 recognizes that your computer has an audio card, multimedia support is automatically installed and your Desktop also will include the following:
*The Multimedia folder contains the multimedia applications that are supported by your computer. You can find out more about these Multimedia objects in the online Multimedia book, located in the Information folder.
*During installation, if OS/2 finds Windows programs already installed on your computer, your Desktop also will include these icons.
*The Windows Programs folder contains program objects for the Windows programs you had installed before you installed OS/2.
*The WIN-OS/2 Groups folder contains program objects for the Windows Groups programs that were created under the Windows Program Manager.
To find out more about these Windows program objects, refer to the online book Windows Programs in OS/2.


To install OS/2 using the Easy Installation method, follow these steps:
===Using Pop-up Menus 27/3===
  1. If your computer is on, close all running applications.
Now that you know a little bit about the objects on the Desktop, you should also know that each object has its own menu known as a pop-up menu. Pop-up menus contain items that relate specifically to an object as well as items that are common to all objects. Some of the standard pop-up menu items include:
  2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
;Open
  3. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
:Opens an object or folder and displays its contents, starts a program, or displays a data file. Selecting Open is the same as double-clicking on an object. Some items have an arrow to the right of Open that lets you choose how you want your icons to be displayed. You have three choices:
      to restart it.
::Icon View Displays the icons randomly within the folder.
  4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1. Then
::Tree View Displays the objects in a hierarchy.
      press Enter.  As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
::Details View Displays the properties of the objects (for example, the date and time the object was created, the full name of the object, and any other special attributes associated with the object).
      asking you to wait, followed by a black screen. Then the  screen appears.
::Settings Opens the Settings notebook for the object. The Settings notebook looks like a book with tabs and enables you to view and change the current settings for the object.
  5. If you are installing OS/2 from diskettes, go to step 6. If you are
::Help Displays general help information about the object. Select the arrow to the right of Help to display a list of the types of help available for the object.
      installing from a CD, insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive; then press
::Help Index Displays an alphabetic list of available help topics for the active program.
      Enter.
::General Help Displays help information about the active window. This is the same information you would see if you were to select Help from the pop-up menu or press the F1 key while the open window is active.
  6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Easy Installation. Then
::Using Help Explains all the ways you can get help for objects on the Desktop.
      press Enter.
::Keys Help Explains the different groups of keys you can use with OS/2.
  7. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
       When you select a specific group, additional help is displayed with a list
      diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
       of the keys provided for the group.
      installation progresses. If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
Create another Lets you create another object from the pop-up menu and works
      any messages to remove diskettes.
the same as if you were to drag a template from the Templates folder.
      After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
Copy Makes a duplicate of the selected object and its contents.
      and then reinsert Diskette 1. Follow the instructions on the screen. After
  Move Lets you move an object to a new location anywhere on the Desktop.
      you remove Diskette 1 and press Enter, you will see the System
Create shadow Creates a duplicate of an object but differs from a copy in that
      Configuration screen.
it automatically exchanges data between the shadow and the original object.
  8. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
  When you make changes in the shadow object, the original object is updated with
      hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
the same data.
      Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
Pickup and Drop Enables you to move an object and perform other tasks before
      If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
you drop the object in its new location.  Drop will not be displayed on the
      click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name. A screen
pop-up menu until you have selected Pickup.
      will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
Window Displays additional menu items that enable you to manage the size and
      hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using, refer
location of the window and close the open window.
      to the documentation that came with it.
Find Helps you locate any object in the system.
       Follow the instructions on each screen.  Click on Help if you need more
Arrange and Undo Arrange Organizes the objects on the Desktop or the open
      information about any screen you see.
active window in horizontal rows across the top of the screenUndo Arrange
      If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
places the objects in the location where they were before you selected Arrange.
      OK.
  Undo Arrange will not be displayed on the pop-up menu until you have selected
      A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
Arrange.
       (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
Try It!
      program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
  The Desktop has its own pop-up menu, and each object has its own pop-up menu.
  9. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
To display the pop-up menu for the Desktop, try the following: c.
      or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
  1. Move the mouse pointer to an empty area on the Desktop.
      names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
  2. Press mouse button 2 to display the Desktop pop-up menu.
        o If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
       Look at the menu items on the pop-up menu.  The Desktop pop-up menu
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
       contains items that no other pop-up menu has - Lockup now, Shut down, and
          LPT3 button Then press Enter.
       System Setup.
        o If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
To display the pop-up menu for an object, try the following.  In this example,
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
  you will display the pop-up menu for the OS/2 System object. c.
          COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.
  1. Move the mouse pointer to OS/2 System.
          If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
  2. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the object.
          install default printer and press Enter or click on OK.
      Notice that some of the items on the pop-up menu for the object are
  10. If you received a Warning message at the beginning of the Installation
      different from those you saw on the Desktop pop-up. Each object has menu
      program telling you that you did not have enough free disk space to
      items that are exclusive to that object.
      install OS/2, but you decided to continue with the installation anyway,
For more information about pop-up menus, select the menus topic in the Master Help Index, and then select any of the topics of interest to you.
      you will see the OS/2 Setup and Installation screen. Go to step 11.
      If you did not receive a Warning message at the beginning of the
      Installation program, go to step 12.
  11. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
      features you want to installYou will notice that some features have a
      check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
      The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
      right of the feature.
      Follow these steps:
        a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
        b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
        c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections
  12. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. You will be asked to
      remove and insert diskettes, including one or more Printer Driver
      diskettes.
  13. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
       Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the
       screen; click on Help if you need more information.
  14. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
       of the OS/2 installation.
  15. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one
      of the following (if Windows was preinstalled on your computer when you
      bought it, you can skip this step and go to step 18):
        o If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
            a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
            b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
            c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
                requested.
        o  If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
            a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
            b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
            c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
                type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.
                For example:
                e:\winsetup
                where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup
                is the directory that contains the Windows files.
  16. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and press Enter.
  17. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
      and restart your computer. Click on OK or press enter.
  18. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
View the Tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use your
Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the transition
from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
For more help on using the operating system, you can access the online help
system. Press F1 anytime to get help, or if you see a Help push button at the
bottom of a screen, you can click on it to get more information about that
screen.
 
Switching between OS/2 and DOS with Dual Boot    15/2+


When you install OS/2 using the Easy Installation method, a Dual Boot feature is
===Using Settings Notebooks 28/3===
automatically set up for you as well. Dual Boot lets you switch back and forth
Each object has its own Settings notebook. The Settings notebook enables you to customize settings for each object. Just as the pop-up menus for an object have exclusive and common menu items, the Settings notebooks have exclusive settings pages. Some of the standard settings pages are as follows:
between OS/2 and DOS (you might want to do this because some DOS programs do not
;View:Use the View page to select how icons and their text are displayed.
run under OS/2).
;Include:Use the Include page to include objects that you want in your folder and exclude objects you don't want in your folder.
Dual Boot also keeps track of which operating system should start when you turn
;Sort:Use the Sort page to determine the menu items listed when you select the arrow to the right of Sort in the pop-up menu. You determine how you want the objects in folders sorted by selecting the items from the pop-up menu.
on your computer. Each time you shut down and restart your computer, it will
;Background:Use the Background page to select an image or color to display in the background of any open folder, including the Desktop. You can select a different image or color for each and every folder on the Desktop.
start (boot) in whichever operating system was last being used. For example, if
;Menu:Use the menu page to customize your pop-up menu items. You can add, delete, or change the items on the pop-up menu or the cascaded menu that is displayed when you select the arrow to the right of a menu item.
you shut down your system while DOS is running, your system will start in DOS
;File:Use the File page to view the file name and path of a file object. You can also define the object as a work area object. A work-area folder lets you put together objects that are related to a specific task. For more information about the Files page, select files topic from the Master Help Index and then select File information about objects. For more information about work-area folders, select the folders topic from the Master Help Index and then select Creating a work-area folder.
the next time you turn on your computer.
;Window:Use the Window page to customize the window behavior for each object on the Desktop.  Window behavior includes how and where you want your object to be minimized, how you want the window to open, and which button (hide or minimize) you want to appear on the window. every time you double-click on it.
;General:Use the General page to change the name or the icon displayed for the folder currently selected or open.
There are additional settings pages available, but the pages listed above are some of the most common. You can get help for settings pages by selecting the Help push button, which is available on every page. Try It!


  Starting the Dual Boot Feature   16/3
Use the following procedure as a guide to displaying the Settings notebook for an object:
  1. Move the mouse pointer to OS/2 System.
  2. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the object.
  3. Select Settings to display the Settings notebook for the object.
      Notice that each page is identified by a tab on the right side of the
      notebook.
  4. Select the Window tab to display the Window page.
      Look at the bottom of the page. You will see Window - Page 1 of 2, which
      lets you know that there is more than one page associated with the Window
      tab.
   5. Click on the right arrow at the bottom of the page to display page 2 for
      the Window tab.
      Some of the tabs in the notebooks can have up to 3 or 4 pages with which
      they are associated.  Simply select the right arrow to move forward
      through the pages and the left arrow to move backward through the pages.
      You can also use the arrows instead of the tabs to page through the
      notebooks.
  6. Double-click on the title-bar icon to close the notebook.
When you make changes to the Settings notebook, the changes take effect immediately after you close the notebook.


Use the Dual Boot function to switch from one operating system to another:
===Finding Information 29/2+===
  o  To switch from OS/2 to DOS:
OS/2 provides plenty of information online, in the form of help information and books, that you can use as you are working.
        1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
        2. Open Command Prompts.
        3. Open Dual Boot.
        4. When a message appears asking if you want your system to be reset,
          type Y and press Enter.
        Note:  If you want to run your DOS programs while OS/2 is running, you
        can use the DOS sessions that are part of OS/2 for most DOS programs.
        By using these sessions, you don't have to use Dual Boot, which shuts
        down your OS/2 session.  To use a DOS session, open DOS Window or DOS
        Full Screen from the Command Prompts folder.
  o  To switch from DOS to OS/2:
        1. At the DOS command prompt, type c:\os2\boot /os2
        2. Press Enter.
For more information about the BOOT command, refer to the Command Reference.
The Command Reference is located in the Information folder on your OS/2
Desktop.


Installing DOS after Installing OS/2    17/3
===Getting Help 30/3+===
Help information is available for every object on the Desktop, every menu item on pop-up and pull-down menus, and every place you see a Help push button.
Try It!
If you want to learn how to use the online help functions, be sure the Using OS/2 tutorial is displayed. Then use the following procedure:
  1. Select the About Help push button.
   2. Review the panels about OS/2 Help.
  3. Read the instructions on the right side of the window and in the
      information box.
  4. Select the Practice push button to try it out.
Return to this book when you are finished.


If you installed OS/2 on drive C, formatted the drive with the FAT file system,
===F1 Help 31/4===
and you did not already have DOS installed, your system will still have the Dual
F1 help provides information about objects, pop-up menu items, entry fields, and
Boot capability. However, you must install DOS to use the Dual Boot feature.
push buttons. You use the F1 help by selecting or highlighting an item and
To add Dual Boot after installing OS/2, follow these steps:
pressing the F1 key on your keyboard.
   1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
Try It!
   2. Open Command Prompts.
To get F1 help for each item on a pop-up menu, try the following:
  3. Open Dual Boot.  A Warning box appears reminding you that DOS was not
   1. Click on the down arrow icon in the upper-left corner of the tutorial
       installed and asking if you want to continue.
      window. The title-bar icon menu for the OS/2 tutorial is displayed.
  4. Type Y and press EnterYou will see messages that your system is being
   2. Press the Down Arrow key on your keyboard and watch the focus box move
      prepared, and then a warning that you must shut down your system.  Press
       from menu item to menu itemTry this several times and stop at the Close
       Enter to close the window.
       menu item.
   5. Shut down your system:
   3. Now press the F1 key on your keyboard.
        a. Position the mouse pointer on a blank space on your Desktop and press
      A helpful explanation about why you might want to use this menu item is
          mouse button 2.
      displayed.
        b. Select Shut down... from the menu that appears.
   4. Double-click on the title-bar icon in the upper-left corner of the help
        c. When a message appears telling you to turn off your computer, do so.
       window, next to Help for Close, to close the help window.
   6. Install DOS on your computer. Follow the instructions that came in your
Return to this book when you are finished.
       DOS package.
  7. At the DOS command line, type c:\os2\boot /os2 and press Enter to return
      to your OS/2 Desktop.


What to Do if Dual Boot Does Not Work    18/3
===Help Push Button 32/4===
 
Another way to get help is to use the Help push button available on most of the object pop-up menus and notebook pages.
If the BOOT command is unsuccessful when you try to switch from DOS to OS/2, you
These Help push buttons let you work with the object while you learn how to use it.
might have programs running that take up too much of your computer's memory. If
Try It!
so, close the programs before you use the BOOT command. If the programs are
To learn how to use the Help push buttons, try the following:
loaded from your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you must deactivate the programs before
   1. Open OS/2 System.
using the BOOT command.
  2. Open System Setup.
 
   3. Open Solid Color Palette.
Using Windows Programs    19/2+
  4. Click on the Edit Color push button.
 
   5. When the Edit Color window is displayed, move it to the left side of the
When you install OS/2 on a computer that has Windows installed on it, all of
      screen to make room for the help panel.
your Windows functions are still available. If you installed OS/2 with the Easy
   6. Click on the Help push button.
Installation method, any Windows programs you had on your computer were
   7. Read the information provided in the help window. Notice the highlighted
automatically placed in folders on your OS/2 Desktop. You can also use the
      words within the help text. These words indicate that additional
Windows Program Manager by opening a WIN-OS/2 command prompt from the Command
      information is available.
Prompts folder in the OS/2 System folder.
      You can use the Edit Color window while the Help information is displayed.
To use your Windows programs after installing OS/2, use the following
   8. When you are finished reading the help information, you can close the help
procedures:
       window by double-clicking on the title-bar icon in the upper-left corner
   o  To run a Windows program from your OS/2 Desktop:
       of the help window.
        1. Open WIN-OS/2* Groups, or Windows Programs or Additional Windows
Another way to get help is by using an online book called the Master Help
          Progams (whichever contains the program object you want to open).
Index. For more information refer to "Mastering the Master Help Index" in Part
        2. Open the program you want to use.
3 of this book.
   o  To run a Windows program from the Windows Program Manager:
        1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
        2. Open Command Prompts.
        3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen or WIN-OS/2 Window.
        4. Open the program you want to use.
 
Installing Windows after Installing OS/2    20/3
 
If you installed OS/2 on a computer that did not have Microsoft Windows on it
already, you can install Windows later if you have a partition formatted with
the FAT file system. Follow these steps:
   1. Start your computer with DOS. Do one of the following:
        o  Open Dual Boot in the Command Prompts folder.
        o  Select DOS from the Boot Manager menu.
          Note:  If you have not installed DOS, refer to the procedure in
          Installing DOS after Installing OS/2.
   2. When a message appears asking if you want your system to be reset, type Y
      and press Enter.
   3. Install Windows in a FAT-formatted partition or logical drive.
  4. Shut down your computer, and then restart it with OS/2.
  5. Open System Setup in the OS/2 System folder.
  6. Open Selective Install
  7. When the System Configuration screen appears, select OK.
   8. On the OS/2 Setup and Installation screen, select WIN-OS/2 Support. Then
       select Install
  9. When the Advanced Options window appears, select OK to continue.
  10. When prompted to do so, insert and remove the numbered OS/2 installation
       diskettes.
  11. When prompted to do so, insert and remove the numbered Windows diskettes.
  12. When prompted to do so, shut down and restart your computer so the changes
      can take effect.


  What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation    21/2
===Viewing Information Online 33/3+===
When you installed OS/2, online information and books were added to the Information folder. These books and information describe information about printing in OS/2, using Windows programs in OS/2, program and performance considerations, using OS/2 multimedia programs, a book that identifies trademarks used in the online information, a glossary of terms and the Master Help Index, which is your main online help resource.  The following books are in
the Information folder.


The installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most
===Master Help Index 34/4===
cases, you will not encounter any problems. However, if you do have problems
The Master Help Index provides help for practically everything you want to know about using OS/2. It is set up like a dictionary that has tabs. These tabs can help you find topics quickly. After you select a tab, use the scroll bar to page down to the topic you are looking for. You will sometimes find that after you select a topic, a secondary list of topics is displayed. This list of topics is related to the topic you selected.
either during the installation process or immediately afterwards, refer to
Try It!
Solving Installation Problems.
 
Problems you might encounter include:
To learn about the Master Help Index:
  o  A blank screen after installation.
#Select the About Help push button.
  o  An error message with a number and, sometimes, text.
#Select the Using the Master Help Index topic.
  o  A hardware device that does not work. (This problem can occur if you are
#Read the instructions on the right side of the window and in the information box.
      using hardware that is not supported by OS/2.)
#Select the Practice push button to try it out.
  If these or other problems occur, refer to Solving Installation Problems.
 
Hint:
:You can use the keys on your keyboard to move to sections in the index. Simply press the key that corresponds to the first letter of the topic, and the entries that start with that letter will be displayed.
 
For more information refer to "Mastering the Master Help Index" in Part 3 of this book.
 
===Command Reference 35/4===
If you are familiar with using a command line or you want to learn how to use one, you will find the online Command Reference to be very helpful. This book contains descriptions of all the commands you can use at an OS/2 command prompt.
 
You might already be familiar with some of the commands because some are actually identical to those you have used with DOS. Some of the commands are new and some contain additional parameters specific for use with OS/2. For more information about command lines, see "Using Command Prompts" in Part 3 of this book.
Try It!
 
To learn how to use the Command Reference, review the "Using the Command Reference" topic located in the About Help section of the tutorial. When you are finished, close the tutorial and try the following steps:
#Open the Information folder.
#Open the Command Reference.
#Select the + sign next to OS/2 Commands By Name to display all the OS/2 commands.
#Open the command for which you want information.
Note: You might see + signs next to some of the commands in the list. The + signs indicate that additional information pertaining to these commands is available. Click on the + sign to view the additional topics.


Part 2 - Exploring OS/2   22/1
===Glossary 36/4===
The Glossary provides definitions for terms used in the OS/2 information. The Glossary looks like a dictionary and can be used in the same way the Master Help Index is used. You can use the tutorial to find out more about the Glossary.


===REXX Information 37/4===
This book provides information to acquaint you with the REXX language and programming concepts.


Exploring the Desktop    23/1+
===Windows Programs in OS/2 38/4===
This book provides information about using OS/2 and Windows programs together under OS/2.


In this chapter you will learn about and explore computer terms you should know,
===Application Considerations 39/4===
the OS/2 tutorial (Using OS/2),  the icons (small pictures) that are displayed
This book provides information about the settings or tasks you need to perform to enable certain programs to run under OS/2.
on your Desktop, and the online information that is available.  There will be
times when you are sent from this book to your computer so that you can explore
the Desktop. Be sure to have your computer on with the Desktop or the tutorial
displayed.


Understanding Terminology    24/2
===Performance Considerations 40/4===
This book provides information about how to improve the performance of your system, memory management, model-specific computer problems, and COM ports.


Before you begin your exploration of the Desktop, it's important to recognize
===Printing in OS/2 41/4===
the terminology used in this book and in other OS/2 information. The following
This book provides information for everything you want to know about printing in OS/2-from installing a printer to solving printer problems.
terms are used in addition to click and double-click to describe mouse actions.
Select    Point to an item and click mouse button 1.  Instructions explain
          which item to point to.
Open      Point to an item and double-click mouse button 1.  Instructions
          explain which item to point to.
For more information about click and double-click, review the "Using the Mouse"
section of Using OS/2.


Using the Tutorial    25/2
===Multimedia 42/4===
This book provides information pertaining to the multimedia programs available with OS/2.


Begin your exploration by going through the OS/2 tutorial (Using OS/2).  The
===Trademarks 43/4===
Using OS/2 tutorial was created to teach you the basics of OS/2 step-by-step,
This book provides trademark information for trademarks mentioned in the online books and online help information.
and to provide advanced hints and topics for experienced DOS, OS/2, or
Microsoft** Windows** users.
Try It!
If the tutorial is not displayed on the Desktop, you can find it on the
LaunchPad.
Use either of the following procedures to display the tutorial:
  o  If you don't know how to use a mouse:
        1. Press and release the Alt and Tab keys at the same time until you
          highlight the LaunchPad, and then press Enter to open the LaunchPad.
        2. Use the Left or Right Arrow key to highlight the Using OS/2 (its the
          icon with the question mark on it), and then press Enter.
  o  If you know how to use a mouse: c.
        1. Double-click on the LaunchPad icon if it is not already open on the
          Desktop.
        2. Click on Using OS/2 (its the icon with the question mark on it),
          located in the Front Panel, to display the tutorial on the Desktop.
Return to this book when the tutorial is displayed.
Look at the tutorial now.  The information box at the bottom of the window
describes how to start the tutorial.  To the right of the box are push buttons
that you can click on with your mouse.  When the text or graphic on a button is
black, the button is active and available for use. When it is grey, the button
is not active and cannot be used.
Try It!
  o  If you don't know how to use a mouse, press the Spacebar on your keyboard
      to start the "Using the Mouse" instructions in the tutorial.
      These instructions explain mouse terminology and teach you how to use a
      mouse.
  o  If you know how to use a mouse, press Enter or click on (select) the >
      button to begin the tutorial.
Return to this book when you have completed this procedure.
After you have viewed "Using the Mouse" or if you bypassed that section, the
tutorial begins with the Introduction panel.
Move the mouse pointer around the window and read the text in the information
box to learn about the features in the tutorial.
The area on the left side of the tutorial window is the selection area. The
selection area contains twelve push buttons that you click on to select.
The tutorial topics are displayed on the first seven push buttons. Click on a
push button to display the tutorial contents list. Double-click on the topic
text to go directly to that topic, or click on the  > button to continue
through the topics.
The eighth push button is the tutorial index, which provides a list of all
tutorial topics.  The topics are organized in groups that relate to the main
topic push buttons.  Corresponding subtopics are listed below.  When you
double-click on a topic in the index, you go directly to that topic. This can
be helpful if you want to review a topic that you have already tried but are
unable to remember where it is listed.
The remaining four push buttons are available when you are within certain
tutorial topics.  They provide the following information:
Practice  Lets you to try a task for yourself.  When you select Practice, the
          tutorial window moves to reveal the Desktop.  The window provides
          instruction for a task you can perform on the Desktop.  You will
          navigate through folders and objects to perform the task as you would
          from the Desktop.
OS/2      Provides tips for using OS/2.  The OS/2 tips are displayed
          automatically in the information box for each tutorial topic.
Windows  Provides tips for the Microsoft Windows user.  The Windows tips
          compare OS/2 tasks to similar tasks in Windows.
Expert    Provides advanced tips for the more experienced OS/2 user.
You can move throughout the tutorial at your own pace and review the topics in
any order.


Using the Desktop and Its Objects    26/2+
===Using the LaunchPad 44/2+===
The LaunchPad holds the objects and push buttons that you use most often. Some of the most commonly used objects are already on the LaunchPad.


The icons that you see on the Desktop are called objects. Some of these objects
===Using LaunchPad Push Buttons 45/3+===
are folders.  Folders are objects that contain other objects and folders.  Think
The push buttons at the left side of the LaunchPad let you secure your computer while you are away, shut down your computer when you are done working for the day, locate things on the Desktop, and display a list of all the windows you have open on the Desktop. The following describes the push buttons on the LaunchPad.
of the Desktop as one big folder or the main folder that contains everything you
need to use OS/2.  If you are familiar with DOS and Microsoft** Windows** you
can think of the Desktop folder as a directory and the folders it contains as
subdirectories.  Other types of objects are data files, program files, or device
files.
Note:  Throughout this book, the Desktop is also referred to as the Workplace
Shell*.
When you look at the Desktop, you will see the following objects:
The OS/2 System folder contains objects you can use to set up OS/2 the way you
want it. You can use these objects to change your mouse for left-handed use or
to speed up the click rate, as well as to change the colors and look of the
Desktop.
The Information folder contains online information, including Using OS/2 (the
online tutorial), and the Master Help Index, and online books, including
Command Reference, Glossary, Printing in OS/2, Application Considerations,
Windows Programs in OS/2, Performance Considerations,Using Multimedia, and REXX
Information.  See Using the Information.
The Templates folder contains object models (templates) for the different types
of objects in OS/2.  These templates make it easy for you to create new objects
for files, folders, programs, and other objects. See Using Templates.
The LaunchPad contains the objects you use most often.  You can also add other
objects to the LaunchPad. For more information about using the LaunchPad, refer
to "Using the LaunchPad" later in this chapter.
During installation, if OS/2 recognizes that your computer has an audio card,
multimedia support is automatically installed and your Desktop also will
include the following:
The Multimedia folder contains the multimedia applications that are supported
by your computer. You can find out more about these Multimedia objects in the
online Multimedia book, located in the Information folder.
During installation, if OS/2 finds Windows programs already installed on your
computer, your Desktop also will include these icons.
The Windows Programs folder contains program objects for the Windows programs
you had installed before you installed OS/2.
The WIN-OS/2 Groups folder contains program objects for the Windows Groups
programs that were created under the Windows Program Manager.
To find out more about these Windows program objects, refer to the online book
Windows Programs in OS/2.


Using Pop-up Menus    27/3
===Lockup Push Button 46/4===
You can use Lockup to lock up your computer keyboard and display at any time.
By locking up your computer, you can keep others from using your computer while you are away.
Try It!
To lock up your computer, you must first decide on a password. Your password can be from 1 to 15 characters long. Think of a password now, write it down, and put it in a safe place. Then try the following:
#Select the Lockup push button on the left side of the LaunchPad.
#Read the text in the window and type your password in the Password field next to the blinking cursor.
#Press the Enter key on your keyboard and the cursor will start blinking in the Password (for verification) field.
#Type the same password again to verify that you entered the password correctly.
#Select the OK push button.
#Select the Lockup push button on the LaunchPad. The OS/2 Logo screen is displayed and a Help push button is available at the bottom right side of the screen.
#Type your password, and then press Enter. You will return to the Desktop.
Note: After you have specified your password, your screen will automatically lock up within three minutes if there is no action being performed on the Desktop. Realize that it is very important to be sure to:
  REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORD!
After you have decided upon a password and entered it into the Password window, you will not see the password window again unless you decide at some later time that you want to change your password. Now, whenever you select Lockup on the LaunchPad, your computer will be automatically locked up.
To change your password, or any of the other settings associated with the Lockup push button, you must use the settings menu choice in the Desktop pop-up menu.
Try It!
To see the Lockup settings available and to change your password, try the following:
#Using mouse button 2, click on an open area on the Desktop. The Desktop pop-up menu is displayed.
#Select Settings to display the Settings notebook for the Desktop.
#Select the Lockup tab.
#:Notice that the Lockup tab has three pages associated with it. The bottom right corner of the page is labeled Lockup - Page 1 of 3. The page currently displayed is the Timeout page.  Use this page to change the current settings for how much time you want to pass before the computer automatically locks up.  Timeout is set for 3 minutes by default. The second page enables you to decide what graphics or colors you want to be displayed while your computer is locked up.  The Lockup screen is set to display the OS/2 Logo screen by default.  The screen is displayed in the Preview area of the page. Page 3 is the page you use to change your current password.
#Move the mouse pointer to the right arrow and select it until the Password Page in the notebook is displayed.
#Type your new password in the Password field and then again in the Password (for verification) field. If you need help, select the Help push button.
#Select OK.
Remember to lock up your computer when you are away to prevent someone from using it.


Now that you know a little bit about the objects on the Desktop, you should also
===Find Push Button 47/2+===
know that each object has its own menu known as a pop-up menu. Pop-up menus
The Find push button helps you locate objects in the system. If you can't
contain items that relate specifically to an object as well as items that are
remember where to find your favorite game, you can use the Find option to help
common to all objects.  Some of the standard pop-up menu items include:
you locate it.
Open Opens an object or folder and displays its contents, starts a program, or
Try It!
displays a data file. Selecting Open is the same as double-clicking on an
To learn how to use Find, try the following:
object.  Some items have an arrow to the right of Open that lets you choose how
#Select Find on the LaunchPad. The Find Objects window is displayed.
you want your icons to be displayed. You have three choices:
#Select the Help push button at the bottom of the window.
      Icon View Displays the icons randomly within the folder.
#Read the information about how to use Find. Be sure to read through to the end of the help information, where you can find a list of the fields available on the Find Objects window. You can double-click on the highlighted items to display additional information about how to use these fields. Be sure to select the Previous push button at the bottom of the help window to return to the original help information for Find.
      Tree View Displays the objects in a hierarchy.
#Double-click on the title-bar icon in the help window when you are finished using the help information.  This will close the help window.
      Details View Displays the properties of the objects (for example, the date
 
      and time the object was created, the full name of the object, and any
===Window List Push Button 48/3===
      other special attributes associated with the object).
You can use the Window List push button to help you locate open objects, reopen
Settings Opens the Settings notebook for the object.  The Settings notebook
minimized windows, or close open windows.
looks like a book with tabs and enables you to view and change the current
Try It!
settings for the object.
To learn about the Window List, try the following:
Help Displays general help information about the object. Select the arrow to
  1. Select the Window List push button.
the right of Help to display a list of the types of help available for the
       A list of open active windows is displayed.  The Desktop is the first
object.
       window in the listThe list also includes the LaunchPad and any other
      Help Index Displays an alphabetic list of available help topics for the
      active objects or folders you might have already opened.
      active program.
  2. Select the title-bar icon located in the upper-left corner of the window.
      General Help Displays help information about the active window. This is
  3. Select the arrow to the right of Help.
      the same information you would see if you were to select Help from the
  4. Select General Help.
      pop-up menu or press the F1 key while the open window is active.
  5. Read the information in the help window to learn more about the Window
      Using Help Explains all the ways you can get help for objects on the
      List and how to use it.
      Desktop.
 
      Keys Help Explains the different groups of keys you can use with OS/2.
===Shut Down Push Button 49/3===
       When you select a specific group, additional help is displayed with a list
After you have given OS/2 its daily workout, you must take care and remember to shut down your computerShut down is the cool-down exercise for this powerful operating system.  When you shut down your computer, information about which windows are open and where they are located on the Desktop is saved in the storage buffer on your hard disk. When you select Shut down, you will see a window asking if you are ready to shut downSimply select the OK push button
       of the keys provided for the group.
and you will be on your way to performing a successful shutdown. Remember to use the Shut down option when you are finished working for the day.
  Create another Lets you create another object from the pop-up menu and works
Note:  Be sure to check all programs for unsaved information (such as data files you might be editing) before you start the shutdown procedure.  
the same as if you were to drag a template from the Templates folder.
Note:  Never turn off the power on your computer until you have completed a shutdown.
Copy Makes a duplicate of the selected object and its contents.
 
Move Lets you move an object to a new location anywhere on the Desktop.
===Using Objects on the LaunchPad 50/3+===
Create shadow Creates a duplicate of an object but differs from a copy in that
The objects on the right side of the LaunchPad are shadows of objects that already exist elsewhere in OS/2. A shadow object is linked to the original object but it can reside in a different location on the Desktop. The purpose of a shadow object is to allow you to use an object from the Desktop whether or not it is located on drive C. When you make a change to the shadow, the change also occurs in the original. By creating a shadow of the original object instead of creating a copy, you can save space on your hard disk and still use the
it automatically exchanges data between the shadow and the original object.
functions of the object. The following are the objects on the LaunchPad:
When you make changes in the shadow object, the original object is updated with
the same data.
Pickup and Drop Enables you to move an object and perform other tasks before
you drop the object in its new location.  Drop will not be displayed on the
pop-up menu until you have selected Pickup.
Window Displays additional menu items that enable you to manage the size and
location of the window and close the open window.
  Find Helps you locate any object in the system.
  Arrange and Undo Arrange Organizes the objects on the Desktop or the open
active window in horizontal rows across the top of the screen. Undo Arrange
places the objects in the location where they were before you selected Arrange.
  Undo Arrange will not be displayed on the pop-up menu until you have selected
Arrange.
  Try It!
The Desktop has its own pop-up menu, and each object has its own pop-up menu.
To display the pop-up menu for the Desktop, try the following: c.
  1. Move the mouse pointer to an empty area on the Desktop.
  2. Press mouse button 2 to display the Desktop pop-up menu.
      Look at the menu items on the pop-up menu. The Desktop pop-up menu
      contains items that no other pop-up menu has - Lockup now, Shut down, and
      System Setup.
To display the pop-up menu for an object, try the following.  In this example,
you will display the pop-up menu for the OS/2 System object. c.
  1. Move the mouse pointer to OS/2 System.
  2. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the object.
      Notice that some of the items on the pop-up menu for the object are
      different from those you saw on the Desktop pop-up. Each object has menu
      items that are exclusive to that object.
For more information about pop-up menus, select the menus topic in the Master
Help Index, and then select any of the topics of interest to you.


  Using Settings Notebooks    28/3
===Drive A Object 51/4===
The Drive A object gives you access to the information provided on a diskette you insert into the diskette drive slot on your computer.  When you select the drawer button for the Drive A object, you will see that it contains the Drive C object (if Drive C is the drive where you installed OS/2). This object gives you access to the contents of Drive C in your computer. For more information about accessing drives, see "Using Drives" in Part 3 of this book.


Each object has its own Settings notebook.  The Settings notebook enables you to
===OS/2 Window Object 52/4===
customize settings for each object.  Just as the pop-up menus for an object have
The OS/2 Window object gives you access to an OS/2 command prompt in a window on the Desktop. You can use the OS/2 command prompt in much the same way as a DOS command prompt - by typing a command at the command prompt.
exclusive and common menu items, the Settings notebooks have exclusive settings
When you select the drawer button for the OS/2 Window object, you will see that it contains the DOS Window object. The DOS Window object provides you access to a DOS command prompt in a window on the Desktop. Here you can use the DOS commands with which you are already familiarFor more information about using a command prompt, refer to the online Command Reference, or the "Using Command Prompts" in Part 3 of this book.
pages.  Some of the standard settings pages are as follows:
View Use the View page to select how icons and their text are displayed.
Include Use the Include page to include objects that you want in your folder
and exclude objects you don't want in your folder.
Sort Use the Sort page to determine the menu items listed when you select the
arrow to the right of Sort in the pop-up menu.  You determine how you want the
objects in folders sorted by selecting the items from the pop-up menu.
Background Use the Background page to select an image or color to display in
the background of any open folder, including the Desktop.  You can select a
different image or color for each and every folder on the Desktop.
Menu Use the menu page to customize your pop-up menu items.  You can add,
delete, or change the items on the pop-up menu or the cascaded menu that is
displayed when you select the arrow to the right of a menu item.
File Use the File page to view the file name and path of a file object.  You
can also define the object as a work area object.  A work-area folder lets you
put together objects that are related to a specific task.  For more information
about the Files page, select files topic from the Master Help Index and then
select File information about objects. For more information about work-area
folders, select the folders topic from the Master Help Index and then select
Creating a work-area folder.
Window Use the Window page to customize the window behavior for each object on
the Desktop. Window behavior includes how and where you want your object to be
minimized, how you want the window to open , and which button (hide or
minimize) you want to appear on the window. every time you double-click on it.
General Use the General page to change the name or the icon displayed for the
folder currently selected or open.
There are additional settings pages available, but the pages listed above are
some of the most common.  You can get help for settings pages by selecting the
Help push button, which is available on every page.
  Try It!
Use the following procedure as a guide to displaying the Settings notebook for
an object:
  1. Move the mouse pointer to OS/2 System.
  2. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the object.
  3. Select Settings to display the Settings notebook for the object.
      Notice that each page is identified by a tab on the right side of the
      notebook.
  4. Select the Window tab to display the Window page.
      Look at the bottom of the page.  You will see Window - Page 1 of 2, which
      lets you know that there is more than one page associated with the Window
      tab.
  5. Click on the right arrow at the bottom of the page to display page 2 for
      the Window tab.
      Some of the tabs in the notebooks can have up to 3 or 4 pages with which
      they are associated.  Simply select the right arrow to move forward
      through the pages and the left arrow to move backward through the pages.
      You can also use the arrows instead of the tabs to page through the
      notebooks.
  6. Double-click on the title-bar icon to close the notebook.
When you make changes to the Settings notebook, the changes take effect
immediately after you close the notebook.


Finding Information    29/2+
===Using OS/2 Object 53/4===
The Using OS/2 object gives you instant access to the OS/2 tutorial. Use the tutorial to learn something new, to refresh your memory about how to do something, or to experience hands-on practice using OS/2.


OS/2 provides plenty of information online, in the form of help information and
===Shredder Object 54/4===
books, that you can use as you are working.
The Shredder provides a quick way for you to delete files, objects, or folders that you no longer have a use for.  For more information about the Shredder, see the online Master Help Index.


Getting Help    30/3+
===Printer Object 55/4===
The printer object is added to the LaunchPad only if a printer was set up when you installed OS/2. You might not have a printer object on your LaunchPad. If you want to know how to set up a printer, use the information provided in the online Printing in OS/2 book located in the Information folder.


Help information is available for every object on the Desktop, every menu item
===Adding Objects to the LaunchPad 56/3===
on pop-up and pull-down menus, and every place you see a Help push button.
You can easily add any object you want to the LaunchPad by simply dragging the object to the right side of the LaunchPad. The LaunchPad will expand to include the object on the panel.
Try It!
Try It!
If you want to learn how to use the online help functions, be sure the Using
When adding an object to the LaunchPad, use the following example as a guide.
OS/2 tutorial is displayed. Then use the following procedure:
In this example, the System Clock is added to the LaunchPad:
  1. Select the About Help push button.
#Open the OS/2 System folder.
  2. Review the panels about OS/2 Help.
#Open the System Setup folder.
  3. Read the instructions on the right side of the window and in the
#Move the mouse pointer over the System Clock object.
      information box.
#Press and hold mouse button 2 and move the object in between two objects on the LaunchPad until you see a single, solid black bar. This black bar indicates where the object will be added to the LaunchPad.
  4. Select the Practice push button to try it out.
For more information about the LaunchPad, refer to the Master Help Index, the Using OS/2 tutorial, and the help information provided with the LaunchPad.
Return to this book when you are finished.
 
==Part 3 - Using OS/2 57/1==
===Customizing Your System 58/1+===
The System Setup object contains objects that help you customize your system.
To open System Setup:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
or:
#Point to an empty area on the Desktop.
#Click mouse button 2.
#Select System Setup.
 
===Color Palette 59/2+===
The Color Palette is used to customize the colors on your screen. You can change
the color of the following parts of the Workplace Shell*:
*Desktop
*Titles of the objects on the Desktop and in folders
*Different parts of the windows, such as push buttons, scroll bars, and the background.
There are two colors palettes, one is a Solid Color Palette for low resolution displays and one is a Mixed Color Palette for high resolution displays. The Solid Color Palette contains 16 solid colors and the Mixed Color palette contains 256 mixed colors.
Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to use the Color Palettes.
The following steps can be used for both the Solid and the Mixed Color Palettes.


  F1 Help    31/4
===Changing Screen Colors 60/3===
To globally change the color of an item (for example, change the color of the background in every window):
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Color Palette.
#Make sure that the item you want to change is visible.
#Point to a color on the color palette.
#Press and hold Alt.
#Press and hold mouse button 2.
#Drag the color to the item you want to change. The mouse pointer changes to a paint bucket.
#Release mouse button 2.
#Release Alt. The color of all instances of the item changes to the new color.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click.
To change the color of a specific item (for example, change the color of the vertical scroll bar in this window only):
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Color Palette.
#Make sure that the item you want to change is visible.
#Point to a color on the color palette.
#Press and hold mouse button 2.
#Drag the color to the item you want to change.
#Release mouse button 2. The color of the item changes to the new color.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click.


F1 help provides information about objects, pop-up menu items, entry fields, and
===Changing the Color of Object Titles 61/3===
push buttons.  You use the F1 help by selecting or highlighting an item and
To change the color of the titles of objects:
pressing the F1 key on your keyboard.
#Open OS/2 System.
Try It!
#Open System Setup.
To get F1 help for each item on a pop-up menu, try the following:
#Open Color Palette.
  1. Click on the down arrow icon in the upper-left corner of the tutorial
#Make sure an object title is visible in the folder. (You cannot change an individual title color. Changing one title color changes every title color in the folder.)
      window. The title-bar icon menu for the OS/2 tutorial is displayed.
#Point to a color on the Color Palette.
  2. Press the Down Arrow key on your keyboard and watch the focus box move
#Press and hold Ctrl.
      from menu item to menu item. Try this several times and stop at the Close
#Press and hold mouse button 2.
      menu item.
#Drag the color to a title in the folder.
  3. Now press the F1 key on your keyboard.
#Release mouse button 2.
      A helpful explanation about why you might want to use this menu item is
#Release Ctrl. The color of every title in the folder changes to the new color.
      displayed.
  4. Double-click on the title-bar icon in the upper-left corner of the help
      window, next to Help for Close, to close the help window.
Return to this book when you are finished.


  Help Push Button    32/4
===Changing the Colors on the Color Palette 62/3===
You can change the colors available on the Color Palette:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Color Palette.
#Select the color on the Color Palette that you want to change.
#Select Edit color.  A window appears in which you can make adjustments to or change the color. For more information about the choices available in this window, select the Help push button.
#When the correct color appears in the box on the color bar in the window, point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click. The Color Palette window is displayed with the new color.


Another way to get help is to use the Help push button available on most of the
===Country 63/2===
object pop-up menus and notebook pages.
When you installed OS/2, you determined settings like date, time, numbers, and currency of a specific country. The Country settings notebook lets you change these settings.
These Help push buttons let you work with the object while you learn how to use
You can select a specific country and have all the formats changed automatically, or you can make individual format selections.
it.
To change country formats:
Try It!
To learn how to use the Help push buttons, try the following:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open System Setup.
   3. Open Solid Color Palette.
   3. Select Country.
  4. Click on the Edit Color push button.
    Tip Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can
  5. When the Edit Color window is displayed, move it to the left side of the
    reconfigure the operating system to support another national language
      screen to make room for the help panel.
    without having to reinstall the entire operating system (see Selective
  6. Click on the Help push button.
    Install).
  7. Read the information provided in the help window.  Notice the highlighted
For country-dependent information, refer to the COUNTRY statement in the online Command Reference.
      words within the help text.  These words indicate that additional
      information is available.
      You can use the Edit Color window while the Help information is displayed.
  8. When you are finished reading the help information, you can close the help
      window by double-clicking on the title-bar icon in the upper-left corner
      of the help window.
Another way to get help is by using an online book called the Master Help
Index. For more information refer to "Mastering the Master Help Index" in Part
3 of this book.


Viewing Information Online    33/3+
===Device Driver Install 64/2===
 
Many devices that you attach to a computer, such as a CD-ROM drive, mouse, display, and printer come with a device driver diskette.
When you installed OS/2, online information and books were added to the
The device driver diskette (sometimes called a device support diskette) contains the code needed by the computer to recognize and operate the device.
Information folderThese books and information describe information about
The Device Driver Install object is used to install any device driver except those for printers and plottersTo install a device driver for a printer or plotter, see Installing a Printer.
printing in OS/2, using Windows programs in OS/2, program and performance
To install a device driver (other than one for a printer or plotter):
considerations, using OS/2 multimedia programs, a book that identifies
  1. Open OS/2 System.
trademarks used in the online information, a glossary of terms and the Master
  2. Open System Setup.
Help Index, which is your main online help resource. The following books are in
  3. Open Device Driver Install.
the Information folder.
  4. Insert the device driver diskette.
  5. Select Install.
  6. Select the device driver to install from the list.
  7. Select OK.
For additional information, refer to the documentation that came with the device.
Note: Do not use the Device Driver Install object to install device drivers found on the OS/2 Installation diskettes.


Master Help Index    34/4
===Font Palette 65/2+===
The Font Palette allows you to:
*Change the typeface of any text in the Workplace Shell interface
*Change sample typefaces currently available on the Font Palette
*Add new fonts to your system
*Delete existing fonts from your system
A font is a collection of characters and symbols of a particular size and style used to produce text on displays and printers. When you install OS/2, the IBM Core Fonts are automatically installed, unless you specify otherwise. The IBM Core Fonts can be used by your display and IBM LaserPrinter, HP** LaserJet**, and PostScript** printers.
The IBM Core Fonts consist of a set of 13 Adobe** Type 1 fonts that work with the Adobe Type Manager** (ATM). The table that follows lists the IBM Core Fonts.
{|class="wikitable"
|+IBM Core Fonts
!FAMILY NAME||TYPEFACE
|-
|rowspan=4|Times New Roman**||Times New Roman
|-
|Times New Roman Bold
|-
|Times New Roman Bold Italic
|-
|Times New Roman Italic
|-
|rowspan=4|Helvetica**||Helvetica
|-
|Helvetica Bold
|-
|Helvetica Bold Italic
|-
|Helvetica Italic
|-
|rowspan=4|Courier||Courier
|-
|Courier Bold
|-
|Courier Bold Italic
|-
|Courier Italic
|-
|Symbol Set||Symbol Set
|}


The Master Help Index provides help for practically everything you want to know
The Adobe Type Manager is an integral part of the OS/2 operating system and works with existing OS/2 and Windows application programs to produce the sharpest possible fonts on the screen and on the printed page. Because it incorporates PostScript outline font technology, the ATM program eliminates jagged fonts so that your screen can display high-quality typefaces of any size or style. The ATM program also enables even inexpensive printers to print PostScript language fonts that are crisp and smooth.
about using OS/2.  It is set up like a dictionary that has tabs.  These tabs can
Note: If you want to use the fonts for both OS/2 and Windows applications, you must install the font files using both the Font Palette and the ATM Control Panel.
help you find topics quickly.  After you select a tab, use the scroll bar to
page down to the topic you are looking for.  You will sometimes find that after
you select a topic, a secondary list of topics is displayed.  This list of
topics is related to the topic you selected.
Try It!
To learn about the Master Help Index:
  1. Select the About Help push button.
  2. Select the Using the Master Help Index topic.
  3. Read the instructions on the right side of the window and in the
      information box.
  4. Select the Practice push button to try it out.
Hint:
      You can use the keys on your keyboard to move to sections in the
      index.  Simply press the key that corresponds to the first letter of
      the topic, and the entries that start with that letter will be
      displayed.
For more information refer to "Mastering the Master Help Index" in Part 3 of
this book.


Command Reference    35/4
===Changing Fonts 66/3===
The Font Palette window displays sample typefaces of eight of the fonts installed on your system. You can use these samples to change any text in the Workplace Shell interface.
To change the typeface of text:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Font Palette.
#Point to the sample typeface you want to use.
#Press and hold mouse button 2. The mouse pointer changes to a pencil.
#Drag the sample typeface to the object whose text font you want to change.
#:If you drag a sample typeface to an object on the Desktop, the text of all the objects on the Desktop changes to that typeface. If you drag a sample typeface to an open object, such as a folder, the typeface will change only for the objects within the folder.
#Release mouse button 2.


If you are familiar with using a command line or you want to learn how to use
===Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette 67/3===
one, you will find the online Command Reference to be very helpful. This book
To change which sample typefaces appear on the Font Palette:
contains descriptions of all the commands you can use at an OS/2 command prompt.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
You might already be familiar with some of the commands because some are
  2. Open System Setup.
actually identical to those you have used with DOS. Some of the commands are
  3. Open Font Palette.
new and some contain additional parameters specific for use with OS/2. For more
  4. Select the sample typeface you want to change.
information about command lines, see "Using Command Prompts" in Part 3 of this
  5. Select Edit fontThe Edit Font window appears.
book.
   6. Select the down arrow for the Name field.
Try It!
   7. Select a new typeface from the list.
To learn how to use the Command Reference, review the "Using the Command
   8. Select the Style and Size if desired.
Reference" topic located in the About Help section of the tutorialWhen you
   9. Select the appropriate Emphasis if desired.
are finished, close the tutorial and try the following steps:
  10. Point to the title-bar icon.
   1. Open the Information folder.
  11. Double-click.
   2. Open the Command Reference.
   3. Select the + sign next to OS/2 Commands By Name to display all the OS/2
      commands.
   4. Open the command for which you want information.
Note:  You might see + signs next to some of the commands in the list. The +
signs indicate that additional information pertaining to these commands is
available. Click on the + sign to view the additional topics.


  Glossary   36/4
===Adding Fonts to Your System 68/3===
There are thousands of additional font styles in the Adobe Type 1 font-file format that are available for use with the OS/2 operating system.  These fonts require two files for each typeface. These files have an AFM and PFB file-name extension.  The Font Palette converts the AFM file to an OFM file when it installs the new font.
Note:  If the set of fonts you want to install is supplied on multiple diskettes, you might need to copy the files into a temporary directory, because the font installation process requires that both files for a given typeface be available at the same time.
To add more fonts to your system:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Font Palette.
  4. Select Edit font.  The Edit Font window appears.
  5. Select Add.
  6. Follow the instructions on the Add Font window; then select Add.
  7. Select the names of the font files that you want to install on your
      system.
  8. Select Add.
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
  10. Double-click.
See Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette if you want to add one of the new typefaces to the Font Palette samples.


The Glossary provides definitions for terms used in the OS/2 information.  The
===Removing Fonts from Your System 69/3===
Glossary looks like a dictionary and can be used in the same way the Master Help
To remove a font from your system:
Index is usedYou can use the tutorial to find out more about the Glossary.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Font Palette.
  4. Select Edit font.  The Edit Font window appears.
  5. Select Delete.
  6. Select the names of the font files that you want to delete from your
      system.
  7. Select Delete.
  8. When the files have been deleted, point to the title-bar icon.
  9. Double-click.
Note: Removing a font deletes the corresponding files from your hard disk unless they are needed by the Windows Adobe Type Manager.  For more information about the Windows Adobe Type Manager, see the online Windows Programs in OS/2 book located in the Information folder.


REXX Information    37/4
===Keyboard 70/2===
 
The Keyboard object is used to adjust the blink rate of the cursor, change the speed at which a key repeats when held down, and customize the keyboard to make it easier to use for those with special needs.
This book provides information to acquaint you with the REXX language and
To customize the keyboard:
programming concepts.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
 
  2. Open System Setup.
Windows Programs in OS/2    38/4
  3. Open Keyboard.
 
   4. Select the tab for the setting you want to change.
This book provides information about using OS/2 and Windows programs together
  5. Point to the title-bar icon.
under OS/2.
  6. Double-click.
Note:  If the keyboard speed is set in Windows, when that WIN-OS/2 session is started, the keyboard speed for the entire system is reset and remains reset even after that WIN-OS/2 session is closed.


Application Considerations    39/4
Select the Special Needs tab to change the settings to meet your special requirements. For example, you can make keys "sticky" so that you can press and release a series of keys (for example, Ctrl+Alt+Del) sequentially but have the keys operate as if the keys were pressed and released at the same time.


This book provides information about the settings or tasks you need to perform
To enable sticky keys:
to enable certain programs to run under OS/2.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Keyboard.
  4. Select Special Needs.
  5. Select the Settings activation On radio button.
  6. For each key you want to act as a sticky key, press Shift three times;
      then press the key you want to stay stuck down.
  7. Repeat the previous step for each key that you want to operate as a sticky
      key.
  8. Point to the title-bar icon.
  9. Double-click.
To deactivate sticky keys, press and release each sticky key once.


  Performance Considerations   40/4
===Add Programs 71/2===
Some programs do not place a program object in a folder or on the Desktop during their installation. Without the object, you cannot use the Workplace Shell to start the program.  To correct this situation, you can use the Add Programs object.  Add Programs uses a database to identify possible programs, set the correct DOS settings, and select an appropriate program object for the newly added OS/2, DOS, and Windows programs.
You can create your own database to be used with Add Programs.  For more information, see the OS/2 Tutorial, the help information provided with Add Programs or the Master Help Index.
To add programs to the Desktop:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Add Programs.  The Add Programs to the Desktop window appears.
  4. Select Add new programs
  5. Select Ok.  A message is displayed when the process is complete.
  6. Select Ok.
The Add Programs program creates a DOS Programs folder, a Windows Programs folder, and a Windows Groups folder.
Some Windows groups contain DOS programs.  After you add them to the Desktop, these DOS program objects are placed in the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder and also in a DOS folder if you added DOS programs.
    Tip If your computer had a previous version of the OS/2 operating system,
    you might see a folder on your Desktop with the same name as one of your
    old groups.  This folder contains program objects that represent your old
    programs; however, Add Programs also puts these programs and program
    objects in new folders (DOS Programs or Windows Programs folders).
    Use the program objects in these new folders rather than the old group name
    folders because the preselected settings will work best for the performance
    of your program.


This book provides information about how to improve the performance of your
===Mouse 72/2===
system, memory management, model-specific computer problems, and COM ports.
The Mouse object is used to change the behavior of your mouse. You can:
*Control the speed of the mouse pointer
*Change the look of the pointer
*Change the length, size and color of the pointer tail
*Change the mouse for left-hand use
*Customize the Alt, Shift, and Ctrl key combinations
*Change the length and look of the mouse pointer tail
Note: You can change the speed of your mouse for your Windows sessions using the Windows Control Panel. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to customize mouse settings.


Printing in OS/2   41/4
To change the mouse settings:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Mouse.
Use the Timings page to change the speed at which actions occur when you use the mouse. Use the Setup page to customize the mouse for left-hand use or right-hand use. If you change the setting, the button settings on the Mappings page are automatically updated; however, you also can use the Mappings page to customize them individually. Use the Comet Cursor page to change the length and look of the mouse pointer's tail.


This book provides information for everything you want to know about printing in
Tip Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can reconfigure the operating system to support another pointing device without having to reinstall the entire operating system (see Selective Install).
OS/2-from installing a printer to solving printer problems.


Multimedia    42/4
===Scheme Palette 73/2+===
The Scheme Palette contains many different predefined color schemes. Each scheme
has a preset color for the following:
*Desktop
*Titles of the objects on the Desktop and in folders
*Different parts of the windows such as push buttons, scroll bars, and the background.
You can use these schemes as they are, or you can change their colors. In addition, you can also use the Scheme Palette to change the width of the borders around the windows, and the font used.


This book provides information pertaining to the multimedia programs available
===Changing Color Schemes 74/3===
with OS/2.
To use a predefined scheme to change the colors of one folder or window:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Scheme Palette.
#Make sure that the folder or window you want to change is visible.
#Point to a scheme on the palette.
#Press and hold mouse button 2.
#Drag the color scheme to the window.
#Release mouse button 2.  The window colors change to the new scheme.


Trademarks    43/4
===Globally Changing Color Schemes 75/3===
To use one of the predefined schemes to change the colors for all the folders
that do not have their colors individually set:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Scheme Palette.
#Point to a scheme on the palette.
#Press and hold Alt.
#Press and hold mouse button 2.
#Drag the color scheme to the Desktop.
#Release mouse button 2.
#Release Alt. The colors change to the new scheme.


This book provides trademark information for trademarks mentioned in the online
===Changing the Colors on the Scheme Palette 76/3===
books and online help information.
To change the colors within a scheme on the Scheme Palette:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Scheme Palette.
#Select the scheme on the Scheme Palette that you want to change.
#Select Edit Scheme.
#Select the part of the window (in the Window area field) whose color you want to change.
#Select Edit Color.  A window appears in which you can make adjustments to or change the color. (For more information about the choices available in this window, select the Help push button.)
#Adjust the color until the correct color appears in the box on the color bar in the window.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click. The selected window part changes to the new color on the Scheme Palette.
#When all the color changes have been made, point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click.
Tip You can point to an area on the sample palette and click mouse button 2 to select the part of the window to be changed, instead of using the Window area field to select it. This reduces the amount of scrolling needed to find the correct window part.


Using the LaunchPad    44/2+
===Changing the Fonts in a Scheme 77/3===
 
To change the font of text within the scheme:
The LaunchPad holds the objects and push buttons that you use most often.  Some
   1. Open OS/2 System.
of the most commonly used objects are already on the LaunchPad.
   2. Open System Setup.
 
   3. Open Scheme Palette.
Using LaunchPad Push Buttons    45/3+
   4. Select the scheme on the Scheme Palette that you want to change.
 
   5. Select Edit Scheme.
The push buttons at the left side of the LaunchPad let you secure your computer
   6. Select the part of the window (in the Window area field) whose font you
while you are away, shut down your computer when you are done working for the
       want to change.
day, locate things on the Desktop, and display a list of all the windows you
   7. Select Edit Font.
have open on the Desktop. The following describes the push buttons on the
  8. Select the name, style, size, and emphasis that you want to use.
LaunchPad.
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
 
  10. Double-clickThe font of the selected window part changes on the Scheme
Lockup Push Button    46/4
      Palette. For more information about fonts, see Font Palette.
 
    Tip To display a colorful picture (bit map) on the background of your
You can use Lockup to lock up your computer keyboard and display at any time.
    folder windows or the Desktop folder:
By locking up your computer, you can keep others from using your computer while
      1. Display the pop-up menu for a folder.
you are away.
      2. Select Settings.
Try It!
      3. Select the Background tab.
To lock up your computer, you must first decide on a password.  Your password
      4. Select the Image radio button in the Background type field.
can be from 1 to 15 characters long.  Think of a password now, write it down,
      5. Select the arrow to the right of the Image File field.
and put it in a safe place.  Then try the following:
      6. Select a file with a .BMP file-name extension.
   1. Select the Lockup push button on the left side of the LaunchPad.
    The image appears in the background of your folder.
   2. Read the text in the window and type your password in the Password field
      next to the blinking cursor.
   3. Press the Enter key on your keyboard and the cursor will start blinking in
      the Password (for verification) field.
   4. Type the same password again to verify that you entered the password
      correctly.
   5. Select the OK push button.
   6. Select the Lockup push button on the LaunchPad.  The OS/2 Logo screen is
      displayed and a Help push button is available at the bottom right side of
       the screen.
   7. Type your password, and then press Enter.  You will return to the Desktop.
Note:  After you have specified your password, your screen will automatically
lock up within three minutes if there is no action being performed on the
Desktop. Realize that it is very important to be sure to:
        REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORD!
After you have decided upon a password and entered it into the Password window,
you will not see the password window again unless you decide at some later time
that you want to change your password. Now, whenever you select Lockup on the
LaunchPad, your computer will be automatically locked up.
  To change your password, or any of the other settings associated with the
  Lockup push button, you must use the settings menu choice in the Desktop pop-up
menu.
Try It!
To see the Lockup settings available and to change your password, try the
following:
  1. Using mouse button 2, click on an open area on the Desktop.  The Desktop
      pop-up menu is displayed.
  2. Select Settings to display the Settings notebook for the Desktop.
  3. Select the Lockup tab.
      Notice that the Lockup tab has three pages associated with it. The bottom
      right corner of the page is labeled Lockup - Page 1 of 3.
      The page currently displayed is the Timeout page.  Use this page to change
      the current settings for how much time you want to pass before the
      computer automatically locks up.  Timeout is set for 3 minutes by default.
      The second page enables you to decide what graphics or colors you want to
      be displayed while your computer is locked up.  The Lockup screen is set
      to display the OS/2 Logo screen by default.  The screen is displayed in
      the Preview area of the page.
      Page 3 is the page you use to change your current password.
  4. Move the mouse pointer to the right arrow and select it until the Password
      Page in the notebook is displayed.
  5. Type your new password in the Password field and then again in the
      Password (for verification) field. If you need help, select the Help push
      button.
  6. Select OK.
Remember to lock up your computer when you are away to prevent someone from
using it.


Find Push Button    47/2+
===Sound 78/2===
The Sound object is used by an application to generate a warning beep. The beep can be turned off.
You can indicate whether a beep should be heard when a warning message is displayed or an invalid key is pressed. To customize the sound settings:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Sound.
Note: If you install OS/2 Multimedia additional sound options are available.


The Find push button helps you locate objects in the system. If you can't
For more information, see the online Multimedia book.
remember where to find your favorite game, you can use the Find option to help
 
you locate it.
===Spooler 79/2+===
Try It!
The Spooler stores jobs that are waiting for an available printer or port. OS/2 includes a spooler for printouts you request in OS/2, DOS, and Windows sessions (an instance of a command prompt or started program).
To learn how to use Find, try the following:
When you print, the system creates a spool file which is held in place in the SPOOL directoryThe SPOOL directory is created by the system during installation. You can use the Spooler object to change the location of the spooler path and to disable or enable the spooler.
  1. Select Find on the LaunchPad. The Find Objects window is displayed.
  2. Select the Help push button at the bottom of the window.
  3. Read the information about how to use FindBe sure to read through to
      the end of the help information, where you can find a list of the fields
      available on the Find Objects window. You can double-click on the
      highlighted items to display additional information about how to use these
      fields.  Be sure to select the Previous push button at the bottom of the
      help window to return to the original help information for Find.
  4. Double-click on the title-bar icon in the help window when you are
      finished using the help information.  This will close the help window.


Window List Push Button   48/3
===Enabling the Spooler 80/3===
To enable the spooler:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Spooler.
  4. Point to the title-bar icon.
  5. Click mouse button 2.
  6. Select Disable spooler
  7. Point to the title-bar icon.
  8. Double-click. (Spooling takes effect immediately.  You do not need to
      restart your system.)


You can use the Window List push button to help you locate open objects, reopen
===Changing the Spooler Path 81/3===
minimized windows, or close open windows.
Use this procedure if you print often, or if you print large jobs and need a separate storage area, such as a large disk, for spool files. Be sure to wait until all your jobs finish printing, or delete any pending jobs.
Try It!
To learn about the Window List, try the following:
  1. Select the Window List push button.
      A list of open active windows is displayed.  The Desktop is the first
      window in the list.  The list also includes the LaunchPad and any other
      active objects or folders you might have already opened.
  2. Select the title-bar icon located in the upper-left corner of the window.
  3. Select the arrow to the right of Help.
  4. Select General Help.
  5. Read the information in the help window to learn more about the Window
      List and how to use it.


Shut Down Push Button    49/3
To change the spooler path:
#Select all the printer objects.
#Select Hold from the pop-up menu of each printer object.
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Spooler. By default, the Spooler Settings notebook appears.
#Select Spool path.
#In the Spool path field, type the new path.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click.


After you have given OS/2 its daily workout, you must take care and remember to
===Changing the Print Priority 82/3===
shut down your computer.  Shut down is the cool-down exercise for this powerful
You can set the print priority higher or lower to adjust the speed at which spooled print jobs are printed.
operating system.  When you shut down your computer, information about which
windows are open and where they are located on the Desktop is saved in the
storage buffer on your hard disk. When you select Shut down, you will see a
window asking if you are ready to shut down.  Simply select the OK push button
and you will be on your way to performing a successful shutdown. Remember to use
the Shut down option when you are finished working for the day.
Note:  Be sure to check all programs for unsaved information (such as data files
you might be editing) before you start the shutdown procedure.
Note:  Never turn off the power on your computer until you have completed a
shutdown.


Using Objects on the LaunchPad    50/3+
To set the print priority:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Spooler. By default, the Spooler Settings notebook appears.
#Select the Print priority page.
#Move the slider arm to select priority.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click.


The objects on the right side of the LaunchPad are shadows of objects that
===Disabling the Spooler 83/3===
already exist elsewhere in OS/2. A shadow object is linked to the original
You might want to disable the spooler to print jobs that have a high-security risk. Disabling the spooler prevents others from viewing your print jobs in a printer-object window. However, you cannot disable spooling to a network printer on a network server.
object but it can reside in a different location on the Desktop.  The purpose of
a shadow object is to allow you to use an object from the Desktop whether or not
it is located on drive C. When you make a change to the shadow, the change also
occurs in the original. By creating a shadow of the original object instead of
creating a copy, you can save space on your hard disk and still use the
functions of the object. The following are the objects on the LaunchPad:


Drive A Object    51/4
To disable the spooler:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Spooler.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Click mouse button 2.
#Select Enable spooler.
#Restart your system.
When the Spooler is disabled, your print jobs go directly to a printer. However, a printout might contain material from different jobs mixed together.


The Drive A object gives you access to the information provided on a diskette
===System 84/2+===
you insert into the diskette drive slot on your computer. When you select the
The System object is used to change system defaults. You can select how you want a window that is already open to be displayed and where you want windows that you have minimized to be displayed. This notebook is also used to specify confirmation messages and to turn off the product information window. For more information about each tab, select the help push button provided on each page.
drawer button for the Drive A object, you will see that it contains the Drive C
object (if Drive C is the drive where you installed OS/2). This object gives you
access to the contents of Drive C in your computer. For more information about
accessing drives, see "Using Drives" in Part 3 of this book.


OS/2 Window Object    52/4
===Confirming Delete Actions 85/3===
To specify if you want a confirmation message displayed each time you delete an object or a folder:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open System.
#Select the Confirmations tab.
#Place a check mark next to each item you want a confirmation message for.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click.


The OS/2 Window object gives you access to an OS/2 command prompt in a window on
===Directing Keyboard and Mouse Activity 86/3===
the Desktop. You can use the OS/2 command prompt in much the same way as a DOS
To enable or disable the direction of any keyboard and mouse activity during the startup of any Presentation Manager program.
command prompt - by typing a command at the command prompt.
#Open OS/2 System.
When you select the drawer button for the OS/2 Window object, you will see that
#Open System Setup.
it contains the DOS Window object. The DOS Window object provides you access to
#Open System.
a DOS command prompt in a window on the Desktop. Here you can use the DOS
#Select the Input tab.
commands with which you are already familiar. For more information about using
#Place a check mark next to Enable type ahead or Disable type ahead. (The default is Enable type ahead.)
a command prompt, refer to the online Command Reference, or the "Using Command
#Point to the title-bar icon.
Prompts" in Part 3 of this book.
#Double-click.


Using OS/2 Object    53/4
===Resolving Title Conflicts 87/3===
To specify how the system is to respond to title conflicts if you create, copy, or move an object into a folder that already has an object with the same name:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open System.
#Select the Title tab.
#Select the choice that best describe how you want the system to respond when a title conflict appears.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click.


The Using OS/2 object gives you instant access to the OS/2 tutorial. Use the
===Changing System Defaults 88/3===
tutorial to learn something new, to refresh your memory about how to do
To change the system defaults for a window:
something, or to experience hands-on practice using OS/2.
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open System.
#Select the Window tab.
#Select the choices that best describe how you want the windows to behave.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click.


Shredder Object    54/4
===Printing a Screen 89/3===
To be able to print the information in an open window:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open System.
#Select the Print Screen tab.
#Select Enable.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click.
To print the open window:
#Select the open window.
#Press Print Screen.


The Shredder provides a quick way for you to delete files, objects, or folders
===Displaying Logos 90/3===
that you no longer have a use for. For more information about the Shredder, see
To specify if you want a logo to be displayed and how long to display it:
the online Master Help Index.
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open System.
#Select the Logo tab.
#Select the choices that best describes how you want the system to handle product information and logos.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click.


Printer Object    55/4
===Changing Screen Resolution 91/3===
To change the screen resolution for an XGA display adapter:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open System.
#Select the Screen tab.
#Select the resolution you want to use.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
#Double-click.
Note: The Screen tab will not appear if you are using the VGA, 8514, or SVGA driver.


The printer object is added to the LaunchPad only if a printer was set up when
Tip After changing screen resolutions from a higher resolution to a lower resolution, some applications might open windows that are partially off the screen. If this occurs:
you installed OS/2. You might not have a printer object on your LaunchPad. If
#Press Alt+Spacebar.
you want to know how to set up a printer, use the information provided in the
#Select Move.
online Printing in OS/2 book located in the Information folder.
#Use the mouse or the arrow keys to move the window.
#Click mouse button 1 or press Enter.
or:
#Point to an empty area on the Desktop.
#Click mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the same time.
#Point to the name of the program.
#Click mouse button 2.
#Select Tile or Cascade. The window will now appear on the screen.


Adding Objects to the LaunchPad    56/3
===System Clock 92/2===
The System Clock object is used to set the system date and time or to set an alarm. You can display the clock in either analog or digital mode.


You can easily add any object you want to the LaunchPad by simply dragging the
To set the system clock:
object to the right side of the LaunchPad.  The LaunchPad will expand to include
#Open OS/2 System.
the object on the panel.
#Open System Setup.
Try It!
#Select System Clock.
When adding an object to the LaunchPad, use the following example as a guide.
#Display the pop-up menu for System Clock.
In this example, the System Clock is added to the LaunchPad:
#Select Settings.
  1. Open the OS/2 System folder.
#Select the tab for the setting you want to change.
  2. Open the System Setup folder.
#Select View; change to the View page if necessary. (To view a different View page, use an arrow at the lower-right corner of the window.)
  3. Move the mouse pointer over the System Clock object.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
  4. Press and hold mouse button 2 and move the object in between two objects
#Double-click.
      on the LaunchPad until you see a single, solid black bar. This black bar
      indicates where the object will be added to the LaunchPad.
For more information about the LaunchPad, refer to the Master Help Index, the
Using OS/2 tutorial, and the help information provided with the LaunchPad.


  Part 3 - Using OS/2   57/1
===WIN-OS/2 Setup 93/2===
The WIN-OS/2 Setup object is used to select a public or private clipboard or dynamic data exchange (DDE). The clipboard and DDE are features that allow data exchange between programs. You also can use this object to preselect WIN-OS/2 settings for all Windows programs before you start them. Use the Fast load setting to automatically start a WIN-OS/2 session when you start OS/2. If you change a setting, the change affects only subsequent Windows programs that are started. Programs that are currently running are not affected.


If you are using Windows programs that can share information using the clipboard or Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) feature, then you can change the way these features work in all WIN-OS/2 sessions.


Customizing Your System    58/1+
Note: Be sure you check with the instructions that came with your program to determine if these features are supported.


The System Setup object contains objects that help you customize your system.
The clipboard is an area that temporarily holds data. Data is placed in the clipboard by selecting cut or copy from a menu. You can cut (move) or copy data from one document and paste it into another document, even if the other document is in a different program. For example, you can place a spreadsheet from one program into a document from another program.
To open System Setup:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
or:
  1. Point to an empty area on the Desktop.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select System Setup.


Color Palette    59/2+
The DDE feature enables the exchange of data between programs. Any change made to information in one file is applied to the same information in an associated file. In the example above, if changes are made to the original spreadsheet, corresponding changes are made to the spreadsheet in the document. If changes are made to the spreadsheet in the document, corresponding changes are made to the original spreadsheet.


The Color Palette is used to customize the colors on your screen. You can change
The clipboard and DDE can be set to Public or Private. When DDE is set to Public, information can be shared with OS/2 and WIN-OS/2 sessions. Information cannot be shared with DOS sessions. When the clipboard or DDE is set to Private, sharing data between sessions is restrictedThis means that only information for those programs running in that single session can be shared.
the color of the following parts of the Workplace Shell*:
  o  Desktop
  o  Titles of the objects on the Desktop and in folders
  o  Different parts of the windows, such as push buttons, scroll bars, and the
      background.
There are two colors palettes, one is a Solid Color Palette for low resolution
displays and one is a Mixed Color Palette for high resolution displays.  The
Solid Color Palette contains 16 solid colors and the Mixed Color palette
contains 256 mixed colors.
  Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to use the Color
Palettes.
The following steps can be used for both the Solid and the Mixed Color
Palettes.


Changing Screen Colors    60/3
When OS/2 is installed, the clipboard and DDE are set to Public. Windows programs that have the clipboard or DDE feature are set up during installation of the OS/2 operating system to use a Public setting for all WIN-OS/2 sessions. You can use the WIN-OS/2 Setup object to set these features to private. You can further customize the way you use these features by using
the Settings notebook of the program object.


To globally change the color of an item (for example, change the color of the
Note: Changing the clipboard and DDE features to Private will not affect the performance of your Windows programs.
background in every window):
 
  1. Open OS/2 System.
To change the clipboard or DDE feature to Private:
  2. Open System Setup.
#Open OS/2 System.
  3. Open Color Palette.
#Open System Setup.
  4. Make sure that the item you want to change is visible.
#Open WIN-OS/2 Setup.
  5. Point to a color on the color palette.
#Select Data Exchange.
  6. Press and hold Alt.
#Select Private for Dynamic Data Exchange or Clipboard.
  7. Press and hold mouse button 2.
#Point to the title-bar icon.
  8. Drag the color to the item you want to change. The mouse pointer changes
#Double-click.
      to a paint bucket.
Note: If you change the settings for the clipboard or DDE while a program is running in a WIN-OS/2 session, the settings for the program will take effect immediately.
  9. Release mouse button 2.
 
  10. Release Alt.  The color of all instances of the item changes to the new
For related information about the clipboard, DDE, WIN-OS/2, and Windows Programs, see the Windows Programs in OS/2 located in the online Information folder or the Master Help Index.
      color.
 
  11. Point to the title-bar icon.
===Power 94/2+===
  12. Double-click.
The Power object manages and tracks power consumption in battery-powered computers that support the Advanced Power Management (APM) standard. The APM standard defines the way the hardware and software work together to reduce power consumption and help extend battery life.
To change the color of a specific item (for example, change the color of the
If your computer supports the APM standard, the Power object might be automatically installed during the OS/2 installation process. If it was not installed, you can install it by using Selective Install and selecting Advanced Power Management. For information about Selective Install, see Selective Install.
vertical scroll bar in this window only):
 
  1. Open OS/2 System.
Note: This power management feature is not available if your computer does not have APM BIOS or a device driver that emulates APM BIOS.
  2. Open System Setup.
 
  3. Open Color Palette.
OS/2 APM support relies on the power status information returned from the BIOS on your computer. You might notice incorrect battery life or status within the Power icon on your computer. If this occurs, rely on the LEDs on your computer for accurate power status information.
  4. Make sure that the item you want to change is visible.
 
  5. Point to a color on the color palette.
Turning the APM setting to Off also turns off the BIOS power management. If you want to turn off APM, but not the BIOS power management, place REM before the APM device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, and then restart your system to invoke the change.
  6. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  7. Drag the color to the item you want to change.
  8. Release mouse button 2.  The color of the item changes to the new color.
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
  10. Double-click.


  Changing the Color of Object Titles    61/3
For example:
  REM DEVICE=C:\OS2\APM.SYS


To change the color of the titles of objects:
===Power Object 95/3===
  1. Open OS/2 System.
To open the Power object:
  2. Open System Setup.
#Open OS/2 System.
  3. Open Color Palette.
#Open System Setup.
  4. Make sure an object title is visible in the folder.  (You cannot change an
#Open Power.
      individual title color.  Changing one title color changes every title
To display the Power pop-up menu:
      color in the folder.)
#Point to the Power object.
  5. Point to a color on the Color Palette.
#Click mouse button 1 or 2.
  6. Press and hold Ctrl.
  7. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  8. Drag the color to a title in the folder.
  9. Release mouse button 2.
  10. Release Ctrl.  The color of every title in the folder changes to the new
      color.


  Changing the Colors on the Color Palette    62/3
===Power Settings 96/3===
To set power management support:
#Display the Power object pop-up menu.
#Select Settings. The Power - Settings notebook appears.
#Select Power.
#Set Power management to On or Off. If set to On, power consumption will be reduced and power status will be tracked. If set to Off, the suspend mode, power status, and battery status features are disabled.
#Set Confirm on power state changes if you want to confirm requests to go to suspend mode. (See Suspend Mode.)
To set the default status view of the status window:
#Display the Power object pop-up menu.
#Select Settings. The Power - Settings notebook appears.
#Select View.
#Select Full status or Battery only for Default status view.
#Set Refresh (of the status window) to On or Off.
#If you set Refresh to On, select the number of minutes (from 1 to 30) for Refresh rate. The system will automatically update the status window at the intervals you specified.
You can also update the status window by selecting Refresh Now from the Power object pop-up menu.


You can change the colors available on the Color Palette:
===Power Status 97/3===
  1. Open OS/2 System.
To display the power status:
  2. Open System Setup.
#Display the Power object pop-up menu.
  3. Open Color Palette.
#Select the arrow to the right of Open.
  4. Select the color on the Color Palette that you want to change.
#Select Full status or Battery status. A full-status Power window or a power-gauge Power window is displayed, depending on your selection.
  5. Select Edit color. A window appears in which you can make adjustments to
Note:  You cannot change the size of the Power window.
      or change the color.  For more information about the choices available in
      this window, select the Help push button.
  6. When the correct color appears in the box on the color bar in the window,
      point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.  The Color Palette window is displayed with the new color.


  Country   63/2
A full-status Power window displays the following information:
*Battery life. This information is displayed as a power gauge that shows the power level of the battery compared to the capacity of the battery. When the power gauge indicator is completely shaded, the battery is at full power. The shaded area of the gauge moves up or down as the battery power level increases or decreases. When the power gauge indicator is dimmed, there is no battery in the computer or the computer cannot provide battery information.
*Power source for the computer. If the system cannot determine the power source, no power source information is displayed.
*Battery state, which is the charge state of the battery. Battery state information is displayed as follows:
  High        Battery charge is OK; continue using your computer.
Low        Recharge the battery or switch to another power source
            such as another battery or AC power.
Critical    Battery charge is depleted.  Recharge the battery or
            switch to another power source immediately to avoid a
            system failure or data loss.
Charging   System is restoring the battery charge.
Unknown    System cannot determine the battery state or there is no
            battery in your computer.


When you installed OS/2, you determined settings like date, time, numbers, and
===Suspend Mode 98/3===
currency of a specific country.  The Country settings notebook lets you change
To set the suspend mode:
these settings.
#Display the Power object pop-up menu.
You can select a specific country and have all the formats changed
#Select Suspend.
automatically, or you can make individual format selections.
When suspend mode is activated, battery power is conserved by dimming the display and turning off devices that are not in use.
To change country formats:
If Confirm on power status changes is set in the Power - Settings notebook, a message is displayed that asks you if you want to continue before switching to suspend mode.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Select Country.
    Tip Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can
    reconfigure the operating system to support another national language
    without having to reinstall the entire operating system (see Selective
    Install).
For country-dependent information, refer to the COUNTRY statement in the online
Command Reference.


  Device Driver Install    64/2
Note: Different computers have different procedures for exiting suspend mode and resuming operation. Refer to the documentation that came with your computer for information about its suspend mode features.


Many devices that you attach to a computer, such as a CD-ROM drive, mouse,
After you exit suspend mode, you will notice a startup delay before you can resume operation of your systemThis delay might be a few seconds, depending on your system.
display, and printer come with a device driver diskette.
  The device driver diskette (sometimes called a device
support diskette) contains the code needed by the computer to recognize and
operate the device.
The Device Driver Install object is used to install any device driver except
those for printers and plotters.  To install a device driver for a printer or
plotter, see Installing a Printer.
To install a device driver (other than one for a printer or plotter):
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Device Driver Install.
  4. Insert the device driver diskette.
  5. Select Install.
  6. Select the device driver to install from the list.
  7. Select OK.
For additional information, refer to the documentation that came with the
device.
Note:  Do not use the Device Driver Install object to install device drivers
found on the OS/2 Installation diskettes.


Font Palette    65/2+
===Selective Install 99/2+===
The Selective Install object is used to add features that you did not include when you originally installed the operating system. You also can use the Selective Install object to change the mouse, display adapter, or country information for your system.


The Font Palette allows you to:
Note: You will need the OS/2 installation diskettes for each of the procedures that follow.
  o  Change the typeface of any text in the Workplace Shell interface
  o  Change sample typefaces currently available on the Font Palette
  o  Add new fonts to your system
  o  Delete existing fonts from your system
A font is a collection of characters and symbols of a particular size and style
used to produce text on displays and printers. When you install OS/2, the IBM
Core Fonts are automatically installed, unless you specify otherwise.  The IBM
Core Fonts can be used by your display and IBM LaserPrinter, HP** LaserJet**,
and PostScript** printers.
The IBM Core Fonts consist of a set of 13 Adobe** Type 1 fonts that work with
the Adobe Type Manager** (ATM).  The table that follows lists the IBM Core
Fonts.
ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
3          IBM Core Fonts                          3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 FAMILY NAME          3 TYPEFACE                  3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Times New Roman**    3 Times New Roman          3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3                      3 Times New Roman Bold      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3                      3 Times New Roman Bold      3
3                      3 Italic                    3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3                      3 Times New Roman Italic    3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Helvetica**          3 Helvetica                3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3                      3 Helvetica Bold            3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3                      3 Helvetica Bold Italic    3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3                      3 Helvetica Italic          3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Courier              3 Courier                  3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3                      3 Courier Bold              3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3                      3 Courier Bold Italic      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3                      3 Courier Italic            3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Symbol Set          3 Symbol Set                3
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
The Adobe Type Manager is an integral part of the OS/2 operating system and
works with existing OS/2 and Windows application programs to produce the
sharpest possible fonts on the screen and on the printed page.  Because it
incorporates PostScript outline font technology, the ATM program eliminates
jagged fonts so that your screen can display high-quality typefaces of any size
or style. The ATM program also enables even inexpensive printers to print
PostScript language fonts that are crisp and smooth.
Note:  If you want to use the fonts for both OS/2 and Windows applications, you
must install the font files using both the Font Palette and the ATM Control
Panel.


Changing Fonts    66/3
===Adding Options after Installation 100/3===
To add options after installation:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open System Setup.
#Open Selective Install.
#Select from the System Configuration window any of the choices that you want to change or add.
#Select OK.
#Place a check mark to the left of any feature you want to add. (For more information about a feature, press F1.) If a More push button is displayed to the right of a feature, select it to see additional choices.


The Font Palette window displays sample typefaces of eight of the fonts
===Adding Online Documentation after Installation 101/3===
installed on your system.  You can use these samples to change any text in the
To add online documentation after installation:
Workplace Shell interface.
#Open OS/2 System.
To change the typeface of text:
#Open System Setup.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
#Open Selective Install.
  2. Open System Setup.
#Select OK when the System Configuration window is displayed.
  3. Open Font Palette.
#Select the check box to the left of Documentation.
  4. Point to the sample typeface you want to use.
#Select More to the right of Documentation.
  5. Press and hold mouse button 2.  The mouse pointer changes to a pencil.
#Select the check box to the left of any documentation units to deselect the ones you do not want to add.
  6. Drag the sample typeface to the object whose text font you want to change.
#Select OK.
      If you drag a sample typeface to an object on the Desktop, the text of all
#Select Install.
      the objects on the Desktop changes to that typeface. If you drag a sample
#Follow the instructions on the screen.
      typeface to an open object, such as a folder, the typeface will change
      only for the objects within the folder.
  7. Release mouse button 2.


  Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette    67/3
===Changing Display Adapter Support 102/3===
To change the display adapter support after installation:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Selective Install.
4. Select Primary Display or Secondary Display from the System Configuration
    window.
5. Select the display adapter that you want from the list provided.
6. Select OK.
7. Follow the instructions on the screen.


To change which sample typefaces appear on the Font Palette:
===Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation 103/3===
To add PCMCIA** support after installation:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open System Setup.
   3. Open Font Palette.
   3. Open Selective Install.
   4. Select the sample typeface you want to change.
   4. Select OK when the System Configuration window is displayed.
   5. Select Edit font.  The Edit Font window appears.
   5. Select the check box to the left of PCMCIA Support to display the Select
   6. Select the down arrow for the Name field.
      PCMCIA system window.
   7. Select a new typeface from the list.
   6. Select the appropriate system (this should either be a direct match with
   8. Select the Style and Size if desired.
      your target install system or a known compatible system).
   9. Select the appropriate Emphasis if desired.
   7. Select OK.
  10. Point to the title-bar icon.
   8. Select Install.
  11. Double-click.
   9. Follow the instructions on the screen.


Adding Fonts to Your System    68/3
===PCMCIA 104/2+===
OS/2 provides software support for Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) hardware. PCMCIA is the standard for PC card adapters associated with portable computers. A PC card is a small form-factor adapter about the size and shape of a credit card. You can use PC cards with laptops, notebooks, tablets, and other portable computer systems that are equipped with a PCMCIA slot.


There are thousands of additional font styles in the Adobe Type 1 font-file
===Installing PCMCIA 105/3===
format that are available for use with the OS/2 operating system.  These fonts
PCMCIA can be automatically installed during OS/2 installation or it can be installed through Selective Install after OS/2 installation. To install PCMCIA support after installation, see Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation.
require two files for each typeface.  These files have an AFM and PFB file-name
extension.  The Font Palette converts the AFM file to an OFM file when it
installs the new font.
Note:  If the set of fonts you want to install is supplied on multiple
diskettes, you might need to copy the files into a temporary directory, because
the font installation process requires that both files for a given typeface be
available at the same time.
To add more fonts to your system:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Font Palette.
  4. Select Edit font.  The Edit Font window appears.
  5. Select Add.
  6. Follow the instructions on the Add Font window; then select Add.
  7. Select the names of the font files that you want to install on your
      system.
  8. Select Add.
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
  10. Double-click.
See Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette if you want to add one of
the new typefaces to the Font Palette samples.


Removing Fonts from Your System    69/3
===PCMCIA Components 106/3===
PCMCIA consists of the following services and client device drivers (CDDs):
*Card services - Provide an industry-standard interface layer between the Client device driver (CDD) and hardware-specific socket services.
*Socket services - Provide an industry-standard interface layer across hardware platforms for specific chip-set support.
*Resource Client - A special-purpose CDD that provides Card Services, detailing the resources in use and available at start up.
*Modem Card Manager - A generic CDD that provides a Card Manager level of support for PCMCIA modem cards.


To remove a font from your system:
===Plug and Play for PCMCIA 107/3+===
  1. Open OS/2 System.
Plug and Play for PCMCIA is an OS/2 application that displays PC card information, socket status, assigned resources, and card type. There are two basic types of PC cards:
  2. Open System Setup.
*Memory cards, which contain specific types of memory devices
  3. Open Font Palette.
*Input/output (I/O) cards, which contain devices such as modems and disks
  4. Select Edit font.  The Edit Font window appears.
Both card types are assigned system resources, which are used to communicate with the card's devices.
  5. Select Delete.
  6. Select the names of the font files that you want to delete from your
      system.
  7. Select Delete.
  8. When the files have been deleted, point to the title-bar icon.
  9. Double-click.
Note:  Removing a font deletes the corresponding files from your hard disk
unless they are needed by the Windows Adobe Type Manager.  For more information
about the Windows Adobe Type Manager, see the online Windows Programs in OS/2
book located in the Information folder.


Keyboard    70/2
Plug and Play for PCMCIA also allows you to start applications automatically when their objects (icons) are registered to a PC card type.


The Keyboard object is used to adjust the blink rate of the cursor, change the
To open the Plug and Play for PCMCIA object:
speed at which a key repeats when held down, and customize the keyboard to make
#Open OS/2 System.
it easier to use for those with special needs.
#Open System Setup.
To customize the keyboard:
#Open Plug and Play for PCMCIA.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Keyboard.
  4. Select the tab for the setting you want to change.
  5. Point to the title-bar icon.
  6. Double-click.
Note:  If the keyboard speed is set in Windows, when that WIN-OS/2 session is
started, the keyboard speed for the entire system is reset and remains reset
even after that WIN-OS/2 session is closed.
Select the Special Needs tab to change the settings to meet your special
requirements.  For example, you can make keys "sticky" so that you can press
and release a series of keys (for example, Ctrl+Alt+Del) sequentially but have
the keys operate as if the keys were pressed and released at the same time.
To enable sticky keys:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Keyboard.
  4. Select Special Needs.
  5. Select the Settings activation On radio button.
  6. For each key you want to act as a sticky key, press Shift three times;
      then press the key you want to stay stuck down.
  7. Repeat the previous step for each key that you want to operate as a sticky
      key.
  8. Point to the title-bar icon.
  9. Double-click.
To deactivate sticky keys, press and release each sticky key once.


  Add Programs    71/2
===Socket and Card Information 108/4===
The Plug and Play for PCMCIA window displays the following information:
No.          Socket number.
Card Type    Card-type icon and text.
  Card Status  Card-status icon and text.


Some programs do not place a program object in a folder or on the Desktop during
===Card Types 109/4===
their installation. Without the object, you cannot use the Workplace Shell to
  o  Booted
start the program. To correct this situation, you can use the Add Programs
  o Communication - for the following card types:
object. Add Programs uses a database to identify possible programs, set the
          3270          5250
correct DOS settings, and select an appropriate program object for the newly
          Ethernet      LAN
added OS/2, DOS, and Windows programs.
          SDLC          Token Ring
You can create your own database to be used with Add Programs.  For more
  o  Hard Disk
information, see the OS/2 Tutorial, the help information provided with Add
  o I/O - for multi-function, parallel, and SCSI card types.
Programs or the Master Help Index.
  o Memory
To add programs to the Desktop:
  o Modem, Serial
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Add Programs. The Add Programs to the Desktop window appears.
  4. Select Add new programs
  5. Select Ok. A message is displayed when the process is complete.
  6. Select Ok.
  The Add Programs program creates a DOS Programs folder, a Windows Programs
folder, and a Windows Groups folder.
  Some Windows groups contain DOS programs. After you add them to the Desktop,
  these DOS program objects are placed in the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder and also in
a DOS folder if you added DOS programs.
    Tip If your computer had a previous version of the OS/2 operating system,
    you might see a folder on your Desktop with the same name as one of your
    old groups. This folder contains program objects that represent your old
    programs; however, Add Programs also puts these programs and program
    objects in new folders (DOS Programs or Windows Programs folders).
    Use the program objects in these new folders rather than the old group name
    folders because the preselected settings will work best for the performance
    of your program.


  Mouse    72/2
===Card Status 110/4===
o  Empty
o Inserted
o  Ready
o  Not Ready
o  Inserted for Memory


The Mouse object is used to change the behavior of your mouse.  You can:
===Memory Card - Details View 111/4===
  o  Control the speed of the mouse pointer
To receive additional information about an inserted memory card:
  o  Change the look of the pointer
   1. Select the memory card.
  o  Change the length, size and color of the pointer tail
   2. Press Enter.
  o  Change the mouse for left-hand use
The Memory Card - Details View appears with the following information:
  o  Customize the Alt, Shift, and Ctrl key combinations
;Card information:Vendor name and card description data retrieved from card.
  o  Change the length and look of the mouse pointer tail
;Write protect:Yes or no.
Note:  You can change the speed of your mouse for your Windows sessions using
;Battery:Good, low, or dead.
the Windows Control Panel. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive
;Region:Region of card memory for memory devices such as SRAM.
demonstration of how to customize mouse settings.
To change the mouse settings:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Mouse.
Use the Timings page to change the speed at which actions occur when you use
the mouse. Use the Setup page to customize the mouse for left-hand use or
right-hand use. If you change the setting, the button settings on the Mappings
page are automatically updated; however, you also can use the Mappings page to
customize them individually. Use the Comet Cursor page to change the length and
look of the mouse pointer's tail.
    Tip Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can
    reconfigure the operating system to support another pointing device without
    having to reinstall the entire operating system (see Selective Install).


  Scheme Palette   73/2+
===I/O Card - Details View 112/4===
To receive additional information about an inserted I/O-type card:
  1. Select the appropriate card.
  2. Press Enter.
The I/O Card - Details View appears with the following information:
  Card information    Vendor name and card description data retrieved from card.
Assigned resources  System resources used by this PC card:
      IRQ   Interrupt request level.
      I/O    Input/output ports.


The Scheme Palette contains many different predefined color schemes. Each scheme
===Options 113/3+===
has a preset color for the following:
The Options menu bar choice has two selections, Customize and Register Object. The Customize option allows you to turn a beep on and off, display the Plug and Play for PCMCIA window when a PC card is used, and keep Plug and Play for PCMCIA visible when other applications are running in the foreground.
  o  Desktop
The Register Object option allows you to register objects to be launched (started or opened) when a specific type of PC card is used. (It is not necessary to have a card inserted when registering objects.) If more than one object is registered to the same card type or the manual option is selected, the Object Launcher window is displayed where you can select which registered object to launch.
  o  Titles of the objects on the Desktop and in folders
  o  Different parts of the windows such as push buttons, scroll bars, and the
      background.
You can use these schemes as they are, or you can change their colors. In
addition, you can also use the Scheme Palette to change the width of the
borders around the windows, and the font used.


Changing Color Schemes    74/3
Note: Objects can be launched only after Plug and Play for PCMCIA is opened.


To use a predefined scheme to change the colors of one folder or window:
===Customize 114/4===
   1. Open OS/2 System.
To use the Customize window:
   2. Open System Setup.
   1. Select Options.
   3. Open Scheme Palette.
   2. Select Customize.
  4. Make sure that the folder or window you want to change is visible.
   3. To display the Plug and Play for PCMCIA window whenever a PC card is
   5. Point to a scheme on the palette.
      inserted, removed, ready, or not ready, select the appropriate check box
   6. Press and hold mouse button 2.
      under Display window.
   7. Drag the color scheme to the window.
   4. To hear a beep whenever a PC card is inserted, removed, ready, or not
  8. Release mouse button 2. The window colors change to the new scheme.
      ready, select the appropriate check box under Beep.
   5. To keep the Plug and Play for PCMCIA icon or window in the foreground
      (visible) when running another application, select Yes.
   6. To return to the original default settings, select Defaults.
  Note:  Plug and Play for PCMCIA must be open for your selections to become
active.


  Globally Changing Color Schemes   75/3
===Register Object 115/4===
 
To register an object:
To use one of the predefined schemes to change the colors for all the folders
  1. Select Options.
that do not have their colors individually set:
  2. Select Register Object.
  3. Click on the down arrow to the right of the Select a card type field to
      display a list of available card types.
  4. Select the desired card type.
  5. Drag a copy of each object that you want to register to this card type to
      the Object List field. The name of the object appears in the list.  (If
      you have registered more than one object for this card type, see also
      Object Launcher.)
   6. Select Automatically or Manually to indicate how you would like the object
      to be launched.  (If you have selected Manually, see also Object
      Launcher.)
  7. Select any of the choices under When card is to indicate when you would
      like to launch the object.
      Note:  The Ready and Not ready choices work only with I/O card types.
  8. To return to the original default settings, select Defaults.
To deregister an object:
  1. Select the object to be removed from the Object List.
  2. Select Remove.
      Note:  Selecting Remove does not affect the original object.
 
===Object Launcher 116/3===
The Object Launcher is displayed when Plug and Play for PCMCIA is open and one
or both of the following occurs:
  o  More than one object is registered for the inserted PC card type.
  o  Manually is selected under Launch Choices.
To launch an object:
  1. Select the object to launch.
  2. Select Launch.
 
===Selective Uninstall 117/2===
The Selective Uninstall program allows you to remove operating system files, programs, and device drivers from your hard disk. You might want to uninstall files to free hard disk space for other programs.
Warning: Do not remove operating system files, programs, or device drivers from your hard disk unless you have backed up the operating system (as it was originally installed). Use the BACKUP.EXE program from the utility diskettes you created with "Create Utility Diskettes" program to back up your system. After system files, programs, or device drivers are removed, they are unavailable for future use.
You can recover files, programs, or device drivers that you delete (as they were originally installed) only by using the RESTORE.EXE file from the Utility Diskettes you created.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open System Setup.
   3. Open Scheme Palette.
   3. Locate the Selective Uninstall object inside the System Setup folder.
   4. Point to a scheme on the palette.
   4. Open Selective Uninstall.  The Selective Uninstall window appears.
   5. Press and hold Alt.
For information about Selective Uninstall, press F1. Or, place the mouse pointer on the Help push button and click once.  To close the Help window, press Esc.
   6. Press and hold mouse button 2.
   1. To make a selection, press the Tab key until your choice is highlighted;
  7. Drag the color scheme to the Desktop.
      then press the Spacebar. A check mark (/) appears in the box next to your
  8. Release mouse button 2.
      choice. Or, place the mouse pointer on the check box beside a choice and
   9. Release Alt.  The colors change to the new scheme.
      click once.
 
   2. The More push button next to some choices indicates that a secondary
Changing the Colors on the Scheme Palette    76/3
      window containing more choices associated with your selection is
      available. After you select a choice, the More push button is highlighted.
      Select More to display a list of items you can choose to remove.
      Warning: When you select More, all items in the associated choices l  ist
      are checked. Make sure you remove the check marks from those items that
      you do not want to delete from your hard disk.
      For information about the items in the window, press F1. Or, place the
      mouse pointer on the Help push button and click once.
   3. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove operating system features
      from your hard disk.
    Adobe Type Manager
    Your hard disk contains the Adobe Type Manager program.  The program runs
    in the WIN-OS/2 environment.  Adobe Type Manager uses PostScript[**]
    outline font technology to produce the sharpest possible type on the screen
    and on the printed page.
    If you intend to use Adobe Type Manager, do not choose to uninstall Fonts.
    For more information about using Adobe Type Manager, see the online Windows
    Programs in OS/2 located in the Information folder on the desktop.


To change the colors within a scheme on the Scheme Palette:
===Create Utility Diskettes 118/2===
The OS/2 operating system comes installed on your hard disk. Your computer has a program that creates diskettes called Utility Diskettes. Create these diskettes to help you correct problems if you cannot start your computer from the hard disk.
The Utility Diskettes also allow you to start the procedure that backs up the operating system to diskettes. Backup diskettes allow you to restore OS/2 to your hard disk in the event of a computer problem.
To complete this procedure, you will need three blank, high-density (2MB) diskettes for a 1.44MB drive, or one extended-density (4MB) diskette for a 2.88MB drive.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open System Setup.
   3. Open Scheme Palette.
   3. Open Create Utility Diskettes. The Create Utility Diskettes window
  4. Select the scheme on the Scheme Palette that you want to change.
       appears.
  5. Select Edit Scheme.
       For information about Create Utility Diskettes, press F1.  Or, place the
  6. Select the part of the window (in the Window area field) whose color you
       mouse pointer on the Help push button and click once. To close the Help
       want to change.
       window, press Esc.
  7. Select Edit Color. A window appears in which you can make adjustments to
   4. Select the drive where the Utility Diskettes will be createdIf you
       or change the color.  (For more information about the choices available in
       select drive A, insert a blank diskette into drive A.
       this window, select the Help push button.)
  5. Type C. Or, place the mouse pointer on the Create push button and click
  8. Adjust the color until the correct color appears in the box on the color
      once.  Follow the instructions on the screen to prepare Utility Diskettes.
       bar in the window.
      Label the first diskette you create Utility Diskette 1, the second
   9. Point to the title-bar icon.
      diskette Utility Diskette 2, and the third diskette Utility Diskette 3.
  10. Double-clickThe selected window part changes to the new color on the
      Store the diskettes in a safe place.
       Scheme Palette.
  11. When all the color changes have been made, point to the title-bar icon.
  12. Double-click.
    Tip You can point to an area on the sample palette and click mouse button 2
    to select the part of the window to be changed, instead of using the Window
    area field to select it. This reduces the amount of scrolling needed to
    find the correct window part.


Changing the Fonts in a Scheme    77/3
===Starting Objects Automatically 119/1+===
The Startup folder contains objects that you want to automatically start every time the system starts.
This chapter describes how to use the Startup folder to start objects. It also describes how to customize your system startup by placing variables in your CONFIG.SYS file.


To change the font of text within the scheme:
===Starting Programs Automatically 120/2+===
  1. Open OS/2 System.
You can start programs automatically at system startup using a Startup folder, a STARTUP.CMD file, or both. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to use the Startup folder.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Scheme Palette.
  4. Select the scheme on the Scheme Palette that you want to change.
  5. Select Edit Scheme.
  6. Select the part of the window (in the Window area field) whose font you
      want to change.
  7. Select Edit Font.
  8. Select the name, style, size, and emphasis that you want to use.
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
  10. Double-click.  The font of the selected window part changes on the Scheme
      Palette.  For more information about fonts, see Font Palette.
    Tip To display a colorful picture (bit map) on the background of your
    folder windows or the Desktop folder:
      1. Display the pop-up menu for a folder.
      2. Select Settings.
      3. Select the Background tab.
      4. Select the Image radio button in the Background type field.
      5. Select the arrow to the right of the Image File field.
      6. Select a file with a .BMP file-name extension.
    The image appears in the background of your folder.


Sound    78/2
===Startup Folder 121/3===
 
You can place objects of frequently used programs and batch files in a Startup folder so that every time you start your computer, the programs and batch files will start. The objects in the Startup folder are started when the Desktop folder is opened at system startup. You cannot specify the order in which the objects in the folder are started.
The Sound object is used by an application to generate a warning beep. The beep
You should place a shadow of the program objects in the Startup folder instead of the original object. This ensures that any changes made to the original object are applied to the object in the Startup folder.
can be turned off.
To create a shadow of an object and place it in the Startup folder:
You can indicate whether a beep should be heard when a warning message is
   1. Point to the object.
displayed or an invalid key is pressed.  To customize the sound settings:
   2. Press and hold Ctrl+Shift.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
   2. Open System Setup.
  4. Drag the object to the Startup folder.
   3. Open Sound.
  5. Release mouse button 2.
Note:  If you install OS/2 Multimedia additional sound options are available.
  6. Release the Ctrl and Shift keys.
For more information, see the online Multimedia book.


Spooler    79/2+
===STARTUP.CMD File 122/3===
A STARTUP.CMD file is similar to the Startup folder in that it is used to automatically start programs and batch files at system startup. If a STARTUP.CMD file is present, it will be run prior to the starting of the Desktop. For more information about creating and running a STARTUP.CMD file, refer to the online Command Reference.


The Spooler stores jobs that are waiting for an available printer or port.  OS/2
===Preventing Automatic Startup 123/2===
includes a spooler for printouts you request in OS/2, DOS, and Windows sessions
Programs located in the Startup folder or programs running at the time the computer was shut down will automatically start when the computer is restarted.
(an instance of a command prompt or started program).
To prevent these programs from starting:
When you print, the system creates a spool file which is held in place in the
  1. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the computer.
SPOOL directory.  The SPOOL directory is created by the system during
  2. When you see the Desktop animation (similar to an exploding box), press
installationYou can use the Spooler object to change the location of the
      and hold Ctrl+Shift+F1.
spooler path and to disable or enable the spooler.
  3. Hold the keys for approximately 15 seconds, or until the Desktop appears.
      (If the hard disk light stops flashing during this time, your computer
      might be suspendedRelease the keys quickly, and then resume holding the
      keys until the Desktop objects appear.)


  Enabling the Spooler   80/3
===Customizing Your CONFIG.SYS for Startup 124/2===
 
You can customize the way your Workplace Shell starts by changing the system variables at either a command prompt or in the CONFIG.SYS file. Precede each of the variables with the SET command.
To enable the spooler:
The system variables for the Workplace Shell are:
AUTOSTART            Determines the parts of the Workplace Shell that are
                      automatically started.  Eliminating any of the options
                      from the statement restricts the user from accessing
                      portions of the Shell.  For example:
                      SET AUTOSTART=FOLDERS, PROGRAMS, TASKLIST, CONNECTIONS
      FOLDERS          Allows a user to open additional folders after startup.
      PROGRAMS          Allows a user to open additional programs after startup.
      TASKLIST          Allows a user to open the Window List.
      CONNECTIONS      Recreates the network connections established during the
                        last log on.
      LAUNCHPAD        Creates a new LaunchPad on the Desktop.
  OS2_SHELL            Sets the command processor for OS/2 sessions.  For
                      example:
                      SET OS2_SHELL=C:\OS2\CMD.EXE
RESTARTOBJECTS      Sets the objects that will be automatically started by the
                      Workplace Shell.  For example:
                      SET RESTARTOBJECTS=STARTUPFOLDERSONLY
      YES Starts all the objects that were running at the time of shutdown and
      all objects in the Startup folder.  This is the default.
      NO Does not start any of the applications that were running at the time of
      shutdown and does not start the objects in the Startup folder.
      STARTUPFOLDERSONLY Starts only those objects in the Startup folder.
      REBOOTONLY Starts objects only when the Workplace Shell is started by
      pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del or turning on the computer.
RUNWORKPLACE        Sets the interface that is started by the OS/2 operating
                      system. PMSHELL.EXE is the program for the Workplace Shell
                      interface.  For example:
                      SET RUNWORKPLACE=C:\OS2\PMSHELL.EXE
SYSTEM_INI          Determines the INI file to be used by the Workplace Shell
                      for system information about such items as default colors
                      and printer drivers. For example:
                      SET SYSTEM_INI=C:\OS2\OS2SYS.INI
USER_INI            Determines the INI file to be used by the Workplace Shell
                      for system information about such items as program
                      defaults, display options, and file options.  For example:
                      SET USER_INI=C:\OS2\OS2.INI
For more information about customizing the user interface, refer to the online
Command Reference.
The DISKCACHE statement in the CONFIG.SYS file is set up so that it
automatically runs the CHKDSK program upon startup if the system shuts down
improperly.  The CHKDSK program analyzes and fixes disk problems caused by the
improper shutdown.
If you add hard disk drives or partitions after the installation of the OS/2
operating system, you should edit the CONFIG.SYS file and update the AC:x
parameter to reflect the new additions. AC: starts the auto-check feature on
the specified drives when the system shuts down improperly.  The value x
represents the letters of the disks or partitions on the system that you want
to check.
For example, if you want to check disks C and D and your existing DISKCACHE statement is:
DISKCACHE=64,LW
Add the AC: parameter to the statement as follows:
DISKCACHE=64,LW,AC:CD
For more information about the DISKCACHE statement, refer to the online Command Reference.
 
===Using Disk Drives 125/1+===
This chapter describes how to use the Drives folder to access and use the different types of storage media installed in your computer.
When opened, the Drives folder provides a view of all drive objects in the system. For example, the following drive types could be accessed from the Drives folder:
   o  Diskette
  o  Hard disk
  o  CD-ROM
  o  Tape backup
  o  Optical disc
  o  PCMCIA
To view the Drive objects:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open Drives.
   3. Open Spooler.
Note:  Drive objects cannot be copied.
  4. Point to the title-bar icon.
 
   5. Click mouse button 2.
===About Hard Disks and Diskettes 126/2===
  6. Select Disable spooler
There are two kinds of disks:
  7. Point to the title-bar icon.
Hard disk  A non-removable disk that is built into a hard-disk drive.  Hard
   8. Double-click.  (Spooling takes effect immediately.  You do not need to
            disks come in a variety of capacities and can hold large amounts of
      restart your system.)
            information.  (Capacity is the maximum amount of information that a
            diskette or disk can hold.)
            Information can be stored on and erased from the disk over and over
            again.  The computer can write to and read information from the
            hard disk much faster than it can from a diskette.
Diskette   A removable disk that can be inserted in and removed from a
            diskette drive.  Diskettes come in a variety of capacities.
            Diskettes cannot hold as much information as a hard disk.
            Information can be stored on and erased from the diskette over and
            over again.  The computer cannot write to or read information from
            a diskette as fast as it can from a hard disk.  There are two sizes
            of diskettes, 5.25" and 3.5":
  o  5.25-inch diskettes are thin, flexible, and somewhat fragile.  A 5.25-inch
      diskette has a write-protect notch located on the right side. You can
      place a write-protect tab over the notch to protect the information stored
      on the diskette.
      To store information on or erase information from the diskette, you must
      remove the write-protect tab from the diskette.
   o  3.5-inch diskettes are protected by a hard plastic cover that makes them
      more durable.  A 3.5-inch diskette can be write protected by sliding a
      built-in tab to reveal the write-protect opening.
      To store information on or erase information from the diskette, you must
      slide the tab over the write-protect opening on the diskette.
            Note:  If a diskette does not have a write-protect notch or tab,
            the diskette is permanently write protected.  Many software
            manufacturers use permanently write-protected diskettes to prevent
            the information on the diskettes from being accidentally changed or
            deleted.
The capacity of a diskette and a hard disk is measured in bytes. A diskette
must be formatted at a capacity less than or equal to the capacity of the
diskette drive in order for the diskette and the drive to be compatible.  So
even though a diskette is the correct size physically, its capacity might not
be compatible with the diskette drive in the computer.
For example, a 3.5-inch diskette drive designed to work with 2.88MB diskettes
can use 1.44MB diskettes, but a 1.44MB diskette drive cannot use a 2.88MB
diskette. The following terms are used to describe the capacity of disks and
the size of files:
Byte        Amount of space it takes to store a character.
Kilobyte   1024 bytes and is abbreviated as KB.
Megabyte    1024KB (approximately a million bytes) and is abbreviated as MB.
  Gigabyte    1024MB (approximately a billion bytes) and is abbreviated as GB.
The following terms are equivalent:
1MB = 1024KB = 1048576 bytes
Each diskette drive and hard disk drive in a computer has a letter assigned to
it.  This letter is the name that both you and the computer use to identify the
driveFor example, on many computers the diskette drive is called drive A and
the hard disk drive is called drive C.
 
===Accessing Hard Disks and Diskettes 127/2+===
You can use the Drives folder to access the information on your hard disk and diskette drives.  This allows you to view disk information, display the files on the disks, and copy and move files. The files can be viewed as objects so they can easily be copied and moved with the mouse.


Changing the Spooler Path    81/3
Tip For specific instructions on using the Drive A object, see Drive A.


Use this procedure if you print often, or if you print large jobs and need a
===Viewing Disk Information 128/3===
separate storage area, such as a large disk, for spool files. Be sure to wait
To view the size of a disk:
until all your jobs finish printing, or delete any pending jobs.
To change the spooler path:
  1. Select all the printer objects.
  2. Select Hold from the pop-up menu of each printer object.
  3. Open OS/2 System.
  4. Open System Setup.
  5. Open Spooler.  By default, the Spooler Settings notebook appears.
  6. Select Spool path.
  7. In the Spool path field, type the new path.
  8. Point to the title-bar icon.
  9. Double-click.
 
Changing the Print Priority    82/3
 
You can set the print priority higher or lower to adjust the speed at which
spooled print jobs are printed.
To set the print priority:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open Drives.
   3. Open Spooler.  By default, the Spooler Settings notebook appears.
   3. Open the drive object you want information about.
  4. Select the Print priority page.
  5. Move the slider arm to select priority.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.


  Disabling the Spooler    83/3
===Displaying Objects 129/3===
 
The drive objects are used to display the contents of the drives on your
You might want to disable the spooler to print jobs that have a high-security
computer. The contents of the drive can be displayed in three different views:
riskDisabling the spooler prevents others from viewing your print jobs in a
Icon view    Displays the contents of the disk as icons.  This is the default
printer-object windowHowever, you cannot disable spooling to a network
              if the disk does not have folders (directories).
printer on a network server.
Tree view    Displays the contents of the disk in a tree.  This is the default
To disable the spooler:
              if the disk has folders (directories)A plus (+) sign to the
              left of a folder indicates that additional folders exist inside
              the folderBy selecting the plus sign, you can see the other
              folders in the folder.  Pointing to a folder and double-clicking
              displays the contents of the folder in an icon view.
              Note:  When an additional folder is opened from a folder that is
              in tree view, if the default for the additional folder is also
              tree view, it is overridden and displayed in an icon view.  There
              is no need to open it again in tree view because it is already
              shown in the parent folder's tree view.
Details view  Displays the contents of the disk in a table with the following
              additional information:
  o  Icon
  o  Title
  o  Real name
  o  Size
  o  Last write date and time
  o  Last access date and time
  o  Creation date and time
  o  Flags
To display the contents of a drive as icons:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open Drives.
   3. Open Spooler.
   3. Point to the object that you want to display.
  4. Point to the title-bar icon.
   4. Click mouse button 2.
   5. Click mouse button 2.
   5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
   6. Select Enable spooler.
   6. Select Icon view.
  7. Restart your system.
  To display the contents of a drive in a tree view:
When the Spooler is disabled, your print jobs go directly to a printer.
However, a printout might contain material from different jobs mixed together.
 
System   84/2+
 
The System object is used to change system defaults. You can select how you
want a window that is already open to be displayed and where you want windows
that you have minimized to be displayed.  This notebook is also used to specify
confirmation messages and to turn off the product information window. For more
information about each tab, select the help push button provided on each page.
 
  Confirming Delete Actions    85/3
 
To specify if you want a confirmation message displayed each time you delete an
object or a folder:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open Drives.
   3. Open System.
   3. Point to the object that you want to display.
   4. Select the Confirmations tab.
   4. Click mouse button 2.
   5. Place a check mark next to each item you want a confirmation message for.
   5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
   6. Point to the title-bar icon.
   6. Select Tree view.
   7. Double-click.
  7. If a plus (+) sign appears to the left of a folder, select it to expand
 
      the contents.
  Directing Keyboard and Mouse Activity    86/3
   8. To display the contents of a folder, point to the folder; then
 
      double-click.
To enable or disable the direction of any keyboard and mouse activity during the
  To display details about the contents of a drive:
startup of any Presentation Manager program.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open Drives.
   3. Open System.
   3. Point to the object that you want to display.
   4. Select the Input tab.
   4. Click mouse button 2.
   5. Place a check mark next to Enable type ahead or Disable type ahead. (The
   5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
      default is Enable type ahead.)
   6. Select Details view.
   6. Point to the title-bar icon.
   7. Select the scroll bars at the bottom and side of the window to scroll the
   7. Double-click.
      information.


  Resolving Title Conflicts   87/3
===Copying Objects 130/3===
Note: If you want to copy the object to a folder object or another drive object, the target object must be visible before you start the copy.
To copy an object from a drive to another location:
  1. Open the drive containing the object you want to copy.
  2. Point to the object you want to copy.
  3. Press and hold Ctrl.
  4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  5. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
  6. Release mouse button 2.
  7. Release Ctrl.
To copy an object from another location to a drive:
  1. Point to the object you want to copy.
  2. Press and hold Ctrl.
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the object to the drive object.
  5. Release mouse button 2.
  6. Release Ctrl.


To specify how the system is to respond to title conflicts if you create, copy,
===Moving Objects 131/3===
or move an object into a folder that already has an object with the same name:
There are times when you need to move an object (copy the object to a different location and delete it from the original location).
  1. Open OS/2 System.
Note:  If you want to move the object to a folder object or another drive object, the target object must be visible before you start the move.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open System.
  4. Select the Title tab.
  5. Select the choice that best describe how you want the system to respond
      when a title conflict appears.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.


Changing System Defaults   88/3
To move an object from a drive to another location:
  1. Open the drive containing the object you want to move.
  2. Point to the object you want to move.
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
  5. Release mouse button 2.
To move an object from another location to a drive:
  1. Point to the object you want to move.
  2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  3. Drag the mouse to the drive object.
  4. Release mouse button 2.


To change the system defaults for a window:
===Deleting Objects from a Drive 132/3===
   1. Open OS/2 System.
You can delete (erase) unwanted objects from a drive.
   2. Open System Setup.
To delete an object from a drive:
   3. Open System.
   1. Open the drive.
   4. Select the Window tab.
   2. Point to the object you want to delete.
  5. Select the choices that best describe how you want the windows to behave.
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
   4. Drag the object to the Shredder.
   7. Double-click.
   5. Release mouse button 2.


  Printing a Screen   89/3
===Formatting a Disk 133/2===
You can format a disk. When a disk is formatted, it is checked for defects and prepared to accept data. During this process, all existing data is erased from the disk.
Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to format a diskette.
Note:  Before you format a disk, make sure that it does not contain any information that is important.
  To format a disk:
  1. Point to the disk you want to format.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
   3. Select Format disk.
  4. When the Format Disk window appears, type a Volume Label (name for the
      disk).
  5. Select the type of file system (FAT or HPFS) you want to use on the disk.
      (For more information about these file systems, see the Master Help
      Index).
  6. Select Format.
  7. When the format is complete, select OK.


To be able to print the information in an open window:
===Checking a Disk 134/2===
   1. Open OS/2 System.
You can check a disk for:
   2. Open System Setup.
  o  Defects, which are errors in the file allocation table or directory on the
   3. Open System.
      disk.  If you select Write corrections to disk, any problems found will be
   4. Select the Print Screen tab.
      fixed.
   5. Select Enable.
  o  Current usage, which is the amount of the disk used for directories, user
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
      files, and extended attributes.  It also indicates the amount of space
  7. Double-click.
      that is reserved on the disk.
To print the open window:
  o  File system type, which is the type of file system on the disk.
   1. Select the open window.
  o  Total disk space, which is the capacity of the disk in bytes.
  2. Press Print Screen.
   o  Total amount of disk space available, which is the amount of free space
      left on the disk.
Note:  You cannot check a disk that is currently being used or is locked by another process (for example, the disk that OS/2 is running on).
To check a disk:
  1. Point to the drive that you want to check.
   2. Click mouse button 2.
   3. Select Check disk.
   4. Select Write corrections to disk.
   5. Select Check. When the check is done, the Check Disk &dash. Results
      window is displayed.
   6. Select Cancel to remove the window.


Displaying Logos    90/3
===Drive A 135/2+===
 
The Drive A object provides quick access to the diskette drive in your computer referred to as A.
To specify if you want a logo to be displayed and how long to display it:
You can use the Drive A object to:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
*Display the objects on a diskette
  2. Open System Setup.
*Display information about the objects on the diskette
  3. Open System.
*Copy objects on a diskette to another location
  4. Select the Logo tab.
*Copy objects from another location to a diskette
  5. Select the choices that best describes how you want the system to handle
*Move objects on a diskette to another location
      product information and logos.
*Move objects from another location to a diskette
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
*Delete objects from a diskette
  7. Double-click.
*Format a diskette
*Check a diskette for defects and fix it
Note: The Drive A object cannot be copied.


Changing Screen Resolution    91/3
This chapter discusses only the Drive A object. For information about other drive objects and a discussion about disks and diskettes, see Using Disk Drives.


To change the screen resolution for an XGA* display adapter:
===Displaying the Objects on a Diskette 136/3===
  1. Open OS/2 System.
To display the objects on a diskette:
  2. Open System Setup.
#Place a diskette into diskette drive A.
  3. Open System.
#Open Drive A.
  4. Select the Screen tab.
The Drive A window appears showing the contents of the diskette. The actual layout of the window that appears depends upon the contents of the diskette.
  5. Select the resolution you want to use.
  Tree view  Displays the objects on the diskette in a directory (tree)
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
            structure with folders representing the directoriesThis view
  7. Double-click.
            comes up when the objects on the diskette are placed in
  Note:  The Screen tab will not appear if you are using the VGA, 8514, or SVGA
            directories.
driver.
            To view the contents of a directory, point to a folder and
    Tip After changing screen resolutions from a higher resolution to a lower
            double-click.
    resolution, some applications might open windows that are partially off the
Icon view  Displays the objects on the diskette as pictures (icons). This
    screenIf this occurs:
            view comes up when all the objects on the diskette are in the root
      1. Press Alt+Spacebar.
            directory.
      2. Select Move.
      3. Use the mouse or the arrow keys to move the window.
      4. Click mouse button 1 or press Enter.
    or:
      1. Point to an empty area on the Desktop.
      2. Click mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the same time.
      3. Point to the name of the program.
      4. Click mouse button 2.
      5. Select Tile or Cascade.  The window will now appear on the screen.


  System Clock   92/2
===Displaying Information about the Objects on a Diskette 137/2===
The tree and icon views give limited information about the objects on a diskette. However, the details view gives the following information about the objects on the diskette:
Title of the object  Name that appears below the icon that represents the
                      object.
Real name of object  Actual name of the object.
Size                  Amount of space in bytes that the object occupies.
Last write date      Date that the information in the object was last changed.
Last write time      Time of day that the information in the object was last
                      changed.
Last access date      Date that the information in the object was last viewed.
Last access time      Time of day that the information in the object was last
                      viewed.
Creation date        Date that the object was first created.
  Creation time        Time that the object was first created.
Flags                Characteristics of the file that allow it to be used in a
                      certain way.
To display detailed information about the objects on a diskette:
   1. Place a diskette into drive A.
  2. Open Drive A.
  3. Point to the title-bar icon.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
  6. Select Details view.


The System Clock object is used to set the system date and time or to set an
===Copying Objects to or from a Diskette 138/2===
alarm. You can display the clock in either analog or digital mode.
There are times when you need to copy an object (duplicate the object and place it in a different location).
To set the system clock:
Note: If you want to copy the object to a folder object or another drive object, the target object must be visible before you start the copy.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
To copy an object from a diskette in Drive A to another location:
   2. Open System Setup.
   1. Place a diskette into drive A.
   3. Select System Clock.
   2. Open Drive A.
   4. Display the pop-up menu for System Clock.
   3. Point to the object you want to copy.
   5. Select Settings.
   4. Press and hold Ctrl.
   6. Select the tab for the setting you want to change.
   5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
   7. Select View; change to the View page if necessary(To view a different
   6. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
      View page, use an arrow at the lower-right corner of the window.)
   7. Release mouse button 2.
   8. Point to the title-bar icon.
  8. Release Ctrl.
   9. Double-click.
  To copy an object from another location to a diskette in Drive A:
  1. Place the diskette you want to copy the object to into drive A.
   2. Point to the object you want to copy.
  3. Press and hold Ctrl.
  4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
   5. Drag the mouse to the Drive A object.
  6. Release mouse button 2.
  7. Release Ctrl.


WIN-OS/2 Setup    93/2
===Moving Objects to or from a Diskette 139/2===
 
There are times when you need to move an object (copy the object to a different location and delete it from the original location).
The WIN-OS/2 Setup object is used to select a public or private clipboard or
Note: If you want to move the object to a folder object or another drive object, the target object must be visible before you start the move.
dynamic data exchange (DDE).  The clipboard and DDE are features that allow data
To move an object from the diskette in Drive A to another location:
exchange between programs.  You also can use this object to preselect WIN-OS/2
  1. Place a diskette into drive A.
settings for all Windows programs before you start them. Use the Fast load
  2. Open Drive A.
setting to automatically start a WIN-OS/2 session when you start OS/2. If you
  3. Point to the object you want to move.
change a setting, the change affects only subsequent Windows programs that are
  4. Press and hold Shift.
started. Programs that are currently running are not affected.
  5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
If you are using Windows programs that can share information using the clipboard
  6. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
or Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) feature, then you can change the way these
  7. Release mouse button 2.
features work in all WIN-OS/2 sessions.
  8. Release Shift.
Note:  Be sure you check with the instructions that came with your program to
Note: When moving an object from a diskette, the Shift key must be used with mouse button 2.
determine if these features are supported.
To move an object from another location to the diskette in Drive A:
The clipboard is an area that temporarily holds data.  Data is placed in the
   1. Place the diskette you want to move the object to into drive A.
clipboard by selecting cut or copy from a menu.  You can cut (move) or copy
   2. Point to the object you want to move.
data from one document and paste it into another document, even if the other
   3. Press and hold Shift.
document is in a different program. For example, you can place a spreadsheet
   4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
from one program into a document from another program.
   5. Drag the object to the Drive A object.
The DDE feature enables the exchange of data between programs. Any change made
   6. Release mouse button 2.
to information in one file is applied to the same information in an associated
   7. Release Shift.
file. In the example above, if changes are made to the original spreadsheet,
Note:  When moving an object to a diskette, the Shift key must be used with mouse button 2.
corresponding changes are made to the spreadsheet in the document. If changes
are made to the spreadsheet in the document, corresponding changes are made to
the original spreadsheet.
The clipboard and DDE can be set to Public or Private. When DDE is set to
Public, information can be shared with OS/2 and WIN-OS/2 sessions. Information
cannot be shared with DOS sessions. When the clipboard or DDE is set to
Private, sharing data between sessions is restricted. This means that only
information for those programs running in that single session can be shared.
When OS/2 is installed, the clipboard and DDE are set to Public.
Windows programs that have the clipboard or DDE feature are set up during
installation of the OS/2 operating system to use a Public setting for all
WIN-OS/2 sessions. You can use the WIN-OS/2 Setup object to set these features
to private. You can further customize the way you use these features by using
the Settings notebook of the program object.
Note: Changing the clipboard and DDE features to Private will not affect the
performance of your Windows programs.
To change the clipboard or DDE feature to Private:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   3. Open WIN-OS/2 Setup.
   4. Select Data Exchange.
   5. Select Private for Dynamic Data Exchange or Clipboard.
   6. Point to the title-bar icon.
   7. Double-click.
Note:  If you change the settings for the clipboard or DDE while a program is
running in a WIN-OS/2 session, the settings for the program will take effect
immediately.
For related information about the clipboard, DDE, WIN-OS/2, and Windows
Programs, see the Windows Programs in OS/2 located in the online Information
folder or the Master Help Index.


Power   94/2+
===Deleting Objects from a Diskette 140/2===
You can delete (erase) unwanted objects from a diskette.
To delete an object from a diskette:
  1. Place the diskette you want to delete the object from into drive A.
  2. Open Drive A.
  3. Point to the object you want to delete.
   4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  5. Drag the object to the Shredder.
  6. Release mouse button 2.


The Power object manages and tracks power consumption in battery-powered
===Formatting a Diskette 141/2===
computers that support the Advanced Power Management (APM) standard. The APM
You can format a diskette using the Drive A object. When a diskette is formatted, it is checked for defects and prepared to accept data. During this process, all existing data is erased from the diskette.
standard defines the way the hardware and software work together to reduce power
To format a diskette:
consumption and help extend battery life.
  1. Place the diskette you want to format into drive A.
If your computer supports the APM standard, the Power object might be
  2. Point to Drive A.
automatically installed during the OS/2 installation process. If it was not
  3. Click mouse button 2.
installed, you can install it by using Selective Install and selecting Advanced
  4. Select Format disk.
Power ManagementFor information about Selective Install, see Selective
  5. When the Format Disk window appears, type a Volume Label (name for the
Install.
      disk or diskette).
Note:  This power management feature is not available if your computer does not
  6. Select Format.
have APM BIOS or a device driver that emulates APM BIOS.
  7. When the format is complete, select OK.
  OS/2 APM support relies on the power status information returned from the BIOS
 
on your computerYou might notice incorrect battery life or status within the
===Checking a Diskette 142/2===
Power icon on your computer. If this occurs, rely on the LEDs on your computer
You can check a diskette for:
for accurate power status information.
*Defects, which are errors in the file allocation table or directory on the disketteIf you select Write corrections to disk, any problems found will be fixed.
Turning the APM setting to Off also turns off the BIOS power management. If
*Current usage, which is the amount of the diskette used for directories, user files, and extended attributesIt also indicates the amount of space that is reserved on the diskette.
you want to turn off APM, but not the BIOS power management, place REM before
*File system type, which is the type of file system on the diskette(All diskettes are formatted for the FAT file system.)
the APM device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, and then restart your
*Total disk space, which is the capacity of the diskette in bytes.
system to invoke the change.
*Total amount of disk space available, which is the amount of free space left on the diskette.
For example:
To check a diskette:
  REM DEVICE=C:\OS2\APM.SYS
#Place the diskette to be checked into drive A.
#Point to Drive A.
#Click mouse button 2.
#Select Check disk.
#Select Write corrections to disk.
#Select Check.
#After a few seconds, the Check Disk - Results window is displayed. Select Cancel to remove the window.


Power Object    95/3
===Using Command Prompts 143/1+===
The Command Prompts folder contains objects that open DOS, OS/2, and WIN-OS/2 sessions. A session is one instance of a command prompt or started program.
Each session is separate from all other sessions that might be running on the computer.
To open the Command Prompts object:
#Open OS/2 System.
#Open Command Prompts.


To open the Power object:
===OS/2 Command Prompts 144/2===
The OS/2 Full-Screen and OS/2 Window objects are used to access an OS/2 command prompt. At these command prompts, you can start programs and enter OS/2 commands.
For a description of OS/2 commands that can be used at these prompts, see the OS/2 Command Reference in the Information folder.
To start an OS/2 command prompt session:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open Command Prompts.
   3. Open Power.
   3. Open OS/2 Full Screen, OS/2 Window, or both.
  To display the Power pop-up menu:
When you close a session, the session and its related windows are automatically closed. Make sure that you save all important data in the session before you close it.
   1. Point to the Power object.
To close an OS/2 command prompt session:
   2. Click mouse button 1 or 2.
  1. Type Exit.
  2. Press Enter.
You can switch (temporarily leave without closing) from an OS/2 command prompt session to another running program.  When you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then restored when you switch back.
  To temporarily leave an OS/2 command prompt session:
   1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
  2. Point to a title on the Window List.
   3. Double-click.
or:
  1. Press Alt+Esc to switch to another open object.


Power Settings    96/3
===DOS Command Prompts 145/2===
 
The DOS Full-Screen and DOS Window objects are used to access a DOS command prompt. At these command prompts, you can start programs and enter DOS commands.
To set power management support:
For a description of DOS commands that can be used at these prompts, see the OS/2 Command Reference in the Information folder.
  1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
To start a DOS command prompt session:
  2. Select Settings.  The Power - Settings notebook appears.
  3. Select Power.
  4. Set Power management to On or Off.  If set to On, power consumption will
      be reduced and power status will be tracked.  If set to Off, the suspend
      mode, power status, and battery status features are disabled.
  5. Set Confirm on power state changes if you want to confirm requests to go
      to suspend mode.  (See Suspend Mode.)
To set the default status view of the status window:
  1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
  2. Select Settings.  The Power - Settings notebook appears.
  3. Select View.
  4. Select Full status or Battery only for Default status view.
  5. Set Refresh (of the status window) to On or Off.
  6. If you set Refresh to On, select the number of minutes (from 1 to 30) for
      Refresh rate.  The system will automatically update the status window at
      the intervals you specified.
      You can also update the status window by selecting Refresh Now from the
      Power object pop-up menu.
 
Power Status    97/3
 
To display the power status:
  1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
  2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
  3. Select Full status or Battery status.  A full-status Power window or a
      power-gauge Power window is displayed, depending on your selection.
Note:  You cannot change the size of the Power window.
A full-status Power window displays the following information:
  o  Battery life.  This information is displayed as a power gauge that shows
      the power level of the battery compared to the capacity of the battery.
      When the power gauge indicator is completely shaded, the battery is at
      full power.  The shaded area of the gauge moves up or down as the battery
      power level increases or decreases.  When the power gauge indicator is
      dimmed, there is no battery in the computer or the computer cannot provide
      battery information.
  o  Power source for the computer.  If the system cannot determine the power
      source, no power source information is displayed.
  o  Battery state, which is the charge state of the battery.  Battery state
      information is displayed as follows:
          High        Battery charge is OK; continue using your computer.
          Low        Recharge the battery or switch to another power source
                      such as another battery or AC power.
          Critical    Battery charge is depleted.  Recharge the battery or
                      switch to another power source immediately to avoid a
                      system failure or data loss.
          Charging    System is restoring the battery charge.
          Unknown    System cannot determine the battery state or there is no
                      battery in your computer.
 
Suspend Mode    98/3
 
To set the suspend mode:
  1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
  2. Select Suspend.
When suspend mode is activated, battery power is conserved by dimming the
display and turning off devices that are not in use.
If Confirm on power status changes is set in the Power - Settings notebook, a
message is displayed that asks you if you want to continue before switching to
suspend mode.
Note:  Different computers have different procedures for exiting suspend mode
and resuming operation.  Refer to the documentation that came with your
computer for information about its suspend mode features.
After you exit suspend mode, you will notice a startup delay before you can
resume operation of your system.  This delay might be a few seconds, depending
on your system.
 
Selective Install    99/2+
 
The Selective Install object is used to add features that you did not include
when you originally installed the operating system. You also can use the
Selective Install object to change the mouse, display adapter, or country
information for your system.
Note:  You will need the OS/2 installation diskettes for each of the procedures
that follow.
 
Adding Options after Installation    100/3
 
To add options after installation:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open Command Prompts.
   3. Open Selective Install.
   3. Open DOS Full Screen, DOS Window, or both.
  4. Select from the System Configuration window any of the choices that you
When you close a session, the session and its related windows are automatically closed. Make sure that you save all important data in the session before you close it.
      want to change or add.
To close a DOS command prompt session:
   5. Select OK.
  1. Type Exit.
   6. Place a check mark to the left of any feature you want to add. (For more
  2. Press Enter.
      information about a feature, press F1.) If a More push button is
You can switch from a DOS command prompt session to another running program. When you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then restored when you switch back.
      displayed to the right of a feature, select it to see additional choices.
To temporarily leave a DOS command prompt session:
   1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
   2. Point to a title on the Window List.
  3. Double-click.
  or:
  1. Press Alt+Esc to display the Desktop.


  Adding Online Documentation after Installation    101/3
===DOS from Drive A 146/2+===
The DOS from Drive A object is used to start a specific version (3.0 or later) of DOS from a diskette. By using a specific version of DOS, you can use programs that will not run under the DOS provided with OS/2.
Before you can start a specific DOS version from a diskette, you must create the diskette used to start the DOS version.  This diskette is commonly known as a DOS Startup diskette or DOS bootable diskette.


To add online documentation after installation:
===Creating a DOS Startup Diskette 147/3===
   1. Open OS/2 System.
Note:  If you already have a DOS Startup diskette, go to step 6 to make sure the
   2. Open System Setup.
diskette is set up to work correctly with the DOS from Drive A object.
   3. Open Selective Install.
To create a DOS Startup diskette:
   4. Select OK when the System Configuration window is displayed.
   1. Boot your system with a version of DOS. You can use a:
   5. Select the check box to the left of Documentation.
        o  DOS installation diskette
   6. Select More to the right of Documentation.
        o  Hard disk that DOS has been installed on
   7. Select the check box to the left of any documentation units to deselect
        o  Diskette that DOS has been installed on
      the ones you do not want to add.
   2. Type FORMAT A: /S
   8. Select OK.
   3. Place a blank diskette into drive A.
   9. Select Install.
   4. Press Enter.  This transfers the system files to the diskette.
   10. Follow the instructions on the screen.
   5. When the format is complete, remove the diskette.
 
   6. Start OS/2 by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.
  Changing Display Adapter Support    102/3
   7. Select OS/2 System.
 
   8. Select Drives.
To change the display adapter support after installation:
   9. Select Drive C.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
   10. Open the OS/2 folder; then open the MDOS folder.
  2. Open System Setup.
  11. Place the formatted diskette containing the system files into drive A.
  3. Open Selective Install.
  12. Copy the following data-file objects from Drive C to the Drive A object:
  4. Select Primary Display or Secondary Display from the System Configuration
        o  FSFILTER.SYS
       window.
        o FSACCESS.EXE You can copy as many additional DOS files to the
  5. Select the display adapter that you want from the list provided.
          diskette as you want.
  6. Select OK.
  13. Open the Templates folder.
  7. Follow the instructions on the screen.
  14. Copy a Data File object to the Desktop.
 
  15. Point to the data-file object and double-click. The OS/2 System Editor
Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation    103/3
      starts.
  16. Type the following information into the data file:
      DEVICE=FSFILTER.SYS
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\HIMEM.SYS
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\EMM386.SYS
      DOS=HIGH,UMB
      DEVICEHIGH=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS
      FILES=20
       BUFFERS=20
  17. Point to the title-bar icon of the OS/2 System Editor; then double-click.
  18. Select Save as; then type A:\CONFIG.SYS and press Enter.
  19. Point to the data-file object again and double-click.
  20. Type the following information into the data file:
      ECHO OFF
      PROMPT $P$G
      SET COMSPEC=A:\COMMAND.COM
      C:\OS2\MDOS\MOUSE.COM
      PATH A:\
  21. Point to the title-bar icon of the OS/2 System Editor; then double-click.
  22. Select Save as; then type A:\AUTOEXEC.BAT and press Enter.


To add PCMCIA** support after installation:
===Starting DOS from Drive A 148/3===
   1. Open OS/2 System.
To start a DOS from Drive A session:
   2. Open System Setup.
   1. Insert the DOS Startup diskette in drive A.
   3. Open Selective Install.
   2. Open OS/2 System.
   4. Select OK when the System Configuration window is displayed.
   3. Open Command Prompts.
   5. Select the check box to the left of PCMCIA Support to display the Select
   4. Open DOS from Drive A.
      PCMCIA system window.
To close a DOS from Drive A session:
   6. Select the appropriate system (this should either be a direct match with
   1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
      your target install system or a known compatible system).
   2. Point to DOS from Drive A in the Window List.
   7. Select OK.
   3. Click mouse button 2.
   8. Select Install.
   4. Click on Close.
  9. Follow the instructions on the screen.
  You can switch from a DOS from Drive A session to another running program.
 
  When you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then
  PCMCIA    104/2+
restored when you switch back.
 
  To temporarily leave a DOS from Drive A session:
OS/2 provides software support for Personal Computer Memory Card International
  1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
Association (PCMCIA) hardware. PCMCIA is the standard for PC card adapters
  2. Point to a title on the Window List.
associated with portable computers.  A PC card is a small form-factor adapter
  3. Double-click.
about the size and shape of a credit card. You can use PC cards with laptops,
or:
notebooks, tablets, and other portable computer systems that are equipped with a
   1. Press Alt+Esc to display the Desktop.
PCMCIA slot.
 
Installing PCMCIA   105/3


PCMCIA can be automatically installed during OS/2 installation or it can be
===WIN-OS/2 Full Screen 149/2===
installed through Selective Install after OS/2 installation. To install PCMCIA
The WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen object is used to run multiple Windows programs in a full-screen session. For more information about WIN-OS/2, see the online WIN-OS/2 Book located in the Information folder.
support after installation, see Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation.
To start a WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen session:
  1. open the object.
To close a WIN-OS/2 full-screen session:
  1. Point to the title-bar icon.
  2. Double-click.
To switch to the OS/2 Desktop:
  1. Point to the OS/2 Desktop object in the lower left corner of the screen.
  2. Double-click.


  PCMCIA Components   106/3
===Starting Multiple Sessions 150/2===
You can have multiple sessions of any object open.
To open more than one session of an object:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Copy one of the objects (for example, DOS Window) by holding down the Ctrl
      key and mouse button 2 and dragging the object to the same or another
      folder.  Then release the mouse button and the Ctrl key.
  4. Open the object to start the session.
  5. Repeat the steps to create and open another session.
Or, if you need multiple copies of objects often, you can alter the settings of
the object so that it creates another session every time you open it. Do the
following:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Point to the object.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  5. Select Settings.
  6. Select the Window tab.
  7. Select the Create new window radio button.
  8. Close the notebook by double-clicking mouse button 1 on the title-bar
      icon.  Now, each time you select the object a new session starts.


PCMCIA consists of the following services and client device drivers (CDDs):
===Starting and Exiting BASICA and QBASIC 151/2===
  o  Card services - Provide an industry-standard interface layer between the
To start the BASICA or QBASIC programs:
      Client device driver (CDD) and hardware-specific socket services.
NoteBASICA will only run on IBM computers.
  o  Socket services - Provide an industry-standard interface layer across
      hardware platforms for specific chip-set support.
  o  Resource Client - A special-purpose CDD that provides Card Services,
      detailing the resources in use and available at start up.
  o  Modem Card Manager - A generic CDD that provides a Card Manager level of
      support for PCMCIA modem cards.
 
Plug and Play for PCMCIA    107/3+
 
Plug and Play for PCMCIA is an OS/2 application that displays PC card
information, socket status, assigned resources, and card type. There are two
basic types of PC cards:
  o  Memory cards, which contain specific types of memory devices
  o  Input/output (I/O) cards, which contain devices such as modems and disks
Both card types are assigned system resources, which are used to communicate
  with the card's devices.
Plug and Play for PCMCIA also allows you to start applications automatically
when their objects (icons) are registered to a PC card type.
To open the Plug and Play for PCMCIA object:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open System Setup.
   2. Open Command Prompts.
   3. Open Plug and Play for PCMCIA.
   3. Open OS/2 Full Screen, OS/2 Window, DOS Full Screen, or DOS Window.
  4. Type BASICA or QBASIC at the command prompt; then press Enter.
To exit the BASICA program:
  1. Type SYSTEM.
  2. Press Enter.
To exit the QBASIC program:
  1. Select File.
  2. Select Exit.
  3. Select Enter.


Socket and Card Information   108/4
===Cleaning Up Your Desktop 152/1+===
The Minimized Window Viewer is where open objects are stored when they are minimized. This keeps your desktop organized but still allows you to have multiple objects open and running.
To open the Minimized Window Viewer:
   1. Point to Minimized Window Viewer.
  2. Double-click.


The Plug and Play for PCMCIA window displays the following information:
===Displaying an Object in the Minimized Window Viewer 153/2===
  No.           Socket number.
The objects in the Minimized Window Viewer are still open, but they are running in the background (cannot accept user input).
Card Type    Card-type icon and text.
To display an object found in the Minimized Window Viewer:
  Card Status  Card-status icon and text.
  1. Open the Minimized Window Viewer.
  2. Point to the object.
  3. Double-click.
  or:
  1. Point to an empty area on the desktop.
  2. Click mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the same time.
  3. Point to the title of the object you want to display.
  4. Double-click.
  Note:  There may be more titles in the Window List than objects in the
Minimized Window Viewer, because hidden windows are also displayed in the
Window List.


  Card Types   109/4
===Minimizing an Object to the Desktop 154/2===
Some frequently used objects might be easier to re-access if they are minimized to the desktop instead of the Minimized Window Viewer.
To make an object minimize to the desktop:
  1. Point to the object you want to minimize to the desktop.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Settings.
  4. Select the Window tab.
  5. Select Minimize button. (If the choice is present.)
   6. Select Minimize window to desktop.
  7. Point to the title-bar icon.
  8. Double-click.


   o  Booted
===Minimizing an Object to the Minimized Window Viewer   155/2===
  o  Communication - for the following card types:
Most objects by default are set up to minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer.
          3270          5250
However, some objects are not.
          Ethernet      LAN
To make an object minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer:
          SDLC          Token Ring
  1. Point to the object you want to minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer.
   o Hard Disk
  2. Click mouse button 2.
   o  I/O - for multi-function, parallel, and SCSI card types.
  3. Select Settings.
   o  Memory
   4. Select the Window tab.
   o  Modem, Serial
  5. Select Minimize button. (If the choice is present.)
   6. Select Minimize window to viewer.
   7. Point to the title-bar icon.
   8. Double-click.


  Card Status   110/4
===Using the Shredder 156/1+===
The Shredder object provides a quick and easy way to delete objects. It is
located on the LaunchPad .
To delete an object:
  1. Point to the object.
  2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  3. Drag the object to the Shredder.
   4. Release mouse button 2.
  5. Respond to confirmation messages (if applicable).


  o Empty
===Customizing the Delete Confirmations 157/2===
  o  Inserted
You can change the settings of your desktop to specify when confirmation
  o Ready
messages appear, if any, when you delete an object. The following confirmation
  o Not Ready
choices are available:
  o  Inserted for Memory
  Confirm on folder delete Displays a confirmation message whenever a folder
 
                          object is deleted using the Shredder object or a
  Memory Card - Details View    111/4
                          pop-up menu.
 
  Confirm on delete        Displays a confirmation message whenever an object is
To receive additional information about an inserted memory card:
                          deleted using the Shredder object or a pop-up menu.
   1. Select the memory card.
    Important Disabling the confirmation messages increases your chances of
   2. Press Enter.
    accidentally deleting an object.
The Memory Card - Details View appears with the following information:
To change the settings:
Card information  Vendor name and card description data retrieved from card.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
Write protect      Yes or no.
   2. Open System Setup.
Battery            Good, low, or dead.
  3. Open System.
Region            Region of card memory for memory devices such as SRAM.
   4. Select the Confirmations tab.
 
   5. Make sure a check mark appears in each choice that you want to enable. To
I/O Card - Details View   112/4
      add or remove a check mark, select the choice.
 
   6. Point to the title-bar icon.
To receive additional information about an inserted I/O-type card:
   7. Double-click.
  1. Select the appropriate card.
   2. Press Enter.
The I/O Card - Details View appears with the following information:
Card information    Vendor name and card description data retrieved from card.
Assigned resources  System resources used by this PC card:
      IRQ   Interrupt request level.
      I/O   Input/output ports.


  Options   113/3+
===Preparing Your System to Recover Deleted Objects 158/2===
Chances are that at some point you will accidentally delete an object that you
need. You can recover a deleted object if the DELDIR environment variable is
enabled in your CONFIG.SYS file prior to deleting the object.
To enable DELDIR:
   1. Edit your C:\CONFIG.SYS file and remove the REM statement from the
      beginning of the DELDIR statement.
        a. Open OS/2 System.
        b. Open Drives.
        c. Open Drive C.  (If the OS/2 operating system is installed on a
          different drive, open that drive instead.)
        d. After the Drive C object opens, a tree view of its contents is
          displayed.  Open the Drive C entry in the tree.
        e. Open the C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
        f. Select Edit.
        g. Select Find.
        h. Type DELDIR (all caps) in the Find field.
        i. Select Find.  (If the DELDIR statement is not found, see the online
          Command Reference for instructions on how to add it.)
        j. Select the beginning of the DELDIR line.
        k. Delete REM from the beginning of the line using the Del key.
        l. Point to the title-bar icon.
        m. Double-click.
        n. Select Save.
        o. Select Type.
        p. Select Set.
  2. Shut down your system; then restart it.  Changes made to the CONFIG.SYS
      object are not initiated until the system is restarted.
The DELDIR statement specifies the size of the directory used to hold deleted
objects.  When the directory is full, the oldest files in the directory are
removed in order to make room for the new objects.
If you delete an object, recover it as soon as possible afterwards, or it might
be too late.  For more information about DELDIR, see the online Command
Reference.
Note:  To be able to recover objects deleted in a DOS session, repeat the
preceding procedure on the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.


The Options menu bar choice has two selections, Customize and Register Object.
===Recovering Deleted Objects 159/2===
The Customize option allows you to turn a beep on and off, display the Plug and
You can recover a deleted or erased object using the UNDELETE command.
Play for PCMCIA window when a PC card is used, and keep Plug and Play for PCMCIA
Note:  The DELDIR environment variable must be enabled prior to the deletion of the object.  For more information about DELDIR, see Preparing Your System to
visible when other applications are running in the foreground.
Recover Deleted Objects.
The Register Object option allows you to register objects to be launched
To recover a deleted object:
(started or opened) when a specific type of PC card is used. (It is not
  1. Open OS/2 System.
necessary to have a card inserted when registering objects.)  If more than one
  2. Open Command Prompts.
object is registered to the same card type or the manual option is selected, the
  3. Open a DOS or OS/2 window.
Object Launcher window is displayed where you can select which registered object
  4. Type UNDELETE /L and press Enter to see a list of file names associated
to launch.
      with the recently deleted objects.
Note: Objects can be launched only after Plug and Play for PCMCIA is opened.
  5. Write down the complete path and file name.  Include the drive letter,
 
      directory names, and the file name.  For example:
  Customize    114/4
      C:\OS2\SAMPLE.TXT
 
  6. Type UNDELETE followed by the complete path and file name. For example:
To use the Customize window:
      UNDELETE C:\OS2\SAMPLE.TXT
   1. Select Options.
  7. Press Enter.
   2. Select Customize.
The file associated with the deleted object has now been successfully
   3. To display the Plug and Play for PCMCIA window whenever a PC card is
  recovered.  For more information about UNDELETE, see the online Command
      inserted, removed, ready, or not ready, select the appropriate check box
Reference.
      under Display window.
To place the object back on the desktop:
   4. To hear a beep whenever a PC card is inserted, removed, ready, or not
   1. Open Drives.
      ready, select the appropriate check box under Beep.
   2. Open the drive that contains the recovered file (object).
   5. To keep the Plug and Play for PCMCIA icon or window in the foreground
   3. Find the object on the drive.
      (visible) when running another application, select Yes.
   4. Point to the object.
   6. To return to the original default settings, select Defaults.
   5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
Note:  Plug and Play for PCMCIA must be open for your selections to become
  6. Drag the object to the desktop.
active.
   7. Release mouse button 2.
 
===Using Templates 160/1+===
A template is an object that you can use as a model to create additional objects. When you drag a template, you create another of the original object, as though you were peeling one of the objects off a stack. The new object has the same settings and contents as the templates in the stack.


Register Object    115/4
===Creating an Object from the Templates Folder 161/2+===
You can create new objects by using the objects in the Templates folder. To open the Templates folder:
   1. Point to the Templates object on the Desktop.
  2. Double-click.


To register an object:
===Creating a Folder Object 162/3===
   1. Select Options.
To use the Folder template to create a new folder:
   2. Select Register Object.
   1. Open Templates.
   3. Click on the down arrow to the right of the Select a card type field to
   2. Point to the Folder template.
      display a list of available card types.
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
   4. Select the desired card type.
   4. Drag a copy of the Folder template to the Desktop or to another folder.
  5. Drag a copy of each object that you want to register to this card type to
  5. Release mouse button 2An empty folder is created.
      the Object List field. The name of the object appears in the list(If
   6. Rename the folder (for example, "My new folder"). For information about
      you have registered more than one object for this card type, see also
       renaming, see the OS/2 Tutorial.
      Object Launcher.)
  You can drag any objects you want (for example, program objects and data-file
   6. Select Automatically or Manually to indicate how you would like the object
objects) to the new folder.
      to be launched.  (If you have selected Manually, see also Object
    Tip The operating system will add new templates when you install programs
      Launcher.)
    that support them. The MMPM/2 application supports templates for digital
  7. Select any of the choices under When card is to indicate when you would
    audio, MIDI, and digital video files.
       like to launch the object.
      Note: The Ready and Not ready choices work only with I/O card types.
  8. To return to the original default settings, select Defaults.
To deregister an object:
  1. Select the object to be removed from the Object List.
  2. Select Remove.
      Note:  Selecting Remove does not affect the original object.


Object Launcher   116/3
===Creating a Data-File Object 163/3===
To use the Data File template to create a data-file object:
   1. Open Templates.
  2. Move the mouse pointer to the Data-File template.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the Data-File template to any folder (including the Desktop folder).
      A new data-file object is created.
  5. Open the data-file object to begin editing the file with the System
      Editor.
  6. When you are ready to save the file, select File; then select Save.
      Respond to the system prompts (for example, in the Save notification
      window, indicate if you want a file type such as plain text).
  7. Double-click mouse button 1 on the title-bar icon to close the window.
  8. Rename the object currently titled "Data File".  Refer to the OS/2
      Tutorial.
Note:  If you use Save as on the File menu instead of Save, another object is
created with the new name. "Data File" remains an empty file.
If you open a data-file object that is not associated with any other program,
it automatically opens in the OS/2 System Editor.  If you prefer, you can
associate the data-file object with one or more program objects (for more
information, see the Master Help Index).  For more information about using the
OS/2 System Editor, select Help on the menu.


The Object Launcher is displayed when Plug and Play for PCMCIA is open and one
===Creating a Program Object 164/3===
or both of the following occurs:
A program object starts a program or a session.  If you install a new OS/2, DOS,
  o More than one object is registered for the inserted PC card type.
or Windows program, you might need to run the Add Programs program in the System
  o  Manually is selected under Launch Choices.
Setup folder to create a program object. This is the recommended method of
To launch an object:
creating a program object.
   1. Select the object to launch.
You also can create a program object using the Templates folder.
   2. Select Launch.
   1. Open Templates.
  2. Move the mouse pointer to the Program template.
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the Program template to a folder or to the Desktop.
  5. Customize the program object using the Settings notebook.  For example,
      select the session type, name the program object, or set up the
      associations.


Selective Uninstall    117/2
===Creating a Template of an Object 165/2===
 
You can create a template of an object when you have an existing object (such as
The Selective Uninstall program allows you to remove operating system files,
a form letter with a company letterhead) and you need another oneFor example,
programs, and device drivers from your hard diskYou might want to uninstall
you could make the form letter a template and then customize it for different
files to free hard disk space for other programs.
customers. The new object will have the same settings (such as associations)
Warning: Do not remove operating system files, programs, or device drivers from
and contents as the original.
your hard disk unless you have backed up the operating system (as it was
To create a template of an object:
originally installed). Use the BACKUP.EXE program from the utility diskettes you
   1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by pointing at the object and then
created with "Create Utility Diskettes" program to back up your system. After
      clicking mouse button 2.
system files, programs, or device drivers are removed, they are unavailable for
   2. Select Settings.
future use.
   3. Select the General tab.
You can recover files, programs, or device drivers that you delete (     as they
   4. Select the Template check box.
were originally installed) only by using the RESTORE.EXE file from the Utility
   5. Close the Settings notebook.
Diskettes you created.
  The object is now displayed as a template.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
Drag a copy of the object from the template whenever you need a new copy.
   2. Open System Setup.
Customize the new object to your preference. For example, you can change the
   3. Locate the Selective Uninstall object inside the System Setup folder.
name of the object and add a new icon (see the OS/2 Tutorial or the Master Help
   4. Open Selective Uninstall.  The Selective Uninstall window appears.
Index).
For information about Selective Uninstall, press F1.  Or, place the mouse
If you want to move a stack of templates, rather than create an object from the
pointer on the Help push button and click once.  To close the Help window,
top template, press the Shift key while dragging the stack.
press Esc.
   1. To make a selection, press the Tab key until your choice is highlighted;
      then press the Spacebar. A check mark (/) appears in the box next to your
      choice. Or, place the mouse pointer on the check box beside a choice and
      click once.
  2. The More push button next to some choices indicates that a secondary
      window containing more choices associated with your selection is
      available. After you select a choice, the More push button is highlighted.
      Select More to display a list of items you can choose to remove.
      Warning: When you select More, all items in the associated choices l  ist
      are checked. Make sure you remove the check marks from those items that
      you do not want to delete from your hard disk.
      For information about the items in the window, press F1.  Or, place the
      mouse pointer on the Help push button and click once.
  3. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove operating system features
      from your hard disk.
    Adobe Type Manager
    Your hard disk contains the Adobe Type Manager program.  The program runs
    in the WIN-OS/2 environment.  Adobe Type Manager uses PostScript[**]
    outline font technology to produce the sharpest possible type on the screen
    and on the printed page.
    If you intend to use Adobe Type Manager, do not choose to uninstall Fonts.
    For more information about using Adobe Type Manager, see the online Windows
    Programs in OS/2 located in the Information folder on the desktop.


Create Utility Diskettes    118/2
===Creating Another Object 166/2===
 
All objects that have a Create another choice in their pop-up menu have a cascaded menu that lists their templates. When you create a template of your own, it is added to the cascaded menu.
The OS/2 operating system comes installed on your hard disk. Your computer has a
The result of Create another is identical to creating an object from a template.
program that creates diskettes called Utility Diskettes. Create these diskettes
If you select Create another from the pop-up menu of an object, a new object
to help you correct problems if you cannot start your computer from the hard
with the same default settings and data is created. If you select the arrow to
disk.
the right of Create another, a cascaded menu is displayed. This menu contains a
The Utility Diskettes also allow you to start the procedure that backs up the
listing of all the template objects you created. You can select one of the
operating system to diskettes. Backup diskettes allow you to restore OS/2 to
choices to create another object from that template.
your hard disk in the event of a computer problem.
For example, suppose you created a template and named it "Company letterhead."
To complete this procedure, you will need three blank, high-density (2MB)
This template is listed as a choice on the cascaded menu. Whenever you need to
diskettes for a 1.44MB drive, or one extended-density (4MB) diskette for a
create a similar letter, select Company letterheadThe new data-file object
2.88MB drive.
contains whatever was in the original "Company letterhead" and the same settings
  1. Open OS/2 System.
(such as associations).
  2. Open System Setup.
To create another object using a pop-up menu:
  3. Open Create Utility Diskettes. The Create Utility Diskettes window
   1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by pointing at the object and then
      appears.
       clicking mouse button 2.
      For information about Create Utility Diskettes, press F1Or, place the
   2. Select Create another if you want to use one of your templates, or select
      mouse pointer on the Help push button and click once.  To close the Help
      the arrow to the right of Create another and select a template choice.
      window, press Esc.
  Note:  The new object appears in the active folder; for example, if the object
   4. Select the drive where the Utility Diskettes will be created.  If you
is on the Desktop, the duplicate appears on the Desktop.
       select drive A, insert a blank diskette into drive A.
   5. Type C.  Or, place the mouse pointer on the Create push button and click
      once. Follow the instructions on the screen to prepare Utility Diskettes.
      Label the first diskette you create Utility Diskette 1, the second
      diskette Utility Diskette 2, and the third diskette Utility Diskette 3.
      Store the diskettes in a safe place.


Starting Objects Automatically    119/1+
===Setting Up Printers 167/1+===
If you installed a printer when you installed OS/2, a printer object is on your
Desktop.  The printer object is used to print jobs (data files) and check their
progress.  If you want to add a printer object, see Installing a Printer.
Note:  The explanations and instructions in this chapter apply to printers and
plotters.
Each printer object represents a certain arrangement of hardware, software, and
configurations, which simplifies the printing process. Printer objects can
represent local printers and network printers. Local printers are connected to
individual computers or individual workstations on a network.  Network printers
are connected to local area network (LAN) servers and can be used by
workstations connected to the network.  For more detailed information about
printer and printing, see the OS/2 Tutorial and the online Printing in OS/2 book
located in the Information folder.


The Startup folder contains objects that you want to automatically start every
===Installing a Printer 168/2+===
time the system starts.
Even if you did not select a printer during the OS/2 installation, you still can add a printer to the system.  There are several different procedures to choose from.  From the following list, choose the procedure that best describes your
This chapter describes how to use the Startup folder to start objectsIt also
situation, then follow the instructions to add the printer.
describes how to customize your system startup by placing variables in your
  o  Create a printer object but use a printer driver that is currently
CONFIG.SYS file.
      installed on the system.  See Creating a Printer Object.
  o  Create a printer object and install a new printer driver to use with it.
      See Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver.
  o  Install a new printer driver but use an existing printer object. See
      Installing a Printer Driver Only.
  o  Change the printer driver being used with an existing printer object.  See
      Changing Printer Drivers.
  o  Install a Windows printer driver for use with WIN-OS/2. See Installing a
      Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session.
  o Install an OEM (Other Equipment Manufacturer) printer driver for use with
      Windows. See Installing a Printer Driver from Another Manufacturer for a
      WIN-OS/2 Session.
Note:  When you create an OS/2 printer object, you might be prompted to create
an equivalent Windows printer object. If you choose to create the Windows
printer object, you also are prompted to install a Windows printer driver.


Starting Programs Automatically    120/2+
===Creating a Printer Object 169/3===
 
This procedure involves adding a printer object and selecting a printer driver.
You can start programs automatically at system startup using a Startup folder, a
Use this procedure if you have existing printer drivers installed on your system
STARTUP.CMD file, or both. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive
and you want this new printer object to use one of them.
demonstration of how to use the Startup folder.
To create a printer object to use with an existing printer driver:
 
  1. Open Templates.
Startup Folder   121/3
  2. Point to the Printer template.
 
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
You can place objects of frequently used programs and batch files in a Startup
  4. Drag the template to a folder or the Desktop.
folder so that every time you start your computer, the programs and batch files
  5. Release mouse button 2.  The Create a Printer window is displayed.
will start.  The objects in the Startup folder are started when the Desktop
  6. Type a name for the printer in the Name field.
folder is opened at system startup. You cannot specify the order in which the
  7. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
objects in the folder are started.
  8. Select the printer driver that corresponds to your printer model.
You should place a shadow of the program objects in the Startup folder instead
  9. Select Create.
of the original object.  This ensures that any changes made to the original
  10. Respond to the "Do you want to install an equivalent WIN-OS/2 printer
object are applied to the object in the Startup folder.
      configuration" question; then follow the instructions on the screen to
To create a shadow of an object and place it in the Startup folder:
      complete the installation.
   1. Point to the object.
A new printer object is on your DesktopIf you want to customize the settings
   2. Press and hold Ctrl+Shift.
for this new printer object, see Setting Printer Properties.
 
===Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver 170/3===
This procedure involves creating a printer object and installing a printer driver. Use this procedure if you want to create a printer object and install a
new printer driver.
   1. Open Templates.
   2. Point to the Printer template.
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
   4. Drag the object to the Startup folder.
   4. Drag the template to a folder or the Desktop.
   5. Release mouse button 2.
   5. Release mouse button 2.
   6. Release the Ctrl and Shift keys.
   6. Type a name for the printer in the Name field.
  7. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
  8. Select Install new printer driver.
  9. Use the instructions in the following list to install your printer driver:
        o  If your printer driver came with the OS/2 operating system, follow
          the instructions for Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2.
        o  If your printer driver did not come with the OS/2 operating system,
          follow the instructions for Other Printer Driver.
Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2
  1. Select one or more printer drivers in the list.
  2. Select Install.
  3. Ensure that the information in the Directory field is correct.
  4. Select OK.
  5. Select create to create the printer object.
Other Printer Driver
  1. Select Other OS/2 printer driver
  2. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
      appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.
  3. Select Refresh.  Wait until the window fills with printer drivers.
  4. Select one or more drivers.  If the driver you need is not listed, insert
      another diskette or change the information in the Directory field and
      select Refresh again.
  5. Select Install.
  6. Select Create to create the printer object.
A new printer object is on your Desktop.  If you want to customize the settings
for this new printer object, see Setting Printer Properties.
    Tip Many printers have multiple printer drivers available.  For example,
    Hewlett Packard has several drivers for their LaserJet IIID printer. To
    ensure that you get the correct driver with the printer model you select,
    scroll the Printer Driver field to the right until you can see the name of
    the printer driver.


  STARTUP.CMD File   122/3
===Installing a Printer Driver Only 171/3===
Sometimes you have an existing printer object, but you do not have the correct printer driver on your system. This might happen if you add a different printer to your system.
To install a new driver for an existing printer object:
  1. Point to the printer object.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Settings.
  4. Select the Printer driver tab.
  5. Point to one of the printer driver objects.
  6. Click mouse button 2.
  7. Select Install.
   8. Use the instructions in the following list to install your printer driver:
        o  If your printer driver came with the OS/2 operating system, follow
          the instructions for Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2.
        o  If your printer driver did not come with the OS/2 operating system,
          follow the instructions for Other Printer Driver.
Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2
  1. Select one or more printer drivers in the list.
  2. Select Install.
  3. Ensure that the information in the Directory field is correct.
  4. Select OK.
Other Printer Driver
  1. Select Other OS/2 printer driver.
  2. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
      appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.
  3. Select Refresh.
  4. Select one or more drivers.  If the driver you need is not listed, insert
      another diskette or change the information in the Directory field and
      select Refresh again.
  5. Select Install.
A new printer driver is installed.  If you want to customize the settings for
this new printer driver, see Setting Printer Properties.
    Tip Many printers have multiple printer drivers available.  For example,
    Hewlett Packard has several drivers for their LaserJet IIID printer. To
    ensure that you get the correct driver with the printer model you select,
    scroll the Printer Driver field to the right until you can see the printer
    driver name.


A STARTUP.CMD file is similar to the Startup folder in that it is used to
===Changing Printer Drivers 172/3===
automatically start programs and batch files at system startup. If a STARTUP.CMD
You might already have both the printer object and the printer driver installed
file is present, it will be run prior to the starting of the DesktopFor more
on your system, but you need to connect them. This might happen if you like to
information about creating and running a STARTUP.CMD file, refer to the online
use different printer drivers with a printer object.
Command Reference.
To change to a different printer driver:
  1. Point to the printer object.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Settings.
  4. Select the Printer driver tab.
  5. Select the printer driver.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.
  The printer object is now set up to use a different printer driver. See Setting
Printer Properties for information about setting the properties to match the
capabilities of the new printer driver.


Preventing Automatic Startup    123/2
===Installing a Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session 173/3===
 
Windows programs print directly to the OS/2 spooler. Therefore, multiple print jobs can be spooled from one WIN-OS/2 session or multiple WIN-OS/2 sessions.
Programs located in the Startup folder or programs running at the time the
To install a printer driver in Windows:
computer was shut down will automatically start when the computer is restarted.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
To prevent these programs from starting:
  2. Open Command Prompts.
   1. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the computer.
  3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen.
   2. When you see the Desktop animation (similar to an exploding box), press
  4. Open WIN-OS/2 Main.
       and hold Ctrl+Shift+F1.
  5. Open Control Panel.
  3. Hold the keys for approximately 15 seconds, or until the Desktop appears.
  6. Open Printers.
       (If the hard disk light stops flashing during this time, your computer
  7. Select Add and then select a printer driver in the list.
       might be suspendedRelease the keys quickly, and then resume holding the
  8. Select Install.
       keys until the Desktop objects appear.)
   9. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
       appropriate drive designation and path in the Install Driver pop-up
      window.
  10. Select OK.
  11. Select Connect.
  12. Select LPT1.OS2, LPT2.OS2, or LPT3.OS2.
       Note:  You can select a COMx port, but no spooling to the OS/2 Print
       object will occurHowever, you will still be able to use the Print
       Manager in Windows.
  13. Select OK.
  14. Select the printer that you want to assign as the default.
  15. Select the Set as Default Printer pushbutton.
  16. Select Close.


  Customizing Your CONFIG.SYS for Startup    124/2
===Installing a Printer Driver from Another Manufacturer for a WIN-OS/2 Session 174/3===
OS/2 has a wide variety of printer drivers available for use with Windows.
However, there might be times when you want to use a driver supplied by another
printer manufacturer.
To add a Windows printer driver supplied by another printer manufacturer:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen
  4. Open WIN-OS/2 Main
  5. Open Control Panel.
  6. Open Printers.
  7. Select Add.
  8. Select Unlisted Printer from the beginning of the list of printers.
  9. Select Install.
  10. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
      appropriate drive designation and path in the Install Driver pop-up
      window.
  11. Select OK.
  12. Select Connect.
  13. Select LPT1.OS2, LPT2.OS2, or LPT3.OS2.
  14. Select OK.
  15. Select the printer that you want to assign as the default.
  16. Select the Set as Default Printer pushbutton.
  17. Select Close.
    Tip If you also want to create an OS/2 printer object for use with the same
    driver, follow the instructions for Creating a Printer Object and make the
    following selections:
      o Select the same port you selected for your printer, using the Windows
          Control Panel.
      o  Select the OS/2 printer driver, IBMNULL, as the default driver.
          (IBMNULL is installed during system installation.)


You can customize the way your Workplace Shell starts by changing the system
===Setting Printer Properties 175/2===
variables at either a command prompt or in the CONFIG.SYS file.  Precede each of
A printer driver has settings called printer properties. Printer properties describe the way your printer is physically set up.
the variables with the SET command.
Examples of printer properties are:
The system variables for the Workplace Shell are:
  o Type of paper feed (tractor or bin)
  AUTOSTART            Determines the parts of the Workplace Shell that are
  o Number and location of paper trays
                      automatically started. Eliminating any of the options
  o  Forms defined for your printer
                      from the statement restricts the user from accessing
  o Forms loaded in the paper feed or trays of your printer
                      portions of the Shell. For example:
  o  Font cartridges loaded on the printer
                      SET AUTOSTART=FOLDERS, PROGRAMS, TASKLIST, CONNECTIONS
  o  Installed soft fonts
      FOLDERS          Allows a user to open additional folders after startup.
  o  Additional features installed, such as extended symbol sets and patterns
      PROGRAMS          Allows a user to open additional programs after startup.
  o Resolution
      TASKLIST          Allows a user to open the Window List.
  o Orientation
      CONNECTIONS      Recreates the network connections established during the
  o  Compression
                        last log on.
Examples of plotter properties are:
      LAUNCHPAD        Creates a new LaunchPad on the Desktop.
  o Number of carousels
  OS2_SHELL            Sets the command processor for OS/2 sessions. For
  o Active carousel
                      example:
  o  Color type of each pen in a carousel
                      SET OS2_SHELL=C:\OS2\CMD.EXE
The number and kind of properties available depend upon the type of printer or
  RESTARTOBJECTS      Sets the objects that will be automatically started by the
  plotter you have.
                      Workplace Shell. For example:
To set the printer properties:
                      SET RESTARTOBJECTS=STARTUPFOLDERSONLY
  1. Point to the printer object.
      YES Starts all the objects that were running at the time of shutdown and
  2. Click mouse button 2.
      all objects in the Startup folder. This is the default.
  3. Select Settings.
      NO Does not start any of the applications that were running at the time of
  4. Select the Printer driver tab.
      shutdown and does not start the objects in the Startup folder.
  5. Point to a printer driver.
      STARTUPFOLDERSONLY Starts only those objects in the Startup folder.
  6. Click mouse button 2.
      REBOOTONLY Starts objects only when the Workplace Shell is started by
  7. Select Settings.
      pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del or turning on the computer.
  8. Change the properties to match your printer setup.
RUNWORKPLACE        Sets the interface that is started by the OS/2 operating
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
                      system. PMSHELL.EXE is the program for the Workplace Shell
  10. Double-click.
                      interface. For example:
  Your printer object is now set up to print a job.  For information about how to
                      SET RUNWORKPLACE=C:\OS2\PMSHELL.EXE
print a job, see the online Printing in OS/2 book located in the Information
SYSTEM_INI          Determines the INI file to be used by the Workplace Shell
  Folder.
                      for system information about such items as default colors
 
                      and printer drivers. For example:
===Using Productivity Tools and Games 176/1+===
                      SET SYSTEM_INI=C:\OS2\OS2SYS.INI
The Productivity folder provides programs that assist you in editing text and icons, searching for files or text and displaying system utilization., Each productivity program has a set of help menus to assist you with using the program.
USER_INI            Determines the INI file to be used by the Workplace Shell
The Games folder provides you with games for your entertainment.
                      for system information about such items as program
 
                      defaults, display options, and file options. For example:
===The Productivity Folder 177/2+===
                      SET USER_INI=C:\OS2\OS2.INI
To open a Productivity program:
  For more information about customizing the user interface, refer to the online
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  Command Reference.
  2. Open Productivity.
The DISKCACHE statement in the CONFIG.SYS file is set up so that it
  3. Open the program you want to use.
automatically runs the CHKDSK program upon startup if the system shuts down
For information about using a program in the Productivity folder, press F1 after the program is opened.
improperly. The CHKDSK program analyzes and fixes disk problems caused by the
improper shutdown.
If you add hard disk drives or partitions after the installation of the OS/2
operating system, you should edit the CONFIG.SYS file and update the AC:x
parameter to reflect the new additions. AC: starts the auto-check feature on
the specified drives when the system shuts down improperly. The value x
represents the letters of the disks or partitions on the system that you want
to check.
For example, if you want to check disks C and D and your existing DISKCACHE
statement is:
      DISKCACHE=64,LW
Add the AC: parameter to the statement as follows:
      DISKCACHE=64,LW,AC:CD
For more information about the DISKCACHE statement, refer to the online Command
Reference.


  Using Disk Drives    125/1+
===Clipboard Viewer 178/3===
Clipboard Viewer is a program that enables you to view the contents of the OS/2 clipboard. The system clipboard is used to share information between programs in the same session or in different sessions (for information about sessions, see Using Command Prompts). It temporarily holds data being passed from one program to another. You can copy or cut information to the clipboard from a program in one session and then paste the information from the clipboard to a
program in a different session. For more information about the clipboard, refer
to the online book Windows Programs in OS/2


This chapter describes how to use the Drives folder to access and use the
===Enhanced Editor 179/3===
different types of storage media installed in your computer.
Enhanced Editor is an editor you can use to create and edit text files. It also enables you to work on multiple files at the same time. You can start the Enhanced Editor by opening its object or by typing EPM at the OS/2 command prompt and pressing Enter.
When opened, the Drives folder provides a view of all drive objects in the
The Enhanced Editor has a number of features and functions. These features and
system. For example, the following drive types could be accessed from the
functions are thoroughly explained in the Quick Reference help file located
Drives folder:
under the Help menu bar choice of the Enhanced Editor.
  o  Diskette
  o  Hard disk
  o  CD-ROM
  o  Tape backup
  o  Optical disc
  o  PCMCIA
To view the Drive objects:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Drives.
Note:  Drive objects cannot be copied.


  About Hard Disks and Diskettes   126/2
  Icon Editor   180/3


There are two kinds of disks:
Icon Editor is a tool that enables you to create, edit, and convert image files.
Hard disk  A non-removable disk that is built into a hard-disk drive.  Hard
  These files include icons, bit maps, and pointersAn icon is a graphical
            disks come in a variety of capacities and can hold large amounts of
representation of an object or a minimized program. A bit map is a special type
            information.  (Capacity is the maximum amount of information that a
of image made up of a series of dots. (The OS/2 logo is an example of a bit
            diskette or disk can hold.)
map.)  A pointer is a small symbol on the screen that reflects the movement of
            Information can be stored on and erased from the disk over and over
the mouse.
            again.  The computer can write to and read information from the
            hard disk much faster than it can from a diskette.
Diskette    A removable disk that can be inserted in and removed from a
            diskette drive.  Diskettes come in a variety of capacities.
            Diskettes cannot hold as much information as a hard disk.
            Information can be stored on and erased from the diskette over and
            over again.  The computer cannot write to or read information from
            a diskette as fast as it can from a hard disk.  There are two sizes
            of diskettes, 5.25" and 3.5":
  o 5.25-inch diskettes are thin, flexible, and somewhat fragileA 5.25-inch
      diskette has a write-protect notch located on the right side. You can
      place a write-protect tab over the notch to protect the information stored
      on the diskette.
      To store information on or erase information from the diskette, you must
      remove the write-protect tab from the diskette.
  o  3.5-inch diskettes are protected by a hard plastic cover that makes them
      more durable. A 3.5-inch diskette can be write protected by sliding a
      built-in tab to reveal the write-protect opening.
      To store information on or erase information from the diskette, you must
      slide the tab over the write-protect opening on the diskette.
            Note:  If a diskette does not have a write-protect notch or tab,
            the diskette is permanently write protected.  Many software
            manufacturers use permanently write-protected diskettes to prevent
            the information on the diskettes from being accidentally changed or
            deleted.
The capacity of a diskette and a hard disk is measured in bytes. A diskette
must be formatted at a capacity less than or equal to the capacity of the
diskette drive in order for the diskette and the drive to be compatible. So
even though a diskette is the correct size physically, its capacity might not
be compatible with the diskette drive in the computer.
For example, a 3.5-inch diskette drive designed to work with 2.88MB diskettes
can use 1.44MB diskettes, but a 1.44MB diskette drive cannot use a 2.88MB
diskette.  The following terms are used to describe the capacity of disks and
the size of files:
Byte        Amount of space it takes to store a character.
Kilobyte    1024 bytes and is abbreviated as KB.
Megabyte    1024KB (approximately a million bytes) and is abbreviated as MB.
  Gigabyte    1024MB (approximately a billion bytes) and is abbreviated as GB.
The following terms are equivalent:
1MB = 1024KB = 1048576 bytes
Each diskette drive and hard disk drive in a computer has a letter assigned to
it.  This letter is the name that both you and the computer use to identify the
drive.  For example, on many computers the diskette drive is called drive A and
the hard disk drive is called drive C.


  Accessing Hard Disks and Diskettes   127/2+
  OS/2 System Editor   181/3


You can use the Drives folder to access the information on your hard disk and
The OS/2 System Editor is used to create and edit text files. You can use the
diskette drivesThis allows you to view disk information, display the files on
System Editor to edit your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT system files.  The System
the disks, and copy and move files. The files can be viewed as objects so they
Editor runs in a windowYou can start several sessions of the System Editor so
can easily be copied and moved with the mouse.
that you can edit several files at once.
    Tip For specific instructions on using the Drive A object, see Drive A.
You can start the System Editor two ways:
  o  By selecting its object
  o  Opening a data file associated with the System Editor.  (All data files
      area associated with the System Editor by default.)
  o  By typing E (and pressing Enter) at an OS/2 command line If you want to
      edit a particular file, you follow the E with a space and then type the
      path and file name of the file.


  Viewing Disk Information   128/3
  Picture Viewer   182/3


To view the size of a disk:
Picture Viewer displays and prints metafile (.MET) and picture interchange
  1. Open OS/2 System.
format (.PIF) files.  You also can view spooler (.SPL) files; however, the file
  2. Open Drives.
must contain a picture in a standard OS/2 format.
   3. Open the drive object you want information about.
Note:  Picture Viewer does not support multiple-page metafiles.
Picture Viewer lets you zoom in or zoom out of a picture after it is displayed.
  Move the mouse pointer to the portion of the picture you want to zoom in and
then double-click mouse button 1.
 
Pulse    183/3
 
Pulse is a system monitor. Use Pulse to see a graphic representation of how
different activities affect the system and how much processor power is still
available for other programs. You can change the colors of the graphic, adjust
the graph line, and freeze the screen image.
 
Seek and Scan Files   184/3
 
Seek and Scan Files is a program that quickly searches one or more disks for
files or text. When a file match is found, it is displayed in a selection list.
Then you can open (or run) the selected file.


  Displaying Objects   129/3
  The Games Folder   185/2+


The drive objects are used to display the contents of the drives on your
The Games folder contains Klondike Solitaire, OS/2 Chess and Mahjongg.
computer.  The contents of the drive can be displayed in three different views:
To start a game:
Icon view    Displays the contents of the disk as icons.  This is the default
              if the disk does not have folders (directories).
Tree view    Displays the contents of the disk in a tree.  This is the default
              if the disk has folders (directories).  A plus (+) sign to the
              left of a folder indicates that additional folders exist inside
              the folder.  By selecting the plus sign, you can see the other
              folders in the folder.  Pointing to a folder and double-clicking
              displays the contents of the folder in an icon view.
              Note:  When an additional folder is opened from a folder that is
              in tree view, if the default for the additional folder is also
              tree view, it is overridden and displayed in an icon view.  There
              is no need to open it again in tree view because it is already
              shown in the parent folder's tree view.
Details view  Displays the contents of the disk in a table with the following
              additional information:
  o  Icon
  o  Title
  o  Real name
  o  Size
  o  Last write date and time
  o  Last access date and time
  o  Creation date and time
  o  Flags
To display the contents of a drive as icons:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Open Drives.
   2. Open Games.
   3. Point to the object that you want to display.
   3. Open the game you want to play.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  For information about playing a game in the Games folder, press F1 after the
  5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
game is opened.
  6. Select Icon view.
 
  To display the contents of a drive in a tree view:
  Klondike Solitaire   186/3
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Drives.
  3. Point to the object that you want to display.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
  6. Select Tree view.
  7. If a plus (+) sign appears to the left of a folder, select it to expand
      the contents.
  8. To display the contents of a folder, point to the folder; then
      double-click.
  To display details about the contents of a drive:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Drives.
  3. Point to the object that you want to display.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
  6. Select Details view.
  7. Select the scroll bars at the bottom and side of the window to scroll the
      information.


  Copying Objects    130/3
Klondike Solitaire is a popular card game for one person. The object of this
game is to find the aces and build on them in suit and in ascending order.  You
use the mouse to move the cards to their new location.


Note: If you want to copy the object to a folder object or another drive
  OS/2 Chess   187/3
object, the target object must be visible before you start the copy.
To copy an object from a drive to another location:
  1. Open the drive containing the object you want to copy.
  2. Point to the object you want to copy.
  3. Press and hold Ctrl.
  4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  5. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
  6. Release mouse button 2.
  7. Release Ctrl.
To copy an object from another location to a drive:
  1. Point to the object you want to copy.
  2. Press and hold Ctrl.
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the object to the drive object.
  5. Release mouse button 2.
  6. Release Ctrl.


  Moving Objects    131/3
With OS/2 Chess, you can play a game of chess against another person playing on
the same computer or on a network workstation. You also can play against the
computer.  The object of the game is to checkmate your opponent's king.


There are times when you need to move an object (copy the object to a different
  Mahjongg   188/3
location and delete it from the original location).
Note: If you want to move the object to a folder object or another drive
object, the target object must be visible before you start the move.
To move an object from a drive to another location:
  1. Open the drive containing the object you want to move.
  2. Point to the object you want to move.
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
  5. Release mouse button 2.
To move an object from another location to a drive:
  1. Point to the object you want to move.
  2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  3. Drag the mouse to the drive object.
  4. Release mouse button 2.


Deleting Objects from a Drive    132/3
Mahjongg is a popular version of the ancient Chinese tile game. The object of
this game is to remove all the tiles by matching all the pairs.


You can delete (erase) unwanted objects from a drive.
Using the Information   189/1+
To delete an object from a drive:
   1. Open the drive.
  2. Point to the object you want to delete.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the object to the Shredder.
  5. Release mouse button 2.


Formatting a Disk   133/2
The Information folder contains information to aid you in using OS/2.
To open the Information folder:
  1. Point to Information
   2. Double-click.
The Information folder contains all the online documents described in this
chapter.


You can format a disk. When a disk is formatted, it is checked for defects and
  Using OS/2    190/2
prepared to accept data.  During this process, all existing data is erased from
the disk.
Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to format a
diskette.
Note:  Before you format a disk, make sure that it does not contain any
information that is important.
To format a disk:
  1. Point to the disk you want to format.
   2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Format disk.
  4. When the Format Disk window appears, type a Volume Label (name for the
      disk).
  5. Select the type of file system (FAT or HPFS) you want to use on the disk.
      (For more information about these file systems, see the Master Help
      Index).
  6. Select Format.
  7. When the format is complete, select OK.


  Checking a Disk   134/2
The OS/2 Tutorial is an interactive and animated look at the OS/2 Workplace
Shell interface. It explains how to use a mouse, work with objects and folders,
use windows, and get help.
If you are new to OS/2, you should spend the 40 minutes (approximate) it takes
to go through the tutorial.  You will find that it is time well spent.
To start the OS/2 Tutorial:
  1. Open Information
   2. Open Tutorial


You can check a disk for:
  Command Reference   191/2+
  o  Defects, which are errors in the file allocation table or directory on the
      disk.  If you select Write corrections to disk, any problems found will be
      fixed.
  o  Current usage, which is the amount of the disk used for directories, user
      files, and extended attributes.  It also indicates the amount of space
      that is reserved on the disk.
  o  File system type, which is the type of file system on the disk.
  o Total disk space, which is the capacity of the disk in bytes.
   o  Total amount of disk space available, which is the amount of free space
      left on the disk.
Note:  You cannot check a disk that is currently being used or is locked by
another process (for example, the disk that OS/2 is running on).
To check a disk:
  1. Point to the drive that you want to check.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Check disk.
  4. Select Write corrections to disk.
  5. Select Check.  When the check is done, the Check Disk &dash. Results
      window is displayed.
  6. Select Cancel to remove the window.


  Drive A    135/2+
Before there were friendly operating system interfaces like the Workplace Shell,
 
computer users communicated with a computer using a predefined set of
The Drive A object provides quick access to the diskette drive in your computer
instructions called commands. Users would type a command at a prompt, and the
referred to as A.
computer would perform the requested task.
You can use the Drive A object to:
Some people still like to communicate with the computer in this way. For that
  o  Display the objects on a diskette
reason, OS/2 supplies both DOS and OS/2 command prompts and the OS/2 Command
  o  Display information about the objects on the diskette
Reference.
  o  Copy objects on a diskette to another location
The Command Reference explains each OS/2 and DOS command, graphically shows the
  o  Copy objects from another location to a diskette
correct syntax of the command, and gives examples of when and how to use the
  o Move objects on a diskette to another location
command.
  o  Move objects from another location to a diskette
In addition, it explains the commands that can be used to create a batch file (a
   o  Delete objects from a diskette
series of commands that are processed sequentially). Batch files are useful for
   o  Format a diskette
automating the entering of commands that are used over and over again.
  o Check a diskette for defects and fix it
To open the OS/2 Command Reference:
  Note: The Drive A object cannot be copied.
   1. Open Information.
This chapter discusses only the Drive A object. For information about other
   2. Open Command Reference.
drive objects and a discussion about disks and diskettes, see Using Disk
  To open the OS/2 Command Reference and get information about a specific
  Drives.
  command:
  1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type HELP followed by the name of the command.
      For example:
      HELP COPY
  2. Press Enter. The Command Reference is opened to the COPY command page.


  Displaying the Objects on a Diskette   136/3
  Using the Contents Window   192/3


To display the objects on a diskette:
The Contents window is the first window that appears when the Command Reference
  1. Place a diskette into diskette drive A.
is openedNotice that some of the topics in this window have a plus (+) sign
  2. Open Drive A.
beside themThe plus sign indicates that additional topics are available.
The Drive A window appears showing the contents of the diskette.  The actual
To expand the Contents and view the additional topics:
layout of the window that appears depends upon the contents of the diskette.
  1. Select the + sign.
  Tree view  Displays the objects on the diskette in a directory (tree)
  To collapse the topics in the Contents:
            structure with folders representing the directoriesThis view
  1. Select the - sign.
            comes up when the objects on the diskette are placed in
  To open a topic:
            directories.
  1. Point to the title of the topic.
            To view the contents of a directory, point to a folder and
  2. Double-click.
            double-click.
  Icon view  Displays the objects on the diskette as pictures (icons)This
            view comes up when all the objects on the diskette are in the root
            directory.


  Displaying Information about the Objects on a Diskette   137/2
  Obtaining Additional Information    193/3


The tree and icon views give limited information about the objects on a
When a topic is opened, the information for the topic is displayed in a window.
diskette.  However, the details view gives the following information about the
Highlighted words and phrases in the window indicate that additional information
objects on the diskette:
is hidden "beneath" the word or phrase.
Title of the object  Name that appears below the icon that represents the
To view the additional information:
                      object.
   1. Point to the highlighted word or phrase.
Real name of object  Actual name of the object.
   2. Double-click.
Size                  Amount of space in bytes that the object occupies.
To return to the previous window of information:
Last write date      Date that the information in the object was last changed.
   1. Select Previous.
Last write time      Time of day that the information in the object was last
                      changed.
Last access date      Date that the information in the object was last viewed.
Last access time      Time of day that the information in the object was last
                      viewed.
Creation date        Date that the object was first created.
Creation time        Time that the object was first created.
Flags                Characteristics of the file that allow it to be used in a
                      certain way.
To display detailed information about the objects on a diskette:
   1. Place a diskette into drive A.
  2. Open Drive A.
  3. Point to the title-bar icon.
   4. Click mouse button 2.
  5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
   6. Select Details view.


  Copying Objects to or from a Diskette   138/2
  Searching for Information   194/3


There are times when you need to copy an object (duplicate the object and place
There might be times when you are using the Command Reference when you have an
it in a different location).
idea of what you want, but you cannot remember where it is. The search function
Note:  If you want to copy the object to a folder object or another drive
can help you find the information you need.
object, the target object must be visible before you start the copy.
To search for a word or phrase in all the topics in the Command Reference:
To copy an object from a diskette in Drive A to another location:
   1. Select Search.
   1. Place a diskette into drive A.
   2. Type the word or words you want to find. You can also use the ? and *
   2. Open Drive A.
      wildcard characters in the search field.
  3. Point to the object you want to copy.
   3. Make sure that All sections is selected; then select Search.
  4. Press and hold Ctrl.
  A Search Results window appears containing a list of topics that have the word
  5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
or phrase that you were trying to find. To open a topic, point to a topic and
  6. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
double-click.
   7. Release mouse button 2.
  Sometimes, you have a general idea where the information is. You can limit the
  8. Release Ctrl.
  search to those topics by marking the topics.
  To copy an object from another location to a diskette in Drive A:
  To mark a topic:
  1. Place the diskette you want to copy the object to into drive A.
   1. Press and hold Ctrl.
  2. Point to the object you want to copy.
   2. Select the topics that you want to search.
  3. Press and hold Ctrl.
   3. Release Ctrl.
  4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
To unmark a topic:
  5. Drag the mouse to the Drive A object.
   1. Press and hold Ctrl.
  6. Release mouse button 2.
   2. Select the topic.
  7. Release Ctrl.
   3. Release Ctrl.
 
  To search for a word or phrase in marked topics:
  Moving Objects to or from a Diskette    139/2
   1. Select the + signs in the Contents window.
 
   2. Mark the topics you want to search.
There are times when you need to move an object (copy the object to a different
   3. Select Search.
location and delete it from the original location).
   4. Type the word or words you want to find.
Note: If you want to move the object to a folder object or another drive
   5. Make sure that Marked sections is selected; then select Search.
object, the target object must be visible before you start the move.
  When the Search Results window appears, open the topics and read them.
  To move an object from the diskette in Drive A to another location:
   1. Place a diskette into drive A.
   2. Open Drive A.
  3. Point to the object you want to move.
   4. Press and hold Shift.
   5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
   6. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
   7. Release mouse button 2.
  8. Release Shift.
  Note:  When moving an object from a diskette, the Shift key must be used with
mouse button 2.
To move an object from another location to the diskette in Drive A:
   1. Place the diskette you want to move the object to into drive A.
   2. Point to the object you want to move.
   3. Press and hold Shift.
   4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  5. Drag the object to the Drive A object.
   6. Release mouse button 2.
  7. Release Shift.
Note: When moving an object to a diskette, the Shift key must be used with
mouse button 2.


  Deleting Objects from a Diskette   140/2
  Using a Bookmark   195/3


You can delete (erase) unwanted objects from a diskette.
Information that you refer to frequently can be flagged using a bookmark.
To delete an object from a diskette:
Setting a bookmark duplicates the topic in a bookmark window.
   1. Place the diskette you want to delete the object from into drive A.
To set a bookmark:
   2. Open Drive A.
   1. Open the topic that you want to mark with a bookmark.
   3. Point to the object you want to delete.
  2. Select Services.
   4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  3. Select Bookmark.
   5. Drag the object to the Shredder.
  4. Change the name used for the bookmark (optional).
   6. Release mouse button 2.
  5. Make sure Place is selected; then select OK.
To view bookmarked information:
  1. Select Services.
   2. Select Bookmark.
   3. Select View.
  4. Select the topic you want to open.
   5. Select OK.
To remove a bookmark:
  1. Select Services.
  2. Select Bookmark.
   3. Select Remove.
  4. Select the topic you want to remove.
   5. Select OK.


  Formatting a Diskette   141/2
  Printing a Topic   196/3


You can format a diskette using the Drive A objectWhen a diskette is
Some people prefer to read information in a hardcopy format.  You can print a
formatted, it is checked for defects and prepared to accept data.  During this
topic, some topics, all topics, the table of contents, and the index of the
process, all existing data is erased from the diskette.
Command Reference.
To format a diskette:
To print a topic:
   1. Place the diskette you want to format into drive A.
   1. Open the topic you want to print.
   2. Point to Drive A.
  2. Select Print.
   3. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Make sure that This section is selected; then select Print.
   4. Select Format disk.
To print more than one topic:
   5. When the Format Disk window appears, type a Volume Label (name for the
  1. Press and hold Ctrl.
      disk or diskette).
   2. Select the topics that you want to print.
  6. Select Format.
   3. Release Ctrl.
  7. When the format is complete, select OK.
   4. Select Print.
   5. Make sure that Marked sections is selected; then select Print.
To print the table of contents, index, or all the topics:
  1. Select Print.
  2. Select the item you want to print.
  3. Select Print.
Note:  The Contents and Index choices only print the entries; they do not print
the text associated with the entries.  The All sections choice prints the
entire Command Reference.  Before electing to do this, be aware that the
document is large and will take a long time to print.
 
===Glossary 197/2===
The Glossary is an alphabetic listing of terms used in the Workplace Shell interface and the online help system.
To open the Glossary:
#Open Information.
#Open Glossary.
There are three ways to find a term in the glossary. You can type the first letter of the word you are looking for, scroll through the list or use the search function.
 
To scroll through the list to find a term in the glossary:
#Select the letter that the word begins with.  If the letter is not visible, select the tab arrow until the letter is visible; then select the letter.
#Select the up or down arrow in the scroll bar until the term is visible.
#Point to the term.
#Double-click.
To use the search function to find a term in the glossary:
#Select Search topics.
#Type the term that you want to find.
#Select Search.
#When the list of matching entries appears, point to the term; then double-click.


  Checking a Diskette    142/2
===REXX Information 198/2+===
REXX is a procedures language designed to make basic OS/2 programs easier to write and debug. Both beginning and experienced programmers will find REXX easy to use because it uses common English words, arithmetic and string functions, and OS/2 commands within a simple framework.
To view the REXX Information:
#Open Information.
#Open REXX Information.
For information about using the Contents window, searching, printing and getting additional information, see Command Reference.


You can check a diskette for:
===Displaying Help for OS/2 Messages 199/3===
  o  Defects, which are errors in the file allocation table or directory on the
You can get information to help you understand, correct, and respond to OS/2 messages. The way you request help depends upon how and where the message is displayed.
      diskette. If you select Write corrections to disk, any problems found
To get help for a message that appears in a window with a Help push button:
      will be fixed.
# Select the Help push button.
  o  Current usage, which is the amount of the diskette used for directories,
To get help for a message that appears on a full screen and is enclosed in a box:
      user files, and extended attributes. It also indicates the amount of
# Use the up or down arrow key to highlight Display Help.
      space that is reserved on the diskette.
# Press Enter.
  o File system type, which is the type of file system on the diskette. (All
To get help for an error message that has a message number, preceded by the letters SYS:
      diskettes are formatted for the FAT file system.)
# At the OS/2 command prompt, type HELP followed by a space and the message number. (It is not necessary to type the letters SYS or the leading zeros.)
  o Total disk space, which is the capacity of the diskette in bytes.
# Press Enter.
  o Total amount of disk space available, which is the amount of free space
For example, if you received this message:
      left on the diskette.
SYS0002: The system cannot find the file specified.
  To check a diskette:
To request help for this message, type HELP 2 and then press Enter. The following help appears:
  1. Place the diskette to be checked into drive A.
SYS0002:  The system cannot find the file specified.
  2. Point to Drive A.
  EXPLANATION:  The file named in the command does not exist in the current directory or search path specifiedOr, the file name was entered incorrectly.
  3. Click mouse button 2.
ACTION:  Retry the command using the correct file name.
  4. Select Check disk.
 
  5. Select Write corrections to disk.
===Mastering the Master Help Index 200/1+===
  6. Select Check.
The Master Help Index is an online, alphabetic list of topics available to help you while using OS/2. This index contains information about:
  7. After a few seconds, the Check Disk - Results window is displayed. Select
*Things to consider before performing a task
      Cancel to remove the window.
*Steps to take to complete a task
*OS/2 concepts
*DOS error messages
To open the Master Help Index:
#Open Information.
#Open Master Help Index
Tabs turn to the page in the index of the selected alphabet letter. Tab arrows scroll the tabs but do not scroll the index entries.
Scroll bar arrows (vertical scroll bar) scroll the index entries one line at a time. Scroll bar arrows (horizontal scroll bar) scroll the index entries to the left or right so you can read information that does not fit into the window.
Index entries are the online help for the OS/2 operating system.


Using Command Prompts    143/1+
To open an index entry for viewing:
#Point to the entry.
#Double-click.


The Command Prompts folder contains objects that open DOS, OS/2, and WIN-OS/2
===Accessing Additional Information 201/2===
sessions.  A session is one instance of a command prompt or started program.
When an index entry is opened, the information for the topic is displayed in a window. Some entries have highlighted words and phrases in the window, which indicate that additional information is hidden "beneath" the word or phrase.
Each session is separate from all other sessions that might be running on the
computer.
To open the Command Prompts object:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.


OS/2 Command Prompts    144/2
To view the additional information:
#Point to the highlighted word or phrase.
#Double-click.
To return to the previous window of information:
#Select Previous.


The OS/2 Full-Screen and OS/2 Window objects are used to access an OS/2 command
===Searching for a Topic 202/2===
prompt.  At these command prompts, you can start programs and enter OS/2
You can search the Master Help Index for an entry using one or more words that describe the topic. For example, to search for information about how to duplicate an object, you might search using the word "duplicate", "duplicates", or even "duplicating". The result of a search (using duplicate, duplicates, or duplicating) is "copying an object".
commands.
For a description of OS/2 commands that can be used at these prompts, see the
OS/2 Command Reference in the Information folder.
To start an OS/2 command prompt session:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open OS/2 Full Screen, OS/2 Window, or both.
When you close a session, the session and its related windows are automatically
closed.  Make sure that you save all important data in the session before you
close it.
To close an OS/2 command prompt session:
  1. Type Exit.
  2. Press Enter.
You can switch (temporarily leave without closing) from an OS/2 command prompt
session to another running program.  When you switch sessions, your command
prompt session is saved and then restored when you switch back.
To temporarily leave an OS/2 command prompt session:
  1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
  2. Point to a title on the Window List.
  3. Double-click.
or:
  1. Press Alt+Esc to switch to another open object.


DOS Command Prompts    145/2
To search for a topic:
#Open the Master Help Index.
#Select Search topics.
#In the Search string field, type the word or words that describe the topic.
#Select Search.
#When the list of topics (matched items) appears, open the entry you want to read.


The DOS Full-Screen and DOS Window objects are used to access a DOS command
===Printing a Master Help Index Entry 203/2===
prompt.  At these command prompts, you can start programs and enter DOS
To print a Master Help Index entry:
commands.
#Open the index entry you want to print.
For a description of DOS commands that can be used at these prompts, see the
#Select Print topic.
OS/2 Command Reference in the Information folder.
For more information about using the Master Help Index, review the OS/2 Tutorial.
To start a DOS command prompt session:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open DOS Full Screen, DOS Window, or both.
When you close a session, the session and its related windows are automatically
closed.  Make sure that you save all important data in the session before you
close it.
To close a DOS command prompt session:
  1. Type Exit.
  2. Press Enter.
You can switch from a DOS command prompt session to another running program.
When you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then
restored when you switch back.
To temporarily leave a DOS command prompt session:
  1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
  2. Point to a title on the Window List.
  3. Double-click.
or:
  1. Press Alt+Esc to display the Desktop.


  DOS from Drive A    146/2+
==Part 4 - Troubleshooting 204/1==
===Solving Installation Problems 205/1+===
This chapter provides information to help you solve problems you might encounter while installing OS/2*. It includes information about what to do if you have problems, plus specific instructions for recovering from error messages or problems with installation diskettes, screens, or CD-ROMs.
Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the information dealing with a particular problem.


The DOS from Drive A object is used to start a specific version (3.0 or later)
===What to Do If You Have Problems 206/2===
of DOS from a disketteBy using a specific version of DOS, you can use
Installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most cases, you will not experience problemsHowever, if you do encounter a problem during installation, do the following:
programs that will not run under the DOS provided with OS/2.
#Read through this chapter to see if the problem you are experiencing is documented.
Before you can start a specific DOS version from a diskette, you must create the
#If you received an error message (or error number), locate the message in this chapter and perform the suggested actions to resolve the problem.
diskette used to start the DOS version.  This diskette is commonly known as a
#If your problem is not addressed in this section, refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions on how to get additional assistance.
DOS Startup diskette or DOS bootable diskette.
When you report your problem make sure you include the following information:
*The brand and model of the equipment you are using
*The error message or number, if any, that appeared on your screen
*The number of the installation diskette you were using when the problem occurred
*The number for your fax machine, or the number of a fax machine to which you have access


  Creating a DOS Startup Diskette   147/3
===Editing the CONFIG.SYS File on Diskette 1 207/2===
A CONFIG.SYS file contains lines of instructions that control how your computer starts up and how it works with the devices you have attached to it.
Diskette 1, which comes with OS/2, contains a CONFIG.SYS file. The file is added to your root directory during installation. There might be instances in which you will be instructed in this chapter to edit your CONFIG.SYS file in order to add a statement, "remark out" a line, or modify an existing line in the file.
If you need to alter the CONFIG.SYS file before you install OS/2, you will need to make the changes to the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1.
Note:  If the CONFIG.SYS file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able to
restart your computer.  Be careful when editing the file.


Note:  If you already have a DOS Startup diskette, go to step 6 to make sure the
To edit the CONFIG.SYS file that is on Diskette 1, use an ASCII text editor.
diskette is set up to work correctly with the DOS from Drive A object.
If you do not have a text editor installed on your computer, use the editor that comes on the OS/2 installation diskettes. Follow these steps:
To create a DOS Startup diskette:
   1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
   1. Boot your system with a version of DOS. You can use a:
  2. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
        o DOS installation diskette
      to restart it.
        o  Hard disk that DOS has been installed on
   3. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and
        o  Diskette that DOS has been installed on
      insert Diskette 1.
  2. Type FORMAT A: /S
   4. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to display the command
   3. Place a blank diskette into drive A.
      prompt.
   4. Press Enter.  This transfers the system files to the diskette.
   5. At the command prompt, type TEDIT CONFIG.SYS and press Enter. The file
   5. When the format is complete, remove the diskette.
      will appear on your screen, and you can make any changes or additions to
  6. Start OS/2 by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.
      it. (Press F1 if you need help using the editor.)
  7. Select OS/2 System.
   6. When you are done working on the file, press F2 to save it.
   8. Select Drives.
   7. Press F4 to quit the editor.
   9. Select Drive C.
 
  10. Open the OS/2 folder; then open the MDOS folder.
===Installation Error Messages 208/2===
  11. Place the formatted diskette containing the system files into drive A.
If you receive one of the following error messages on your screen while installing OS/2, try to resolve the problem with the suggested action.
  12. Copy the following data-file objects from Drive C to the Drive A object:
Only some files were copied. You may be out of disk space.
        o  FSFILTER.SYS
Explanation: The installation program stopped transferring files because there
        o FSACCESS.EXE You can copy as many additional DOS files to the
              was not enough hard disk space available.
          diskette as you want.
  Action:      Move non-OS/2 operating system files out of the installation
  13. Open the Templates folder.
              partition. You can store these files in another partition or on
  14. Copy a Data File object to the Desktop.
              a diskette. If you intend to format the installation partition,
  15. Point to the data-file object and double-click.  The OS/2 System Editor
              remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
       starts.
              files.
  16. Type the following information into the data file:
An error occurred when System Installation tried to copy a file.
      DEVICE=FSFILTER.SYS
  Explanation 1: The installation diskette might contain errors.
       DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\HIMEM.SYS
Action:       Request a replacement diskette from your place of purchase.
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\EMM386.SYS
Explanation 2: The installation program stopped transferring files because
      DOS=HIGH,UMB
              there was not enough hard disk space available.
      DEVICEHIGH=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS
Action:       Move non-OS/2 operating system files out of the installation
      FILES=20
              partition. You can store these files in another partition or on
       BUFFERS=20
              a diskette. If you intend to format the installation partition,
  17. Point to the title-bar icon of the OS/2 System Editor; then double-click.
              remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
  18. Select Save as; then type A:\CONFIG.SYS and press Enter.
              files.
  19. Point to the data-file object again and double-click.
Explanation 3: The hard disk might contain errors.
  20. Type the following information into the data file:
Action:       Follow the CHKDSK procedure outlined in Recovering from Errors on
      ECHO OFF
              the Hard Disk.
      PROMPT $P$G
An error occurred when System Installation tried to transfer system files to
      SET COMSPEC=A:\COMMAND.COM
your hard disk. Your hard disk might be unusable.
      C:\OS2\MDOS\MOUSE.COM
Explanation:  The installation program stopped transferring files because an
      PATH A:\
              error occurred while the boot record was being written.
  21. Point to the title-bar icon of the OS/2 System Editor; then double-click.
Action:      Format the installation partition and restart the installation.
  22. Select Save as; then type A:\AUTOEXEC.BAT and press Enter.
              Remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
 
              files.
  Starting DOS from Drive A    148/3
System Installation failed trying to load a module into memory.
 
Explanation: The installation program could not load a system module because
To start a DOS from Drive A session:
              there is not enough memory.  OS/2 requires a minimum of 4MB of
  1. Insert the DOS Startup diskette in drive A.
              memory.
  2. Open OS/2 System.
Action:      Add more system memory (RAM).
  3. Open Command Prompts.
An error occurred when System Installation tried to allocate a segment of
  4. Open DOS from Drive A.
  memory.
  To close a DOS from Drive A session:
Explanation: The installation program could not allocate a segment of memory
  1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
              because there is not enough memory. OS/2 requires a minimum of
  2. Point to DOS from Drive A in the Window List.
              4MB of memory.
  3. Click mouse button 2.
Action:      Add more system memory (RAM).
  4. Click on Close.
FDISK unsuccessful.
  You can switch from a DOS from Drive A session to another running program.
  Explanation: Your hard disk controller might not be supported.
  When you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then
Action:      Make a copy of Diskette 1. Locate the Device Support Diskette
restored when you switch back.
              supplied by the manufacturer of your hard disk controller. Copy
  To temporarily leave a DOS from Drive A session:
              the OS/2 device driver from that Device Support Diskette onto the
  1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
              copy of Diskette 1. Then add the statement BASEDEV=xxx.SYS
  2. Point to a title on the Window List.
              (where xxx is the name of the device driver) to the CONFIG.SYS
  3. Double-click.
              file on the copy of Diskette 1, and restart the installation.
  or:
  An error occurred when System Installation tried to locate the dynamic link
  1. Press Alt+Esc to display the Desktop.
  library.
 
  Explanation: The installation program could not load the dynamic link library
  WIN-OS/2 Full Screen   149/2
              because there is not enough random access memory (RAM). OS/2
 
              requires a minimum of 4MB of memory
The WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen object is used to run multiple Windows programs in a
Action:      Add more system memory (RAM).
full-screen session. For more information about WIN-OS/2, see the online
A disk read error occurred.
WIN-OS/2 Book located in the Information folder.
  Explanation: The BIOS level of the Future Domain** adapter is not compatible.
To start a WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen session:
  Action:      Contact Future Domain for a BIOS upgrade if you own the
  1. open the object.
              following:
  To close a WIN-OS/2 full-screen session:
  o  Future Domain TMC-850/860/875/885 with BIOS revision level 7.0
  1. Point to the title-bar icon.
   o  Future Domain TMC-1660/1670/1680 with BIOS revision level 2.0
  2. Double-click.
OS/2 is unable to operate your hard disk or your diskette drive.
To switch to the OS/2 Desktop:
  Explanation 1: This might indicate some incompatibility between OS/2 and the
  1. Point to the OS/2 Desktop object in the lower left corner of the screen.
              diskette drive controller or hard disk controller in your system.
  2. Double-click.
Action:      Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the diskette or hard disk from which
 
              you are starting OS/2.  Remove all lines with
  Starting Multiple Sessions    150/2
              BASEDEV=xxxxxxxx.ADD (where xxxxxxxx can be any characters), and
 
              make sure the following two lines appear in the CONFIG.SYS:
You can have multiple sessions of any object open.
              BASEDEV=IBMxFLPY.ADD
To open more than one session of an object:
              BASEDEV=IBMINT13.I13
  1. Open OS/2 System.
              (where x is replaced by a 2 if you are using a Micro Channel
  2. Open Command Prompts.
              system, and a 1 if you are using any other system.)
  3. Copy one of the objects (for example, DOS Window) by holding down the Ctrl
  Explanation 2: A diskette drive or a hard disk drive controller might have an
      key and mouse button 2 and dragging the object to the same or another
              additional device (such as a tape backup) attached to it.
      folderThen release the mouse button and the Ctrl key.
Action:       Disconnect additional devices, if possible.
  4. Open the object to start the session.
Explanation 3: There might be an interrupt request (IRQ) level conflict between
  5. Repeat the steps to create and open another session.
              the diskette drive or hard disk controller and other devices
  Or, if you need multiple copies of objects often, you can alter the settings of
              installed on your system.
  the object so that it creates another session every time you open itDo the
  Action:      Change IRQ levels to eliminate conflicts.
following:
Explanation 4: The hard disk partition on which you are installing OS/2 was
  1. Open OS/2 System.
              compressed with a DOS data compression program.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
Action:      Use the data compression program to decompress the partition.
   3. Point to the object.
              Then restart the installation procedure.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  TRAPxxx
  5. Select Settings.
Explanation:  In general, traps are symptoms of software-related problems.
   6. Select the Window tab.
              After you have pursued these symptoms from a software failure
  7. Select the Create new window radio button.
              perspective, you should consider the potential of a hardware
  8. Close the notebook by double-clicking mouse button 1 on the title-bar
              cause relating to caches and memory, such as the following:
       iconNow, each time you select the object a new session starts.
  o If your computer has an 80486 microprocessor, your computer might require
 
      faster RAM chips (60ns or 70ns).
  Starting and Exiting BASICA and QBASIC    151/2
  o There might be a problem with the external (level-2) CPU memory cache or
 
      main memory system on ISA or EISA systems.
To start the BASICA or QBASIC programs:
Action:      Try the following:
Note:  BASICA will only run on IBM computers.
   1. From the setup/diagnostics diskette or the BIOS Setup program built into
  1. Open OS/2 System.
      the computer, try disabling all shadow RAM and external (level- 2) CPU
  2. Open Command Prompts.
      memory caches.
  3. Open OS/2 Full Screen, OS/2 Window, DOS Full Screen, or DOS Window.
   2. If problems persist during the installation of OS/2 after performing the
  4. Type BASICA or QBASIC at the command prompt; then press Enter.
      above action, turn off the turbo switch (if one is available) on your
  To exit the BASICA program:
       system and retry the operationDisable caching during installation or
  1. Type SYSTEM.
      turn the turbo switch off.
  2. Press Enter.
  Some of the more common traps are listed below.  If you receive a trap error
  To exit the QBASIC program:
that is not listed, you can view help for the trap after OS/2 is installed, by
  1. Select File.
typing HELP followed by the trap number at an OS/2 command prompt. For
  2. Select Exit.
example:
  3. Select Enter.
HELP 0002
 
If the trap error contains a letter, as in a TRAP D error you must convert the
  Cleaning Up Your Desktop    152/1+
  hexadecimal number (D) to decimal then add it to 1930. For example, TRAP D
 
converted would be 1943 because D hexadecimal is 13 decimal (13 added to 1930
The Minimized Window Viewer is where open objects are stored when they are
  equals 1943). So you would type HELP 1943 at an OS/2 command prompt.
minimized. This keeps your desktop organized but still allows you to have
A list of the hexadecimal to decimal conversions are listed below:
multiple objects open and running.
  A = 10      D = 13
To open the Minimized Window Viewer:
B = 11      E = 14
  1. Point to Minimized Window Viewer.
C = 12      F = 15
  2. Double-click.
  TRAP0002
 
Explanation:  A TRAP0002 error is a hardware error and is usually related
Displaying an Object in the Minimized Window Viewer    153/2
              directly to memory. Mismatched memory modules can often cause
 
              these kinds of errors. Your computer might have a variety of
The objects in the Minimized Window Viewer are still open, but they are running
              single inline memory modules (SIMMs) that were produced by
in the background (cannot accept user input).
              different manufacturers or that operate at different speeds.
To display an object found in the Minimized Window Viewer:
              (For example, a 1 x 9 module cannot be used with a 1 x 3 module.)
   1. Open the Minimized Window Viewer.
Action:      Try the following:
   2. Point to the object.
   o  Have your computer checked by a service representative.
  3. Double-click.
   o  If your computer memory is okay and the problem persists, make sure that
or:
      your system BIOS is of a recent date (1991 or later). Refer to Chapter 17,
  1. Point to an empty area on the desktop.
      "Special Hardware Considerations," for more information about BIOS, or
  2. Click mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the same time.
      contact the manufacturer of your computer BIOS to receive the latest
  3. Point to the title of the object you want to display.
      version.
  4. Double-click.
SYS0005
  Note: There may be more titles in the Window List than objects in the
Explanation:  When you perform a redirected remote installation of OS/2 using
  Minimized Window Viewer, because hidden windows are also displayed in the
              SYSINST2 for panel installation, the error message SYS0005
Window List.
              appears while the computer attempts to copy UNPACK2.EXE.
 
  Action:       This Access Denied Error is caused by damage to the extended
Minimizing an Object to the Desktop    154/2
              attribute data on the NetWare** Server. To correct this problem,
 
              delete the old disk images on the server and create new OS/2 disk
Some frequently used objects might be easier to re-access if they are minimized
              images.
to the desktop instead of the Minimized Window Viewer.
SYS1200 and EC=00BF
To make an object minimize to the desktop:
Explanation:  The DOS environment cannot be created.
  1. Point to the object you want to minimize to the desktop.
Action:      If you see the error message SYS1200 while attempting to use the
  2. Click mouse button 2.
              Dual Boot feature to change to DOS, and you also see error code
  3. Select Settings.
              EC=00BF, check your CONFIG.SYS file. Make sure your virtual DOS
  4. Select the Window tab.
              device drivers have not been remarked out of or removed from your
  5. Select Minimize button.  (If the choice is present.)
              CONFIG.SYS file. If necessary, look at the CONFIG.SYS file in
  6. Select Minimize window to desktop.
              the OS2\INSTALL directory (the CONFIG.SYS file as it was
  7. Point to the title-bar icon.
              originally installed) to see how the DOS device drivers should be
  8. Double-click.
              listed.
 
SYS1201
  Minimizing an Object to the Minimized Window Viewer    155/2
  Explanation:  A device driver specified in the CONFIG.SYS file cannot be found,
 
              is the incorrect device driver (ex. DOS device driver), or is
Most objects by default are set up to minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer.
              specified twice within the file.
However, some objects are not.
Action:       Make sure the correct device driver for the device is installed,
To make an object minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer:
              and then check the CONFIG.SYS file to make sure the information
  1. Point to the object you want to minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer.
              specified is correct.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
SYS1475
  3. Select Settings.
Explanation:  The file OS2BOOT cannot be foundThis is a hidden system file
  4. Select the Window tab.
              and must reside in the root directory of the drive from which the
  5. Select Minimize button(If the choice is present.)
              operating system is started.
  6. Select Minimize window to viewer.
Action:      Remove the diskette from drive A and restart the systemIf the
  7. Point to the title-bar icon.
              problem was not caused by a diskette in drive A, then the OS2BOOT
  8. Double-click.
              file might be missingTry the following procedure:
 
   1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
  Using the Shredder    156/1+
   2. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
 
      to restart it.
The Shredder object provides a quick and easy way to delete objectsIt is
   3. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and
located on the LaunchPad .
      insert Diskette 1.
To delete an object:
   4. Press Enter.
   1. Point to the object.
  5. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to display the command
   2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
      prompt.
  3. Drag the object to the Shredder.
  6. Reinsert the Installation Diskette.
   4. Release mouse button 2.
  7. Type sysinstx c: and press Enter(If your operating system resides on a
   5. Respond to confirmation messages (if applicable).
      drive other than C, use the appropriate drive letter instead.)
 
              If this procedure does not correct the problem, it might be
Customizing the Delete Confirmations    157/2
              necessary to reinstall the operating system.
 
SYS1719
You can change the settings of your desktop to specify when confirmation
  Explanation: The file IBM386FS\HPFS386.IFS does not contain a valid device
messages appear, if any, when you delete an objectThe following confirmation
              driver or file system driver.
choices are available:
Action:      Edit your CONFIG.SYS file and delete the following line:
Confirm on folder delete  Displays a confirmation message whenever a folder
              IFS=x:\OS2\HPFS.IFS
                          object is deleted using the Shredder object or a
SYS2025
                          pop-up menu.
Explanation:  A disk read error occurred. This might be a disk error or a
Confirm on delete        Displays a confirmation message whenever an object is
              damaged system boot record.
                          deleted using the Shredder object or a pop-up menu.
Actions:      Try the following:
    Important Disabling the confirmation messages increases your chances of
   o  If this error occurred while the system was loading, follow the procedure
    accidentally deleting an object.
      in Recovering from Errors on the Hard Disk.
  To change the settings:
  o If this error occurred when the system was reading the installation
  1. Open OS/2 System.
      diskettes, there might be an error on the disketteIf you already have
  2. Open System Setup.
      an operating system installed on your computer, use the XDFCOPY command to
  3. Open System.
      make a copy of the installation diskettes. Retry the installation with
  4. Select the Confirmations tab.
      the newly copied diskettes.
  5. Make sure a check mark appears in each choice that you want to enable.  To
   o  If your computer has BIOS supplied by AMI** or Phoenix**, you might need
      add or remove a check mark, select the choice.
       to upgrade the BIOS. Refer to Chapter 17, "Special Hardware
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
      Considerations."
   7. Double-click.
  o If your system has a local bus IDE controller card, disable the BIOS on
 
      the 32-bit local bus IDE controller card and use the generic INT13 driver
  Preparing Your System to Recover Deleted Objects    158/2
      instead of IBM1S506.ADD.
 
  o Make sure that there is not a hardware problem with your hard disk
Chances are that at some point you will accidentally delete an object that you
      controller or your diskette drive.
needYou can recover a deleted object if the DELDIR environment variable is
SYS2026
enabled in your CONFIG.SYS file prior to deleting the object.
Explanation: The file OS2LDR cannot be found. This is a hidden system file
To enable DELDIR:
              and must reside in the root directory of the drive from which the
   1. Edit your C:\CONFIG.SYS file and remove the REM statement from the
              operating system is started.
       beginning of the DELDIR statement.
  Action:      Try the following:
        a. Open OS/2 System.
              Make sure a non-system diskette is not in the diskette drive. If
        b. Open Drives.
              a diskette is in the drive, remove it and restart the system.
        c. Open Drive C. (If the OS/2 operating system is installed on a
              If the OS2LDR file is still missing:
          different drive, open that drive instead.)
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette into the diskette drive and restart the
        d. After the Drive C object opens, a tree view of its contents is
      system.
          displayed. Open the Drive C entry in the tree.
  2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
        e. Open the C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
   3. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to access a command
        f. Select Edit.
       prompt.
        g. Select Find.
  4. Copy the OS2LDR file from the Installation Diskette to the root directory
        h. Type DELDIR (all caps) in the Find field.
      on the OS/2 partition.
        i. Select Find. (If the DELDIR statement is not found, see the online
  5. Restart the system.
          Command Reference for instructions on how to add it.)
  SYS2027
        j. Select the beginning of the DELDIR line.
  Explanation:  This message usually accompanies messages SYS1475 and SYS2025,
        k. Delete REM from the beginning of the line using the Del key.
              and means that the system must be restartedSee the explanation
        l. Point to the title-bar icon.
              and actions for these messages for more specific information.
        m. Double-click.
  Action:       Insert a system diskette and restart the system.
        n. Select Save.
SYS2028
        o. Select Type.
  Explanation:  The system cannot find the OS2KRNL file. This is a hidden system
        p. Select Set.
              file and must reside in the root directory of the drive from
   2. Shut down your system; then restart it.  Changes made to the CONFIG.SYS
              which the operating system is started.
       object are not initiated until the system is restarted.
Action:      Try the following:
The DELDIR statement specifies the size of the directory used to hold deleted
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette into the diskette drive and restart the
objects.  When the directory is full, the oldest files in the directory are
      system.
  removed in order to make room for the new objects.
  2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
  If you delete an object, recover it as soon as possible afterwards, or it might
  3. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to access a command
be too lateFor more information about DELDIR, see the online Command
      prompt.
Reference.
  4. Copy the OS2KRNLI file from the Installation Diskette to the root
  Note: To be able to recover objects deleted in a DOS session, repeat the
      directory of the OS/2 partition.  Type: A:OS2KRNLI C:\OS2KRNL and press
  preceding procedure on the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
      Enter. (Where A: is the diskette drive containing the Installation
      Diskette and C: is the drive on which you are installing OS/2.) Notice the
      change in name of the OS2KRNL file.
  5. Remove the diskette from the drive.
  6. Restart the system.
SYS2029
Explanation:  The file OS2KRNL is damaged or not readable.
Action:      Copy the OS2KRNLI file from the Installation Diskette to the root
              directory of the drive containing the operating system.  Follow
              the instructions for error message SYS2028.
SYS2030
Explanation:  The system does not have enough memory to start the operating
              system.  OS/2 requires a minimum of 4MB of memory.
Action:      Add more memory to the system.
SYS3146
Explanation:  The system cannot find the OS2LDR.MSG file.  This is a hidden
              system file and must reside in the root directory of the drive
              from which the operating system is started.
Action:      Copy the OS2LDR.MSG file from the Installation Diskette to the
              root directory of the drive containing the operating system.
SYS3147
Explanation:  The OS2LDR.MSG file is not readable.  The file might be damaged.
Action:      Copy the OS2LDR.MSG file from the Installation Diskette to the
              root directory of the drive containing the operating system.
SYS3161
Explanation:  The system detected an 8086, 8088, or 80286 processor.  These
              processors are not supported by OS/2.
Action:      Upgrade your system so that your processor is compatible with the
              80386 processor.
 
===Installation Diskette Problems 209/2===
Following are solutions to problems that might occur while you are using the installation diskettes to install OS/2.
 
;Diskette 1:If the installation procedure stops while Diskette 1 is in the diskette drive, there might be a problem with the features of the hard disk controller. If the controller has on-board disk caching, disable the caching. If the controller can do asynchronous memory refreshes, turn off that feature. Make sure that other IRQ settings do not conflict with the hard disk controller IRQ setting. If multiple hard disk controllers or hardcards are installed in the system, it might be necessary to remove one of them.<br />The following apply to machine-specific problems:
*If you are installing on a system with an Allways** IN2000 SCSI adapter, and an IPE or FDISK error is displayed during the installation of Diskette 1. Upgrade your system to the current BIOS level of VCN:1-02.  The Allways IN2000 SCSI adapter might require an EPROM upgrade to operate with OS/2. You might find that you have some problems when trying to install over DOS partitions.  To correct these problems, you need to install the EPROM and reformat the hard drive.
*If you are installing OS/2 on a Mylex** system, a TRAP0008 error occurs during the installation of Diskette 1. For more information on this error, contact Mylex.
*If you are installing on a Compaq** 386/331 Deskpro system, a TRAP000D error occurs during the installation of Diskette 1.  To correct this problem, do the following:
1. Make a copy of Diskette 1.  You will modify the copy.
2. Use a text editor to edit the CONFIG.SYS file that exists on the copy of Diskette 1.
3. Delete the following statement from the CONFIG.SYS file:
      BASEDEV=IBM2SCSI.ADD
4. Use the copy of the diskette during the installation process instead of the original.
;Diskette 3: If the installation program continues to prompt you to insert Diskette 3, you have a 1.44 MB diskette drive that can work in either IBM* PC/XT* mode or IBM PCAT mode.  Contact your service representative to determine if there are hardware-specific considerations.
;Any Diskette: If several diskettes are successfully installed, then the system refuses a diskette and makes a beeping sound, your system might be infected with the Joshi virus. (This symptom usually appears after the first phase of the installation is complete and the system is restarted.) The Joshi virus is a DOS virus that interferes with OS/2 and causes random lockups. The Joshi virus:
* Operates by trapping disk reads and writes.  If the virus is active in memory, programs that try to locate the virus on diskette will have problems detecting it.
* Is carried on the boot sector of an infected data diskette or system diskette. This virus originated in DOS but can survive in OS/2.  When you start an infected system, the virus resides in memory and survives a Ctrl+Alt+Del startup.  If you do not type Happy Birthday Joshi, the system will stop.
* Is copied to the boot sector of every diskette. The virus will be transferred to any computer on which the user performed any diskette operation that included reading from, or writing to, the infected diskette.
* Spreads from infected diskettes to DOS and OS/2 systems when the systems are started from diskettes.
* Interferes with the startup from the hard disk of OS/2-based systems. The warning that OS/2 will give is that the IBM1FLPY.ADD file is bad or missing.
Many antivirus packages are effective at detecting this virus.
In DOS, the Norton Antivirus Version 2.1 can both detect and clear the virus.
In OS/2, Central Point Anti-Virus** can detect the virus.
McAfee** Clean and Scan and IBM Anti-Virus/2* (AV/2) can both detect and clear the virus.


Recovering Deleted Objects    159/2
===Installation Screen Problems 210/2===
Following are solutions for problems you might have with your screen during the installation of OS/2.


You can recover a deleted or erased object using the UNDELETE command.
White Screen during Installation
Note:  The DELDIR environment variable must be enabled prior to the deletion of
 
the object.  For more information about DELDIR, see Preparing Your System to
If the display screen is white during the installation of OS/2 and there is no system activity, set the video adapter to operate on an 8-bit mode and move the adapter to an 8-bit slot. Do the following:
Recover Deleted Objects.
   1. Turn off the computer and disable the autosensing capability of the video
To recover a deleted object:
       adapter.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
   2. Modify the settingsRefer to the documentation that came with your video
  2. Open Command Prompts.
       adapter.
  3. Open a DOS or OS/2 window.
   3. Place the adapter in an 8-bit slotThen install OS/2.
  4. Type UNDELETE /L and press Enter to see a list of file names associated
   4. Return the adapter to the 16-bit slot and set back to the 16-bit mode.
      with the recently deleted objects.
 
   5. Write down the complete path and file name.  Include the drive letter,
White Screen with Disk Light On Constantly
      directory names, and the file name.  For example:
       C:\OS2\SAMPLE.TXT
   6. Type UNDELETE followed by the complete path and file nameFor example:
       UNDELETE C:\OS2\SAMPLE.TXT
   7. Press Enter.
The file associated with the deleted object has now been successfully
recoveredFor more information about UNDELETE, see the online Command
Reference.
To place the object back on the desktop:
  1. Open Drives.
  2. Open the drive that contains the recovered file (object).
   3. Find the object on the drive.
  4. Point to the object.
  5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  6. Drag the object to the desktop.
  7. Release mouse button 2.


  Using Templates    160/1+
If you are installing OS/2 on a fast 486 ISA-bus computer, you might encounter a white screen and the disk light constantly on. To correct this problem, try to reduce the speed of the computer by turning off the turbo mode of the computer.  Refer to the documentation that came with your computer to find out how to change the mode.


A template is an object that you can use as a model to create additional
Black Lines on an OS/2 Logo Screen
objects.  When you drag a template, you create another of the original object,
as though you were peeling one of the objects off a stack.  The new object has
the same settings and contents as the templates in the stack.


  Creating an Object from the Templates Folder    161/2+
During the installation on a Gateway** 2000 with an 80486/66MHz processor, a local bus, and an ATI** Graphics Ultra Pro, the system will get to the screen with the colorful OS/2 logo, and then the installation will stop. The display screen shows horizontal bands of video separated by black bands that scroll horizontally across the screen.  To correct this problem, do the following:
1. Start DOS.
2. At the DOS prompt, type CD \MACH32 and press Enter.
  3. Type install and press Enter.
4. At the Main Selection screen, select Set Power Up Configuration.
5. Select Monitor Type and press Enter.
6. Select 1572 Monitor with 72Hz Refresh Rate and press Enter.
7. Select IBM Default (or 60Hz) as the new display.
Note:  After OS/2 is successfully installed, repeat the steps to reselect the 1572 Monitor type.


You can create new objects by using the objects in the Templates folder.  To
===Installation CD-ROM Problems 211/2===
open the Templates folder:
Cannot Access CD-ROM During Installation
  1. Point to the Templates object on the Desktop.
  2. Double-click.


  Creating a Folder Object    162/3
If the device driver for your CD-ROM is not included in the OS/2 package, but is available from the CD-ROM manufacturer, you can modify Diskette 1 to add the device driver. Refer to "Chapter 17, Special Hardware Considerations" for instructions.


To use the Folder template to create a new folder:
If you cannot access your CD-ROM drive during installation from a CD, but you can access the drive using DOS, you can install OS/2 using disk images. Disk Images are copies of the installation program that you put on disketteYou create disk images by using the XDFCOPY utility program to copy images from the CD to diskettes.  You then use these diskettes to install OS/2.
  1. Open Templates.
  2. Point to the Folder template.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag a copy of the Folder template to the Desktop or to another folder.
  5. Release mouse button 2An empty folder is created.
  6. Rename the folder (for example, "My new folder"). For information about
      renaming, see the OS/2 Tutorial.
  You can drag any objects you want (for example, program objects and data-file
objects) to the new folder.
    Tip The operating system will add new templates when you install programs
    that support them.  The MMPM/2 application supports templates for digital
    audio, MIDI, and digital video files.


  Creating a Data-File Object    163/3
Note: Installation diskettes are in a special format called XDF. The only command you should use with an XDF disketee is XDFCOPY.


To use the Data File template to create a data-file object:
Be sure to use formatted diskettes for this procedure.  To find out exactly how many diskettes you will need:
   1. Open Templates.
   1. Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive
   2. Move the mouse pointer to the Data-File template.
   2. Type: DIR X:\DISKIMGS\OS2\35 /W (where: X is the drive letter of your
   3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
      CD-ROM drive and 35 is the diskette size.)
   4. Drag the Data-File template to any folder (including the Desktop folder).
   3. Press Enter.  A list of files will appear on your display.
       A new data-file object is created.
   4. Count the files that end with the extension .DSK.  Each .DSK file will
  5. Open the data-file object to begin editing the file with the System
       require a separate diskette.
      Editor.
Use the following command to create each disk image:
  6. When you are ready to save the file, select File; then select Save.
X:\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY
      Respond to the system prompts (for example, in the Save notification
X:\DISKIMGS\OS2\size\diskname.dsk Y:
      window, indicate if you want a file type such as plain text).
where:
  7. Double-click mouse button 1 on the title-bar icon to close the window.
X:                      is the drive letter of the CD-ROM drive.
  8. Rename the object currently titled "Data File"Refer to the OS/2
\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY        is the location and name of the program used to create
      Tutorial.
                          the diskettes
  Note:  If you use Save as on the File menu instead of Save, another object is
DISKIMGS\OS2\size        is the location of the files containing the disk
created with the new name. "Data File" remains an empty file.
                          images. Substitute 35 for the size parameterUse 35
  If you open a data-file object that is not associated with any other program,
                          for 3.5-inch 1.44MB and 2.88MB diskettes.
it automatically opens in the OS/2 System EditorIf you prefer, you can
  diskname.dsk            is the disk image file name (for example, DISK0.DSK).
associate the data-file object with one or more program objects (for more
  Y:                      is the drive letter of your diskette drive.
  information, see the Master Help Index)For more information about using the
  For example, to create the Installation Diskette (DISK0.DSK) on a 3.5-inch
  OS/2 System Editor, select Help on the menu.
  diskette, type the following and press Enter.
  E:\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY E:\DISKIMGS\OS2\35\DISK0.DSK A:
  Where: E: is the CD-ROM drive and A: is the diskette drive.


Creating a Program Object    164/3
===Miscellaneous Installation Problems 212/2===
Following are solutions to miscellaneous problems that might occur while you are installing OS/2.


A program object starts a program or a session.  If you install a new OS/2, DOS,
Missing Device Driver Needed for Installation
or Windows program, you might need to run the Add Programs program in the System
Setup folder to create a program object.  This is the recommended method of
creating a program object.
You also can create a program object using the Templates folder.
  1. Open Templates.
  2. Move the mouse pointer to the Program template.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the Program template to a folder or to the Desktop.
  5. Customize the program object using the Settings notebook.  For example,
      select the session type, name the program object, or set up the
      associations.


Creating a Template of an Object   165/2
If the device driver needed to install OS/2 on your computer is missing from the installation diskettes, obtain the device driver from either the device manufacturer or a bulletin board, then do the following:
 
  1. Make a backup copy of Diskette 1.
You can create a template of an object when you have an existing object (such as
  2. Copy the needed device driver file (.ADD) to the backup copy of Diskette
a form letter with a company letterhead) and you need another oneFor example,
      1.
you could make the form letter a template and then customize it for different
  3. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the backup copy of Diskette 1 and change the
customers.  The new object will have the same settings (such as associations)
      BASEDEV= statement to include the file name and extension of the new
and contents as the original.
      device driver.  Example:  BASEDEV=IBM1FLPY.ADD
To create a template of an object:
   4. Save the file, and use the updated copy of Diskette 1 to install OS/2.
   1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by pointing at the object and then
Computer Beeps Constantly
       clicking mouse button 2.
If your computer beeps constantly while you are changing diskettes during
   2. Select Settings.
installation, you might have a defective diskette drive controller or cable.
   3. Select the General tab.
Check the controller and cable for damage, and also check all their
   4. Select the Template check box.
connections.
   5. Close the Settings notebook.
Promise IDE Cached Controller
The object is now displayed as a template.
To install OS/2 on a system with a Promise IDE Cached Controller, you must edit
  Drag a copy of the object from the template whenever you need a new copy.
the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1 and change the following line:
  Customize the new object to your preferenceFor example, you can change the
BASEDEV=IBM1S506
  name of the object and add a new icon (see the OS/2 Tutorial or the Master Help
  to
  Index).
BASEDEV=IBM1S506 /!SMS
  If you want to move a stack of templates, rather than create an object from the
ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Adapter
  top template, press the Shift key while dragging the stack.
ATI makes various display adapters that are comparable with the IBM 8514/A
 
display adapter.  The ATI Graphics Ultra, 8514 Ultra, and Graphics Vantage can
  Creating Another Object    166/2
all be treated as IBM 8514/A adapters for the OS/2 installation process.
 
However, if you have an ATI Graphics Ultra Pro, you must follow these steps
All objects that have a Create another choice in their pop-up menu have a
before you install OS/2.  The INSTALL utility program used in the following
cascaded menu that lists their templatesWhen you create a template of your
steps will set your display to run as a VGA display so that OS/2 can be
own, it is added to the cascaded menu.
installed.  After OS/2 is installed, you can run the INSTALL utility program
The result of Create another is identical to creating an object from a template.
again to select the correct display attached to the system.
  If you select Create another from the pop-up menu of an object, a new object
Note:  Following these steps incorrectly might cause your system to hang with a
with the same default settings and data is created.  If you select the arrow to
black screen or distort your display with static.  Refer to the ATI
the right of Create another, a cascaded menu is displayedThis menu contains a
documentation if you encounter problems configuring the Ultra Pro memory.
listing of all the template objects you createdYou can select one of the
To prepare your ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter for use with OS/2:
choices to create another object from that template.
   1. Start your system using DOS, preferably from a diskette.  You will need to
For example, suppose you created a template and named it "Company letterhead."
      start DOS again after OS/2 is installed because the ATI INSTALL utility
This template is listed as a choice on the cascaded menuWhenever you need to
       program runs only in DOS.
create a similar letter, select Company letterhead. The new data-file object
   2. Type INSTALL at the DOS command prompt.
contains whatever was in the original "Company letterhead" and the same settings
   3. If your adapter has 1MB of video memory, select SHARED.  If your adapter
(such as associations).
      has 2MB of video memory, ensure that the aperture is properly configured.
To create another object using a pop-up menu:
   4. Select Monitor Setup.
  1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by pointing at the object and then
   5. Select Custom.
      clicking mouse button 2.
  6. Set the refresh rate for 640 x 480 to IBM DEFAULT (or 60Hz).
  2. Select Create another if you want to use one of your templates, or select
  7. Set the refresh of all other resolutions as appropriate for your display.
      the arrow to the right of Create another and select a template choice.
  8. Save the configuration.
Note: The new object appears in the active folder; for example, if the object
  9. Install OS/2. Make sure that during the installation of OS/2, you select
is on the Desktop, the duplicate appears on the Desktop.
      8514 as the primary display type.
  IBM PS/2* Model 30-286 Upgrades
OS/2 is not supported on IBM PS/2 Model 30-286 upgraded to a 386
microprocessor.
Aox** Systems
  If your computer has an Aox add-in microprocessor adapter and you encounter
  problems either installing or starting up your OS/2 system, call the Aox
  Corporation and ask for the latest "flash-prom" code upgrade.
IOMEGA** PC Powered Pro 90
  If you are using an IOMEGA PC Powered Pro 90, call the IOMEGA service number
  and request OAD Driver Version 2.3.
  IBM PS/2 Model 90 and 95 Computers
  o  If you are experiencing problems with your Model 90 or 95, ensure your
      system is at the latest engineering change (EC) level. Your IBM service
      representative can assist you.
  o  You must ensure that you have matched pairs of single in-line memory
      modulesThis means that each pair of single in-line memory modules, as
      described in your technical reference manual, must be matched in memory
      size and speed.  Mixing these modules can cause some computers to report
      memory errors.
All ISA, EISA, and PCI Systems
  If you are installing OS/2 on a ISA, EISA, or PCI system, some CMOS settings
might need to be adjusted:
  o  Turn off ROM shadowing (system and video) if it is not essential to
      starting your system.
      Usually only extremely fast systems require ROM shadowing during a
      startup. Do not turn ROM shadowing on again after installing OS/2.
  o If you get a TRAP0002 error, add wait states (both read and write, if the
      option is given)Add two wait states and see if the TRAP0002 error goes
      away.
      Note: Take as few of the actions here as are necessary to prevent the
      TRAP0002 error, because you must retain whatever setting makes the system
      function. If you added wait states, do not remove them later without
      adding faster (matched) DRAM to your system.
  o If you experience other traps or complete system hangs while installing,
      turn off your external processor cache (internal cache is not a problem).
      If this corrects the problem, have the system board repaired or replaced
      before you turn on the cache again.
 
===Solving Problems After Installation 213/1+===
This chapter provides information to help you solve problems you might encounter after OS/2 has been installed. It includes information about what to do if you have problems, plus specific instructions for startup, memory, display, mouse, CD-ROM, hard disk, and Desktop problems.  In addition, procedures are given for recovering the Desktop, CONFIG.SYS file, user INI file, hard disk, and memory state data.
Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the information dealing with a particular problem.
 
===What to Do If You Have Problems 214/2===
OS/2 is a stable operating system and, in most cases, you will not experience problems. However, if you do encounter a problem while using OS/2, do the following:
# Read through this chapter to see if the problem you are experiencing is documented.
# If your problem is not addressed in this section, refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions on how to get additional assistance.
Before you call for assistance, make sure you call from a telephone that is near your computer and gather the following before you speak with the OS/2 specialist:
*Your registration number (located in the Service and Support brochure in the US only)
*The brand and model of the equipment you are using
*The error message or number, if any, that appeared on your screen
*Paper and pencil for taking notes
*The number for your fax machine, or the number of a fax machine to which you have access


  Setting Up Printers    167/1+
===Editing the CONFIG.SYS File in Your Root Directory 215/2===
A CONFIG.SYS file contains lines of instructions that control how your computer starts up and how it works with the devices you have attached to it.
During installation, the CONFIG.SYS file is copied from Diskette 1 and added to your root directory. There might be instances in which you will be instructed in this chapter to edit your CONFIG.SYS file in order to add a statement, "remark out" a line, or modify an existing line in the file. If you need to alter the CONFIG.SYS file after you install OS/2, you will need to make the changes to the CONFIG.SYS file located in the root directory on the hard disk (usually drive C).
Note:  If the CONFIG.SYS file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able to restart your computer.  Be careful when editing the file.


If you installed a printer when you installed OS/2, a printer object is on your
To edit the CONFIG.SYS file that is in your root directory (after installing OS/2), follow these steps:
Desktop. The printer object is used to print jobs (data files) and check their
  1. Open OS/2 System.
progress.  If you want to add a printer object, see Installing a Printer.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
Note: The explanations and instructions in this chapter apply to printers and
  3. Type COPY CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.OLD and press Enter.
plotters.
  4. Type E C:\CONFIG.SYS and press Enter.
Each printer object represents a certain arrangement of hardware, software, and
      where: E is the command used to start the System Editor that comes with
configurations, which simplifies the printing process. Printer objects can
      OS/2
represent local printers and network printers. Local printers are connected to
                C: is the letter of the drive where OS/2 was installed
individual computers or individual workstations on a networkNetwork printers
                \ is the symbol for root directory
are connected to local area network (LAN) servers and can be used by
      The CONFIG.SYS file will appear on your screen, and you can make changes
workstations connected to the network. For more detailed information about
      to it.
printer and printing, see the OS/2 Tutorial and the online Printing in OS/2 book
  5. When you are done working on the file, select File, then select Save.
located in the Information folder.
  6. Select Type... in the Save notification window.
  7. Select Plain Text, then select Set.
  8. Press Alt+F4 to exit from the System Editor.
  9. Shut down your computer.  (You must restart your computer anytime you make
      changes to the CONFIG.SYS file in order for the changes to take effect.)
For more information about the statements that can appear in the CONFIG.SYS file, refer to the Command Reference that is located in the Information folder on the OS/2 Desktop.
 
===Startup Problems 216/2===
Following are solutions to problems that might occur when you try to start your system after installing OS/2.


Installing a Printer    168/2+
Internal Processing Error Message Appears


Even if you did not select a printer during the OS/2 installation, you still can
The system stops and the screen displays INTERNAL PROCESSING ERROR at the top of a message.
add a printer to the systemThere are several different procedures to choose
Record the information exactly as it displayed on the screen, and write a description of what you were doing when the trap occurredThen, refer to the Service and Support information in your OS/2 package for instructions about calling for additional assistance.
from.  From the following list, choose the procedure that best describes your
Boot Manager Menu Does Not Appear:
situation, then follow the instructions to add the printer.
If you installed the Boot Manager partition but the Boot Manager startup menu does not appear as expected when you start the system, you will need to make the Boot Manager partition startableDo the following:
  o  Create a printer object but use a printer driver that is currently
   1. Turn on the computerIf the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
      installed on the system.  See Creating a Printer Object.
       to restart it.
   o  Create a printer object and install a new printer driver to use with it.
   2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
      See Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver.
       screen, press Alt+F1.
  o Install a new printer driver but use an existing printer object. See
   3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
      Installing a Printer Driver Only.
  o  Change the printer driver being used with an existing printer object.  See
       Changing Printer Drivers.
   o  Install a Windows printer driver for use with WIN-OS/2. See Installing a
       Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session.
   o  Install an OEM (Other Equipment Manufacturer) printer driver for use with
      Windows. See Installing a Printer Driver from Another Manufacturer for a
      WIN-OS/2 Session.
Note:  When you create an OS/2 printer object, you might be prompted to create
an equivalent Windows printer object.  If you choose to create the Windows
printer object, you also are prompted to install a Windows printer driver.


Creating a Printer Object    169/3
System Will Not Start DOS from the Boot Manager Menu


This procedure involves adding a printer object and selecting a printer driver.
On a system with a VESA** SUPER I/O controller and two disk drives, the system might not start from the Boot Manager menu. Instead, it will display a
Use this procedure if you have existing printer drivers installed on your system
non-system disk or disk error message. For more information on this message,
and you want this new printer object to use one of them.
check the VESA controller documentation or contact the manufacturer.
To create a printer object to use with an existing printer driver:
Dual Boot Does Not Work
  1. Open Templates.
If the BOOT command is unsuccessful when you try to switch from DOS to OS/2,
  2. Point to the Printer template.
you might have one or more active terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) or DOS
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
cache programsIf so, end the programs before you use the BOOT command. For
  4. Drag the template to a folder or the Desktop.
TSR programs that are loaded from AUTOEXEC.BAT, you must deactivate the
  5. Release mouse button 2The Create a Printer window is displayed.
programs before using the BOOT command.
  6. Type a name for the printer in the Name field.
Error When Using Dual Boot on a PS/1 System
  7. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
On PS/1 systems preinstalled with DOS 5.0, using Dual Boot from OS/2 to DOS
  8. Select the printer driver that corresponds to your printer model.
  might result in an errorTo correct this problem, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to
  9. Select Create.
  restart the system.
  10. Respond to the "Do you want to install an equivalent WIN-OS/2 printer
      configuration" question; then follow the instructions on the screen to
      complete the installation.
  A new printer object is on your DesktopIf you want to customize the settings
  for this new printer object, see Setting Printer Properties.


Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver    170/3
===Memory Problems 217/2===
Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with memory after installing OS/2.
IBM PS/2 Model 90 or 95 Memory Parity Errors
If your Model 90 or 95 is a 33 MHz system and you are having difficulty
identifying intermittent memory parity errors such as TRAP0002, which force you
to restart your system, then ECA053 might apply.  If your microprocessor card
has part number 84F9356, contact your IBM representative to assist you with a
replacement.
IBM PS/2 Model 90 Memory Errors
If your Model 90 is experiencing intermittent memory errors, ECA084 might apply
if the part number of your memory riser card is N33F4905 or 84F9356.  Your IBM
representative can assist you with a replacement.


This procedure involves creating a printer object and installing a printer
===Display Problems 218/2===
driver.  Use this procedure if you want to create a printer object and install a
Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with your display after installing OS/2.
new printer driver.
White Screen after Installation
  1. Open Templates.
If the display screen is white after installation and there is no system
  2. Point to the Printer template.
activity, set the video adapter to operate on an 8-bit bus and move the adapter
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
to an 8-bit slot. If possible, disable the autosensing capability of the video
  4. Drag the template to a folder or the Desktop.
adapter. For information on modifying these settings, refer to the
  5. Release mouse button 2.
documentation that came with your video adapter.
  6. Type a name for the printer in the Name field.
Blank Screen after Installation
  7. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
If the Desktop appears to be blank when you restart the system after the
  8. Select Install new printer driver.
complete installation of OS/2, and you are using a ProComm** Micro Channel* SCSI
  9. Use the instructions in the following list to install your printer driver:
adapter, do not attempt to run CHKDSK on the drive connected to the adapter.
        o  If your printer driver came with the OS/2 operating system, follow
Contact ProComm to receive the device driver needed for the SCSI card.
          the instructions for Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2.
System Stops at Logo Screen
        o If your printer driver did not come with the OS/2 operating system,
If you have a Future Domain 16xx SCSI controller, you might have installed OS/2
          follow the instructions for Other Printer Driver.
successfully but then found a problem the next time you started OS/2.  If the
Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2
system stopped running with the logo screen displayed, there might be a conflict
  1. Select one or more printer drivers in the list.
with the interrupt settings of your hardware devices. Check all interrupt
  2. Select Install.
request (IRQ) settings on all your hardware devices and make sure that each one
  3. Ensure that the information in the Directory field is correct.
is using a unique IRQ. Future Domain controllers are shipped from the factory
  4. Select OK.
preset to use IRQ5. However, IRQ5 is the interrupt that is normally assigned to
  5. Select create to create the printer object.
LPT2. Also, it is common for IRQ5 to be used by sound or communications
  Other Printer Driver
adaptersYou might not see a problem immediately because of interrupt
  1. Select Other OS/2 printer driver
conflicts, but eventually a problem can occur.
  2. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
System Will Not Restart on a High-Resolution Display
      appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.
If you installed support for a high-resolution display adapter and your system
  3. Select Refresh.  Wait until the window fills with printer drivers.
will not restart, follow the procedure below. This procedure will set the
   4. Select one or more drivers.  If the driver you need is not listed, insert
adapter support to a lower resolution (VGA) but will enable your system to
       another diskette or change the information in the Directory field and
start.
      select Refresh again.
   1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
   5. Select Install.
       to restart it.
   6. Select Create to create the printer object.
   2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
A new printer object is on your Desktop. If you want to customize the settings
      screen, press Alt+F1.
  for this new printer object, see Setting Printer Properties.
   3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
    Tip Many printers have multiple printer drivers available. For example,
  4. Use Selective Install to install support for another high-resolution
    Hewlett Packard has several drivers for their LaserJet IIID printer. To
      display adapter.
    ensure that you get the correct driver with the printer model you select,
  Graphics Mode and Refresh Rates Incorrect for Hardware
    scroll the Printer Driver field to the right until you can see the name of
  Most video adapters are sensitive to the characteristics and capabilities of
    the printer driver.
the display attached to them. The video BIOS on these adapters detects and
 
sets the hardware to support a desired graphics mode.
  Installing a Printer Driver Only    171/3
Some adapters have configuration dip switches to select desired vertical
 
refresh rates for high-resolution modes (800 x 600 and 1024 x 768).  Others are
Sometimes you have an existing printer object, but you do not have the correct
shipped with DOS video-configuration utility programs that allow selection of
printer driver on your system. This might happen if you add a different printer
refresh rates. Usual refresh rates range from 56Hz to 72Hz non-interlaced or
to your system.
  88Hz interlaced.  The display has to be capable of synchronizing to this
To install a new driver for an existing printer object:
frequency for proper mode set.
  1. Point to the printer object.
When the desired refresh rate has been set using either the dip switches or the
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  video-configuration utility program run the \OS2\SVGA.EXE utility program to
  3. Select Settings.
store the hardware setup in an \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI file. At a DOS full-screen
  4. Select the Printer driver tab.
session, type: C:\OS2\SVGA ON; then press Enter.
  5. Point to one of the printer driver objects.
The Installation Program Installed VGA Support instead of SVGA
  6. Click mouse button 2.
During the installation of OS/2, the installation program might have installed
  7. Select Install.
only VGA support for your display. To install the Super VGA (SVGA) drivers,
  8. Use the instructions in the following list to install your printer driver:
you can use Selective Install in the System Setup folder. (System Setup is in
        o If your printer driver came with the OS/2 operating system, follow
the OS/2 System folder).
          the instructions for Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2.
  Video Corruption or Stacked or Missing Icons
        o  If your printer driver did not come with the OS/2 operating system,
  1. Display the Desktop pop-up menu (click mouse button 2 on the OS/2 desktop
          follow the instructions for Other Printer Driver.
      background).
  Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2
  2. Select Refresh to redraw the Desktop.
  1. Select one or more printer drivers in the list.
  3. If the screen goes blank, press Alt+Esc (to switch between the programs)
   2. Select Install.
      to force repainting of the screen.
   3. Ensure that the information in the Directory field is correct.
  Synchronization Lost Under OS/2 But Not DOS
   4. Select OK.
The resolution or refresh rate loses synchronization under OS/2 but not DOS.
Other Printer Driver
To correct this problem, generate the \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI file under a specific
   1. Select Other OS/2 printer driver.
version of DOS using the following instructions:
  2. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
  1. Start DOS.
      appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.
   2. Type \OS2\SVGA ON DOS
  3. Select Refresh.
   3. Press Enter.
  4. Select one or more drivers. If the driver you need is not listed, insert
   4. Type RENAME \OS2\SVGADATA.DOS \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI
      another diskette or change the information in the Directory field and
  5. Press Enter.
      select Refresh again.
   6. Restart OS/2.
  5. Select Install.
If this does not fix the problem, try selecting a different vertical refresh
A new printer driver is installed. If you want to customize the settings for
rate (refer to your adapter manual); then generate the PMI file again.
  this new printer driver, see Setting Printer Properties.
If your display remains out of synchronization or is stable and synchronized
    Tip Many printers have multiple printer drivers availableFor example,
  after restarting the system but loses synchronization after a session switch,
    Hewlett Packard has several drivers for their LaserJet IIID printer. To
this might be due to your video adapter's hardware implementation.
    ensure that you get the correct driver with the printer model you select,
Note:  Some video adapter hardware cannot be fully saved and restored in all
    scroll the Printer Driver field to the right until you can see the printer
graphics modes for all refresh rates.
    driver name.
Using After Dark** for Windows** with S3** Adapter
 
  If you have an S3 adapter and are using After Dark for Windows, images that
  Changing Printer Drivers    172/3
  move from left to right will not perform properly.
 
Switch to any resolution other than 640 x 480 x 16M.
You might already have both the printer object and the printer driver installed
  Using Ventura Publisher** for Windows with an S3 Adapter
on your system, but you need to connect themThis might happen if you like to
If you have an S3 display adapter and are using Ventura Publisher for Windows,
use different printer drivers with a printer object.
you might experience a General Protection fault when starting the program.
To change to a different printer driver:
Switch to a 256-color resolution to avoid this problem.
  1. Point to the printer object.
  Using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 with S3 Adapter
  2. Click mouse button 2.
If you have an S3 display adapter and are using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 your
  3. Select Settings.
system might trap.
  4. Select the Printer driver tab.
  Switch to any resolution other than one using 16M colors.
  5. Select the printer driver.
Using Lotus** 1-2-3** for OS/2 or Lotus Freelance for OS/2
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
If you have an XGA or SVGA display adapter and are using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2
  7. Double-click.
or Lotus Freelance** for OS/2, your system might trap.
  The printer object is now set up to use a different printer driver. See Setting
Switch to a resolution that uses 256 colors or less.
  Printer Properties for information about setting the properties to match the
Using WordPerfect** 5.1 or 5.2 for Windows with S3 Adapter
  capabilities of the new printer driver.
If you have an S3 display adapter and are using WordPerfect 5.1 or 5.2 for
 
  Windows you might experience a General Protection fault when the Print Preview
  Installing a Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session    173/3
option is selected.
 
  Use any resolution other than the 800 x 600 x 64K or 600 x 480 x 16 million
Windows programs print directly to the OS/2 spooler. Therefore, multiple print
  color modes.
jobs can be spooled from one WIN-OS/2 session or multiple WIN-OS/2 sessions.
Using Software Motion Video Feature with S3 Adapter
To install a printer driver in Windows:
  If you have an S3 display adapter and are using the software motion video
  1. Open OS/2 System.
feature you might experience poor performance of video playback in 64K-color
  2. Open Command Prompts.
modes.
  3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen.
  Normally, the software motion video feature will take advantage of a 1MB
  4. Open WIN-OS/2 Main.
aperture on video adapters and systems where it is available. For those systems
  5. Open Control Panel.
with nonstandard locations, the actual physical address of the aperture must be
  6. Open Printers.
provided in the following CONFIG.SYS statement:
  7. Select Add and then select a printer driver in the list.
SET VIDEO_APERTURE=xxxh
  8. Select Install.
where "xxx" is a hexadecimal value in units of 1MB, representing the actual
  9. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
physical address to map to the aperture. For example, the IBM PS/ValuePoint*
      appropriate drive designation and path in the Install Driver pop-up
systems must have the statement:
      window.
SET VIDEO_APERTURE=400h
   10. Select OK.
to use a physical address at 1GB.
  11. Select Connect.
Blank Screen on IBM ValuePoint system
  12. Select LPT1.OS2, LPT2.OS2, or LPT3.OS2.
If you have one of the following IBM ValuePoint systems, you might encounter a
      Note: You can select a COMx port, but no spooling to the OS/2 Print
blank screen while switching from one window to another.
      object will occur. However, you will still be able to use the Print
PS/ValuePoint Display Models:   6314    6317    6319
       Manager in Windows.
PS/ValuePoint System Models:    6382    6384    6387
  13. Select OK.
To correct or avoid this problem, make sure that the flash EEPROM level of your
  14. Select the printer that you want to assign as the default.
system is 62 or later.
  15. Select the Set as Default Printer pushbutton.
  To check the EEPROM level:
  16. Select Close.
  1. Begin the Configuration Utility program by turning the system off and then
 
       on again.
  Installing a Printer Driver from Another Manufacturer for a WIN-OS/2 Session    174/3
  2. During the memory count, press F1. (The memory count appears in the upper
 
      left corner of the screen as numbers followed by KB.)
OS/2 has a wide variety of printer drivers available for use with Windows.
  3. When the Configuration Utility screen appears, look for the Flash EEPROM
However, there might be times when you want to use a driver supplied by another
      Revision Level.
printer manufacturer.
  4. The fifth and sixth characters in the Flash EEPROM Revision Level
To add a Windows printer driver supplied by another printer manufacturer:
      represent the actual revision level.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  5. If the revision level is less than 62, you must install the ValuePoint
  2. Open Command Prompts.
      Flash BIOS update.
  3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen
  To get the required ValuePoint Flash BIOS update do the following: Access the
  4. Open WIN-OS/2 Main
IBM PC Company Bulletin Board System, then download the VP2FL62A.DSK file,
  5. Open Control Panel.
which is the Flash BIOS Update Level 62.
  6. Open Printers.
If you do not have access to a modem, you can call the IBM Help Center and
  7. Select Add.
request this update on diskette.
  8. Select Unlisted Printer from the beginning of the list of printers.
Video Corruption with Video 7** Adapter
  9. Select Install.
If you experience minor video corruption when switching from an OS/2
  10. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
full-screen session to the Desktop using Alt+Esc, exit the OS/2 session and
      appropriate drive designation and path in the Install Driver pop-up
restart it.
      window.
Video Corruption Using 8514/A Adapter with WIN-OS/2
  11. Select OK.
If you are running a WIN-OS/2 full-screen session with an 8514/A adapter in a
  12. Select Connect.
high-resolution mode, do not switch to a different session while the program is
  13. Select LPT1.OS2, LPT2.OS2, or LPT3.OS2.
updating the screen or displaying an hourglass. The actual problem you
  14. Select OK.
experience (for example, video corruption, system hang) depends upon what the
  15. Select the printer that you want to assign as the default.
display driver is doing at the time of the switch.
  16. Select the Set as Default Printer pushbutton.
Color Icons and Bit Maps Improperly Drawn
  17. Select Close.
Windows programs that use color icons or color bit-map backgrounds must run in
    Tip If you also want to create an OS/2 printer object for use with the same
the foreground to be properly drawn.  Do not switch from a Windows program
    driver, follow the instructions for Creating a Printer Object and make the
while it is being started or before it completes drawing color icons and color
    following selections:
bit-map backgrounds.
      o Select the same port you selected for your printer, using the Windows
Discolored Bit Map Using 8514/A Adapter
          Control Panel.
If you are using an 8514/A display adapter, 256-color bit maps might become
      o Select the OS/2 printer driver, IBMNULL, as the default driver.
discolored. after you start a WIN-OS/2 window session.
          (IBMNULL is installed during system installation.)
This discoloration is due to the sharing of the 256-color palette and should
 
not affect the running of the programs.
  Setting Printer Properties    175/2
Corrupted Graphics in DOS Programs
 
Some DOS programs with graphics use a non-standard VGA mode that the adapter
A printer driver has settings called printer properties. Printer properties
can support, but the operating system cannot. The graphics in these programs
describe the way your printer is physically set up.
might be corrupted when displayed in a window. To avoid this problem run these
Examples of printer properties are:
programs in DOS full-screen sessions.
  o Type of paper feed (tractor or bin)
Corrupted Colors in DOS Programs
   o Number and location of paper trays
Some DOS programs experience color corruption when running in a window on the
  o  Forms defined for your printer
Desktop in VGA mode.  This is a limitation of the VGA mode because the color
  o  Forms loaded in the paper feed or trays of your printer
  palette of the DOS session has to be translated to the Presentation Manager*
   o  Font cartridges loaded on the printer
and the Desktop in VGA mode does not offer enough colors to do an optimal
   o  Installed soft fonts
translation.
  o  Additional features installed, such as extended symbol sets and patterns
  The best solution is to use an OS/2 display driver that supports the 256-color
  o Resolution
mode or run the program in a DOS full-screen session.
  o Orientation
Corrupted DOS Full-Screen Session on IBM ThinkPad* 750C Series
  o  Compression
  If you are using a ThinkPad 750C Series, after installing OS/2, you might find
  Examples of plotter properties are:
that your DOS full-screen session is corrupted. To fix this problem you must
  o Number of carousels
  reinstall the video driver from the ThinkPad video features diskette.
  o Active carousel
   1. Restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del. Press Alt+F1 when the small
  o  Color type of each pen in a carousel
      white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your screen.
The number and kind of properties available depend upon the type of printer or
   2. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V to return to VGA mode.
  plotter you have.
   3. Restart your system, and then reinstall the ThinkPad 750c video drivers
  To set the printer properties:
      from the ThinkPad video features diskette.
  1. Point to the printer object.
  WIN-OS/2 Fails to Start on IBM ThinkPad
   2. Click mouse button 2.
  If a WIN-OS2 window fails to come up on an IBM Thinkpad, make sure that your
   3. Select Settings.
  CONFIG.SYS file contains the following statement:
   4. Select the Printer driver tab.
  DOS=LOW,NOUMB
   5. Point to a printer driver.
  Also, make sure that the WIN-OS/2 settings have DOS set to LOW and UMB set to
  6. Click mouse button 2.
  OFF.
  7. Select Settings.
  Notebook Computers Using DOS Window
  8. Change the properties to match your printer setup.
Some notebook computers get a trap D error or other problems when a DOS window
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
is opened.  This error is caused by improper video register shadowing. To
  10. Double-click.
correct the problem:
  Your printer object is now set up to print a jobFor information about how to
   1. Edit your C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
  print a job, see the online Printing in OS/2 book located in the Information
   2. Change
Folder.
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VVGA.SYS
 
      to
Using Productivity Tools and Games    176/1+
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VSVGA.SYS
 
   3. Save the C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
The Productivity folder provides programs that assist you in editing text and
   4. Shut down and restart the computer.
icons, searching for files or text and displaying system utilization., Each
Text Strings Clipped on Display
productivity program has a set of help menus to assist you with using the
OS/2 uses a system proportional font that is designed to meet the International
program.
Organization for Standards (ISO) 9241 standard and the German DIN 66234
The Games folder provides you with games for your entertainment.
standard when using certain ISO compliant hardware. If you do not want to use
 
ISO compliant fonts, you can modify the OS2.INI file to install fonts that are
  The Productivity Folder    177/2+
not ISO compliant. Font changes made in the OS2.INI file are global across all
 
  programsIf you have REXX installed, you can type the following information
To open a Productivity program:
  into a CMD file and use it to change the font.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  call RxFuncAdd "SysIni", "RexxUtil", "SysIni"
  2. Open Productivity.
  AppName = "PM_SystemFonts"
  3. Open the program you want to use.
  KeyName = "DefaultFont"
  For information about using a program in the Productivity folder, press F1
  FontName = "10.System Proportional Non-ISO"
  after the program is opened.
  call SysIni "USER", AppName, KeyName, FontName||"0"x
 
  exit
  Clipboard Viewer    178/3
After the file has been run, shut down and restart the system.
 
Poor Performance of Windows Programs Using 8514/A Adapter
Clipboard Viewer is a program that enables you to view the contents of the OS/2
If your system has an 8514/A adapter, you can improve the performance of your
clipboard. The system clipboard is used to share information between programs
  Windows programs by changing their settings.  Open the Settings notebook for
in the same session or in different sessions (for information about sessions,
each Windows program and change the following WIN-OS/2 settings:
see Using Command Prompts). It temporarily holds data being passed from one
      VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP to OFF
program to another. You can copy or cut information to the clipboard from a
      VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION to ON
program in one session and then paste the information from the clipboard to a
  Corrupted Desktop with the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Adapter
program in a different session. For more information about the clipboard, refer
  If your system has the 1MB version of the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter with
to the online book Windows Programs in OS/2
the memory set to SHARED, some DOS programs running in the background might
 
  corrupt the Desktop.
  Enhanced Editor    179/3
To correct this problem, you must upgrade to the 2MB version of the ATI
 
  Graphics Ultra Pro and set the VGA memory to 256K or greater.
Enhanced Editor is an editor you can use to create and edit text files. It also
  Note:  If you are using the 1MB version of the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter
enables you to work on multiple files at the same time. You can start the
with the OS/2 8514/A display driver, the VGA memory must be set to SHARED.
Enhanced Editor by opening its object or by typing EPM at the OS/2 command
System Hang Using PM Debugger
prompt and pressing Enter.
  To correct this problem, use an XGA* or 8514/A adapter with the debugger. An
The Enhanced Editor has a number of features and functions. These features and
access violation will occur when you exit the debugger, but you will not have
functions are thoroughly explained in the Quick Reference help file located
  to restart your system and you will not have system problems as a result of
under the Help menu bar choice of the Enhanced Editor.
  using the debugger.
 
Video Corruption on XGA Display Using Windows Screen Savers
  Icon Editor    180/3
A Windows screen saver program that starts while in a background session might
 
display a corrupted image being displayed when you switch back to the Windows
Icon Editor is a tool that enables you to create, edit, and convert image files.
session. The image can be refreshed by moving the mouse or pressing any key.
  These files include icons, bit maps, and pointers. An icon is a graphical
  You can eliminate this problem by changing your WIN-OS/2 settings for the
representation of an object or a minimized program. A bit map is a special type
screen saver program using the Settings Notebook.  Change the settings to:
of image made up of a series of dots. (The OS/2 logo is an example of a bit
      VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP to ON
map.) A pointer is a small symbol on the screen that reflects the movement of
      VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION to OFF
the mouse.
  Using Dual Displays (XGA and VGA)
 
  If you are using a dual display system with XGA as the primary display and VGA
  OS/2 System Editor    181/3
as the secondary display, you might see some minor corruption when the XGA
 
display is set to a resolution with 65536 colors.
The OS/2 System Editor is used to create and edit text files. You can use the
This corruption will be on the display that does not have focus and will not
System Editor to edit your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT system filesThe System
interfere with the operation of the system.
Editor runs in a window. You can start several sessions of the System Editor so
Using Dual Displays with Windows programs in a Window Session
that you can edit several files at once.
  On dual display configurations with XGA-2 as the primary display and VGA as the
You can start the System Editor two ways:
secondary display, the DOS full-screen session might be corrupted if a Windows
   o  By selecting its object
program is started in a window session.
   o  Opening a data file associated with the System Editor.  (All data files
  To recover from this situation, shut down and restart the system.
       area associated with the System Editor by default.)
  Using XGA-2 Adapter with Dual Boot
   o  By typing E (and pressing Enter) at an OS/2 command line If you want to
  If you are using Dual Boot with an XGA-2 adapter, you must modify the
      edit a particular file, you follow the E with a space and then type the
CONFIG.DOS file:
      path and file name of the file.
   1. Edit the \OS2\SYSTEM\CONFIG.DOS file.
 
   2. Locate the line
  Picture Viewer    182/3
       DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM 2048 X=nnnn-nnnn
 
   3. Change nnnn-nnnn to C000-CFFF.
Picture Viewer displays and prints metafile (.MET) and picture interchange
  4. Save and exit the file.
format (.PIF) files. You also can view spooler (.SPL) files; however, the file
Screen Corruption on IBM P75 Systems
must contain a picture in a standard OS/2 format.
On IBM P75 systems, there might be some corruption on the screen whenever
Note: Picture Viewer does not support multiple-page metafiles.
several icons are selected and moved together.
  Picture Viewer lets you zoom in or zoom out of a picture after it is displayed.
  This corruption can be eliminated by selecting Sort from the Desktop pop-up
  Move the mouse pointer to the portion of the picture you want to zoom in and
menu.
  then double-click mouse button 1.
  Limited Resolutions on IBM P75 Systems with External Displays
 
An IBM P75 system with an external display attached might only have the 640 x
  Pulse    183/3
  480 x 16,772,216 resolution selection on the the System Settings Screen page.
 
  If the external display is capable of displaying higher resolutions, use the
Pulse is a system monitorUse Pulse to see a graphic representation of how
  P75 Reference Diskette to disable the built-in plasma display.
different activities affect the system and how much processor power is still
  Color Changes Behind Icons on XGA Displays
available for other programs. You can change the colors of the graphic, adjust
If you are using an XGA display, the diagonal lines behind the icons of open
the graph line, and freeze the screen image.
objects might change color unexpectedly.
 
This does not interfere with the operation of the system.
  Seek and Scan Files    184/3
  Extra Lines on OS/2 System Clock on XGA Displays
 
If you are using an XGA display, extra lines might appear on the face of the
Seek and Scan Files is a program that quickly searches one or more disks for
  OS/2 System Clock between the quarter (:15) and half (:30) hour.
files or text. When a file match is found, it is displayed in a selection list.
These lines do not interfere with the operation of the clock.
  Then you can open (or run) the selected file.
Display Power Management Signaling Not Enabled on XGA Displays
 
  If you are using an XGA display, the XGA DMQS (\xga$dmqs\*.dqs) files in this
  The Games Folder    185/2+
version of the operating system do not have DPMS (Display Power Management
 
Signaling) enabled for the DPMS supported displays.
The Games folder contains Klondike Solitaire, OS/2 Chess and Mahjongg.
You must use the DPMS OVERRIDE parameter provided with the Power Management
To start a game:
  Utility program that is located in System Setup.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  PS/ValuePoint System with Radius XGA Display Adapter
  2. Open Games.
If you are using a Radius XGA display adapter on a PS/ValuePoint system, it
  3. Open the game you want to play.
might not work correctly.
  For information about playing a game in the Games folder, press F1 after the
To correct this problem, you need to obtain and use the VPXGA.EXE utility
  game is opened.
  program. For a copy of this utility program, check your Radius Installation
 
Diskette or contact a service representative at Radius.
  Klondike Solitaire    186/3
Zenith Data Systems** and Hewlett Packard Systems with Headland Adapters
 
Zenith Data Systems with Headland HT208 and Hewlett Packard systems with HT209
Klondike Solitaire is a popular card game for one personThe object of this
  display a white half-screen whenever high-resolution modes are selected.
game is to find the aces and build on them in suit and in ascending order. You
These systems do not support high-resolution modes even though you can
use the mouse to move the cards to their new location.
  successfully install high resolution drivers and select the modes. To correct
 
  this problem, use Selective Install to install VGA.
  OS/2 Chess    187/3
ZEOS** Systems with Speedstar VGA
 
If you are using a ZEOS system with Speedstar VGA, the video display adapter
With OS/2 Chess, you can play a game of chess against another person playing on
might not configure.
the same computer or on a network workstation.  You also can play against the
  Use the VMODE utility program supplied with the system to configure the display
computerThe object of the game is to checkmate your opponent's king.
  during the display driver installation.
Video Corruption with Sigma Legend** Adapter
  If you have a Sigma Legend display adapter you might experience minor video
corruption on the Desktop when you switch between the Desktop and DOS if they
are running in different modes.
  Use the DOS utility program that is packaged with this display adapter to set
the DOS session to the same mode as the Desktop.
System Hang with Sigma Legend Adapter
If you are using a Sigma Legend display in 1024 x 768 x 256 color mode, the
system might stop.
Use only 640 x 480 x 256 or 800 x 600 x 256 mode with this adapter.


Mahjongg    188/3
===Mouse Problems 219/2===
 
The following information provides solutions to problems you might encounter with your mouse.
Mahjongg is a popular version of the ancient Chinese tile game. The object of
Existing Mouse Not Working Correctly
this game is to remove all the tiles by matching all the pairs.
If the mouse you had connected to your computer before installing OS/2 now works
 
improperly (movements appear "jerky" or the mouse does not respond when you move
Using the Information    189/1+
it), do the following:
 
   1. Open OS/2 System.
The Information folder contains information to aid you in using OS/2.
   2. Open Command Prompts.
To open the Information folder:
  3. Open OS/2 Window. If you installed OS/2 from a CD, continue with step 4.
   1. Point to Information
      If you installed from diskettes, go to step 5.
   2. Double-click.
  4. Type ATTRIB -R C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS and press Enter (where c is the drive
  The Information folder contains all the online documents described in this
      where OS/2 is installed).
chapter.
   5. Insert the diskette that came with your mouse into drive A (this diskette
 
      contains the mouse device driver).
Using OS/2    190/2
  6. Type COPY A:\MOUSE.SYS C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS and press Enter (where C is the
 
      drive where OS/2 is installed).
The OS/2 Tutorial is an interactive and animated look at the OS/2 Workplace
  7. Shut down the system.
Shell interface. It explains how to use a mouse, work with objects and folders,
Mouse Not Working after Installation
use windows, and get help.
If you installed a mouse during the installation of OS/2, or used selective
If you are new to OS/2, you should spend the 40 minutes (approximate) it takes
  installation to install a new mouse and the mouse is not working, you will need
to go through the tutorialYou will find that it is time well spent.
to edit your CONFIG.SYS file.  Do the following:
To start the OS/2 Tutorial:
  1. Edit the C:\CONFIG.SYS file and press Enter (where C is the drive where
   1. Open Information
      OS/2 is installed).
   2. Open Tutorial
  2. Delete the mouse device driver statements from the CONFIG.SYS file (there
 
      might be more than one such statement).  For example:
  Command Reference    191/2+
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS
 
   3. Shut down the system, and then restart it.
Before there were friendly operating system interfaces like the Workplace Shell,
   4. Use Selective Install to install a different mouse driver.
computer users communicated with a computer using a predefined set of
Serial Mouse Not Working
instructions called commandsUsers would type a command at a prompt, and the
If the serial mouse is connected to a serial port, make sure that the serial
computer would perform the requested task.
port is configured for default settings.
Some people still like to communicate with the computer in this wayFor that
  Logitech** Mouse Not Working after Installation
reason, OS/2 supplies both DOS and OS/2 command prompts and the OS/2 Command
If you have a Logitech mouse that does not work after installation, you might
Reference.
have to select another mouse driver.  Before 1991, Logitech sold "C-Series"
The Command Reference explains each OS/2 and DOS command, graphically shows the
serial mice. Since 1991, Logitech has sold only "M-Series" Microsoft-compatible
correct syntax of the command, and gives examples of when and how to use the
serial mice.  To determine which mouse you have, look at the bottom of the
command.
mouseIf it says "CA" or "C7," then it is a C-Series mouse.  If not, then you
In addition, it explains the commands that can be used to create a batch file (a
have an M-Series mouse. Use Selective Install to select the correct Logitech
series of commands that are processed sequentially)Batch files are useful for
mouse driver.
automating the entering of commands that are used over and over again.
  Logitech Mouse Not Working after Dual Boot from DOS
To open the OS/2 Command Reference:
If your Logitech mouse is not working on a Dual Boot system after you run DOS
  1. Open Information.
and switch to OS/2, your mouse might be running in a mode set by a DOS-based
   2. Open Command Reference.
mouse device driver.  To correct the problem:
  To open the OS/2 Command Reference and get information about a specific
  1. If COM2 port is being used, switch back to DOS and type the following at
command:
      the DOS command prompt:
   1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type HELP followed by the name of the command.
      MOUSE PC
      For example:
      or
      HELP COPY
      MOUSE 2 PC
  2. Press EnterThe Command Reference is opened to the COPY command page.
      This will reset the mouse to a mode that is recognized by OS/2.
 
      Note: You must use the MOUSE.COM that came with the mouse, or the command
  Using the Contents Window    192/3
      will not work.
 
  2. Then type the following:
The Contents window is the first window that appears when the Command Reference
      C:\OS2\BOOT /OS2
is openedNotice that some of the topics in this window have a plus (+) sign
   3. Press Enter.  OS/2 should start and your mouse should work.
beside them.  The plus sign indicates that additional topics are available.
  4. If this does not work, disconnect and reconnect the mouse.
To expand the Contents and view the additional topics:
   5. If these methods do not work, close your programs and turn off the
  1. Select the + sign.
      computer.  Then, turn the computer on again.
  To collapse the topics in the Contents:
Mouse Does Not Work on an IBM PS/2 Model 90 or 95
  1. Select the - sign.
If your Model 90 or 95 has the Unattended Start Mode option set (through the
  To open a topic:
System Programs), the mouse driver will not load during startup.
  1. Point to the title of the topic.
  To correct this situation, disable the Unattended Start Mode.
  2. Double-click.
Mouse Does Not Work on COM3 or COM4
 
  OS/2 supports connection only to COM1 or COM2, at the standard input/output
  Obtaining Additional Information    193/3
(I/O) address and interrupt request (IRQ) setting.
 
Mouse Pointer Does Not Move
When a topic is opened, the information for the topic is displayed in a window.
When you move your mouse, the mouse pointer on the screen does not move.
Highlighted words and phrases in the window indicate that additional information
Verify that each device on your computer that uses an IRQ setting is not
is hidden "beneath" the word or phrase.
conflicting with another IRQ setting.
To view the additional information:
  Mouse Statements in CONFIG.SYS
   1. Point to the highlighted word or phrase.
The mouse statements that should appear in your CONFIG.SYS depend on the type
   2. Double-click.
of mouse connected to your computer.
  To return to the previous window of information:
  The correct CONFIG.SYS statements for running a serial mouse are:
  1. Select Previous.
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\PCLOGIC.SYS SERIAL=COMx
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS TYPE=PCLOGIC$
  Where:  C is the drive on which OS/2 is installed, and COMx is either COM1 or
COM2.
The correct CONFIG.SYS statements for running a Microsoft or IBM mouse are:
  DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS
Where:  C is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.
Three-button Mouse Not Working Correctly
You have a 3-button mouse and error SYS1201 is displayed on the screen.
  OS/2 supports only the 2-button mode on a 3-button mouse.  If your mouse has a
switch to change to a 2-button mode, change the switch.  If it doesn't, replace
the mouse with a 2 button mouse.
Erratic Mouse Pointer in WIN-OS/2 Sessions
If you have an erratic pointer in your WIN-OS/2 programs.
Set the following WIN-OS/2 settings:
   o  MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS to On
  o  IDLE_SENSITIVITY to 100
   o  IDLE_SECONDS to 20
Mouse Not Recognized on Non-IBM Computer
If your mouse is not recognized on a non-IBM computer that has a mouse port
with an attached mouse, the mouse might be incompatible with the mouse port
because of the chip on the mouse adapter.
  Attach the mouse to a serial port.  If the mouse still does not work, try a
different mouse with the mouse port.
Mouse and Keyboard Stop Working
If you have AMI BIOS, you might have an old version. Contact your computer
manufacturer for an updated BIOS level.


Searching for Information    194/3
===CD-ROM Problems 220/2===
 
Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with your CD-ROM after installing OS/2.
There might be times when you are using the Command Reference when you have an
Philips** CM 205 CD-ROM
idea of what you want, but you cannot remember where it is. The search function
If you have a Philips CM 205 drive and it doesn't work with OS/2, edit your
can help you find the information you need.
CONFIG.SYS file and change the line containing LMS205.ADD to LMS206.ADD.
To search for a word or phrase in all the topics in the Command Reference:
If your CD-ROM drive is not working correctly (does not respond, or generates
   1. Select Search.
errors when trying to read a CD), do the following:
   2. Type the word or words you want to find. You can also use the ? and *
   1. Open OS/2 System.
       wildcard characters in the search field.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
   3. Make sure that All sections is selected; then select Search.
   3. Open OS/2 Window.
A Search Results window appears containing a list of topics that have the word
  4. Insert the diskette that came with your CD-ROM drive into drive A. (This
or phrase that you were trying to find. To open a topic, point to a topic and
       diskette contains the CD-ROM device driver.)
double-click.
   5. Type the following, pressing Enter after each:
Sometimes, you have a general idea where the information is. You can limit the
      COPY A:*.ADD C:\OS2\
search to those topics by marking the topics.
      COPY A:*.IFS C:\OS2\
To mark a topic:
      COPY A:*.DMD C:\OS2\
  1. Press and hold Ctrl.
      where * represents the actual name of the file.
   2. Select the topics that you want to search.
  6. Edit the C:\CONFIG.SYS file and press Enter (where c is the drive on which
  3. Release Ctrl.
      OS/2 is installed).
To unmark a topic:
   7. Add the following statements to the CONFIG.SYS file (if not already
  1. Press and hold Ctrl.
      there):
  2. Select the topic.
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
  3. Release Ctrl.
      IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
To search for a word or phrase in marked topics:
      BASEDEV=OS2CDROM.DMD
   1. Select the + signs in the Contents window.
      BASEDEV=*.ADD
  2. Mark the topics you want to search.
      where * represents the actual name of the .ADD file on the device driver
  3. Select Search.
      diskette.
   4. Type the word or words you want to find.
   8. If the following statement appears in the CONFIG.SYS file, change it from:
  5. Make sure that Marked sections is selected; then select Search.
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDROM.SYS /Q /N:4
  When the Search Results window appears, open the topics and read them.
      to
 
      REM DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDROM.SYS /Q /N:4
  Using a Bookmark    195/3
   9. Shut down the system.
 
  Problems with Sony, Mitsumi, or Hitachi** CD-ROM Drives
Information that you refer to frequently can be flagged using a bookmark.
  If you are using a Sony, Mitsumi, or Hitachi CD-ROM drive and cannot access it,
Setting a bookmark duplicates the topic in a bookmark window.
do the following:
To set a bookmark:
   1. Copy the following files from Diskette 1 to the hard disk, as follows:
   1. Open the topic that you want to mark with a bookmark.
      COPY A:\OS2CDROM.DMD C:\OS2
   2. Select Services.
      COPY A:\CDFS.IFS C:\OS2
  3. Select Bookmark.
   2. Edit your CONFIG.SYS file on the hard disk and add the following
   4. Change the name used for the bookmark (optional).
      statements:
  5. Make sure Place is selected; then select OK.
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
  To view bookmarked information:
      IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
   1. Select Services.
   3. Shut down the system.
   2. Select Bookmark.
Problems with Sound Blaster CD-ROM Drives
   3. Select View.
If you are using a Sound Blaster CD-ROM drive with the device driver SBPCD2.SYS
   4. Select the topic you want to open.
  and cannot access the drive, restart your system and do the following:
   5. Select OK.
   1. Copy the following file from Diskette 1 to the hard disk, as follows:
To remove a bookmark:
      COPY A:\CDFS.IFS C:\OS2
  1. Select Services.
   2. Edit your CONFIG.SYS file on the hard disk and add the following
   2. Select Bookmark.
      statement:
   3. Select Remove.
      IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
  4. Select the topic you want to remove.
   3. Open OS/2 System.
   5. Select OK.
   4. Open Selective Install from the System Setup folder.
   5. Select the icon next to CD-ROM Device Support on the System Configuration
      screen.
   6. Select OTHER from the bottom of the CD-ROM selection list; then select OK.
   7. When the selective installation is complete, edit the CONFIG.SYS file and
      delete the following line:
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
   8. Shut down the system.


Printing a Topic    196/3
===Hard Disk Problems 221/2===
 
Following are solutions to problems you might have with hard disk drives after installing OS/2Also refer to Recovery Procedures.
Some people prefer to read information in a hardcopy formatYou can print a
Slow SCSI Support
topic, some topics, all topics, the table of contents, and the index of the
After installation, you might experience slow SCSI support.  If this occurs,
Command Reference.
make sure that the hard disk and the controller card are both set for the ASYNCH
To print a topic:
mode or the SYNCH mode.
  1. Open the topic you want to print.
Problem with Quantum Hardcard or IDE Controller
  2. Select Print.
Add the required switch settings (adapter number and IRQ level) to the
  3. Make sure that This section is selected; then select Print.
IBM1S506.ADD device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file. If you need
To print more than one topic:
assistance with the switch settings or need a BIOS upgrade (for certain Quantum
   1. Press and hold Ctrl.
Hardcards), contact a service representative at Quantum.
   2. Select the topics that you want to print.
Hard Disk Controller Problem
   3. Release Ctrl.
   1. Determine the controller manufacturer, model number, and type.  Then,
  4. Select Print.
      determine which device driver is installed for the controller (for
  5. Make sure that Marked sections is selected; then select Print.
      example, FD7000EX.ADD).
  To print the table of contents, index, or all the topics:
   2. Verify that the installed device driver is the correct one.
  1. Select Print.
   3. Verify that the BASEDEV= statements are correct in your CONFIG.SYS file.
  2. Select the item you want to print.
      Verify that the correct device driver is listed in a BASEDEV= statement.
  3. Select Print.
      Also, verify that the correct device driver is the only device driver
  Note: The Contents and Index choices only print the entries; they do not print
      listed for that controller.  For more information about BASEDEV=
  the text associated with the entriesThe All sections choice prints the
      statements, refer to the Command Reference in the Information folder.
  entire Command Reference.  Before electing to do this, be aware that the
  Cannot Set Up a Primary Partition
  document is large and will take a long time to print.
If you have more than two hard disk drives and you cannot set up a primary
partition on one of the hard disk drives, your BIOS could be preventing the
setup.
With OS/2, you can have a primary partition on two hard disk drives; however,
the BIOS in your computer determines which two hard disk drives can have
primary partitions.
  Cannot Access Entire Hard Disk
  Your hard disk drive has more than 1024 cylinders, and you cannot access the
entire drive space, the device driver for your controller might not support
  more than 1024 cylinders.
  If you have a non-IBM controller and device driver, contact the manufacturer of
  the device driver to ask if your level of the driver supports more than 1024
  cylinders.


Glossary    197/2
===Desktop Problems 222/2===
 
Following are solutions to problems you might have with your Desktop after installing OS/2.
The Glossary is an alphabetic listing of terms used in the Workplace Shell
System Stops Working
interface and the online help system.
The system stops and the keyboard and mouse do not respond.
To open the Glossary:
   1. Press Ctrl+Esc or Alt+Esc and wait a few seconds to see if the system
   1. Open Information.
      responds.
   2. Open Glossary.
   2. Determine if you can move your mouse but cannot select any object when you
There are three ways to find a term in the glossary.  You can type the first
      press mouse button 1.
letter of the word you are looking for, scroll through the list or use the
  3. Press the Caps Lock and Num Lock keys to see if their status lights come
search function.
      on.
To scroll through the list to find a term in the glossary:
   4. Record a description of what you were doing when the system stopped.  If
   1. Select the letter that the word begins with.  If the letter is not
       any messages were displayed on the screen, be sure to record the message
       visible, select the tab arrow until the letter is visible; then select the
       text and number.
       letter.
   5. Refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for
   2. Select the up or down arrow in the scroll bar until the term is visible.
      instructions about calling for additional assistance.
  3. Point to the term.
Missing Icons
  4. Double-click.
After restarting your system, some of your Desktop icons might be missing.
  To use the search function to find a term in the glossary:
Check the documentation for the hard drive and the controller card to ensure
   1. Select Search topics.
that their settings are both set for the ASYNCH mode or the SYNCH mode.
   2. Type the term that you want to find.
Stacked Icons
   3. Select Search.
  If the objects on your Desktop appear to be stacked on each other, you can
   4. When the list of matching entries appears, point to the term; then
refresh your Desktop:
       double-click.
   1. Position the mouse pointer on a blank area of the Desktop.
 
   2. Press mouse button 2.  A pop-up menu appears.
  REXX Information    198/2+
   3. Select Refresh.
 
   4. If your screen goes blank, press Alt+Esc to switch between programs and
REXX is a procedures language designed to make basic OS/2 programs easier to
       force the "repainting" of your screen.
write and debug. Both beginning and experienced programmers will find REXX easy
DOS and Windows Programs Not Added to the Desktop
to use because it uses common English words, arithmetic and string functions,
  During the installation of OS/2, your existing DOS and Windows programs are
and OS/2 commands within a simple framework.
  automatically added to your OS/2 Desktop. However, the installation program
To view the REXX Information:
might not find all programs (for example, programs located on remote servers).
  1. Open Information.
  If this happens, restart the system, then run the Add Programs to Desktop
  2. Open REXX Information.
  utility program. (Add Programs to Desktop is located in the System Setup
  For information about using the Contents window, searching, printing and
folder which is located in the OS/2 System folder.)
  getting additional information, see Command Reference.
  OS/2 2.x Programs Not Added to the Desktop
 
If you installed OS/2 on a system that already had OS/2 2.x installed on it and
  Displaying Help for OS/2 Messages    199/3
your OS/2 2.x programs were not added to your Desktop, do the following:
 
   1. Turn on the computerIf the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
You can get information to help you understand, correct, and respond to OS/2
      to restart it.
messages. The way you request help depends upon how and where the message is
   2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
displayed.
      screen, press Alt+F1.
To get help for a message that appears in a window with a Help push button:
   3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
   1. Select the Help push button.
  4. Delete the DESKTOP directory.
  To get help for a message that appears on a full screen and is enclosed in a
   5. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.  The Desktop should be
box:
      re-created.
  1. Use the up or down arrow key to highlight Display Help.
  6. If the problem continues, re-create the INI filesFollow the
   2. Press Enter.
      instructions in Rebuilding Your Desktop.
To get help for an error message that has a message number, preceded by the
  If you moved program groups off the Desktop and into a folder, you should move
letters SYS:
  them back on the Desktop before installing OS/2. Otherwise, duplicate icons
   1. At the OS/2 command prompt, type HELP followed by a space and the message
  could appear on the screenIf you try to delete these icons, the original
      number.   (It is not necessary to type the letters SYS or the leading
  icons will also be deleted.
      zeros.)
  Blank Desktop and Missing Objects
   2. Press Enter.
  If the Desktop is blank, objects are missing, you cannot delete an object, or
For example, if you received this message:
  you have another problem that involves objects, run the CHKDSK (check disk)
SYS0002: The system cannot find the file specified.
  program until the results indicate there are no errorsTo run CHKDSK, do the
To request help for this message, type HELP 2 and then press Enter. The
  following:
following help appears:
   1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
SYS0002:  The system cannot find the file specified.
      your system.
EXPLANATION:  The file named in the command does not exist
   2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
in the current directory or search path specifiedOr, the
  3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
file name was entered incorrectly.
   4. Insert Diskette 2.
  ACTION:  Retry the command using the correct file name.
   5. Type: CHKDSK C: /F and press Enter (where: C: is the drive where OS/2 is
 
      installed).
Mastering the Master Help Index    200/1+
  For more information about CHKDSK, select Command Reference in the Information
 
folder.
The Master Help Index is an online, alphabetic list of topics available to help
  Missing Objects in the OS/2 System Folder
you while using OS/2.  This index contains information about:
Follow the instructions in Rebuilding Your Desktop.
  o Things to consider before performing a task
Folders Open and Close Immediately
  o  Steps to take to complete a task
Follow the instructions in Recovering Archived System Files.
  o  OS/2 concepts
  Missing, Empty, or Multiple Objects on Desktop
  o DOS error messages
  o The Desktop is missing objects or there is more than one icon for the same
  To open the Master Help Index:
      object.
  1. Open Information.
   o  One or more Desktop folders are empty.
  2. Open Master Help Index
   o  After you shut down the computer and start it again, the objects on the
  Tabs turn to the page in the index of the selected alphabet letter.  Tab arrows
       Desktop are not displayed the same as when you shut down.
  scroll the tabs but do not scroll the index entries.
Recover the archived Desktop, using the procedure in Recovering Archived System
  Scroll bar arrows (vertical scroll bar) scroll the index entries one line at a
Files.
  time.  Scroll bar arrows (horizontal scroll bar) scroll the index entries to
If that does not fix the problem, follow the instructions for Rebuilding Your
  the left or right so you can read information that does not fit into the
Desktop.
  window.
Object Cannot Be Deleted
  Index entries are the online help for the OS/2 operating system.
  If you cannot delete an object, do the following:
  To open an index entry for viewing:
   1. Create a folder.
   1. Point to the entry.
   2. Drag the object you want to delete to the new folder and drop it.
  2. Double-click.
   3. Drag the new folder to the Shredder and drop it.
 
  If you cannot shred the folder, do the following:
Accessing Additional Information   201/2
  1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type: CD DESKTOP and press Enter.
 
   2. After the DESKTOP directory opens, type: RD directory and press Enter.
When an index entry is opened, the information for the topic is displayed in a
      (Where: directory is replaced by the name of the directory (folder) that
window. Some entries have highlighted words and phrases in the window, which
      you want to delete.)
indicate that additional information is hidden "beneath" the word or phrase.
To view the additional information::
   1. Point to the highlighted word or phrase.
   2. Double-click.
  To return to the previous window of information:
  1. Select Previous.
 
  Searching for a Topic    202/2
 
You can search the Master Help Index for an entry using one or more words that
describe the topicFor example, to search for information about how to
duplicate an object, you might search using the word "duplicate", "duplicates",
or even "duplicating". The result of a search (using duplicate, duplicates, or
duplicating) is "copying an object".
To search for a topic:
  1. Open the Master Help Index.
   2. Select Search topics.
   3. In the Search string field, type the word or words that describe the
       topic.
  4. Select Search.
  5. When the list of topics (matched items) appears, open the entry you want
      to read.
 
  Printing a Master Help Index Entry   203/2
 
To print a Master Help Index entry:
   1. Open the index entry you want to print.
   2. Select Print topic.
  For more information about using the Master Help Index, review the OS/2
Tutorial.
 
Part 4 - Troubleshooting   204/1
 
 
Solving Installation Problems    205/1+
 
This chapter provides information to help you solve problems you might encounter
while installing OS/2*. It includes information about what to do if you have
problems, plus specific instructions for recovering from error messages or
problems with installation diskettes, screens, or CD-ROMs.
Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the
information dealing with a particular problem.
 
What to Do If You Have Problems    206/2


Installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most cases,
===Recovery Procedures 223/2+===
you will not experience problems.  However, if you do encounter a problem during
The procedures that follow provide information about recovering from Desktop
installation, do the following:
problems and system failures, including:
   1. Read through this chapter to see if the problem you are experiencing is
   o  A damaged, unusable, or unstartable desktop
      documented.
   o  An invalid CONFIG.SYS file
  2. If you received an error message (or error number), locate the message in
   o  A damaged INI file
      this chapter and perform the suggested actions to resolve the problem.
   o  Hard disk errors
  3. If your problem is not addressed in this section, refer to the Service and
   o  A forgotten lockup password
      Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions on how to get
  Note:  Backing up your system regularly might help you avoid having to
      additional assistance.
re-create files in the event of a system failure.
When you report your problem make sure you include the following information:
If your Desktop becomes damaged, unusable, or unstartable, you can recover in
   o  The brand and model of the equipment you are using
  two ways:
   o  The error message or number, if any, that appeared on your screen
   o Use the Archive/Recover utility program to restore your Desktop to a
   o  The number of the installation diskette you were using when the problem
       previously saved state
      occurred
   o  Rebuild your existing Desktop
   o  The number for your fax machine, or the number of a fax machine to which
      you have access
 
  Editing the CONFIG.SYS File on Diskette 1    207/2
 
A CONFIG.SYS file contains lines of instructions that control how your computer
starts up and how it works with the devices you have attached to it.
Diskette 1, which comes with OS/2, contains a CONFIG.SYS file. The file is added
to your root directory during installation.  There might be instances in which
you will be instructed in this chapter to edit your CONFIG.SYS file in order to
add a statement, "remark out" a line, or modify an existing line in the file.
If you need to alter the CONFIG.SYS file before you install OS/2, you will need
to make the changes to the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1.
Note:  If the CONFIG.SYS file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able to
restart your computer.  Be careful when editing the file.
To edit the CONFIG.SYS file that is on Diskette 1, use an ASCII text editor.
If you do not have a text editor installed on your computer, use the editor
  that comes on the OS/2 installation diskettes.  Follow these steps:
   1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
  2. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
      to restart it.
  3. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and
      insert Diskette 1.
  4. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to display the command
      prompt.
  5. At the command prompt, type TEDIT CONFIG.SYS and press Enter. The file
      will appear on your screen, and you can make any changes or additions to
       it.  (Press F1 if you need help using the editor.)
   6. When you are done working on the file, press F2 to save it.
  7. Press F4 to quit the editor.


  Installation Error Messages   208/2
===Recovering Archived System Files 224/3===
OS/2 has the capability of archiving key system files as well as the DESKTOP
directory each time you start OS/2.  The default setting for this feature is
OFF. (The Archive function can be turned ON via the Archive page of the Desktop
Settings notebook.)
When the Archive function is turned ON, the state of the key system files and
Desktop as they existed at the last three "starts" of OS/2 are saved.  Each time
you restart OS/2, the oldest set of archived system files is deleted and the
current system files are saved.  OS/2 also keeps a permanent archive of your
Desktop and key files as they existed when OS/2 was first installed, so you can
always restore your system to its original state.
To use archived system files, do the following:
  1. Turn on your computer.  If your computer is already on, perform a shut
      down, then press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper-left corner of your screen
      (before the OS/2 logo screen appears), press Alt+F1.
   3. A screen appears, listing the three most recent archives.  Do one of the
      following:
        o  Type the number of the archive you want to use to restore your
          system.
        o  Type X to restore your system to its original state (as it was when
          you first installed OS/2).
        o  Type C to get an OS/2 command prompt (for example, if you want to
          edit your CONFIG.SYS file).
        o  Type V to reset your primary display to VGA (for example, if you
          think your Desktop is not damaged but cannot be seen because you need
          to reinstall your VGA device drivers).


If you receive one of the following error messages on your screen while
===Recovery Choices during Restart 225/3+===
installing OS/2, try to resolve the problem with the suggested action.
The Recovery Choices screen enables you to specify how the system is to restart
Only some files were copied. You may be out of disk space.
while a restart is in progress.  You can display the Recovery Choices screen
Explanation: The installation program stopped transferring files because there
during restart by pressing Alt+F1 when a small white box appears in the upper
              was not enough hard disk space available.
left-hand corner of your screen. If you want the system to display the Recovery
  Action:      Move non-OS/2 operating system files out of the installation
Choices screen each time it restarts, you can select Display Recovery Choices at
              partition.  You can store these files in another partition or on
every system restart on the Archive page of the Desktop Settings notebook.
              a diskette. If you intend to format the installation partition,
The Recovery Choices screen allows you to:
              remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
  o Select the set of archived system files that the system is to use to
              files.
      restart
An error occurred when System Installation tried to copy a file.
  o Continue using the original installation files to restart, and go to a
  Explanation 1: The installation diskette might contain errors.
      command line
Action:       Request a replacement diskette from your place of purchase.
  o  Continue using the current system files to restart, and reset your primary
  Explanation 2: The installation program stopped transferring files because
      display to VGA
              there was not enough hard disk space available.
  o Restart your system using a customized CONFIG.SYS file that you have
  Action:      Move non-OS/2 operating system files out of the installation
       created
              partition. You can store these files in another partition or on
  Each set of archived files appears on the Recovery Choices screen with the date
              a diskette. If you intend to format the installation partition,
  and time when the files were archived. The files are numbered 1, 2, 3 or, for
              remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
  the original installation files, X.  Select the files that you want the system
              files.
  to restart with by pressing 1, 2, 3, or X on your keyboard.  The system will
  Explanation 3: The hard disk might contain errors.
  continue to restart using the set of archived files represented by the number
  Action:      Follow the CHKDSK procedure outlined in Recovering from Errors on
you pressed.
              the Hard Disk.
  To go to a command line without changing the system files, press the C key on
  An error occurred when System Installation tried to transfer system files to
  your keyboard.
  your hard diskYour hard disk might be unusable.
  To reset your primary display to VGA, press the V key on your keyboard.
Explanation: The installation program stopped transferring files because an
  The character keys that you press can be uppercase or lowercase letters.
              error occurred while the boot record was being written.
  To restart your system using a customized version of the CONFIG.SYS file, enter
  Action:      Format the installation partition and restart the installation.
an alphabetic character that corresponds to the name of a CONFIG.SYS file that
              Remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
  you have created. Creating Your Own CONFIG.SYS Files describes how to create
              files.
  and name your own customized version of CONFIG.SYSDisplaying Your CONFIG.?
  System Installation failed trying to load a module into memory.
  Choices on the Recovery Choices Screen describes how to display your customized
  Explanation:  The installation program could not load a system module because
  CONFIG.SYS choices on the Recovery Choices screen.
              there is not enough memory. OS/2 requires a minimum of 4MB of
 
              memory.
===Creating Your Own CONFIG.SYS Files 226/4===
  Action:      Add more system memory (RAM).
In some cases, you need different CONFIG.SYS files to create environments that
  An error occurred when System Installation tried to allocate a segment of
are specific to the kinds of work you are doing. For example, when you use a
  memory.
laptop computer with a docking station, you might want a CONFIG.SYS file that
Explanation:  The installation program could not allocate a segment of memory
supports your laptop computer and one that supports your regular machine. You
              because there is not enough memory. OS/2 requires a minimum of
can create different versions of the CONFIG.SYS file, and, during restart,
              4MB of memory.
specify from the Recovery Choices screen which version the system is to use. You
Action:      Add more system memory (RAM).
can also customize the Recovery Choices screen to display your customized
FDISK unsuccessful.
CONFIG.SYS file choices.
Explanation:  Your hard disk controller might not be supported.
The following steps describe how to create and use multiple CONFIG.SYS files.
Action:      Make a copy of Diskette 1. Locate the Device Support Diskette
In these steps, ? is any unique single alphabetic character except: X, x, C, c,
              supplied by the manufacturer of your hard disk controller. Copy
V, or v. These steps use C as the root directory. If you installed OS/2 on a
              the OS/2 device driver from that Device Support Diskette onto the
drive other than C, replace the C in the path name with your own root directory.
              copy of Diskette 1.  Then add the statement BASEDEV=xxx.SYS
  1. Save a copy of the current CONFIG.SYS file.
              (where xxx is the name of the device driver) to the CONFIG.SYS
       You can save a copy of the current CONFIG.SYS file by copying it to a
              file on the copy of Diskette 1, and restart the installation.
      diskette.  Otherwise, you can copy the current CONFIG.SYS file to the
An error occurred when System Installation tried to locate the dynamic link
      C:\OS2\BOOT subdirectory, and rename it to CONFIG.?If you copy and
library.
      rename CONFIG.SYS, be sure to make a note of the new name and directory so
ExplanationThe installation program could not load the dynamic link library
      you can restore it later.
              because there is not enough random access memory (RAM). OS/2
  2. On the C:\OS2\BOOT subdirectory, create a file called CONFIG.? and
              requires a minimum of 4MB of memory
       customize it with the modifications that you need.
Action:      Add more system memory (RAM).
  3. Copy your customized CONFIG.? file to the current CONFIG.SYS file.
A disk read error occurred.
       There are two ways to copy your CONFIG.? file. You can enter the copy
Explanation:  The BIOS level of the Future Domain** adapter is not compatible.
      command at the OS/2 command prompt, or you can create an OS/2 batch file
Action:       Contact Future Domain for a BIOS upgrade if you own the
       that will run during restart after the system processes C:\CONFIG.SYS.
              following:
        a. Replacing Your CONFIG.SYS file with CONFIG.?
  o  Future Domain TMC-850/860/875/885 with BIOS revision level 7.0
          If you have only one customized CONFIG.? file, or if you do not plan
  o  Future Domain TMC-1660/1670/1680 with BIOS revision level 2.0
          to change between CONFIG.SYS and CONFIG.? often, you might choose to
OS/2 is unable to operate your hard disk or your diskette drive.
          copy over CONFIG.SYS with your customized CONFIG.? file. Copying over
Explanation 1: This might indicate some incompatibility between OS/2 and the
          C:\CONFIG.SYS with your customized CONFIG.? file replaces CONFIG.SYS
              diskette drive controller or hard disk controller in your system.
          in the root directory, and makes your customized file the default
  Action:      Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the diskette or hard disk from which
          CONFIG.SYS file.
              you are starting OS/2Remove all lines with
          The command to copy your customized file to the current CONFIG.SYS
              BASEDEV=xxxxxxxx.ADD (where xxxxxxxx can be any characters), and
          file is:
              make sure the following two lines appear in the CONFIG.SYS:
          COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.? C:\CONFIG.SYS
              BASEDEV=IBMxFLPY.ADD
          Using your customized CONFIG.? file as the default file allows you to
              BASEDEV=IBMINT13.I13
          restart without selecting a CONFIG.? file at the Recovery Choices
              (where x is replaced by a 2 if you are using a Micro Channel
          screen.
              system, and a 1 if you are using any other system.)
          You can now restart your system. When you restart, the system will
Explanation 2: A diskette drive or a hard disk drive controller might have an
          automatically use the file in the root directory named CONFIG.SYS.
              additional device (such as a tape backup) attached to it.
        b. Creating a Batch File to Replace CONFIG.SYS with CONFIG.?
Action:       Disconnect additional devices, if possible.
          If you have several customized CONFIG.SYS files, using the batch file
Explanation 3: There might be an interrupt request (IRQ) level conflict between
          allows you to specify the CONFIG.? you want to use without entering
              the diskette drive or hard disk controller and other devices
          multiple copy commandsYou can simply change the ? character in
              installed on your system.
          your batch file, and enter that character at the Recovery Choices
Action:       Change IRQ levels to eliminate conflicts.
          screen.
Explanation 4: The hard disk partition on which you are installing OS/2 was
          Create a batch file on C:\OS2\BOOT, and name it ALTF1?.CMD, where ?
              compressed with a DOS data compression program.
          is the character that you used in the name of your CONFIG.? file. Put
Action:       Use the data compression program to decompress the partition.
          the following COPY command in the batch file.
              Then restart the installation procedure.
          COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.? C:\CONFIG.SYS
TRAPxxx
          Display the Recovery Choices screen by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del to
Explanation:  In general, traps are symptoms of software-related problems.
          restart your system and then pressing Alt+F1.
              After you have pursued these symptoms from a software failure
          At the Recovery Choices screen, press the key for the ? single
              perspective, you should consider the potential of a hardware
          character in the name of the CONFIG.? file you want to use.
              cause relating to caches and memory, such as the following:
          The system continues the restart using your customized CONFIG.? file.
  o  If your computer has an 80486 microprocessor, your computer might require
          NoteIf you enter a character from the Recovery Choices screen for
      faster RAM chips (60ns or 70ns).
          which there is no corresponding ALTF1?.CMD batch file, the system
  o  There might be a problem with the external (level-2) CPU memory cache or
          will use the CONFIG.? file that corresponds to that character. If no
      main memory system on ISA or EISA systems.
          CONFIG.? file corresponding to that character exists, the system will
Action:       Try the following:
          return to the Recovery Choices screen.
  1. From the setup/diagnostics diskette or the BIOS Setup program built into
          Example
      the computer, try disabling all shadow RAM and external (level- 2) CPU
          The following example shows how to create a CONFIG.SYS file named
      memory caches.
          CONFIG.A, and a batch file to copy it during restart. The system is
  2. If problems persist during the installation of OS/2 after performing the
          installed on the C driveBefore you start, save a copy of your
      above action, turn off the turbo switch (if one is available) on your
          current CONFIG.SYS file.
      system and retry the operation.  Disable caching during installation or
            1. Copy the system version of CONFIG.SYS into a new file called
      turn the turbo switch off.
                CONFIG.A
Some of the more common traps are listed below. If you receive a trap error
                COPY CONFIG.SYS C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.A
that is not listed, you can view help for the trap after OS/2 is installed, by
            2. Change to the C:\OS2\BOOT directory
typing HELP followed by the trap number at an OS/2 command prompt. For
                CD OS2
example:
                CD BOOT
HELP 0002
            3. Edit CONFIG.A to customize it, and save your changes
If the trap error contains a letter, as in a TRAP D error you must convert the
                E CONFIG.A
hexadecimal number (D) to decimal then add it to 1930. For example, TRAP D
            4. Edit a file called ALTF1A.CMD file
converted would be 1943 because D hexadecimal is 13 decimal (13 added to 1930
                E ALTF1A.CMD
equals 1943)So you would type HELP 1943 at an OS/2 command prompt.
            5. Put the following COPY command into ALTF1A.CMD, and save your
A list of the hexadecimal to decimal conversions are listed below:
                changes
A = 10      D = 13
                COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.A C:\CONFIG.SYS
B = 11      E = 14
            6. Restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.  Press Alt+F1 when
C = 12      F = 15
                the small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of
TRAP0002
                your screen.
Explanation: A TRAP0002 error is a hardware error and is usually related
            7. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press the letter A.
              directly to memory. Mismatched memory modules can often cause
 
              these kinds of errors. Your computer might have a variety of
===Displaying Your CONFIG.? Choices on the Recovery Choices Screen  227/4===
              single inline memory modules (SIMMs) that were produced by
You can customize your Recovery Choices screen to display the list of customized CONFIG.? files that you createdCustomizing the Recovery Choices screen will help you to remember which character to enter for a particular version of CONFIG.?, by displaying your selections.
              different manufacturers or that operate at different speeds.
To customize the Recovery Choices screen, edit the file
              (For example, a 1 x 9 module cannot be used with a 1 x 3 module.)
C:\OS2\BOOT\ALTF1BOT.SCR. (If you installed OS/2 on a drive other than C,
Action:       Try the following:
specify the drive on which OS/2 is installed.) You can add up to 6 lines of text
  o  Have your computer checked by a service representative.
to the bottom of this file.
  o  If your computer memory is okay and the problem persists, make sure that
Each line that you add should represent a single CONFIG.? file that you created.
      your system BIOS is of a recent date (1991 or later). Refer to Chapter 17,
  Each line should include the alphabetic character that identifies that CONFIG.?
      "Special Hardware Considerations," for more information about BIOS, or
file.  You might also want to include a brief, one-line description of when to
      contact the manufacturer of your computer BIOS to receive the latest
use that version of the CONFIG.? file.
      version.
For example, to display the option for the CONFIG.A file on the Recovery Choices
SYS0005
screen, you might add the following to the file C:\OS2\BOOT\ALTF1BOT.SCR:
ExplanationWhen you perform a redirected remote installation of OS/2 using
A CONFIG.A (file for laptop computer)
              SYSINST2 for panel installation, the error message SYS0005
 
              appears while the computer attempts to copy UNPACK2.EXE.
===Rebuilding Your Desktop 228/3===
Action:      This Access Denied Error is caused by damage to the extended
Use the following procedure if the Archive/Recover procedure did not restore your Desktop, this procedure will rebuild the Desktop by making new INI files.
              attribute data on the NetWare** Server. To correct this problem,
   1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
              delete the old disk images on the server and create new OS/2 disk
              images.
SYS1200 and EC=00BF
Explanation: The DOS environment cannot be created.
  Action:      If you see the error message SYS1200 while attempting to use the
              Dual Boot feature to change to DOS, and you also see error code
              EC=00BF, check your CONFIG.SYS file. Make sure your virtual DOS
              device drivers have not been remarked out of or removed from your
              CONFIG.SYS file. If necessary, look at the CONFIG.SYS file in
              the OS2\INSTALL directory (the CONFIG.SYS file as it was
              originally installed) to see how the DOS device drivers should be
              listed.
SYS1201
Explanation: A device driver specified in the CONFIG.SYS file cannot be found,
              is the incorrect device driver (ex. DOS device driver), or is
              specified twice within the file.
  Action:      Make sure the correct device driver for the device is installed,
              and then check the CONFIG.SYS file to make sure the information
              specified is correct.
  SYS1475
Explanation:  The file OS2BOOT cannot be foundThis is a hidden system file
              and must reside in the root directory of the drive from which the
              operating system is started.
Action:      Remove the diskette from drive A and restart the system. If the
              problem was not caused by a diskette in drive A, then the OS2BOOT
              file might be missing.  Try the following procedure:
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
   2. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
       to restart it.
       to restart it.
   3. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and
   2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
       insert Diskette 1.
       screen, press Alt+F1.
   4. Press Enter.
   3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
   5. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to display the command
   4. Change to the OS/2 directory on your hard disk.  Type the following
       prompt.
      commands and press Enter after each:
   6. Reinsert the Installation Diskette.
      C:
  7. Type sysinstx c: and press Enter. (If your operating system resides on a
      CD\OS2
      drive other than C, use the appropriate drive letter instead.)
  5. Type the following commands and press Enter after each:
              If this procedure does not correct the problem, it might be
      MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC
              necessary to reinstall the operating system.
       MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC
  SYS1719
   6. Delete the hidden file, WP?ROOT.?SF, from the startable partition. Type
Explanation:  The file IBM386FS\HPFS386.IFS does not contain a valid device
      the following commands and press Enter after each:
              driver or file system driver.
      ATTRIB -h -s -r \WP?ROOT.?SF
Action:      Edit your CONFIG.SYS file and delete the following line:
      DEL \WP?ROOT.?SF
              IFS=x:\OS2\HPFS.IFS
  7. Restart the system.
SYS2025
 
Explanation:  A disk read error occurred.  This might be a disk error or a
===Recovering the CONFIG.SYS File 229/3===
              damaged system boot record.
The CONFIG.SYS file contains command statements that are used to configure your
Actions:      Try the following:
system during startup.  If the file is changed incorrectly, you might not be
   o If this error occurred while the system was loading, follow the procedure
able to restart the system or edit the file(For example, some programs write
       in Recovering from Errors on the Hard Disk.
information to the CONFIG.SYS file when they are installed. In some cases, this
   o  If this error occurred when the system was reading the installation
information can cause the CONFIG.SYS file to be unusable.) To recover the
       diskettes, there might be an error on the diskette. If you already have
original version of the CONFIG.SYS file (as it was created when OS/2 was
       an operating system installed on your computer, use the XDFCOPY command to
installed), you can use the following procedure:
       make a copy of the installation diskettes. Retry the installation with
   1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
       the newly copied diskettes.
       to restart it.
  o If your computer has BIOS supplied by AMI** or Phoenix**, you might need
   2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
       to upgrade the BIOSRefer to Chapter 17, "Special Hardware
       screen, press Alt+F1.
       Considerations."
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
   o  If your system has a local bus IDE controller card, disable the BIOS on
  4. Type C: and press Enter (where C represents the drive on which your
      the 32-bit local bus IDE controller card and use the generic INT13 driver
       operating system resides).
      instead of IBM1S506.ADD.
  5. Rename the damaged CONFIG.SYS file.  For example, type:
  o Make sure that there is not a hardware problem with your hard disk
       REN CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.BAD
      controller or your diskette drive.
  6. Press Enter.
SYS2026
  7. Copy the backup version of the CONFIG.SYS file to the root directory of
Explanation:  The file OS2LDR cannot be found.  This is a hidden system file
       the drive where your operating system resides(The CONFIG.SYS backup
              and must reside in the root directory of the drive from which the
       file was created during OS/2 installation)Type:
              operating system is started.
       COPY C:\OS2\INSTALL\CONFIG.SYS C:\CONFIG.SYS
  Action:      Try the following:
  8. Press Enter.
              Make sure a non-system diskette is not in the diskette drive. If
   9. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
              a diskette is in the drive, remove it and restart the system.
As stated, this procedure reestablishes the original version of the CONFIG.SYS
              If the OS2LDR file is still missing:
file (as it was created during OS/2 installation). If you made any changes to
   1. Insert the Installation Diskette into the diskette drive and restart the
  the CONFIG.SYS file after that time, you will have to edit the newly copied
       system.
CONFIG.SYS file and add those changes.
   2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
 
   3. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to access a command
===Recovering the User INI File 230/3===
      prompt.
The OS2.INI file, also referred to as the user INI file, is an operating system
   4. Copy the OS2LDR file from the Installation Diskette to the root directory
startup file that contains system settings such as program defaults, display
       on the OS/2 partition.
options, and file options.  The OS2SYS.INI file, also referred to as the system
   5. Restart the system.
INI file, is an operating system file that contains information about installed
  SYS2027
fonts and printer driversIf you receive a message that the OS2.INI file has
  Explanation: This message usually accompanies messages SYS1475 and SYS2025,
been "corrupted", replace both the OS2.INI file and the OS2SYS.INI file on your
              and means that the system must be restartedSee the explanation
hard disk.
              and actions for these messages for more specific information.
Use the following procedure to replace these two files with versions containing
  Action:       Insert a system diskette and restart the system.
default values:
  SYS2028
   1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
  Explanation: The system cannot find the OS2KRNL fileThis is a hidden system
       to restart it.
              file and must reside in the root directory of the drive from
   2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
              which the operating system is started.
      screen, press Alt+F1.
Action:      Try the following:
   3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
   1. Insert the Installation Diskette into the diskette drive and restart the
   4. Type C: and press Enter (where C represents the drive where your operating
       system.
       system resides).
   5. Type CD \OS2 and press Enter.
  6. Type ATTRIB -s -h -r OS2*.INI and press Enter.
  7. Type REN OS2.INI OS2.OLD and press Enter.
  8. Type MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC and press Enter.
  9. Type REN OS2SYS.INI OS2SYS.OLD and press Enter.
  10. Type MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC and press Enter.
  11. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
  You can protect your INI files by having them automatically backed up each time
  you start your system. For example, if you include the following statements in
your CONFIG.SYS file, a backup copy of your current INI files and a backup copy
of the INI files as they existed at the previous system startup will be made.
  (Note that this example assumes that OS/2 is installed on drive C.  Use the
letter of the drive on which you have OS/2 installed.)
  CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\*.INX C:\OS2\*.INY
  CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\OS2*.INI C:\OS2\*.INX
  By copying the INI files this way, you will always be able to recover a recent
  version of these files in case the user INI file becomes damaged.
 
===Recovering from Errors on the Hard Disk 231/3===
The CHKDSK command with the parameter /F can be used to correct disk and
directory errorsHowever, when you use the /F parameter, no activity can occur
on the disk.  Therefore, if you need to correct errors on the drive from which
you normally start OS/2, you must use the version of CHKDSK that is on the
installation diskettes (or installation CD) instead of the version that has been
installed on the hard disk. You can also use the version of CHKDSK on the
installation diskettes or CD if the disk is in use or locked by another process.
To run CHKDSK /F using diskettes:
   1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
       your system.
   2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
   2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
   3. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to access a command
   3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
      prompt.
   4. Insert Diskette 2.
   4. Copy the OS2KRNLI file from the Installation Diskette to the root
  5. To correct the errors on your hard disk, type CHKDSK C: /F:2, then press
      directory of the OS/2 partition.  Type: A:OS2KRNLI C:\OS2KRNL and press
       Enter. (Where: C: is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
       Enter. (Where A: is the diskette drive containing the Installation
   6. Remove the diskette from drive A.
      Diskette and C: is the drive on which you are installing OS/2.) Notice the
   7. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
      change in name of the OS2KRNL file.
  To run CHKDSK /F from a CD:
   5. Remove the diskette from the drive.
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
   6. Restart the system.
      your system.
  SYS2029
  2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
Explanation:  The file OS2KRNL is damaged or not readable.
  3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
Action:      Copy the OS2KRNLI file from the Installation Diskette to the root
  4. Insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
              directory of the drive containing the operating system. Follow
  5. Type E: (where E is your CD-ROM drive) and press Enter.
              the instructions for error message SYS2028.
  6. Type CD\OS2IMAGE and press Enter.
SYS2030
  7. Type CD DISK_2 and press Enter.
Explanation:  The system does not have enough memory to start the operating
  8. To correct the errors on your hard disk, type CHKDSK C: /F:2, then press
              system. OS/2 requires a minimum of 4MB of memory.
      Enter(Where: C: is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
Action:       Add more memory to the system.
  9. Press Enter.
SYS3146
Explanation:  The system cannot find the OS2LDR.MSG file. This is a hidden
              system file and must reside in the root directory of the drive
              from which the operating system is started.
Action:      Copy the OS2LDR.MSG file from the Installation Diskette to the
              root directory of the drive containing the operating system.
  SYS3147
Explanation: The OS2LDR.MSG file is not readable.  The file might be damaged.
Action:      Copy the OS2LDR.MSG file from the Installation Diskette to the
              root directory of the drive containing the operating system.
SYS3161
Explanation:  The system detected an 8086, 8088, or 80286 processor.  These
              processors are not supported by OS/2.
Action:      Upgrade your system so that your processor is compatible with the
              80386 processor.


  Installation Diskette Problems   209/2
  Recovering Memory State Data   232/3


Following are solutions to problems that might occur while you are using the
The process OS/2 uses to recover the state of memory at the time of a failure is
installation diskettes to install OS/2.
called a memory dumpA memory dump is performed when a problem is difficult to
Diskette 1:  If the installation procedure stops while Diskette 1 is in the
reproduce or other methods of problem determination do not identify the problem.
              diskette drive, there might be a problem with the features of the
  Memory dump information can then be analyzed by a team of technical experts and
              hard disk controller.  If the controller has on-board disk
determine the cause of the problem.
              caching, disable the caching.  If the controller can do
Important Do not perform a memory dump unless your Service and Support Group
              asynchronous memory refreshes, turn off that feature.  Make sure
has recommended this action. :enote.
              that other IRQ settings do not conflict with the hard disk
There are two types of memory dumps:
              controller IRQ setting.  If multiple hard disk controllers or
   o  Manual memory dump (used for system hangs and traps that cause the system
              hardcards are installed in the system, it might be necessary to
       to stop)
              remove one of them.
   o  Automatic memory dump (used for application programs, system traps, and
              The following apply to machine-specific problems:
       internal processing errors)
  o  If you are installing on a system with an Allways** IN2000 SCSI adapter,
  A system memory dump can be placed on a FAT hard-disk partition or formatted
      and an IPE or FDISK error is displayed during the installation of Diskette
  diskettes.
      1. Upgrade your system to the current BIOS level of VCN:1-02The Allways
  Different situations determine which type of memory dump is neededRefer to
      IN2000 SCSI adapter might require an EPROM upgrade to operate with OS/2.
  the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions about
      You might find that you have some problems when trying to install over DOS
calling for additional assistance.
      partitions.  To correct these problems, you need to install the EPROM and
  Using TRACE in CONFIG.SYS File
      reformat the hard drive.
Before you create the memory dump diskettes, you must use the OS/2 Event
  o  If you are installing OS/2 on a Mylex** system, a TRAP0008 error occurs
Tracing Service to capture a sequence of system events. To enable system
      during the installation of Diskette 1.  For more information on this
event-tracing, add the following statements to your CONFIG.SYS file:
      error, contact Mylex.
TRACEBUF=63
  o  If you are installing on a Compaq** 386/331 Deskpro system, a TRAP000D
  TRACE=ON
      error occurs during the installation of Diskette 1.  To correct this
The default for TRACE=ON is to trace all static system events.
      problem, do the following:
Restart your system to activate TRACE.  Also, turn on two dynamic trace points
        1. Make a copy of Diskette 1. You will modify the copy.
  as follows:
        2. Use a text editor to edit the CONFIG.SYS file that exists on the copy
   1. Open OS/2 System.
          of Diskette 1.
   2. Open Command Prompts.
        3. Delete the following statement from the CONFIG.SYS file:
   3. Open OS/2 Full Screen or OS/2 Window.
          BASEDEV=IBM2SCSI.ADD
   4. Type the following at the command prompt:
        4. Use the copy of the diskette during the installation process instead
      trace on kernel  (press Enter)
          of the original.
      trace on doscall1 (press Enter)
  Diskette 3:  If the installation program continues to prompt you to insert
  Performing the Memory Dump
              Diskette 3, you have a 1.44 MB diskette drive that can work in
  If you are sending a memory dump to diskettes, you must use formatted
              either IBM* PC/XT* mode or IBM PCAT mode.  Contact your service
  diskettesGenerally, one 1.44MB diskette is used for each 2MB of RAMFor
              representative to determine if there are hardware-specific
  example, if you have a 16MB system, you will probably use eight 1.44MB
              considerations.
  formatted diskettes.
Any Diskette: If several diskettes are successfully installed, then the system
  If you are sending a memory dump to a hard disk, you must first create a FAT
              refuses a diskette and makes a beeping sound, your system might
  partition labeled SADUMP and give it a size greater than the amount of physical
              be infected with the Joshi virus. (This symptom usually appears
  memory (RAM) in your systemFor example, if your system has 16MB of RAM, set
              after the first phase of the installation is complete and the
  the size of the SADUMP partition to 17MB.
              system is restarted.) The Joshi virus is a DOS virus that
  To run a memory dump, the Memory Dump facility must be started manually or
              interferes with OS/2 and causes random lockups.  The Joshi virus:
automatically as follows:
   o  Operates by trapping disk reads and writes.  If the virus is active in
To start it manually:
       memory, programs that try to locate the virus on diskette will have
Press and hold down the Ctrl and Alt keys, and then press the Num Lock key
      problems detecting it.
  twice. After a few seconds, the screen clears; after a minute the system beeps
   o  Is carried on the boot sector of an infected data diskette or system
  and one of the following messages is displayed:
       diskette. This virus originated in DOS but can survive in OS/2. When you
When dumping to diskettes:
      start an infected system, the virus resides in memory and survives a
  Insert a formatted diskette to commence dumping.
      Ctrl+Alt+Del startup. If you do not type Happy Birthday Joshi, the system
  When dumping to a hard disk:
      will stop.
  The memory dump is being performed.
  o Is copied to the boot sector of every disketteThe virus will be
  The total amount of memory to be dumped is xxxx.
      transferred to any computer on which the user performed any diskette
  To start it automatically:
      operation that included reading from, or writing to, the infected
  Type one of the following statements in your CONFIG.SYS file and restart your
      diskette.
  system:
  o Spreads from infected diskettes to DOS and OS/2 systems when the systems
  TRAPDUMP=OFF,drive letter:
      are started from diskettes.
  TRAPDUMP=ON,drive letter:
  o Interferes with the startup from the hard disk of OS/2-based systems. The
  TRAPDUMP=R0,drive letter:
      warning that OS/2 will give is that the IBM1FLPY.ADD file is bad or
      missing.
              Many antivirus packages are effective at detecting this virus.
              In DOS, the Norton Antivirus Version 2.1 can both detect and
              clear the virus.
              In OS/2, Central Point Anti-Virus** can detect the virus.
              McAfee** Clean and Scan and IBM Anti-Virus/2* (AV/2) can both
              detect and clear the virus.
 
  Installation Screen Problems    210/2
 
Following are solutions for problems you might have with your screen during the
installation of OS/2.
White Screen during Installation
If the display screen is white during the installation of OS/2 and there is no
system activity, set the video adapter to operate on an 8-bit mode and move the
adapter to an 8-bit slot. Do the following:
   1. Turn off the computer and disable the autosensing capability of the video
      adapter.
   2. Modify the settings.  Refer to the documentation that came with your video
      adapter.
   3. Place the adapter in an 8-bit slot.  Then install OS/2.
   4. Return the adapter to the 16-bit slot and set back to the 16-bit mode.
  White Screen with Disk Light On Constantly
  If you are installing OS/2 on a fast 486 ISA-bus computer, you might encounter
  a white screen and the disk light constantly onTo correct this problem, try
to reduce the speed of the computer by turning off the turbo mode of the
computerRefer to the documentation that came with your computer to find out
  how to change the mode.
  Black Lines on an OS/2 Logo Screen
  During the installation on a Gateway** 2000 with an 80486/66MHz processor, a
  local bus, and an ATI** Graphics Ultra Pro, the system will get to the screen
  with the colorful OS/2 logo, and then the installation will stop. The display
  screen shows horizontal bands of video separated by black bands that scroll
  horizontally across the screen.  To correct this problem, do the following:
  1. Start DOS.
  2. At the DOS prompt, type CD \MACH32 and press Enter.
  3. Type install and press Enter.
  4. At the Main Selection screen, select Set Power Up Configuration.
  5. Select Monitor Type and press Enter.
  6. Select 1572 Monitor with 72Hz Refresh Rate and press Enter.
  7. Select IBM Default (or 60Hz) as the new display.
  Note: After OS/2 is successfully installed, repeat the steps to reselect the
  1572 Monitor type.
 
Installation CD-ROM Problems    211/2
 
Cannot Access CD-ROM During Installation
If the device driver for your CD-ROM is not included in the OS/2 package, but is
available from the CD-ROM manufacturer, you can modify Diskette 1 to add the
device driver. Refer to "Chapter 17, Special Hardware Considerations" for
instructions.
If you cannot access your CD-ROM drive during installation from a CD, but you
can access the drive using DOS, you can install OS/2 using disk images.  Disk
Images are copies of the installation program that you put on diskette. You
create disk images by using the XDFCOPY utility program to copy images from the
CD to diskettes. You then use these diskettes to install OS/2.
Note: Installation diskettes are in a special format called XDF. The only
command you should use with an XDF disketee is XDFCOPY.
Be sure to use formatted diskettes for this procedure. To find out exactly how
  many diskettes you will need:
  1. Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive
  2. Type: DIR X:\DISKIMGS\OS2\35 /W (where: X is the drive letter of your
      CD-ROM drive and 35 is the diskette size.)
  3. Press Enter.  A list of files will appear on your display.
  4. Count the files that end with the extension .DSK. Each .DSK file will
      require a separate diskette.
  Use the following command to create each disk image:
  X:\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY
  X:\DISKIMGS\OS2\size\diskname.dsk Y:
  where:
  where:
  X:                       is the drive letter of the CD-ROM drive.
  o TRAPDUMP=OFF,drive letter: indicates that no automatic dump is to be
  \DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY        is the location and name of the program used to create
      takenThis is the default value; it is generally used when initiating a
                          the diskettes
      manual memory dump.
DISKIMGS\OS2\size        is the location of the files containing the disk
      If REIPL=ON is specified in the CONFIG.SYS file, the system will restart
                          images. Substitute 35 for the size parameterUse 35
      automatically and no dump will be taken when a system trap or internal
                          for 3.5-inch 1.44MB and 2.88MB diskettes.
      processing error occurs.
  diskname.dsk            is the disk image file name (for example, DISK0.DSK).
  o  TRAPDUMP=ON,drive letter: specifies the drive to which system dump
Y:                      is the drive letter of your diskette drive.
      information is written for any access violations. The system will restart
  For example, to create the Installation Diskette (DISK0.DSK) on a 3.5-inch
      after the TRAPDUMP process has completedThe default drive is A if no
  diskette, type the following and press Enter.
      drive is specified.
  E:\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY E:\DISKIMGS\OS2\35\DISK0.DSK A:
  o TRAPDUMP=R0,drive letter: specifies the drive to which system dump
  Where: E: is the CD-ROM drive and A: is the diskette drive.
      information is written for system traps and internal processing errors.
 
      The system will restart after the TRAPDUMP process has completed. The
  Miscellaneous Installation Problems    212/2
      default drive is A if no drive is specified.
 
  TRAPDUMP now initiates a memory dump, depending on which TRAPDUMP statement is
Following are solutions to miscellaneous problems that might occur while you are
  placed in the CONFIG.SYS file.
installing OS/2.
  Warning: Setting TRAPDUMP to ON or R0 enables your system to automatically
Missing Device Driver Needed for Installation
  initiate a memory dump. Do not enable TRAPDUMP unless you need to troubleshoot
If the device driver needed to install OS/2 on your computer is missing from the
  your system and have been instructed to do so by your technical coordinator.
installation diskettes, obtain the device driver from either the device
Note:  If dumping to diskettes, complete steps 1 through 5. If dumping to hard
manufacturer or a bulletin board, then do the following:
disk, skip steps 1 through 5 and read step 6.
  1. Make a backup copy of Diskette 1.
   1. When prompted, insert the diskette labeled Dump Diskette 1 and press any
  2. Copy the needed device driver file (.ADD) to the backup copy of Diskette
       key to start the dump process.  The following message will be displayed:
      1.
       The memory dump is being performed...
   3. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the backup copy of Diskette 1 and change the
   2. When the memory dump has completed or the current dump diskette is full,
       BASEDEV= statement to include the file name and extension of the new
      the following messages are displayed:
       device driver. Example:  BASEDEV=IBM1FLPY.ADD
      The diskette is fullInsert another formatted diskette in drive A.
   4. Save the file, and use the updated copy of Diskette 1 to install OS/2.
      The storage address ranges on this diskette are:
Computer Beeps Constantly
      DUMPDATA.xxx      yyy - zzz
If your computer beeps constantly while you are changing diskettes during
      Press any key to continue.
installation, you might have a defective diskette drive controller or cable.
      where xxx is the dump diskette number, yyy is the beginning memory
Check the controller and cable for damage, and also check all their
      address, and zzz is the ending memory address on the disk.
connections.
      Note:  If you press Enter without changing the diskette, the system will
Promise IDE Cached Controller
       prompt you once more before the dump process overwrites the contents of
To install OS/2 on a system with a Promise IDE Cached Controller, you must edit
       the current diskette in the drive. :enote.
the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1 and change the following line:
   3. Insert the next dump diskette into drive A and press any keyThis action
BASEDEV=IBM1S506
      continues the dump process and displays the following message:
to
       The memory dump is being performed...
BASEDEV=IBM1S506 /!SMS
      Warning: Any data on the dump diskettes will be overwritten by the Memory
ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Adapter
      Dump facility.
ATI makes various display adapters that are comparable with the IBM 8514/A
   4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the dumping is completed and the following
display adapterThe ATI Graphics Ultra, 8514 Ultra, and Graphics Vantage can
      message is displayed:
all be treated as IBM 8514/A adapters for the OS/2 installation process.
      Insert memory dump diskette number 1 to complete dump.
However, if you have an ATI Graphics Ultra Pro, you must follow these steps
      The storage address ranges on this diskette are:
before you install OS/2. The INSTALL utility program used in the following
       DUMPDATA.xxx        yyy - zzz
steps will set your display to run as a VGA display so that OS/2 can be
       Press any key to continue.
installed.  After OS/2 is installed, you can run the INSTALL utility program
   5. You must reinsert Dump Diskette 1 at this point to properly terminate the
again to select the correct display attached to the system.
       dump processThe control program will write the dump summary record to
Note:  Following these steps incorrectly might cause your system to hang with a
       Dump Diskette 1 and end the process.  After the process has ended, the
black screen or distort your display with static.  Refer to the ATI
       following messages are displayed:
documentation if you encounter problems configuring the Ultra Pro memory.
       The memory dump has completedRemove the dump diskette and restart the
To prepare your ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter for use with OS/2:
      system.
  1. Start your system using DOS, preferably from a diskette.  You will need to
  6. When a memory dump is initiated, the system begins writing the system
       start DOS again after OS/2 is installed because the ATI INSTALL utility
      memory to the dump partition. When completed, the system restarts
       program runs only in DOS.
       automatically.
  2. Type INSTALL at the DOS command prompt.
Mailing the Dump Diskettes
   3. If your adapter has 1MB of video memory, select SHAREDIf your adapter
  Do not send dump diskettes unless instructed by the Service and Support Group.
       has 2MB of video memory, ensure that the aperture is properly configured.
  Diskettes must be clearly labeled with the identification number (which is the
  4. Select Monitor Setup.
PMR number that is provided by the Service and Support Group) and your name.
  5. Select Custom.
  Also, be sure to number the diskettes.
  6. Set the refresh rate for 640 x 480 to IBM DEFAULT (or 60Hz).
  Send the dump diskettes to the address provided by the Service and Support
  7. Set the refresh of all other resolutions as appropriate for your display.
GroupRefer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for
  8. Save the configuration.
  instructions about calling for additional assistance.
   9. Install OS/2.  Make sure that during the installation of OS/2, you select
 
      8514 as the primary display type.
Recovering from A Forgotten Password    233/3
IBM PS/2* Model 30-286 Upgrades
OS/2 is not supported on IBM PS/2 Model 30-286 upgraded to a 386
microprocessor.
Aox** Systems
If your computer has an Aox add-in microprocessor adapter and you encounter
problems either installing or starting up your OS/2 system, call the Aox
Corporation and ask for the latest "flash-prom" code upgrade.
IOMEGA** PC Powered Pro 90
If you are using an IOMEGA PC Powered Pro 90, call the IOMEGA service number
and request OAD Driver Version 2.3.
IBM PS/2 Model 90 and 95 Computers
  o  If you are experiencing problems with your Model 90 or 95, ensure your
       system is at the latest engineering change (EC) level. Your IBM service
       representative can assist you.
   You must ensure that you have matched pairs of single in-line memory
       modulesThis means that each pair of single in-line memory modules, as
       described in your technical reference manual, must be matched in memory
       size and speed.  Mixing these modules can cause some computers to report
       memory errors.
  All ISA, EISA, and PCI Systems
If you are installing OS/2 on a ISA, EISA, or PCI system, some CMOS settings
might need to be adjusted:
  o Turn off ROM shadowing (system and video) if it is not essential to
       starting your system.
      Usually only extremely fast systems require ROM shadowing during a
      startup. Do not turn ROM shadowing on again after installing OS/2.
  o If you get a TRAP0002 error, add wait states (both read and write, if the
      option is given).  Add two wait states and see if the TRAP0002 error goes
      away.
      Note: Take as few of the actions here as are necessary to prevent the
      TRAP0002 error, because you must retain whatever setting makes the system
      functionIf you added wait states, do not remove them later without
      adding faster (matched) DRAM to your system.
  o If you experience other traps or complete system hangs while installing,
      turn off your external processor cache (internal cache is not a problem).
      If this corrects the problem, have the system board repaired or replaced
      before you turn on the cache again.


  Solving Problems After Installation   213/1+
If you forgot your lockup password, you must use the LOCK.RC file located in the
\OS2 directory to reconfigure the OS2.INI file. To do this:
   1. Turn on the computer.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
      screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
  4. Change from drive A to the drive on which OS/2 is installed.  Type: C: and
      press Enter.
  5. Change to the OS2 directory.  Type CD \OS2 and press Enter.
  6. Type the following:
      MAKEINI OS2.INI LOCK.RC
  7. Press Enter.
  8. Restart the computer.


This chapter provides information to help you solve problems you might encounter
===Video Procedures    234/1+===
after OS/2 has been installed.  It includes information about what to do if you
This chapter provides information to help you install and fine tune your OS/2
have problems, plus specific instructions for startup, memory, display, mouse,
video.  It includes supported chip sets and resolutions, instructions for
CD-ROM, hard disk, and Desktop problems.  In addition, procedures are given for
changing video settings, plus specific procedures for SVGA, XGA, and LCD or
recovering the Desktop, CONFIG.SYS file, user INI file, hard disk, and memory
Monochrome Plasma displays.
state data.
Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the
Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the
information dealing with a particular problem.
information.
 
===Video Device Drivers for OS/2 235/2+===
OS/2 contains video device drivers that support the chip sets found on many system boards and display adapters.
The following table lists the supported chip sets and the video device driver that should be selected during installation.
 
===Non-Accelerated Video Device Drivers 236/3===
{|class="wikitable"
!MANUFACTURER||CHIP SET||VIDEO DEVICE DRIVER
|-
|ATI Technologies||ATI28800  256 color||ATI Technologies ATI28800
|-
|Cirrus Logic||CL-GD5422, CL-GD5424||Cirrus Logic
|-
|Headland Technologies||HT209  256 color||Headland Technologies HT209
|-
|IBM||IBM VGA  16 color||Video graphics adapter (VGA)
|-
|IBM||IBM VGA256C||IBM VGA256C
|-
|Trident Microsystems||TVGA8900B, TVGA8900C 256 color||Trident Microsystems TVGA8900
|-
|TSENG||ET4000||TSENG Laboratories ET4000
|-
|Western Digital||WD90C11, WD90C30, WD90C31 (in WD90C30 compatibility mode) 256 color||Western Digital WD90C11, C30, C31 (C30 mode only)
|-
|colspan=3|NOTE: Use the Selective Install icon to change the resolution and number of colors for non-accelerated video device drivers.
|}


  What to Do If You Have Problems    214/2
===Accelerated Video Device Drivers 237/3===
{|class="wikitable"
!MANUFACTURER||CHIP SET||VIDEO DEVICE DRIVER
|-
|IBM||IBM 8514||Display Adapter 8514/A
|-
|IBM||IBM XGA||Extended graphic adapter (XGA)
|-
|S3 Corporation||S3 86C801, 86C805, 86C928||S3 86C801, 86C805, 86C928
|-
|S3 Corporation||S3 86C864||S3 864
|-
|Cirrus Logic||Cirrus Logic 5426, 5428, 5430, 5434||Cirrus Logic 5426, 5428, 5430, 5434
|-
|Western Digital||WD 90C24, 90C24A, 90C24A2, 90C31||WD 90C24 - 90C31
|-
|Western Digital||WD 90C33||WD 90C33
|-
|ATI Technology||MACH 32||ATI MACH 32
|-
|ATI Technology||MACH 64||ATI MACH 64
|-
|TSENG||ETW32, ETW32i, ETW32p||TSENG ET4000/W32, /W32i, /W32p
|-
|Weitek||Power 9000||Weitek Power 9000
|-
|colspan=3|NOTE: Not all system boards and display adapters that use these chip sets are supported.  For more information about display adapter and chip set compatibility, select HELP from the Display Driver Install window in Selective Install or refer to the README file on the Installation Diskette.


OS/2 is a stable operating system and, in most cases, you will not experience
These drivers will be installed in 640x480x256 colors by the OS/2 installation program. Use the system icon to change the resolution and number of colors if you are using any of the accelerated video device drivers except IBM 8514.
problems.  However, if you do encounter a problem while using OS/2, do the
|}
following:
 
  1. Read through this chapter to see if the problem you are experiencing is
===Supported Resolutions for Accelerated Drivers 238/3===
      documented.
The resolutions that can be set for a particular display adapter, are dependent on the:
  2. If your problem is not addressed in this section, refer to the Service and
* Specific display adapter being used
      Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions on how to get
* Graphics accelerator chip set on the adapter
      additional assistance.
* Video device driver being used
Before you call for assistance, make sure you call from a telephone that is
* Amount of video memory on the adapter
near your computer and gather the following before you speak with the OS/2
The video device drivers shipped with OS/2 (see the previous table) support the following resolutions and number of colors.  Not all of the device drivers support all of the resolutions. For more information about the resolutions supported by each adapter and device driver, select Help from the Display Driver Install window in Selective Install or refer to the README file on the Installation Diskette.
specialist:
  o  Your registration number (located in the Service and Support brochure in
      the US only)
  o  The brand and model of the equipment you are using
  o The error message or number, if any, that appeared on your screen
  o  Paper and pencil for taking notes
  o  The number for your fax machine, or the number of a fax machine to which
      you have access


  Editing the CONFIG.SYS File in Your Root Directory   215/2
  3 RESOLUTIONS    3 NUMBER OF      3 VIDEO MEMORY   3 NOTE
3                3 COLORS          3 REQUIRED


A CONFIG.SYS file contains lines of instructions that control how your computer
3 640 x 480      3 256            3 1MB
starts up and how it works with the devices you have attached to it.
 
During installation, the CONFIG.SYS file is copied from Diskette 1 and added to
3 800 x 600      3 256            3 1MB            3
your root directory. There might be instances in which you will be instructed in
 
this chapter to edit your CONFIG.SYS file in order to add a statement, "remark
  3 1024 x 768      3 256            3 1MB            3
out" a line, or modify an existing line in the file. If you need to alter the
 
CONFIG.SYS file after you install OS/2, you will need to make the changes to the
3 1280 x 1200    3 256            3 2MB            3
CONFIG.SYS file located in the root directory on the hard disk (usually drive
 
C).
  3 1600 x 1200    3 256            3 4MB            3
Note: If the CONFIG.SYS file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able to
 
restart your computer.  Be careful when editing the file.
  3 640 x 480       3 65,536          3 1MB            3
To edit the CONFIG.SYS file that is in your root directory (after installing
 
  OS/2), follow these steps:
  3 800 x 600       3 65,536          3 1MB            3
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Type COPY CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.OLD and press Enter.
  4. Type E C:\CONFIG.SYS and press Enter.
       where: E is the command used to start the System Editor that comes with
      OS/2
                C: is the letter of the drive where OS/2 was installed
                \ is the symbol for root directory
      The CONFIG.SYS file will appear on your screen, and you can make changes
      to it.
  5. When you are done working on the file, select File, then select Save.
  6. Select Type... in the Save notification window.
  7. Select Plain Text, then select Set.
  8. Press Alt+F4 to exit from the System Editor.
  9. Shut down your computer. (You must restart your computer anytime you make
       changes to the CONFIG.SYS file in order for the changes to take effect.)
For more information about the statements that can appear in the CONFIG.SYS
file, refer to the Command Reference that is located in the Information folder
on the OS/2 Desktop.


  Startup Problems    216/2
  3 1024 x 768      3 65,536          3 2MB            3


Following are solutions to problems that might occur when you try to start your
  3 1280 x 1024    3 65,536          3 4MB            3 2
system after installing OS/2.
Internal Processing Error Message Appears
The system stops and the screen displays INTERNAL PROCESSING ERROR at the top of
a message.
Record the information exactly as it displayed on the screen, and    write a
description of what you were doing when the trap occurred. Then, refer to the
Service and Support information in your OS/2 package for instructions about
calling for additional assistance.
Boot Manager Menu Does Not Appear:
If you installed the Boot Manager partition but the Boot Manager startup menu
does not appear as expected when you start the system, you will need to make the
Boot Manager partition startable.  Do the following:
  1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
      to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
      screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
System Will Not Start DOS from the Boot Manager Menu
On a system with a VESA** SUPER I/O controller and two disk drives, the system
might not start from the Boot Manager menu.  Instead, it will display a
non-system disk or disk error message.  For more information on this message,
check the VESA controller documentation or contact the manufacturer.
Dual Boot Does Not Work
If the BOOT command is unsuccessful when you try to switch from DOS to OS/2,
you might have one or more active terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) or DOS
cache programs.  If so, end the programs before you use the BOOT command.  For
TSR programs that are loaded from AUTOEXEC.BAT, you must deactivate the
programs before using the BOOT command.
Error When Using Dual Boot on a PS/1 System
On PS/1 systems preinstalled with DOS 5.0, using Dual Boot from OS/2 to DOS
might result in an error.  To correct this problem, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to
restart the system.


  Memory Problems    217/2
  3 640 x 480      3 16,777,216      3 1MB or 2MB      3 1,3


Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with memory after
3 800 x 600      3 16,777,216      3 2MB            3 1,4,6
installing OS/2.
IBM PS/2 Model 90 or 95 Memory Parity Errors
If your Model 90 or 95 is a 33 MHz system and you are having difficulty
identifying intermittent memory parity errors such as TRAP0002, which force you
to restart your system, then ECA053 might apply.  If your microprocessor card
has part number 84F9356, contact your IBM representative to assist you with a
replacement.
IBM PS/2 Model 90 Memory Errors
If your Model 90 is experiencing intermittent memory errors, ECA084 might apply
if the part number of your memory riser card is N33F4905 or 84F9356.  Your IBM
representative can assist you with a replacement.


  Display Problems    218/2
  3 1024 x 768      3 16,777,216      3 4MB            3 1


Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with your display after
3 1280 x 1024    3 16,777,216      3 4MB            3 1,2
installing OS/2.
 
White Screen after Installation
3 1360 x 1024    3 16              3 1MB            3 5
If the display screen is white after installation and there is no system
 
activity, set the video adapter to operate on an 8-bit bus and move the adapter
3 NOTE:
to an 8-bit slot. If possible, disable the autosensing capability of the video
  3
adapterFor information on modifying these settings, refer to the
3 1The Western Digital device drivers do not support
documentation that came with your video adapter.
3    16,777,216 colors.
Blank Screen after Installation
3 2.  Most adapter/chip set combinations do not support
If the Desktop appears to be blank when you restart the system after the
3    these resolutions and colors.
complete installation of OS/2, and you are using a ProComm** Micro Channel* SCSI
3 3.  The amount of video memory required for this resol-
adapter, do not attempt to run CHKDSK on the drive connected to the adapter.
3    ution is dependent on the display adapter and the
Contact ProComm to receive the device driver needed for the SCSI card.
3    video device driver installed.
System Stops at Logo Screen
3 4Display adapters with the TSENG W32p Rev A chip set
If you have a Future Domain 16xx SCSI controller, you might have installed OS/2
3    do not support this resolution.
successfully but then found a problem the next time you started OS/2If the
3 5.  This resolution is supported only for XGA-2.
system stopped running with the logo screen displayed, there might be a conflict
  3 6Cirrus adapters require more than 2MB of video memory
with the interrupt settings of your hardware devices. Check all interrupt
  3    for this resolution.
request (IRQ) settings on all your hardware devices and make sure that each one
 
is using a unique IRQ. Future Domain controllers are shipped from the factory
===Installing a Video Device Driver 239/2===
preset to use IRQ5However, IRQ5 is the interrupt that is normally assigned to
All display adapters must tailor their output to the capabilities of the display
LPT2. Also, it is common for IRQ5 to be used by sound or communications
attached to the systemUnfortunately, there is no standard for communicating
adapters. You might not see a problem immediately because of interrupt
the capabilities of the display to the display adapterThe result is that many
conflicts, but eventually a problem can occur.
display adapters supply a program to define and select the type of display
System Will Not Restart on a High-Resolution Display
attached to the system. OS/2 responds to this situation by permitting the DOS
If you installed support for a high-resolution display adapter and your system
display selection utilities provided by the manufacturers to be used to properly
will not restart, follow the procedure belowThis procedure will set the
configure the system.  OS/2 then configures the system in the same manner each
adapter support to a lower resolution (VGA) but will enable your system to
time your computer is started.
start.
If no display is specified, many display adapters make an assumption about the
  1. Turn on the computerIf the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
type of display attached to the system. This default setting is designed to
      to restart it.
work with the widest range of displays possible; therefore, it is the safest
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
choice.
      screen, press Alt+F1.
During this installation procedure, you will be asked to make a decision about
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
whether you want to use the defaults for your display type, or use the display
  4. Use Selective Install to install support for another high-resolution
adapter utility program provided by the manufacturer of the adapterYou should
      display adapter.
use the utility program provided by the manufacturer if any of the following
Graphics Mode and Refresh Rates Incorrect for Hardware
apply:
Most video adapters are sensitive to the characteristics and capabilities of
  o Your display adapter is produced by Diamond Computer Systems, Inc..
the display attached to themThe video BIOS on these adapters detects and
  o Your display supports non-interlaced operation only.
sets the hardware to support a desired graphics mode.
  o Your display does not support VESA standard refresh rates.
Some adapters have configuration dip switches to select desired vertical
  o Your display adapter requires software configuration to function properly
  refresh rates for high-resolution modes (800 x 600 and 1024 x 768). Others are
      in DOS.
  shipped with DOS video-configuration utility programs that allow selection of
  o You want to configure your system to take advantage of the full refresh
  refresh rates. Usual refresh rates range from 56Hz to 72Hz non-interlaced or
      capabilities of your display.
  88Hz interlaced.  The display has to be capable of synchronizing to this
  Note:  Using the utility program provided by the manufacturer requires exact
frequency for proper mode set.
knowledge about the capabilities of your displayIf the wrong display type is
  When the desired refresh rate has been set using either the dip switches or the
  selected, your system might not start.
  video-configuration utility program run the \OS2\SVGA.EXE utility program to
  If you have an SVGA adapter in your system, you must restore it to work in VGA
  store the hardware setup in an \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI file.  At a DOS full-screen
  mode before you can use the following instructions to install a different
  session, type: C:\OS2\SVGA ON; then press Enter.
adapter in your system.  See Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter
  The Installation Program Installed VGA Support instead of SVGA
  for instructions.
  During the installation of OS/2, the installation program might have installed
  To install a new display adapter or video device driver:
  only VGA support for your display.  To install the Super VGA (SVGA) drivers,
  1. Install the display adapter using the manufacturer's instructions.
you can use Selective Install in the System Setup folder. (System Setup is in
  2. Restart your system.
the OS/2 System folder).
  3. Open OS/2 System.
Video Corruption or Stacked or Missing Icons
   4. Open System Setup.
   1. Display the Desktop pop-up menu (click mouse button 2 on the OS/2 desktop
   5. Open Selective Install.
      background).
   6. Select Primary Display or Secondary Display from the System Configuration
   2. Select Refresh to redraw the Desktop.
       window.
   3. If the screen goes blank, press Alt+Esc (to switch between the programs)
      Note: A secondary display is used for only DOS and full-screen sessions.
       to force repainting of the screen.
      Even if two displays are attached to the system only one is active at a
  Synchronization Lost Under OS/2 But Not DOS
      time.
The resolution or refresh rate loses synchronization under OS/2 but not DOS.
   7. Select the display driver that you want from the list provided.  (If you
To correct this problem, generate the \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI file under a specific
      are unsure of which driver to choose, select Help.)
version of DOS using the following instructions:
   8. Select OK.
  1. Start DOS.
   9. Follow the instructions on the screen.
   2. Type \OS2\SVGA ON DOS
 
   3. Press Enter.
===Video Settings 240/2===
   4. Type RENAME \OS2\SVGADATA.DOS \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI
To change video settings for a program:
   5. Press Enter.
   1. Point to the program icon.
   6. Restart OS/2.
   2. Click mouse button 2.
If this does not fix the problem, try selecting a different vertical refresh
  3. Select Settings.
rate (refer to your adapter manual); then generate the PMI file again.
  4. Select the Session tab.
If your display remains out of synchronization or is stable and synchronized
  5. Select the DOS settings or WIN-OS/2 push button.
after restarting the system but loses synchronization after a session switch,
  6. Change the settings (See the online documentation for detailed a
this might be due to your video adapter's hardware implementation.
      explanation of these settings).
Note:  Some video adapter hardware cannot be fully saved and restored in all
  7. Select the Save push button.
graphics modes for all refresh rates.
  8. Close the Settings notebook.
Using After Dark** for Windows** with S3** Adapter
 
If you have an S3 adapter and are using After Dark for Windows, images that
===SVGA Procedures 241/2+===
move from left to right will not perform properly.
The following procedures provide instructions for enabling and disabling SVGA
Switch to any resolution other than 640 x 480 x 16M.
after OS/2 is installed.
Using Ventura Publisher** for Windows with an S3 Adapter
 
If you have an S3 display adapter and are using Ventura Publisher for Windows,
===Enabling SVGA in WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen Sessions 242/3===
you might experience a General Protection fault when starting the program.
You can enable WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions to run in high-resolution (1024 x 768) mode while the OS/2 Desktop runs in VGA mode.
Switch to a 256-color resolution to avoid this problem.
To enable WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions for SVGA:
Using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 with S3 Adapter
Note: Follow the instructions very carefullyOtherwise, you could cause your WIN-OS/2 sessions to become inoperable.
If you have an S3 display adapter and are using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 your
  1. Use Selective Install to install VGA (640 x 480) support for OS/2.
  system might trap.
  2. Back up the SYSTEM.INI and WIN.INI files as follows:
  Switch to any resolution other than one using 16M colors.
        a. Open OS/2 System.
Using Lotus** 1-2-3** for OS/2 or Lotus Freelance for OS/2
        b. Open Command Prompts.
If you have an XGA or SVGA display adapter and are using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2
        c. Open OS/2 Full Screen.
or Lotus Freelance** for OS/2, your system might trap.
        d. At the C prompt, do the following:
Switch to a resolution that uses 256 colors or less.
            o  Type: CD\OS2\MDOS\WINOS2 and press Enter.
  Using WordPerfect** 5.1 or 5.2 for Windows with S3 Adapter
            o Type: COPY WIN.INI WIN.BAK and press Enter.
  If you have an S3 display adapter and are using WordPerfect 5.1 or 5.2 for
            o Type: COPY SYSTEM.INI SYSTEM.BAK and press Enter.
Windows you might experience a General Protection fault when the Print Preview
  3. Check the OS2\MDOS\WINOS2\SYSTEM directory for the desired high-resolution
  option is selected.
      display device driver.
  Use any resolution other than the 800 x 600 x 64K or 600 x 480 x 16 million
        o If the device driver is already on the system, go to step 4.
color modes.
        o If the device driver is not found, use your OS/2 or Windows
Using Software Motion Video Feature with S3 Adapter
          installation disk to copy the driver to the \OS2\MDOS\WINOS2\SYSTEM
If you have an S3 display adapter and are using the software motion video
          directory.
feature you might experience poor performance of video playback in 64K-color
          For example, to use the OS/2 diskettes and install the 8514.DRV
modes.
          high-resolution device driver:
Normally, the software motion video feature will take advantage of a 1MB
            a. Search the OS/2 installation diskettes for the WIN8514 and
  aperture on video adapters and systems where it is available. For those systems
                *F.FON files and then do the following:
  with nonstandard locations, the actual physical address of the aperture must be
                  - DIR A:WIN8514 and press Enter
provided in the following CONFIG.SYS statement:
                  - DIR A:*F.FON and press Enter
  SET VIDEO_APERTURE=xxxh
                    After you find the files, you have to unpack themThe
where "xxx" is a hexadecimal value in units of 1MB, representing the actual
                    files are packed with their standard target directory coded
physical address to map to the aperture.  For example, the IBM PS/ValuePoint*
                    into the packed file.
systems must have the statement:
            b. Copy the file to the system disk in the proper directory, using
  SET VIDEO_APERTURE=400h
                the UNPACK utility program:
  to use a physical address at 1GB.
                  - Type UNPACK A:WIN8514 and press Enter.
Blank Screen on IBM ValuePoint system
                  - Type UNPACK A:*F.FON and press Enter.
If you have one of the following IBM ValuePoint systems, you might encounter a
                    The SVGA driver and font files are now unpacked and in the
blank screen while switching from one window to another.
                    correct directory.
PS/ValuePoint Display Models:  6314    6317    6319
  4. Edit the SYSTEM.INI file and find the following line:
PS/ValuePoint System Models:    6382    6384    6387
      FDISPLAY.DRV=VGA.DRV
To correct or avoid this problem, make sure that the flash EEPROM level of your
      This line specifies the device driver used in WIN-OS/2 full-screen
  system is 62 or later.
      sessions.
To check the EEPROM level:
      Note: DISPLAY.DRV is the driver used for Microsoft Windows. FDISPLAY.DRV
  1. Begin the Configuration Utility program by turning the system off and then
      is the driver used for WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions. SDISPLAY.DRV is the
       on again.
       driver used for WIN-OS/2 windowed sessions.
   2. During the memory count, press F1(The memory count appears in the upper
   5. Change this line to point to the high-resolution device driver that was
       left corner of the screen as numbers followed by KB.)
      unloaded in the steps aboveIn this example, the device driver is
  3. When the Configuration Utility screen appears, look for the Flash EEPROM
       8514.DRV.
       Revision Level.
      Note:  To install a different driver, substitute the name of your driver
  4. The fifth and sixth characters in the Flash EEPROM Revision Level
       in the statement: FDISPLAY.DRV=8514.DRV
       represent the actual revision level.
      The modified line should look like the following:
   5. If the revision level is less than 62, you must install the ValuePoint
       FDISPLAY.DRV=8514.DRV
      Flash BIOS update.
   6. Change the SYSTEM.INI font entries:
  To get the required ValuePoint Flash BIOS update do the following: Access the
        o In SYSTEM.INI, these entries are:
IBM PC Company Bulletin Board System, then download the VP2FL62A.DSK file,
          FIXEDFON.FON=VGAFIX.FON
which is the Flash BIOS Update Level 62.
          OEMFONTS.FON=VGAOEM.FON
  If you do not have access to a modem, you can call the IBM Help Center and
          FONTS.FON=VGASYS.FON
request this update on diskette.
        o For 8514/A, these entries must be changed to:
Video Corruption with Video 7** Adapter
          FIXEDFON.FON=8514FIX.FON
If you experience minor video corruption when switching from an OS/2
          OEMFONTS.FON=8514OEM.FON
  full-screen session to the Desktop using Alt+Esc, exit the OS/2 session and
          FONTS.FON=8514SYS.FON
  restart it.
        o Save the changes to the SYSTEM.INI file.
Video Corruption Using 8514/A Adapter with WIN-OS/2
  7. Change the WIN.INI font entries
If you are running a WIN-OS/2 full-screen session with an 8514/A adapter in a
        o In WIN.INI, the entries are:
high-resolution mode, do not switch to a different session while the program is
          SYMBOL 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SYMBOLE.FON
updating the screen or displaying an hourglass. The actual problem you
          MS SANS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SSERIFE.FON
experience (for example, video corruption, system hang) depends upon what the
          MS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SERIFE.FON
display driver is doing at the time of the switch.
          SMALL FONTS (VGA RES)=SMALLE.FON
  Color Icons and Bit Maps Improperly Drawn
          COURIER 10,12,15 (VGA RES)=COURE.FON
Windows programs that use color icons or color bit-map backgrounds must run in
        o For 8514/A, these entries must be changed to:
the foreground to be properly drawn.  Do not switch from a Windows program
          SYMBOL 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SYMBOLG.FON
while it is being started or before it completes drawing color icons and color
          MS SANS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SSERIFG.FON
bit-map backgrounds.
          MS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SERIFG.FON
Discolored Bit Map Using 8514/A Adapter
          SMALL FONTS (8514 RES)=SMALLG.FON
If you are using an 8514/A display adapter, 256-color bit maps might become
          COURIER 10,12,15 (8514 RES)=COURG.FON
  discolored. after you start a WIN-OS/2 window session.
        o Save the changes to the SYSTEM.INI file.
This discoloration is due to the sharing of the 256-color palette and should
The system is ready to run Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions high-resolution mode.
not affect the running of the programs.
 
Corrupted Graphics in DOS Programs
===Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter 243/3===
Some DOS programs with graphics use a non-standard VGA mode that the adapter
Because SVGA adapters are only compatible at the VGA level, the system must be restored to VGA in order to safely install a different display adapter.
can support, but the operating system cannotThe graphics in these programs
To set your system back to VGA:
might be corrupted when displayed in a window. To avoid this problem run these
  1. Turn on the computerIf the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
programs in DOS full-screen sessions.
      to restart it.
Corrupted Colors in DOS Programs
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
Some DOS programs experience color corruption when running in a window on the
      screen, press Alt+F1.
Desktop in VGA mode.  This is a limitation of the VGA mode because the color
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
  palette of the DOS session has to be translated to the Presentation Manager*
Your display adapter is restored and can work in VGA mode. If you want to install a new display adapter or video device driver, complete the steps under Installing a Video Device Driver.
and the Desktop in VGA mode does not offer enough colors to do an optimal
 
translation.
===Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection 244/3===
  The best solution is to use an OS/2 display driver that supports the 256-color
If you performed the steps in Installing a Video Device Driver and selected an incorrect display driver you can recover by restoring to VGA mode.
mode or run the program in a DOS full-screen session.
To restore to VGA mode:
Corrupted DOS Full-Screen Session on IBM ThinkPad* 750C Series
  1. Turn on the computerIf the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
  If you are using a ThinkPad 750C Series, after installing OS/2, you might find
      to restart it.
that your DOS full-screen session is corrupted.  To fix this problem you must
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
reinstall the video driver from the ThinkPad video features diskette.
      screen, press Alt+F1.
  1. Restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del. Press Alt+F1 when the small
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
      white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your screen.
  4. Use Selective Install to install support for another high-resolution
  2. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V to return to VGA mode.
      display adapter. See Installing a Video Device Driver for instructions.
  3. Restart your system, and then reinstall the ThinkPad 750c video drivers
 
      from the ThinkPad video features diskette.
===Capturing the Display Configuration 245/3===
  WIN-OS/2 Fails to Start on IBM ThinkPad
SVGA display and video mode configuration under OS/2 is controlled by the SVGADATA.PMI file. This file can be provided by the display adapter manufacturer or created using the SVGA utility program.
  If a WIN-OS2 window fails to come up on an IBM Thinkpad, make sure that your
The SVGA utility program gets information from the SVGA chip set to set each video mode and captures the current state of the display adapter. This information is stored in the SVGADATA.PMI file and used when the system is started.
  CONFIG.SYS file contains the following statement:
Both the SVGA.EXE and SVGADATA.PMI are located in the \OS2 directory.
DOS=LOW,NOUMB
To create the SVGADATA.PMI file, type one of the following commands at a DOS
Also, make sure that the WIN-OS/2 settings have DOS set to LOW and UMB set to
command prompt and press Enter.
  OFF.
  SVGA ON          Generates the SVGADATA.PMI file which enables OS/2 SVGA
Notebook Computers Using DOS Window
                  support.
Some notebook computers get a trap D error or other problems when a DOS window
  SVGA ON DOS      Generates PMI information when executed outside the OS/2 DOS
is opened.  This error is caused by improper video register shadowing. To
                  environment. This generates an SVGADATA.DOS file that can be
  correct the problem:
                  renamed to .PMI and copied to the \OS2 directory. This entry
  1. Edit your C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
                  might be required if your SVGA adapter uses DOS device
  2. Change
                  drivers to configure the display. Trident** adapters are an
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VVGA.SYS
                  example.
       to
  SVGA ON INIT      Generates default display information for some TSENG** and
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VSVGA.SYS
                  Cirrus Logic** based display adapters.
  3. Save the C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
SVGA OFF          Deletes the SVGADATA.PMI file, disabling OS/2 SVGA support.
  4. Shut down and restart the computer.
SVGA STATUS       Returns your graphics chipset, as it appears to OS/2.
  Text Strings Clipped on Display
Note: The SVGA utility program might be affected by video configuration
  OS/2 uses a system proportional font that is designed to meet the International
programs, Terminate Stay Resident programs (TSR), and switches and jumpers on
Organization for Standards (ISO) 9241 standard and the German DIN 66234
the display adapterConfigure your video adapter properly before using the
standard when using certain ISO compliant hardware. If you do not want to use
  SVGA utility program to create the SVGADATA.PMI file.
ISO compliant fonts, you can modify the OS2.INI file to install fonts that are
 
not ISO compliant. Font changes made in the OS2.INI file are global across all
===Switching to a Display with Less Capability 246/3===
programs. If you have REXX installed, you can type the following information
Switching to a lower capability display after installing high-resolution (SVGA) drivers might cause the system to start out of synchronization. Follow this procedure to switch to a display with less capability:
into a CMD file and use it to change the font.
  1. Open DOS Full-Screen command prompt.
  call RxFuncAdd "SysIni", "RexxUtil", "SysIni"
  2. Run the DOS display configuration utility program supplied with your SVGA
  AppName = "PM_SystemFonts"
      adapter to properly configure your display adapter and display.
  KeyName = "DefaultFont"
  3. Change to the \OS2 directory on your hard disk.
  FontName = "10.System Proportional Non-ISO"
  4. Type SVGA ON.
  call SysIni "USER", AppName, KeyName, FontName||"0"x
  5. Press Enter to start the SVGA utility programThis utility program saves
  exit
      the current state of your video configuration.
  After the file has been run, shut down and restart the system.
  6. Shut down your system.
Poor Performance of Windows Programs Using 8514/A Adapter
  7. Restart your system to enable the new display.
If your system has an 8514/A adapter, you can improve the performance of your
Note: You can also use these instructions if you start a specific version of DOSSubstitute the following step for step 4. Type SVGA ON DOS and press Enter.  When the SVGA utility program finishes, type:
  Windows programs by changing their settingsOpen the Settings notebook for
  RENAME\OS2\SVGADATA.DOS \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI
  each Windows program and change the following WIN-OS/2 settings:
Press Enter.
      VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP to OFF
 
      VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION to ON
===XGA Procedures 247/2+===
  Corrupted Desktop with the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Adapter
The following information relates to specific situations with high-resolution XGA displays.
If your system has the 1MB version of the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter with
 
the memory set to SHARED, some DOS programs running in the background might
===XGA-2 Display Type Override 248/3===
corrupt the Desktop.
To correctly operate your display, OS/2 needs to determine the type and characteristics of the device by using a display identification numberSome displays have the same identification number but different characteristics. If OS/2 does not operate your display at the correct refresh rate or display mode, and you are running an XGA-2 adapter, do the following:
To correct this problem, you must upgrade to the 2MB version of the ATI
  1. Open OS/2 System.
Graphics Ultra Pro and set the VGA memory to 256K or greater.
  2. Open System Setup.
Note:  If you are using the 1MB version of the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter
  3. Open System. The System Settings notebook appears.
with the OS/2 8514/A display driver, the VGA memory must be set to SHARED.
  4. Select page 2 of the Screen page(You can go to page 2 by selecting the
  System Hang Using PM Debugger
      right arrow in the lower-right corner of the notebook.)
  To correct this problem, use an XGA* or 8514/A adapter with the debugger. An
  5. Select the appropriate display type using the list provided.
  access violation will occur when you exit the debugger, but you will not have
      Note: If an incorrect display type is selected, your display might be
to restart your system and you will not have system problems as a result of
      unusable after you restart your system.
using the debugger.
  6. Close the Settings notebook.
  Video Corruption on XGA Display Using Windows Screen Savers
 
A Windows screen saver program that starts while in a background session might
===Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection 249/3===
display a corrupted image being displayed when you switch back to the Windows
If you performed the steps in XGA-2 Display Type Override and your display is not usable, you can revert back to the previous display type. To erase the display type override information:
  session.  The image can be refreshed by moving the mouse or pressing any key.
1. Turn on the computerIf the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
You can eliminate this problem by changing your WIN-OS/2 settings for the
2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your screen, press Alt+F1.
  screen saver program using the Settings NotebookChange the settings to:
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
      VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP to ON
  4. Change to the C:\XGA$DMQS directory and delete the XGASETUP.PRO file.
      VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION to OFF
    This erases all override information from your system.
  Using Dual Displays (XGA and VGA)
  5. Remove the diskette and restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.
If you are using a dual display system with XGA as the primary display and VGA
    Your display now operates using its default settings.
  as the secondary display, you might see some minor corruption when the XGA
Note: If you plan to change or replace your display, first delete the file XGASETUP.PRO from the XGA$DMQS directory and then turn off the system. If your new display does not operate correctly, repeat the preceding procedure.
display is set to a resolution with 65536 colors.
 
This corruption will be on the display that does not have focus and will not
===Changing Screen Resolution and Number of Colors 250/3===
interfere with the operation of the system.
Note: You cannot use this procedure if you are using the VGA, 8514, or SVGA driver.
  Using Dual Displays with Windows programs in a Window Session
To change the screen resolution or number of colors:
On dual display configurations with XGA-2 as the primary display and VGA as the
   1. Open OS/2 System.
secondary display, the DOS full-screen session might be corrupted if a Windows
  2. Open System Setup.
program is started in a window session.
  3. Open System.
To recover from this situation, shut down and restart the system.
   4. Select the desired resolution and number of colors from the list.
Using XGA-2 Adapter with Dual Boot
  5. Close the Settings notebook.
If you are using Dual Boot with an XGA-2 adapter, you must modify the
  6. Shut down and restart your system to make the new resolution and number of
CONFIG.DOS file:
      colors operational.
  1. Edit the \OS2\SYSTEM\CONFIG.DOS file.
Note: The Microsoft Windows XGA full-screen driver does not support all the graphic modes handled by the OS/2 PM XGA driver. The full-screen Windows driver does not support 1024 x 768 x 16 color. If this mode is selected, the OS/2 Desktop will run at 1024 x 768 x 16 color, but the Windows full screen will operate in 1024 x 768 x 256 color mode.
  2. Locate the line
 
      DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM 2048 X=nnnn-nnnn
===Laptop LCD or Monochrome Plasma Displays 251/2===
   3. Change nnnn-nnnn to C000-CFFF.
Laptop LCDs and computers with monochrome plasma displays use 16 shades of gray and operate like VGA displays.
   4. Save and exit the file.
Note: If you run VGA DOS graphics programs on the OS/2 Desktop and your system does not have VGA support, your Desktop might be corrupted.
Screen Corruption on IBM P75 Systems
You can optimize the color scheme for gray-scale usage, and also provide a good set of colors for a VGA Desktop presentation on a laptop LCD or monochrome plasma display. To change the color scheme and create a more readable display image:
On IBM P75 systems, there might be some corruption on the screen whenever
  1. Use your Reference Diskette or hardware Setup program to set your hardware
several icons are selected and moved together.
    to VGA color, if possible.
This corruption can be eliminated by selecting Sort from the Desktop pop-up
  2. Open OS/2 System.
menu.
  3. Open System Setup.
Limited Resolutions on IBM P75 Systems with External Displays
  4. Open Scheme Palette.
An IBM P75 system with an external display attached might only have the 640 x
  5. Select the monochrome scheme in the right-hand column.
480 x 16,772,216 resolution selection on the the System Settings Screen page.
  6. Close the Scheme Palette.
If the external display is capable of displaying higher resolutions, use the
 
P75 Reference Diskette to disable the built-in plasma display.
=Part 5 - Advanced Installation    252/1=
Color Changes Behind Icons on XGA Displays
 
If you are using an XGA display, the diagonal lines behind the icons of open
 
objects might change color unexpectedly.
  Using Advanced Installation    253/1+
  This does not interfere with the operation of the system.
 
Extra Lines on OS/2 System Clock on XGA Displays
This chapter provides examples of installing OS/2 on your computer using the
If you are using an XGA display, extra lines might appear on the face of the
Advanced Installation method. Advanced Installation is designed for experienced
OS/2 System Clock between the quarter (:15) and half (:30) hour.
computer users who want to customize their installation in one or more of the
These lines do not interfere with the operation of the clock.
following ways:
Display Power Management Signaling Not Enabled on XGA Displays
  o Select specific software features of OS/2 to install, rather than the
If you are using an XGA display, the XGA DMQS (\xga$dmqs\*.dqs) files in this
      preselected group (see Examples 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)
  version of the operating system do not have DPMS (Display Power Management
  o Install OS/2 on a drive or partition other than C (see Examples 1, 2, and
Signaling) enabled for the DPMS supported displays.
      3)
  You must use the DPMS OVERRIDE parameter provided with the Power Management
  o Install OS/2 in a logical drive (see Examples 1, 2, and 3)
  Utility program that is located in System Setup.
  o Install OS/2 on a hard disk other than the first disk in the computer (see
  PS/ValuePoint System with Radius XGA Display Adapter
      Example 3)
  If you are using a Radius XGA display adapter on a PS/ValuePoint system, it
  o Select the HPFS file system (see step 21 in Example 1)
  might not work correctly.
  o Install OS/2 so it can be used with Boot Manager (see Examples 1, 2, and
To correct this problem, you need to obtain and use the VPXGA.EXE utility
      3)
program. For a copy of this utility program, check your Radius Installation
  o Install OS/2 on a computer that does not have DOS and Windows on it (see
Diskette or contact a service representative at Radius.
      Examples 4 and 5)
  Zenith Data Systems** and Hewlett Packard Systems with Headland Adapters
  o Install OS/2 in one primary partition and delete all existing information
Zenith Data Systems with Headland HT208 and Hewlett Packard systems with HT209
      on your hard disk (see Example 5)
display a white half-screen whenever high-resolution modes are selected.
  If you have any problems during the installation, press the F1 key to view the
These systems do not support high-resolution modes even though you can
online help that is available whenever you see F1=Help at the bottom of a
  successfully install high resolution drivers and select the modes.  To correct
  screen. If you have problems with any of your hardware or if you receive error
this problem, use Selective Install to install VGA.
  messages, refer to Solving Installation Problems.
  ZEOS** Systems with Speedstar VGA
 
If you are using a ZEOS system with Speedstar VGA, the video display adapter
Planning for a Boot Manager Setup    254/2
  might not configure.
 
  Use the VMODE utility program supplied with the system to configure the display
During Advanced Installation, you will be asked to specify how you want to
  during the display driver installation.
partition your hard diskIf you are installing more than one operating system,
  Video Corruption with Sigma Legend** Adapter
you will want to consider setting up multiple partitions to contain them.  If
If you have a Sigma Legend display adapter you might experience minor video
you set up multiple partitions, you must install the Boot Manager feature. The
  corruption on the Desktop when you switch between the Desktop and DOS if they
Boot Manager helps you manage the selective startup of your operating systems.
  are running in different modes.
To find out more about partitioning your hard disk and installing Boot Manager,
Use the DOS utility program that is packaged with this display adapter to set
read Setting Up Your Hard Disk. before continuing with the Advanced
  the DOS session to the same mode as the Desktop.
Installation. For information about partition sizes, see -- Reference dpart not
  System Hang with Sigma Legend Adapter
found --..
  If you are using a Sigma Legend display in 1024 x 768 x 256 color mode, the
 
system might stop.
Installing the Operating System    255/2+
  Use only 640 x 480 x 256 or 800 x 600 x 256 mode with this adapter.
 
The sections that follow provide examples of typical installation setups.
  o  Example 1 shows how to repartition your hard disk to create a Boot Manager
      partition, a primary partition for DOS and Windows, and a logical drive
      for OS/2.
  o  Example 2 shows how to preserve an existing partition that already
      contains DOS and Windows, and create a Boot Manager partition and a
      logical drive for OS/2 on a hard disk that has available free space.
  o  Example 3 shows an installation on a computer with two hard disks.  In
      this example, a Boot Manager partition and a primary partition for DOS and
      Windows are created on the first hard disk. On the second hard disk, two
      logical drives are created, one to hold data (with drive letter D) and one
      for OS/2 (with drive letter E).
  o  Example 4 and Example 5 show how to install OS/2 on a computer that has no
      other operating systems already installed on it.  The Boot Manager is not
      installed in these installation examples.
      Note:  If you install OS/2 on a computer without Windows, you will not be
      able to use Windows programs.
To make the installation as easy as possible, select the example that most
closely resembles your system and the way you want to customize it.  If you
need more detailed explanations of the Boot Manager, the FDISK utility, the
file systems available in OS/2, or hard disk partitioning, please read Setting
Up Your Hard Disk.
Note:  Be sure you have read As You Begin before installing OS/2.


  Mouse Problems   219/2
  Example 1   256/3


The following information provides solutions to problems you might encounter
Creating a Boot Manager Partition, a Primary Partition for DOS and Windows, and
with your mouse.
a Logical Drive for OS/2 and Data
Existing Mouse Not Working Correctly
In the following example, a 120MB hard disk that contains one primary partition
If the mouse you had connected to your computer before installing OS/2 now works
with DOS and Windows in it will be deleted and replaced with the following
improperly (movements appear "jerky" or the mouse does not respond when you move
partitions:
it), do the following:
   o  A 1MB Boot Manager partition
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   o  A 20MB primary partition for DOS and Windows (drive C)
   2. Open Command Prompts.
   o  A 99MB logical drive for OS/2 and data (drive D)
   3. Open OS/2 Window. If you installed OS/2 from a CD, continue with step 4.
  Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, you can
      If you installed from diskettes, go to step 5.
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
   4. Type ATTRIB -R C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS and press Enter (where c is the drive
to be.  Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
       where OS/2 is installed).
hard disk.
   5. Insert the diskette that came with your mouse into drive A (this diskette
   1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
      contains the mouse device driver).
       existing operating system to back up the data.)
   6. Type COPY A:\MOUSE.SYS C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS and press Enter (where C is the
   2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
      drive where OS/2 is installed).
   3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
  7. Shut down the system.
      from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
Mouse Not Working after Installation
  4. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
If you installed a mouse during the installation of OS/2, or used selective
      to restart it.
  installation to install a new mouse and the mouse is not working, you will need
   5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
to edit your CONFIG.SYS file. Do the following:
      press Enter.  As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
   1. Edit the C:\CONFIG.SYS file and press Enter (where C is the drive where
       asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
       OS/2 is installed).
   6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
   2. Delete the mouse device driver statements from the CONFIG.SYS file (there
       Then press Enter.
       might be more than one such statement). For example:
  7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS
      specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
  3. Shut down the system, and then restart it.
   8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
   4. Use Selective Install to install a different mouse driver.
      continue with the installation.
Serial Mouse Not Working
  9. Delete the existing partition (which you have backed up):
If the serial mouse is connected to a serial port, make sure that the serial
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
port is configured for default settings.
        b. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete.
Logitech** Mouse Not Working after Installation
        c. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
If you have a Logitech mouse that does not work after installation, you might
        d. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
have to select another mouse driver.  Before 1991, Logitech sold "C-Series"
        e. Repeat steps a through d for any other partitions you want to delete
serial mice. Since 1991, Logitech has sold only "M-Series" Microsoft-compatible
  10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
serial mice. To determine which mouse you have, look at the bottom of the
        a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
mouse. If it says "CA" or "C7," then it is a C-Series mouse. If not, then you
        b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
have an M-Series mouse. Use Selective Install to select the correct Logitech
        c. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
mouse driver.
  11. Create the DOS and Windows primary partition:
Logitech Mouse Not Working after Dual Boot from DOS
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
If your Logitech mouse is not working on a Dual Boot system after you run DOS
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
and switch to OS/2, your mouse might be running in a mode set by a DOS-based
        c. Type the size of the primary partition (in this example, 20) and
mouse device driver. To correct the problem:
          press Enter.
  1. If COM2 port is being used, switch back to DOS and type the following at
        d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
      the DOS command prompt:
        e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
      MOUSE PC
        f. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
      or
        g. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
      MOUSE 2 PC
        h. Type a name for this partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and press
      This will reset the mouse to a mode that is recognized by OS/2.
          Enter.
      Note:  You must use the MOUSE.COM that came with the mouse, or the command
  12. Create the logical drive for OS/2 and your data:
      will not work.
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
  2. Then type the following:
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
      C:\OS2\BOOT /OS2
        c. Accept the size of the logical drive (in this example, 99) by
  3. Press Enter.  OS/2 should start and your mouse should work.
          pressing Enter.
  4. If this does not work, disconnect and reconnect the mouse.
          Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
  5. If these methods do not work, close your programs and turn off the
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 99), you would also
      computer. Then, turn the computer on again.
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
Mouse Does Not Work on an IBM PS/2 Model 90 or 95
          of free space or at the start of free space.
If your Model 90 or 95 has the Unattended Start Mode option set (through the
        d. Select Extended Logical Driveand press Enter.
System Programs), the mouse driver will not load during startup.
        e. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
To correct this situation, disable the Unattended Start Mode.
        f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
Mouse Does Not Work on COM3 or COM4
        g. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS2/DATA) and press
  OS/2 supports connection only to COM1 or COM2, at the standard input/output
          Enter.
(I/O) address and interrupt request (IRQ) setting.
  13. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
  Mouse Pointer Does Not Move
      startup time):
When you move your mouse, the mouse pointer on the screen does not move.
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS2/DATA line (or whatever name
Verify that each device on your computer that uses an IRQ setting is not
          you have given the logical drive) and press Enter.
conflicting with another IRQ setting.
        b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
Mouse Statements in CONFIG.SYS
        c. Select Default and press Enter. The name you typed for the logical
The mouse statements that should appear in your CONFIG.SYS depend on the type
          drive will appear next to Default.
of mouse connected to your computer.
          Note: If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
The correct CONFIG.SYS statements for running a serial mouse are:
          after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS
          Display Time now. Then continue with step d.
DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
        d. Press F3.
DEVICE=C:\OS2\PCLOGIC.SYS SERIAL=COMx
  14. Exit the FDISK screen:
  DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS TYPE=PCLOGIC$
        a. Press F3.
Where: C is the drive on which OS/2 is installed, and COMx is either COM1 or
        b. Press any key to remove the message box.
COM2.
        c. Select Save and exit and press Enter.
The correct CONFIG.SYS statements for running a Microsoft or IBM mouse are:
        d. When a message appears confirming that the hard disk partitioning is
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS
          complete, remove Diskette 1from drive A. Do not insert the
DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
          Installation Diskette. Continue with step 15.
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS
  15. Install DOS and Windows:
Where:  C is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.
        a. Insert the DOS installation diskette into drive A, and then press
Three-button Mouse Not Working Correctly
          Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
You have a 3-button mouse and error SYS1201 is displayed on the screen.
        b. Follow the instructions that came with DOS to install it. If prompted
OS/2 supports only the 2-button mode on a 3-button mouse.  If your mouse has a
          to do so during the DOS installation, format the partition and
switch to change to a 2-button mode, change the switchIf it doesn't, replace
          logical drive you created in the previous steps.
the mouse with a 2 button mouse.
        c. After DOS is installed, the Boot Manager menu appears. Select the DOS
Erratic Mouse Pointer in WIN-OS/2 Sessions
          partition and press Enter.
If you have an erratic pointer in your WIN-OS/2 programs.
        d. Install Windows in the primary partition you created for it (in this
Set the following WIN-OS/2 settings:
          example, it is drive C)Follow the installation instructions that
  o  MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS to On
          came with Windows.
  o  IDLE_SENSITIVITY to 100
          Note:  If you receive a message about the Windows swapper file, you
  o  IDLE_SECONDS to 20
          should avoid putting the swapper file in the same partition or
Mouse Not Recognized on Non-IBM Computer
          logical drive as OS/2.  However, if you put the Windows swapper file
If your mouse is not recognized on a non-IBM computer that has a mouse port
          in the same partition or logical drive as OS/2, make sure you leave
with an attached mouse, the mouse might be incompatible with the mouse port
          enough free space for OS/2, and create a temporary Windows swapper
because of the chip on the mouse adapter.
          file.
Attach the mouse to a serial port. If the mouse still does not work, try a
  16. Continue the OS/2 installation:
different mouse with the mouse port.
        a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A and press Ctrl+Alt+Del
Mouse and Keyboard Stop Working
          to restart your computer.
If you have AMI BIOS, you might have an old version. Contact your computer
        b. When the IBM logo screen appears, remove the Installation Diskette
manufacturer for an updated BIOS level.
          and insert Diskette 1into drive A.  Then press Enter.
 
        c. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option
CD-ROM Problems    220/2
          2, specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
 
        d. When the warning screen appears, press Enter to continue.
Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with your CD-ROM after
  17. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
installing OS/2.
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
Philips** CM 205 CD-ROM
        b. Highlight the OS2/DATA line (or whatever name you have given the
If you have a Philips CM 205 drive and it doesn't work with OS/2, edit your
          logical drive) and press Enter.
CONFIG.SYS file and change the line containing LMS205.ADD to LMS206.ADD.
        c. Select Set installable and press Enter.
If your CD-ROM drive is not working correctly (does not respond, or generates
        d. Press F3 to exit the FDISK screen.
errors when trying to read a CD), do the following:
  18. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
  1. Open OS/2 System.
      Accept the drive, and press Enter.  (In this example, the screen will show
  2. Open Command Prompts.
      drive D as the selected drive.)
  3. Open OS/2 Window.
  19. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
  4. Insert the diskette that came with your CD-ROM drive into drive A. (This
      2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
      diskette contains the CD-ROM device driver.)
      any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
  5. Type the following, pressing Enter after each:
  20. When a screen appears asking if you want to format the OS/2 partition, do
      COPY A:*.ADD C:\OS2\
      one of the following:
      COPY A:*.IFS C:\OS2\
        o  Select Do not format the partition if you want to use the FAT file
      COPY A:*.DMD C:\OS2\
          system. Then press Enter. Continue with step 22.
      where * represents the actual name of the file.
        o  Select Format the partition if you want to use the HPFS file system.
  6. Edit the C:\CONFIG.SYS file and press Enter (where c is the drive on which
          Then press Enter.  Continue with step 21.
       OS/2 is installed).
          Refer to Selecting a File System for an explanation of the file
  7. Add the following statements to the CONFIG.SYS file (if not already
          systems.
       there):
  21. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
       DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
       with which you want to format the OS/2 logical drive.
       IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
  22. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
       BASEDEV=OS2CDROM.DMD
       diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
      BASEDEV=*.ADD
       installation progresses.
       where * represents the actual name of the .ADD file on the device driver
       After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
       diskette.
       and then reinsert Diskette 1  Follow the instructions on the screen.
  8. If the following statement appears in the CONFIG.SYS file, change it from:
       After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
       DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDROM.SYS /Q /N:4
       screen, followed by the System Configuration screen:
       to
  23. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
       REM DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDROM.SYS /Q /N:4
       hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
  9. Shut down the system.
       Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
Problems with Sony, Mitsumi, or Hitachi** CD-ROM Drives
       If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
If you are using a Sony, Mitsumi, or Hitachi CD-ROM drive and cannot access it,
      click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.  A screen
do the following:
      will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
  1. Copy the following files from Diskette 1 to the hard disk, as follows:
      hardware device.  If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
       COPY A:\OS2CDROM.DMD C:\OS2
      refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
       COPY A:\CDFS.IFS C:\OS2
      about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
  2. Edit your CONFIG.SYS file on the hard disk and add the following
      display, refer to Video Procedures
       statements:
       Follow the instructions on each screen.   Click on Help if you need more
      DEVICE=C:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
       information about any screen you see.
       IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
      If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
  3. Shut down the system.
       OK.
Problems with Sound Blaster CD-ROM Drives
       A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
If you are using a Sound Blaster CD-ROM drive with the device driver SBPCD2.SYS
      (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
and cannot access the drive, restart your system and do the following:
      program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
  1. Copy the following file from Diskette 1 to the hard disk, as follows:
  24. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
       COPY A:\CDFS.IFS C:\OS2
      or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
  2. Edit your CONFIG.SYS file on the hard disk and add the following
       names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
      statement:
        o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
      IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
  3. Open OS/2 System.
          LPT3 button.  Then press Enter.
  4. Open Selective Install from the System Setup folder.
        o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
  5. Select the icon next to CD-ROM Device Support on the System Configuration
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
      screen.
          COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.
  6. Select OTHER from the bottom of the CD-ROM selection list; then select OK.
          If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
  7. When the selective installation is complete, edit the CONFIG.SYS file and
          install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
       delete the following line:
          and Installation screen appears:
       DEVICE=C:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
  25. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
  8. Shut down the system.
       Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration in the
 
       menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
Hard Disk Problems    221/2
      during Installation for more information.
 
  26. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
Following are solutions to problems you might have with hard disk drives after
      features you want to install.  You will notice that some features have a
installing OS/2.  Also refer to Recovery Procedures.
      check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
Slow SCSI Support
      The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
After installation, you might experience slow SCSI support. If this occurs,
      right of the feature.
make sure that the hard disk and the controller card are both set for the ASYNCH
      Follow these steps:
mode or the SYNCH mode.
        a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
Problem with Quantum Hardcard or IDE Controller
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
Add the required switch settings (adapter number and IRQ level) to the
        b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
IBM1S506.ADD device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file. If you need
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
assistance with the switch settings or need a BIOS upgrade (for certain Quantum
        c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
Hardcards), contact a service representative at Quantum.
  27. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
Hard Disk Controller Problem
      want to select.  Then click on OK.
  1. Determine the controller manufacturer, model number, and type.  Then,
  28. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen.  If you are installing
      determine which device driver is installed for the controller (for
       from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
       example, FD7000EX.ADD).
      including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After inserting each
  2. Verify that the installed device driver is the correct one.
      diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
  3. Verify that the BASEDEV= statements are correct in your CONFIG.SYS file.
  29. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
       Verify that the correct device driver is listed in a BASEDEV= statement.
       Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the
      Also, verify that the correct device driver is the only device driver
       screen; click on Help if you need more information.
       listed for that controller.  For more information about BASEDEV=
  30. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
      statements, refer to the Command Reference in the Information folder.
      of the OS/2 installation.
Cannot Set Up a Primary Partition
  31. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one
If you have more than two hard disk drives and you cannot set up a primary
      of the following:
partition on one of the hard disk drives, your BIOS could be preventing the
        o If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
  setup.
            a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
With OS/2, you can have a primary partition on two hard disk drives; however,
            b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
the BIOS in your computer determines which two hard disk drives can have
            c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
primary partitions.
                requested.
  Cannot Access Entire Hard Disk
        o If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
Your hard disk drive has more than 1024 cylinders, and you cannot access the
            a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
entire drive space, the device driver for your controller might not support
            b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
more than 1024 cylinders.
            c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
If you have a non-IBM controller and device driver, contact the manufacturer of
                type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.
the device driver to ask if your level of the driver supports more than 1024
                For example:
cylinders.
                e:\winsetup
 
                where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup
Desktop Problems    222/2
                is the directory that contains the Windows files.
  32. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and press Enter.
  33. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
      and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press Enter.
  34. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
your Desktop.  The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.


Following are solutions to problems you might have with your Desktop after
Example 2    257/3
installing OS/2.
 
System Stops Working
Creating a Boot Manager Partition, Keeping an Existing Primary Partition for DOS
The system stops and the keyboard and mouse do not respond.
and Windows (without Repartitioning), and Creating Logical Drives for OS/2 and
  1. Press Ctrl+Esc or Alt+Esc and wait a few seconds to see if the system
Data
      responds.
In this example, a hard disk of 120MB currently consists of a primary partition
  2. Determine if you can move your mouse but cannot select any object when you
of 40MB (containing DOS and Windows) and a logical drive of 80MB (which might
      press mouse button 1.
contain data). The DOS/Windows primary partition (drive C) will be preserved,
   3. Press the Caps Lock and Num Lock keys to see if their status lights come
but the logical drive will be deleted and replaced by:
      on.
   o  A 1MB Boot Manager partition
   4. Record a description of what you were doing when the system stopped. If
   o A 39MB logical drive for data (drive D)
      any messages were displayed on the screen, be sure to record the message
  o  A 40MB logical drive for OS/2 (drive E)
      text and number.
In this example, you will create free space on your hard disk and then put the
  5. Refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for
Boot Manager partition at the end of the free space. Of course, you can
      instructions about calling for additional assistance.
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
  Missing Icons
  to be.  Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on the
  After restarting your system, some of your Desktop icons might be missing.
  drive you are repartitioning.
Check the documentation for the hard drive and the controller card to ensure
  1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing logical drive. (Use
that their settings are both set for the ASYNCH mode or the SYNCH mode.
      your existing operating system to back up the data.)
Stacked Icons
  2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
If the objects on your Desktop appear to be stacked on each other, you can
   3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
refresh your Desktop:
      from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
   1. Position the mouse pointer on a blank area of the Desktop.
   4. Turn your computer on.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
  2. Press mouse button 2.  A pop-up menu appears.
       to restart it.
  3. Select Refresh.
  5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
   4. If your screen goes blank, press Alt+Esc to switch between programs and
      press Enter.   As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
       force the "repainting" of your screen.
      asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
DOS and Windows Programs Not Added to the Desktop
  6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
  During the installation of OS/2, your existing DOS and Windows programs are
      Then press Enter.
automatically added to your OS/2 Desktop. However, the installation program
  7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
might not find all programs (for example, programs located on remote servers).
      specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
If this happens, restart the system, then run the Add Programs to Desktop
  8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
utility program. (Add Programs to Desktop is located in the System Setup
      continue with the installation.
folder which is located in the OS/2 System folder.)
  9. Delete the existing logical drive (which you have backed up):
OS/2 2.x Programs Not Added to the Desktop
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
If you installed OS/2 on a system that already had OS/2 2.x installed on it and
        b. Highlight the line that contains information about the logical drive
your OS/2 2.x programs were not added to your Desktop, do the following:
          you are going to delete.  Then press Enter.
  1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
        c. Select Delete partition from the Options menu and press Enter.
      to restart it.
  10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
      screen, press Alt+F1.
        b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
        c. Select Create at End of Free Space and press Enter.
  4. Delete the DESKTOP directory.
  11. Create the first logical drive (for data):
  5. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system. The Desktop should be
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
      re-created.
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
  6. If the problem continues, re-create the INI files. Follow the
        c. Type the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 39) and
      instructions in Rebuilding Your Desktop.
          press Enter.
If you moved program groups off the Desktop and into a folder, you should move
        d. Select Extended Logical Driveand press Enter.
them back on the Desktop before installing OS/2. Otherwise, duplicate icons
        e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
could appear on the screen. If you try to delete these icons, the original
  12. Create the second logical drive (for OS/2):
icons will also be deleted.
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
Blank Desktop and Missing Objects
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
If the Desktop is blank, objects are missing, you cannot delete an object, or
        c. Accept the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 40  )
you have another problem that involves objects, run the CHKDSK (check disk)
          by pressing Enter.
program until the results indicate there are no errors.  To run CHKDSK, do the
          Note:  If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
following:
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 40), you would also
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
      your system.
          of free space or at the start of free space.
  2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
        d. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
  3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
        e. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  4. Insert Diskette 2.
        f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
  5. Type: CHKDSK C: /F and press Enter (where: C: is the drive where OS/2 is
        g. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS/2) and press
      installed).
          Enter.
For more information about CHKDSK, select Command Reference in the Information
  13. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
folder.
      startup time):
Missing Objects in the OS/2 System Folder
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
Follow the instructions in Rebuilding Your Desktop.
          have given this logical drive) and press Enter.
Folders Open and Close Immediately
        b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
Follow the instructions in Recovering Archived System Files.
        c. Select Default and press Enter. The name you typed for the OS/2
Missing, Empty, or Multiple Objects on Desktop
          logical drive will appear next to Default.
  o  The Desktop is missing objects or there is more than one icon for the same
          Note:  If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
      object.
          after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
  o  One or more Desktop folders are empty.
          Display Time Then continue with step d.
  o After you shut down the computer and start it again, the objects on the
        d. Press F3.
      Desktop are not displayed the same as when you shut down.
  14. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
Recover the archived Desktop, using the procedure in Recovering Archived System
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
Files.
          have given this logical drive) and press Enter.
If that does not fix the problem, follow the instructions for Rebuilding Your
        b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
Desktop.
  15. Add a name for the DOS/Windows partition to the Boot Manager startup menu:
Object Cannot Be Deleted
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the line that contains information
If you cannot delete an object, do the following:
          about the DOS/Windows partition.
  1. Create a folder.
        b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  2. Drag the object you want to delete to the new folder and drop it.
        c. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
  3. Drag the new folder to the Shredder and drop it.
        d. Type a name for this partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and press
If you cannot shred the folder, do the following:
          Enter.
  1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type: CD DESKTOP and press Enter.
  16. Exit the FDISK screen:
  2. After the DESKTOP directory opens, type: RD directory and press Enter.
        a. Press F3.
      (Where: directory is replaced by the name of the directory (folder) that
        b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
      you want to delete.)
  17. Continue with the installation. You will be asked to reinsert the
 
      Installation Diskette and Diskette 1 Follow the messages on the screen.
Recovery Procedures    223/2+
  18. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
 
      Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen will show
The procedures that follow provide information about recovering from Desktop
      drive E as the selected drive.)
problems and system failures, including:
  19. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
  o A damaged, unusable, or unstartable desktop
      2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
  o An invalid CONFIG.SYS file
      any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
  o  A damaged INI file
  20. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
  o Hard disk errors
      want to use for your OS/2 drive.  (Refer to Selecting a File System)
  o  A forgotten lockup password
  21. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
  Note: Backing up your system regularly might help you avoid having to
      diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
re-create files in the event of a system failure.
      installation progresses.
If your Desktop becomes damaged, unusable, or unstartable, you can recover in
      After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
two ways:
      and then reinsert Diskette 1  Follow the instructions on the screen.
  o  Use the Archive/Recover utility program to restore your Desktop to a
      After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
      previously saved state
      screen, followed by the System Configuration screen.
  o Rebuild your existing Desktop
  22. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
 
      hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
Recovering Archived System Files    224/3
      Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
 
      If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
OS/2 has the capability of archiving key system files as well as the DESKTOP
      click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
directory each time you start OS/2.  The default setting for this feature is
      will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
OFF. (The Archive function can be turned ON via the Archive page of the Desktop
      hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
Settings notebook.)
      refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
When the Archive function is turned ON, the state of the key system files and
      about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
Desktop as they existed at the last three "starts" of OS/2 are sa
       display, refer Video Procedures.
 
      Follow the instructions on each screen.  Click on Help if you need more
ved.  Each time
       information about any screen you see.
you restart OS/2, the oldest set of archived system files is deleted and the
      If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
current system files are saved. OS/2 also keeps a permanent archive of your
      OK.
Desktop and key files as they existed when OS/2 was first installed, so you can
      A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
always restore your system to its original state.
      (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
To use archived system files, do the following:
       program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
  1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, perform a shut
  23. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
       down, then press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
      or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper-left corner of your screen
      names.  Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
       (before the OS/2 logo screen appears), press Alt+F1.
         o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
  3. A screen appears, listing the three most recent archives.  Do one of the
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
       following:
           LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
        o  Type the number of the archive you want to use to restore your
         o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
          system.
           PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
        o  Type X to restore your system to its original state (as it was when
           COM3, or COM4 buttonThen press Enter.
          you first installed OS/2).
          If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
         o  Type C to get an OS/2 command prompt (for example, if you want to
          install default printer and press Enter or click on OKThe OS/2
           edit your CONFIG.SYS file).
          Setup and Installation screen appears.
         o  Type V to reset your primary display to VGA (for example, if you
  24. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
           think your Desktop is not damaged but cannot be seen because you need
  25. Click on Format on the pull-down menu.  Then indicate which file system
           to reinstall your VGA device drivers).
      you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold your data
 
      (in this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to Selecting a File
  Recovery Choices during Restart    225/3+
      System for an explanation of the file systems.  Click on Format when you
 
       are done.
The Recovery Choices screen enables you to specify how the system is to restart
  26. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
while a restart is in progressYou can display the Recovery Choices screen
  27. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
during restart by pressing Alt+F1 when a small white box appears in the upper
       Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration on the
left-hand corner of your screen. If you want the system to display the Recovery
      menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
Choices screen each time it restarts, you can select Display Recovery Choices at
      during Installation for more information.
every system restart  on the Archive page of the Desktop Settings notebook.
  28. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
The Recovery Choices screen allows you to:
      features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a
  o  Select the set of archived system files that the system is to use to
      check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
       restart
      The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
  o  Continue using the original installation files to restart, and go to a
      right of the feature.
      command line
      Follow these steps:
  o  Continue using the current system files to restart, and reset your primary
        a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
      display to VGA
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
  o  Restart your system using a customized CONFIG.SYS file that you have
        b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
       created
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
Each set of archived files appears on the Recovery Choices screen with the date
        c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
  and time when the files were archived. The files are numbered 1, 2, 3 or, for
  29. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
the original installation files, X. Select the files that you want the system
      want to selectThen click on OK.
  to restart with by pressing 1, 2, 3, or X on your keyboard. The system will
  30. Follow the instructions that appear on each screenIf you are installing
continue to restart using the set of archived files represented by the number
      from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
you pressed.
      including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After inserting each
To go to a command line without changing the system files, press the C key on
      diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
your keyboard.
  31. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
To reset your primary display to VGA, press the V key on your keyboard.
      Configuration/Selection Utility screen.  Follow the instructions on the
The character keys that you press can be uppercase or lowercase letters.
      screen; click on Help if you need more information.
To restart your system using a customized version of the CONFIG.SYS file, enter
  32. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
an alphabetic character that corresponds to the name of a CONFIG.SYS file that
      of the OS/2 installation.
  you have created. Creating Your Own CONFIG.SYS Files describes how to create
  33. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
and name your own customized version of CONFIG.SYSDisplaying Your CONFIG.?
      and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press Enter.
Choices on the Recovery Choices Screen describes how to display your customized
  34. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
  CONFIG.SYS choices on the Recovery Choices screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
your Desktop.  The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.


  Creating Your Own CONFIG.SYS Files   226/4
  Example 3   258/3


In some cases, you need different CONFIG.SYS files to create environments that
Creating a Boot Manager Partition and a Primary Partition for DOS and Windows on
are specific to the kinds of work you are doing. For example, when you use a
the First Hard Disk, and Logical Drives for OS/2 and Data on the Second Hard
laptop computer with a docking station, you might want a CONFIG.SYS file that
Disk
supports your laptop computer and one that supports your regular machine. You
In the following example, a system with two hard disk drives (one 80MB in size
can create different versions of the CONFIG.SYS file, and, during restart,
with DOS and Windows on it, and the other 200MB in size with programs and data
specify from the Recovery Choices screen which version the system is to use. You
on it) will be reformatted and replaced with the following partitions and
can also customize the Recovery Choices screen to display your customized
logical drives:
CONFIG.SYS file choices.
  o  The first hard disk:
The following steps describe how to create and use multiple CONFIG.SYS files.
        - A 1MB Boot Manager partition
In these steps, ? is any unique single alphabetic character except: X, x, C, c,
        -  A 79MB primary partition for DOS and Windows (drive C)
V, or v. These steps use C as the root directory. If you installed OS/2 on a
   o  The second hard disk:
drive other than C, replace the C in the path name with your own root directory.
        -  A 155MB logical drive for programs and data (drive D)
   1. Save a copy of the current CONFIG.SYS file.
        - A 45MB logical drive for OS/2 (drive E)
      You can save a copy of the current CONFIG.SYS file by copying it to a
Notice that in this example, because only one primary partition (drive C) is
      diskette. Otherwise, you can copy the current CONFIG.SYS file to the
  created on the first hard disk, no drive remapping occurs for your data drive
      C:\OS2\BOOT subdirectory, and rename it to CONFIG.?. If you copy and
(drive D). That is, if your data files were previously in drive D on the second
      rename CONFIG.SYS, be sure to make a note of the new name and directory so
hard disk, they will still be in logical drive D after repartitioning and
      you can restore it later.
installing OS/2. Of course, you must back up your data files before
  2. On the C:\OS2\BOOT subdirectory, create a file called CONFIG.? and
repartitioning, and then restore the files to drive D when the OS/2
      customize it with the modifications that you need.
installation is completed.
  3. Copy your customized CONFIG.? file to the current CONFIG.SYS file.
You will also notice that when you create only logical drives on your second
      There are two ways to copy your CONFIG.? file. You can enter the copy
hard disk, the FDISK utility program will automatically set up a small (usually
      command at the OS/2 command prompt, or you can create an OS/2 batch file
1MB) primary partition at the start of free space. That is because it must
      that will run during restart after the system processes C:\CONFIG.SYS.
reserve space for the partition table at the start of the hard disk. However,
        a. Replacing Your CONFIG.SYS file with CONFIG.?
this partition will not be assigned a drive letter, and will not cause drive
          If you have only one customized CONFIG.? file, or if you do not plan
remapping or interfere with the use of the logical drives you create on this
          to change between CONFIG.SYS and CONFIG.? often, you might choose to
disk.
          copy over CONFIG.SYS with your customized CONFIG.? file. Copying over
Use the following steps to set up your hard disks this way. Of course, you can
          C:\CONFIG.SYS with your customized CONFIG.? file replaces CONFIG.SYS
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
          in the root directory, and makes your customized file the default
to be.   Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
          CONFIG.SYS file.
hard disks.
          The command to copy your customized file to the current CONFIG.SYS
  1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partitions. (Use your
          file is:
      existing operating system to back up the data.)  Be sure to back up data
          COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.? C:\CONFIG.SYS
      on both hard disks.
          Using your customized CONFIG.? file as the default file allows you to
  2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
          restart without selecting a CONFIG.? file at the Recovery Choices
  3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
          screen.
      from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
          You can now restart your system. When you restart, the system will
  4. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
          automatically use the file in the root directory named CONFIG.SYS.
      to restart it.
        b. Creating a Batch File to Replace CONFIG.SYS with CONFIG.?
  5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
          If you have several customized CONFIG.SYS files, using the batch file
      press Enter.  As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
          allows you to specify the CONFIG.? you want to use without entering
      asking you to wait, followed by a black screen. Then a screen appears.
          multiple copy commands. You can simply change the ? character in
  6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
          your batch file, and enter that character at the Recovery Choices
      Then press Enter.
          screen.
  7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
          Create a batch file on C:\OS2\BOOT, and name it ALTF1?.CMD, where ?
      specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
          is the character that you used in the name of your CONFIG.? file. Put
  8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
          the following COPY command in the batch file.
      continue with the installation.
          COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.? C:\CONFIG.SYS
  9. Delete the existing partition on the first hard disk (which you have
          Display the Recovery Choices screen by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del to
      backed up):
          restart your system and then pressing Alt+F1.
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
          At the Recovery Choices screen, press the key for the ? single
        b. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete.
          character in the name of the CONFIG.? file you want to use.
        c. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
          The system continues the restart using your customized CONFIG.? file.
        d. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
          Note:  If you enter a character from the Recovery Choices screen for
        e. Repeat steps a through d for any other partitions you want to delete
           which there is no corresponding ALTF1?.CMD batch file, the system
           on the first hard disk.
          will use the CONFIG.? file that corresponds to that character. If no
  10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
          CONFIG.? file corresponding to that character exists, the system will
        a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
          return to the Recovery Choices screen.
        b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
          Example
        c. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
          The following example shows how to create a CONFIG.SYS file named
  11. Create the primary partition for DOS and Windows:
          CONFIG.A, and a batch file to copy it during restart. The system is
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
          installed on the C drive. Before you start, save a copy of your
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
          current CONFIG.SYS file.
        c. Accept the size of the partition (in this example, 79) by pressing
            1. Copy the system version of CONFIG.SYS into a new file called
          Enter.
                CONFIG.A
          Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
                COPY CONFIG.SYS C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.A
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 79), you would also
            2. Change to the C:\OS2\BOOT directory
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the partition at the end of
                CD OS2
          free space or at the start of free space.
                CD BOOT
        d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
            3. Edit CONFIG.A to customize it, and save your changes
        e. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
                E CONFIG.A
        f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
            4. Edit a file called ALTF1A.CMD file
        g. Type a name for this primary partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and
                E ALTF1A.CMD
          press Enter.
            5. Put the following COPY command into ALTF1A.CMD, and save your
  12. Delete the existing partition on the second hard disk (which you have
                changes
      backed up):
                COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.A C:\CONFIG.SYS
        a. At the FDISK screen, press the Tab key to highlight Disk at the top
            6. Restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del. Press Alt+F1 when
          of the screen.
                the small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of
        b. Press the Right Arrow key to display the FDISK screen for the second
                your screen.
          hard disk.
            7. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press the letter A.
        c. Press the Tab key to highlight the first partition listed on the
 
          FDISK screen.
Displaying Your CONFIG.? Choices on the Recovery Choices Screen    227/4
        d. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete and
 
          press Enter.
You can customize your Recovery Choices screen to display the list of customized
        e. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
CONFIG.? files that you created.  Customizing the Recovery Choices screen will
        f. Repeat steps a through e for any other partitions you want to delete
help you to remember which character to enter for a particular version of
          on the second hard disk.
CONFIG.?, by displaying your selections.
  13. Create the logical drive for OS/2:
To customize the Recovery Choices screen, edit the file
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
C:\OS2\BOOT\ALTF1BOT.SCR. (If you installed OS/2 on a drive other than C,
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
specify the drive on which OS/2 is installed.) You can add up to 6 lines of text
        c. Type the size of the logical drive (in this example, 45) and press
to the bottom of this file.
          Enter.
Each line that you add should represent a single CONFIG.? file that you created.
        d. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
Each line should include the alphabetic character that identifies that CONFIG.?
        e. Select Create at End of Free Space and press Enter.
file.  You might also want to include a brief, one-line description of when to
        f. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
use that version of the CONFIG.? file.
        g. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
For example, to display the option for the CONFIG.A file on the Recovery Choices
        h. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS/2) and press
screen, you might add the following to the file C:\OS2\BOOT\ALTF1BOT.SCR:
          Enter.
A CONFIG.A (file for laptop computer)
  14. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
 
      startup time):
  Rebuilding Your Desktop    228/3
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
 
          have given the logical drive for OS/2) and press Enter.
Use the following procedure if the Archive/Recover procedure did not restore
        b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
your Desktop, this procedure will rebuild the Desktop by making new INI files.
        c. Select Default and press Enter. The name you typed for the OS/2
  1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
          logical drive will appear next to Default.
      to restart it.
          Note: If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
          after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
      screen, press Alt+F1.
          Display Time now. Then continue with step d.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
        d. Press F3.
  4. Change to the OS/2 directory on your hard disk.  Type the following
  15. Create the logical drive for data:
      commands and press Enter after each:
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
      C:
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
      CD\OS2
        c. Accept the size of the logical drive (in this example, 155) by
  5. Type the following commands and press Enter after each:
          pressing Enter.
      MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC
          Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
      MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 155), you would also
  6. Delete the hidden file, WP?ROOT.?SF, from the startable partition. Type
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the partition at the end of
      the following commands and press Enter after each:
          free space or at the start of free space.
      ATTRIB -h -s -r \WP?ROOT.?SF
        d. Select Extended Logical Drive and Press Enter.
      DEL \WP?ROOT.?SF
  16. Exit the FDISK screen:
  7. Restart the system.
        a. Press F3.
 
        b. Press any key to remove the message box.
  Recovering the CONFIG.SYS File    229/3
        c. Select Save and exit and press Enter.
 
        d. When a message appears confirming the hard disk partitioning is
The CONFIG.SYS file contains command statements that are used to configure your
          complete, remove Diskette 1from drive A. Do not insert the
system during startup. If the file is changed incorrectly, you might not be
          Installation Diskette. Continue with step 17.
able to restart the system or edit the file(For example, some programs write
  17. Install DOS and Windows on the first hard disk:
information to the CONFIG.SYS file when they are installed. In some cases, this
        a. Insert the DOS installation diskette into drive A, and then press
information can cause the CONFIG.SYS file to be unusable.) To recover the
          Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
original version of the CONFIG.SYS file (as it was created when OS/2 was
        b. Follow the instructions that came with DOS to install itIf
installed), you can use the following procedure:
          prompted to do so during the DOS installation, format the partition
  1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
          and logical drives you created in the previous steps.
      to restart it.
        c. After DOS is installed, the Boot Manager menu appears. Select the
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
          DOS partition and press Enter.
      screen, press Alt+F1.
        d. Install Windows in the primary partition you created for it (in this
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
          example, it is drive C). Follow the installation instructions that
  4. Type C: and press Enter (where C represents the drive on which your
          came with Windows.
      operating system resides).
          Note:  If you receive a message about the Windows swapper file, you
  5. Rename the damaged CONFIG.SYS file.  For example, type:
          should avoid putting the swapper file in the same partition or
      REN CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.BAD
          logical drive as OS/2. However, if you put the Windows swapper file
  6. Press Enter.
          in the same partition or logical drive as OS/2, make sure you leave
  7. Copy the backup version of the CONFIG.SYS file to the root directory of
          enough free space for OS/2, and create a temporary Windows swapper
      the drive where your operating system resides. (The CONFIG.SYS backup
          file.
      file was created during OS/2 installation)Type:
  18. Continue the OS/2 installation:
      COPY C:\OS2\INSTALL\CONFIG.SYS C:\CONFIG.SYS
        a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A and press Ctrl+Alt+Del
  8. Press Enter.
          to restart your computer.
  9. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
        b. When the IBM logo screen appears, remove the Installation Diskette
As stated, this procedure reestablishes the original version of the CONFIG.SYS
          and insert Diskette 1into drive AThen press Enter.
file (as it was created during OS/2 installation). If you made any changes to
        c. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option
the CONFIG.SYS file after that time, you will have to edit the newly copied
          2, specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
CONFIG.SYS file and add those changes.
        d. When the warning screen appears, press Enter to continue.
 
  19. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
Recovering the User INI File    230/3
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
 
        b. Press the Tab key to highlight Disk at the top of the FDISK screen.
The OS2.INI file, also referred to as the user INI file, is an operating system
        c. Press the Right Arrow key to display the FDISK screen for the second
startup file that contains system settings such as program defaults, display
          hard disk.
options, and file options. The OS2SYS.INI file, also referred to as the system
        d. Press the Tab key to highlight the first partition listed on the
INI file, is an operating system file that contains information about installed
          FDISK screen.
fonts and printer drivers. If you receive a message that the OS2.INI file has
        e. Highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you have given the OS/2
been "corrupted", replace both the OS2.INI file and the OS2SYS.INI file on your
          logical drive) and press Enter.
hard disk.
        f. Select Set installable and press Enter.
Use the following procedure to replace these two files with versions containing
        g. Press F3 to exit the FDISK screen.
default values:
  20. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
  1. Turn on the computerIf the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
      Accept the drive, and press Enter(In this example, the screen will show
       to restart it.
       drive E as the selected drive.)
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
  21. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
       screen, press Alt+F1.
       2.  Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
      any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
  4. Type C: and press Enter (where C represents the drive where your operating
  22. When a screen appears asking if you want to format the OS/2 partition, do
      system resides).
      one of the following:
  5. Type CD \OS2 and press Enter.
        o  Select Do not format the partition if you want to use the FAT file
  6. Type ATTRIB -s -h -r OS2*.INI and press Enter.
          system. Then press Enter. Continue with step 24.
  7. Type REN OS2.INI OS2.OLD and press Enter.
        o  Select Format the partition if you want to use the HPFS file system.
  8. Type MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC and press Enter.
          Then press Enter. Continue with step 23.
  9. Type REN OS2SYS.INI OS2SYS.OLD and press Enter.
          Refer to Selecting a File System for an explanation of the file
   10. Type MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC and press Enter.
          systems.
  11. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
   23. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
  You can protect your INI files by having them automatically backed up each time
      with which you want to format the OS/2 logical drive. If a warning screen
you start your system.  For example, if you include the following statements in
      appears, press Enter to continue with the installation.
your CONFIG.SYS file, a backup copy of your current INI files and a backup copy
  24. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
of the INI files as they existed at the previous system startup will be made.
      diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
(Note that this example assumes that OS/2 is installed on drive C.  Use the
      installation progresses.
letter of the drive on which you have OS/2 installed.)
  25. After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\*.INX C:\OS2\*.INY
      and then reinsert Diskette 1  Follow the instructions on the screen.
CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\OS2*.INI C:\OS2\*.INX
      After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
By copying the INI files this way, you will always be able to recover a recent
      screen, followed by the System Configuration screen.
version of these files in case the user INI file becomes damaged.
  26. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
 
      hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
Recovering from Errors on the Hard Disk    231/3
      Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
 
      If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
The CHKDSK command with the parameter /F can be used to correct disk and
      click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
directory errorsHowever, when you use the /F parameter, no activity can occur
      will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
on the diskTherefore, if you need to correct errors on the drive from which
      hardware deviceIf you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
you normally start OS/2, you must use the version of CHKDSK that is on the
      refer to the documentation that came with itIf you need information
installation diskettes (or installation CD) instead of the version that has been
      about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
installed on the hard disk. You can also use the version of CHKDSK on the
      display, refer to Video Procedures.
installation diskettes or CD if the disk is in use or locked by another process.
      Follow the instructions on each screen.  Click on Help if you need more
To run CHKDSK /F using diskettes:
      information about any screen you see.
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
      If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
      your system.
      OK.
  2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
      A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
  3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
      (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
  4. Insert Diskette 2.
      program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
  5. To correct the errors on your hard disk, type CHKDSK C: /F:2, then press
  27. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
      Enter. (Where: C: is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
      or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
  6. Remove the diskette from drive A.
      names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
  7. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
        o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
  To run CHKDSK /F from a CD:
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
          LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
       your system.
        o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
  2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
  3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
          COM3, or COM4 button.  Then press Enter.
  4. Insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
          If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
  5. Type E: (where E is your CD-ROM drive) and press Enter.
          install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
  6. Type CD\OS2IMAGE and press Enter.
          and Installation screen appears.
  7. Type CD DISK_2 and press Enter.
  28. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
  8. To correct the errors on your hard disk, type CHKDSK C: /F:2, then press
  29. Click on Format on the pull-down menuThen indicate which file system
       Enter(Where: C: is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
      you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold data (in
  9. Press Enter.
      this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to Selecting a File
 
       System for an explanation of the file systems.  Click on Format when you
Recovering Memory State Data    232/3
      are done.
 
  30. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
The process OS/2 uses to recover the state of memory at the time of a failure is
  31. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
called a memory dump.  A memory dump is performed when a problem is difficult to
      Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration in the
reproduce or other methods of problem determination do not identify the problem.
      menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
Memory dump information can then be analyzed by a team of technical experts and
      during Installation for more information.
determine the cause of the problem.
  32. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
Important  Do not perform a memory dump unless your Service and Support Group
       features you want to installYou will notice that some features have a
has recommended this action. :enote.
      check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
There are two types of memory dumps:
      The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
  o Manual memory dump (used for system hangs and traps that cause the system
      right of the feature.
       to stop)
      Follow these steps:
  o  Automatic memory dump (used for application programs, system traps, and
        a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
       internal processing errors)
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
A system memory dump can be placed on a FAT hard-disk partition or formatted
        b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
diskettes.
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
Different situations determine which type of memory dump is neededRefer to
        c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions about
  33. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
calling for additional assistance.
      want to select. Then click on OK.
Using TRACE in CONFIG.SYS File
  34. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are installing
Before you create the memory dump diskettes, you must use the OS/2 Event
       from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
Tracing Service to capture a sequence of system events.  To enable system
       including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.  After inserting each
event-tracing, add the following statements to your CONFIG.SYS file:
      diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
  TRACEBUF=63
  35. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
TRACE=ON
      Configuration/Selection Utility screenFollow the instructions on the
The default for TRACE=ON is to trace all static system events.
      screen; click on Help if you need more information.
Restart your system to activate TRACEAlso, turn on two dynamic trace points
  36. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
as follows:
      of the OS/2 installation.
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  37. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one
  2. Open Command Prompts.
      of the following:
  3. Open OS/2 Full Screen or OS/2 Window.
        o If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
  4. Type the following at the command prompt:
            a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
      trace on kernel  (press Enter)
            b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
      trace on doscall1 (press Enter)
            c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
Performing the Memory Dump
                requested.
If you are sending a memory dump to diskettes, you must use formatted
        o If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
diskettes.  Generally, one 1.44MB diskette is used for each 2MB of RAM.  For
            a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
example, if you have a 16MB system, you will probably use eight 1.44MB
            b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
formatted diskettes.
            c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
If you are sending a memory dump to a hard disk, you must first create a FAT
                type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.
partition labeled SADUMP and give it a size greater than the amount of physical
                For example:
memory (RAM) in your systemFor example, if your system has 16MB of RAM, set
                e:\winsetup
  the size of the SADUMP partition to 17MB.
                where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup
  To run a memory dump, the Memory Dump facility must be started manually or
                is the directory that contains the Windows files.
  automatically as follows:
            d. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and
  To start it manually:
                press Enter.
Press and hold down the Ctrl and Alt keys, and then press the Num Lock key
            e. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to
twiceAfter a few seconds, the screen clears; after a minute the system beeps
                shut down and restart your computerClick on OK or press
and one of the following messages is displayed:
                Enter.
  When dumping to diskettes:
            f. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on
Insert a formatted diskette to commence dumping.
                your screen.
When dumping to a hard disk:
  Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
  The memory dump is being performed.
  your Desktop.  The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
The total amount of memory to be dumped is xxxx.
  transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
  To start it automatically:
 
  Type one of the following statements in your CONFIG.SYS file and restart your
  Example 4    259/3
  system:
 
  TRAPDUMP=OFF,drive letter:
Creating a Primary Partition for OS/2 and a Logical Drive for Data
  TRAPDUMP=ON,drive letter:
The following example shows how to set up your hard disk to install OS/2 in one
TRAPDUMP=R0,drive letter:
partition and your data in another partitionIt does not involve the
where:
installation of the Boot Manager. You can use this setup if you are installing
   o  TRAPDUMP=OFF,drive letter: indicates that no automatic dump is to be
on a computer that does not have DOS, Windows, or any other operating systems on
       taken.  This is the default value; it is generally used when initiating a
it, or if you want to replace all existing operating systems with OS/2.
      manual memory dump.
In this example, an 80MB hard disk is replaced by:
      If REIPL=ON is specified in the CONFIG.SYS file, the system will restart
  o A 45MB primary partition in which OS/2 will be installed (drive C)
       automatically and no dump will be taken when a system trap or internal
  o A 35MB logical drive, which will be used to hold programs and data (drive
      processing error occurs.
      D)
   o TRAPDUMP=ON,drive letter: specifies the drive to which system dump
  Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, you can
       information is written for any access violations. The system will restart
  customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
      after the TRAPDUMP process has completed.  The default drive is A if no
  to be.  Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
       drive is specified.
  hard disk.
   o  TRAPDUMP=R0,drive letter: specifies the drive to which system dump
   1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
       information is written for system traps and internal processing errors.
       existing operating system to back up the data.)
      The system will restart after the TRAPDUMP process has completed.  The
  2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
       default drive is A if no drive is specified.
       from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
TRAPDUMP now initiates a memory dump, depending on which TRAPDUMP statement is
   3. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
placed in the CONFIG.SYS file.
       to restart it.
Warning: Setting TRAPDUMP to ON or R0 enables your system to automatically
  4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
initiate a memory dump. Do not enable TRAPDUMP unless you need to troubleshoot
       press Enter.  As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
your system and have been instructed to do so by your technical coordinator.
      asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
Note:  If dumping to diskettes, complete steps 1 through 5. If dumping to hard
   5. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
disk, skip steps 1 through 5 and read step 6.
       Then press Enter.
   1. When prompted, insert the diskette labeled Dump Diskette 1 and press any
  6. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
      key to start the dump process. The following message will be displayed:
       specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
      The memory dump is being performed...
  7. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
  2. When the memory dump has completed or the current dump diskette is full,
      continue with the installation.
      the following messages are displayed:
  8. Delete the existing partition (which you have backed up):
      The diskette is full. Insert another formatted diskette in drive A.
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
      The storage address ranges on this diskette are:
        b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
      DUMPDATA.xxx      yyy - zzz
        c. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
      Press any key to continue.
   9. Create the primary partition for OS/2:
      where xxx is the dump diskette number, yyy is the beginning memory
        a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
      address, and zzz is the ending memory address on the disk.
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
      Note: If you press Enter without changing the diskette, the system will
        c. Type the size of the primary partition (in this example, 45) and
      prompt you once more before the dump process overwrites the contents of
          press Enter.
      the current diskette in the drive. :enote.
        d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
  3. Insert the next dump diskette into drive A and press any key. This action
        e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
      continues the dump process and displays the following message:
  10. Indicate that this partition should be used to install OS/2:
      The memory dump is being performed...
        a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
      Warning: Any data on the dump diskettes will be overwritten by the Memory
        b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
      Dump facility.
        c. Type a name for the partition (for example, OS/2), and press Enter.
  4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the dumping is completed and the following
  11. Create the logical drive for your data:
      message is displayed:
        a. Highlight the Free Space line.
      Insert memory dump diskette number 1 to complete dump.
        b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
      The storage address ranges on this diskette are:
        c. Select Create partition and press Enter.
      DUMPDATA.xxx        yyy - zzz
        d. Accept the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 35  )
      Press any key to continue.
          by pressing Enter.
  5. You must reinsert Dump Diskette 1 at this point to properly terminate the
          Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
       dump process. The control program will write the dump summary record to
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 35), you would also
       Dump Diskette 1 and end the processAfter the process has ended, the
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
       following messages are displayed:
          of free space or at the start of free space.
      The memory dump has completed. Remove the dump diskette and restart the
        e. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
       system.
  12. Exit the FDISK screen:
  6. When a memory dump is initiated, the system begins writing the system
        a. Press F3.
       memory to the dump partition. When completed, the system restarts
        b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
       automatically.
  13. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove and insert diskettes.
  Mailing the Dump Diskettes
  14. When the Welcome screen reappears, select Advanced Installation and press
Do not send dump diskettes unless instructed by the Service and Support Group.
       Enter.
Diskettes must be clearly labeled with the identification number (which is the
  15. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
PMR number that is provided by the Service and Support Group) and your name.
       Accept the drive, and press Enter(In this example, the screen will show
  Also, be sure to number the diskettes.
       drive C as the selected drive.)
Send the dump diskettes to the address provided by the Service and Support
  16. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
Group. Refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for
       2. Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
instructions about calling for additional assistance.
       any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
 
  17. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
Recovering from A Forgotten Password    233/3
       want to use for your OS/2 partition. (Refer to Selecting a File System.)
 
  18. When prompted to do so, remove and insert diskettes. After Diskette 6, you
If you forgot your lockup password, you must use the LOCK.RC file located in the
      will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then reinsert
\OS2 directory to reconfigure the OS2.INI file.  To do this:
      Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screenAfter you remove
  1. Turn on the computer.
      Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo screen, followed by
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
      the System Configuration screen.
       screen, press Alt+F1.
  19. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
      hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
  4. Change from drive A to the drive on which OS/2 is installed.  Type: C: and
      Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
       press Enter.
      If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
  5. Change to the OS2 directory. Type CD \OS2 and press Enter.
      click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
  6. Type the following:
      will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
       MAKEINI OS2.INI LOCK.RC
      hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
  7. Press Enter.
       refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
  8. Restart the computer.
      about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
 
       display, refer to Video Procedures.
Video Procedures    234/1+
      Follow the instructions on each screen.   Click on Help if you need more
 
      information about any screen you see.
This chapter provides information to help you install and fine tune your OS/2
      If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
videoIt includes supported chip sets and resolutions, instructions for
       OK.
changing video settings, plus specific procedures for SVGA, XGA, and LCD or
      A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
Monochrome Plasma displays.
      (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the
      program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
information.
  20. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
 
      or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
Video Device Drivers for OS/2    235/2+
      namesThen indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
 
        o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
OS/2 contains video device drivers that support the chip sets found on many
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
system boards and display adapters.
          LPT3 button.  Then press Enter.
The following table lists the supported chip sets and the video device driver
        o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
that should be selected during installation.
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
 
          COM3, or COM4 button.  Then press Enter.
  Non-Accelerated Video Device Drivers    236/3
          If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
 
          install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
          and Installation screen appears.
3 MANUFACTURER    3 CHIP SET                      3 VIDEO DEVICE DRIVER       3
  21. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
  22. Click on Format on the pull-down menuThen indicate which file system
3 ATI Technolo-  3 ATI28800  256 color            3 ATI Technologies ATI28800 3
       you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold data (in
3 gies            3                                3                          3
      this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to Selecting a File
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      System for an explanation of the file systems. Click on Format when you
3 Cirrus Logic    3 CL-GD5422, CL-GD5424          3 Cirrus Logic              3
      are done.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
  23. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
3 Headland Tech- 3 HT209  256 color              3 Headland Technologies    3
  24. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
3 nologies        3                                3 HT209                    3
      Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration on the
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
3 IBM            3 IBM VGA 16 color              3 Video graphics adapter    3
      during Installation for more information.
3                3                                3 (VGA)                    3
   25. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      features you want to install.  You will notice that some features have a
3 IBM            3 IBM VGA256C                    3 IBM VGA256C              3
      check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
3 Trident**      3 TVGA8900B, TVGA8900C   256    3 Trident Microsystems      3
      right of the feature.
3 Microsystems    3 color                          3 TVGA8900                  3
       Follow these steps:
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
        a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
3 TSENG          3 ET4000                        3 TSENG Laboratories ET4000 3
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
        b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
3 Western        3 WD90C11, WD90C30, WD90C31 (in  3 Western Digital WD90C11,  3
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
3 Digital**       3 WD90C30 compatibility mode)    3 C30, C31 (C30 mode only)  3
        c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
3                3 256 color                      3                          3
  26. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      want to select.  Then click on OK.
3 NOTE:  Use the Selective Install icon to change the resolution and number of 3
  27. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen.  If you are installing
3 colors for non-accelerated video device drivers.                             3
      from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
      including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.  After inserting each
 
      diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
Accelerated Video Device Drivers    237/3
  28. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
      Configuration/Selection Utility screen.  Follow the instructions on the
      screen; click on Help if you need more information.
  29. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
      of the OS/2 installation.
  30. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
      and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press Enter.
  31. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
your Desktop.  The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.


ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
Example 5   260/3
3 MANUFACTURER   3 CHIP SET                      3 VIDEO DEVICE DRIVER      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 IBM            3 IBM 8514                      3 Display Adapter 8514/A    3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 IBM            3 IBM XGA                        3 Extended graphic adapter  3
3                3                                3 (XGA)                    3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 S3 Corporation  3 S3 86C801, 86C805, 86C928      3 S3 86C801, 86C805, 86C928 3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 S3 Corporation  3 S3 86C864                      3 S3 864                    3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Cirrus Logic**  3 Cirrus Logic 5426, 5428, 5430, 3 Cirrus Logic 5426, 5428,  3
3                3 5434                          3 5430, 5434                3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Western Digital 3 WD 90C24, 90C24A, 90C24A2,    3 WD 90C24 - 90C31          3
3                3 90C31                          3                          3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Western Digital 3 WD 90C33                      3 WD 90C33                  3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 ATI Technology  3 MACH 32                        3 ATI MACH 32              3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 ATI Technology  3 MACH 64                        3 ATI MACH 64              3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 TSENG**        3 ETW32, ETW32i, ETW32p          3 TSENG ET4000/W32, /W32i,  3
3                3                                3 /W32p                    3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Weitek**        3 Power 9000                    3 Weitek Power 9000        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 NOTE:  Not all system boards and display adapters that use these chip sets  3
3 are supported.  For more information about display adapter and chip set com- 3
3 patibility, select HELP from the Display Driver Install window in Selective  3
3 Install or refer to the README file on the Installation Diskette.            3
3                                                                              3
3 These drivers will be installed in 640x480x256 colors by the OS/2 installa-  3
3 tion program.  Use the system icon to change the resolution and number of    3
3 colors if you are using any of the accelerated video device drivers except  3
3 IBM 8514.                                                                    3
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY


Supported Resolutions for Accelerated Drivers    238/3
Creating One Primary Partition for OS/2
 
The following example shows how to set up your hard disk to install OS/2 in one
The resolutions that can be set for a particular display adapter, are dependent
primary partition (drive C). It does not involve the installation of the Boot
on the:
Manager. You can use this setup if you want to reformat your existing hard disk
  o Specific display adapter being used
and replace all the information on the disk with OS/2.  You can also use this
  o  Graphics accelerator chip set on the adapter
example if you want to reformat your hard disk with a different file system (for
  o Video device driver being used
example, you now want to use the FAT file system on a computer that was
  o  Amount of video memory on the adapter
previously formatted with the HPFS file system).
The video device drivers shipped with OS/2 (see the previous table) support the
In this example, an 80MB hard disk is replaced by:
following resolutions and number of colorsNot all of the device drivers
   o An 80MB primary partition in which OS/2 will be installed (drive C)
support all of the resolutions.  For more information about the resolutions
  Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, the size
supported by each adapter and device driver, select Help from the Display
  of your hard disk may be different from the size of the disk used in this
Driver Install window in Selective Install or refer to the README file on the
  example.  Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
Installation Diskette.
  hard disk.
ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDD?
  1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
3 RESOLUTIONS    3 NUMBER OF      3 VIDEO MEMORY   3 NOTE3
      existing operating system to back up the data.)
  3                3 COLORS          3 REQUIRED        3    3
  2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
  CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
      from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
  3 640 x 480      3 256            3 1MB            3    3
  3. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
  CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
       to restart it.
  3 800 x 600      3 256            3 1MB            3    3
  4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
       press Enter.  As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
3 1024 x 768      3 256            3 1MB            3    3
      asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
  5. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
3 1280 x 1200    3 256            3 2MB            3    3
      Then press Enter.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
  6. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
3 1600 x 1200    3 256            3 4MB            3    3
       specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
  CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
  7. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
3 640 x 480       3 65,536          3 1MB            3    3
       continue with the installation.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
  8. Delete existing partitions (which you have backed up):
3 800 x 600       3 65,536          3 1MB            3    3
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
        b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
3 1024 x 768      3 65,536          3 2MB            3    3
        c. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
        d. Repeat steps a through c for all partitions you want to delete.
3 1280 x 1024    3 65,536          3 4MB            3 2   3
  9. Create the primary partition for OS/2:
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
        a. Highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
3 640 x 480       3 16,777,216      3 1MB or 2MB      3 1, 3
        b. From the Options menu, select Create partition and press Enter.
3                3                3                3 3  3
        c. Accept the size of the partition (in this example, 80) by pressing
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
          Enter.
3 800 x 600       3 16,777,216      3 2MB            3 1,  3
        d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
3                3                3                3 4, 3
  10. Indicate that this partition should be used to install OS/2:
3                3                3                3 6  3
        a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
        b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
3 1024 x 768      3 16,777,216      3 4MB            3 1  3
        c. Type a name for the partition (for example, OS/2), and press Enter.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
   11. Exit the FDISK screen:
3 1280 x 1024    3 16,777,216      3 4MB            3 1,  3
        a. Press F3.
3                3                3                3 2   3
        b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDD4
  12. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove and insert diskettes.
3 1360 x 1024    3 16              3 1MB            3 5  3
  13. When the Welcome screen reappears, select Advanced Installation and press
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDD4
      Enter.
3 NOTE:                                                    3
  14. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
3                                                          3
      Accept the drive, and press Enter(In this example, the screen will show
3 1. The Western Digital device drivers do not support    3
      drive C as the selected drive.)
3    16,777,216 colors.                                   3
  15. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
3 2. Most adapter/chip set combinations do not support    3
      2.  Then press Enter(If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
3    these resolutions and colors.                         3
      any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
3 3. The amount of video memory required for this resol-  3
  16. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
3    ution is dependent on the display adapter and the    3
      want to use for your OS/2 partition. (Refer to Selecting a File System.)
3    video device driver installed.                       3
  17. When prompted to do so, remove and insert diskettes. After Diskette 6, you
3 4.  Display adapters with the TSENG W32p Rev A chip set   3
      will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then reinsert
3    do not support this resolution.                       3
      Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screenAfter you remove
3 5. This resolution is supported only for XGA-2.         3
      Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo screen, followed by
3 6. Cirrus adapters require more than 2MB of video memory 3
      the System Configuration screen.
3    for this resolution.                                 3
  18. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
      hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
 
      Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
Installing a Video Device Driver    239/2
      If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
 
      click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
All display adapters must tailor their output to the capabilities of the display
      will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
attached to the systemUnfortunately, there is no standard for communicating
      hardware deviceIf you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
the capabilities of the display to the display adapter. The result is that many
       refer to the documentation that came with itIf you need information
display adapters supply a program to define and select the type of display
      about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
attached to the systemOS/2 responds to this situation by permitting the DOS
       display, refer to Video Procedures.
display selection utilities provided by the manufacturers to be used to properly
      Follow the instructions on each screen.  Click on Help if you need more
configure the systemOS/2 then configures the system in the same manner each
      information about any screen you see.
time your computer is started.
      If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
If no display is specified, many display adapters make an assumption about the
      OK.
type of display attached to the systemThis default setting is designed to
      A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
work with the widest range of displays possible; therefore, it is the safest
      (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
choice.
      program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
During this installation procedure, you will be asked to make a decision about
  19. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
whether you want to use the defaults for your display type, or use the display
      or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
adapter utility program provided by the manufacturer of the adapter.  You should
      names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
use the utility program provided by the manufacturer if any of the following
        o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
apply:
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
  o  Your display adapter is produced by Diamond Computer Systems, Inc..
          LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
  o  Your display supports non-interlaced operation only.
        o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
  o  Your display does not support VESA standard refresh rates.
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
  o Your display adapter requires software configuration to function properly
          COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.
       in DOS.
          If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
  o You want to configure your system to take advantage of the full refresh
          install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
       capabilities of your display.
          and Installation screen appears.
Note:  Using the utility program provided by the manufacturer requires exact
  20. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
knowledge about the capabilities of your display.  If the wrong display type is
       Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration on the
selected, your system might not start.
      menu bar at the top of the screen.  Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
If you have an SVGA adapter in your system, you must restore it to work in VGA
      during Installation for more information.
mode before you can use the following instructions to install a different
  21. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
adapter in your system. See Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter
      features you want to install.  You will notice that some features have a
for instructions.
      check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
To install a new display adapter or video device driver:
      The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
  1. Install the display adapter using the manufacturer's instructions.
      right of the feature. Follow these steps:
  2. Restart your system.
        a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
  3. Open OS/2 System.
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
  4. Open System Setup.
        b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
  5. Open Selective Install.
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
  6. Select Primary Display or Secondary Display from the System Configuration
        c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
      window.
  22. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
      Note: A secondary display is used for only DOS and full-screen sessions.
      want to selectThen click on OK.
      Even if two displays are attached to the system only one is active at a
  23. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen.  If you are installing
      time.
      from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
  7. Select the display driver that you want from the list provided.  (If you
      including one or more Printer Driver diskettesAfter inserting each
       are unsure of which driver to choose, select Help.)
      diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
  8. Select OK.
  24. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
  9. Follow the instructions on the screen.
      Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the
 
      screen; click on Help if you need more information.
Video Settings    240/2
  25. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
 
      of the OS/2 installation.
To change video settings for a program:
  26. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
  1. Point to the program icon.
      and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press Enter.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  27. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
  3. Select Settings.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
  4. Select the Session tab.
your Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
  5. Select the DOS settings or WIN-OS/2 push button.
  transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
  6. Change the settings (See the online documentation for detailed a
      explanation of these settings).
  7. Select the Save push button.
  8. Close the Settings notebook.
 
  SVGA Procedures    241/2+
 
The following procedures provide instructions for enabling and disabling SVGA
after OS/2 is installed.
 
  Enabling SVGA in WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen Sessions    242/3
 
You can enable WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions to run in high-resolution (1024 x
768) mode while the OS/2 Desktop runs in VGA mode.
To enable WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions for SVGA:
Note:  Follow the instructions very carefully.  Otherwise, you could cause your
WIN-OS/2 sessions to become inoperable.
  1. Use Selective Install to install VGA (640 x 480) support for OS/2.
  2. Back up the SYSTEM.INI and WIN.INI files as follows:
        a. Open OS/2 System.
        b. Open Command Prompts.
        c. Open OS/2 Full Screen.
        d. At the C prompt, do the following:
            o Type: CD\OS2\MDOS\WINOS2 and press Enter.
            o  Type: COPY WIN.INI WIN.BAK and press Enter.
            o  Type: COPY SYSTEM.INI SYSTEM.BAK and press Enter.
  3. Check the OS2\MDOS\WINOS2\SYSTEM directory for the desired high-resolution
      display device driver.
        o  If the device driver is already on the system, go to step 4.
        o  If the device driver is not found, use your OS/2 or Windows
          installation disk to copy the driver to the \OS2\MDOS\WINOS2\SYSTEM
          directory.
          For example, to use the OS/2 diskettes and install the 8514.DRV
          high-resolution device driver:
            a. Search the OS/2 installation diskettes for the WIN8514 and
                *F.FON files and then do the following:
                  -  DIR A:WIN8514 and press Enter
                  -  DIR A:*F.FON and press Enter
                    After you find the files, you have to unpack them.  The
                    files are packed with their standard target directory coded
                    into the packed file.
            b. Copy the file to the system disk in the proper directory, using
                the UNPACK utility program:
                  -  Type UNPACK A:WIN8514 and press Enter.
                  -  Type UNPACK A:*F.FON and press Enter.
                    The SVGA driver and font files are now unpacked and in the
                    correct directory.
  4. Edit the SYSTEM.INI file and find the following line:
      FDISPLAY.DRV=VGA.DRV
      This line specifies the device driver used in WIN-OS/2 full-screen
      sessions.
      Note:  DISPLAY.DRV is the driver used for Microsoft Windows. FDISPLAY.DRV
      is the driver used for WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions. SDISPLAY.DRV is the
      driver used for WIN-OS/2 windowed sessions.
  5. Change this line to point to the high-resolution device driver that was
      unloaded in the steps above.  In this example, the device driver is
      8514.DRV.
      Note:  To install a different driver, substitute the name of your driver
      in the statement: FDISPLAY.DRV=8514.DRV
      The modified line should look like the following:
      FDISPLAY.DRV=8514.DRV
  6. Change the SYSTEM.INI font entries:
        o  In SYSTEM.INI, these entries are:
          FIXEDFON.FON=VGAFIX.FON
          OEMFONTS.FON=VGAOEM.FON
          FONTS.FON=VGASYS.FON
        o  For 8514/A, these entries must be changed to:
          FIXEDFON.FON=8514FIX.FON
          OEMFONTS.FON=8514OEM.FON
          FONTS.FON=8514SYS.FON
        o  Save the changes to the SYSTEM.INI file.
  7. Change the WIN.INI font entries
        o  In WIN.INI, the entries are:
          SYMBOL 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SYMBOLE.FON
          MS SANS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SSERIFE.FON
          MS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SERIFE.FON
          SMALL FONTS (VGA RES)=SMALLE.FON
          COURIER 10,12,15 (VGA RES)=COURE.FON
        o  For 8514/A, these entries must be changed to:
          SYMBOL 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SYMBOLG.FON
          MS SANS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SSERIFG.FON
          MS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SERIFG.FON
          SMALL FONTS (8514 RES)=SMALLG.FON
          COURIER 10,12,15 (8514 RES)=COURG.FON
        o  Save the changes to the SYSTEM.INI file.
The system is ready to run Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions
high-resolution mode.


  Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter   243/3
  Configuring Your Boot Manager Menu   261/2+


Because SVGA adapters are only compatible at the VGA level, the system must be
After installing OS/2 (and the Boot Manager), you can go back and make changes
restored to VGA in order to safely install a different display adapter.
to the Boot Manager menu, such as how long the menu should be displayed and how
To set your system back to VGA:
information on the menu should appear. To do so, follow these steps:
   1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
   1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
      to restart it.
  2. Open Drive.
   2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
   3. Press mouse button 2 to display a pop-up menu.
      screen, press Alt+F1.
  4. Select Create partition.
   3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
   5. At the Fixed Disk Utility screen, make any changes you want to the
Your display adapter is restored and can work in VGA mode.  If you want to
      setting. Select Help if you need more information.
install a new display adapter or video device driver, complete the steps under
  Installing a Video Device Driver.


  Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection   244/3
  Setting the Menu Display Time   262/3


If you performed the steps in Installing a Video Device Driver and selected an
To indicate how long you want the Boot Manager startup menu displayed when you
incorrect display driver you can recover by restoring to VGA mode.
start your system, follow these steps:
To restore to VGA mode:
   1. From the Startup Values menu, you can do one of the following:
   1. Turn on the computer. If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
        o If you want the menu displayed for a certain period of time before
      to restart it.
          the default operating system starts, accept the value of Yes.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
        o  If you want the menu to be displayed indefinitely (until you
      screen, press Alt+F1.
          explicitly select a choice from the menu), highlight Timer and press
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
          Enter to change the value to No.
  4. Use Selective Install to install support for another high-resolution
   2. If you accepted the value of Yes, indicate how long you want the menu
      display adapter.  See Installing a Video Device Driver for instructions.
      displayed before the default operating system is started. You can do one
 
      of the following:
Capturing the Display Configuration   245/3
        o Accept the value listed next to Timeout.
 
        o Change the value as follows:
SVGA display and video mode configuration under OS/2 is controlled by the
            a. Select Timeout and press Enter.
SVGADATA.PMI file.  This file can be provided by the display adapter
            b. Type the amount of time (in seconds) that you want the menu
manufacturer or created using the SVGA utility program.
                displayed before the preselected operating system is
The SVGA utility program gets information from the SVGA chip set to set each
                automatically started.
video mode and captures the current state of the display adapter.  This
            c. Press Enter.
information is stored in the SVGADATA.PMI file and used when the system is
started.
Both the SVGA.EXE and SVGADATA.PMI are located in the \OS2 directory.
To create the SVGADATA.PMI file, type one of the following commands at a DOS
command prompt and press Enter.
  SVGA ON          Generates the SVGADATA.PMI file which enables OS/2 SVGA
                  support.
  SVGA ON DOS      Generates PMI information when executed outside the OS/2 DOS
                  environment.  This generates an SVGADATA.DOS file that can be
                  renamed to .PMI and copied to the \OS2 directory. This entry
                  might be required if your SVGA adapter uses DOS device
                  drivers to configure the display. Trident** adapters are an
                  example.
SVGA ON INIT      Generates default display information for some TSENG** and
                  Cirrus Logic** based display adapters.
SVGA OFF          Deletes the SVGADATA.PMI file, disabling OS/2 SVGA support.
SVGA STATUS      Returns your graphics chipset, as it appears to OS/2.
Note:  The SVGA utility program might be affected by video configuration
programs, Terminate Stay Resident programs (TSR), and switches and jumpers on
the display adapter. Configure your video adapter properly before using the
SVGA utility program to create the SVGADATA.PMI file.


  Switching to a Display with Less Capability   246/3
  Setting the Menu Mode   263/3


Switching to a lower capability display after installing high-resolution (SVGA)
You can select either Normal or Advanced for the Boot Manager menu modeIf you
drivers might cause the system to start out of synchronizationFollow this
select Advanced, your Boot Manager menu will include additional information
procedure to switch to a display with less capability:
about your partitions.
  1. Open DOS Full-Screen command prompt.
To change the mode that is currently displayed, follow these steps:
  2. Run the DOS display configuration utility program supplied with your SVGA
   1. Highlight Mode on the Startup Values menu.
      adapter to properly configure your display adapter and display.
   2. Press Enter.
  3. Change to the \OS2 directory on your hard disk.
  When you have finished configuring your Boot Manager menu, press F3.
   4. Type SVGA ON.
   5. Press Enter to start the SVGA utility program.  This utility program saves
      the current state of your video configuration.
  6. Shut down your system.
  7. Restart your system to enable the new display.
  Note:  You can also use these instructions if you start a specific version of
DOS.  Substitute the following step for step 4.  Type SVGA ON DOS and press
Enter.  When the SVGA utility program finishes, type:
RENAME\OS2\SVGADATA.DOS \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI
Press Enter.


  XGA Procedures   247/2+
  Bypassing the Boot Manager Menu   264/2


The following information relates to specific situations with high-resolution
After the Boot Manager is installed, you can use the SETBOOT command if you want
XGA displays.
to restart your computer to a specified drive without going through the Boot
Manager menu.  The SETBOOT command immediately restarts the system.
The parameter for SETBOOT is /IBD:drive, where drive is the letter of a
startable partition.  For example, from the OS/2 command prompt, you can type:
setboot /ibd:e
to restart your system and start the operating system using drive E, without
displaying the Boot Manager menu.
See the Command Reference for more information about the SETBOOT command.  (The
Command Reference is located in the Information folder on your OS/2 Desktop.)


  XGA-2 Display Type Override   248/3
  What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation   265/2


To correctly operate your display, OS/2 needs to determine the type and
The installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most
characteristics of the device by using a display identification number. Some
cases, you will not encounter any problems. However, if you do have problems
displays have the same identification number but different characteristics.  If
either during the installation process or immediately afterwards, refer to
OS/2 does not operate your display at the correct refresh rate or display mode,
Solving Installation Problems.
and you are running an XGA-2 adapter, do the following:
Problems you might encounter include:
   1. Open OS/2 System.
   o  A blank screen after installation.
   2. Open System Setup.
   o  An error message with a number and, sometimes, text.
   3. Open System. The System Settings notebook appears.
   o A hardware device that does not work.  (This problem can occur if you are
  4. Select page 2 of the Screen page.  (You can go to page 2 by selecting the
       using hardware that is not supported by OS/2.)
       right arrow in the lower-right corner of the notebook.)
  5. Select the appropriate display type using the list provided.
      Note:  If an incorrect display type is selected, your display might be
      unusable after you restart your system.
  6. Close the Settings notebook.


  Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection   249/3
  Using a Response File to Install OS/2   266/2+


If you performed the steps in XGA-2 Display Type Override and your display is
This section describes how to use a response file to install OS/2.  It is
not usable, you can revert back to the previous display type.  To erase the
intended primarily for people who will be setting up workstations for others to
display type override information:
use.
  1. Turn on the computerIf the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
      to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
      screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
  4. Change to the C:\XGA$DMQS directory and delete the XGASETUP.PRO file.
      This erases all override information from your system.
  5. Remove the diskette and restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.
      Your display now operates using its default settings.
Note:  If you plan to change or replace your display, first delete the file
XGASETUP.PRO from the XGA$DMQS directory and then turn off the system.  If your
new display does not operate correctly, repeat the preceding procedure.


  Changing Screen Resolution and Number of Colors   250/3
  Understanding Response File Installation   267/3


Note:  You cannot use this procedure if you are using the VGA, 8514, or SVGA
If you have installed previous versions of OS/2 or other operating systems, you
driver.
are familiar with installation procedures that require you to insert and remove
To change the screen resolution or number of colors:
a series of diskettes and answer screen prompts. When you use a response file
  1. Open OS/2 System.
to install, it is not necessary to answer any screen prompts. All the answers
  2. Open System Setup.
are in a response file that you place on installation Diskette 1 The
  3. Open System.
Installation program reads the file from Diskette 1instead of prompting you for
  4. Select the desired resolution and number of colors from the list.
the installation information.
  5. Close the Settings notebook.
  6. Shut down and restart your system to make the new resolution and number of
      colors operational.
Note:  The Microsoft Windows XGA full-screen driver does not support all the
graphic modes handled by the OS/2 PM XGA driver. The full-screen Windows
driver does not support 1024 x 768 x 16 color.  If this mode is selected, the
OS/2 Desktop will run at 1024 x 768 x 16 color, but the Windows full screen
will operate in 1024 x 768 x 256 color mode.


  Laptop LCD or Monochrome Plasma Displays   251/2
  Adding the Sample Response File to Your System   268/3+


Laptop LCDs and computers with monochrome plasma displays use 16 shades of gray
A sample response file is included on the OS/2 installation diskettes.  When you
and operate like VGA displays.
install the operating system, this response file (called SAMPLE.RSP) is placed
Note:  If you run VGA DOS graphics programs on the OS/2 Desktop and your system
in the OS2\INSTALL directory.
does not have VGA support, your Desktop might be corrupted.
The SAMPLE.RSP file and other files needed for a response file installation are
You can optimize the color scheme for gray-scale usage, and also provide a good
not automatically installed on your system if you installed OS/2 using the Easy
set of colors for a VGA Desktop presentation on a laptop LCD or monochrome
Installation methodYou must add these files to your system in order to use
plasma displayTo change the color scheme and create a more readable display
them. Follow these steps:
  image:
   1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
   1. Use your Reference Diskette or hardware Setup program to set your hardware
   2. Open System Setup.
      to VGA color, if possible.
   3. Open Selective Install.  The Software Configuration screen appears.
   2. Open OS/2 System.
   4. Select Optional System Utilities.
   3. Open System Setup.
   5. Select the More push button to the right of Optional System UtilitiesA
   4. Open Scheme Palette.
       window appears with a list of utilities.
   5. Select the monochrome scheme in the right-hand column.
   6. Place a check mark next to Installation Utilities; then select Install.
  6. Close the Scheme Palette.
   7. When prompted to do so, insert the requested installation diskettes.
 
      Select OK when you are done.
Part 5 - Advanced Installation    252/1
 
 
Using Advanced Installation    253/1+
 
This chapter provides examples of installing OS/2 on your computer using the
Advanced Installation method. Advanced Installation is designed for experienced
computer users who want to customize their installation in one or more of the
following ways:
  o Select specific software features of OS/2 to install, rather than the
       preselected group (see Examples 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)
  o  Install OS/2 on a drive or partition other than C (see Examples 1, 2, and
      3)
   o  Install OS/2 in a logical drive (see Examples 1, 2, and 3)
  o  Install OS/2 on a hard disk other than the first disk in the computer (see
      Example 3)
   o  Select the HPFS file system (see step 21 in Example 1)
  o  Install OS/2 so it can be used with Boot Manager (see Examples 1, 2, and
      3)
  o  Install OS/2 on a computer that does not have DOS and Windows on it (see
      Examples 4 and 5)
  o  Install OS/2 in one primary partition and delete all existing information
      on your hard disk (see Example 5)
If you have any problems during the installation, press the F1 key to view the
online help that is available whenever you see F1=Help at the bottom of a
screen. If you have problems with any of your hardware or if you receive error
messages, refer to Solving Installation Problems.


  Planning for a Boot Manager Setup   254/2
  Modifying the Sample Response File   269/4


During Advanced Installation, you will be asked to specify how you want to
After you install the SAMPLE.RSP file on your own system, you can modify the
partition your hard disk.  If you are installing more than one operating system,
SAMPLE.RSP file and use it to install OS/2 on another workstationUse an
you will want to consider setting up multiple partitions to contain themIf
editor (such as the System Editor) to modify the sample response file.
you set up multiple partitions, you must install the Boot Manager feature. The
The following is an excerpt from the sample response file:
Boot Manager helps you manage the selective startup of your operating systems.
*************************************
To find out more about partitioning your hard disk and installing Boot Manager,
*AlternateAdapter
read Setting Up Your Hard Disk. before continuing with the Advanced
*;
Installation. For information about partition sizes, see -- Reference dpart not
* Specifies secondary adapter for two display systems.
found --..
* This should be a lower or equal resolution display since
 
* the highest resolution display will be primary for PM.
Installing the Operating System    255/2+
*
 
* Valid Parms
The sections that follow provide examples of typical installation setups.
*
  o Example 1 shows how to repartition your hard disk to create a Boot Manager
*   0=None (DEFAULT)
      partition, a primary partition for DOS and Windows, and a logical drive
*   1=Other than following (DDINSTAL will handle)
      for OS/2.
*   2=Monochrome /Printer Adapter
  o  Example 2 shows how to preserve an existing partition that already
*   3=Color Graphics Adapter
      contains DOS and Windows, and create a Boot Manager partition and a
*   4=Enhanced Graphics Adapter
      logical drive for OS/2 on a hard disk that has available free space.
*   5=PS/2 Display Adapter
   o  Example 3 shows an installation on a computer with two hard disks.  In
*   6=Video Graphics Adapter
      this example, a Boot Manager partition and a primary partition for DOS and
*   7=8514/A Adapter
      Windows are created on the first hard disk. On the second hard disk, two
*   8=XGA Adapter
      logical drives are created, one to hold data (with drive letter D) and one
*   9=SVGA Adapter
      for OS/2 (with drive letter E).
*************************************
   o  Example 4 and Example 5 show how to install OS/2 on a computer that has no
AlternateAdapter=0
      other operating systems already installed on it.  The Boot Manager is not
      installed in these installation examples.
      Note:  If you install OS/2 on a computer without Windows, you will not be
      able to use Windows programs.
To make the installation as easy as possible, select the example that most
closely resembles your system and the way you want to customize it.  If you
need more detailed explanations of the Boot Manager, the FDISK utility, the
file systems available in OS/2, or hard disk partitioning, please read Setting
Up Your Hard Disk.
Note:  Be sure you have read As You Begin before installing OS/2.


  Example 1    256/3
  Copying the Response File to Diskette 1    270/3


Creating a Boot Manager Partition, a Primary Partition for DOS and Windows, and
Use the following steps to make changes to the sample response file. After
a Logical Drive for OS/2 and Data
making the changes, you will copy the file to a copy of Diskette 1.  You must
In the following example, a 120MB hard disk that contains one primary partition
also make some modifications to the copy of Diskette 1to make room on it for the
with DOS and Windows in it will be deleted and replaced with the following
response file.
partitions:
  1. Install OS/2 on a computer.
   o  A 1MB Boot Manager partition
  2. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
   A 20MB primary partition for DOS and Windows (drive C)
  3. Open Command Prompts.
   o  A 99MB logical drive for OS/2 and data (drive D)
   4. Open OS/2 Window.
Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, you can
   5. Insert Diskette 1into drive A.
  customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
   6. Type diskcopy a: a: and press Enter.
to be.  Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
  7. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert a blank,
hard disk.
      formatted diskette. (This diskette will be used to make a copy of
   1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
      Diskette 1)
       existing operating system to back up the data.)
   8. Make sure the copy of Diskette 1is in drive A.  Then type del a:\mouse.sys
   2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
       and press Enter.
  3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.  If you are installing OS/2
   9. Type del a:\sysinst2.exe and press Enter.
      from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
  10. If you are installing from a CD, this step is not necessary; go to step
  4. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
      10.  If you are installing from diskettes, type del a:\bundle and press
       to restart it.
      Enter.
  5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
  11. To edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the copy of Diskette 1 type e a:\config.sys
       press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
       and press Enter.
       asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
  12. Change the following statement from:
  6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
       SET OS2_SHELL=SYSINST2.EXE to the following:
       Then press Enter.
       SET OS2_SHELL=RSPINST.EXE A:\OS2SE30.RS                                P
  7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
  13. Delete the following statement from the CONFIG.SYS file:
       specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
       DEVICE=MOUSE.SYS
  8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
  14. Save and close the CONFIG.SYS file. At the prompt, type the following and
       continue with the installation.
       press Enter after each command:
  9. Delete the existing partition (which you have backed up):
      CD\OS2\INSTALL
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
       COPY SAMPLE.RSP OS2SE30.RSP
        b. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete.
  15. Use an editor (such as the System Editor) to make your changes to the
        c. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
      response file so you can use it for installing OS/2. Then save and close
        d. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
      the file.
        e. Repeat steps a through d for any other partitions you want to delete
  16. At the prompt, type the following and press Enter after each command:
   10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
      COPY OS2SE30.RSP A:
        a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
      COPY C:\RSPINST.EXE A:\
        b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
   17. Remove the copy of Diskette 1from drive A.
        c. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
  18. If you have a non-Micro Channel computer, go to step 20. f you have a
  11. Create the DOS and Windows primary partition:
      Micro Channel computer and the Reference Diskette contains ABIOS.SYS and
         a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
      *.BIO files, you will also need to modify the Installation Diskette that
         b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
      came with OS/2. Follow these steps:
         c. Type the size of the primary partition (in this example, 20) and
         a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
           press Enter.
         b. Type diskcopy a: a: and press Enter.
        d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
         c. When prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette from drive A
        e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
           and insert a blank, formatted diskette. Then press Enter. This makes
         f. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
          a copy of the Installation Diskette, which you will use in the next
        g. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
          step.
         h. Type a name for this partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and press
         d. Make sure the copy you just made of the Installation Diskette is in
           Enter.
          drive A. Type the following and press Enter after each command:
  12. Create the logical drive for OS/2 and your data:
          DEL A:\*.BIO
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
          DEL A:\ABIOS.SYS
         b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
         e. Remove the copy of the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert
        c. Accept the size of the logical drive (in this example, 99) by
           the Reference Diskette.
           pressing Enter.
        f. Type the following and press Enter after each command:
          Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
          COPY A:\*.BIO C:\
           on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 99), you would also
          COPY A:\ABIOS.SYS C:\
           have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
         g. Remove the Reference Diskette from drive A and insert the copy of the
           of free space or at the start of free space.
           Installation DisketteType the following and press Enter after each
        d. Select Extended Logical Driveand press Enter.
           command:
        e. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
           COPY C:\*.BIO A:\
        f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
           COPY C:\ABIOS.SYS A:\
         g. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS2/DATA) and press
          Note:  This Installation Diskette copy is now system-specific. You
           Enter.
          will need to create a modified Installation Diskette for each type of
   13. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
          system on which you are installing OS/2.
       startup time):
         h. Use this copy of the Installation Diskette during the installation
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS2/DATA line (or whatever name
           process.
          you have given the logical drive) and press Enter.
   19. When prompted for Diskette 1during the installation, insert the modified
        b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
       copy you made of Diskette 1and press Enter.
        c. Select Default and press Enter. The name you typed for the logical
      From this point on, the Installation program will prompt only for the
          drive will appear next to Default.
      insertion of diskettes.  No other installation actions are necessary.
          Note: If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
  20. When prompted to insert Diskette 1again, insert the original Diskette
          after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
      1into drive A.
          Display Time now. Then continue with step d.
  Response files can be used to install the same set of options on multiple
        d. Press F3.
workstationsHowever, be sure that the workstations are set up with the same
  14. Exit the FDISK screen:
set of options and hardware.
        a. Press F3.
 
        b. Press any key to remove the message box.
Installing OS/2 from a Local Area Network Source    271/2
        c. Select Save and exit and press Enter.
 
        d. When a message appears confirming that the hard disk partitioning is
You can use a response file to direct the installation from a source other than
          complete, remove Diskette 1from drive A. Do not insert the
a diskette in drive A. For example, in a local area network (LAN), you could
          Installation DisketteContinue with step 15.
direct the installation to a drive on the serverThis type of installation
  15. Install DOS and Windows:
requires additional software (such as a LAN support product).
        a. Insert the DOS installation diskette into drive A, and then press
Be aware of the following requirements for remote installation of OS/2:
          Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
  o  The RAM requirements vary from 6MB to 10MB or more, depending on the
         b. Follow the instructions that came with DOS to install it. If prompted
      installation variables.
           to do so during the DOS installation, format the partition and
         -  Redirected remote installation requires more RAM than disk
          logical drive you created in the previous steps.
           installation because the SWAPPER.DAT file is not active.
         c. After DOS is installed, the Boot Manager menu appears. Select the DOS
         -  If you are doing a redirected remote installation without CID
           partition and press Enter.
           (configuration, installation, and distribution), you need only about
         d. Install Windows in the primary partition you created for it (in this
          6MB of RAM.
           example, it is drive C)Follow the installation instructions that
         -  If you are using CID, the RAM requirements usually range from 6MB to
          came with Windows.
           8MB.
          Note:  If you receive a message about the Windows swapper file, you
        - If you are using a process on top of CID, such as NVDM/2, 8MB to 10MB
           should avoid putting the swapper file in the same partition or
           (or more) might be requiredThe main variable with CID is the size
          logical drive as OS/2However, if you put the Windows swapper file
           of the REXX procedure and which dynamic link libraries it pulls in.
           in the same partition or logical drive as OS/2, make sure you leave
          With remote installation, the LAN connection utility programs are the
           enough free space for OS/2, and create a temporary Windows swapper
          main variables.  The version of OS/2 that you are installing is
          file.
           another variable.
  16. Continue the OS/2 installation:
  o  During remote installation, the SWAPPER.DAT file is not active because the
        a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A and press Ctrl+Alt+Del
      disk partition containing the active swapper file cannot be formatted
          to restart your computer.
      during installation. The SWAPPER.DAT file can be made active, but the
        b. When the IBM logo screen appears, remove the Installation Diskette
      disk partition has to be a local partition and it has to be preformatted.
          and insert Diskette 1into drive A.  Then press Enter.
      To activate the SWAPPER.DAT file, you must edit the CONFIG.SYS file. To do
        c. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option
      this, replace the existing MEMMAN=NOSWAP statement with the following:
          2, specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
      MEMMAN=SWAP,PROTECT
        d. When the warning screen appears, press Enter to continue.
      SWAPPATH=D:\ 2048 4096
  17. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
  o  Personal computers might require more RAM because the network drivers
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
      might have to store more data in the RAM buffers until the processor is
        b. Highlight the OS2/DATA line (or whatever name you have given the
      able to handle the data.
          logical drive) and press Enter.
For more information, refer to the following IBM publications:
        c. Select Set installable and press Enter.
      OS/2 Version 2.1 Remote Installation and Maintenance
        d. Press F3 to exit the FDISK screen.
      (GG24-3780)
  18. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
      NTS/2 Redirected Installation and Configuration Guide (S96F-8488)
      Accept the drive, and press Enter(In this example, the screen will show
      NTS/2 LAN Adapter and Protocol Support Configuration Guide (S96F-8489)
      drive D as the selected drive.)
      Automated Installation for CID-Enabled OS/2 2.x (GG24-3783)
  19. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
      Automated Installation for CID-Enabled Extended Services, LAN Server V3.0
      2.  Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
      and Network Transport Services/2 (GG24-3781)
      any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
 
  20. When a screen appears asking if you want to format the OS/2 partition, do
Setting Up Your Hard Disk    272/1+
      one of the following:
 
        o  Select Do not format the partition if you want to use the FAT file
This chapter provides a detailed explanation of the Boot Manager feature
          system.  Then press EnterContinue with step 22.
available in OS/2, as well as information about hard disk partitioning and the
        o  Select Format the partition if you want to use the HPFS file system.
FDISK utility programThis chapter will help you plan the setup of your hard
          Then press Enter.  Continue with step 21.
disk before you begin installing OS/2.
          Refer to Selecting a File System for an explanation of the file
In addition, this chapter provides detailed descriptions of some of the
          systems.
installation tasks that are outlined in Using Advanced Installation. If you want
  21. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
more information about an Advanced Installation task as you are installing,
      with which you want to format the OS/2 logical drive.
refer to the descriptions in this chapter.
  22. Follow the instructions on the screenIf you are installing from
 
      diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
What Is the Boot Manager?    273/2
      installation progresses.
 
      After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
When you install multiple operating systems on your computer, you can use the
      and then reinsert Diskette 1  Follow the instructions on the screen.
Boot Manager feature to manage the selective startup of those systemsThe Boot
      After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
Manager startup menu lets you select which operating system you want to be
       screen, followed by the System Configuration screen:
active each time you start your system.
  23. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
The following is an example of what the Boot Manager startup menu would look
       hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
like if you installed the Boot Manager and three operating systems. This menu
       Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
would be displayed each time you started your computer, so that you could select
       If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
which operating system should start.
      click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
You use the FDISK utility program during the installation of OS/2 to install the
      will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
Boot Manager feature. FDISK is a program supplied with OS/2 that can be used to
      hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
manage such tasks as creating and deleting the partitions on your hard disk.
      refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
Partitions are divisions you create on your hard disk to use as separate storage
      about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
areas.
      display, refer to Video Procedures
The following is a brief list of the steps you follow to set up your hard disk
      Follow the instructions on each screen.  Click on Help if you need more
for multiple operating systems.
      information about any screen you see.
  o  You install the Boot Manager in its own partition (usually 1MB in size).
      If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
  o  You then create partitions for any operating systems (including OS/2) you
      OK.
       are going to install.
      A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
  o  Next, you install the other operating systems in the partitions
      (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
      you created for them.
      program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
       (If you want OS/2 to work with DOS and Windows, you must install DOS and
  24. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
       Windows first. Otherwise, most operating systems can be installed after
      or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
       installing OS/2.)
      names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
  o  Finally, you install the OS/2 operating system.
        o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
 
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
  Hard Disk Partitioning    274/2+
          LPT3 button.  Then press Enter.
 
        o If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
A hard disk can be partitioned in several different ways. For example, your hard
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
disk can have one partition that takes up the entire hard disk. However, if you
          COM3, or COM4 buttonThen press Enter.
are going to install multiple operating systems on your hard disk (and install
          If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
the Boot Manager feature), you must separate the hard disk into multiple
          install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
partitions.
          and Installation screen appears:
During the Advanced installation, you will be asked how you want your partitions
  25. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
set up. The default choice is to set up one partition (if you are installing on
      Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration in the
a hard disk with no data) or to preserve the setup of an existing hard disk.  If
      menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
you choose to specify your own partition, the FDISK screen is displayed.
      during Installation for more information.
From the FDISK screen, you specify the number and type of partitions that you
  26. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
want created. Your hard disk can be separated into a maximum of four primary
      features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a
partitions. You can create primary partitions, which are typically used for
      check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
operating systems.
      The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
Note: If a partition is going to contain an operating system, the partition
      right of the feature.
must be within the first 1024 cylinders.
      Follow these steps:
You can also create logical drives in an area of the hard disk that is outside
        a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
the primary partitionsThis area is known as the extended partition. The
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
logical drives within the extended partition are typically used to hold programs
        b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
and data.
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
You can have four primary partitions or three primary partitions and one
        c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
extended partition. If you are going to install multiple operating systems on
  27. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
your hard disk, you must create one primary partition to contain the programs
      want to select. Then click on OK.
that manage the startup of multiple operating systems. (This partition is
  28. Follow the instructions that appear on each screenIf you are installing
referred to as the Boot Manager partition.)
      from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
After the Boot Manager partition is created, you can create up to three
      including one or more Printer Driver diskettesAfter inserting each
additional primary partitions (to hold three operating systems).
      diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
An important aspect of primary partitions is the fact that, at any moment in
  29. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
time, only one of the primary partitions is active.  When a given primary
      Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the
partition is active, any other primary partitions on the same physical disk
      screen; click on Help if you need more information.
cannot be accessed. Therefore, the operating system in one primary partition
  30. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
cannot access the data in another primary partition on the same physical disk.
      of the OS/2 installation.
Another way of subdividing your hard disk is to create logical drives within an
  31. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one
extended partition. Logical drives are typically used to hold programs and data.
      of the following:
However, you can also install OS/2 in a logical drive.
        o  If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
The extended partition takes the place of one of the primary partitions on your
            a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
hard diskIn other words, if you create logical drives within an extended
            b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
partition, your hard disk can contain only three primary partitions.
            c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
If two logical drives have been set aside for dataThat data can be shared by
                requested.
all the operating systems (provided the file system formats of the logical
        o  If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
drives are compatible with the operating systems).
            a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
All of the logical drives exist within one partition-the extended partition.
            b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
You don't explicitly create the extended partition. The extended partition is
            c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
created the first time you create a logical (non-primary) drive.
                type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.
One of the differences between a logical drive and a primary partition is that
                For example:
each logical drive is assigned a unique drive letter.  However, all primary
                e:\winsetup
partitions on a hard disk share the same drive letter. (On the first hard disk
                where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup
in your system, the primary partitions share drive C). This means that only one
                is the directory that contains the Windows files.
primary partition on a hard disk can be accessed at one time. (Note that the
  32. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and press Enter.
Boot Manager partition is different from other primary partitions because it is
  33. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
never assigned a drive letter.)
      and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press Enter.
If you want OS/2 to be able to access the data in the partition of another
  34. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
operating system (for example, the DOS partition), install OS/2  in a logical
  Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
drive.
your DesktopThe tutorial also provides information to help you make the
Notice the drive letter assignments in this illustration. The operating system
  transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
that is active when you start the system performs a process known as drive
mapping, in which partitions and logical drives are assigned drive letters. All
the primary partitions are mapped first and all logical drives within extended
partitions are assigned subsequent drive letters (up through Z).
Important:  Only one primary partition per hard disk can be active at a time.
So, only one primary partition is actually assigned the letter C at any one
time. The other primary partitions are not mapped.
An operating system maps only those drives with a format type that it supports.
For example, DOS does not support the installable file system (IFS) format.
(The High Performance File System is an example of an IFS format.) Therefore,
any partition or logical drive that is formatted with IFS is not mapped by DOS
and is not assigned a drive letter.
In the following figure, DOS is active in a primary partition. (The other
primary partitions are not mapped.) Drive D is formatted for the File
Allocation Table (FAT) file system, which DOS recognizesHowever, the next
drive is formatted with a file system that DOS does not recognize.  Therefore,
DOS ignores this drive. Some versions of DOS (such as DOS Version 5.0) will
recognize the last partition on the hard disk (in this example) and assign it
the letter E.  In other versions of DOS, no drives beyond the HPFS drive are
recognized.  Therefore, no data in those partitions can be used by DOS.
Because of the problems that can result when drives are remapped, you should
avoid deleting logical drives that exist in the middle of your hard disk.  For
example, if you were to delete a logical drive from the middle of your disk, the
subsequent drives would be remapped. (Drive F would become drive E, and so on.)
Problems would result if any programs refer to the former drive letter.
The important thing to remember when you are setting up your system is that only
one primary partition can be accessible (active) on each hard disk at any system
startup. On the other hand, all the logical drives within the extended partition
are accessible (provided their file system formats are compatible with the
starting operating system). For example, suppose you had DOS 5.0 in one primary
partition and OS/2 in another primary partition.  One of your logical drives is
formatted for FAT and contains a variety of DOS programs. You could start the
DOS programs from either of the primary partitions.
It is also important to understand what happens to the drive mapping if you add
a hard disk after you install OS/2.  The logical drives on your existing hard
disk will be remapped if your second hard disk has a primary partition on it.
Now, assume that you add a second hard disk to your system. The primary
partition of that second hard disk will be assigned D. The logical drives of
your first hard disk will be remapped.  The existing logical drive D becomes E,
E becomes F, and so forth.
Because OS/2 is now in the logical drive assigned as E, all references to the
drive letter (for example, statements in your CONFIG.SYS and INI files) will
have to change.  For this reason, it is strongly recommended that you place only
logical drives on the hard disk that you are adding.


  Example 2   257/3
  Planning for a Boot Manager Setup   275/3


Creating a Boot Manager Partition, Keeping an Existing Primary Partition for DOS
When you are planning your Boot Manager setup, be aware of the following:
and Windows (without Repartitioning), and Creating Logical Drives for OS/2 and
  o  Use primary partitions for DOS systems or versions of the OS/2 operating
Data
      system prior to 2.0.
In this example, a hard disk of 120MB currently consists of a primary partition
  o  To prevent the loss of usable disk space, create all primary partitions
of 40MB (containing DOS and Windows) and a logical drive of 80MB (which might
      contiguously, at the beginning or end of the disk free space area.
contain data).  The DOS/Windows primary partition (drive C) will be preserved,
  o  Put all installable file systems (such as the High Performance File
but the logical drive will be deleted and replaced by:
      System) at the end of the disk configuration.
   o  A 1MB Boot Manager partition
  o Be aware of specific operating-system restrictions on the hard disk . For
  o  A 39MB logical drive for data (drive D)
      example, to run properly, DOS 3.3 must be installed in a primary partition
  o  A 40MB logical drive for OS/2 (drive E)
      that is within the first 32MB of the hard disk.
In this example, you will create free space on your hard disk and then put the
   o  If you are installing a primary partition for DOS and you intend to load
Boot Manager partition at the end of the free space. Of course, you can
      that version of DOS into a DOS session of OS/2, you will need to change
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
      the DOS CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files. (You do this after you finish
  to be.  Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on the
      installing the operating systems.) Refer to specific DOS version in the
drive you are repartitioning.
      starting topic of the Master Help Index. (The Master Help Index is
  1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing logical drive. (Use
      displayed on your screen after the OS/2 operating system is installed.)
       your existing operating system to back up the data.)
  o You can install both DOS and a version of the OS/2 operating system in the
  2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
      same primary partition if you want to use the Dual Boot feature within
  3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.  If you are installing OS/2
       your Boot Manager setup. However, if DOS and OS/2 1.3 are in the primary
       from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
       partition, you will have to copy the BOOT.COM file from the OS/2 partition
   4. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
      to the primary partition after you install OS/2.
       to restart it.
   o  If you are using the IBM DOS 5.00 Upgrade to update your DOS 3.3 or DOS
  5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1  Then
       4.0 system, you should be aware that some versions of the upgrade will not
       press Enter.   As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
      recognize the DOS partition unless it is the only partition on the hard
      asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
       disk. You might have to do the following:
  6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
        1. Make sure that the DOS partition is the only primary partition on
      Then press Enter.
          your hard disk.
  7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
        2. Install the DOS 5.00 Upgrade.
      specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
        3. Add the Boot Manager partition and install OS/2.
  8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
  o  If you have a system with a VESA SUPER I/O controller and two disk drives,
       continue with the installation.
       the system will not start DOS from the Boot Manager menu. Instead, it
  9. Delete the existing logical drive (which you have backed up):
      will display a non-system disk or disk error message. For more
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
      information on this message, check the VESA controller documentation or
        b. Highlight the line that contains information about the logical drive
      contact the manufacturer.
          you are going to delete.  Then press Enter.
 
        c. Select Delete partition from the Options menu and press Enter.
The FDISK Utility Program    276/2+
  10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
 
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
When you install OS/2 with the Advanced Installation method, yo          u use
        b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
the FDISK utility program to install the Boot Manager feature and to set up the
        c. Select Create at End of Free Space and press Enter.
partitions on your hard disk. During Advanced Installation, the FDISK screen
  11. Create the first logical drive (for data):
appears so that you can see how the partitions are currently set up on your
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
system.
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
 
        c. Type the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 39) and
The Options Menu    277/3
          press Enter.
 
        d. Select Extended Logical Driveand press Enter.
When you press the Enter key from the FDISK screen, the Options menu appears.
        e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
The following list describes each of the choices on the Options menu. Some of
  12. Create the second logical drive (for OS/2):
the choices are available only under certain conditions. (They appear in black
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
on the menu.)  If you try to select an unavailable choice, the system will
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
respond with a warning beep.
        c. Accept the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 40 )
Install Boot Manager This choice is used only once--when you create the
          by pressing Enter.
partition for the Boot Manager.  It is unavailable thereafter.
          Note: If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
Create partition This choice is used to create primary partitions and logical
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 40), you would also
drives within the extended partition.  You can use this choice whenever free
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
  space is available on the hard disk.
          of free space or at the start of free space.
  Add to Boot Manager menu This choice is used to add the name of a partition or
        d. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
logical drive to the Boot Manager startup menu.  You should use this choice for
        e. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
any operating system that you want to be able to select when you start the
        f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
system.  When you select this choice, the New Name window is displayed. You use
        g. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS/2) and press
the New Name window to assign a meaningful name to the partition or logical
          Enter.
drive.
  13. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
Change partition name This choice is used to change the name that you have
      startup time):
previously assigned to a partition or logical drive.
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
Assign C: partition This choice is used to specify which primary partition you
          have given this logical drive) and press Enter.
want to be active (when more than one primary partition is installed on your
        b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
system). The placement of the drive letter (C) tells you which primary
        c. Select Default and press Enter. The name you typed for the OS/2
partition will be visible (or accessible) after you restart the system.
          logical drive will appear next to Default.
Set startup values This choice is used to specify the actions of the Boot
          Note: If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
Manager startup menu. For example, with Set startup values, you can specify
          after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
  how long you want the Boot Manager menu to be displayed before the default
          Display Time Then continue with step d.
operating system is started. You can also specify which operating system you
        d. Press F3.
  want as the default.
  14. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
Remove from Boot Manager menu This choice is used to delete a name from the
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
Boot Manager startup menu.  When you delete the name, you can no longer select
          have given this logical drive) and press Enter.
the operating system associated with that name from the Boot Manager startup
        b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
menu.
  15. Add a name for the DOS/Windows partition to the Boot Manager startup menu:
Delete partition This choice is used to delete information about a primary
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the line that contains information
partition or logical drive. After you exit from FDISK, all the data in the
          about the DOS/Windows partition.
partition or logical drive is deleted. (If you want to save any of the data in
        b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
a partition, be sure to back up the data be fore deleting the partition.)
        c. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
Set installable This choice is used to mark a partition or logical drive as the
        d. Type a name for this partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and press
target for installation.  For example, during the installation of OS/2, you set
          Enter.
one primary partition (or logical drive) as installable. (This partition or
  16. Exit the FDISK screen:
drive is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
        a. Press F3.
After you install the operating system, the status of this partition will
        b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
change from Installable to Bootable.
  17. Continue with the installation. You will be asked to reinsert the
If you use FDISK after the OS/2 installation (in preparation for installing
      Installation Diskette and Diskette 1 Follow the messages on the screen.
other operating systems), you can mark only primary partitions on the first
  18. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
hard disk as installable.
      Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen will show
  Any partition that is set installable must reside within the first 1024
      drive E as the selected drive.)
  cylinders of the hard disk. In addition, if you have more than two hard disk
  19. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
drives, be aware that some adapter manufacturers support the booting of
      2. Then press Enter(If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
partitions on the first two hard disk drives only.
      any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
Also note that some SCSI drives that use removable media cannot be partitioned.
  20. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
Make startable This choice is used to determine which primary partition is
      want to use for your OS/2 drive.  (Refer to Selecting a File System)
  activated when you start your systemWhen you install the Boot Manager, it is
  21. Follow the instructions on the screen.  If you are installing from
automatically marked as Startable. This means that the Boot Manager is in
      diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
control when you start your system.  Only one primary partition on the first
      installation progresses.
hard disk can be made startable.  If you set any other primary partition
      After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
startable, the Boot Manager startup menu will not appear when you start the
      and then reinsert Diskette 1  Follow the instructions on the screen.
system.
      After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
 
      screen, followed by the System Configuration screen.
Creating a Boot Manager Setup    278/2+
  22. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
 
      hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
The following sections describe in detail how to delete and create partitions,
      Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
how and why to make selections from the Options menu, and how to specify options
      If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
for how the Boot Manager will start up. Using Advanced Installation provides
      click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.  A screen
quick procedures you can follow to perform these actions.  You can refer to the
      will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
sections here if you need more detailed information.
      hardware device.  If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
 
      refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
Deleting Existing Partitions    279/3
      about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
 
      display, refer Video Procedures.
To set up your system for installation, you must make sure there is enough room
      Follow the instructions on each screen.   Click on Help if you need more
on your hard disk to accommodate the desired partitions. If you use the Advanced
      information about any screen you see.
Installation method to install OS/2,
      If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
it might be necessary for you to delete some or
      OK.
all of the existing partitions on your hard disk.
      A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
For example, if your hard disk currently has only one partition that takes up
      (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
the entire hard disk and you want to put OS/2 in its own partition, you must
       program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
delete the existing partition. However, if your hard disk has ample free space
  23. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
for OS/2, you can keep one or more existing partitions and add to them.
      or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
Important:  All information you want to save must be backed up. Changing the
      namesThen indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
size of a partition deletes all information in that partition, and the entire
        o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
operating system must be reinstalled when the new partition is created.
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
To delete an existing partition, you would follow these steps:
          LPT3 button. Then press Enter.
  1. On the FDISK screen, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight the
        o If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
       partition you want to delete.
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
          COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.
  3. Select Delete partition and press EnterThe information about that
          If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
      partition is deleted, and the words Free Space appear in the space
          install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2
      formerly occupied by the partition information.
          Setup and Installation screen appears.
  4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for any other partitions you want to delete.
  24. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
  After deleting the partitions on your hard disk, you must create the Boot
  25. Click on Format on the pull-down menu.  Then indicate which file system
  Manager partition.
       you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold your data
 
       (in this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to Selecting a File
Creating the Boot Manager Partition    280/3
       System for an explanation of the file systems. Click on Format when you
 
       are done.
During the Advanced Installation method, you must create a Boot Manager
  26. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
partition.  To create this partition, follow these steps:
  27. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
  1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted on the FDISK screen.
      Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration on the
      If it is not, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight it.
      menu bar at the top of the screen.  Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
      during Installation for more information.
  3. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
  28. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
  4. Specify whether the Boot Manager partition should be at the beginning or
      features you want to install.  You will notice that some features have a
       at the end of the available free space on the hard disk.
      check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
       Note:  The only restriction on the placement of the Boot Manager partition
      The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
       is that it be within the first 1024 cylinders of the first hard disk.
      right of the feature.
       Typically, the first 1024 cylinders is equal to 1GB (gigabyte), or 1024MB.
      Follow these steps:
After creating the Boot Manager partition, you can create any other partitions
        a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
you need to install OS/2 and the other operating systems you want to use on
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
  your computer.
        b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
        c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
  29. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
      want to select.  Then click on OK.
  30. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen.  If you are installing
      from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
      including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.  After inserting each
      diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
  31. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
      Configuration/Selection Utility screen.  Follow the instructions on the
      screen; click on Help if you need more information.
  32. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
      of the OS/2 installation.
  33. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
      and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press Enter.
  34. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
  your Desktop.  The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.


  Example 3   258/3
  Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems   281/3+


Creating a Boot Manager Partition and a Primary Partition for DOS and Windows on
After you create the partition for the Boot Manager, you create primary
the First Hard Disk, and Logical Drives for OS/2 and Data on the Second Hard
partitions for any DOS or Windows versions or previous versions of OS/2 that you
Disk
are going to install.  At this time, you can also create any logical drives for
In the following example, a system with two hard disk drives (one 80MB in size
data or programs or to install OS/2.
with DOS and Windows on it, and the other 200MB in size with programs and data
Consider the following before you begin creating the partitions:
on it) will be reformatted and replaced with the following partitions and
  o  If you prefer, and if you have sufficient free space on the hard disk, you
logical drives:
      can leave existing partitions intact until you have completely transferred
   o  The first hard disk:
      data processing operations to OS/2.
        -  A 1MB Boot Manager partition
   o  You can install OS/2 in its own partition and place your programs and data
        - A 79MB primary partition for DOS and Windows (drive C)
      in a separate logical drive. This arrangement makes it easier to back up
   o  The second hard disk:
      those programs and data.
        -  A 155MB logical drive for programs and data (drive D)
   o  If multiple types of file systems are needed, determine if you want them
        - A 45MB logical drive for OS/2 (drive E)
      in a separate partition or placed on a logical drive.
Notice that in this example, because only one primary partition (drive C) is
  o When determining how much space to allocate for the OS/2 partition,
  created on the first hard disk, no drive remapping occurs for your data drive
      consider some of the tools and applications you will be installing and
(drive D). That is, if your data files were previously in drive D on the second
      whether you want to install them in the OS/2 partition or on another
  hard disk, they will still be in logical drive D after repartitioning and
      logical drive. For example, if you want to install the OS/2 Toolkit, you
installing OS/2.  Of course, you must back up your data files before
      can install it on a separate logical drive instead of the default
  repartitioning, and then restore the files to drive D when the OS/2
      partition used for OS/2.
installation is completed.
  o Allow enough room in your OS/2 partition for the growth of a swap fileA
  You will also notice that when you create only logical drives on your second
      swap file contains segments of a program
hard disk, the FDISK utility program will automatically set up a small (usually
      or data temporarily
  1MB) primary partition at the start of free space.  That is because it must
      moved out of main storage. The swap file (SWAPPER.DAT) requires at least
reserve space for the partition table at the start of the hard diskHowever,
      2MB of hard disk space but might require much more.  You can include this
this partition will not be assigned a drive letter, and will not cause drive
      space in your OS/2 partition, or you can set up a logical drive for the
remapping or interfere with the use of the logical drives you create on this
      swap file.
disk.
  o Some operating systems, such as AIX*, require that their own disk utility
  Use the following steps to set up your hard disks this way. Of course, you can
      program create the installation partition.  The OS/2 FDISK utility program
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
      cannot create the partition for these operating systems. If you are going
  to be.  Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
      to install AIX, make sure you leave sufficient free space for it on the
hard disks.
      hard disk.
   1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partitions. (Use your
  o If you have applications that require other operating systems, such as
      existing operating system to back up the data.)  Be sure to back up data
      AIX, check the amount of storage space recommended by the supplier.
      on both hard disks.
To create partitions and logical drives for your other operating systems and
   2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
  for your programs and data, follow these steps:
   3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
   1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted on the FDISK screen.
       from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
      If it is not, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight it.
  4. Turn your computer on.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
   2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       to restart it.
   3. Select Create partition and press Enter.
  5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
  4. Type the size (in MB) of the partition you are creating.  Use the
       press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
       following table to help you determine a minimum size for the partition.
       asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.  Then a screen appears.
      For specific information about partition sizes, refer to the
  6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
       documentation
       Then press Enter.
      that came with the product you will be installing.
  7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
       place=inline width=column frame=box id=dpart rules=horiz hdframe=rules
       specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
      hp='2 0 0
  8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
      0' split=yes expand.
       continue with the installation.
       ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
  9. Delete the existing partition on the first hard disk (which you have
      ?
       backed up):
      3          Planning Table for Partition Sizes
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
      3
        b. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete.
       CDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
        c. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
      4
        d. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
      3 CONTENTS 3 SIZE    3 HARD DISK CONSIDERATIONS
        e. Repeat steps a through d for any other partitions you want to delete
      3
          on the first hard disk.
       CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
  10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
      4
        a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       3 DOS 3.3  3 2MB      3 Must be in a primary partition within the first
        b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
       32MB  3
        c. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
      3          3          3 on the first hard disk.
  11. Create the primary partition for DOS and Windows:
      3
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
      4
        c. Accept the size of the partition (in this example, 79) by pressing
      3 DOS 4.0  3 3MB      3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
          Enter.
      disk. 3
          Note:  If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 79), you would also
      4
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the partition at the end of
      3 DOS 5.0  3 4MB      3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
          free space or at the start of free space.
      disk. 3
        d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
        e. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
      4
        f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
      3 DOS 6.x  3 8MB      3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
        g. Type a name for this primary partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and
      disk. 3
          press Enter.
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
  12. Delete the existing partition on the second hard disk (which you have
      4
       backed up):
      3 OS/2 1.x 3 20MB    3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
        a. At the FDISK screen, press the Tab key to highlight Disk at the top
      disk. 3
          of the screen.
      3 SE      3          3 Installs in less than 20MB, but segment swapping
        b. Press the Right Arrow key to display the FDISK screen for the second
      is    3
          hard disk.
      3          3          3 inhibited.
        c. Press the Tab key to highlight the first partition listed on the
      3
          FDISK screen.
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
        d. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete and
      4
          press Enter.
      3 OS/2 1.x 3 30MB    3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
        e. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
      disk. 3
        f. Repeat steps a through e for any other partitions you want to delete
      3 EE      3          3 Installs in less than 30MB with reduced function.
          on the second hard disk.
      3
   13. Create the logical drive for OS/2:
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
      4
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
      3 OS/2 2.0 3 15-33MB  3 Can be in a primary partition or logical drive.
        c. Type the size of the logical drive (in this example, 45) and press
      If    3
          Enter.
      3          3          3 you choose a minimum size for the partition, you
        d. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
      might 3
        e. Select Create at End of Free Space and press Enter.
      3          3          3 want to place the swap file on another partition.
        f. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
      3
        g. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
        h. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS/2) and press
      4
          Enter.
       3 OS/2 2.1 3 20-40MB  3 OS/2 2.1 can be in a primary partition or logical
  14. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
      3
       startup time):
      3          3 (Plus    3 drive.  If you choose a minimum size for the
        a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
      parti-    3
          have given the logical drive for OS/2) and press Enter.
      3          3 10MB for 3 tion, you might want to place the swap file on
        b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
      another 3
        c. Select Default and press EnterThe name you typed for the OS/2
      3          3 swap    3 partition.
          logical drive will appear next to Default.
      3
          Note:  If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
      3          3 file and 3
          after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
      3
          Display Time now. Then continue with step d.
      3          3 5MB for 3 If you want to install all the features and you
        d. Press F3.
      want  3
  15. Create the logical drive for data:
      3          3 multi-   3 the swap file in the same partition, consider
         a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
      making  3
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
      3          3 media)  3 the OS/2 partition larger.
        c. Accept the size of the logical drive (in this example, 155) by
      3
          pressing Enter.
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
           Note:  If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
      4
           on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 155), you would also
      3 OS/2    3 25-45MB  3 OS/2 can be in a primary partition or logical
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the partition at the end of
      drive.   3
          free space or at the start of free space.
      3 Version  3 (Plus    3 If you choose a minimum size for the partition,
        d. Select Extended Logical Drive and Press Enter.
      you    3
  16. Exit the FDISK screen:
      3 3        3 10MB for 3 might want to place the swap file on another
        a. Press F3.
      parti-    3
        b. Press any key to remove the message box.
      3          3 swap    3 tion.
        c. Select Save and exit and press Enter.
      3
        d. When a message appears confirming the hard disk partitioning is
      3          3 file and 3
          complete, remove Diskette 1from drive A.  Do not insert the
      3
          Installation Diskette.  Continue with step 17.
      3          3 10MB for 3 If you want to install all the features and you
  17. Install DOS and Windows on the first hard disk:
      want   3
        a. Insert the DOS installation diskette into drive A, and then press
       3          3 multi-  3 the swap file in the same partition, consider
          Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
      making  3
        b. Follow the instructions that came with DOS to install it. If
      3          3 media)  3 the OS/2 partition larger.
          prompted to do so during the DOS installation, format the partition
      3
          and logical drives you created in the previous steps.
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
        c. After DOS is installed, the Boot Manager menu appears.  Select the
      4
          DOS partition and press Enter.
      3 AIX      3          3 Partition size determined and built by AIX Disk
        d. Install Windows in the primary partition you created for it (in this
      3
          example, it is drive C).  Follow the installation instructions that
      3          3          3 utility programPartition is created at the end
          came with Windows.
      of  3
          Note:  If you receive a message about the Windows swapper file, you
      3          3          3 the hard disk.
          should avoid putting the swapper file in the same partition or
      3
          logical drive as OS/2.  However, if you put the Windows swapper file
      @DDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
          in the same partition or logical drive as OS/2, make sure you leave
      Y
          enough free space for OS/2, and create a temporary Windows swapper
      Place system tools or common applications in a logical drive within the
          file.
      extended partition so that the data can be shared among the operating
  18. Continue the OS/2 installation:
      systems.
        a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A and press Ctrl+Alt+Del
  5. Specify whether this is a primary partition or a logical drive within the
          to restart your computer.
      extended partition. Consider the following:
        b. When the IBM logo screen appears, remove the Installation Diskette
         o  All versions of DOS must reside in primary partitions on the first
          and insert Diskette 1into drive AThen press Enter.
          hard disk. Versions of OS/2 before 2.0 must also reside in primary
        c. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option
          partitions. (Remember that primary partitions cannot share data.)
          2, specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
        o  Logical drives within an extended partition are shareable. This
        d. When the warning screen appears, press Enter to continue.
           means that any data installed in the logical drive can be used by an
  19. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
           operating system running from any other active logical drive on the
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
          system, if the file system formats are compatible.
        b. Press the Tab key to highlight Disk at the top of the FDISK screen.
  6. Specify the location of the partition or logical drive you want to create.
        c. Press the Right Arrow key to display the FDISK screen for the second
        Select either Create at Start of Free Space or Create at End of Free
          hard disk.
      Space. Note that the logical drives cannot be intermixed with primary
        d. Press the Tab key to highlight the first partition listed on the
      partitions.
          FDISK screen.
      Note:  This option is not available when the amount of free space equals
        e. Highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you have given the OS/2
      the size of the request.
          logical drive) and press Enter.
When you have set up the partition, you use the Options menu choices to specify
        f. Select Set installable and press Enter.
information about the partition.
        g. Press F3 to exit the FDISK screen.
 
  20. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
Specifying Options for the New Partition    282/4
      Accept the drive, and press Enter. (In this example, the screen will show
 
       drive E as the selected drive.)
To specify options for the partition you just created, use the following
  21. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
procedure. Refer to The Options Menu for detailed explanations of the choices on
       2.  Then press Enter. (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
the Options menu.
       any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
  1. From the FDISK screen, Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  22. When a screen appears asking if you want to format the OS/2 partition, do
  2. Select Add to Boot Manager menu if you want this partition displayed on
       one of the following:
      the Boot Manager startup menu. If you do not select this choice for the
        o  Select Do not format the partition if you want to use the FAT file
      partition, you cannot select the operating system that exists in this
          system. Then press Enter.  Continue with step 24.
      partition from the menu at startup time.
        o Select Format the partition if you want to use the HPFS file system.
  3. If you selected Add to Boot Manager menu, you see the window in which you
          Then press Enter. Continue with step 23.
      are asked to type a name for the partition. Type the name, and then press
          Refer to Selecting a File System for an explanation of the file
      Enter.
          systems.
If you have additional partitions to set up, follow the instructions outlined
  23. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
in Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems. Otherwise, continue to
      with which you want to format the OS/2 logical drive. If a warning screen
Creating the Partition for OS/2.
       appears, press Enter to continue with the installation.
 
  24. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from
  Creating the Partition for OS/2   283/3
      diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
 
       installation progresses.
After you have created the partitions for the Boot Manager and for each of the
  25. After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
other operating systems you plan to install, create the partition or logical
       and then reinsert Diskette 1  Follow the instructions on the screen.
drive in which you will install OS/2 OS/2 can be installed in either a primary
      After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
partition or a logical drive within the extended partition.
      screen, followed by the System Configuration screen.
Remember that some operating systems, such as AIX, use their own disk utility
  26. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
program to set up partitionsThe partitions for such operating systems are
      hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
created when you actually install the operating systems. You must leave
      Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
sufficient space on the hard disk to accommodate these operating systems.
      If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
To create the partition or logical drive for OS/2, follow these steps:
       click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
  1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted. If it is not, press the
       will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
      Up Arrow ( ) or Down Arrow ( ) key to highlight it.
       hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
      refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
  3. Select Create partition and press Enter.
      about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
  4. Type the size (in MB) of the partition or logical drive you are creating.
      display, refer to Video Procedures.
      Note that the size of the swap file is based on the size of installed
      Follow the instructions on each screen.  Click on Help if you need more
      memory. The less memory you have, the larger the swap file. Thus, if your
       information about any screen you see.
      computer has a small amount of memory, you will need a larger partition.
      If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
      (You can also place the swap file on another partition.  To do this,
       OK.
      select Software configuration from the OS/2 Setup and Installation window
       A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
      that appears during the Installation program. ) If you want to install all
      (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
      features and you want the swap file on the same partition, consider making
       program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
      the OS/2 partition large enough to accommodate all of those files.
  27. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
  5. Specify whether this partition is a primary partition or a logical drive
      or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
       within the extended partition.
      names.  Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
      If you have already marked three partitions as primary partitions, you
        o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
       might want to select Extended Logical Drive for OS/2. Your hard disk can
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
       be made up of a maximum of four primary partitions or three primary
          LPT3 button.  Then press Enter.
      partitions and multiple logical drives within one extended partition. So,
        o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
      if you create a primary partition for OS/2 when three primary partitions
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
       already exist, you cannot create any logical drives.
          COM3, or COM4 button.  Then press Enter.
  6. Specify the location of the partition or logical drive you want to create.
          If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
      Note: This option is not available when the amount of free space equals
          install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
      the size of the request.
          and Installation screen appears.
 
  28. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
  Specifying Options for the OS/2 Partition    284/3
  29. Click on Format on the pull-down menu.  Then indicate which file system
 
      you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold data (in
During the Installation program, you can use the Options menu choices to specify
      this example, the logical drive is drive D).  Refer to Selecting a File
information about the OS/2 partition or logical drive:
      System for an explanation of the file systems.  Click on Format when you
  1. From the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
      are done.
  2. Highlight Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
  30. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
  3. Type the name you want to assign to this partition or logical drive, and
  31. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
       press Enter.
      Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration in the
  4. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
      menu bar at the top of the screen.  Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
  5. Highlight Set installable and press Enter.
      during Installation for more information.
       You must select Set installable for this partition or logical drive. By
  32. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
      selecting Set installable, you indicate which partition or logical drive
      features you want to install.  You will notice that some features have a
       should be used for OS/2.
      check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
 
      The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
Specifying the Default Operating System    285/3
      right of the feature.
 
      Follow these steps:
After you create partitions for all of your operating systems, including OS/2,
        a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
you may specify which operating system should be started (by default) every time
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
you start your computer. Follow these steps:
        b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
  1. Highlight the line on the FDISK screen that contains the information for
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
       the operating system you want preselected at startup time. For example,
        c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
       if you want OS/2 to be the preselected choice on the Boot Manager startup
  33. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
       menu, highlight the OS/2 Version 3 line.
      want to select.  Then click on OK.
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  34. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen.  If you are installing
  3. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
      from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
  4. With Default highlighted, press Enter. Notice that the name of the
      including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.  After inserting each
       partition you chose is listed next to Default.
      diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
  5. Press F3.
  35. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
      If you want to set the timer for how long the Boot Manager menu should be
      Configuration/Selection Utility screen.  Follow the instructions on the
      displayed and how information on the menu should appear, you can do so
      screen; click on Help if you need more information.
       during the installation of OS/2 or you can do so after installation.  To
  36. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
       set the timer and display mode now, continue with the sections that
      of the OS/2 installation.
       follow, "Setting the Menu Display Time" and "Setting the Menu Mode."
  37. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one
      Otherwise, go to step 6.
      of the following:
  6. Press F3
        o  If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
            a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
            b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
            c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
                requested.
        o  If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
            a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
            b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
            c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
                type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.
                For example:
                e:\winsetup
                where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup
                is the directory that contains the Windows files.
            d. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and
                press Enter.
            e. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to
                shut down and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press
                Enter.
            f. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on
                your screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
your Desktop.  The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.


  Example 4   259/3
  Setting the Menu Display Time   286/3+


Creating a Primary Partition for OS/2 and a Logical Drive for Data
To indicate how long you want the Boot Manager startup menu displayed when you
The following example shows how to set up your hard disk to install OS/2 in one
start your system, follow these steps:
partition and your data in another partition.  It does not involve the
   1. From the Set startup values menu, you can do one of the following:
installation of the Boot Manager.  You can use this setup if you are installing
        o If you want the menu displayed for a certain period of time before
on a computer that does not have DOS, Windows, or any other operating systems on
          the default operating system starts, accept the value of Yes.
it, or if you want to replace all existing operating systems with OS/2.
        o If you want the menu to be displayed indefinitely (until you
In this example, an 80MB hard disk is replaced by:
          explicitly select a choice from the menu), highlight Timer and press
   o  A 45MB primary partition in which OS/2 will be installed (drive C)
          Enter to change the value to No.
  o  A 35MB logical drive, which will be used to hold programs and data (drive
   2. If you selected Yes for Timer, indicate how long you want the menu
      D)
       displayed before the default operating system is started. You can do one
Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, you can
      of the following:
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
         o  Accept the value listed next to Timeout.
  to be.  Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
         o  Change the value as follows:
hard disk.
            a. Select Timeout and press Enter.
  1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
            b. Type the amount of time (in seconds) that you want the menu
      existing operating system to back up the data.)
                displayed before the preselected operating system is
  2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
                automatically started.
      from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
            c. Press Enter.
  3. Turn your computer on.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
 
      to restart it.
Setting the Menu Mode    287/4
  4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
 
      press Enter.  As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
You can select either Normal or Advanced for the Boot Manager menu mode. If you
      asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
select Advanced, your Boot Manager menu will include additional information
  5. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
about your partitions.
      Then press Enter.
To change the mode that is currently displayed:
   6. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
  1. Highlight Mode on the Set startup values menu.
      specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
  2. Press Enter.
  7. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
When you have finished configuring your Boot Manager menu, press F3. Then
       continue with the installation.
continue with the installation of OS/2.
  8. Delete the existing partition (which you have backed up):
 
         a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
  Selecting a File System    288/2
         b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
 
        c. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
If you choose to format an existing partition during the Installation program,
  9. Create the primary partition for OS/2:
you will be asked to select a file system.  A file system is the part of the
        a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
operating system that provides access to files and programs on a disk. You can
        b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
select either the File Allocation Table (FAT) file system or the High
        c. Type the size of the primary partition (in this example, 45) and
Performance File System (HPFS).
          press Enter.
  o Select the FAT file system if you intend to share data in the partition
        d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
       with a version of DOS that is running independently of OS/2. (For example,
        e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
       if you occasionally need to start DOS from a diskette and access the data
  10. Indicate that this partition should be used to install OS/2:
       in the OS/2 partition, the partition would have to be formatted for the
        a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       FAT file system.) DOS uses the FAT file system, and does not recognize
        b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
       files created by HPFS. Although DOS does not recognize HPFS, this is not
        c. Type a name for the partition (for example, OS/2), and press Enter.
       the case for DOS sessions that are part of OS/2.  If you plan to run you
  11. Create the logical drive for your data:
       r DOS programs in the DOS sessions that are part of OS/2, you can format
        a. Highlight the Free Space line.
       for either file system. The only restriction for DOS programs running in
        b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       these DOS sessions is that they will not recognize the longer file names
        c. Select Create partition and press Enter.
       in the HPFS partition.
        d. Accept the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 35 )
  o  HPFS has features that make it a better choice for larger hard disk
          by pressing Enter.
       partitions.  It puts the directory at the seek center of the partition and
          Note:  If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
       is designed to allocate contiguous space for files. This feature helps
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 35), you would also
      prevent disk fragmentation. HPFS also handles write errors by writing to
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
       alternate space reserved for that purpose.
          of free space or at the start of free space.
  HPFS also supports file names up to 254 characters in length.
        e. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
  If you format an OS/2 partition for the FAT file system and the system memory
  12. Exit the FDISK screen:
  is less than or equal to 6MB, support for HPFS is not automatically installed.
        a. Press F3.
  You can add this support later (for example, if you want to format another
        b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
partition for HPFS) using the Selective Install utility program (located in the
  13. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove and insert diskettes.
System Setup folder).
  14. When the Welcome screen reappears, select Advanced Installation and press
  If you are trying to decide whether to use HPFS, consider that it takes at
      Enter.
least 200KB of system memory. If your computer has 6MB or less of memory, your
  15. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
system performance will be adversely affected.
      Accept the drive, and press Enter.  (In this example, the screen will show
 
      drive C as the selected drive.)
Changing System Options from the OS/2 Setup and Installation Window    289/2+
  16. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
 
      2. Then press Enter.  (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
During Advanced Installation, the OS/2 Setup and Installation window appears so
      any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
you can select the features of the operating system that you want to install.
  17. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
You can also use the menu bar at the top of the window to indicate an alternate
       want to use for your OS/2 partition. (Refer to Selecting a File System.)
drive for your swap file, and to modify your CONFIG.SYS file.
  18. When prompted to do so, remove and insert diskettes. After Diskette 6, you
 
       will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then reinsert
Installing the Swap File and WIN-OS/2 Support in a Logical Drive    290/3
      Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screen.  After you remove
 
       Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo screen, followed by
If you use the Advanced Installation method, you can install the swap file and
      the System Configuration screen.
WIN-OS/2 support in another partition or logical drive to save hard disk space
  19. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
in your OS/2 partition. When you are setting up your partitions with the FDISK
       hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
utility program, you can create a logical drive just for this purpose.
      Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
When the OS/2 Setup and Installation window appears during the installation
      If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
process, follow these steps:
       click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
  1. Select Software configuration from the menu bar of the OS/2 Setup and
       will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
       Installation window.
      hardware device.  If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
  2. Select Change OS/2 parameters.
       refer to the documentation that came with it.  If you need information
  3. Make sure the cursor is in the SWAPPATH field by selecting the field with
       about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
       the mouse or the Tab keyReplace the default location of the swap file
      display, refer to Video Procedures.
       with the desired location. For example, to place the swap file in the
       Follow the instructions on each screen.  Click on Help if you need more
       root directory of logical drive D, type
       information about any screen you see.
      d:\.
      If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
  4. Select OK or press Enter.
      OK.
  5. Select the More push button next to WIN-OS/2 Support.
      A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
  6. Select the Down Arrow in the Destination drive field to change the drive
       (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
      to the desired logical drive (drive D in this example).
       program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
  7. Select OK.
  20. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
 
      or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
  Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File during Installation    291/3
       namesThen indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
        o If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
          LPT3 button.  Then press Enter.
        o If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
          COM3, or COM4 button.  Then press Enter.
          If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
          install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
          and Installation screen appears.
  21. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
  22. Click on Format on the pull-down menu. Then indicate which file system
      you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold data (in
      this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to Selecting a File
      System for an explanation of the file systems. Click on Format when you
      are done.
  23. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
  24. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
      Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration on the
      menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
      during Installation for more information.
  25. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
      features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a
      check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
      The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
      right of the feature.
      Follow these steps:
        a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
        b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
        c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
  26. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
      want to select. Then click on OK.
  27. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen.  If you are installing
      from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
       including one or more Printer Driver diskettes. After inserting each
      diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
  28. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
       Configuration/Selection Utility screenFollow the instructions on the
       screen; click on Help if you need more information.
  29. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
       of the OS/2 installation.
  30. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
      and restart your computer. Click on OK or press Enter.
  31. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
your DesktopThe tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.


  Example 5    260/3
During Advanced Installation, you can customize your system by modifying the
 
CONFIG.SYS file. To do so, follow these steps when the OS/2 Setup and
Creating One Primary Partition for OS/2
Installation window appears during installation:
The following example shows how to set up your hard disk to install OS/2 in one
  1. Select Software configuration from the menu bar at the top of the window.
primary partition (drive C). It does not involve the installation of the Boot
  2. Select either Change OS/2 parameters or Change DOS parameters.
Manager. You can use this setup if you want to reformat your existing hard disk
      For example, if you want to change the MINFREE setting for the swap file,
and replace all the information on the disk with OS/2. You can also use this
      select Change OS/2 parametersThen specify the size on the window that
example if you want to reformat your hard disk with a different file system (for
      is displayedThe MINFREE setting is used to specify when the system
example, you now want to use the FAT file system on a computer that was
       should warn you about the growth of the swap file.
previously formatted with the HPFS file system).
   3. Select OK when you have finished making all the selections in the window.
In this example, an 80MB hard disk is replaced by:
       The OS/2 Setup and Installation window will reappear.
  o  An 80MB primary partition in which OS/2 will be installed (drive C)
   4. Make your selections in the OS/2 Setup and Installation window to continue
Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, the size
       with the installation of OS/2.
  of your hard disk may be different from the size of the disk used in this
 
exampleBe aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
Special Hardware Considerations   292/1+
hard disk.
 
  1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
This chapter provides information to help you if you are installing OS/2 Version
       existing operating system to back up the data.)
3 on or using the following hardware:
   2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
      Gateway 2000
       from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
      A system with Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS
  3. Turn your computer on.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
      ATI Graphics Ultra Pro display adapter
      to restart it.
      An EISA system with an Adaptec 1742A controller card
  4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
      IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
      press Enter.  As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
      IBM PS/2 Model 76
      asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
      IBM ThinkPad with a Docking Station
   5. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
      A system with an Aox upgrade
      Then press Enter.
      Quantum II Hard Card
  6. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
      Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR, or Tandy
      specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
       non-SCSI CD-ROM drive
  7. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
       Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination
       continue with the installation.
       IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
   8. Delete existing partitions (which you have backed up):
      Sound Blaster
        a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
      Pro AudioSpectrum 16
        b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
 
        c. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
Using Gateway 2000 Computers    293/2+
        d. Repeat steps a through c for all partitions you want to delete.
 
  9. Create the primary partition for OS/2:
If you have an early version of a Gateway 2000 computer that does not work
        a. Highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
properly, your BIOS might be an early version. The company suggests that you
        b. From the Options menu, select Create partition and press Enter.
replace the system board. Contact Gateway 2000, Inc. for information about
        c. Accept the size of the partition (in this example, 80) by pressing
upgrading your computer.
          Enter.
 
        d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
486 Math Coprocessors    294/3
  10. Indicate that this partition should be used to install OS/2:
 
        a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
If you have a Gateway 2000 computer with a 486 processor and a revision E system
        b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
board, you could experience a divide underflow errorThe error can occur when
        c. Type a name for the partition (for example, OS/2), and press Enter.
you are running software that takes advantage of the 486 math coprocessor.  If
  11. Exit the FDISK screen:
this error occurs, you can upgrade to a revision F system board by contacting
        a. Press F3.
Gateway.
        b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
 
  12. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove and insert diskettes.
TRAP0002 Errors on Boot or Installation    295/3
  13. When the Welcome screen reappears, select Advanced Installation and press
 
      Enter.
Gateway computers that cause a TRAP0002 error are caused by one of the
  14. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
following:
      Accept the drive, and press Enter.  (In this example, the screen will show
  o  A bad Read Ahead Cache on the system board
       drive C as the selected drive.)
  o  Bad memory
  15. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
When the problem is a bad Read Ahead Cache on the system board, press
       2.  Then press Enter.  (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
Ctrl+Alt+Del to display a menu from which you can disable the external caching.
       any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
Refer to your Gateway documentation for more information. Contact Gateway when
  16. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
this problem is encountered.
      want to use for your OS/2 partition. (Refer to Selecting a File System.)
When the problem is bad memory, try moving each memory module to a different
  17. When prompted to do so, remove and insert diskettes. After Diskette 6, you
memory controllerIf the problem is not corrected, determine which memory
      will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then reinsert
module is bad and replace it.
      Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screen. After you remove
 
      Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo screen, followed by
  Gateway Nomad Notebook    296/3
      the System Configuration screen.
 
  18. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
If you receive a message that OS/2 is unable to operate your hard disk or your
      hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
diskette drive, your computer needs a BIOS upgrade.
      Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
If a TRAP error appears when the system is started, or during installation,
      If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
disable caching on the system board. If the problem persists, contact Gateway
      click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.  A screen
2000, Inc.
      will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
 
      hardware deviceIf you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
  Using Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS    297/2+
      refer to the documentation that came with it.  If you need information
 
      about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
This section provides information about computers that require a BIOS upgrade to
      display, refer to Video Procedures.
support OS/2 Version 3.
      Follow the instructions on each screen.  Click on Help if you need more
 
      information about any screen you see.
  Phoenix BIOS    298/3
      If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
 
      OK.
For questions about products that use Phoenix BIOS, call the computer
      A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
manufacturer directly. If there are additional questions, contact Phoenix.
      (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
 
      program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
AMI BIOS    299/3+
  19. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
 
      or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
The later BIOS versions from American Megatrends, Inc. (AMI) provide a screen ID
      namesThen indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
code, which is visible at the lower-left corner of the screen during the initial
        o If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
random access memory (RAM) count. The code can be made to reappear if you
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
restart the system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del, or it can be frozen on screen by
          LPT3 button.  Then press Enter.
holding down the Ins key during system startup. This creates a keyboard error,
        o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
which will stop the screen. On a system that uses AMI BIOS or AMI BIOS Plus, the
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
message will be in the form:
          COM3, or COM4 buttonThen press Enter.
aaaa-bbbb-mmddyy-Kc
          If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
On a system than uses AMI HI-Flex BIOS, the message will be in the form:
          install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
ee-ffff-bbbbbb-gggggggg-mmddyy-hhhhhhhh-c
          and Installation screen appears.
If the screen ID code is in a form other than those above, one of the following
  20. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
is true:
      Setup and Installation screen. Click on Software configuration on the
  o  The BIOS is a very early versionIn this case, contact Washburn & Co.
      menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
  o  The BIOS was produced by a company with source-code license. In this case,
      during Installation for more information.
      the system board manufacturer will be able to provide further information
  21. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
      or updatesAll Everex** 368 BIOS versions are in this category.
      features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a
      check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
      The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
      right of the feature. Follow these steps:
        a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
        b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
        c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
  22. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
      want to select.  Then click on OK.
  23. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. If you are installing
      from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
      including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.  After inserting each
      diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
  24. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
      Configuration/Selection Utility screen.  Follow the instructions on the
      screen; click on Help if you need more information.
  25. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
      of the OS/2 installation.
  26. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
      and restart your computerClick on OK or press Enter.
  27. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
your DesktopThe tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.


  Configuring Your Boot Manager Menu   261/2+
  General Rules   300/4


After installing OS/2 (and the Boot Manager), you can go back and make changes
  o  If an IDE-type hard drive is installed, the date mmddyy should be 040990
to the Boot Manager menu, such as how long the menu should be displayed and how
      or later for use with any operating system, including DOS. Special timing
information on the menu should appear. To do so, follow these steps:
      requirements of IDE drives were accommodated on the date noted.
   1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
  o  If you use any other drive type, such as MFM, RLL, ESDI, or SCSI, the OS/2
  2. Open Drive.
      operating system might install and operate correctly if mmddyy is 092588
   3. Press mouse button 2 to display a pop-up menu.
      or later, provided that the Keyboard Controller revision level is suitable
  4. Select Create partition.
      for the OS/2 version being used. Also, in the case of SCSI hard drives, a
  5. At the Fixed Disk Utility screen, make any changes you want to the
      driver compatible with the version of OS/2 operating system being
       setting. Select Help if you need more information.
      installed might be provided by the controller manufacturer, and if so, a
      special installation procedure might apply.
   o  Keyboard Controller revision level F (represented by "c" in the previous
      screen ID code examples) is expected to produce proper installation and
      operation of OS/2 versions 1.3x and 2.x.
          OS/2 1.0 or 1.1:  8, B, D, or F
          OS/2 1.2x:        D or F
          OS/2 1.3x or 2.:  F
   o  If the Keyboard Controller revision level shows as 0 or M, the Keyboard
      Controller chip is not an AMI chip, even if an AMI license sticker was
      applied to it. If it is not an AMI chip, its performance under the OS/2
      operating system is unknown.  It might or might not work correctly.  For
      some revision levels (usually "M"), an AMI chip can successfully replace a
      non-AMI chip, but this is not a general rule. Sometimes the nonstandard
      Keyboard Controller (usually "0") was used to combine system board
      functions not normally part of the controller. Substituting a standard
      chip causes the board to not function at all. In this case, there is no
      solution other than to replace the board. A revision level of 9
       accompanied by a nonstandard ID code also indicates a nonstandard
      controller (and BIOS). The system board manufacturer should be contacted
      for further information.


  Setting the Menu Display Time   262/3
  BIOS Updates   301/4


To indicate how long you want the Boot Manager startup menu displayed when you
If a BIOS prior to the previously noted dates requires replacement, note the
start your system, follow these steps:
following:
   1. From the Startup Values menu, you can do one of the following:
   o  AMI BIOS and BIOS Plus series BIOS (16 character ID code) for cached
         o  If you want the menu displayed for a certain period of time before
      system boards are customized for individual system board designs. You can
           the default operating system starts, accept the value of Yes.
      obtain updates only from the system board manufacturer, unless you have
        o If you want the menu to be displayed indefinitely (until you
      one of the following:
           explicitly select a choice from the menu), highlight Timer and press
         1. A BIOS with "aaaa" = E307. This BIOS can be replaced with a standard
           Enter to change the value to No.
           type.
   2. If you accepted the value of Yes, indicate how long you want the menu
        2. A BIOS for Northgate** or Motherboard Factory** system boards, except
       displayed before the default operating system is started. You can do one
          the Northgate Slimline**. This BIOS can be replaced by a standard
       of the following:
          type. The Slimline BIOS has the VGA BIOS in the same chips. They can
        o  Accept the value listed next to Timeout.
          be updated to the 040990 release, provided they are identified as
        Change the value as follows:
          Slimline, and the speed is specified (20, 25, or 33 MHz).  The speed
            a. Select Timeout and press Enter.
          must be specified because different VGA code is required for the
            b. Type the amount of time (in seconds) that you want the menu
          various speeds.
                displayed before the preselected operating system is
        3. A BIOS with "aaaa" = DAMI, DAMX, or EDAMI (usually for cached boards
                automatically started.
           d  esigned or built by AMI). This BIOS can be updated.  Mylex or
            c. Press Enter.
          Leading Technology** boards with these prefixes can only be updated
           by the board manufacturer.
   o  The complete screen ID code is necessary to determine whether a BIOS
      update for other system boards can be provided. In the case of the HI-Flex
      BIOS, the complete second and third lines of the ID code are also
       necessary.  If not immediately visible on the screen, they can be viewed
       by pressing the Ins key during system startup.
  If you have a hard disk drive from another manufacturer, it must be dated
      092588 or later. If your hard disk drive is an earlier version, contact
      the dealer at your place of purchase, or the hard disk manufacturer, for
      information about upgrading the drive.


  Setting the Menu Mode   263/3
  Micronics BIOS   302/3


You can select either Normal or Advanced for the Boot Manager menu mode.  If you
If you have revision E of a Micronics system board, you might receive a divide
select Advanced, your Boot Manager menu will include additional information
underflow message, or your computer might not work properly. This board contains
about your partitions.
an early version of BIOS. If you purchased the board from Gateway, contact
To change the mode that is currently displayed, follow these steps:
Gateway 2000, Inc. request an upgrade to revision F.
  1. Highlight Mode on the Startup Values menu.
  2. Press Enter.
When you have finished configuring your Boot Manager menu, press F3.


  Bypassing the Boot Manager Menu   264/2
  Using the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Display Adapter   303/2


After the Boot Manager is installed, you can use the SETBOOT command if you want
If you have an ATI Graphics Ultra Pro, you must run the INSTALL.EXE utility
to restart your computer to a specified drive without going through the Boot
program provided by ATI before you install OS/2 Version 3. Note that this is a
Manager menu.  The SETBOOT command immediately restarts the system.
DOS program and you must, therefore, start DOS before you run the program.
The parameter for SETBOOT is /IBD:drive, where drive is the letter of a
Note: If you have a Gateway 2000 system, refer also to "Black Lines on an OS/2
startable partition.  For example, from the OS/2 command prompt, you can type:
Logo Screen" in Solving Installation Problems
setboot /ibd:e
  1. Start DOS on your computer.
to restart your system and start the operating system using drive E, without
  2. Insert the ATI diskette into drive A.
displaying the Boot Manager menu.
  3. Type a:install.exe and press Enter. The Set Power-Up Configuration menu
See the Command Reference for more information about the SETBOOT command(The
      appears.
Command Reference is located in the Information folder on your OS/2 Desktop.)
  4. Select Custom for Monitor Type.
  5. Make sure that VGA Memory Sizeis set to Shared for 1 MB video memory
      boards.
  6. Make sure that the refresh rate for 640 x 480 resolution is set to IBM
      Default or 60 Hz.
      Note: Later during the installation of OS/2 Version 3, be sure to select
      8514 as the primary display type.


  What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation   265/2
  Using an EISA System with an Adaptec 1742A Controller Card   304/2


The installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most
If you have an EISA system with an Adaptec 1742A controller card, you must run
cases, you will not encounter any problems. However, if you do have problems
the Setup Configuration program provided on the Adaptec Card Setup Diskette
either during the installation process or immediately afterwards, refer to
before installing OS/2 Version 3. To set up the Adaptec card in the
Solving Installation Problems.
configuration using the Setup Diskette, do the following:
Problems you might encounter include:
  1. Set the Enhanced mode setting to OFF.
   o  A blank screen after installation.
  2. Set the Standard mode setting to ON.
   o  An error message with a number and, sometimes, text.
  3. Set the Hex Address setting to C800.
   o  A hardware device that does not work. (This problem can occur if you are
  4. Set the I/O Port setting to 230H.
      using hardware that is not supported by OS/2.)
   5. Set the DMA channel setting to 5.
   6. Set the Parity Check setting to OFF.
  7. Set the Synchronous Negotiation setting to ON. If CD-ROM is not
      recognized, set this setting to OFF.
  8. Set the Enabled Disconnect setting to YES.
   9. Set the IRQ setting to 11 (default is 2).


  Using a Response File to Install OS/2    266/2+
  Using an IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette   305/2


This section describes how to use a response file to install OS/2. It is
As part of the setup of your computer, you might have been advised to create a
intended primarily for people who will be setting up workstations for others to
Reference Diskette (sometimes called a "Hardware System Program Diskette"). The
use.
Reference Diskette contains BIOS information (code about how your diskette
drives, hard drives, and keyboard interact). The OS/2 Version 3 Installation
program may prompt you to insert this diskette.
If you have not created the Reference Diskette, do so before you begin the
installation of OS/2 Version 3. Refer to your PS/2 documentation for
instructions on creating this diskette.


  Understanding Response File Installation   267/3
  Using an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or IBM ThinkPad with a Docking Station   306/2


If you have installed previous versions of OS/2 or other operating systems, you
If you are installing OS/2 Version 3 on an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or an IBM ThinkPad
are familiar with installation procedures that require you to insert and remove
700, 700C, 720, or 720C attached to a 3550 Docking Station, you need to replace
a series of diskettes and answer screen prompts.  When you use a response file
the ABIOS files on the OS/2 Installation Diskette with files from the Reference
to install, it is not necessary to answer any screen prompts. All the answers
Diskette.  Do the following:
are in a response file that you place on installation Diskette 1  The
  1. If you are using a ThinkPad, detach it from the Docking Station.
Installation program reads the file from Diskette 1instead of prompting you for
  2. Create a Reference Diskette by following the documentation that came with
the installation information.
      your computer.
  3. Make a copy of the Installation Diskette. Type diskcopy a: a: and press
      Enter. Remove and insert diskettes when prompted to do so.
  4. Remove the copy from drive A and insert the original Installation
      Diskette.
  5. Turn your computer onIf your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
      to restart it.
  6. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette, insert
      Diskette 1, and press Enter.
  7. When the Welcome screen appears, press F3 to display the command prompt.
  8. Insert the copy of the Installation Diskette into drive A.
  9. Type a:\del *.bio and press Enter.
  10. Remove the copy of the Installation Diskette and insert the Reference
      Diskette you created into drive A.
  11. If your computer has more than one diskette drive, insert the copy of the
      Installation Diskette into drive B. In the next two steps, you will be
      prompted to insert diskettes into both drive A and drive B.
      If you computer has only one diskette drive, when you are asked to insert
      a diskette into drive A, insert the Reference Diskette into your diskette
      drive. When you are asked to insert a diskette into drive B, insert the
      copy of the Installation Diskette into your diskette drive.
  12. Type copy a:\*.bio b:\ and press Enter.
  13. Type copy a:\abios.sys b:\ and press Enter.
  14. Turn off your computer.  If you are using a ThinkPad, return it to the
      Docking Station.


  Adding the Sample Response File to Your System    268/3+
  Using a System with an Aox Upgrade   307/2


A sample response file is included on the OS/2 installation diskettes.  When you
If you have a system with a 286 processor that has been upgraded to a 386SX with
install the operating system, this response file (called SAMPLE.RSP) is placed
an Aox upgrade and you want to install OS/2 Version 3, you must start the system
in the OS2\INSTALL directory.
with DOS and run the AOX232.EXEContact the Aox Technical Support Group to
The SAMPLE.RSP file and other files needed for a response file installation are
request a copy of AOX232.EXE before continuing with the installation of OS/2.
not automatically installed on your system if you installed OS/2 using the Easy
Installation method.  You must add these files to your system in order to use
them. Follow these steps:
  1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Selective InstallThe Software Configuration screen appears.
  4. Select Optional System Utilities.
  5. Select the More push button to the right of Optional System Utilities.  A
      window appears with a list of utilities.
  6. Place a check mark next to Installation Utilities; then select Install.
  7. When prompted to do so, insert the requested installation diskettes.
      Select OK when you are done.


  Modifying the Sample Response File   269/4
  Using a Quantum II XL Hard Card   308/2


After you install the SAMPLE.RSP file on your own system, you can modify the
If you have a Quantum hard card, you must make a modification to the
SAMPLE.RSP file and use it to install OS/2 on another workstation. Use an
BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file. To modify the BASEDEV
editor (such as the System Editor) to modify the sample response file.
statement, do the following:
The following is an excerpt from the sample response file:
  1. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1.
*************************************
  2. Change the BASEDEV statement to:
*AlternateAdapter
      BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /A:1 /IRQ
*;
      (The settings shown are the defaults for the Quantum hard card.)
* Specifies secondary adapter for two display systems.
  3. Save the CONFIG.SYS file.
* This should be a  lower or equal resolution display since
   4. Install OS/2 Version 3.
* the highest resolution display will be primary for PM.
 
*
Using a Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi,  BSR, or Tandy Non-SCSI CD-ROM Drive   309/2+
* Valid Parms
 
*
For the Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR, or Tandy
*   0=None (DEFAULT)
non-SCSI drives to be recognized by OS/2 Version 3, the base port address
*   1=Other than following (DDINSTAL will handle)
specified on the CD-ROM BASEDEV statement in the CONFIG.SYS file must match the
*   2=Monochrome /Printer Adapter
base I/O port address specified on the CD-ROM host adapter card.
*   3=Color Graphics Adapter
Note:  If you are installing OS/2 from a CD-ROM, you might first need to modify
*   4=Enhanced Graphics Adapter
the BASEDEV statement for your CD-ROM device driver in the CONFIG.SYS file on
*   5=PS/2 Display Adapter
the diskette labeled Diskette 1. See also the section called "Using an
*   6=Video Graphics Adapter
Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination."
*   7=8514/A Adapter
*   8=XGA Adapter
*   9=SVGA Adapter
*************************************
AlternateAdapter=0


  Copying the Response File to Diskette 1   270/3
  Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-31A Device Driver   310/3


Use the following steps to make changes to the sample response file. After
The Sony SONY31A.ADD device driver supports the following CD-ROM drives:
making the changes, you will copy the file to a copy of Diskette 1You must
      Sony CDU-31A, CDU-7305
also make some modifications to the copy of Diskette 1to make room on it for the
      Sony CDU-33A, CDU-7405
response file.
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Sony CD-ROM device
  1. Install OS/2 on a computer.
driver.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD
  2. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode from the default,
  3. Open Command Prompts.
software polling transfer, to software interrupt transferThe syntax for the
  4. Open OS/2 Window.
BASEDEV statement is as follows:
  5. Insert Diskette 1into drive A.
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD [/A:d][/AT:dd][/P:nnn][/I:nn][/V]
   6. Type diskcopy a: a: and press Enter.
where:
  7. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert a blank,
[/A:d]   Identifies a specific adapter, d. The adapter is specified as a
       formatted diskette.  (This diskette will be used to make a copy of
          single-digit value which is zero based (for example, the first
       Diskette 1)
          adapter is specified as /A:0).
  8. Make sure the copy of Diskette 1is in drive A. Then type del a:\mouse.sys
[/AT:dd]  Sets the adapter type connected to the CD-ROM drive. Supported values
      and press Enter.
          are:
  9. Type del a:\sysinst2.exe and press Enter.
       00 = Sony CDB-334 (default)
  10. If you are installing from a CD, this step is not necessary; go to step
       05 = Echo** Speech (with ESC614 chip)
      10If you are installing from diskettes, type del a:\bundle and press
                  Orchid** SoundWave 32
      Enter.
                  Orchid GameWave 32
   11. To edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the copy of Diskette 1 type e a:\config.sys
                  Cardinal DSP16
      and press Enter.
      08 = MediaVision** Pro AudioSpectrum 16
  12. Change the following statement from:
[/P:nnn]  Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The port
      SET OS2_SHELL=SYSINST2.EXE to the following:
          address is specified as a four-digit hex value. Leading zeros should
      SET OS2_SHELL=RSPINST.EXE A:\OS2SE30.RS                                P
          be specified. The value must be the same number as the port address
  13. Delete the following statement from the CONFIG.SYS file:
          selected by the jumper on the host interface card.
      DEVICE=MOUSE.SYS
          If this parameter is not specified, the default port address for the
  14. Save and close the CONFIG.SYS file. At the prompt, type the following and
          host adapter is usedFor the Sony CDB-334 host interface card, the
      press Enter after each command:
          default is 0340. For the Media Vision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 card, the
      CD\OS2\INSTALL
          default is 1F88.
      COPY SAMPLE.RSP OS2SE30.RSP
[/I:nn]   Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
  15. Use an editor (such as the System Editor) to make your changes to the
          the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface card. If
      response file so you can use it for installing OS/2. Then save and close
          this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
      the file.
          polling transfer.
  16. At the prompt, type the following and press Enter after each command:
          Note: Some Sony CDB-334 host adapter cards do not include the
      COPY OS2SE30.RSP A:
          plastic jumper switch to select the IRQ channel on the IRQ jumper
      COPY C:\RSPINST.EXE A:\
          block. You must obtain and install the plastic jumper switch to
  17. Remove the copy of Diskette 1from drive A.
          enable the IRQ channel.
  18. If you have a non-Micro Channel computer, go to step 20. f you have a
[/V]      Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
      Micro Channel computer and the Reference Diskette contains ABIOS.SYS and
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
      *.BIO files, you will also need to modify the Installation Diskette that
The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
      came with OS/2. Follow these steps:
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
        a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
each CD-ROM drive.
        b. Type diskcopy a: a: and press Enter.
Example 1: The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony
        c. When prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette from drive A
CDB-334 host adapter.
          and insert a blank, formatted diskette. Then press Enter. This makes
The Sony CDB-334 host adapter supports base I/O port addresses of 320h, 330h,
          a copy of the Installation Diskette, which you will use in the next
340h, or 360h. If the host adapter is set to its default port address of 340h,
          step.
the CONFIG.SYS statement does not need to be modified and should appear as
        d. Make sure the copy you just made of the Installation Diskette is in
  follows:
          drive A. Type the following and press Enter after each command:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD
          DEL A:\*.BIO
If the CDB-334 host adapter is set to any port address other than the default
          DEL A:\ABIOS.SYS
  of 340h, the CONFIG.SYS statement must be modified. For example, if the Sony
        e. Remove the copy of the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert
CDB-334 host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 360, the line in the
          the Reference Diskette.
CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
        f. Type the following and press Enter after each command:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P
          COPY A:\*.BIO C:\
If, in the above situation, the driver is operating in interrupt mode at IRQ
          COPY A:\ABIOS.SYS C:\
channel 5, the line in your CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
        g. Remove the Reference Diskette from drive A and insert the copy of the
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P:0360 /I
          Installation Diskette. Type the following and press Enter after each
Example 2: The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a
          command:
MediaVision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 host adapter.
          COPY C:\*.BIO A:\
  In this case, the line in CONFIG.SYS must be modified and should appear as
          COPY C:\ABIOS.SYS A:\
follows:
          Note: This Installation Diskette copy is now system-specific. You
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /AT
          will need to create a modified Installation Diskette for each type of
Note: The default port address for the CDU-31A when attached to the PAS-16
          system on which you are installing OS/2.
card is 1F88. The Sony Desktop Library model numbers CDU-31A-LL/L and CDU-7305
        h. Use this copy of the Installation Diskette during the installation
  include the PAS-16 adapter.
          process.
Example 3:  The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a Creative
  19. When prompted for Diskette 1during the installation, insert the modified
Labs Sound Blaster Pro, Sound Blaster 16, or Sound Blaster 16 MultiCD host
      copy you made of Diskette 1and press Enter.
adapter.
      From this point on, the Installation program will prompt only for the
The port address specified on the BASEDEV statement in CONFIG.SYS should be 10h
      insertion of diskettes. No other installation actions are necessary.
above the base I/O port address specified on these adapter cards. For example,
  20. When prompted to insert Diskette 1again, insert the original Diskette
if the Sound Blaster card is set for a base I/O port address of 220h, the line
      1into drive A.
  in CONFIG.SYS should appear as follows:
  Response files can be used to install the same set of options on multiple
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P
  workstationsHowever, be sure that the workstations are set up with the same
  Example 4:  The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to the Echo
  set of options and hardware.
Speech, Orchid SoundWave 32, Orchid GameWave 32, or Cardinal DSP16 host
  adapter.
  In this case, the line in CONFIG.SYS must be modified and should appear as
follows:
  BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /AT


  Installing OS/2 from a Local Area Network Source   271/2
  Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-535 Device Driver   311/3


You can use a response file to direct the installation from a source other than
The Sony SONY535.ADD device driver supports the following CD-ROM drives:
a diskette in drive AFor example, in a local area network (LAN), you could
      Sony 531 series (CDU-531, 6201, 6205)
direct the installation to a drive on the serverThis type of installation
      Sony 535 series (CDU-535, 6205, 7205)
requires additional software (such as a LAN support product).
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Sony CD-ROM device
Be aware of the following requirements for remote installation of OS/2:
driver.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD
  o The RAM requirements vary from 6MB to 10MB or more, depending on the
line in the CONFIG.SYS fileAlso change the transfer mode from the default,
      installation variables.
software polling transfer, to software interrupt transferThe syntax for the
        - Redirected remote installation requires more RAM than disk
BASEDEV statement is as follows:
           installation because the SWAPPER.DAT file is not active.
BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD [P:nnn][/I:nn][/U:d,d...][/V]
        - If you are doing a redirected remote installation without CID
where:
           (configuration, installation, and distribution), you need only about
  [/P:nnn]. Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The value
           6MB of RAM.
          must be the same number as the port address specified by the jumper
        - If you are using CID, the RAM requirements usually range from 6MB to
          on the host interface card.
           8MB.
[/I:nn]Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
        - If you are using a process on top of CID, such as NVDM/2, 8MB to 10MB
           the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface card. If
          (or more) might be requiredThe main variable with CID is the size
          this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
           of the REXX procedure and which dynamic link libraries it pulls in.
          polling transfer.
           With remote installation, the LAN connection utility programs are the
          Note:  Some Sony host adapter cards do not include the plastic jumper
           main variablesThe version of OS/2 that you are installing is
          switch to select the IRQ channel on the IRQ jumper block. You must
           another variable.
           obtain and install the plastic jumper switch to enable the IRQ
  o During remote installation, the SWAPPER.DAT file is not active because the
           channel.
      disk partition containing the active swapper file cannot be formatted
  [/U:d,d...]. Specifies the drive unit number which the Sony CD-ROM drive is set
      during installation. The SWAPPER.DAT file can be made active, but the
           toThe value of d must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3If more than one
      disk partition has to be a local partition and it has to be preformatted.
          Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to the adapter, this parameter must be
      To activate the SWAPPER.DAT file, you must edit the CONFIG.SYS file. To do
           specified.  If only one CD-ROM drive is attached to the adapter, and
      this, replace the existing MEMMAN=NOSWAP statement with the following:
           this parameter is not specified, then the default unit ID used by the
      MEMMAN=SWAP,PROTECT
           driver is 0.
      SWAPPATH=D:\ 2048 4096
  [/V].    Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
  o Personal computers might require more RAM because the network drivers
           level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
      might have to store more data in the RAM buffers until the processor is
  The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
      able to handle the data.
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
  For more information, refer to the following IBM publications:
  each CD-ROM drive.
      OS/2 Version 2.1 Remote Installation and Maintenance
Example 1:  A Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony CDB-240 series host
      (GG24-3780)
adapter.
      NTS/2 Redirected Installation and Configuration Guide (S96F-8488)
If the Sony host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 360, the line in
      NTS/2 LAN Adapter and Protocol Support Configuration Guide (S96F-8489)
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
      Automated Installation for CID-Enabled OS/2 2.x (GG24-3783)
BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:360
      Automated Installation for CID-Enabled Extended Services, LAN Server V3.0
Example 2:  A Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony CDB-240 series host
      and Network Transport Services/2 (GG24-3781)
adapter.
 
  If the Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to the Sony host adapter at a base I/O
  Setting Up Your Hard Disk    272/1+
port address of 360h, and the driver is operating in interrupt mode at IRQ
 
channel 5, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
This chapter provides a detailed explanation of the Boot Manager feature
  BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:360 /I:5
available in OS/2, as well as information about hard disk partitioning and the
Example 3:  Multiple Sony CD-ROM drives are daisy-chained to a Sony CDB-240
FDISK utility program. This chapter will help you plan the setup of your hard
series host adapter.
disk before you begin installing OS/2.
If two Sony CD-ROM drives are daisy-chained from the Sony host adapter with the
In addition, this chapter provides detailed descriptions of some of the
  first drive set to drive unit 0 and the second set to drive unit 1, the line in
installation tasks that are outlined in Using Advanced Installation. If you want
  the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
more information about an Advanced Installation task as you are installing,
BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:340 /U:0,1
refer to the descriptions in this chapter.


  What Is the Boot Manager?   273/2
  Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Panasonic Device Driver   312/3


When you install multiple operating systems on your computer, you can use the
The Panasonic device driver (SBCD2.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
Boot Manager feature to manage the selective startup of those systems.  The Boot
  o  Panasonic CR-521, 522, 523, 562, 563
Manager startup menu lets you select which operating system you want to be
  o  Creative Labs OmniCD
active each time you start your system.
  o  IBM ISA CD-ROM drive
The following is an example of what the Boot Manager startup menu would look
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Panasonic CD-ROM
like if you installed the Boot Manager and three operating systemsThis menu
device driver.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the
would be displayed each time you started your computer, so that you could select
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode
which operating system should start.
from the default, software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer.
You use the FDISK utility program during the installation of OS/2 to install the
The syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows: BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD
Boot Manager feature. FDISK is a program supplied with OS/2 that can be used to
[/P:nnn][/T:n][/NS][/V]
manage such tasks as creating and deleting the partitions on your hard disk.
where:
Partitions are divisions you create on your hard disk to use as separate storage
[./P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card.  The value
areas.
          must be the same number as the port address selected by the jumper on
The following is a brief list of the steps you follow to set up your hard disk
          the host interface card.
for multiple operating systems.
[./T:n]  Sets the adapter type connected to the CD-ROM drive. The supported
  o You install the Boot Manager in its own partition (usually 1MB in size).
          value is:
  o You then create partitions for any operating systems (including OS/2) you
      Creative Labs CD-ROM interface card (not Sound Blaster)
      are going to install.
[./NS]    Disables drive select scanDriver will not scan for more than one
  o Next, you install the other operating systems in the partitions
          CD-ROM drive.
      you created for them.
[./V]    Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
      (If you want OS/2 to work with DOS and Windows, you must install DOS and
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
      Windows firstOtherwise, most operating systems can be installed after
  The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
      installing OS/2.)
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
  o Finally, you install the OS/2 operating system.
each CD-ROM drive.
Example 1:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a standard Panasonic or IBM ISA CD-ROM host adapter.
The standard Panasonic or IBM ISA host adapter supports base I/O port addresses
of 300h, 310h, 320h, or 330h.  For example, if the adapter is set to a base I/O
port address of 300, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:300
Example 2:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a Creative Labs Sound Blaster Pro, Sound Blaster 16, or Sound
Blaster 16 MultiCD.
  If the Sound Blaster card is set for a base I/O address of 220h, the line in
CONFIG.SYS should appears as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:220
Example 3:  A Creative Labs OmniCD is attached to a standard Creative Labs
CD-ROM host adapter (not Sound Blaster).
  The standard Creative Labs host adapter supports base I/O port addresses of
250h or 260h.  For example, if the adapter is set to a base I/O port address of
  250, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:250 /T:2
Example 4:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a MediaVision Jazz 16 sound card.
If the MediaVision card is set for a base I/O port address of 300h, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:300 /NS
  Example 5:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a Reveal audio card.
  If the Reveal audio card is set to a base I/O port address of 630h, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:630


  Hard Disk Partitioning   274/2+
  Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Philips CD-ROM Device Drivers   313/3


A hard disk can be partitioned in several different ways. For example, your hard
The Philips device driver (LMS205.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
disk can have one partition that takes up the entire hard disk.  However, if you
      Philips CM205, CM225
are going to install multiple operating systems on your hard disk (and install
  The Philips device driver (LMS206.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
the Boot Manager feature), you must separate the hard disk into multiple
      Philips CM205MS,CM225MS (multisession photo CD version of CM205)
partitions.
      Philips CM206, CM226
During the Advanced installation, you will be asked how you want your partitions
Note:  If you have installed OS/2 and find that your CD-ROM drive does not
set up. The default choice is to set up one partition (if you are installing on
function, you  must copy the LMS206.ADD file from Diskette 1 to the \OS2
a hard disk with no data) or to preserve the setup of an existing hard disk.  If
directory and add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file:
you choose to specify your own partition, the FDISK screen is displayed.
  BASEDEV=LMS206.ADD
From the FDISK screen, you specify the number and type of partitions that you
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Philips CD-ROM
want created. Your hard disk can be separated into a maximum of four primary
device drivers. The parameters can be changed by modifying the
partitions. You can create primary partitions, which are typically used for
BASEDEV=LMS205.ADD (or LMS206.ADD) line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change
operating systems.
the transfer mode from the default, software polling transfer, to software
Note:  If a partition is going to contain an operating system, the partition
  interrupt transfer. The syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows:
must be within the first 1024 cylinders.
  BASEDEV=LMS205.ADD [/P:nnn][/U:x][/M:y][/V]
You can also create logical drives in an area of the hard disk that is outside
  where:
the primary partitionsThis area is known as the extended partition. The
[./P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The value
logical drives within the extended partition are typically used to hold programs
          must be the same number as the port address selected by the jumper on
and data.
          the host interface card.
You can have four primary partitions or three primary partitions and one
[/U:x]    Identifies a specific unit, x. Valid values for x are 0, 1, 2, and
extended partition. If you are going to install multiple operating systems on
          3.  The default is zeroLMS205 and LMS206 locate all CM250 and
your hard disk, you must create one primary partition to contain the programs
          CM260 host adapters and assign unit numbers based on the order in
that manage the startup of multiple operating systems. (This partition is
          which each was found. This parameter tells LMS205 and LMS206 which
referred to as the Boot Manager partition.)
          BASEDEV line it is currently processing.
After the Boot Manager partition is created, you can create up to three
[/M:y]    Indicates the number of 2500-byte CD frame buffers that should be
additional primary partitions (to hold three operating systems).
          allocated by the LMS205.ADD or LMS2056.ADD driver. Valid values for y
An important aspect of primary partitions is the fact that, at any moment in
          are 8,...,26. The default is 16. Any value below the minimum (8)
time, only one of the primary partitions is active.  When a given primary
          will be assigned the minimum (8).
partition is active, any other primary partitions on the same physical disk
  [/V]      Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
cannot be accessed. Therefore, the operating system in one primary partition
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
cannot access the data in another primary partition on the same physical disk.
 
Another way of subdividing your hard disk is to create logical drives within an
Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Mitsumi CD-ROM Device Driver    314/3
extended partition. Logical drives are typically used to hold programs and data.
 
  However, you can also install OS/2  in a logical drive.
The Mitsumi device driver (MITFX001.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
The extended partition takes the place of one of the primary partitions on your
      Mitsumi CRMC-FX001D
hard disk. In other words, if you create logical drives within an extended
      Mitsumi CRMC-FX001
partition, your hard disk can contain only three primary partitions.
      Mitsumi CRMC-LU005S
If two logical drives have been set aside for data. That data can be shared by
      Mitsumi CRMC-LU002S
all the operating systems (provided the file system formats of the logical
      BSR 6800
drives are compatible with the operating systems).
      Tandy CDR-1000
All of the logical drives exist within one partition-the extended partition.
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Mitsumi CD-ROM
You don't explicitly create the extended partition. The extended partition is
device driver. The parameters can be changed by modifying the
created the first time you create a logical (non-primary) drive.
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS fileAlso change the transfer
One of the differences between a logical drive and a primary partition is that
mode from the default, software polling transfer, to software interrupt
each logical drive is assigned a unique drive letterHowever, all primary
transferThe syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows:
partitions on a hard disk share the same drive letter.  (On the first hard disk
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD [/P:nnn][/I:nn][/V]
in your system, the primary partitions share drive C). This means that only one
  where:
primary partition on a hard disk can be accessed at one time. (Note that the
  [/P:nnn]  Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. This must
Boot Manager partition is different from other primary partitions because it is
          be the same number as specified by the DIP switch on the interface
never assigned a drive letter.)
          card.
If you want OS/2 to be able to access the data in the partition of another
[/I:nn]  Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
operating system (for example, the DOS partition), install OS/2 in a logical
          the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface cardIf
drive.
          this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
Notice the drive letter assignments in this illustration. The operating system
          polling transfer.
that is active when you start the system performs a process known as drive
  [/V]      Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
mapping, in which partitions and logical drives are assigned drive letters.  All
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
the primary partitions are mapped first and all logical drives within extended
  The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
partitions are assigned subsequent drive letters (up through Z).
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
Important: Only one primary partition per hard disk can be active at a time.
each CD-ROM drive.
So, only one primary partition is actually assigned the letter C at any one
Example 1:  A Mitsumi CD-ROM drive is attached to a Mitsumi host adapter.
time. The other primary partitions are not mapped.
The Mitsumi host adapter supports I/O port address ranges from 300h to 3FCh.
An operating system maps only those drives with a format type that it supports.
If the Mitsumi host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of either 300h or
For example, DOS does not support the installable file system (IFS) format.
340h, the statement in CONFIG.SYS does not need to be modified and should
(The High Performance File System is an example of an IFS format.) Therefore,
appear as follows:
any partition or logical drive that is formatted with IFS is not mapped by DOS
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD
and is not assigned a drive letter.
If the Mitsumi host adapter is set to an address other than those specified
In the following figure, DOS is active in a primary partition. (The other
above, the BASEDEV statement needs to be modified. For example, if the Mitsumi
primary partitions are not mapped.) Drive D is formatted for the File
  host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 320, the line in the
Allocation Table (FAT) file system, which DOS recognizesHowever, the next
CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
drive is formatted with a file system that DOS does not recognizeTherefore,
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:320
DOS ignores this drive. Some versions of DOS (such as DOS Version 5.0) will
Example 2:A Mitsumi CD-ROM drive is attached to a Creative Labs Sound Blaster
recognize the last partition on the hard disk (in this example) and assign it
16 MultiCD.
the letter EIn other versions of DOS, no drives beyond the HPFS drive are
  If the Mitsumi CD-ROM port on the Sound Blaster 16 MultiCD is set to an I/O
recognizedTherefore, no data in those partitions can be used by DOS.
port address of 340, the line in CONFIG.SYS should appear as follows:
Because of the problems that can result when drives are remapped, you should
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:340
avoid deleting logical drives that exist in the middle of your hard diskFor
  Note:    To enable interrupt transfer mode, which improves performance, the /I
example, if you were to delete a logical drive from the middle of your disk, the
parameter must be specified. For example, to enable interrupt transfer mode
subsequent drives would be remapped. (Drive F would become drive E, and so on.)
for IRQ channel 10 at I/O port address of 320h, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file
Problems would result if any programs refer to the former drive letter.
  should appear as follows:
The important thing to remember when you are setting up your system is that only
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:320 /I:10
one primary partition can be accessible (active) on each hard disk at any system
startup. On the other hand, all the logical drives within the extended partition
are accessible (provided their file system formats are compatible with the
starting operating system). For example, suppose you had DOS 5.0 in one primary
partition and OS/2 in another primary partition. One of your logical drives is
formatted for FAT and contains a variety of DOS programs. You could start the
DOS programs from either of the primary partitions.
It is also important to understand what happens to the drive mapping if you add
a hard disk after you install OS/2The logical drives on your existing hard
disk will be remapped if your second hard disk has a primary partition on it.
Now, assume that you add a second hard disk to your system. The primary
partition of that second hard disk will be assigned D. The logical drives of
your first hard disk will be remapped. The existing logical drive D becomes E,
E becomes F, and so forth.
Because OS/2 is now in the logical drive assigned as E, all references to the
drive letter (for example, statements in your CONFIG.SYS and INI files) will
have to change. For this reason, it is strongly recommended that you place only
logical drives on the hard disk that you are adding.


  Planning for a Boot Manager Setup   275/3
  Using an Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination   315/2


When you are planning your Boot Manager setup, be aware of the following:
If you find that your drive or combination of CD-ROM drive and SCSI adapter is
  o Use primary partitions for DOS systems or versions of the OS/2 operating
not supported by OS/2 Version 3, you can contact the manufacturer and obtain an
      system prior to 2.0.
OS/2 Adapter Device Driver (.ADD) file. Then, after you receive the .ADD file,
  o To prevent the loss of usable disk space, create all primary partitions
use your current operating system and follow this procedure before you install
       contiguously, at the beginning or end of the disk free space area.
OS/2:
  o Put all installable file systems (such as the High Performance File
  1. Make a copy of Diskette 1At a command prompt, type diskcopy a: a: and
       System) at the end of the disk configuration.
       press Enter.
  o  Be aware of specific operating-system restrictions on the hard disk . For
  2. Copy the .ADD file to the root directory on the copy of Diskette 1.  (The
       example, to run properly, DOS 3.3 must be installed in a primary partition
       root directory is the first directory on the diskette.)  If there is not
       that is within the first 32MB of the hard disk.
      enough room, delete the following files from the copy of Diskette 1:
  o  If you are installing a primary partition for DOS and you intend to load
          For an ISA/EISA (non-Micro Channel) computer:  IBM2*.*
      that version of DOS into a DOS session of OS/2, you will need to change
          For a Micro Channel computer:  IBM1*.*
      the DOS CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files. (You do this after you finish
       You will now have room to add device drivers to Diskette 1. However, if
      installing the operating systems.) Refer to specific DOS version in the
      the .ADD driver is on a diskette, you might have to copy it to your hard
       starting topic of the Master Help Index(The Master Help Index is
       disk before copying it to the copy of Diskette 1.
       displayed on your screen after the OS/2 operating system is installed.)
  3. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file located on the copy of Diskette 1:
  o You can install both DOS and a version of the OS/2 operating system in the
        a. At the end of the file, add the appropriate BASEDEV= statement for
      same primary partition if you want to use the Dual Boot feature within
          your adapter.  For example, if your .ADD file is named T128SCSI.ADD,
      your Boot Manager setup. However, if DOS and OS/2 1.3 are in the primary
          add the following BASEDEV= statement shown in capital letters:
      partition, you will have to copy the BOOT.COM file from the OS/2 partition
                set cdrominst=1
      to the primary partition after you install OS/2.
                ifs=cdfs.ifs /q
   o  If you are using the IBM DOS 5.00 Upgrade to update your DOS 3.3 or DOS
                BASEDEV=T128SCSI.ADD
      4.0 system, you should be aware that some versions of the upgrade will not
          The lowercase letters represent lines that already exist in your
       recognize the DOS partition unless it is the only partition on the hard
          CONFIG.SYS file, and uppercase letters represent lines you need to
       disk. You might have to do the following:
          insert. This ensures proper placement and installation.
        1. Make sure that the DOS partition is the only primary partition on
          Do not specify a file path for the .ADD file.
          your hard disk.
        b. Insert the letters REM before any lines in the CONFIG.SYS file that
        2. Install the DOS 5.00 Upgrade.
          refer to the file you deleted in step 2 above.
        3. Add the Boot Manager partition and install OS/2.
  4. Begin the installation by inserting the Installation Diskette into drive A
  o  If you have a system with a VESA SUPER I/O controller and two disk drives,
       and restarting the systemWhen prompted to insert Diskette 1, insert the
       the system will not start DOS from the Boot Manager menuInstead, it
       copy that you modified.
      will display a non-system disk or disk error message.  For more
  5. Install OS/2 Version 3, following the instructions in Using Easy
      information on this message, check the VESA controller documentation or
      Installation or Using Advanced Installation
      contact the manufacturer.
When the installation is complete, you must make changes to the CONFIG.SYS file
  located in the root directory of the OS/2 partition in order to make your
CD-ROM accessible.  You must also copy the .ADD that you put on the copy of
Diskette 1 to the \OS2 directory of the OS/2 drive. The OS/2 Installation
program does not copy unsupported .ADD files automatically. Do the following
(in the following examples, X represents the OS/2 partition):
  1. Open the OS/2 System folder on the Desktop.
   2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open OS/2 Window.
  4. At the command prompt, type cd\os2 and press Enter.
  5. Insert Diskette 1 into drive A.  Then type the following, pressing Enter
      after each:
      COPY A:\OS2CDROM.DMD
       COPY A:\CDFS.IFS
  6. Remove Diskette 1 from drive A and insert the manufacturer-supplied device
      driver diskette (which contains the .ADD file).
  7. Type the following and then press Enter:
      COPY A:\T128SCSI.ADD
       where T128SCSI.ADD represents the name of the device driver file.
  8. Using a system editor, add the lines shown in uppercase letters to the
      CONFIG.SYS file as shown below. (Lowercase letters represent lines that
      already exist in your CONFIG.SYS file; uppercase letters represent lines
      you need to insert.  This ensures proper placement and installation.)
      basedev=ibm1s506.add
      basedev=os2dasd.dmd
      DEVICE=X:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
      IFS=X:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
      set bookshelf=x:\os2\book . . .
      codepage=437,850
      devinfo=kbd,us,x:\os2\keyboard.dcp
       BASEDEV=T128SCSI.ADD
      devinfo=scr,vga,x:\os2\viotbl.dcp
  9. Save the CONFIG.SYS file and exit the editor.
  10. Shut down your system.
  The above procedure is not guaranteed to make your CD-ROM work properly because
the device drivers are made by manufacturers other than IBM.  For further
assistance, contact the manufacturer or your CD-ROM drive.


  The FDISK Utility Program   276/2+
  Using an IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter   316/2


When you install OS/2 with the Advanced Installation method, yo          u use
TheM -
the FDISK utility program to install the Boot Manager feature and to set up the
AudioadaptercanbeconfiguredtoautomaticallyrouteanyaudiosourceattachedtoitsLINE -
partitions on your hard disk. During Advanced Installation, the FDISK screen
INjacktotheLINE - OUTjack .  ThismightbenecessaryifyourCD -
appears so that you can see how the partitions are currently set up on your
ROMdriveisnotattachedinternallytotheaudiocardoutputs .
system.
ToenablethisfeatureoftheM - Audiocard ,addaPtotheendoftheDEVICE =statementforM -
AudiointheCONFIG . SYSfile ,asinthefollowingexample :
DEVICE=d:\MMOS2\ACPADD2.SYS A P
where d represents the drive letter, which will already appear in your
CONFIG.SYS file.


  The Options Menu   277/3
  Using a Sound Blaster Adapter   317/2


When you press the Enter key from the FDISK screen, the Options menu appears.
Before you install the Sound Blaster adapter into your computer, you must know
The following list describes each of the choices on the Options menu. Some of
the interrupt level, I/O port address, and the DMA channels. These values were
the choices are available only under certain conditions. (They appear in black
shown when you installed the adapter into your computer.  If you do not know
on the menu.) If you try to select an unavailable choice, the system will
these values, you can do the following:
respond with a warning beep.
  o On a Micro Channel computer, run the Reference Diskette and look at the
Install Boot Manager This choice is used only once--when you create the
      system configuration.
  partition for the Boot Manager.  It is unavailable thereafter.
  o On an ISA/EISA (non-Micro Channel) computer, check the Dip switches on
Create partition This choice is used to create primary partitions and logical
      your Sound Blaster.
drives within the extended partition. You can use this choice whenever free
  If your computer has a Token Ring Adapter or a SCSI adapter, you might have
  space is available on the hard disk.
  problems if you set Sound Blaster to use I/O port address 220Choose a
  Add to Boot Manager menu This choice is used to add the name of a partition or
  different address if you have either of these adapters installed.  I/O address
  logical drive to the Boot Manager startup menuYou should use this choice for
  240 is a good choice if 220 cannot be used.
  any operating system that you want to be able to select when you start the
  ISA and EISA (non-Micro Channel) computers use Interrupt level 7 for the
  system.  When you select this choice, the New Name window is displayed. You use
  printer (LPT) portIf you have this type of computer with a parallel printer,
  the New Name window to assign a meaningful name to the partition or logical
  choose a different interrupt.
  drive.
  o This release of OS/2 does not support MIDI recording.
  Change partition name This choice is used to change the name that you have
  o Sound Blaster (non-SB PRO) does not support software volume control.  The
  previously assigned to a partition or logical drive.
      MMPM/2 Volume Control application will, therefore, be ineffective for
  Assign C: partition This choice is used to specify which primary partition you
      these adapters.
  want to be active (when more than one primary partition is installed on your
  o If you have an older Sound Blaster (non-SB PRO) card, ensure that you
system).  The placement of the drive letter (C) tells you which primary
      upgrade the DSP module to Version 2.0 or higher. Versions 1.0 and 1.5 are
partition will be visible (or accessible) after you restart the system.
      not supported by the Sound Blaster device drivers.
  Set startup values This choice is used to specify the actions of the Boot
 
Manager startup menu.  For example, with Set startup values, you can specify
  Using a Pro AudioSpectrum 16    318/2
how long you want the Boot Manager menu to be displayed before the default
 
  operating system is started. You can also specify which operating system you
The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 is conceptually two sound cards in one adapterThe
want as the default.
adapter provides support for the MediaVision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 and the Sound
  Remove from Boot Manager menu This choice is used to delete a name from the
Blaster 2.0. A Yamaha OPL-3 chip is included for FM MIDI synthesisIt is used
Boot Manager startup menuWhen you delete the name, you can no longer select
by the OS/2 device driver for MIDI playback and for MIDI background sound when
the operating system associated with that name from the Boot Manager startup
playing games.
  menu.
The FM MIDI hardware is the same as used in Creative Labs Sound Blaster adapters
  Delete partition This choice is used to delete information about a primary
and is fixed to always respond at a single I/O base addressThis commonality
partition or logical drive. After you exit from FDISK, all the data in the
of hardware is the reason that multiple Pro AudioSpectrum 16 adapters and
partition or logical drive is deleted(If you want to save any of the data in
multiple Sound Blaster adapters cannot be used in a single computer.
a partition, be sure to back up the data be fore deleting the partition.)
The OS/2 physical device driver does not use the Sound Blaster wave audio side
  Set installable This choice is used to mark a partition or logical drive as the
of the adapter.  This is left free for use by WIN-OS/2 sessions or by games
target for installation. For example, during the installation of OS/2, you set
running in DOS sessions.
  one primary partition (or logical drive) as installable. (This partition or
The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 side of the adapter requires one interrupt (IRQ), one
drive is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
Direct Memory Access (DMA) channel, and two I/O addresses. The Sound Blaster
After you install the operating system, the status of this partition will
side also uses one interrupt (IRQ), one DMA channel, and two I/O addresses. The
change from Installable to Bootable.
values for each side of the adapter must be unique just as those selected for
  If you use FDISK after the OS/2 installation (in preparation for installing
other hardware adapters must be unique. I/O addresses 388 and 330 will not be
other operating systems), you can mark only primary partitions on the first
seen in the device driver statement.
  hard disk as installable.
The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 configurations (DMA and IRQ) are set via software at
  Any partition that is set installable must reside within the first 1024
system startup, based on parameters specified on the DEVICE= line of the
  cylinders of the hard disk. In addition, if you have more than two hard disk
CONFIG.SYS fileThe values are set by OS/2 Multimedia installation.  An
  drives, be aware that some adapter manufacturers  support the booting of
example of the DEVICE= line that should appear in your CONFIG.SYS file for the
  partitions on the first two hard disk drives only.
Pro AudioSpectrum 16 device driver follows:
  Also note that some SCSI drives that use removable media cannot be partitioned.
DEVICE=D:\MMOS2\MVPRODD.SYS /I:10 /D:5 /S:1,240,1,5 /N:PAS161$
  Make startable This choice is used to determine which primary partition is
where:
  activated when you start your system. When you install the Boot Manager, it is
  /N:xxxxx  Specifies the name of the driver.
  automatically marked as StartableThis means that the Boot Manager is in
  /T:x      /T:1 = use on-board oscillator for OPL-3 (the default is /T:0).
  control when you start your systemOnly one primary partition on the first
  /D:x      Sets the DMA channel.
  hard disk can be made startableIf you set any other primary partition
  /Q:x      Sets the IRQ channel.
  startable, the Boot Manager startup menu will not appear when you start the
  /I:x      Sets the IRQ channel.
  system.
  /B:xxx    Specifies HEX base board I/O location (the default is /B:388).
 
  /W:x      If /W:1, enables warm boot reset (the default is /W:0).
  Creating a Boot Manager Setup    278/2+
  /M:x,xxx MPU [enabled,base address]
  /F:x      FM synthesis (/F:1 is enabled by default).
  /J:x      /J:1 causes a joystick to be enabled (the default is /J:0).
/S:x,xxx,x,x Sound Blaster [enable,base address,DMA,IRQ]
  The Sound Blaster DMA is fixed at DMA channel 1. The I/O base address and IRQ
  settings are set differently based on the version of the Pro AudioSpectrum 16
  adapter. Older adapters have these values set via jumpers on the card. The
  current versions set the Sound Blaster settings via software on the command
line to MVPRODD.SYS (or MVSOUND.SYS for DOS).
  As of this release of OS/2, the device driver MVPRODD.SYS does not know how to
  set the Sound Blaster IRQ from software. Only the first two parameters of the
  /S: parameters are used (enable and I/O location).


The following sections describe in detail how to delete and create partitions,
Keyboard and Mouse Use    319/1+
how and why to make selections from the Options menu, and how to specify options
for how the Boot Manager will start up. Using Advanced Installation provides
quick procedures you can follow to perform these actions.  You can refer to the
sections here if you need more detailed information.


  Deleting Existing Partitions    279/3
The following tables list some of the most common tasks you can do, using either
the keyboard or a mouse. The plus (+) sign between key names means to press and
hold down the keys in the order shown and release them together.
When a column is left blank under the Mouse heading, it means that there is no
equivalent mouse function.  The keyboard must be used.
The following terms are used to describe actions taken with a mouse:
Click        Press and release a mouse button.  Instructions explain whether
              you should click mouse button 1 or 2.
Double-click  Press and release mouse button 1 twice in quick succession.
Drag          Move an object across the computer screen with a mouse.
Open          Point to an item and double-click.  Instructions explain which
              item to point to.
Point        Move the mouse pointer.
Select        Point to an item and click mouse button 1.  Instructions explain
              which item to point to.
Note:  For a detailed list of specific key assignments, see the Master Help
Index.


To set up your system for installation, you must make sure there is enough room
  System Tasks    320/2
on your hard disk to accommodate the desired partitions. If you use the Advanced
Installation method to install OS/2,
  it might be necessary for you to delete some or
all of the existing partitions on your hard disk.
For example, if your hard disk currently has only one partition that takes up
the entire hard disk and you want to put OS/2 in its own partition, you must
delete the existing partition.  However, if your hard disk has ample free space
for OS/2, you can keep one or more existing partitions and add to them.
Important:  All information you want to save must be backed up. Changing the
size of a partition deletes all information in that partition, and the entire
operating system must be reinstalled when the new partition is created.
To delete an existing partition, you would follow these steps:
  1. On the FDISK screen, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight the
      partition you want to delete.
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  3. Select Delete partition and press Enter.  The information about that
      partition is deleted, and the words Free Space appear in the space
      formerly occupied by the partition information.
  4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for any other partitions you want to delete.
After deleting the partitions on your hard disk, you must create the Boot
Manager partition.


  Creating the Boot Manager Partition   280/3
ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
3 TASK                  3 KEYS        3 MOUSE                                3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Get help.              3 F1          3 Select the word HELP.                3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Restart the system.    3 Ctrl+Alt+Del3                                      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Switch to the next    3 Alt+Tab    3 Select the window.                    3
3 window.                3            3                                      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Switch to the next    3 Alt+Esc    3 Press both mouse buttons at the same 3
3 window or full-screen  3            3 time; open the window.                3
3 session.              3            3                                      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Display the Window    3 Ctrl+Esc   3 Point to an empty area on the        3
3 List.                  3            3 desktop; click both mouse buttons at  3
3                        3            3 the same time.                        3
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY


During the Advanced Installation method, you must create a Boot Manager
  Object Tasks   321/2
partition. To create this partition, follow these steps:
   1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted on the FDISK screen.
      If it is not, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight it.
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  3. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
  4. Specify whether the Boot Manager partition should be at the beginning or
      at the end of the available free space on the hard disk.
      Note:  The only restriction on the placement of the Boot Manager partition
      is that it be within the first 1024 cylinders of the first hard disk.
      Typically, the first 1024 cylinders is equal to 1GB (gigabyte), or 1024MB.
After creating the Boot Manager partition, you can create any other partitions
you need to install OS/2 and the other operating systems you want to use on
your computer.


  Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems   281/3+
ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
 
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
After you create the partition for the Boot Manager, you create primary
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
partitions for any DOS or Windows versions or previous versions of OS/2 that you
3 Move among objects.    3  ,  , , or              3 Point to the object.   3
are going to installAt this time, you can also create any logical drives for
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
data or programs or to install OS/2.
3 Select an object.      3 Use the arrow keys to    3 Select the object.      3
Consider the following before you begin creating the partitions:
3                        3 move among the objects3                        3
   o  If you prefer, and if you have sufficient free space on the hard disk, you
3                        3 Press the Spacebar to   3                        3
      can leave existing partitions intact until you have completely transferred
3                        3 select an object.       3                        3
      data processing operations to OS/2.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
   o  You can install OS/2 in its own partition and place your programs and data
3 Select more than one    3 Shift+F8 to begin Add   3 Press and hold the Ctrl 3
      in a separate logical driveThis arrangement makes it easier to back up
3 object.                3 mode. Use the arrow keys 3 key.  Select an object. 3
      those programs and data.
3                        3 to move among objects.  3 Repeat as needed.       3
  o  If multiple types of file systems are needed, determine if you want them
3                        3 Press the Spacebar to   3 Release the Ctrl key    3
      in a separate partition or placed on a logical drive.
3                        3 make each selection.    3 when done.              3
   o  When determining how much space to allocate for the OS/2 partition,
3                        3 Repeat as neededPress 3                        3
       consider some of the tools and applications you will be installing and
3                        3 Shift+F8 again to end    3                        3
      whether you want to install them in the OS/2 partition or on another
3                        3 Add mode.                3                        3
      logical drive. For example, if you want to install the OS/2 Toolkit, you
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      can install it on a separate logical drive instead of the default
3 Select all objects.    3 Press Ctrl+/            3 Press and hold mouse    3
      partition used for OS/2.
3                        3                          3 button 1; then drag the 3
   o  Allow enough room in your OS/2 partition for the growth of a swap file. A
3                        3                          3 pointer over every      3
      swap file contains segments of a program
3                        3                          3 object.                 3
      or data temporarily
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      moved out of main storage. The swap file (SWAPPER.DAT) requires at least
3 Deselect all objects.  3 Press Ctrl+\            3 Select an empty area on 3
      2MB of hard disk space but might require much moreYou can include this
3                        3                          3 the desktop.           3
      space in your OS/2 partition, or you can set up a logical drive for the
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      swap file.
3 Open an object.        3 Select it; then press   3 Point to the object;    3
   o  Some operating systems, such as AIX*, require that their own disk utility
3                        3 Enter.                  3 then double-click.      3
      program create the installation partitionThe OS/2 FDISK utility program
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      cannot create the partition for these operating systems. If you are going
3 Delete an object.       3 Select it; then press    3 Point to the object;    3
      to install AIX, make sure you leave sufficient free space for it on the
3                        3 Shift+F10.  Select      3 then press and hold    3
      hard disk.
3                        3 DELETE from      the     3 down mouse button 2.    3
  o If you have applications that require other operating systems, such as
3                        3 pop-up menu.             3 Drag the object to the 3
      AIX, check the amount of storage space recommended by the supplier.
3                        3                          3 Shredder object.        3
  To create partitions and logical drives for your other operating systems and
3                        3                          3 Release mouse button 2. 3
  for your programs and data, follow these steps:
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
  1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted on the FDISK screen.
3 Print an object.        3 Select it; then press    3 Point to the object;    3
      If it is not, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight it.
3                        3 Shift+F10. Select PRINT 3 then press and hold    3
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
3                        3 from the pop-up menu.   3 down mouse button 2.    3
  3. Select Create partition and press Enter.
3                        3                          3 Drag the object to the 3
  4. Type the size (in MB) of the partition you are creatingUse the
3                        3                          3 Printer object.         3
      following table to help you determine a minimum size for the partition.
3                        3                          3 Release mouse button 2. 3
      For specific information about partition sizes, refer to the
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      documentation
3 Move an object.         3 Select it; then press    3 Point to the object;    3
      that came with the product you will be installing.
3                        3 Shift+F10Select MOVE  3 then press and hold    3
      place=inline width=column frame=box id=dpart rules=horiz hdframe=rules
3                        3 from the pop-up menu.    3 down mouse button 2.    3
      hp='2 0 0
3                        3                          3 Drag the object to      3
      0' split=yes expand.
3                        3                          3 another folder object3
      ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
3                        3                          3 Release mouse button 2. 3
      ?
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      3          Planning Table for Partition Sizes
3 Copy an object.         3 Select it; then press    3 Press and hold down the 3
      3
3                        3 Shift+F10Select COPY  3 Ctrl key; then point to 3
      CDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
3                        3 from the pop-up menu.    3 the objectPress and 3
      4
3                        3                          3 hold down mouse button 3
      3 CONTENTS 3 SIZE    3 HARD DISK CONSIDERATIONS
3                        3                          3 2. Drag the object to  3
      3
3                        3                          3 where you want a copy  3
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
3                        3                          3 to appear. Release    3
      4
3                        3                          3 mouse button 2; then    3
      3 DOS 3.3 3 2MB      3 Must be in a primary partition within the first
3                        3                          3 release the Ctrl key.   3
       32MB  3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      3         3         3 on the first hard disk.
3 Change the name of an  3 Select the object; then  3 Press and hold down the 3
       3
3 object.                 3 press Shift+F10. Press  3 Alt key; select the    3
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
3                        3  ; then press Enter.     3 name (title).  Release  3
      4
3                        3 Select the GENERAL tab.  3 the Alt keyEdit the 3
      3 DOS 4.0  3 3MB      3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
3                        3 Select the TITLE field;  3 name. Select an area  3
      disk. 3
3                        3 then edit the name.      3 away from the name.    3
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      4
3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Press Alt+Shift+Tab;    3 Point to an empty area  3
      3 DOS 5.0 3 4MB      3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
3 for the desktop folder. 3 then press Ctrl+\. Then 3 of the desktop folder;  3
      disk. 3
3                        3 press Shift+F10.        3 then click mouse button 3
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
3                        3                          3 2.                     3
      4
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      3 DOS 6.3 8MB      3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Select it; then press    3 Point to the object;    3
      disk. 3
3 for an object.         3 Shift+F10.              3 then click mouse button 3
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
3                         3                         3 2.                      3
      4
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      3 OS/2 1.x 3 20MB    3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
3 Select the first choice 3 Home                    3 Select the choice.     3
      disk. 3
3 in a pop-up menu.       3                         3                        3
      3 SE      3         3 Installs in less than 20MB, but segment swapping
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      is    3
3 Select the last choice  3 End                      3 Select the choice.     3
      3         3         3 inhibited.
3 in a pop-up menu.       3                          3                        3
      3
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
      4
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
      3 OS/2 1.x 3 30MB     3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      disk. 3
3 Select a choice using  3 Type the underlined      3                        3
      3 EE      3         3 Installs in less than 30MB with reduced function.
3 the underlined letter.  3 letter.                 3                        3
      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
3 Get Help.               3 Select and object; then 3 Point to the object;    3
      4
3                        3 press F1.               3 then click mouse button 3
      3 OS/2 2.0 3 15-33MB 3 Can be in a primary partition or logical drive.
3                        3                          3 2.  Select HELP.        3
      If    3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      3         3         3 you choose a minimum size for the partition, you
3 Move between the object 3 Press Alt+F6.           3 Select the window or    3
      might 3
3 and the Help window.    3                          3 object.                 3
      3          3         3 want to place the swap file on another partition.
 
      3
Window Tasks    322/2
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
 
      4
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
      3 OS/2 2.1 3 20-40MB  3 OS/2 2.1 can be in a primary partition or logical
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      3
3 Get Help.              3 F1.                     3 Select the word HELP;  3
      3         3 (Plus    3 drive. If you choose a minimum size for the
3                         3                          3 then select the type of 3
      parti-    3
3                        3                          3 help you want.         3
      3         3 10MB for 3 tion, you might want to place the swap file on
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      another 3
3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Alt+Spacebar            3 Point to the title-bar  3
      3         3 swap    3 partition.
3 for a window.          3                          3 icon; then click mouse  3
      3
3                         3                         3 button 2.               3
      3         3 file and 3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      3
3 Move a window.         3 Alt+F7; then use the     3 Point to the title bar; 3
      3         3 5MB for 3 If you want to install all the features and you
3                        3 arrow keys.             3 then press and hold    3
      want   3
3                         3                         3 down mouse button 2.   3
      3         3 multi-  3 the swap file in the same partition, consider
3                        3                          3 Drag the window to the  3
      making   3
3                         3                          3 new location. Release 3
      3         3 media)  3 the OS/2 partition larger.
3                         3                         3 mouse button 2.        3
      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
3 Size a window.         3 Alt+F8; then use the    3 Point to the border;    3
      4
3                        3 arrow keys.             3 then press and hold    3
      3 OS/2    3 25-45MB  3 OS/2 can be in a primary partition or logical
3                         3                         3 down mouse button 2.   3
      drive.   3
3                         3                         3 Drag the border of the 3
      3 Version 3 (Plus    3 If you choose a minimum size for the partition,
3                        3                          3 window in any direc-    3
      you    3
3                         3                         3 tion.  Release mouse    3
      3 3        3 10MB for 3 might want to place the swap file on another
3                         3                         3 button 2.               3
      parti-    3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      3         3 swap    3 tion.
3 Set a default size for  3 Press Alt; then press S. 3 Press and hold the      3
      3
3 a window.              3 Use the up, down, left,  3 Shift key; then point  3
      3         3 file and 3
3                         3 or right cursor keys to 3 to a corner of the     3
      3
3                        3 adjust two of the        3 window border.  Press   3
      3         3 10MB for 3 If you want to install all the features and you
3                         3 borders; then press      3 and hold mouse button   3
      want   3
3                         3 Enter.                  3 1; then drag the border 3
      3         3 multi-   3 the swap file in the same partition, consider
3                         3                         3 to the desired size.   3
      making   3
3                         3 NOTE: If you press the 3 Release mouse button 1; 3
      3         3 media)  3 the OS/2 partition larger.
3                         3        mnemonic key for 3 then release the Shift  3
       3
3                         3       Hide, Minimize,  3 key.                   3
      CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
3                        3        or Maximize,      3                        3
      4
3                         3       instead of the S  3                         3
      3 AIX     3         3 Partition size determined and built by AIX Disk
3                         3       for Size, the    3                        3
      3
3                        3        selected choice   3                        3
      3         3         3 utility program. Partition is created at the end
3                         3       will become the   3                         3
      of  3
3                        3        default size of   3                        3
      3          3         3 the hard disk.
3                         3       the window.      3                        3
      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      @DDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
3 Minimize a window.     3 Alt+F9                  3 Select the Minimize    3
      Y
3                         3                         3 button.                 3
      Place system tools or common applications in a logical drive within the
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      extended partition so that the data can be shared among the operating
3 Hide a window.         3 Alt+F11                  3 Select the Hide button. 3
      systems.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
  5. Specify whether this is a primary partition or a logical drive within the
3 Maximize a window.      3 Alt+F10                  3 Select the Maximize    3
      extended partition. Consider the following:
3                        3                          3 button.                3
         o  All versions of DOS must reside in primary partitions on the first
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
          hard disk. Versions of OS/2 before 2.0 must also reside in primary
3 Close a window.        3 Alt+F4                  3 Double-click on the     3
          partitions. (Remember that primary partitions cannot share data.)
3                        3                          3 title bar icon.         3
         o  Logical drives within an extended partition are shareable.  This
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
          means that any data installed in the logical drive can be used by an
3 Move up through the    3 Page Up or PgUp.        3 Select the area above  3
          operating system running from any other active logical drive on the
3 contents of a window,  3                          3 the slider box on the   3
          system, if the file system formats are compatible.
3 one page at a time.    3                          3 scroll bar.             3
  6. Specify the location of the partition or logical drive you want to create.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
        Select either Create at Start of Free Space or Create at End of Free
3 Move down through the   3 Page Down or PgDn.       3 Select the area below  3
      Space.  Note that the logical drives cannot be intermixed with primary
3 contents of a window,  3                          3 the slider box on the   3
      partitions.
3 one page at a time.     3                          3 scroll bar.            3
      Note:  This option is not available when the amount of free space equals
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      the size of the request.
3 Move to and from the   3 F10                      3 Select the menu bar or  3
When you have set up the partition, you use the Options menu choices to specify
3 menu bar.              3                          3 the window.             3
information about the partition.


  Specifying Options for the New Partition   282/4
  Notebook Tasks   323/2


To specify options for the partition you just created, use the following
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
procedure. Refer to The Options Menu for detailed explanations of the choices on
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
the Options menu.
3 Get Help                3 F1                      3 Select the HELP push    3
  1. From the FDISK screen, Press Enter to display the Options menu.
3                        3                          3 button.                 3
  2. Select Add to Boot Manager menu if you want this partition displayed on
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      the Boot Manager startup menuIf you do not select this choice for the
3 Move to the next page. 3 Alt+Page Down            3 Select a notebook tab3
      partition, you cannot select the operating system that exists in this
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      partition from the menu at startup time.
3 Move to the previous   3 Alt+Page Up              3 Select a notebook tab. 3
   3. If you selected Add to Boot Manager menu, you see the window in which you
3 page.                   3                          3                        3
      are asked to type a name for the partition. Type the name, and then press
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      Enter.
3 Move the cursor from    3 Alt+Up Arrow            3 Select a notebook tab.  3
If you have additional partitions to set up, follow the instructions outlined
3 the notebook page to a 3                          3                        3
in Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems. Otherwise, continue to
3 tab.                   3                          3                        3
Creating the Partition for OS/2.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
 
3 Move the cursor from a 3 Alt+Down Arrow          3 Select the notebook    3
  Creating the Partition for OS/2    283/3
3 tab to the notebook    3                          3 page.                   3
 
3 page.                   3                          3                        3
After you have created the partitions for the Boot Manager and for each of the
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
other operating systems you plan to install, create the partition or logical
3 Move to the next field. 3 Tab                      3 Select the field.       3
drive in which you will install OS/2 OS/2 can be installed in either a primary
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
partition or a logical drive within the extended partition.
3 Move to the next item  3 Up, Down, Left, or Right 3                        3
Remember that some operating systems, such as AIX, use their own disk utility
3 within a field.         3 Arrow                    3                        3
program to set up partitions. The partitions for such operating systems are
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
created when you actually install the operating systems. You must leave
3 Select an item in a     3 Enter                    3 Select the item.       3
sufficient space on the hard disk to accommodate these operating systems.
3 single selection field. 3                          3                        3
To create the partition or logical drive for OS/2, follow these steps:
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
  1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted. If it is not, press the
3 Select an item in a     3 Spacebar                3 Select the button or   3
      Up Arrow ( ) or Down Arrow ( ) key to highlight it.
3 multiple selection      3                          3 box next to the item.   3
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
3 field.                 3                          3                        3
  3. Select Create partition and press Enter.
  4. Type the size (in MB) of the partition or logical drive you are creating.
      Note that the size of the swap file is based on the size of installed
      memory. The less memory you have, the larger the swap file. Thus, if your
      computer has a small amount of memory, you will need a larger partition.
      (You can also place the swap file on another partition.  To do this,
      select Software configuration from the OS/2 Setup and Installation window
      that appears during the Installation program. ) If you want to install all
      features and you want the swap file on the same partition, consider making
      the OS/2 partition large enough to accommodate all of those files.
  5. Specify whether this partition is a primary partition or a logical drive
      within the extended partition.
      If you have already marked three partitions as primary partitions, you
      might want to select Extended Logical Drive for OS/2. Your hard disk can
      be made up of a maximum of four primary partitions or three primary
      partitions and multiple logical drives within one extended partition. So,
      if you create a primary partition for OS/2 when three primary partitions
      already exist, you cannot create any logical drives.
  6. Specify the location of the partition or logical drive you want to create.
      Note:  This option is not available when the amount of free space equals
      the size of the request.


  Specifying Options for the OS/2 Partition    284/3
  Help Window Tasks    324/2


During the Installation program, you can use the Options menu choices to specify
These tasks only work from within a help window.
information about the OS/2  partition or logical drive:
  1. From the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
  2. Highlight Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
  3. Type the name you want to assign to this partition or logical drive, and
      press Enter.
  4. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  5. Highlight Set installable and press Enter.
      You must select Set installable for this partition or logical drive. By
      selecting Set installable, you indicate which partition or logical drive
      should be used for OS/2.


Specifying the Default Operating System    285/3
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
 
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
After you create partitions for all of your operating systems, including OS/2,
3 Switch between a help  3 Alt+F6                  3 Select the window.      3
you may specify which operating system should be started (by default) every time
3 window and the object  3                          3                        3
you start your computer. Follow these steps:
3 or window for which     3                          3                        3
  1. Highlight the line on the FDISK screen that contains the information for
3 help was displayed.     3                          3                        3
      the operating system you want preselected at startup time. For example,
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
       if you want OS/2 to be the preselected choice on the Boot Manager startup
3 Display General help.   3 F2                      3 Select HELP; then       3
      menu, highlight the OS/2 Version 3 line.
3                         3                          3 select GENERAL HELP.   3
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
  3. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
3 Display Keys help.     3 F9                      3 Select HELP; then      3
  4. With Default highlighted, press Enter.  Notice that the name of the
3                        3                          3 select KEYS HELP.       3
      partition you chose is listed next to Default.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
  5. Press F3.
3 Display Help index.     3 F11 or Shift+F1          3 Select HELP; then      3
      If you want to set the timer for how long the Boot Manager menu should be
3                        3                          3 select to HELP INDEX.   3
      displayed and how information on the menu should appear, you can do so
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      during the installation of OS/2 or you can do so after installationTo
3 Display Using help.     3 Shift+F10                3 Select HELP; then      3
      set the timer and display mode now, continue with the sections that
3                        3                          3 select USING HELP.     3
      follow, "Setting the Menu Display Time" and "Setting the Menu Mode."
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      Otherwise, go to step 6.
3 Display help for a      3 Use Tab to move the     3 Double-click on the     3
   6. Press F3
3 highlighted word or    3 cursor to the high-      3 highlighted word or     3
3 phrase.                 3 lighted word or phrase; 3 phrase.                3
3                        3 then press Enter.        3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Display the previous    3 Esc                      3 Select the PREVIOUS    3
3 help window.            3                          3 push button.           3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Search for a word or   3 Ctrl+S                  3 Select SERVICES; then  3
3 phrase                  3                          3 select SEARCH.         3


  Setting the Menu Display Time   286/3+
  Master Help Index Tasks   325/2


To indicate how long you want the Boot Manager startup menu displayed when you
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
start your system, follow these steps:
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
   1. From the Set startup values menu, you can do one of the following:
3 Open the Master Help   3 Enter                    3 Double-click on the    3
        o  If you want the menu displayed for a certain period of time before
3 Index.                  3                          3 Master Help Index.     3
          the default operating system starts, accept the value of Yes.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
         o  If you want the menu to be displayed indefinitely (until you
3 Move through the        3                          3 Select the topic.      3
          explicitly select a choice from the menu), highlight Timer and press
3 topics, one line at a  3                          3                        3
          Enter to change the value to No.
3 time.                  3                          3                        3
  2. If you selected Yes for Timer, indicate how long you want the menu
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
      displayed before the default operating system is startedYou can do one
3 Select the area above  3                          3                        3
      of the following:
3 the slider box on the   3                          3                        3
        o  Accept the value listed next to Timeout.
3 scroll bar.            3                          3                        3
        o Change the value as follows:
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
            a. Select Timeout and press Enter.
3 Move down through the  3 Page Down or PgDn.      3 Select the area below  3
            b. Type the amount of time (in seconds) that you want the menu
3 topics, one page at a  3                          3 the slider box on the   3
                displayed before the preselected operating system is
3 time.                  3                          3 scroll bar.             3
                automatically started.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
            c. Press Enter.
3 Move up through the    3 Page Up or PgUp.         3                        3
3 topics, one page at a   3                          3                        3
3 time.                  3                          3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Move to the topics      3 Type the letter of the   3 Select the letter of    3
3 beginning with a        3 alphabet                3 the alphabet.           3
3 letter.                 3                          3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Switch between an entry 3 Alt+F6                  3 Select the window.      3
3 and the Master Help    3                          3                        3
3 Index.                 3                          3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Display related infor- 3 Use Tab to move the      3 Double-click on an      3
3 mation.                3 cursor to the entry      3 entry listed under      3
3                        3 listed under related    3 related information.   3
3                        3 information; then press 3                        3
3                        3 Enter.                   3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Return to the previous  3 Esc                      3 Select the PREVIOUS    3
3 help window.           3                          3 push button.           3


  Setting the Menu Mode   287/4
  Notices   326/1+


You can select either Normal or Advanced for the Boot Manager menu mode. If you
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not
select Advanced, your Boot Manager menu will include additional information
imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM
about your partitions.
operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended to
To change the mode that is currently displayed:
state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any
  1. Highlight Mode on the Set startup values menu.
functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any
  2. Press Enter.
of IBM's intellectual property rights or other legally protectable rights may be
When you have finished configuring your Boot Manager menu, press F3. Then
used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and
continue with the installation of OS/2.
verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or
services, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user's
responsibility.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in
this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to
these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director
of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood NY 10594, U.S.A.


  Selecting a File System   288/2
  Trademarks    327/2
 
The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are
trademarks or service marks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other
countries:
AT                          IBM
IBMLink                    Micro Channel
Operating System/2          OS/2
PC/XT                      Personal System/2
Presentation Manager        Proprinter
PS/2                        Screen Reader
ThinkPad                    ValuePoint
WIN-OS/2                    Workplace Shell
XGA                        XT
The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) in this publication, are
trademarks of other companies as follows:
Trademark                Owner
Adaptec                  Adaptec, Inc.
Adobe                    Adobe Systems Incorporated
Adobe Type Manager      Adobe Systems Incorporated
After Dark              Berkely Systems, Inc.
Allways                  Funk Software, Inc.
ALR                      Advanced Logic Research, Inc.
AMI                      American Megatrends, Inc.
Aox                      Aox Corporation
APM                      Astek International
ATI                      ATI Technologies, Inc.
Borland C++              Borland International, Inc.
Bubble-Jet              Canon, Inc.
Canon                    Canon Kabushiki Kaisha
Central Point Anti-Virus Central Point Software, Inc.
Central Point Backup    Central Point Software, Inc.
Cirrus Logic            Cirrus Logic, Inc.
Compaq                  Compaq Computer Corporation
CompuServe              CompuServe Incorporated
Echo                    Echo Speech Corporation
Everex                  Everex Systems, Inc.
Flexview                Nutmeg Systems
Freelance                Lotus Development Corporation
Future Domain            Future Domain Corporation
Gateway 2000            Gateway 2000, Inc.
Graphics Ultra Pro      ATI Technologies, Inc.
Helvetica                Linotype Company
Hewlett-Packard          Hewlett-Packard Company
Hitachi                  Hitachi Ltd.
HP                      Hewlett-Packard Company
Intel                    Intel Corporation
IOMEGA                  IOMEGA Inc.
LaserJet                Hewlett-Packard Company
Leading Technology      Leading Technology, Inc.
Legend                  Sigma Designs Inc.
Logitech                Logitech, Inc.
Lotus                    Lotus Development Corporation
McAfee                  McAfee Associates
Media Vision            Media Vision, Inc.
Micronics                Micronics Electronics, Inc.
Microsoft                Microsoft Corporation
Mitsumi                  Mitsumi Denki Kabushki Kaisha
Motherboard Factory      Motherboard Factory
Mylex                    Mylex Corporation
NetWare                  Novell, Inc.
Nomad                    Gateway 2000, Inc.
Northgate                Northgate Computer Systems
Orchid                  Orchid Technology Inc.
Panasonic                Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
PCMCIA                  Personal Computer Memory Card International
                          Association
Philips                  Philips Electronics N.V.
Phoenix                  Phoenix Technologies, Ltd.
PostScript              Adobe Systems Incorporated
Pro AudioSpectrum        Media Vision, Inc.
ProComm                  Datastorm Technologies, Inc.
Quantum                  Quantum Corporation
Reveal                  Reveal Computer Products, Inc.
SlimLine                Northgate Computer Systems
Sony                    Sony Corporation
Sound Blaster            Creative Labs, Inc.
Stacker                  Stac Electronics
S3                      S3 Incorporated
Times New Roman          Monotype Corporation, Limited
Trident                  Trident Microsystems, Incorporated
Toshiba                  Toshiba Corporation
Tseng                    Tseng Laboratories Inc.
Ventura Publisher        Ventura Software, Inc.
VESA                    Video Electronics Standards Association
Video 7                  Video Seven, Inc.
Weitek                  Weitek Corporation
Western Digital          Western Digital Corporation
Windows                  Microsoft Corporation
WordPerfect              WordPerfect Corporation
Zenith Data Systems      Zenith Electronics Corporation
ZEOS                    ZEOS International Ltd.
1-2-3                    Lotus Development Corporation
 
=Glossary   328/1+=


If you choose to format an existing partition during the Installation program,
you will be asked to select a file system.  A file system is the part of the
operating system that provides access to files and programs on a disk.  You can
select either the File Allocation Table (FAT) file system or the High
Performance File System (HPFS).
  o  Select the FAT file system if you intend to share data in the partition
      with a version of DOS that is running independently of OS/2. (For example,
      if you occasionally need to start DOS from a diskette and access the data
      in the OS/2 partition, the partition would have to be formatted for the
      FAT file system.) DOS uses the FAT file system, and does not recognize
      files created by HPFS.  Although DOS does not recognize HPFS, this is not
      the case for DOS sessions that are part of OS/2.  If you plan to run you
      r DOS programs in the DOS sessions that are part of OS/2, you can format
      for either file system.  The only restriction for DOS programs running in
      these DOS sessions is that they will not recognize the longer file names
      in the HPFS partition.
  o  HPFS has features that make it a better choice for larger hard disk
      partitions.  It puts the directory at the seek center of the partition and
      is designed to allocate contiguous space for files.  This feature helps
      prevent disk fragmentation.  HPFS also handles write errors by writing to
      alternate space reserved for that purpose.
HPFS also supports file names up to 254 characters in length.
If you format an OS/2 partition for the FAT file system and the system memory
is less than or equal to 6MB, support for HPFS is not automatically installed.
You can add this support later (for example, if you want to format another
partition for HPFS) using the Selective Install utility program (located in the
System Setup folder).
If you are trying to decide whether to use HPFS, consider that it takes at
least 200KB of system memory.  If your computer has 6MB or less of memory, your
system performance will be adversely affected.
Changing System Options from the OS/2 Setup and Installation Window    289/2+
During Advanced Installation, the OS/2 Setup and Installation window appears so
you can select the features of the operating system that you want to install.
You can also use the menu bar at the top of the window to indicate an alternate
drive for your swap file, and to modify your CONFIG.SYS file.
Installing the Swap File and WIN-OS/2 Support in a Logical Drive    290/3
If you use the Advanced Installation method, you can install the swap file and
WIN-OS/2 support in another partition or logical drive to save hard disk space
in your OS/2 partition.  When you are setting up your partitions with the FDISK
utility program, you can create a logical drive just for this purpose.
When the OS/2 Setup and Installation window appears during the installation
process, follow these steps:
  1. Select Software configuration from the menu bar of the OS/2 Setup and
      Installation window.
  2. Select Change OS/2 parameters.
  3. Make sure the cursor is in the SWAPPATH field by selecting the field with
      the mouse or the Tab key.  Replace the default location of the swap file
      with the desired location.  For example, to place the swap file in the
      root directory of logical drive D, type
      d:\.
  4. Select OK or press Enter.
  5. Select the More push button next to WIN-OS/2 Support.
  6. Select the Down Arrow in the Destination drive field to change the drive
      to the desired logical drive (drive D in this example).
  7. Select OK.


  Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File during Installation   291/3
  A   329/2+


During Advanced Installation, you can customize your system by modifying the
CONFIG.SYS file.  To do so, follow these steps when the OS/2 Setup and
Installation window appears during installation:
  1. Select Software configuration from the menu bar at the top of the window.
  2. Select either Change OS/2 parameters or Change DOS parameters.
      For example, if you want to change the MINFREE setting for the swap file,
      select Change OS/2 parameters.  Then specify the size on the window that
      is displayed.  The MINFREE setting is used to specify when the system
      should warn you about the growth of the swap file.
  3. Select OK when you have finished making all the selections in the window.
      The OS/2 Setup and Installation window will reappear.
  4. Make your selections in the OS/2 Setup and Installation window to continue
      with the installation of OS/2.


  Special Hardware Considerations   292/1+
  archive   330/3


This chapter provides information to help you if you are installing OS/2 Version
archive
3 on or using the following hardware:
(1) A flag of files and directories that OS/2 uses to determine which files are
      Gateway 2000
new or modified.  Files with this flag are included when a backup copy is made
      A system with Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS
or when all the files are restored on a hard disk. (2) A copy of one or more
      ATI Graphics Ultra Pro display adapter
files or a copy of a database that is saved for future reference or for recovery
      An EISA system with an Adaptec 1742A controller card
purposes in case the original data is damaged or lost.
      IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
      IBM PS/2 Model 76
      IBM ThinkPad with a Docking Station
      A system with an Aox upgrade
      Quantum II Hard Card
      Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR, or Tandy
      non-SCSI CD-ROM drive
      Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination
      IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
      Sound Blaster
      Pro AudioSpectrum 16


  Using Gateway 2000 Computers   293/2+
  attribute   331/3


If you have an early version of a Gateway 2000 computer that does not work
attribute
properly, your BIOS might be an early version. The company suggests that you
A characteristic or property of a file, directory, or object; for example, its
replace the system board. Contact Gateway 2000, Inc. for information about
size, last modification date, or flag. See also setting.
upgrading your computer.


  486 Math Coprocessors   294/3
  audio   332/3


If you have a Gateway 2000 computer with a 486 processor and a revision E system
audio
board, you could experience a divide underflow error.  The error can occur when
Pertaining to the portion of recorded information that can be heard.
you are running software that takes advantage of the 486 math coprocessor.  If
this error occurs, you can upgrade to a revision F system board by contacting
Gateway.


  TRAP0002 Errors on Boot or Installation   295/3
  AUTOEXEC.BAT   333/3


Gateway computers that cause a TRAP0002 error are caused by one of the
AUTOEXEC.BAT
following:
A batch file whose main purpose is to process commands that set up the operating
  o  A bad Read Ahead Cache on the system board
system for DOS sessions.
  o  Bad memory
 
When the problem is a bad Read Ahead Cache on the system board, press
  audio    334/3
Ctrl+Alt+Del to display a menu from which you can disable the external caching.
 
Refer to your Gateway documentation for more information. Contact Gateway when
audio
  this problem is encountered.
Pertaining to the portion of recorded information that can be heard.
When the problem is bad memory, try moving each memory module to a different
memory controller.  If the problem is not corrected, determine which memory
module is bad and replace it.


  Gateway Nomad Notebook   296/3
  audio processing   335/3


If you receive a message that OS/2 is unable to operate your hard disk or your
audio processing
diskette drive, your computer needs a BIOS upgrade.
In multimedia applications, manipulating digital audio; for example, by editing
If a TRAP error appears when the system is started, or during installation,
or creating special effects.
disable caching on the system board. If the problem persists, contact Gateway
2000, Inc.


  Using Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS   297/2+
  audio segment   336/3


This section provides information about computers that require a BIOS upgrade to
audio segment
support OS/2 Version 3.
A contiguous set of recorded data from an audio track.  An audio segment might
or might not be associated with a video segment.


  Phoenix BIOS   298/3
  audio track   337/3


For questions about products that use Phoenix BIOS, call the computer
audio track
manufacturer directly. If there are additional questions, contact Phoenix.
(1) The audio portion of a program. (2) The physical location where the audio is
placed beside the image. (A system with two audio tracks can have either stereo
sound or two independent audio tracks.) (3) Synonymous with sound track&per.


  AMI BIOS   299/3+
  AudioVisual Connection (AVC)   338/3


The later BIOS versions from American Megatrends, Inc. (AMI) provide a screen ID
AudioVisual Connection (AVC)
code, which is visible at the lower-left corner of the screen during the initial
An IBM product that enables a user to develop and deliver professional-quality
random access memory (RAM) count.  The code can be made to reappear if you
audio-visual shows on a PS/2 computer.
restart the system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del, or it can be frozen on screen by
 
holding down the Ins key during system startup. This creates a keyboard error,
authoring    339/3
which will stop the screen. On a system that uses AMI BIOS or AMI BIOS Plus, the
 
message will be in the form:
authoring
aaaa-bbbb-mmddyy-Kc
A structured approach to combining all the media elements in an interactive
On a system than uses AMI HI-Flex BIOS, the message will be in the form:
production, assisted by computer software designed for this purpose.
ee-ffff-bbbbbb-gggggggg-mmddyy-hhhhhhhh-c
 
If the screen ID code is in a form other than those above, one of the following
  authoring system    340/3
is true:
  o  The BIOS is a very early version.  In this case, contact Washburn & Co.
  o  The BIOS was produced by a company with source-code license. In this case,
      the system board manufacturer will be able to provide further information
      or updates. All Everex** 368 BIOS versions are in this category.


General Rules    300/4
authoring system
The software tools necessary to integrate computers and peripherals, such as
CD-ROMs and laser videodiscs.


  o  If an IDE-type hard drive is installed, the date mmddyy should be 040990
  B    341/2+
      or later for use with any operating system, including DOS. Special timing
      requirements of IDE drives were accommodated on the date noted.
  o If you use any other drive type, such as MFM, RLL, ESDI, or SCSI, the OS/2
      operating system might install and operate correctly if mmddyy is 092588
      or later, provided that the Keyboard Controller revision level is suitable
      for the OS/2 version being used.  Also, in the case of SCSI hard drives, a
      driver compatible with the version of OS/2 operating system being
      installed might be provided by the controller manufacturer, and if so, a
      special installation procedure might apply.
  o  Keyboard Controller revision level F (represented by "c" in the previous
      screen ID code examples) is expected to produce proper installation and
      operation of OS/2 versions 1.3x and 2.x.
          OS/2 1.0 or 1.1:  8, B, D, or F
          OS/2 1.2x:        D or F
          OS/2 1.3x or 2.:  F
   o  If the Keyboard Controller revision level shows as 0 or M, the Keyboard
      Controller chip is not an AMI chip, even if an AMI license sticker was
      applied to it. If it is not an AMI chip, its performance under the OS/2
      operating system is unknown.  It might or might not work correctly.  For
      some revision levels (usually "M"), an AMI chip can successfully replace a
      non-AMI chip, but this is not a general rule.  Sometimes the nonstandard
      Keyboard Controller (usually "0") was used to combine system board
      functions not normally part of the controller. Substituting a standard
      chip causes the board to not function at all. In this case, there is no
      solution other than to replace the board. A revision level of 9
      accompanied by a nonstandard ID code also indicates a nonstandard
      controller (and BIOS). The system board manufacturer should be contacted
      for further information.


BIOS Updates    301/4


If a BIOS prior to the previously noted dates requires replacement, note the
background   342/3
following:
   o  AMI BIOS and BIOS Plus series BIOS (16 character ID code) for cached
      system boards are customized for individual system board designs.  You can
      obtain updates only from the system board manufacturer, unless you have
      one of the following:
        1. A BIOS with "aaaa" = E307. This BIOS can be replaced with a standard
          type.
        2. A BIOS for Northgate** or Motherboard Factory** system boards, except
          the Northgate Slimline**.  This BIOS can be replaced by a standard
          type.  The Slimline BIOS has the VGA BIOS in the same chips. They can
          be updated to the 040990 release, provided they are identified as
          Slimline, and the speed is specified (20, 25, or 33 MHz).  The speed
          must be specified because different VGA code is required for the
          various speeds.
        3. A BIOS with "aaaa" = DAMI, DAMX, or EDAMI (usually for cached boards
          d  esigned or built by AMI). This BIOS can be updated.  Mylex or
          Leading Technology** boards with these prefixes can only be updated
          by the board manufacturer.
  o  The complete screen ID code is necessary to determine whether a BIOS
      update for other system boards can be provided. In the case of the HI-Flex
      BIOS, the complete second and third lines of the ID code are also
      necessary.  If not immediately visible on the screen, they can be viewed
      by pressing the Ins key during system startup.
  o  If you have a hard disk drive from another manufacturer, it must be dated
      092588 or later.  If your hard disk drive is an earlier version, contact
      the dealer at your place of purchase, or the hard disk manufacturer, for
      information about upgrading the drive.


  Micronics BIOS    302/3
background
In multiprogramming, the conditions under which low-priority programs run when
high-priority programs are not using the system resources. A background session
runs one program step at a time.  It does not run interactively with the user;
processing continues on other sessions in the foreground.


If you have revision E of a Micronics system board, you might receive a divide
back up    343/3
underflow message, or your computer might not work properly. This board contains
an early version of BIOS. If you purchased the board from Gateway, contact
Gateway 2000, Inc. request an upgrade to revision F.


Using the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Display Adapter    303/2
back up
To copy information onto a diskette or hard disk for record keeping or recovery
purposes.


If you have an ATI Graphics Ultra Pro, you must run the INSTALL.EXE utility
  batch file   344/3
program provided by ATI before you install OS/2 Version 3. Note that this is a
DOS program and you must, therefore, start DOS before you run the program.
Note: If you have a Gateway 2000 system, refer also to "Black Lines on an OS/2
Logo Screen" in Solving Installation Problems
  1. Start DOS on your computer.
  2. Insert the ATI diskette into drive A.
  3. Type a:install.exe and press Enter. The Set Power-Up Configuration menu
      appears.
   4. Select Custom for Monitor Type.
  5. Make sure that VGA Memory Sizeis set to Shared for 1 MB video memory
      boards.
  6. Make sure that the refresh rate for 640 x 480 resolution is set to IBM
      Default or 60 Hz.
      Note:  Later during the installation of OS/2 Version 3, be sure to select
      8514 as the primary display type.


  Using an EISA System with an Adaptec 1742A Controller Card   304/2
batch file
A file that contains a series of commands to be processed sequentially. A batch
file can have either a CMD or a BAT extension.
 
baud rate   345/3
 
baud rate
A number representing the speed at which information travels over a
communication line.  The higher the number, the faster communication occurs.


If you have an EISA system with an Adaptec 1742A controller card, you must run
bit map    346/3
the Setup Configuration program provided on the Adaptec Card Setup Diskette
 
before installing OS/2 Version 3. To set up the Adaptec card in the
bit map
configuration using the Setup Diskette, do the following:
A representation of an image by an array of bits.
  1. Set the Enhanced mode setting to OFF.
 
  2. Set the Standard mode setting to ON.
bookmark   347/3
  3. Set the Hex Address setting to C800.
 
   4. Set the I/O Port setting to 230H.
bookmark
  5. Set the DMA channel setting to 5.
A menu choice in online books that is used to save your place in the document
  6. Set the Parity Check setting to OFF.
that you are viewing, by marking the topic that is displayed.
  7. Set the Synchronous Negotiation setting to ON. If CD-ROM is not
      recognized, set this setting to OFF.
  8. Set the Enabled Disconnect setting to YES.
  9. Set the IRQ setting to 11 (default is 2).


  Using an IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette   305/2
  border   348/3


As part of the setup of your computer, you might have been advised to create a
border
Reference Diskette (sometimes called a "Hardware System Program Diskette"). The
A visual indicator of a window's boundaries.
Reference Diskette contains BIOS information (code about how your diskette
drives, hard drives, and keyboard interact). The OS/2 Version 3 Installation
program may prompt you to insert this diskette.
If you have not created the Reference Diskette, do so before you begin the
installation of OS/2 Version 3. Refer to your PS/2 documentation for
instructions on creating this diskette.


  Using an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or IBM ThinkPad with a Docking Station   306/2
  button   349/3


If you are installing OS/2 Version 3 on an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or an IBM ThinkPad
button
700, 700C, 720, or 720C attached to a 3550 Docking Station, you need to replace
A mechanism on a pointing device, such as a mouse, or an area on the computer
the ABIOS files on the OS/2 Installation Diskette with files from the Reference
screen, used to request or initiate an action. See also maximize button, hide
Diskette.  Do the following:
button, push button, radio button, and restore button.
  1. If you are using a ThinkPad, detach it from the Docking Station.
  2. Create a Reference Diskette by following the documentation that came with
      your computer.
  3. Make a copy of the Installation Diskette. Type diskcopy a: a: and press
      Enter. Remove and insert diskettes when prompted to do so.
  4. Remove the copy from drive A and insert the original Installation
      Diskette.
  5. Turn your computer on.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
      to restart it.
  6. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette, insert
      Diskette 1, and press Enter.
  7. When the Welcome screen appears, press F3 to display the command prompt.
  8. Insert the copy of the Installation Diskette into drive A.
  9. Type a:\del *.bio and press Enter.
  10. Remove the copy of the Installation Diskette and insert the Reference
      Diskette you created into drive A.
  11. If your computer has more than one diskette drive, insert the copy of the
      Installation Diskette into drive B. In the next two steps, you will be
      prompted to insert diskettes into both drive A and drive B.
      If you computer has only one diskette drive, when you are asked to insert
      a diskette into drive A, insert the Reference Diskette into your diskette
      drive. When you are asked to insert a diskette into drive B, insert the
      copy of the Installation Diskette into your diskette drive.
  12. Type copy a:\*.bio b:\ and press Enter.
  13. Type copy a:\abios.sys b:\ and press Enter.
  14. Turn off your computer.  If you are using a ThinkPad, return it to the
      Docking Station.


  Using a System with an Aox Upgrade   307/2
  byte   350/3


If you have a system with a 286 processor that has been upgraded to a 386SX with
byte
an Aox upgrade and you want to install OS/2 Version 3, you must start the system
A group of eight adjacent binary digits that are treated as a unit, and that
with DOS and run the AOX232.EXE.  Contact the Aox Technical Support Group to
often represent a character.
request a copy of AOX232.EXE before continuing with the installation of OS/2.


  Using a Quantum II XL Hard Card   308/2
  C   351/2+


If you have a Quantum hard card, you must make a modification to the
BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file. To modify the BASEDEV
statement, do the following:
  1. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1.
  2. Change the BASEDEV statement to:
      BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /A:1 /IRQ
      (The settings shown are the defaults for the Quantum hard card.)
  3. Save the CONFIG.SYS file.
  4. Install OS/2 Version 3.


  Using a Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi,  BSR, or Tandy Non-SCSI CD-ROM Drive   309/2+
  cache   352/3


For the Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR, or Tandy
cache
non-SCSI drives to be recognized by OS/2 Version 3, the base port address
A storage buffer that contains frequently accessed instructions and data; it is
specified on the CD-ROM BASEDEV statement in the CONFIG.SYS file must match the
used to reduce hard disk access time.
base I/O port address specified on the CD-ROM host adapter card.
Note:  If you are installing OS/2 from a CD-ROM, you might first need to modify
the BASEDEV statement for your CD-ROM device driver in the CONFIG.SYS file on
the diskette labeled Diskette 1. See also the section called "Using an
Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination."


  Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-31A Device Driver   310/3
  cascade    353/3
 
cascade
A choice in a menu that arranges the secondary windows so that each window is
offset on two sides from the window it overlaps. The windows appear to be
stacked, one behind the other.
 
cascading choice    354/3
 
cascading choice
A menu choice that has an arrow to the right of it.  If this arrow is selected,
a cascaded menu appears. A three-dimensional arrow indicates that a cascaded
choice is preselected and is the default action when you select the main choice.
A one-dimensional arrow indicates that additional choices are available;
however, there is no default action.  See also cascaded menu.
 
cascaded menu    355/3
 
cascaded menu
A menu that appears when the arrow to the right of a cascading choice is
selected.  It contains a set of choices that are related to the cascading
choice.  Cascaded menus are used to reduce the length of a menu.
 
case-sensitive   356/3
 
case-sensitive
A condition in which entries for an entry field must conform to a specific
lowercase, uppercase, or mixed-case format in order to be valid.


The Sony SONY31A.ADD device driver supports the following CD-ROM drives:
  CD-ROM    357/3
      Sony CDU-31A, CDU-7305
      Sony CDU-33A, CDU-7405
  This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Sony CD-ROM device
driver.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD
line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode from the default,
software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer.  The syntax for the
BASEDEV statement is as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD [/A:d][/AT:dd][/P:nnn][/I:nn][/V]
where:
[/A:d]   Identifies a specific adapter, d. The adapter is specified as a
          single-digit value which is zero based (for example, the first
          adapter is specified as /A:0).
[/AT:dd]  Sets the adapter type connected to the CD-ROM drive. Supported values
          are:
      00 = Sony CDB-334 (default)
      05 = Echo** Speech (with ESC614 chip)
                  Orchid** SoundWave 32
                  Orchid GameWave 32
                  Cardinal DSP16
      08 = MediaVision** Pro AudioSpectrum 16
[/P:nnn]  Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The port
          address is specified as a four-digit hex value.  Leading zeros should
          be specified. The value must be the same number as the port address
          selected by the jumper on the host interface card.
          If this parameter is not specified, the default port address for the
          host adapter is used.  For the Sony CDB-334 host interface card, the
          default is 0340. For the Media Vision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 card, the
          default is 1F88.
[/I:nn]  Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
          the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface card. If
          this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
          polling transfer.
          Note:  Some Sony CDB-334 host adapter cards do not include the
          plastic jumper switch to select the IRQ channel on the IRQ jumper
          block.  You must obtain and install the plastic jumper switch to
          enable the IRQ channel.
[/V]      Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
each CD-ROM drive.
Example 1:  The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony
CDB-334 host adapter.
The Sony CDB-334 host adapter supports base I/O port addresses of 320h, 330h,
340h, or 360h.  If the host adapter is set to its default port address of 340h,
the CONFIG.SYS statement does not need to be modified and should appear as
follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD
If the CDB-334 host adapter is set to any port address other than the default
of 340h, the CONFIG.SYS statement must be modified. For example, if the Sony
CDB-334 host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 360, the line in the
CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P
If, in the above situation, the driver is operating in interrupt mode at IRQ
channel 5, the line in your CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P:0360 /I
Example 2:  The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a
MediaVision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 host adapter.
In this case, the line in CONFIG.SYS must be modified and should appear as
follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /AT
Note:  The default port address for the CDU-31A when attached to the PAS-16
card is 1F88. The Sony Desktop Library model numbers CDU-31A-LL/L and CDU-7305
include the PAS-16 adapter.
Example 3:  The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a Creative
Labs Sound Blaster Pro, Sound Blaster 16, or Sound Blaster 16 MultiCD host
adapter.
The port address specified on the BASEDEV statement in CONFIG.SYS should be 10h
above the base I/O port address specified on these adapter cards.  For example,
if the Sound Blaster card is set for a base I/O port address of 220h, the line
in CONFIG.SYS should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P
Example 4:  The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to the Echo
Speech, Orchid SoundWave 32, Orchid GameWave 32, or Cardinal DSP16 host
adapter.
In this case, the line in CONFIG.SYS must be modified and should appear as
follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /AT


Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-535 Device Driver    311/3
CD-ROM
High capacity, read-only memory in the form of an optically read compact disc.
See also compact disc.


The Sony SONY535.ADD device driver supports the following CD-ROM drives:
  character    358/3
      Sony 531 series (CDU-531, 6201, 6205)
 
      Sony 535 series (CDU-535, 6205, 7205)
character
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Sony CD-ROM device
A letter, digit, or other symbol that is used as part of the organization,
driver.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD
control, or representation of data.
line in the CONFIG.SYS file.  Also change the transfer mode from the default,
software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer.  The syntax for the
  BASEDEV statement is as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD [P:nnn][/I:nn][/U:d,d...][/V]
where:
[/P:nnn]. Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The value
          must be the same number as the port address specified by the jumper
          on the host interface card.
[/I:nn].  Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
          the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface card. If
          this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
          polling transfer.
          Note:  Some Sony host adapter cards do not include the plastic jumper
          switch to select the IRQ channel on the IRQ jumper block.  You must
          obtain and install the plastic jumper switch to enable the IRQ
          channel.
[/U:d,d...]. Specifies the drive unit number which the Sony CD-ROM drive is set
          to.  The value of d must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3.  If more than one
          Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to the adapter, this parameter must be
          specified.  If only one CD-ROM drive is attached to the adapter, and
          this parameter is not specified, then the default unit ID used by the
          driver is 0.
[/V].    Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
each CD-ROM drive.
Example 1:  A Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony CDB-240 series host
adapter.
If the Sony host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 360, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:360
Example 2:  A Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony CDB-240 series host
adapter.
If the Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to the Sony host adapter at a base I/O
port address of 360h, and the driver is operating in interrupt mode at IRQ
channel 5, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:360 /I:5
Example 3:  Multiple Sony CD-ROM drives are daisy-chained to a Sony CDB-240
series host adapter.
If two Sony CD-ROM drives are daisy-chained from the Sony host adapter with the
first drive set to drive unit 0 and the second set to drive unit 1, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:340 /U:0,1


  Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Panasonic Device Driver   312/3
  check box   359/3


The Panasonic device driver (SBCD2.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
check box
  o  Panasonic CR-521, 522, 523, 562, 563
A square box with associated text that represents one choice in a set of
  o  Creative Labs OmniCD
multiple choicesWhen you select a choice, a check mark appears in the check
  o  IBM ISA CD-ROM drive
box to indicate that the choice is in effectYou can clear the check box by
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Panasonic CD-ROM
selecting the choice again. Contrast with radio button.
device driver.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode
from the default, software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer.
The syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows: BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD
[/P:nnn][/T:n][/NS][/V]
where:
[./P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card.  The value
          must be the same number as the port address selected by the jumper on
          the host interface card.
[./T:n]  Sets the adapter type connected to the CD-ROM drive. The supported
          value is:
      Creative Labs CD-ROM interface card (not Sound Blaster)
[./NS]    Disables drive select scan.  Driver will not scan for more than one
          CD-ROM drive.
[./V]    Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
each CD-ROM drive.
Example 1:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a standard Panasonic or IBM ISA CD-ROM host adapter.
The standard Panasonic or IBM ISA host adapter supports base I/O port addresses
of 300h, 310h, 320h, or 330h.  For example, if the adapter is set to a base I/O
port address of 300, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:300
  Example 2:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a Creative Labs Sound Blaster Pro, Sound Blaster 16, or Sound
Blaster 16 MultiCD.
If the Sound Blaster card is set for a base I/O address of 220h, the line in
CONFIG.SYS should appears as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:220
Example 3:  A Creative Labs OmniCD is attached to a standard Creative Labs
CD-ROM host adapter (not Sound Blaster).
The standard Creative Labs host adapter supports base I/O port addresses of
250h or 260h.  For example, if the adapter is set to a base I/O port address of
250, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:250 /T:2
Example 4:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a MediaVision Jazz 16 sound card.
If the MediaVision card is set for a base I/O port address of 300h, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
  BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:300 /NS
Example 5:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a Reveal audio card.
If the Reveal audio card is set to a base I/O port address of 630h, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:630


  Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Philips CD-ROM Device Drivers   313/3
  check mark   360/3


The Philips device driver (LMS205.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
check mark
      Philips CM205, CM225
A symbol that shows that a choice is currently active.  This symbol is used in
The Philips device driver (LMS206.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
menus and check boxesSee also checkbox.
      Philips CM205MS,CM225MS (multisession photo CD version of CM205)
 
      Philips CM206, CM226
  chip set    361/3
Note:  If you have installed OS/2 and find that your CD-ROM drive does not
 
function, you  must copy the LMS206.ADD file from Diskette 1 to the \OS2
chip set
directory and add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file:
An integrated circuit or a set of integrated circuits which provide hardware
BASEDEV=LMS206.ADD
support for a related set of functions, such as generation of video.
  This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Philips CD-ROM
 
device drivers.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the
  choice    362/3
BASEDEV=LMS205.ADD (or LMS206.ADD) line in the CONFIG.SYS file.  Also change
the transfer mode from the default, software polling transfer, to software
interrupt transfer. The syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows:
  BASEDEV=LMS205.ADD [/P:nnn][/U:x][/M:y][/V]
where:
  [./P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The value
          must be the same number as the port address selected by the jumper on
          the host interface card.
[/U:x]    Identifies a specific unit, x.  Valid values for x are 0, 1, 2, and
          3.  The default is zero.  LMS205 and LMS206 locate all CM250 and
          CM260 host adapters and assign unit numbers based on the order in
          which each was found. This parameter tells LMS205 and LMS206 which
          BASEDEV line it is currently processing.
[/M:y]    Indicates the number of 2500-byte CD frame buffers that should be
          allocated by the LMS205.ADD or LMS2056.ADD driver. Valid values for y
          are 8,...,26.  The default is 16. Any value below the minimum (8)
          will be assigned the minimum (8).
  [/V]      Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.


  Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Mitsumi CD-ROM Device Driver    314/3
choice
Any item that you can select. A choice can appear in a selection field, in a
menu, or in text (a list of selectable choices), or it might be represented by
an icon.


The Mitsumi device driver (MITFX001.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
  circular slider control    363/3
      Mitsumi CRMC-FX001D
 
      Mitsumi CRMC-FX001
circular slider control
      Mitsumi CRMC-LU005S
A knob-like control that performs like a control on a TV or stereo.
      Mitsumi CRMC-LU002S
 
      BSR 6800
  click    364/3
      Tandy CDR-1000
 
  This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Mitsumi CD-ROM
click
device driver.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the
To press and release the select button on a pointing device without moving the
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file.  Also change the transfer
pointer off the choiceSee also double-click.
mode from the default, software polling transfer, to software interrupt
transfer.  The syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows:
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD [/P:nnn][/I:nn][/V]
where:
[/P:nnn]  Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card.  This must
          be the same number as specified by the DIP switch on the interface
          card.
[/I:nn]  Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
          the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface card.  If
          this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
          polling transfer.
[/V]      Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
each CD-ROM drive.
Example 1:  A Mitsumi CD-ROM drive is attached to a Mitsumi host adapter.
The Mitsumi host adapter supports I/O port address ranges from 300h to 3FCh.
If the Mitsumi host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of either 300h or
340h, the statement in CONFIG.SYS does not need to be modified and should
appear as follows:
  BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD
If the Mitsumi host adapter is set to an address other than those specified
above, the BASEDEV statement needs to be modified. For example, if the Mitsumi
host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 320, the line in the
CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:320
Example 2:A Mitsumi CD-ROM drive is attached to a Creative Labs Sound Blaster
16 MultiCD.
If the Mitsumi CD-ROM port on the Sound Blaster 16 MultiCD is set to an I/O
port address of 340, the line in CONFIG.SYS should appear as follows:
  BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:340
Note:    To enable interrupt transfer mode, which improves performance, the /I
parameter must be specified. For example, to enable interrupt transfer mode
for IRQ channel 10 at I/O port address of 320h, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file
should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:320 /I:10


  Using an Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination   315/2
  clip   365/3


If you find that your drive or combination of CD-ROM drive and SCSI adapter is
clip
not supported by OS/2 Version 3, you can contact the manufacturer and obtain an
A section of recorded, filmed, or videotaped material.
OS/2 Adapter Device Driver (.ADD) file.  Then, after you receive the .ADD file,
 
use your current operating system and follow this procedure before you install
clipboard    366/3
OS/2:
 
  1. Make a copy of Diskette 1.  At a command prompt, type diskcopy a: a: and
clipboard
      press Enter.
An area of memory that temporarily holds data being passed from one program to
  2. Copy the .ADD file to the root directory on the copy of Diskette 1(The
anotherData is placed on the clipboard by selecting from a menu.
      root directory is the first directory on the diskette.)  If there is not
 
      enough room, delete the following files from the copy of Diskette 1:
close   367/3
          For an ISA/EISA (non-Micro Channel) computer:  IBM2*.*
 
          For a Micro Channel computer:  IBM1*.*
close
      You will now have room to add device drivers to Diskette 1. However, if
A choice in Window List and in those programs that have a system menu.  This is
      the .ADD driver is on a diskette, you might have to copy it to your hard
also a cascading choice from the Windows choice on a pop-up menu. This choice
      disk before copying it to the copy of Diskette 1.
ends highlighted programs and objects and their associated windows.
   3. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file located on the copy of Diskette 1:
 
        a. At the end of the file, add the appropriate BASEDEV= statement for
  command prompt   368/3
          your adapter.  For example, if your .ADD file is named T128SCSI.ADD,
 
          add the following BASEDEV= statement shown in capital letters:
command prompt
                set cdrominst=1
A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands.
                ifs=cdfs.ifs /q
 
                BASEDEV=T128SCSI.ADD
  compact disc   369/3
          The lowercase letters represent lines that already exist in your
 
          CONFIG.SYS file, and uppercase letters represent lines you need to
compact disc
          insert.  This ensures proper placement and installation.
A disc, usually 4.75 inches in diameter, from which data is read optically by
          Do not specify a file path for the .ADD file.
means of a laser.
        b. Insert the letters REM before any lines in the CONFIG.SYS file that
 
          refer to the file you deleted in step 2 above.
CONFIG.SYS   370/3
  4. Begin the installation by inserting the Installation Diskette into drive A
 
      and restarting the system. When prompted to insert Diskette 1, insert the
CONFIG.SYS
      copy that you modified.
A file that the operating system adds to the root directory during installation.
   5. Install OS/2 Version 3, following the instructions in Using Easy
This file contains statements that set up the system configuration each time you
      Installation or Using Advanced Installation
restart the operating system.
When the installation is complete, you must make changes to the CONFIG.SYS file
located in the root directory of the OS/2 partition in order to make your
CD-ROM accessible.  You must also copy the .ADD that you put on the copy of
Diskette 1 to the \OS2 directory of the OS/2 drive. The OS/2 Installation
program does not copy unsupported .ADD files automatically.  Do the following
  (in the following examples, X represents the OS/2 partition):
   1. Open the OS/2 System folder on the Desktop.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open OS/2 Window.
  4. At the command prompt, type cd\os2 and press Enter.
  5. Insert Diskette 1 into drive A.  Then type the following, pressing Enter
      after each:
      COPY A:\OS2CDROM.DMD
      COPY A:\CDFS.IFS
  6. Remove Diskette 1 from drive A and insert the manufacturer-supplied device
      driver diskette (which contains the .ADD file).
  7. Type the following and then press Enter:
      COPY A:\T128SCSI.ADD
      where T128SCSI.ADD represents the name of the device driver file.
  8. Using a system editor, add the lines shown in uppercase letters to the
      CONFIG.SYS file as shown below. (Lowercase letters represent lines that
      already exist in your CONFIG.SYS file; uppercase letters represent lines
      you need to insert.  This ensures proper placement and installation.)
      basedev=ibm1s506.add
      basedev=os2dasd.dmd
      DEVICE=X:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
      IFS=X:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
      set bookshelf=x:\os2\book . . .
      codepage=437,850
      devinfo=kbd,us,x:\os2\keyboard.dcp
      BASEDEV=T128SCSI.ADD
      devinfo=scr,vga,x:\os2\viotbl.dcp
  9. Save the CONFIG.SYS file and exit the editor.
  10. Shut down your system.
The above procedure is not guaranteed to make your CD-ROM work properly because
the device drivers are made by manufacturers other than IBM.  For further
assistance, contact the manufacturer or your CD-ROM drive.


  Using an IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter   316/2
  configuration   371/3


TheM -
configuration
AudioadaptercanbeconfiguredtoautomaticallyrouteanyaudiosourceattachedtoitsLINE -
(1) The manner in which hardware and software of an information processing
INjacktotheLINE - OUTjack .  ThismightbenecessaryifyourCD -
system are organized and interconnected. (2) The arrangement and relationship of
ROMdriveisnotattachedinternallytotheaudiocardoutputs .
the components in a system or network.
ToenablethisfeatureoftheM - Audiocard ,addaPtotheendoftheDEVICE =statementforM -
AudiointheCONFIG . SYSfile ,asinthefollowingexample :
DEVICE=d:\MMOS2\ACPADD2.SYS A P
where d represents the drive letter, which will already appear in your
CONFIG.SYS file.


  Using a Sound Blaster Adapter   317/2
  configure   372/3


Before you install the Sound Blaster adapter into your computer, you must know
configure
the interrupt level, I/O port address, and the DMA channels.  These values were
To describe to a system the devices, optional features, and programs installed
shown when you installed the adapter into your computer. If you do not know
on the system.
these values, you can do the following:
 
  o On a Micro Channel computer, run the Reference Diskette and look at the
  container   373/3
      system configuration.
 
   o  On an ISA/EISA (non-Micro Channel) computer, check the Dip switches on
container
      your Sound Blaster.
An object that holds other objectsA folder is an example of a container
If your computer has a Token Ring Adapter or a SCSI adapter, you might have
object.
problems if you set Sound Blaster to use I/O port address 220Choose a
 
different address if you have either of these adapters installedI/O address
  copy    374/3
240 is a good choice if 220 cannot be used.
 
ISA and EISA (non-Micro Channel) computers use Interrupt level 7 for the
copy
  printer (LPT) port.  If you have this type of computer with a parallel printer,
(1) A reproduction of an original. (2) To make a reproduction of an object in a
choose a different interrupt.
new locationAfter the copy action, the original object remains in the
  o This release of OS/2 does not support MIDI recording.
original location and a duplicate exists in the new location. A menu choice that
  o  Sound Blaster (non-SB PRO) does not support software volume control.  The
places onto the clipboard a copy of what you have selectedThis choice is also
      MMPM/2 Volume Control application will, therefore, be ineffective for
used to make copies of objects from a pop-up menu.
      these adapters.
  o  If you have an older Sound Blaster (non-SB PRO) card, ensure that you
      upgrade the DSP module to Version 2.0 or higherVersions 1.0 and 1.5 are
      not supported by the Sound Blaster device drivers.


  Using a Pro AudioSpectrum 16   318/2
  cut   375/3


The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 is conceptually two sound cards in one adapter.  The
cut
adapter provides support for the MediaVision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 and the Sound
A choice in a menu of a program that removes a selected object, or a part of an
Blaster 2.0.  A Yamaha OPL-3 chip is included for FM MIDI synthesis.  It is used
object, to the clipboard, usually compressing the space it occupied in a window.
by the OS/2 device driver for MIDI playback and for MIDI background sound when
Removes a selected object or a part of an object to the clipboard, usually
playing games.
compressing the space it occupied in a window.
The FM MIDI hardware is the same as used in Creative Labs Sound Blaster adapters
and is fixed to always respond at a single I/O base address.  This commonality
of hardware is the reason that multiple Pro AudioSpectrum 16 adapters and
multiple Sound Blaster adapters cannot be used in a single computer.
The OS/2 physical device driver does not use the Sound Blaster wave audio side
of the adapter.  This is left free for use by WIN-OS/2 sessions or by games
running in DOS sessions.
The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 side of the adapter requires one interrupt (IRQ), one
Direct Memory Access (DMA) channel, and two I/O addresses.  The Sound Blaster
side also uses one interrupt (IRQ), one DMA channel, and two I/O addresses. The
values for each side of the adapter must be unique just as those selected for
other hardware adapters must be unique. I/O addresses 388 and 330 will not be
seen in the device driver statement.
The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 configurations (DMA and IRQ) are set via software at
system startup, based on parameters specified on the DEVICE= line of the
CONFIG.SYS file.  The values are set by OS/2 Multimedia installation.  An
example of the DEVICE= line that should appear in your CONFIG.SYS file for the
Pro AudioSpectrum 16 device driver follows:
DEVICE=D:\MMOS2\MVPRODD.SYS /I:10 /D:5 /S:1,240,1,5 /N:PAS161$
where:
/N:xxxxx  Specifies the name of the driver.
/T:x      /T:1 = use on-board oscillator for OPL-3 (the default is /T:0).
/D:x      Sets the DMA channel.
/Q:x      Sets the IRQ channel.
/I:x      Sets the IRQ channel.
/B:xxx    Specifies HEX base board I/O location (the default is /B:388).
/W:x      If /W:1, enables warm boot reset (the default is /W:0).
/M:x,xxx  MPU [enabled,base address]
/F:x      FM synthesis (/F:1 is enabled by default).
/J:x      /J:1 causes a joystick to be enabled (the default is /J:0).
/S:x,xxx,x,x Sound Blaster [enable,base address,DMA,IRQ]
The Sound Blaster DMA is fixed at DMA channel 1. The I/O base address and IRQ
settings are set differently based on the version of the Pro AudioSpectrum 16
adapter. Older adapters have these values set via jumpers on the card. The
current versions set the Sound Blaster settings via software on the command
line to MVPRODD.SYS (or MVSOUND.SYS for DOS).
As of this release of OS/2, the device driver MVPRODD.SYS does not know how to
set the Sound Blaster IRQ from software. Only the first two parameters of the
/S: parameters are used (enable and I/O location).


  Keyboard and Mouse Use   319/1+
  D   376/2+


The following tables list some of the most common tasks you can do, using either
the keyboard or a mouse.  The plus (+) sign between key names means to press and
hold down the keys in the order shown and release them together.
When a column is left blank under the Mouse heading, it means that there is no
equivalent mouse function.  The keyboard must be used.
The following terms are used to describe actions taken with a mouse:
Click        Press and release a mouse button.  Instructions explain whether
              you should click mouse button 1 or 2.
Double-click  Press and release mouse button 1 twice in quick succession.
Drag          Move an object across the computer screen with a mouse.
Open          Point to an item and double-click.  Instructions explain which
              item to point to.
Point        Move the mouse pointer.
Select        Point to an item and click mouse button 1.  Instructions explain
              which item to point to.
Note:  For a detailed list of specific key assignments, see the Master Help
Index.


  System Tasks   320/2
  data   377/3


ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
data
3 TASK                  3 KEYS        3 MOUSE                                3
The coded representation of information for use in a computer. Data has certain
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
attributes such as type and length.
3 Get help.              3 F1          3 Select the word HELP.                 3
 
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
database   378/3
3 Restart the system.   3 Ctrl+Alt+Del3                                      3
 
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
database
3 Switch to the next    3 Alt+Tab    3 Select the window.                   3
A collection of data with a given structure for accepting, storing, and
3 window.                3            3                                      3
providing, on demand, data for multiple users.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
 
3 Switch to the next    3 Alt+Esc    3 Press both mouse buttons at the same 3
data-file object    379/3
3 window or full-screen 3            3 time; open the window.                3
 
3 session.               3            3                                      3
data-file object
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
An object that represents a file in the file system. The primary purpose is to
3 Display the Window    3 Ctrl+Esc   3 Point to an empty area on the        3
convey information, such as text, graphics, audio, or video. A letter or
3 List.                  3            3 desktop; click both mouse buttons at  3
spreadsheet is an example of data-file objects.
3                        3            3 the same time.                       3
 
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
default   380/3
 
default
A value, attribute, or option that is assumed when another is not explicitly
specified.


  Object Tasks   321/2
  default action   381/3


ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
default action
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
An action that is performed when you press Enter while pointing at an object,
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
double-click the selection button on an object, or perform a direct-manipulation
3 Move among objects.    3  ,  ,  , or              3 Point to the object.    3
operationThe default action is intended to be the action that you would most
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
likely want in the given situation.
3 Select an object.      3 Use the arrow keys to    3 Select the object.      3
 
3                        3 move among the objects3                        3
  default choice   382/3
3                        3 Press the Spacebar to   3                        3
 
3                        3 select an object.        3                        3
default choice
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
A selected choice that a program provides for the initial appearance of a group
3 Select more than one    3 Shift+F8 to begin Add    3 Press and hold the Ctrl 3
of selection choices.
3 object.                3 mode. Use the arrow keys 3 key. Select an object. 3
 
3                        3 to move among objects.  3 Repeat as needed.      3
  deselect   383/3
3                        3 Press the Spacebar to    3 Release the Ctrl key    3
 
3                        3 make each selection.    3 when done.              3
deselect
3                        3 Repeat as needed. Press 3                        3
The process of removing selection highlighting from one or more choices.
3                        3 Shift+F8 again to end   3                        3
Contrast with select.
3                        3 Add mode.                3                        3
 
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
  desktop   384/3
3 Select all objects.    3 Press Ctrl+/             3 Press and hold mouse    3
 
3                        3                          3 button 1; then drag the 3
desktop
3                        3                          3 pointer over every      3
A folder that fills the entire screen and holds all of the objects that enable
3                        3                          3 object.                3
you to interact with and perform operations on the system.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
 
3 Deselect all objects.  3 Press Ctrl+\            3 Select an empty area on 3
  device driver    385/3
3                        3                          3 the desktop.            3
 
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
device driver
3 Open an object.        3 Select it; then press    3 Point to the object;    3
A program that contains the code needed to attach and use a device, such as a
3                        3 Enter.                  3 then double-click.     3
display, plotter, printer, or mouse. The driver might also include data such as
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
help information.
3 Delete an object.      3 Select it; then press    3 Point to the object;    3
3                        3 Shift+F10. Select      3 then press and hold    3
3                        3 DELETE from      the    3 down mouse button 2.   3
3                        3 pop-up menu.            3 Drag the object to the  3
3                        3                          3 Shredder object.        3
3                        3                          3 Release mouse button 2. 3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Print an object.       3 Select it; then press    3 Point to the object;    3
3                        3 Shift+F10.  Select PRINT 3 then press and hold    3
3                        3 from the pop-up menu.    3 down mouse button 2.    3
3                        3                          3 Drag the object to the 3
3                        3                          3 Printer object.        3
3                        3                          3 Release mouse button 2. 3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Move an object.        3 Select it; then press    3 Point to the object;   3
3                        3 Shift+F10.  Select MOVE  3 then press and hold    3
3                        3 from the pop-up menu.    3 down mouse button 2.    3
3                        3                          3 Drag the object to      3
3                        3                          3 another folder object.  3
3                        3                          3 Release mouse button 2. 3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Copy an object.        3 Select it; then press    3 Press and hold down the 3
3                        3 Shift+F10.  Select COPY  3 Ctrl key; then point to 3
3                        3 from the pop-up menu.    3 the object.  Press and 3
3                        3                          3 hold down mouse button  3
3                        3                          3 2.  Drag the object to  3
3                        3                          3 where you want a copy  3
3                        3                          3 to appear.  Release    3
3                        3                          3 mouse button 2; then    3
3                        3                          3 release the Ctrl key.  3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Change the name of an  3 Select the object; then  3 Press and hold down the 3
3 object.                3 press Shift+F10.  Press  3 Alt key; select the    3
3                        3  ; then press Enter.    3 name (title). Release  3
3                        3 Select the GENERAL tab.  3 the Alt key.  Edit the  3
3                        3 Select the TITLE field; 3 name.  Select an area  3
3                        3 then edit the name.      3 away from the name.    3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Press Alt+Shift+Tab;    3 Point to an empty area  3
3 for the desktop folder. 3 then press Ctrl+\.  Then 3 of the desktop folder;  3
3                        3 press Shift+F10.        3 then click mouse button 3
3                        3                          3 2.                      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Select it; then press    3 Point to the object;    3
3 for an object.          3 Shift+F10.              3 then click mouse button 3
3                        3                          3 2.                      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Select the first choice 3 Home                    3 Select the choice.      3
3 in a pop-up menu.      3                          3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Select the last choice  3 End                      3 Select the choice.      3
3 in a pop-up menu.      3                          3                        3
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY
ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Select a choice using  3 Type the underlined      3                        3
3 the underlined letter.  3 letter.                  3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Get Help.              3 Select and object; then  3 Point to the object;    3
3                        3 press F1.                3 then click mouse button 3
3                        3                          3 2. Select HELP.        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Move between the object 3 Press Alt+F6.           3 Select the window or    3
3 and the Help window.    3                          3 object.                3
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY


  Window Tasks   322/2
  device font   386/3


ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
device font
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
A font particular to, and loaded in the memory of a device such as a video
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
display or printer. Some device fonts have size and language-support
3 Get Help.              3 F1.                      3 Select the word HELP;  3
restrictions.
3                        3                          3 then select the type of 3
 
3                        3                          3 help you want.         3
  device object    387/3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
 
3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Alt+Spacebar            3 Point to the title-bar  3
device object
3 for a window.          3                          3 icon; then click mouse 3
An object that provides a means of communication between a computer and another
3                        3                          3 button 2.              3
piece of equipment, such as a printer or disk driveSee also printer object.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
 
3 Move a window.          3 Alt+F7; then use the    3 Point to the title bar; 3
digital   388/3
3                        3 arrow keys.              3 then press and hold    3
 
3                        3                          3 down mouse button 2.    3
digital
3                        3                          3 Drag the window to the  3
Pertaining to data in the form of numeric characters.
3                        3                          3 new locationRelease  3
 
3                        3                          3 mouse button 2.         3
  digital audio   389/3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
 
3 Size a window.          3 Alt+F8; then use the    3 Point to the border;   3
digital audio
3                        3 arrow keys.              3 then press and hold    3
Audible information that has been converted to and stored in digital form.
3                        3                          3 down mouse button 2.    3
 
3                        3                          3 Drag the border of the  3
  digital video    390/3
3                        3                          3 window in any direc-    3
 
3                        3                          3 tion. Release mouse   3
digital video
3                        3                          3 button 2.              3
Visual material that has been converted to digital form.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
 
3 Set a default size for  3 Press Alt; then press S. 3 Press and hold the      3
  direct manipulation    391/3
3 a window.               3 Use the up, down, left,  3 Shift key; then point  3
 
3                        3 or right cursor keys to  3 to a corner of the      3
direct manipulation
3                        3 adjust two of the        3 window border. Press  3
The action of using a mouse or another pointing device to work with objects,
3                        3 borders; then press      3 and hold mouse button  3
rather than through menus. For example, changing the size of a window by
3                        3 Enter.                  3 1; then drag the border 3
dragging one of its edges is direct manipulation. Moving or printing an object
3                        3                          3 to the desired size.   3
by dragging it to the printer is another example. See also drag.
3                        3 NOTE:  If you press the 3 Release mouse button 1; 3
 
3                        3        mnemonic key for  3 then release the Shift  3
directory    392/3
3                        3        Hide, Minimize,  3 key.                    3
 
3                        3        or Maximize,     3                        3
directory
3                        3        instead of the S 3                        3
(1) A list of the files that are stored on a disk or diskette. A directory also
3                        3        for Size, the     3                        3
contains information about the file such as size and date of last change. (2) A
3                        3        selected choice  3                        3
named grouping of files in a file system. See also folder.
3                        3        will become the  3                        3
 
3                        3        default size of   3                        3
directory tree   393/3
3                        3        the window.      3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Minimize a window.      3 Alt+F9                  3 Select the Minimize    3
3                        3                          3 button.                 3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Hide a window.          3 Alt+F11                  3 Select the Hide button. 3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Maximize a window.     3 Alt+F10                  3 Select the Maximize    3
3                        3                          3 button.                3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Close a window.        3 Alt+F4                  3 Double-click on the    3
3                        3                          3 title bar icon.        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Move up through the    3 Page Up or PgUp.        3 Select the area above  3
3 contents of a window,  3                          3 the slider box on the  3
3 one page at a time.     3                          3 scroll bar.            3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Move down through the   3 Page Down or PgDn.       3 Select the area below  3
3 contents of a window,  3                          3 the slider box on the  3
3 one page at a time.     3                          3 scroll bar.             3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Move to and from the   3 F10                      3 Select the menu bar or  3
3 menu bar.              3                          3 the window.            3
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY


Notebook Tasks    323/2
directory tree
An outline of all the directories and subdirectories on the current drive.


ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
disk   394/3
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
 
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
disk
3 Get Help                3 F1                      3 Select the HELP push   3
A round, flat, data medium that is rotated in order to read or write data. See
3                        3                          3 button.                3
also compact disc, hard disk, and diskette.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
 
3 Move to the next page. 3 Alt+Page Down            3 Select a notebook tab. 3
diskette   395/3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
 
3 Move to the previous   3 Alt+Page Up              3 Select a notebook tab.  3
diskette
3 page.                  3                          3                        3
A removable magnetic disk enclosed in a protective cover used to store
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
informationSee also diskette drive.
3 Move the cursor from    3 Alt+Up Arrow            3 Select a notebook tab3
 
3 the notebook page to a  3                          3                        3
  diskette drive    396/3
3 tab.                   3                          3                        3
 
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
diskette drive
3 Move the cursor from a 3 Alt+Down Arrow          3 Select the notebook    3
A mechanism used to seek, read, and write data on diskettes.
3 tab to the notebook    3                          3 page.                  3
3 page.                  3                          3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Move to the next field. 3 Tab                      3 Select the field.      3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Move to the next item  3 Up, Down, Left, or Right 3                        3
3 within a field.        3 Arrow                    3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Select an item in a    3 Enter                    3 Select the item.       3
3 single selection field. 3                          3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Select an item in a    3 Spacebar                3 Select the button or    3
3 multiple selection      3                          3 box next to the item.  3
3 field.                  3                          3                        3
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY


  Help Window Tasks   324/2
  DOS command prompt   397/3


These tasks only work from within a help window.
DOS command prompt
ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands. The DOS command
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
prompt is displayed in a DOS window or DOS full screen. Contrast with OS/2
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
command prompt.
3 Switch between a help  3 Alt+F6                  3 Select the window.     3
 
3 window and the object  3                          3                        3
DOS session   398/3
3 or window for which    3                          3                        3
 
3 help was displayed.     3                          3                        3
DOS session
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
A session created by the OS/2 operating system that supports the independent
3 Display General help.  3 F2                      3 Select HELP; then      3
execution of a DOS program. The DOS program appears to run independent of any
3                        3                          3 select GENERAL HELP.   3
other programs in the system.
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
 
3 Display Keys help.      3 F9                      3 Select HELP; then      3
double-click    399/3
3                        3                          3 select KEYS HELP.      3
 
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
double-click
3 Display Help index.     3 F11 or Shift+F1          3 Select HELP; then      3
To press and release the select button on a pointing device twice in rapid
3                        3                          3 select to HELP INDEX.   3
succession while the pointer is over the intended target of the operationSee
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
also click.
3 Display Using help.    3 Shift+F10                3 Select HELP; then      3
 
3                        3                          3 select USING HELP.      3
downloaded font   400/3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
 
3 Display help for a     3 Use Tab to move the     3 Double-click on the     3
downloaded font
3 highlighted word or    3 cursor to the high-      3 highlighted word or    3
A soft font copied (downloaded) to the memory of a printer.
3 phrase.                 3 lighted word or phrase; 3 phrase.                3
3                        3 then press Enter.       3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Display the previous   3 Esc                      3 Select the PREVIOUS    3
3 help window.            3                          3 push button.            3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Search for a word or    3 Ctrl+S                  3 Select SERVICES; then  3
3 phrase                  3                          3 select SEARCH.         3
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY


  Master Help Index Tasks   325/2
  drag   401/3


ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD?
drag
3 TASK                    3 KEYS                    3 MOUSE                  3
To use a mouse or another pointing device to move an object. The following are
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
examples:  (1) pointing to an object; then pressing and holding mouse button 2
3 Open the Master Help    3 Enter                    3 Double-click on the    3
while moving to a new location, or (2) pointing to a window border; then holding
3 Index.                  3                          3 Master Help Index.     3
down mouse button 1 or 2 while moving the border to change the size of the
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
window. Dragging ends when the mouse button is released.
3 Move through the        3                          3 Select the topic.      3
 
3 topics, one line at a   3                          3                        3
  dynamic data exchange   402/3
3 time.                  3                          3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Select the area above  3                          3                        3
3 the slider box on the  3                          3                        3
3 scroll bar.            3                          3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Move down through the  3 Page Down or PgDn.      3 Select the area below  3
3 topics, one page at a  3                          3 the slider box on the  3
3 time.                  3                          3 scroll bar.            3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Move up through the    3 Page Up or PgUp.        3                        3
3 topics, one page at a  3                          3                        3
3 time.                  3                          3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Move to the topics      3 Type the letter of the   3 Select the letter of    3
3 beginning with a        3 alphabet                3 the alphabet.          3
3 letter.                3                          3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Switch between an entry 3 Alt+F6                  3 Select the window.     3
3 and the Master Help    3                          3                        3
3 Index.                 3                          3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Display related infor- 3 Use Tab to move the      3 Double-click on an      3
3 mation.                3 cursor to the entry      3 entry listed under      3
3                        3 listed under related    3 related information.   3
3                        3 information; then press  3                        3
3                        3 Enter.                  3                        3
CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4
3 Return to the previous  3 Esc                      3 Select the PREVIOUS    3
3 help window.            3                          3 push button.            3
@DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY


Notices    326/1+
dynamic data exchange
The exchange of data between programs or between a program and a data-file
object. Any change you make to information in one program or session is applied
to the identical data created by the other program. For example, with the
dynamic data exchange (DDE) feature enabled, you can select the duplicate of a
spreadsheet that is embedded in a report. Then, if you make changes to the
spreadsheet copy in the report, the same changes are made to the original
spreadsheet file.


References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not
E    403/2+
imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM
operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended to
state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any
functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any
of IBM's intellectual property rights or other legally protectable rights may be
used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and
verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or
services, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user's
responsibility.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in
this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to
these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director
of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood NY 10594, U.S.A.


Trademarks    327/2


The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are
  enable    404/3
trademarks or service marks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other
 
countries:
enable
  AT                          IBM
(1) To make functional. (2) The state of a processing unit that allows the
IBMLink                    Micro Channel
occurrence of certain types of interruptions. (3) To initiate the operation of
Operating System/2          OS/2
a circuit or device.
  PC/XT                      Personal System/2
 
  Presentation Manager        Proprinter
  environment variables    405/3
PS/2                        Screen Reader
 
ThinkPad                    ValuePoint
environment variables
  WIN-OS/2                    Workplace Shell
A series of commands placed in the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files that
XGA                        XT
dictate the way the operating system is going to run and what external devices
The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) in this publication, are
it is going to recognizeThese commands also can be specified as settings of
trademarks of other companies as follows:
DOS programs.
Trademark                Owner
 
Adaptec                  Adaptec, Inc.
  extended attributes    406/3
  Adobe                    Adobe Systems Incorporated
 
Adobe Type Manager      Adobe Systems Incorporated
extended attributes
After Dark              Berkely Systems, Inc.
Additional information that the system or a program associates with a file. An
Allways                  Funk Software, Inc.
extended attribute can be any format, for example text, a bit map, or binary
  ALR                      Advanced Logic Research, Inc.
data.
AMI                      American Megatrends, Inc.
 
Aox                      Aox Corporation
  F    407/2+
  APM                      Astek International
 
ATI                      ATI Technologies, Inc.
 
Borland C++              Borland International, Inc.
  field    408/3
Bubble-Jet              Canon, Inc.
 
  Canon                    Canon Kabushiki Kaisha
field
Central Point Anti-Virus Central Point Software, Inc.
An identifiable area in a window used to contain data. Examples of fields are:
Central Point Backup    Central Point Software, Inc.
an entry field, into which you can type text; and a field of radio buttons, from
  Cirrus Logic            Cirrus Logic, Inc.
which you can select one choice.
Compaq                  Compaq Computer Corporation
 
CompuServe              CompuServe Incorporated
  file    409/3
  Echo                    Echo Speech Corporation
 
Everex                  Everex Systems, Inc.
file
  Flexview                Nutmeg Systems
A collection of related data that is stored and retrieved by an assigned name.
Freelance                Lotus Development Corporation
For example, a file can include information that starts a program, program-file
Future Domain            Future Domain Corporation
object, can contain text or graphics data-file object, or can process a series
Gateway 2000            Gateway 2000, Inc.
of commands such as a batch file.
Graphics Ultra Pro      ATI Technologies, Inc.
 
Helvetica                Linotype Company
  file allocation table (FAT)    410/3
Hewlett-Packard          Hewlett-Packard Company
 
Hitachi                  Hitachi Ltd.
file allocation table (FAT)
HP                      Hewlett-Packard Company
A table used by DOS to allocate disk space for a fileIt also locates and
Intel                    Intel Corporation
chains together parts of the file that may be scattered on different sectors so
  IOMEGA                  IOMEGA Inc.
that the file can be used in a random or sequential manner. Contrast with High
LaserJet                Hewlett-Packard Company
Performance File System (HPFS).
Leading Technology      Leading Technology, Inc.
 
Legend                  Sigma Designs Inc.
  file name    411/3
  Logitech                Logitech, Inc.
 
Lotus                    Lotus Development Corporation
file name
McAfee                  McAfee Associates
(1) The name used by a program to identify a file. (2) When referring to the
Media Vision            Media Vision, Inc.
file allocation table (FAT) file system, the file name is the portion of the
Micronics                Micronics Electronics, Inc.
identifying name that precedes the extension. When referring to the high
Microsoft                Microsoft Corporation
performance file system (HPFS), the file name includes an extension (if there is
  Mitsumi                  Mitsumi Denki Kabushki Kaisha
one).
Motherboard Factory      Motherboard Factory
If you are using the HPFS, the file name can be up to 254 characters and can
Mylex                    Mylex Corporation
include any number of periodsThe following is an example of a path and file
  NetWare                  Novell, Inc.
name in the HPFS file system where C: is the drive, the first \ is the root,
Nomad                    Gateway 2000, Inc.
INCOME is the directory, and SALES.FIGURES.SEPTEMBER is the file name:
Northgate                Northgate Computer Systems
    C:\INCOME\SALES.FIGURES.SEPTEMBER
Orchid                  Orchid Technology Inc.
If you are using the FAT file system, the file name can be up to eight
Panasonic                Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
characters and can be followed by an optional three-character extensionThe
PCMCIA                  Personal Computer Memory Card International
following is an example of a path and file name in the FAT file system where C:
                          Association
is the drive, the first \ is the root, INCOME is the directory, TAX is a
Philips                  Philips Electronics N.V.
subdirectory, and SALES.TXT is the file name and extension:
Phoenix                  Phoenix Technologies, Ltd.
    C:\INCOME\TAX\SALES.TXT
  PostScript              Adobe Systems Incorporated
Pro AudioSpectrum        Media Vision, Inc.
ProComm                  Datastorm Technologies, Inc.
Quantum                  Quantum Corporation
Reveal                  Reveal Computer Products, Inc.
SlimLine                Northgate Computer Systems
Sony                    Sony Corporation
Sound Blaster            Creative Labs, Inc.
  Stacker                  Stac Electronics
S3                      S3 Incorporated
Times New Roman          Monotype Corporation, Limited
Trident                  Trident Microsystems, Incorporated
Toshiba                  Toshiba Corporation
Tseng                    Tseng Laboratories Inc.
Ventura Publisher        Ventura Software, Inc.
VESA                    Video Electronics Standards Association
Video 7                  Video Seven, Inc.
Weitek                  Weitek Corporation
Western Digital          Western Digital Corporation
Windows                  Microsoft Corporation
WordPerfect              WordPerfect Corporation
Zenith Data Systems      Zenith Electronics Corporation
ZEOS                    ZEOS International Ltd.
1-2-3                    Lotus Development Corporation


  Glossary   328/1+
  flag   412/3


flag
A characteristic of a file or directory that enables it to be used in certain
ways.  See also archive, hidden, read-only, and system.


  A   329/2+
  folder   413/3


folder
A container used to organize objects, programs, documents, other folders, or any
combination of these.  The folders on the desktop represent the directories in
the file system.  For example, a folder can have other folders within it.  This
is similar to a subdirectory within a directory.


  archive   330/3
  font   414/3


archive
font
(1) A flag of files and directories that OS/2 uses to determine which files are
A particular style (shape), size, slant, and weight, defined for an entire
new or modified. Files with this flag are included when a backup copy is made
character set; for example, 9-point Helvetica italic bold. When applied to
or when all the files are restored on a hard disk. (2) A copy of one or more
outline or scalable character sets, which can be scaled to any size, font refers
files or a copy of a database that is saved for future reference or for recovery
to style, slant, and weight, but not to size.
purposes in case the original data is damaged or lost.


  attribute   331/3
  foreground   415/3


attribute
foreground
A characteristic or property of a file, directory, or object; for example, its
In multiprogramming, the environment in which interactive high-priority programs
size, last modification date, or flag. See also setting.
run. These programs run interactively with the user.


  audio   332/3
  format   416/3


audio
format
Pertaining to the portion of recorded information that can be heard.
To check a hard disk or diskette for defects and prepare it to hold information.


  AUTOEXEC.BAT   333/3
  Format 0 MIDI file   417/3


AUTOEXEC.BAT
Format 0 MIDI file
A batch file whose main purpose is to process commands that set up the operating
All MIDI data is stored on a single track.
system for DOS sessions.


  audio   334/3
  Format 1 MIDI file   418/3


audio
Format 1 MIDI file
Pertaining to the portion of recorded information that can be heard.
All MIDI data is stored on multiple tracks.


  audio processing   335/3
  H   419/2+


audio processing
In multimedia applications, manipulating digital audio; for example, by editing
or creating special effects.


  audio segment   336/3
  hard disk   420/3


audio segment
hard disk
A contiguous set of recorded data from an audio trackAn audio segment might
A rigid disk in a hard disk drive that you cannot remove. The hard disk can be
or might not be associated with a video segment.
partitioned into storage areas of variable sizes that are subdivided into
directories and subdirectoriesSee also partition.


  audio track   337/3
  Help   421/3


audio track
Help
(1) The audio portion of a program. (2) The physical location where the audio is
A choice on a pop-up menu that gives you assistance and information; for
placed beside the image. (A system with two audio tracks can have either stereo
example, general help about the purpose of the object. (This information is the
sound or two independent audio tracks.) (3) Synonymous with sound track&per.
same as highlighting the choice and pressing F1.) If you select the arrow to
the right of Help, a cascaded menu appears from which you can request further
help.
The Help choice also can appear in those programs that have a menu bar.


  AudioVisual Connection (AVC)   338/3
  Help Index   422/3


AudioVisual Connection (AVC)
Help Index
An IBM product that enables a user to develop and deliver professional-quality
A choice in the Help cascaded menu that presents an alphabetic listing of help
audio-visual shows on a PS/2 computer.
topics for an object.
The Help index choice also can appear in those programs that have Help on a menu
bar.


  authoring   339/3
  Help push button   423/3


authoring
Help push button
A structured approach to combining all the media elements in an interactive
A push button that, when selected, provides information about the item the
production, assisted by computer software designed for this purpose.
cursor is on or about the entire window.


  authoring system   340/3
  hidden   424/3


authoring system
hidden
The software tools necessary to integrate computers and peripherals, such as
A flag that indicates that a file or directory should not be displayed in the
CD-ROMs and laser videodiscs.
directory tree or the directory window.


  B   341/2+
  hide   425/3


hide
To remove a window from the desktop.  Hidden windows are displayed in the Window
List.


  background   342/3
  hide button   426/3


background
hide button
In multiprogramming, the conditions under which low-priority programs run when
A small button located in the right-hand corner of the title bar of a window
high-priority programs are not using the system resources.  A background session
that, when selected, removes all of the windows associated with that window from
runs one program step at a time.  It does not run interactively with the user;
the screen and are displayed in the Window List.
processing continues on other sessions in the foreground.


  back up   343/3
  highlighting   427/3


back up
highlighting
To copy information onto a diskette or hard disk for record keeping or recovery
Emphasizing a display element or segment by modifying its visual attributes.
purposes.


  batch file    344/3
  high performance file system (HPFS)   428/3


batch file
high performance file system (HPFS)
A file that contains a series of commands to be processed sequentiallyA batch
An installable file system that uses high-speed buffer storage, known as a
file can have either a CMD or a BAT extension.
cache, to provide fast access to large disk volumesThe file system also
supports the coexistence of multiple, active file systems on a single personal
computer, with the capability of multiple and different storage devices.
File names used with HPFS can have as many as 254 characters.


  baud rate   345/3
  I   429/2+


baud rate
A number representing the speed at which information travels over a
communication line.  The higher the number, the faster communication occurs.


  bit map   346/3
  icon   430/3


bit map
icon
A representation of an image by an array of bits.
A graphical representation of an object, consisting of an image, image
background, and a label.


  bookmark   347/3
  image file   431/3


bookmark
image file
A menu choice in online books that is used to save your place in the document
A file that is created from a DOS startup diskette.  The image file is a copy of
that you are viewing, by marking the topic that is displayed.
the information on the startup diskette.  Just as a DOS session can be started
from a DOS startup diskette, a DOS session can be started from an image file of
that same diskette.


  border   348/3
  inactive window   432/3


border
inactive window
A visual indicator of a window's boundaries.
A window you are not currently interacting with.  This window cannot receive
input from the mouse or keyboard.  Contrast with active window.


  button   349/3
  install   433/3


button
install
A mechanism on a pointing device, such as a mouse, or an area on the computer
(1) To physically copy the files from the shipped diskettes of an operating
screen, used to request or initiate an actionSee also maximize button, hide
system or program to specified areas (directories) of a hard disk.  (2)
button, push button, radio button, and restore button.
Installing a printer driver, queue driver, or port means adding the driver to
the INI file (and copying to the hard disk only if required)Deleting a
printer driver, queue driver, or port removes the entry from the INI file, but
leaves the program file on your hard disk.


  byte   350/3
  interrupt request (IRQ)   434/3


byte
interrupt request (IRQ)
A group of eight adjacent binary digits that are treated as a unit, and that
A request for processing on a particular priority level.  It may be generated by
often represent a character.
the active program, the processing unit, or an I/O device.


  C   351/2+
  IRQ   435/3


IRQ
See interrupt request (IRQ).


  cache   352/3
  J   436/2+


cache
A storage buffer that contains frequently accessed instructions and data; it is
used to reduce hard disk access time.


  cascade   353/3
  job   437/3


cascade
job
A choice in a menu that arranges the secondary windows so that each window is
A data file sent to a printer to be printed.
offset on two sides from the window it overlaps.  The windows appear to be
stacked, one behind the other.


  cascading choice   354/3
  K   438/2+


cascading choice
A menu choice that has an arrow to the right of it.  If this arrow is selected,
a cascaded menu appears. A three-dimensional arrow indicates that a cascaded
choice is preselected and is the default action when you select the main choice.
A one-dimensional arrow indicates that additional choices are available;
however, there is no default action.  See also cascaded menu.


  cascaded menu   355/3
  kernel   439/3


cascaded menu
kernel
A menu that appears when the arrow to the right of a cascading choice is
(1) The part of an operating system that performs basic functions such as
selectedIt contains a set of choices that are related to the cascading
allocating hardware resources(2) A part of a program that must be in main
choice.  Cascaded menus are used to reduce the length of a menu.
storage in order to load other parts of the program.


  case-sensitive   356/3
  keys help   440/3


case-sensitive
keys help
A condition in which entries for an entry field must conform to a specific
A choice in the Help cascaded menu that presents a listing of all the key
lowercase, uppercase, or mixed-case format in order to be valid.
assignments for an object or a product. This choice also can appear in those
programs that have Help on a menu bar.


  CD-ROM   357/3
  kilobyte (KB)   441/3


CD-ROM
kilobyte (KB)
High capacity, read-only memory in the form of an optically read compact disc.
A term meaning 1024 bytes.
See also compact disc.


  character   358/3
  L   442/2+


character
A letter, digit, or other symbol that is used as part of the organization,
control, or representation of data.


  check box   359/3
  LAN   443/3


check box
LAN
A square box with associated text that represents one choice in a set of
Local Area Network.  (1) Two or more computing units connected for local
multiple choices.  When you select a choice, a check mark appears in the check
resource sharing.  (2) A network in which communications are limited to a
box to indicate that the choice is in effect.  You can clear the check box by
moderate-sized geographic area, such as a single office building, warehouse, or
selecting the choice again. Contrast with radio button.
campus, and that do not extend across public rights-of-way.


  check mark   360/3
  list box   444/3


check mark
list box
A symbol that shows that a choice is currently active.  This symbol is used in
A vertical, scrollable list of objects or settings choices that you can select.
menus and check boxes.  See also checkbox.


  chip set   361/3
  log in   445/3


chip set
log in
An integrated circuit or a set of integrated circuits which provide hardware
(1) To begin a session with a remote resource (2) The act of identifying
support for a related set of functions, such as generation of video.
yourself as authorized to use the resource.  Often, the system requires a user
ID and password to check your authorization to use the resource.


  choice   362/3
  log out   446/3


choice
log out
Any item that you can select. A choice can appear in a selection field, in a
(1) To end a session or request that a session be ended. (2) The act of removing
menu, or in text (a list of selectable choices), or it might be represented by
access to a remote resource from a workstation.  Contrast with log in.
an icon.


  circular slider control   363/3
  M   447/2+


circular slider control
A knob-like control that performs like a control on a TV or stereo.


  click   364/3
  M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter (M-ACPA)   448/3


click
M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter (M-ACPA)
To press and release the select button on a pointing device without moving the
An adapter card (for use with the IBM PS/2 product line) that provides the
pointer off the choiceSee also double-click.
ability to record and play back high quality soundThe adapter converts the
audio input (analog) signals to a digital format that is compressed and stored
for later use.


  clip   365/3
  mark   449/3


clip
mark
A section of recorded, filmed, or videotaped material.
A menu choice of a program that you select to highlight text or graphics that
you want to perform clipboard operations on. The clipboard operations are cut,
copy, paste, clear, and delete.


  clipboard   366/3
  Master Help Index   450/3


clipboard
Master Help Index
An area of memory that temporarily holds data being passed from one program to
An object on the desktop that, when selected, presents an alphabetic listing of
another.  Data is placed on the clipboard by selecting from a menu.
operating system tasks and topics.


  close   367/3
  maximize   451/3


close
maximize
A choice in Window List and in those programs that have a system menu.  This is
A menu choice available from the Windows choice on a pop-up menu. Select this
also a cascading choice from the Windows choice on a pop-up menu. This choice
choice to enlarge the window to its largest possible size.
ends highlighted programs and objects and their associated windows.


  command prompt   368/3
  maximize button   452/3


command prompt
maximize button
A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands.
A large, square button located in the rightmost corner of the title bar of a
window that, when selected, enlarges the window to its largest possible size.
Contrast with hide button.  See also restore button.


  compact disc   369/3
  megabyte (MB)   453/3


compact disc
megabyte (MB)
A disc, usually 4.75 inches in diameter, from which data is read optically by
A term meaning approximately 1000000 bytes.
means of a laser.


  CONFIG.SYS   370/3
  memory   454/3


CONFIG.SYS
memory
A file that the operating system adds to the root directory during installation.
(1) The storage on electronic chips; for example, random access memory, where
This file contains statements that set up the system configuration each time you
your programs and data are held while you use them, or read-only memory where
restart the operating system.
information is stored that your system can refer to but not change. (2)
Program-addressable storage; the locations by which the operating system and
your programs can locate information that is temporarily held in memory. With
the OS/2 operating system, program-addressable memory might be larger than the
electronic chip memory in your computer.


  configuration   371/3
  menu   455/3


configuration
menu
(1) The manner in which hardware and software of an information processing
A displayed list of available items from which you can make a selection. See
system are organized and interconnected. (2) The arrangement and relationship of
also popup menu.
the components in a system or network.


  configure   372/3
  menu bar   456/3


configure
menu bar
To describe to a system the devices, optional features, and programs installed
The area near the top of the window, below the title bar and above the rest of
on the system.
the window, that contains choices that provide access to other menus.


  container   373/3
  MIDI   457/3


container
MIDI
An object that holds other objects.  A folder is an example of a container
Musical Instrument Digital Interface.
object.


  copy   374/3
  MIDI Mapper   458/3


copy
MIDI Mapper
(1) A reproduction of an original.  (2) To make a reproduction of an object in a
Provides the ability to translate and redirect MIDI messages to achieve
new location.  After the copy action, the original object remains in the
device-independent playback of MIDI sequences.
original location and a duplicate exists in the new location. A menu choice that
places onto the clipboard a copy of what you have selected.  This choice is also
used to make copies of objects from a pop-up menu.


  cut   375/3
  migrate   459/3


cut
migrate
A choice in a menu of a program that removes a selected object, or a part of an
(1) To move to a changed operating environment, usually to a new release or
object, to the clipboard, usually compressing the space it occupied in a window.
version of a system. (2) To move data from one hierarchy of storage to another.
Removes a selected object or a part of an object to the clipboard, usually
compressing the space it occupied in a window.


  D   376/2+
  minimize   460/3


minimize
To remove a window (using the minimize button) to one of the following:
  o  Minimized Window Viewer
  o  Window List
  o  Desktop Folder.
See also hide.


  data   377/3
  minimize button   461/3


data
minimize button
The coded representation of information for use in a computer. Data has certain
A button, located next to the rightmost button in a title bar, that when
attributes such as type and length.
selected, reduces the window to its smallest possible size and removes all of
the windows associated with that window from the screen. Contrast with maximize
button and hide button.


  database   378/3
  Minimized Window Viewer   462/3


database
Minimized Window Viewer
A collection of data with a given structure for accepting, storing, and
A folder that contains icons of minimized windows. See also minimize button and
providing, on demand, data for multiple users.
minimize.


  data-file object   379/3
  mix   463/3


data-file object
mix
An object that represents a file in the file system.  The primary purpose is to
The combining of audio or video sources during postproduction.
convey information, such as text, graphics, audio, or video.  A letter or
spreadsheet is an example of data-file objects.


  default   380/3
  mixer   464/3


default
mixer
A value, attribute, or option that is assumed when another is not explicitly
A device used to simultaneously combine and blend several inputs into one or two
specified.
outputs.


  default action   381/3
  modem   465/3


default action
modem
An action that is performed when you press Enter while pointing at an object,
A device that converts digital data from a computer to an analog signal that can
double-click the selection button on an object, or perform a direct-manipulation
be transmitted on a telecommunications line and that converts the received
operation.  The default action is intended to be the action that you would most
signal to data for the computer.
likely want in the given situation.


  default choice   382/3
  mouse   466/3


default choice
mouse
A selected choice that a program provides for the initial appearance of a group
A pointing device that you move on a flat surface to position a pointer on the
of selection choices.
screen.  It allows you to select a choice or function to be performed or to
perform operations on the screen, such as dragging or drawing lines from one
position to another.


  deselect   383/3
  mouse button   467/3


deselect
mouse button
The process of removing selection highlighting from one or more choices.
A mechanism on a mouse that you press to select choices or initiate actions.
Contrast with select.


  desktop   384/3
  move   468/3


desktop
move
A folder that fills the entire screen and holds all of the objects that enable
To change the location of an object.  After the move action, the original exists
you to interact with and perform operations on the system.
in its new location and no longer exists in its original location. Contrast with
copy.


  device driver   385/3
  Move   469/3


device driver
Move
A program that contains the code needed to attach and use a device, such as a
A choice on the pop-up menu of objects that you select to move the objects to
display, plotter, printer, or mouse. The driver might also include data such as
other containers. Select to position a window on the screen.
help information.


  device font   386/3
  multimedia   470/3


device font
multimedia
A font particular to, and loaded in the memory of a device such as a video
(1)  The combination of different elements of media (for example, text,
display or printer. Some device fonts have size and language-support
graphics, audio, and still images) for display and control from a personal
restrictions.
computer. (2)  Material presented in a combination of text, graphics, video,
image, animation, and sound.


  device object   387/3
  multimedia system   471/3


device object
multimedia system
An object that provides a means of communication between a computer and another
A system capable of presenting multiple types and formats of material in their
piece of equipment, such as a printer or disk drive.  See also printer object.
entirety.


  digital   388/3
  multiple DOS sessions   472/3


digital
multiple DOS sessions
Pertaining to data in the form of numeric characters.
A system service that coordinates the concurrent operation of separate DOS
sessions.


  digital audio   389/3
  multiple virtual DOS machines   473/3


digital audio
multiple virtual DOS machines
Audible information that has been converted to and stored in digital form.


digital video    390/3
See multiple DOS sessions.


digital video
multitasking    474/3
Visual material that has been converted to digital form.


direct manipulation    391/3
multitasking
A mode of operation that provides for concurrent performance, or interleaved
execution of two or more tasks.


direct manipulation
  Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI)    475/3
The action of using a mouse or another pointing device to work with objects,
rather than through menus. For example, changing the size of a window by
dragging one of its edges is direct manipulation.  Moving or printing an object
by dragging it to the printer is another example.  See also drag.


directory    392/3
Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI)
A protocol that enables a synthesizer to send signals to another synthesizer or
to a computer, or enables a computer to send signals to a musical instrument or
to another computer.


directory
  N    476/2+
(1) A list of the files that are stored on a disk or diskette. A directory also
contains information about the file such as size and date of last change. (2) A
named grouping of files in a file system.  See also folder.


directory tree    393/3


directory tree
network    477/3
An outline of all the directories and subdirectories on the current drive.


  disk    394/3
network
A configuration of data-processing devices and software connected for the
purpose of sharing resources and for information interchange. See also LAN.


disk
network administrator    478/3
A round, flat, data medium that is rotated in order to read or write data. See
also compact disc, hard disk, and diskette.


  diskette    395/3
network administrator
The person responsible for the installation, management, and control of a
network. The network administrator gives authorization to you for accessing
shared resources and determines the type of access those users can have.


diskette
  network group    479/3
A removable magnetic disk enclosed in a protective cover used to store
information. See also diskette drive.


diskette drive    396/3
network group
A folder representing a Local Area Network or a group of objects that you have
permission to access.


diskette drive
notebook    480/3
A mechanism used to seek, read, and write data on diskettes.


  DOS command prompt    397/3
notebook
A graphical representation that resembles a bound notebook that contains pages
separated into sections by tabbed divider-pages. It contains a mechanism that
you can use to turn the pages. For example, you can select a tab to turn the
page to the section identified by the tab label.


DOS command prompt
  O    481/2+
A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands. The DOS command
prompt is displayed in a DOS window or DOS full screen.  Contrast with OS/2
command prompt.


DOS session    398/3


DOS session
object    482/3
A session created by the OS/2 operating system that supports the independent
execution of a DOS program.  The DOS program appears to run independent of any
other programs in the system.


  double-click    399/3
object
Something that you work with to perform a task. Text and graphics are examples
of objects.  See also data-file object, folder, program object and device
object.


double-click
  open    483/3
To press and release the select button on a pointing device twice in rapid
succession while the pointer is over the intended target of the operation. See
also click.


downloaded font    400/3
open
To create a file or make an existing file available for processing or use.


downloaded font
operating system    484/3
A soft font copied (downloaded) to the memory of a printer.


drag    401/3
operating system
Software that controls the processing of programs and that may provide services
such as resource allocation, scheduling, input/output control, and data
management. Although operating systems are predominantly software, partial
hardware implementations are possible.


drag
  OS/2 command prompt    485/3
To use a mouse or another pointing device to move an object. The following are
examples: (1) pointing to an object; then pressing and holding mouse button 2
while moving to a new location, or (2) pointing to a window border; then holding
down mouse button 1 or 2 while moving the border to change the size of the
window. Dragging ends when the mouse button is released.


  dynamic data exchange    402/3
OS/2 command prompt
A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands. The OS/2 command
prompt is displayed in an OS/2 window or OS/2 full screen.  Contrast with DOS
command prompt.


dynamic data exchange
P    486/2+
The exchange of data between programs or between a program and a data-file
object. Any change you make to information in one program or session is applied
to the identical data created by the other program. For example, with the
dynamic data exchange (DDE) feature enabled, you can select the duplicate of a
spreadsheet that is embedded in a report. Then, if you make changes to the
spreadsheet copy in the report, the same changes are made to the original
spreadsheet file.


E    403/2+


parallel    487/3


  enable    404/3
parallel
Pertaining to the simultaneous transmission of individual parts of a whole.
When a printer is connected to a parallel port, it receives an entire byte
(character) at a time. See also serial.


enable
  parameter    488/3
(1) To make functional. (2) The state of a processing unit that allows the
occurrence of certain types of interruptions.  (3) To initiate the operation of
a circuit or device.


environment variables    405/3
parameter
A variable used in conjunction with a command to affect its result.


environment variables
  parity check    489/3
A series of commands placed in the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files that
dictate the way the operating system is going to run and what external devices
it is going to recognize. These commands also can be specified as settings of
DOS programs.


  extended attributes    406/3
parity check
A mathematical operation on the numerical representation of the information
communicated between two pieces. For example, if parity is odd, any character
represented by an even number has a bit added to it, making it odd, and an
information receiver checks that each unit of information has an odd value.


extended attributes
  PARSEDB    490/3
Additional information that the system or a program associates with a file. An
extended attribute can be any format, for example text, a bit map, or binary
data.


  F    407/2+
PARSEDB
A utility program that creates a similar database to the Migrate Applications
default database (DATABASE.DAT). The Migrate Applications program uses
information in this database when migrating programs.  The database you create
with PARSEDB contains similar information to the default database, but for
different programs.


partition    491/3


  field    408/3
partition
A fixed-size division of storage. On a personal computer hard disk, one of four
possible storage areas of variable size; one might be accessed by DOS, and each
of the others might be assigned to another operating system.


field
  password    492/3
An identifiable area in a window used to contain data. Examples of fields are:
an entry field, into which you can type text; and a field of radio buttons, from
which you can select one choice.


file    409/3
password
A string of characters that you, a program, or a computer operator must specify
to meet security requirements before gaining access to a system and to the
information stored within it.


file
paste    493/3
A collection of related data that is stored and retrieved by an assigned name.
For example, a file can include information that starts a program, program-file
object, can contain text or graphics data-file object, or can process a series
of commands such as a batch file.


  file allocation table (FAT)   410/3
paste
(1) A choice in the menu of a program that, when selected, moves the contents
of the clipboard into a preselected location that you can select in a window.
(2)Move the contents of the clipboard into a preselected location that you can
select in a window.


file allocation table (FAT)
  path    494/3
A table used by DOS to allocate disk space for a file. It also locates and
chains together parts of the file that may be scattered on different sectors so
that the file can be used in a random or sequential manner. Contrast with High
Performance File System (HPFS).


  file name   411/3
path
A statement that indicates where a file is stored on a particular drive. The
path consists of all the directories that must be opened to get to a particular
file.  The directory names are separated by the backslash (\).  The first
backslash represents the root directory.  For example, a file named things that
is located in the EDIT directory of drive C has a path of:
    c:\edit\things
A path is sometimes followed by a file name and a file name extension (if there
is one).  It is sometimes preceded by a drive letter and a colon (:).


file name
  path and file name   495/3
(1) The name used by a program to identify a file.  (2) When referring to the
file allocation table (FAT) file system, the file name is the portion of the
identifying name that precedes the extension. When referring to the high
performance file system (HPFS), the file name includes an extension (if there is
one).
If you are using the HPFS, the file name can be up to 254 characters and can
include any number of periods.  The following is an example of a path and file
name in the HPFS file system where C: is the drive, the first \ is the root,
INCOME is the directory, and SALES.FIGURES.SEPTEMBER is the file name:
    C:\INCOME\SALES.FIGURES.SEPTEMBER
If you are using the FAT file system, the file name can be up to eight
characters and can be followed by an optional three-character extension. The
following is an example of a path and file name in the FAT file system where C:
is the drive, the first \ is the root, INCOME is the directory, TAX is a
subdirectory, and SALES.TXT is the file name and extension:
    C:\INCOME\TAX\SALES.TXT


  flag    412/3
path and file name
The path and file name make up a statement that indicates where a file is stored
in a particular drive. It consists of all the directories that must be opened
to get to a particular file.  The backslash (\) separates directory names and
the file name; the first \ indicates the root.
File names in the HPFS file system can be up to 254 characters and can include
any number of periods. The following is an example:
\INCOME\SALES.FIGURES.FOR.SEPTEMBER
File names in the FAT file system can be up to eight characters and can be
followed by an optional three-character extension.  The following is an example:
\INCOME\TAX\SALES.TXT


flag
  plotter    496/3
A characteristic of a file or directory that enables it to be used in certain
ways. See also archive, hidden, read-only, and system.


folder    413/3
plotter
An output device that uses multiple pens to draw on paper or transparencies.


folder
  pointer    497/3
A container used to organize objects, programs, documents, other folders, or any
combination of these. The folders on the desktop represent the directories in
the file system.  For example, a folder can have other folders within it.  This
is similar to a subdirectory within a directory.


font    414/3
pointer
The symbol displayed on the screen that you move with a pointing device, such as
a mouse.


font
pop-up menu    498/3
A particular style (shape), size, slant, and weight, defined for an entire
character set; for example, 9-point Helvetica italic bold. When applied to
outline or scalable character sets, which can be scaled to any size, font refers
to style, slant, and weight, but not to size.


  foreground    415/3
pop-up menu
A menu that, when requested, is displayed next to the object it is associated
with. It contains choices appropriate for a given object or set of objects in
their current context.  The menu is displayed by clicking mouse button 2 on an
object or on the desktop.


foreground
pop-up window    499/3
In multiprogramming, the environment in which interactive high-priority programs
run. These programs run interactively with the user.


format    416/3
pop-up window
A movable window, fixed in size, in which you provide information required by an
application so that the application can continue to process your request.


format
port    500/3
To check a hard disk or diskette for defects and prepare it to hold information.


  Format 0 MIDI file    417/3
port
A connector on a computer to which cables for devices, such as display stations
and printers, or communications lines are attached. Ports can be parallel or
serial.


Format 0 MIDI file
port designation    501/3
All MIDI data is stored on a single track.


Format 1 MIDI file    418/3
port designation
A 4-character identifier (such as LPT1 or COM1) assigned to a printer, plotter,
or communications device so that the system has a unique way to refer to the
resource.


Format 1 MIDI file
printer driver    502/3
All MIDI data is stored on multiple tracks.


H    419/2+
printer driver
A file that describes the physical characteristics of a printer, plotter, or
other peripheral device, and is used to convert graphics into device-specific
data at the time of printing or plotting. A Presentation Manager printer driver
allows you to print or plot from an application program that creates
printer-independent files.


printer-independent file    503/3


  hard disk    420/3
printer-independent file
A file in a format that is independent of a particular printer type. For
example, with a Presentation Manager spooler, a file in the metafile format is
printer-independent.  See also printer-specific file.


hard disk
  printer object    504/3
A rigid disk in a hard disk drive that you cannot remove. The hard disk can be
partitioned into storage areas of variable sizes that are subdivided into
directories and subdirectories. See also partition.


  Help   421/3
printer object
An object representing a physical printer or plotter, its printer driver, queue,
and other settings. See also device object.
 
printer-specific file   505/3


Help
printer-specific file
A choice on a pop-up menu that gives you assistance and information; for
A file that can be printed on only one type of printerSee also
example, general help about the purpose of the object(This information is the
printer-independent file.
same as highlighting the choice and pressing F1.)  If you select the arrow to
the right of Help, a cascaded menu appears from which you can request further
help.
The Help choice also can appear in those programs that have a menu bar.


  Help Index   422/3
  private   506/3


Help Index
private
A choice in the Help cascaded menu that presents an alphabetic listing of help
When the WIN_CLIPBOARD setting is set to Off, this disables (makes private) the
topics for an object.
sharing of clipboard information among DOS, OS/2 and Windows programs.
The Help index choice also can appear in those programs that have Help on a menu
When the WIN_DDE (dynamic data exchange) setting is set to Off, this disables
bar.
(makes private) the sharing of data among OS/2 and Windows programs.


  Help push button   423/3
  program   507/3


Help push button
program
A push button that, when selected, provides information about the item the
A sequence of instructions that a computer can interpret and process.
cursor is on or about the entire window.


  hidden   424/3
  program-file object   508/3


hidden
program-file object
A flag that indicates that a file or directory should not be displayed in the
An object that starts a program.  Program files commonly have extensions of
directory tree or the directory window.
&per.EXE, .COM, .CMD, or .BAT.  Contrast with data-file object.


  hide   425/3
  program object   509/3


hide
program object
To remove a window from the desktopHidden windows are displayed in the Window
An object representing the file that starts a program.  You can change the
List.
settings for this object to specify how you want the program to start or where
the files related to the program are storedFor example, you can specify that
an editor always starts with the NOTABS option.
See also program-file object.


  hide button   426/3
  program title   510/3


hide button
program title
A small button located in the right-hand corner of the title bar of a window
A name that you type for a selected program.  It is displayed with the icon.  It
that, when selected, removes all of the windows associated with that window from
can be any name you want to use to refer to the program. For example, My
the screen and are displayed in the Window List.
Favorite Editor could be used as the program title for an editor whose actual
title is ABC.


  highlighting   427/3
  program type   511/3


highlighting
program type
Emphasizing a display element or segment by modifying its visual attributes.
See session.


  high performance file system (HPFS)   428/3
  property   512/3


high performance file system (HPFS)
property
An installable file system that uses high-speed buffer storage, known as a
(1) Synonym for setting.  (2) Like a setting, but used by the OS/2 operating
cache, to provide fast access to large disk volumes.  The file system also
system to refer to printer, plotter, or print job set up.
supports the coexistence of multiple, active file systems on a single personal
computer, with the capability of multiple and different storage devices.
File names used with HPFS can have as many as 254 characters.


  I   429/2+
  public   513/3


public
When the WIN_CLIPBOARD setting is set to On, this enables (makes public) the
sharing of clipboard information among DOS, OS/2, and Windows programs.
When the WIN_DDE (dynamic data exchange) setting set to On, this enables (makes
public) the sharing of data among OS/2 and Windows programs.


  icon   430/3
  push button   514/3


icon
push button
A graphical representation of an object, consisting of an image, image
A rounded-corner rectangular control containing text or graphics, or both.  Push
background, and a label.
buttons are used in windows for actions that occur immediately when the push
button is selected.


  image file   431/3
  Q   515/2+


image file
A file that is created from a DOS startup diskette.  The image file is a copy of
the information on the startup diskette.  Just as a DOS session can be started
from a DOS startup diskette, a DOS session can be started from an image file of
that same diskette.


  inactive window   432/3
  queue   516/3


inactive window
queue
A window you are not currently interacting with.  This window cannot receive
A line or list formed by items waiting to be processed; for example, a list of
input from the mouse or keyboardContrast with active window.
print jobs waiting to be printedSee also spooling and spooler.


  install   433/3
  queue driver   517/3


install
queue driver
(1) To physically copy the files from the shipped diskettes of an operating
A software processor that takes a print job from a queue, and sends it to the
system or program to specified areas (directories) of a hard disk.  (2)
appropriate printer driver to prepare it for printing.
Installing a printer driver, queue driver, or port means adding the driver to
the INI file (and copying to the hard disk only if required).  Deleting a
printer driver, queue driver, or port removes the entry from the INI file, but
leaves the program file on your hard disk.


  interrupt request (IRQ)   434/3
  R   518/2+


interrupt request (IRQ)
A request for processing on a particular priority level.  It may be generated by
the active program, the processing unit, or an I/O device.


  IRQ   435/3
  radio button   519/3


IRQ
radio button
See interrupt request (IRQ).
A round button on the screen with text beside it.  Radio buttons are combined to
show you a fixed set of choices from which only one can be selected.  The circle
is partially filled when a choice is selected.  Contrast with check box.


  J   436/2+
  read-only   520/3


read-only
A flag that prevents a file from being modified.  The file with this flag set
can be viewed, copied, or printed.


  job   437/3
  refresh   521/3


job
refresh
A data file sent to a printer to be printed.
An action that updates changed information to its current status.


  K   438/2+
  remote   522/3


remote
Pertaining to a system, program, or device that is accessed through a
telecommunication line.


  kernel   439/3
  resolution   523/3


kernel
resolution
(1) The part of an operating system that performs basic functions such as
(1) Density or sharpness of an image.  For bit-map material, resolution is
allocating hardware resources.  (2) A part of a program that must be in main
expressed in dots-per-inch, with higher quality output having more
storage in order to load other parts of the program.
dots-per-inch.  Resolution can be adjusted for some printers.  Low-resolution
images are printed faster, but appear coarser than high-resolution imagesA
printer's memory size can limit the resolution you can choose. (2) The number of
lines in an image that an imaging system (for example, a telescope, the human
eye, or a camera) can resolve. Higher resolution makes text and graphics appear
clearer.


  keys help   440/3
  resource   524/3


keys help
resource
A choice in the Help cascaded menu that presents a listing of all the key
Any facility of a computing system or operating system needed to perform
assignments for an object or a product. This choice also can appear in those
required operations; includes disk storage, input devices, output devices (such
programs that have Help on a menu bar.
as printers), a processing unit, data files, and programs.


  kilobyte (KB)   441/3
  restore button   525/3


kilobyte (KB)
restore button
A term meaning 1024 bytes.
A button that appears in the rightmost corner of the title bar after a window
has been maximized.  When the restore button is selected, the window returns to
the size it was before it was maximized.  See also maximize button and hide
button.


  L   442/2+
  root directory   526/3


root directory
The first directory on a drive in which all other files and subdirectories
exist, such as C:\.


  LAN   443/3
  S   527/2+


LAN
Local Area Network.  (1) Two or more computing units connected for local
resource sharing.  (2) A network in which communications are limited to a
moderate-sized geographic area, such as a single office building, warehouse, or
campus, and that do not extend across public rights-of-way.


  list box   444/3
  scroll   528/3


list box
scroll
A vertical, scrollable list of objects or settings choices that you can select.
To move a display image vertically or horizontally to view data that is not
otherwise visible in a display screen or window.


  log in   445/3
  scroll bar   529/3


log in
scroll bar
(1) To begin a session with a remote resource (2) The act of identifying
A part of a window, associated with a scrollable area, that you interact with to
yourself as authorized to use the resourceOften, the system requires a user
see information that is not currently visible. Scroll bars can be displayed
ID and password to check your authorization to use the resource.
vertically and horizontallyThe scroll bar can be selected only with a mouse.


  log out   446/3
  select   530/3


log out
select
(1) To end a session or request that a session be ended. (2) The act of removing
To use the selection button to highlight or choose an item such as an object or
access to a remote resource from a workstation. Contrast with log in.
a menu choice. When you make a selection, there is a subsequent action that
will apply. Contrast with deselect.


  M   447/2+
  serial   531/3


serial
Pertaining to the sequential transmission of one element at a time.  Serial
ports pass one bit at a time. If a port has word length 7, it must pass seven
separate elements before the receiver can assemble those elements into a single
recognizable whole unit (character).  See also parallel.


  M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter (M-ACPA)   448/3
  server   532/3


M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter (M-ACPA)
server
An adapter card (for use with the IBM PS/2 product line) that provides the
(1) On a local area network (LAN), a workstation that provides facilities to
ability to record and play back high quality soundThe adapter converts the
other workstations.  (2) A computer that shares its resources with other
audio input (analog) signals to a digital format that is compressed and stored
computers on a network.  An example of a server is a file server, a print
for later use.
server, or a mail server.


  mark   449/3
  session   533/3


mark
session
A menu choice of a program that you select to highlight text or graphics that
(1) A logical connection between two machines on a network.  (2) One instance of
you want to perform clipboard operations on. The clipboard operations are cut,
a started program or command prompt.  Each session is separate from all other
copy, paste, clear, and delete.
sessions that might be running on the computer.  The operating system is
responsible for coordinating the resources that each session uses, such as
computer memory, allocation of processor time, and windows on the screen. The
session types are OS/2 window, OS/2 full screen, DOS window, DOS full screen,
WIN-OS/2 full screen, WIN-OS/2 window, and WIN-OS/2 window separate session.


  Master Help Index   450/3
  setting   534/3


Master Help Index
setting
An object on the desktop that, when selected, presents an alphabetic listing of
A unique characteristic of an object that can be changed or modified.  The
operating system tasks and topics.
setting of an object describes the object.  The name of the object is an example
of a setting.


  maximize   451/3
  Settings   535/3


maximize
Settings
A menu choice available from the Windows choice on a pop-up menu.  Select this
A choice that defines characteristics of objects or displays identifying
choice to enlarge the window to its largest possible size.
characteristics of objects.


  maximize button   452/3
  shadow   536/3


maximize button
shadow
A large, square button located in the rightmost corner of the title bar of a
A link between duplicate objects.  The objects can be located in different
window that, when selected, enlarges the window to its largest possible size.
folders.  If you make a change in either the duplicate or the original, the
Contrast with hide button. See also restore button.
change takes effect in the other as well. Or, suppose you have a program on a
drive other than drive C and want to use it from the desktop. You can make a
shadow of the program for the desktop. The program is not physically moved or
copied, which means you save space on your hard disk, but you can use it from
the desktop.


  megabyte (MB)   453/3
  shutdown   537/3


megabyte (MB)
shutdown
A term meaning approximately 1000000 bytes.
The process of selecting the Shut down choice before the computer is powered off
so that data and configuration information is not lost.


  memory   454/3
  slider   538/3


memory
slider
(1) The storage on electronic chips; for example, random access memory, where
A control that represents a quantity and its relationship to the range of
your programs and data are held while you use them, or read-only memory where
possible values for that quantity. In some cases, you can change the value of
information is stored that your system can refer to but not change.  (2)
the quantity.
Program-addressable storage; the locations by which the operating system and
your programs can locate information that is temporarily held in memory. With
the OS/2 operating system, program-addressable memory might be larger than the
electronic chip memory in your computer.


  menu   455/3
  soft font   539/3


menu
soft font
A displayed list of available items from which you can make a selection.  See
Optional fonts shipped as files.  Soft fonts must be installed onto the hard
also popup menu.
disk before they can be selected from programs.  See also downloaded font.


  menu bar   456/3
  source diskette   540/3


menu bar
source diskette
The area near the top of the window, below the title bar and above the rest of
In a diskette-copying procedure, the diskette from which information is read.
the window, that contains choices that provide access to other menus.
Contrast with target diskette.


  MIDI   457/3
  source drive   541/3


MIDI
source drive
Musical Instrument Digital Interface.
The drive from which information is read. Contrast with target drive.


  MIDI Mapper   458/3
  specific DOS   542/3


MIDI Mapper
specific DOS
Provides the ability to translate and redirect MIDI messages to achieve
An actual DOS program product that is purchased independently of the OS/2
device-independent playback of MIDI sequences.
operating system.  Examples include IBM DOS Version 3.x, Microsoft DOS Version
 
3.x, Digital Research** Version 5.0.  Some programs are dependent on the
  migrate    459/3
internals of a specific DOS version. You can run these programs with the OS/2
operating system by starting a DOS session with a specific DOS version.
Contrast with DOS session.


migrate
  spooler    543/3
(1) To move to a changed operating environment, usually to a new release or
version of a system. (2) To move data from one hierarchy of storage to another.


  minimize    460/3
spooler
A program that intercepts data going to a device driver and writes it to disk.
The data is later printed or plotted when the required device is available. A
spooler prevents output from different sources from being intermixed.


minimize
  spooling   544/3
To remove a window (using the minimize button) to one of the following:
  o Minimized Window Viewer
   o  Window List
  o  Desktop Folder.
See also hide.


  minimize button    461/3
spooling
The process of temporarily storing print jobs while waiting for an available
printer or port. Spooling jobs frees system resources from waiting for a
relatively slow device to provide output, and keeps the contents of each print
job separated from the contents of every other print job.


minimize button
sticky keys    545/3
A button, located next to the rightmost button in a title bar, that when
selected, reduces the window to its smallest possible size and removes all of
the windows associated with that window from the screen. Contrast with maximize
button and hide button.


  Minimized Window Viewer    462/3
sticky keys
An input method that enables you to press and release a series of keys
sequentially (for example, Ctrl+Alt+Del), yet have the keys behave as if they
were pressed and released at the same time. This method can be used for those
who require special-needs settings to make the keyboard easier to use.


Minimized Window Viewer
system    546/3
A folder that contains icons of minimized windows. See also minimize button and
minimize.


mix    463/3
system
A flag that indicates that a file or directory is part of the operating system.


mix
system font    547/3
The combining of audio or video sources during postproduction.


  mixer    464/3
system font
One of the fonts available for screen display and printing. You can specify any
size for this font, and it supports any language.  Contrast with device font.


mixer
T    548/2+
A device used to simultaneously combine and blend several inputs into one or two
outputs.


modem    465/3


modem
tab    549/3
A device that converts digital data from a computer to an analog signal that can
be transmitted on a telecommunications line and that converts the received
signal to data for the computer.


  mouse    466/3
tab
(1) An action, achieved by pressing the Tab key that moves the cursor to the
next field. (2) A graphical representation of a book-like tab on a notebook
that, when selected, turns the notebook page.


mouse
  target diskette    550/3
A pointing device that you move on a flat surface to position a pointer on the
screen. It allows you to select a choice or function to be performed or to
perform operations on the screen, such as dragging or drawing lines from one
position to another.


  mouse button    467/3
target diskette
In a diskette or storage copying procedure, the diskette onto which information
is written. Contrast with source diskette.


mouse button
target drive    551/3
A mechanism on a mouse that you press to select choices or initiate actions.


  move    468/3
target drive
The drive to which information is written. Contrast with source drive.


move
  template    552/3
To change the location of an object. After the move action, the original exists
in its new location and no longer exists in its original location. Contrast with
copy.


  Move    469/3
template
An object that you can use as a model to create additional objects. When you
drag a template you create another of the original object, as though you were
peeling one of the objects off a stack.


Move
tile    553/3
A choice on the pop-up menu of objects that you select to move the objects to
other containers. Select to position a window on the screen.


multimedia    470/3
tile
A choice in a menu that modifies the size of each window and arranges them so
that they appear side-by-side and top-to-bottom.


multimedia
  title bar    554/3
(1) The combination of different elements of media (for example, text,
graphics, audio, and still images) for display and control from a personal
computer. (2)  Material presented in a combination of text, graphics, video,
image, animation, and sound.


  multimedia system    471/3
title bar
The area at the top of each window that can contain the window title and a
title-bar icon. When appropriate, it also contains the hide, maximize, and
restore buttons.


multimedia system
title-bar icon    555/3
A system capable of presenting multiple types and formats of material in their
entirety.


  multiple DOS sessions    472/3
title-bar icon
The mini-icon in the upper-left corner of the title bar that represents the
object that is open in the window. You can use the object to display the pop-up
menu or close a window.


multiple DOS sessions
U    556/2+
A system service that coordinates the concurrent operation of separate DOS
sessions.


multiple virtual DOS machines    473/3


multiple virtual DOS machines
user interface    557/3


See multiple DOS sessions.
user interface
The hardware, software, or both that allows you to interact with and perform
operations on a computer.


  multitasking   474/3
  Using Help   558/3


multitasking
Using Help
A mode of operation that provides for concurrent performance, or interleaved
A cascaded choice on the Help menu that gives you information about how the help
execution of two or more tasks.
function works.  This choice is also available on those programs that have Help
as a choice on a menu bar.


  Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI)   475/3
  V   559/2+


Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI)
A protocol that enables a synthesizer to send signals to another synthesizer or
to a computer, or enables a computer to send signals to a musical instrument or
to another computer.


  N   476/2+
  value   560/3


value
A quantity assigned to a constant, a variable, or a parameter.


  network   477/3
  videodisc   561/3


network
videodisc
A configuration of data-processing devices and software connected for the
A disc on which programs are recorded for playback on a computer (or a
purpose of sharing resources and for information interchange.  See also LAN.
television set); a recording on a videodisc.


  network administrator   478/3
  view   562/3


network administrator
view
The person responsible for the installation, management, and control of a
The appearance of the contents of an open object (for example, a folder can be
network.  The network administrator gives authorization to you for accessing
displayed in icon view, tree view, settings view or details view.
shared resources and determines the type of access those users can have.


  network group   479/3
  virtual device driver   563/3


network group
virtual device driver
A folder representing a Local Area Network or a group of objects that you have
A type of device driver used by DOS programs running in a DOS virtual machine,
permission to access.
in order to access devices such as the screen or mouse which must be shared with
other processes in the system.  The virtual device driver maps DOS device
commands to the normal (physical) device driver under OS/2 Version 3.


  notebook   480/3
  virtual DOS machine   564/3


notebook
virtual DOS machine
A graphical representation that resembles a bound notebook that contains pages
See DOS session.
separated into sections by tabbed divider-pages.  It contains a mechanism that
you can use to turn the pages. For example, you can select a tab to turn the
page to the section identified by the tab label.


  O   481/2+
  W   565/2+




  object   482/3
  waveform   566/3


object
waveform
Something that you work with to perform a taskText and graphics are examples
(1)  A graphic representation of the shape of a wave that indicates the wave's
of objects.  See also data-file object, folder, program object and device
characteristics, such as frequency and amplitude. (2)  A digital method of
object.
storing and manipulating audio data within a computer. (3) A series of digital
samples of the audio input stream taken at regular intervals over the duration
of the audio event.


  open   483/3
  wildcard character   567/3


open
wildcard character
To create a file or make an existing file available for processing or use.
Either a question mark (?) or an asterisk (*) used as a variable in a file name
or file name extension when referring to a particular file or group of files.


  operating system   484/3
  WIN-OS/2*   568/3


operating system
WIN-OS/2*
Software that controls the processing of programs and that may provide services
WIN-OS/2 is a feature of OS/2 that enables OS/2 to run supported Windows
such as resource allocation, scheduling, input/output control, and data
programs. See supported Windows programs.
management. Although operating systems are predominantly software, partial
hardware implementations are possible.


  OS/2 command prompt   485/3
  WIN-OS/2 session   569/3


OS/2 command prompt
WIN-OS/2 session
A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands.  The OS/2 command
A WIN-OS/2 session created by the OS/2 operating system that supports the
prompt is displayed in an OS/2 window or OS/2 full screen.  Contrast with DOS
independent processing of a Windows program.  The Windows program can run in a
command prompt.
WIN-OS/2 full-screen, WIN-OS/2 window, or WIN-OS/2 window separate session.


  P   486/2+
  window   570/3


window
An area of the screen with visible boundaries within which information is
displayed.  A window can be smaller than or the same size as the screen.
Windows can appear to overlap on the screen.


  parallel   487/3
  Window List   571/3


parallel
Window List
Pertaining to the simultaneous transmission of individual parts of a whole.
A menu choice that displays a list of all of the open windows in a product. Use
When a printer is connected to a parallel port, it receives an entire byte
the Window List choice to switch to an active program, to tile or cascade open
(character) at a time.  See also serial.
program windows, to surface hidden windows, or to close a program.


  parameter   488/3
  Windows program   572/3


parameter
Windows program
A variable used in conjunction with a command to affect its result.
A program written for the Microsoft Windows application programming interface.


  parity check   489/3
  workarea   573/3


parity check
workarea
A mathematical operation on the numerical representation of the information
A folder setting that enables you to organize your desktop by grouping together
communicated between two pieces.  For example, if parity is odd, any character
objects for a specific task.  For example, you could group a plotter object with
represented by an even number has a bit added to it, making it odd, and an
data-file objects that contain charts and documents.
information receiver checks that each unit of information has an odd value.


  PARSEDB   490/3
  working directory   574/3


PARSEDB
working directory
A utility program that creates a similar database to the Migrate Applications
A specified directory that becomes the current directory when a program is
default database (DATABASE.DAT).  The Migrate Applications program uses
started.  The current directory is the first directory in which the operating
information in this database when migrating programs.  The database you create
system looks for programs and files and stores temporary files and outputSome
with PARSEDB contains similar information to the default database, but for
programs require a working directory.
different programs.


  partition   491/3
  Workplace Shell   575/3


partition
Workplace Shell
A fixed-size division of storage.  On a personal computer hard disk, one of four
A graphical user interface that makes working with your computer easier. The
possible storage areas of variable size; one might be accessed by DOS, and each
Workplace shell lets you manage your work without having to learn the
of the others might be assigned to another operating system.
complexities of the operating system.
 
password    492/3
 
password
A string of characters that you, a program, or a computer operator must specify
to meet security requirements before gaining access to a system and to the
information stored within it.
 
paste    493/3
 
paste
(1)  A choice in the menu of a program that, when selected, moves the contents
of the clipboard into a preselected location that you can select in a window.
(2)Move the contents of the clipboard into a preselected location that you can
select in a window.
 
path    494/3
 
path
A statement that indicates where a file is stored on a particular drive.  The
path consists of all the directories that must be opened to get to a particular
file.  The directory names are separated by the backslash (\).  The first
backslash represents the root directory.  For example, a file named things that
is located in the EDIT directory of drive C has a path of:
    c:\edit\things
A path is sometimes followed by a file name and a file name extension (if there
is one).  It is sometimes preceded by a drive letter and a colon (:).
 
path and file name    495/3
 
path and file name
The path and file name make up a statement that indicates where a file is stored
in a particular drive.  It consists of all the directories that must be opened
to get to a particular file.  The backslash (\) separates directory names and
the file name; the first \ indicates the root.
File names in the HPFS file system can be up to 254 characters and can include
any number of periods. The following is an example:
\INCOME\SALES.FIGURES.FOR.SEPTEMBER
File names in the FAT file system can be up to eight characters and can be
followed by an optional three-character extension.  The following is an example:
\INCOME\TAX\SALES.TXT
 
plotter    496/3
 
plotter
An output device that uses multiple pens to draw on paper or transparencies.
 
pointer    497/3
 
pointer
The symbol displayed on the screen that you move with a pointing device, such as
a mouse.
 
pop-up menu    498/3
 
pop-up menu
A menu that, when requested, is displayed next to the object it is associated
with.  It contains choices appropriate for a given object or set of objects in
their current context.  The menu is displayed by clicking mouse button 2 on an
object or on the desktop.
 
pop-up window    499/3
 
pop-up window
A movable window, fixed in size, in which you provide information required by an
application so that the application can continue to process your request.
 
port    500/3
 
port
A connector on a computer to which cables for devices, such as display stations
and printers, or communications lines are attached.  Ports can be parallel or
serial.
 
port designation    501/3
 
port designation
A 4-character identifier (such as LPT1 or COM1) assigned to a printer, plotter,
or communications device so that the system has a unique way to refer to the
resource.
 
printer driver    502/3
 
printer driver
A file that describes the physical characteristics of a printer, plotter, or
other peripheral device, and is used to convert graphics into device-specific
data at the time of printing or plotting. A Presentation Manager printer driver
allows you to print or plot from an application program that creates
printer-independent files.
 
printer-independent file    503/3
 
printer-independent file
A file in a format that is independent of a particular printer type.  For
example, with a Presentation Manager spooler, a file in the metafile format is
printer-independent.  See also printer-specific file.
 
printer object    504/3
 
printer object
An object representing a physical printer or plotter, its printer driver, queue,
and other settings.  See also device object.
 
printer-specific file    505/3
 
printer-specific file
A file that can be printed on only one type of printer.  See also
printer-independent file.
 
private    506/3
 
private
When the WIN_CLIPBOARD setting is set to Off, this disables (makes private) the
sharing of clipboard information among DOS, OS/2 and Windows programs.
When the WIN_DDE (dynamic data exchange) setting is set to Off, this disables
(makes private) the sharing of data among OS/2 and Windows programs.
 
program    507/3
 
program
A sequence of instructions that a computer can interpret and process.
 
program-file object    508/3
 
program-file object
An object that starts a program.  Program files commonly have extensions of
&per.EXE, .COM, .CMD, or .BAT.  Contrast with data-file object.
 
program object    509/3
 
program object
An object representing the file that starts a program.  You can change the
settings for this object to specify how you want the program to start or where
the files related to the program are stored.  For example, you can specify that
an editor always starts with the NOTABS option.
See also program-file object.
 
program title    510/3
 
program title
A name that you type for a selected program.  It is displayed with the icon.  It
can be any name you want to use to refer to the program. For example, My
Favorite Editor could be used as the program title for an editor whose actual
title is ABC.
 
program type    511/3
 
program type
See session.
 
property    512/3
 
property
(1) Synonym for setting.  (2) Like a setting, but used by the OS/2 operating
system to refer to printer, plotter, or print job set up.
 
public    513/3
 
public
When the WIN_CLIPBOARD setting is set to On, this enables (makes public) the
sharing of clipboard information among DOS, OS/2, and Windows programs.
When the WIN_DDE (dynamic data exchange) setting set to On, this enables (makes
public) the sharing of data among OS/2 and Windows programs.
 
push button    514/3
 
push button
A rounded-corner rectangular control containing text or graphics, or both.  Push
buttons are used in windows for actions that occur immediately when the push
button is selected.
 
Q    515/2+
 
 
queue    516/3
 
queue
A line or list formed by items waiting to be processed; for example, a list of
print jobs waiting to be printed.  See also spooling and spooler.
 
queue driver    517/3
 
queue driver
A software processor that takes a print job from a queue, and sends it to the
appropriate printer driver to prepare it for printing.
 
R    518/2+
 
 
radio button    519/3
 
radio button
A round button on the screen with text beside it.  Radio buttons are combined to
show you a fixed set of choices from which only one can be selected.  The circle
is partially filled when a choice is selected.  Contrast with check box.
 
read-only    520/3
 
read-only
A flag that prevents a file from being modified.  The file with this flag set
can be viewed, copied, or printed.
 
refresh    521/3
 
refresh
An action that updates changed information to its current status.
 
remote    522/3
 
remote
Pertaining to a system, program, or device that is accessed through a
telecommunication line.
 
resolution    523/3
 
resolution
(1) Density or sharpness of an image.  For bit-map material, resolution is
expressed in dots-per-inch, with higher quality output having more
dots-per-inch.  Resolution can be adjusted for some printers.  Low-resolution
images are printed faster, but appear coarser than high-resolution images.  A
printer's memory size can limit the resolution you can choose. (2) The number of
lines in an image that an imaging system (for example, a telescope, the human
eye, or a camera) can resolve. Higher resolution makes text and graphics appear
clearer.
 
resource    524/3
 
resource
Any facility of a computing system or operating system needed to perform
required operations; includes disk storage, input devices, output devices (such
as printers), a processing unit, data files, and programs.
 
restore button    525/3
 
restore button
A button that appears in the rightmost corner of the title bar after a window
has been maximized.  When the restore button is selected, the window returns to
the size it was before it was maximized.  See also maximize button and hide
button.
 
root directory    526/3
 
root directory
The first directory on a drive in which all other files and subdirectories
exist, such as C:\.
 
S    527/2+
 
 
scroll    528/3
 
scroll
To move a display image vertically or horizontally to view data that is not
otherwise visible in a display screen or window.
 
scroll bar    529/3
 
scroll bar
A part of a window, associated with a scrollable area, that you interact with to
see information that is not currently visible. Scroll bars can be displayed
vertically and horizontally.  The scroll bar can be selected only with a mouse.
 
select    530/3
 
select
To use the selection button to highlight or choose an item such as an object or
a menu choice.  When you make a selection, there is a subsequent action that
will apply. Contrast with deselect.
 
serial    531/3
 
serial
Pertaining to the sequential transmission of one element at a time.  Serial
ports pass one bit at a time. If a port has word length 7, it must pass seven
separate elements before the receiver can assemble those elements into a single
recognizable whole unit (character).  See also parallel.
 
server    532/3
 
server
(1) On a local area network (LAN), a workstation that provides facilities to
other workstations.  (2) A computer that shares its resources with other
computers on a network.  An example of a server is a file server, a print
server, or a mail server.
 
session    533/3
 
session
(1) A logical connection between two machines on a network.  (2) One instance of
a started program or command prompt.  Each session is separate from all other
sessions that might be running on the computer.  The operating system is
responsible for coordinating the resources that each session uses, such as
computer memory, allocation of processor time, and windows on the screen.  The
session types are OS/2 window, OS/2 full screen, DOS window, DOS full screen,
WIN-OS/2 full screen, WIN-OS/2 window, and WIN-OS/2 window separate session.
 
setting    534/3
 
setting
A unique characteristic of an object that can be changed or modified.  The
setting of an object describes the object.  The name of the object is an example
of a setting.
 
Settings    535/3
 
Settings
A choice that defines characteristics of objects or displays identifying
characteristics of objects.
 
shadow    536/3
 
shadow
A link between duplicate objects.  The objects can be located in different
folders.  If you make a change in either the duplicate or the original, the
change takes effect in the other as well. Or, suppose you have a program on a
drive other than drive C and want to use it from the desktop.  You can make a
shadow of the program for the desktop. The program is not physically moved or
copied, which means you save space on your hard disk, but you can use it from
the desktop.
 
shutdown    537/3
 
shutdown
The process of selecting the Shut down choice before the computer is powered off
so that data and configuration information is not lost.
 
slider    538/3
 
slider
A control that represents a quantity and its relationship to the range of
possible values for that quantity.  In some cases, you can change the value of
the quantity.
 
soft font    539/3
 
soft font
Optional fonts shipped as files.  Soft fonts must be installed onto the hard
disk before they can be selected from programs.  See also downloaded font.
 
source diskette    540/3
 
source diskette
In a diskette-copying procedure, the diskette from which information is read.
Contrast with target diskette.
 
source drive    541/3
 
source drive
The drive from which information is read. Contrast with target drive.
 
specific DOS    542/3
 
specific DOS
An actual DOS program product that is purchased independently of the OS/2
operating system.  Examples include IBM DOS Version 3.x, Microsoft DOS Version
3.x, Digital Research** Version 5.0.  Some programs are dependent on the
internals of a specific DOS version.  You can run these programs with the OS/2
operating system by starting a DOS session with a specific DOS version.
Contrast with DOS session.
 
spooler    543/3
 
spooler
A program that intercepts data going to a device driver and writes it to disk.
The data is later printed or plotted when the required device is available.  A
spooler prevents output from different sources from being intermixed.
 
spooling    544/3
 
spooling
The process of temporarily storing print jobs while waiting for an available
printer or port.  Spooling jobs frees system resources from waiting for a
relatively slow device to provide output, and keeps the contents of each print
job separated from the contents of every other print job.
 
sticky keys    545/3
 
sticky keys
An input method that enables you to press and release a series of keys
sequentially (for example, Ctrl+Alt+Del), yet have the keys behave as if they
were pressed and released at the same time.  This method can be used for those
who require special-needs settings to make the keyboard easier to use.
 
system    546/3
 
system
A flag that indicates that a file or directory is part of the operating system.
 
system font    547/3
 
system font
One of the fonts available for screen display and printing.  You can specify any
size for this font, and it supports any language.  Contrast with device font.
 
T    548/2+
 
 
tab    549/3
 
tab
(1) An action, achieved by pressing the Tab key that moves the cursor to the
next field.  (2) A graphical representation of a book-like tab on a notebook
that, when selected, turns the notebook page.
 
target diskette    550/3
 
target diskette
In a diskette or storage copying procedure, the diskette onto which information
is written.  Contrast with source diskette.
 
target drive    551/3
 
target drive
The drive to which information is written.  Contrast with source drive.
 
template    552/3
 
template
An object that you can use as a model to create additional objects.  When you
drag a template you create another of the original object, as though you were
peeling one of the objects off a stack.
 
tile    553/3
 
tile
A choice in a menu that modifies the size of each window and arranges them so
that they appear side-by-side and top-to-bottom.
 
title bar    554/3
 
title bar
The area at the top of each window that can contain the window title and a
title-bar icon.  When appropriate, it also contains the hide, maximize, and
restore buttons.
 
title-bar icon    555/3
 
title-bar icon
The mini-icon in the upper-left corner of the title bar that represents the
object that is open in the window.  You can use the object to display the pop-up
menu or close a window.
 
U    556/2+
 
 
user interface    557/3
 
user interface
The hardware, software, or both that allows you to interact with and perform
operations on a computer.
 
Using Help    558/3
 
Using Help
A cascaded choice on the Help menu that gives you information about how the help
function works.  This choice is also available on those programs that have Help
as a choice on a menu bar.
 
V    559/2+
 
 
value    560/3
 
value
A quantity assigned to a constant, a variable, or a parameter.
 
videodisc    561/3
 
videodisc
A disc on which programs are recorded for playback on a computer (or a
television set); a recording on a videodisc.
 
view    562/3
 
view
The appearance of the contents of an open object (for example, a folder can be
displayed in icon view, tree view, settings view or details view.
 
virtual device driver    563/3
 
virtual device driver
A type of device driver used by DOS programs running in a DOS virtual machine,
in order to access devices such as the screen or mouse which must be shared with
other processes in the system.  The virtual device driver maps DOS device
commands to the normal (physical) device driver under OS/2 Version 3.
 
virtual DOS machine    564/3
 
virtual DOS machine
See DOS session.
 
W    565/2+
 
 
waveform    566/3
 
waveform
(1)  A graphic representation of the shape of a wave that indicates the wave's
characteristics, such as frequency and amplitude. (2)  A digital method of
storing and manipulating audio data within a computer. (3)  A series of digital
samples of the audio input stream taken at regular intervals over the duration
of the audio event.
 
wildcard character    567/3
 
wildcard character
Either a question mark (?) or an asterisk (*) used as a variable in a file name
or file name extension when referring to a particular file or group of files.
 
WIN-OS/2*    568/3


WIN-OS/2*
[[Category:Information]]
WIN-OS/2 is a feature of OS/2 that enables OS/2 to run supported Windows
programs. See supported Windows programs.
 
WIN-OS/2 session    569/3
 
WIN-OS/2 session
A WIN-OS/2 session created by the OS/2 operating system that supports the
independent processing of a Windows program.  The Windows program can run in a
WIN-OS/2 full-screen, WIN-OS/2 window, or WIN-OS/2 window separate session.
 
window    570/3
 
window
An area of the screen with visible boundaries within which information is
displayed.  A window can be smaller than or the same size as the screen.
Windows can appear to overlap on the screen.
 
Window List    571/3
 
Window List
A menu choice that displays a list of all of the open windows in a product.  Use
the Window List choice to switch to an active program, to tile or cascade open
program windows, to surface hidden windows, or to close a program.
 
Windows program    572/3
 
Windows program
A program written for the Microsoft Windows application programming interface.
 
workarea    573/3
 
workarea
A folder setting that enables you to organize your desktop by grouping together
objects for a specific task.  For example, you could group a plotter object with
data-file objects that contain charts and documents.
 
working directory    574/3
 
working directory
A specified directory that becomes the current directory when a program is
started.  The current directory is the first directory in which the operating
system looks for programs and files and stores temporary files and output.  Some
programs require a working directory.
 
Workplace Shell    575/3
 
Workplace Shell
A graphical user interface that makes working with your computer easier. The
Workplace shell lets you manage your work without having to learn the
complexities of the operating system.

Revision as of 04:11, 24 August 2017

By IBM

“Reprint Courtesy of International Business Machines Corporation, © International Business Machines Corporation”

Version Notice 1/1

First Edition (October 1994)

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time. It is possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products, programming, or services in your country. Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM authorized reseller or IBM marketing representative.

Contributors 2/1

Authors c.
Linda S. Rogers
Lisa DeMeo
Karla Stagray
Contributing Authors c.
Su Hill
Val Enright
David Spicer
Marion Lindsey
Lana Meadows
Kathy Hancock
Editors c.
Elizabeth Jean
Tracey Marcelo
Roger Didio
Design c.
Brian Black
Jeff Lewis
National Language Support c.
Joseph Hunt
Mike Cress
Gene Ignatowski
Publications Manager c.
John D. Lloyd
Managing Editor c.
Dan Baker
Publishing Assistant Editor c.
Linda S. Rogers
Editorial Assistant c.
Victor Laird
Production Coordinator c.
Elyse Anchell
Tools Support c.
Gene Ignatowski
Rick Goldsmith
Usability Testing c.
Lynn VanDyke
Carol Righi
Alan Rose
John Tyler

Welcome 3/1+

Hello and welcome to OS/2. You're about to begin using your computer in an exciting new way-as a productivity aid that helps you get your work done quickly and easily. This book is for anyone who uses OS/2, whether you're just beginning, are familiar with computers, or have lots of technical expertise. It contains all the information you need to install and use OS/2 effectively, from the basics to "know-how" information to expert tips and technical details.

  • "Part 1: Installing OS/2" contains system preparation tasks and installation instructions.
  • "Part 2: Exploring OS/2" offers a self-paced, interactive guided tour of the Desktop.
  • "Part 3: Using OS/2" provides step-by-step instructions for using each object on the Desktop.
  • "Part 4: Troubleshooting" includes technical tips and techniques for resolving problems and keeping your system running smoothly.
  • "Part 5: Advanced Installation" is for technical users who want to customize their installation.
  • Appendix A describes techniques for using a mouse or a keyboard.

You'll find this book easy to use if you look for these simple conventions:

  • Boldface type indicates the name of an item you need to select.
  • Italics type indicates new terms, book titles, or variable information that must be replaced by an actual value.
  • Monospace type indicates an example (such as a fictitious path or file name) or text that is displayed on the screen.
  • uppercase type indicates a file name, command name, or acronym.

So why not get started right away? Here are some easy paths to follow, depending on what you want to accomplish:

  • To install OS/2, go to Part 1.
  • If you're new to OS/2 or just want to explore, go to Part 2.
  • To access the extensive online information, go to Part 2.
  • To learn how to use OS/2, go to Part 3.

About OS/2 Version 3 4/2+

OS/2* Version 3 is an advanced, 32-bit operating system that runs on 4MB systems and provides excellent response time to both 16-bit and 32-bit applications. OS/2 Version 3 is easier to install and to use and has better performance than previous versions of the OS/2 operating system.

Installation Improvements in OS/2 Version 3 5/3

OS/2 Version 3 includes an Easy Installation choice. You can choose Easy Installation to install OS/2 from diskette or CD-ROM. Easy Installation lets the system choose which options to install. After you select Easy Installation, you don't have to make any more installation decisions. In addition, OS/2 Version 3 has the following installation improvements:

  • It takes less time and fewer diskettes to complete an installation.
  • The system automatically installs the Dual Boot feature when you install over DOS.
  • You can install more than one printer during the initial installation.
  • Multimedia installation is a part of the OS/2 installation.

Performance 6/3

Performance improvements make OS/2 Version 3 faster at displaying objects on the Desktop, moving from one window to another, and displaying information in the Master Help Index and Glossary.

New Features 7/3

OS/2 Version 3 has the following new features that make the system easier to use:

  • The LaunchPad provides a quick and easy way to get to commands and objects that you use often.
  • The Using OS/2 tutorial is a vastly improved and expanded learning tool that provides basic, step-by-step information, including a Practice push button that takes you to the Desktop to try the task for yourself, as well as expert tips and special hints for Microsoft** Windows** users.
  • Comet Cursor is a trail that follows your mouse pointer to help you see it on portable computer screens.
  • The Pickup and Drop choices on the pop-up menu for an object let you use other Desktop functions while dragging and dropping objects.
  • The Desktop page of the Desktop Settings notebook lets you arrange your Desktop the way you like it and have the system restore that Desktop each time you restart your system.
  • The Archive page of Desktop Settings, together with the Recovery Choices screen, lets you save different versions of your system files and choose which version you want to use to restart your system.
  • Undo Arrange now accompanies the Arrange feature available from the pop-up menu for an object.
  • A redesigned Desktop now has new three-dimensional icons and animated icons.
  • Two color palettes are available - Solid Color Palette and Mixed Color Palette. The Solid Color Palette was designed for use with systems that have VGA display support. The Mixed Color Palette was designed for use with systems that have SVGA display support. The paint roller has been changed to a paint bucket as an additional enhancement.
  • An enhanced Scheme Palette with many new schemes to choose from.
  • Newly designed mouse pointer options include the ability to change the look and size of the mouse pointer.
  • The new Fastload option improves application loading time.
  • Enhanced PCMCIA support enables you to switch devices and automatically reconfigures your system while you continue to work.

Part 1- Installing OS/2 8/1

As You Begin 9/1+

This chapter contains preliminary information to get you ready to install OS/2*.

Complete all the procedures in this chapter. Then choose an installation method.

The OS/2 operating system can be installed over the following products:

  • OS/2 for Windows
  • OS/2 Version 1.3
  • DOS Versions 3.3 or later
  • Microsoft Windows Versions 3.1 or 3.11
  • Windows for Workgroups 3.1 or 3.11
Note: OS/2 does not enable the LAN connectivity function of Windows for Workgroups. For information on how to use the network function after installing OS/2, see the online book, Application Considerations.

If you do not need Windows function, you can install OS/2:

  • Without Windows
  • With an earlier version of Windows
However, you will not be able to run Windows programs.

Preparing Your System 10/2

Before installing OS/2, check the following:

  • If you are installing on a computer that has Windows on it, make sure you have the diskettes or the CD that was used to install Windows.
    Note:
    1. Some computer manufacturers preinstall Windows on your computer, and then provide a utility program so you can create your own Windows diskettes. If Windows was preinstalled on your computer, create the Windows diskettes before you begin installing OS/2
    2. If you used device drivers, fonts, or specific language information files different from those included on the Windows diskettes, or from those that were preinstalled on your computer, you might overwrite these files when installing OS/2. Reinstall those device drivers after installing OS/2.
  • Be sure the files on your hard disk are not compressed. If you are using a DOS compression program, such as Stacker**, AdStor, or DoubleSpace, decompress the disk on which DOS and Windows are installed. Refer to the manual that came with the compression program for instructions.

Note: If the compression program you are using does not specifically state that it works with OS/2, you will not be able to use the compression program after OS/2 is installed.

  • See updates to the Installation program in the README.INS file on the Installation Diskette. Follow these steps:
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
  2. Turn on the computer. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the system.
  3. When prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1 into the drive; then press Enter.
  4. When the Welcome screen appears, press F3 to display a command prompt.
  5. Remove Diskette 1 from drive A and reinsert the Installation Diskette. Then do one of the following:
    • To view the README file online, type tedit readme.ins and press Enter. Press PF4 to quit the editor.
    • To print a copy of the README file, type copy readme.ins > LPT1 and press Enter. (LPT1 represents the port to which your printer is connected. If you are using another port, type the correct port.)
  • Make sure you have the minimum hardware and software required to install OS/2:
    • An Intel** 80386 SX (or higher) 32-bit microprocessor
    • At least 4MB of random access memory (RAM)
    • A hard disk with 35MB to 50MB of free space, plus an additional 10MB of hard disk space for multimedia support (for example, for a sound card)
    • A 1.44MB diskette drive
    • VGA video support
    • An IBM-compatible mouse
      Note: Both DOS and Windows provide programs that check and list your memory and installed hardware. To view this information, do one of the following:
      • If you have PC DOS 6.1 or later installed on your computer, type qconfig at the command line and press Enter.
      • If you have Windows installed on your computer, select Run from the File menu. Then type msd and press Enter.
  • Refer to Special Hardware Considerations if you are using any of the following equipment:
Gateway 2000**
A system with Phoenix**, AMI**, or Micronics** BIOS
ATI** Graphics Ultra** Pro display adapter
An EISA system with an Adaptec** 1742A controller card
IBM* PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
IBM PS/2 Model 76
IBM ThinkPad* with a Docking Station
A system with an Aox upgrade
Quantum** II Hard Card
Sony**, Panasonic**, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips**, Mitsumi**, BSR, or Tandy non-SCSI CD-ROM drive
Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM combination
IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
Sound Blaster**
ProAudio Spectrum** 16

Choosing Easy or Advanced Installation 11/2

Use Easy Installation to install OS/2 with preselected settings, based on your current hardware and software. The Easy Installation program installs the operating system in the same partition as your DOS and Windows (if you have DOS and Windows installed on your computer), uses the File Allocation Table (FAT) file system, and installs the following OS/2 features on your computer:

Documentation, including:

The OS/2 Tutorial
Command Reference
Windows in OS/2
Application Considerations
Performance Considerations
Printing in OS/2
Multimedia

All system fonts

Optional System Utilities, including:

Backup Hard Disk
Change File Attributes
Manage Partition
Restore Backed-Up Files
Sort Filter

Tools and Games, including:

Enhanced Editor
Seek and Scan
Chess
Solitaire
OS/2 DOS Support
Multimedia Software Support (if required capabilities are detected on your computer)
REXX
Optional Bit Maps
Advanced Power Management (if required capabilities are detected on your computer)
PCMCIA (if required capabilities are detected on your computer)

To use Easy Installation, go to Using Easy Installation.

Important

Use Advanced Installation only if you are an experienced computer user. This method lets you customize how OS/2 will be installed on your computer, including:

  • Installing OS/2 on a drive or partition other than C
  • Installing OS/2 in a logical drive
  • Using the HPFS file system
  • Selecting which of the OS/2 features you want to install
  • Installing OS/2 so it can be used with Boot Manager

To use Advanced Installation, go to Using Advanced Installation.

Using Easy Installation 12/1+

This chapter describes how to install OS/2 on your computer using the Easy Installation method. Easy Installation was designed to help you install OS/2 without having to answer technical questions about your computer and its attached hardware. Throughout the installation process, the program will search and detect the type of hardware and software you are using on your computer. Then, the Installation program will install a preselected set of the features of OS/2. If you would prefer to customize the installation of OS/2 on your computer, and if you are experienced at installing operating systems, you might want to use the Advanced Installation method. Refer to Using Advanced Installation for more information about that method. Easy Installation installs OS/2 using defaults (options that are preselected so you don't have to make decisions or selections). If you use this method, OS/2 will be installed as follows:

  • If DOS and Windows are in a primary, drive C partition, OS/2 will be installed in that partition.
  • The partition will not be reformatted.
  • The Dual Boot feature will be automatically set up for you, so you can start your computer from either DOS or OS/2.
  • If you are installing OS/2 Version 3 over a previous version of OS/2, your OS/2 Desktop will be preserved for you.

Preparing for the Installation 13/2

During Easy Installation, you will be asked to insert diskettes (or a compact disc (CD), if you are installing from a CD-ROM drive) and to remove diskettes. Follow the directions you see on the screen. Be prepared to:

  • Indicate the type of printer that is connected to your computer. If you do not know the type of printer you are using, refer to the documentation that came with your printer.
  • Insert the original diskettes or CD that came with Microsoft Windows. Be sure to have your Windows diskettes or CD handy before you install OS/2.

If you have any problems during the installation, press the F1 key to view the online help that is available whenever you see F1=Help at the bottom of a screen. If you have problems with any of your hardware or if you receive error messages during the installation, refer to Solving Installation Problems.

Installing the Operating System 14/2

To install OS/2 using the Easy Installation method, follow these steps:

  1. If your computer is on, close all running applications.
  2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
  3. Turn your computer on. If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
  4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1. Then press Enter. As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages asking you to wait, followed by a black screen. Then the screen appears.
  5. If you are installing OS/2 from diskettes, go to step 6. If you are installing from a CD, insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive; then press Enter.
  6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Easy Installation. Then press Enter.
  7. Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are installing from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the installation progresses. If you are installing from a CD, you will not see any messages to remove diskettes.
    After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then reinsert Diskette 1. Follow the instructions on the screen. After you remove Diskette 1 and press Enter, you will see the System Configuration screen.
  8. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system. Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct. If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name. A screen will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your hardware device. If you are unsure about the hardware you are using, refer to the documentation that came with it. Follow the instructions on each screen. Click on Help if you need more information about any screen you see. If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on OK.
    A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
  9. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer names. Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
    • If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or LPT3 button Then press Enter.
    • If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 button. Then press Enter.
      If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not install default printer and press Enter or click on OK.
  10. If you received a Warning message at the beginning of the Installation program telling you that you did not have enough free disk space to install OS/2, but you decided to continue with the installation anyway, you will see the OS/2 Setup and Installation screen. Go to step 11.
    If you did not receive a Warning message at the beginning of the Installation program, go to step 12.
  11. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software features you want to install. You will notice that some features have a check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
    The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the right of the feature. Follow these steps:
    a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
    b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
    c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections
  12. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen. You will be asked to remove and insert diskettes, including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.
  13. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor Configuration/Selection Utility screen. Follow the instructions on the screen; click on Help if you need more information.
  14. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part of the OS/2 installation.
  15. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one of the following (if Windows was preinstalled on your computer when you bought it, you can skip this step and go to step 18):
    • If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
    a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
    b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
    c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as requested.
    • If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
    a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
    b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
    c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD, type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.
    For example:
    e:\winsetup
    where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup is the directory that contains the Windows files.
  16. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and press Enter.
  17. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down and restart your computer. Click on OK or press enter.
  18. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.

View the Tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use your Desktop. The tutorial also provides information to help you make the transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2. For more help on using the operating system, you can access the online help system. Press F1 anytime to get help, or if you see a Help push button at the bottom of a screen, you can click on it to get more information about that screen.

Switching between OS/2 and DOS with Dual Boot 15/2+

When you install OS/2 using the Easy Installation method, a Dual Boot feature is automatically set up for you as well. Dual Boot lets you switch back and forth between OS/2 and DOS (you might want to do this because some DOS programs do not run under OS/2).

Dual Boot also keeps track of which operating system should start when you turn on your computer. Each time you shut down and restart your computer, it will start (boot) in whichever operating system was last being used. For example, if you shut down your system while DOS is running, your system will start in DOS the next time you turn on your computer.

Starting the Dual Boot Feature 16/3

Use the Dual Boot function to switch from one operating system to another:

  • To switch from OS/2 to DOS:
    1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
    2. Open Command Prompts.
    3. Open Dual Boot.
    4. When a message appears asking if you want your system to be reset, type Y and press Enter.

Note: If you want to run your DOS programs while OS/2 is running, you can use the DOS sessions that are part of OS/2 for most DOS programs. By using these sessions, you don't have to use Dual Boot, which shuts down your OS/2 session. To use a DOS session, open DOS Window or DOS Full Screen from the Command Prompts folder.

  • To switch from DOS to OS/2:
    1. At the DOS command prompt, type c:\os2\boot /os2
    2. Press Enter.

For more information about the BOOT command, refer to the Command Reference. The Command Reference is located in the Information folder on your OS/2 Desktop.

Installing DOS after Installing OS/2 17/3

If you installed OS/2 on drive C, formatted the drive with the FAT file system, and you did not already have DOS installed, your system will still have the Dual Boot capability. However, you must install DOS to use the Dual Boot feature. To add Dual Boot after installing OS/2, follow these steps:

  1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open Dual Boot. A Warning box appears reminding you that DOS was not installed and asking if you want to continue.
  4. Type Y and press Enter. You will see messages that your system is being prepared, and then a warning that you must shut down your system. Press Enter to close the window.
  5. Shut down your system:
    a. Position the mouse pointer on a blank space on your Desktop and press mouse button 2.
    b. Select Shut down... from the menu that appears.
    c. When a message appears telling you to turn off your computer, do so.
  6. Install DOS on your computer. Follow the instructions that came in your DOS package.
  7. At the DOS command line, type c:\os2\boot /os2 and press Enter to return to your OS/2 Desktop.

What to Do if Dual Boot Does Not Work 18/3

If the BOOT command is unsuccessful when you try to switch from DOS to OS/2, you might have programs running that take up too much of your computer's memory. If so, close the programs before you use the BOOT command. If the programs are loaded from your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you must deactivate the programs before using the BOOT command.

Using Windows Programs 19/2+

When you install OS/2 on a computer that has Windows installed on it, all of your Windows functions are still available. If you installed OS/2 with the Easy Installation method, any Windows programs you had on your computer were automatically placed in folders on your OS/2 Desktop. You can also use the Windows Program Manager by opening a WIN-OS/2 command prompt from the Command Prompts folder in the OS/2 System folder. To use your Windows programs after installing OS/2, use the following procedures:

  • To run a Windows program from your OS/2 Desktop:
    1. Open WIN-OS/2* Groups, or Windows Programs or Additional Windows Progams (whichever contains the program object you want to open).
    2. Open the program you want to use.
  • To run a Windows program from the Windows Program Manager:
    1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
    2. Open Command Prompts.
    3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen or WIN-OS/2 Window.
    4. Open the program you want to use.

Installing Windows after Installing OS/2 20/3

If you installed OS/2 on a computer that did not have Microsoft Windows on it already, you can install Windows later if you have a partition formatted with the FAT file system. Follow these steps:

  1. Start your computer with DOS. Do one of the following:
    • Open Dual Boot in the Command Prompts folder.
    • Select DOS from the Boot Manager menu.
    Note: If you have not installed DOS, refer to the procedure in Installing DOS after Installing OS/2.
  2. When a message appears asking if you want your system to be reset, type Y and press Enter.
  3. Install Windows in a FAT-formatted partition or logical drive.
  4. Shut down your computer, and then restart it with OS/2.
  5. Open System Setup in the OS/2 System folder.
  6. Open Selective Install
  7. When the System Configuration screen appears, select OK.
  8. On the OS/2 Setup and Installation screen, select WIN-OS/2 Support. Then select Install
  9. When the Advanced Options window appears, select OK to continue.
  10. When prompted to do so, insert and remove the numbered OS/2 installation diskettes.
  11. When prompted to do so, insert and remove the numbered Windows diskettes.
  12. When prompted to do so, shut down and restart your computer so the changes can take effect.

What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation 21/2

The installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most cases, you will not encounter any problems. However, if you do have problems either during the installation process or immediately afterwards, refer to Solving Installation Problems. Problems you might encounter include:

  • A blank screen after installation.
  • An error message with a number and, sometimes, text.
  • A hardware device that does not work. (This problem can occur if you are using hardware that is not supported by OS/2.)

If these or other problems occur, refer to Solving Installation Problems.

Part 2 - Exploring OS/2 22/1

Exploring the Desktop 23/1+

In this chapter you will learn about and explore computer terms you should know, the OS/2 tutorial (Using OS/2), the icons (small pictures) that are displayed on your Desktop, and the online information that is available. There will be times when you are sent from this book to your computer so that you can explore the Desktop. Be sure to have your computer on with the Desktop or the tutorial displayed.

Understanding Terminology 24/2

Before you begin your exploration of the Desktop, it's important to recognize the terminology used in this book and in other OS/2 information. The following terms are used in addition to click and double-click to describe mouse actions.

Select
Point to an item and click mouse button 1. Instructions explain which item to point to.
Open
Point to an item and double-click mouse button 1. Instructions explain which item to point to.

For more information about click and double-click, review the "Using the Mouse" section of Using OS/2.

Using the Tutorial 25/2

Begin your exploration by going through the OS/2 tutorial (Using OS/2). The Using OS/2 tutorial was created to teach you the basics of OS/2 step-by-step, and to provide advanced hints and topics for experienced DOS, OS/2, or Microsoft Windows users. Try It! If the tutorial is not displayed on the Desktop, you can find it on the LaunchPad. Use either of the following procedures to display the tutorial:

  • If you don't know how to use a mouse:
    1. Press and release the Alt and Tab keys at the same time until you highlight the LaunchPad, and then press Enter to open the LaunchPad.
    2. Use the Left or Right Arrow key to highlight the Using OS/2 (its the icon with the question mark on it), and then press Enter.
  • If you know how to use a mouse: c.
    1. Double-click on the LaunchPad icon if it is not already open on the Desktop.
    2. Click on Using OS/2 (its the icon with the question mark on it), located in the Front Panel, to display the tutorial on the Desktop.

Return to this book when the tutorial is displayed. Look at the tutorial now. The information box at the bottom of the window describes how to start the tutorial. To the right of the box are push buttons that you can click on with your mouse. When the text or graphic on a button is black, the button is active and available for use. When it is grey, the button is not active and cannot be used. Try It!

  • If you don't know how to use a mouse, press the Spacebar on your keyboard to start the "Using the Mouse" instructions in the tutorial. These instructions explain mouse terminology and teach you how to use a mouse.
  • If you know how to use a mouse, press Enter or click on (select) the > button to begin the tutorial.

Return to this book when you have completed this procedure. After you have viewed "Using the Mouse" or if you bypassed that section, the tutorial begins with the Introduction panel. Move the mouse pointer around the window and read the text in the information box to learn about the features in the tutorial. The area on the left side of the tutorial window is the selection area. The selection area contains twelve push buttons that you click on to select. The tutorial topics are displayed on the first seven push buttons. Click on a push button to display the tutorial contents list. Double-click on the topic text to go directly to that topic, or click on the > button to continue through the topics. The eighth push button is the tutorial index, which provides a list of all tutorial topics. The topics are organized in groups that relate to the main topic push buttons. Corresponding subtopics are listed below. When you double-click on a topic in the index, you go directly to that topic. This can be helpful if you want to review a topic that you have already tried but are unable to remember where it is listed.

The remaining four push buttons are available when you are within certain tutorial topics. They provide the following information:

Practice
Lets you to try a task for yourself. When you select Practice, the tutorial window moves to reveal the Desktop. The window provides instruction for a task you can perform on the Desktop. You will navigate through folders and objects to perform the task as you would from the Desktop.
OS/2
Provides tips for using OS/2. The OS/2 tips are displayed automatically in the information box for each tutorial topic.
Windows
Provides tips for the Microsoft Windows user. The Windows tips compare OS/2 tasks to similar tasks in Windows.
Expert
Provides advanced tips for the more experienced OS/2 user.

You can move throughout the tutorial at your own pace and review the topics in any order.

Using the Desktop and Its Objects 26/2+

The icons that you see on the Desktop are called objects. Some of these objects are folders. Folders are objects that contain other objects and folders. Think of the Desktop as one big folder or the main folder that contains everything you need to use OS/2. If you are familiar with DOS and Microsoft Windows you can think of the Desktop folder as a directory and the folders it contains as subdirectories. Other types of objects are data files, program files, or device files.

Note: Throughout this book, the Desktop is also referred to as the Workplace Shell.

When you look at the Desktop, you will see the following objects:

  • The OS/2 System folder contains objects you can use to set up OS/2 the way you want it. You can use these objects to change your mouse for left-handed use or to speed up the click rate, as well as to change the colors and look of the Desktop.
  • The Information folder contains online information, including Using OS/2 (the online tutorial), and the Master Help Index, and online books, including Command Reference, Glossary, Printing in OS/2, Application Considerations, Windows Programs in OS/2, Performance Considerations,Using Multimedia, and REXX Information. See Using the Information.
  • The Templates folder contains object models (templates) for the different types of objects in OS/2. These templates make it easy for you to create new objects for files, folders, programs, and other objects. See Using Templates.
  • The LaunchPad contains the objects you use most often. You can also add other objects to the LaunchPad. For more information about using the LaunchPad, refer to "Using the LaunchPad" later in this chapter.

During installation, if OS/2 recognizes that your computer has an audio card, multimedia support is automatically installed and your Desktop also will include the following:

  • The Multimedia folder contains the multimedia applications that are supported by your computer. You can find out more about these Multimedia objects in the online Multimedia book, located in the Information folder.
  • During installation, if OS/2 finds Windows programs already installed on your computer, your Desktop also will include these icons.
  • The Windows Programs folder contains program objects for the Windows programs you had installed before you installed OS/2.
  • The WIN-OS/2 Groups folder contains program objects for the Windows Groups programs that were created under the Windows Program Manager.

To find out more about these Windows program objects, refer to the online book Windows Programs in OS/2.

Using Pop-up Menus 27/3

Now that you know a little bit about the objects on the Desktop, you should also know that each object has its own menu known as a pop-up menu. Pop-up menus contain items that relate specifically to an object as well as items that are common to all objects. Some of the standard pop-up menu items include:

Open
Opens an object or folder and displays its contents, starts a program, or displays a data file. Selecting Open is the same as double-clicking on an object. Some items have an arrow to the right of Open that lets you choose how you want your icons to be displayed. You have three choices:
Icon View Displays the icons randomly within the folder.
Tree View Displays the objects in a hierarchy.
Details View Displays the properties of the objects (for example, the date and time the object was created, the full name of the object, and any other special attributes associated with the object).
Settings Opens the Settings notebook for the object. The Settings notebook looks like a book with tabs and enables you to view and change the current settings for the object.
Help Displays general help information about the object. Select the arrow to the right of Help to display a list of the types of help available for the object.
Help Index Displays an alphabetic list of available help topics for the active program.
General Help Displays help information about the active window. This is the same information you would see if you were to select Help from the pop-up menu or press the F1 key while the open window is active.
Using Help Explains all the ways you can get help for objects on the Desktop.
Keys Help Explains the different groups of keys you can use with OS/2.
     When you select a specific group, additional help is displayed with a list
     of the keys provided for the group.
Create another Lets you create another object from the pop-up menu and works
the same as if you were to drag a template from the Templates folder.
Copy Makes a duplicate of the selected object and its contents.
Move Lets you move an object to a new location anywhere on the Desktop.
Create shadow Creates a duplicate of an object but differs from a copy in that
it automatically exchanges data between the shadow and the original object.
When you make changes in the shadow object, the original object is updated with
the same data.
Pickup and Drop Enables you to move an object and perform other tasks before
you drop the object in its new location.  Drop will not be displayed on the
pop-up menu until you have selected Pickup.
Window Displays additional menu items that enable you to manage the size and
location of the window and close the open window.
Find Helps you locate any object in the system.
Arrange and Undo Arrange Organizes the objects on the Desktop or the open
active window in horizontal rows across the top of the screen.  Undo Arrange
places the objects in the location where they were before you selected Arrange.
 Undo Arrange will not be displayed on the pop-up menu until you have selected
Arrange.
Try It!
The Desktop has its own pop-up menu, and each object has its own pop-up menu.
To display the pop-up menu for the Desktop, try the following: c.
  1. Move the mouse pointer to an empty area on the Desktop.
  2. Press mouse button 2 to display the Desktop pop-up menu.
     Look at the menu items on the pop-up menu.  The Desktop pop-up menu
     contains items that no other pop-up menu has - Lockup now, Shut down, and
     System Setup.
To display the pop-up menu for an object, try the following.  In this example,
you will display the pop-up menu for the OS/2 System object. c.
  1. Move the mouse pointer to OS/2 System.
  2. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the object.
     Notice that some of the items on the pop-up menu for the object are
     different from those you saw on the Desktop pop-up. Each object has menu
     items that are exclusive to that object.

For more information about pop-up menus, select the menus topic in the Master Help Index, and then select any of the topics of interest to you.

Using Settings Notebooks 28/3

Each object has its own Settings notebook. The Settings notebook enables you to customize settings for each object. Just as the pop-up menus for an object have exclusive and common menu items, the Settings notebooks have exclusive settings pages. Some of the standard settings pages are as follows:

View
Use the View page to select how icons and their text are displayed.
Include
Use the Include page to include objects that you want in your folder and exclude objects you don't want in your folder.
Sort
Use the Sort page to determine the menu items listed when you select the arrow to the right of Sort in the pop-up menu. You determine how you want the objects in folders sorted by selecting the items from the pop-up menu.
Background
Use the Background page to select an image or color to display in the background of any open folder, including the Desktop. You can select a different image or color for each and every folder on the Desktop.
Menu
Use the menu page to customize your pop-up menu items. You can add, delete, or change the items on the pop-up menu or the cascaded menu that is displayed when you select the arrow to the right of a menu item.
File
Use the File page to view the file name and path of a file object. You can also define the object as a work area object. A work-area folder lets you put together objects that are related to a specific task. For more information about the Files page, select files topic from the Master Help Index and then select File information about objects. For more information about work-area folders, select the folders topic from the Master Help Index and then select Creating a work-area folder.
Window
Use the Window page to customize the window behavior for each object on the Desktop. Window behavior includes how and where you want your object to be minimized, how you want the window to open, and which button (hide or minimize) you want to appear on the window. every time you double-click on it.
General
Use the General page to change the name or the icon displayed for the folder currently selected or open.

There are additional settings pages available, but the pages listed above are some of the most common. You can get help for settings pages by selecting the Help push button, which is available on every page. Try It!

Use the following procedure as a guide to displaying the Settings notebook for an object:

  1. Move the mouse pointer to OS/2 System.
  2. Press mouse button 2 to display the pop-up menu for the object.
  3. Select Settings to display the Settings notebook for the object.
     Notice that each page is identified by a tab on the right side of the
     notebook.
  4. Select the Window tab to display the Window page.
     Look at the bottom of the page.  You will see Window - Page 1 of 2, which
     lets you know that there is more than one page associated with the Window
     tab.
  5. Click on the right arrow at the bottom of the page to display page 2 for
     the Window tab.
     Some of the tabs in the notebooks can have up to 3 or 4 pages with which
     they are associated.  Simply select the right arrow to move forward
     through the pages and the left arrow to move backward through the pages.
     You can also use the arrows instead of the tabs to page through the
     notebooks.
  6. Double-click on the title-bar icon to close the notebook.

When you make changes to the Settings notebook, the changes take effect immediately after you close the notebook.

Finding Information 29/2+

OS/2 provides plenty of information online, in the form of help information and books, that you can use as you are working.

Getting Help 30/3+

Help information is available for every object on the Desktop, every menu item on pop-up and pull-down menus, and every place you see a Help push button. Try It! If you want to learn how to use the online help functions, be sure the Using OS/2 tutorial is displayed. Then use the following procedure:

  1. Select the About Help push button.
  2. Review the panels about OS/2 Help.
  3. Read the instructions on the right side of the window and in the
     information box.
  4. Select the Practice push button to try it out.

Return to this book when you are finished.

F1 Help 31/4

F1 help provides information about objects, pop-up menu items, entry fields, and push buttons. You use the F1 help by selecting or highlighting an item and pressing the F1 key on your keyboard. Try It! To get F1 help for each item on a pop-up menu, try the following:

  1. Click on the down arrow icon in the upper-left corner of the tutorial
     window. The title-bar icon menu for the OS/2 tutorial is displayed.
  2. Press the Down Arrow key on your keyboard and watch the focus box move
     from menu item to menu item.  Try this several times and stop at the Close
     menu item.
  3. Now press the F1 key on your keyboard.
     A helpful explanation about why you might want to use this menu item is
     displayed.
  4. Double-click on the title-bar icon in the upper-left corner of the help
     window, next to Help for Close, to close the help window.
Return to this book when you are finished.

Help Push Button 32/4

Another way to get help is to use the Help push button available on most of the object pop-up menus and notebook pages. These Help push buttons let you work with the object while you learn how to use it. Try It! To learn how to use the Help push buttons, try the following:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Solid Color Palette.
  4. Click on the Edit Color push button.
  5. When the Edit Color window is displayed, move it to the left side of the
     screen to make room for the help panel.
  6. Click on the Help push button.
  7. Read the information provided in the help window.  Notice the highlighted
     words within the help text.  These words indicate that additional
     information is available.
     You can use the Edit Color window while the Help information is displayed.
  8. When you are finished reading the help information, you can close the help
     window by double-clicking on the title-bar icon in the upper-left corner
     of the help window.
Another way to get help is by using an online book called the Master Help
Index.  For more information refer to "Mastering the Master Help Index" in Part
3 of this book.

Viewing Information Online 33/3+

When you installed OS/2, online information and books were added to the Information folder. These books and information describe information about printing in OS/2, using Windows programs in OS/2, program and performance considerations, using OS/2 multimedia programs, a book that identifies trademarks used in the online information, a glossary of terms and the Master Help Index, which is your main online help resource. The following books are in the Information folder.

Master Help Index 34/4

The Master Help Index provides help for practically everything you want to know about using OS/2. It is set up like a dictionary that has tabs. These tabs can help you find topics quickly. After you select a tab, use the scroll bar to page down to the topic you are looking for. You will sometimes find that after you select a topic, a secondary list of topics is displayed. This list of topics is related to the topic you selected. Try It!

To learn about the Master Help Index:

  1. Select the About Help push button.
  2. Select the Using the Master Help Index topic.
  3. Read the instructions on the right side of the window and in the information box.
  4. Select the Practice push button to try it out.

Hint:

You can use the keys on your keyboard to move to sections in the index. Simply press the key that corresponds to the first letter of the topic, and the entries that start with that letter will be displayed.

For more information refer to "Mastering the Master Help Index" in Part 3 of this book.

Command Reference 35/4

If you are familiar with using a command line or you want to learn how to use one, you will find the online Command Reference to be very helpful. This book contains descriptions of all the commands you can use at an OS/2 command prompt.

You might already be familiar with some of the commands because some are actually identical to those you have used with DOS. Some of the commands are new and some contain additional parameters specific for use with OS/2. For more information about command lines, see "Using Command Prompts" in Part 3 of this book. Try It!

To learn how to use the Command Reference, review the "Using the Command Reference" topic located in the About Help section of the tutorial. When you are finished, close the tutorial and try the following steps:

  1. Open the Information folder.
  2. Open the Command Reference.
  3. Select the + sign next to OS/2 Commands By Name to display all the OS/2 commands.
  4. Open the command for which you want information.

Note: You might see + signs next to some of the commands in the list. The + signs indicate that additional information pertaining to these commands is available. Click on the + sign to view the additional topics.

Glossary 36/4

The Glossary provides definitions for terms used in the OS/2 information. The Glossary looks like a dictionary and can be used in the same way the Master Help Index is used. You can use the tutorial to find out more about the Glossary.

REXX Information 37/4

This book provides information to acquaint you with the REXX language and programming concepts.

Windows Programs in OS/2 38/4

This book provides information about using OS/2 and Windows programs together under OS/2.

Application Considerations 39/4

This book provides information about the settings or tasks you need to perform to enable certain programs to run under OS/2.

Performance Considerations 40/4

This book provides information about how to improve the performance of your system, memory management, model-specific computer problems, and COM ports.

Printing in OS/2 41/4

This book provides information for everything you want to know about printing in OS/2-from installing a printer to solving printer problems.

Multimedia 42/4

This book provides information pertaining to the multimedia programs available with OS/2.

Trademarks 43/4

This book provides trademark information for trademarks mentioned in the online books and online help information.

Using the LaunchPad 44/2+

The LaunchPad holds the objects and push buttons that you use most often. Some of the most commonly used objects are already on the LaunchPad.

Using LaunchPad Push Buttons 45/3+

The push buttons at the left side of the LaunchPad let you secure your computer while you are away, shut down your computer when you are done working for the day, locate things on the Desktop, and display a list of all the windows you have open on the Desktop. The following describes the push buttons on the LaunchPad.

Lockup Push Button 46/4

You can use Lockup to lock up your computer keyboard and display at any time. By locking up your computer, you can keep others from using your computer while you are away. Try It! To lock up your computer, you must first decide on a password. Your password can be from 1 to 15 characters long. Think of a password now, write it down, and put it in a safe place. Then try the following:

  1. Select the Lockup push button on the left side of the LaunchPad.
  2. Read the text in the window and type your password in the Password field next to the blinking cursor.
  3. Press the Enter key on your keyboard and the cursor will start blinking in the Password (for verification) field.
  4. Type the same password again to verify that you entered the password correctly.
  5. Select the OK push button.
  6. Select the Lockup push button on the LaunchPad. The OS/2 Logo screen is displayed and a Help push button is available at the bottom right side of the screen.
  7. Type your password, and then press Enter. You will return to the Desktop.

Note: After you have specified your password, your screen will automatically lock up within three minutes if there is no action being performed on the Desktop. Realize that it is very important to be sure to:

 REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORD!

After you have decided upon a password and entered it into the Password window, you will not see the password window again unless you decide at some later time that you want to change your password. Now, whenever you select Lockup on the LaunchPad, your computer will be automatically locked up. To change your password, or any of the other settings associated with the Lockup push button, you must use the settings menu choice in the Desktop pop-up menu. Try It! To see the Lockup settings available and to change your password, try the following:

  1. Using mouse button 2, click on an open area on the Desktop. The Desktop pop-up menu is displayed.
  2. Select Settings to display the Settings notebook for the Desktop.
  3. Select the Lockup tab.
    Notice that the Lockup tab has three pages associated with it. The bottom right corner of the page is labeled Lockup - Page 1 of 3. The page currently displayed is the Timeout page. Use this page to change the current settings for how much time you want to pass before the computer automatically locks up. Timeout is set for 3 minutes by default. The second page enables you to decide what graphics or colors you want to be displayed while your computer is locked up. The Lockup screen is set to display the OS/2 Logo screen by default. The screen is displayed in the Preview area of the page. Page 3 is the page you use to change your current password.
  4. Move the mouse pointer to the right arrow and select it until the Password Page in the notebook is displayed.
  5. Type your new password in the Password field and then again in the Password (for verification) field. If you need help, select the Help push button.
  6. Select OK.

Remember to lock up your computer when you are away to prevent someone from using it.

Find Push Button 47/2+

The Find push button helps you locate objects in the system. If you can't remember where to find your favorite game, you can use the Find option to help you locate it. Try It! To learn how to use Find, try the following:

  1. Select Find on the LaunchPad. The Find Objects window is displayed.
  2. Select the Help push button at the bottom of the window.
  3. Read the information about how to use Find. Be sure to read through to the end of the help information, where you can find a list of the fields available on the Find Objects window. You can double-click on the highlighted items to display additional information about how to use these fields. Be sure to select the Previous push button at the bottom of the help window to return to the original help information for Find.
  4. Double-click on the title-bar icon in the help window when you are finished using the help information. This will close the help window.

Window List Push Button 48/3

You can use the Window List push button to help you locate open objects, reopen minimized windows, or close open windows. Try It! To learn about the Window List, try the following:

  1. Select the Window List push button.
     A list of open active windows is displayed.  The Desktop is the first
     window in the list.  The list also includes the LaunchPad and any other
     active objects or folders you might have already opened.
  2. Select the title-bar icon located in the upper-left corner of the window.
  3. Select the arrow to the right of Help.
  4. Select General Help.
  5. Read the information in the help window to learn more about the Window
     List and how to use it.

Shut Down Push Button 49/3

After you have given OS/2 its daily workout, you must take care and remember to shut down your computer. Shut down is the cool-down exercise for this powerful operating system. When you shut down your computer, information about which windows are open and where they are located on the Desktop is saved in the storage buffer on your hard disk. When you select Shut down, you will see a window asking if you are ready to shut down. Simply select the OK push button and you will be on your way to performing a successful shutdown. Remember to use the Shut down option when you are finished working for the day. Note: Be sure to check all programs for unsaved information (such as data files you might be editing) before you start the shutdown procedure. Note: Never turn off the power on your computer until you have completed a shutdown.

Using Objects on the LaunchPad 50/3+

The objects on the right side of the LaunchPad are shadows of objects that already exist elsewhere in OS/2. A shadow object is linked to the original object but it can reside in a different location on the Desktop. The purpose of a shadow object is to allow you to use an object from the Desktop whether or not it is located on drive C. When you make a change to the shadow, the change also occurs in the original. By creating a shadow of the original object instead of creating a copy, you can save space on your hard disk and still use the functions of the object. The following are the objects on the LaunchPad:

Drive A Object 51/4

The Drive A object gives you access to the information provided on a diskette you insert into the diskette drive slot on your computer. When you select the drawer button for the Drive A object, you will see that it contains the Drive C object (if Drive C is the drive where you installed OS/2). This object gives you access to the contents of Drive C in your computer. For more information about accessing drives, see "Using Drives" in Part 3 of this book.

OS/2 Window Object 52/4

The OS/2 Window object gives you access to an OS/2 command prompt in a window on the Desktop. You can use the OS/2 command prompt in much the same way as a DOS command prompt - by typing a command at the command prompt. When you select the drawer button for the OS/2 Window object, you will see that it contains the DOS Window object. The DOS Window object provides you access to a DOS command prompt in a window on the Desktop. Here you can use the DOS commands with which you are already familiar. For more information about using a command prompt, refer to the online Command Reference, or the "Using Command Prompts" in Part 3 of this book.

Using OS/2 Object 53/4

The Using OS/2 object gives you instant access to the OS/2 tutorial. Use the tutorial to learn something new, to refresh your memory about how to do something, or to experience hands-on practice using OS/2.

Shredder Object 54/4

The Shredder provides a quick way for you to delete files, objects, or folders that you no longer have a use for. For more information about the Shredder, see the online Master Help Index.

Printer Object 55/4

The printer object is added to the LaunchPad only if a printer was set up when you installed OS/2. You might not have a printer object on your LaunchPad. If you want to know how to set up a printer, use the information provided in the online Printing in OS/2 book located in the Information folder.

Adding Objects to the LaunchPad 56/3

You can easily add any object you want to the LaunchPad by simply dragging the object to the right side of the LaunchPad. The LaunchPad will expand to include the object on the panel. Try It! When adding an object to the LaunchPad, use the following example as a guide. In this example, the System Clock is added to the LaunchPad:

  1. Open the OS/2 System folder.
  2. Open the System Setup folder.
  3. Move the mouse pointer over the System Clock object.
  4. Press and hold mouse button 2 and move the object in between two objects on the LaunchPad until you see a single, solid black bar. This black bar indicates where the object will be added to the LaunchPad.

For more information about the LaunchPad, refer to the Master Help Index, the Using OS/2 tutorial, and the help information provided with the LaunchPad.

Part 3 - Using OS/2 57/1

Customizing Your System 58/1+

The System Setup object contains objects that help you customize your system. To open System Setup:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.

or:

  1. Point to an empty area on the Desktop.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select System Setup.

Color Palette 59/2+

The Color Palette is used to customize the colors on your screen. You can change the color of the following parts of the Workplace Shell*:

  • Desktop
  • Titles of the objects on the Desktop and in folders
  • Different parts of the windows, such as push buttons, scroll bars, and the background.

There are two colors palettes, one is a Solid Color Palette for low resolution displays and one is a Mixed Color Palette for high resolution displays. The Solid Color Palette contains 16 solid colors and the Mixed Color palette contains 256 mixed colors. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to use the Color Palettes. The following steps can be used for both the Solid and the Mixed Color Palettes.

Changing Screen Colors 60/3

To globally change the color of an item (for example, change the color of the background in every window):

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Color Palette.
  4. Make sure that the item you want to change is visible.
  5. Point to a color on the color palette.
  6. Press and hold Alt.
  7. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  8. Drag the color to the item you want to change. The mouse pointer changes to a paint bucket.
  9. Release mouse button 2.
  10. Release Alt. The color of all instances of the item changes to the new color.
  11. Point to the title-bar icon.
  12. Double-click.

To change the color of a specific item (for example, change the color of the vertical scroll bar in this window only):

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Color Palette.
  4. Make sure that the item you want to change is visible.
  5. Point to a color on the color palette.
  6. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  7. Drag the color to the item you want to change.
  8. Release mouse button 2. The color of the item changes to the new color.
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
  10. Double-click.

Changing the Color of Object Titles 61/3

To change the color of the titles of objects:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Color Palette.
  4. Make sure an object title is visible in the folder. (You cannot change an individual title color. Changing one title color changes every title color in the folder.)
  5. Point to a color on the Color Palette.
  6. Press and hold Ctrl.
  7. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  8. Drag the color to a title in the folder.
  9. Release mouse button 2.
  10. Release Ctrl. The color of every title in the folder changes to the new color.

Changing the Colors on the Color Palette 62/3

You can change the colors available on the Color Palette:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Color Palette.
  4. Select the color on the Color Palette that you want to change.
  5. Select Edit color. A window appears in which you can make adjustments to or change the color. For more information about the choices available in this window, select the Help push button.
  6. When the correct color appears in the box on the color bar in the window, point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click. The Color Palette window is displayed with the new color.

Country 63/2

When you installed OS/2, you determined settings like date, time, numbers, and currency of a specific country. The Country settings notebook lets you change these settings. You can select a specific country and have all the formats changed automatically, or you can make individual format selections. To change country formats:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Select Country.
    Tip Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can
    reconfigure the operating system to support another national language
    without having to reinstall the entire operating system (see Selective
    Install).

For country-dependent information, refer to the COUNTRY statement in the online Command Reference.

Device Driver Install 64/2

Many devices that you attach to a computer, such as a CD-ROM drive, mouse, display, and printer come with a device driver diskette. The device driver diskette (sometimes called a device support diskette) contains the code needed by the computer to recognize and operate the device. The Device Driver Install object is used to install any device driver except those for printers and plotters. To install a device driver for a printer or plotter, see Installing a Printer. To install a device driver (other than one for a printer or plotter):

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Device Driver Install.
  4. Insert the device driver diskette.
  5. Select Install.
  6. Select the device driver to install from the list.
  7. Select OK.

For additional information, refer to the documentation that came with the device. Note: Do not use the Device Driver Install object to install device drivers found on the OS/2 Installation diskettes.

Font Palette 65/2+

The Font Palette allows you to:

  • Change the typeface of any text in the Workplace Shell interface
  • Change sample typefaces currently available on the Font Palette
  • Add new fonts to your system
  • Delete existing fonts from your system

A font is a collection of characters and symbols of a particular size and style used to produce text on displays and printers. When you install OS/2, the IBM Core Fonts are automatically installed, unless you specify otherwise. The IBM Core Fonts can be used by your display and IBM LaserPrinter, HP** LaserJet**, and PostScript** printers. The IBM Core Fonts consist of a set of 13 Adobe** Type 1 fonts that work with the Adobe Type Manager** (ATM). The table that follows lists the IBM Core Fonts.

IBM Core Fonts
FAMILY NAME TYPEFACE
Times New Roman** Times New Roman
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Times New Roman Italic
Helvetica** Helvetica
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Italic
Helvetica Italic
Courier Courier
Courier Bold
Courier Bold Italic
Courier Italic
Symbol Set Symbol Set

The Adobe Type Manager is an integral part of the OS/2 operating system and works with existing OS/2 and Windows application programs to produce the sharpest possible fonts on the screen and on the printed page. Because it incorporates PostScript outline font technology, the ATM program eliminates jagged fonts so that your screen can display high-quality typefaces of any size or style. The ATM program also enables even inexpensive printers to print PostScript language fonts that are crisp and smooth. Note: If you want to use the fonts for both OS/2 and Windows applications, you must install the font files using both the Font Palette and the ATM Control Panel.

Changing Fonts 66/3

The Font Palette window displays sample typefaces of eight of the fonts installed on your system. You can use these samples to change any text in the Workplace Shell interface. To change the typeface of text:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Font Palette.
  4. Point to the sample typeface you want to use.
  5. Press and hold mouse button 2. The mouse pointer changes to a pencil.
  6. Drag the sample typeface to the object whose text font you want to change.
    If you drag a sample typeface to an object on the Desktop, the text of all the objects on the Desktop changes to that typeface. If you drag a sample typeface to an open object, such as a folder, the typeface will change only for the objects within the folder.
  7. Release mouse button 2.

Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette 67/3

To change which sample typefaces appear on the Font Palette:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Font Palette.
  4. Select the sample typeface you want to change.
  5. Select Edit font.  The Edit Font window appears.
  6. Select the down arrow for the Name field.
  7. Select a new typeface from the list.
  8. Select the Style and Size if desired.
  9. Select the appropriate Emphasis if desired.
 10. Point to the title-bar icon.
 11. Double-click.

Adding Fonts to Your System 68/3

There are thousands of additional font styles in the Adobe Type 1 font-file format that are available for use with the OS/2 operating system. These fonts require two files for each typeface. These files have an AFM and PFB file-name extension. The Font Palette converts the AFM file to an OFM file when it installs the new font. Note: If the set of fonts you want to install is supplied on multiple diskettes, you might need to copy the files into a temporary directory, because the font installation process requires that both files for a given typeface be available at the same time. To add more fonts to your system:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Font Palette.
  4. Select Edit font.  The Edit Font window appears.
  5. Select Add.
  6. Follow the instructions on the Add Font window; then select Add.
  7. Select the names of the font files that you want to install on your
     system.
  8. Select Add.
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
 10. Double-click.

See Selecting Sample Typefaces for the Font Palette if you want to add one of the new typefaces to the Font Palette samples.

Removing Fonts from Your System 69/3

To remove a font from your system:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Font Palette.
  4. Select Edit font.  The Edit Font window appears.
  5. Select Delete.
  6. Select the names of the font files that you want to delete from your
     system.
  7. Select Delete.
  8. When the files have been deleted, point to the title-bar icon.
  9. Double-click.

Note: Removing a font deletes the corresponding files from your hard disk unless they are needed by the Windows Adobe Type Manager. For more information about the Windows Adobe Type Manager, see the online Windows Programs in OS/2 book located in the Information folder.

Keyboard 70/2

The Keyboard object is used to adjust the blink rate of the cursor, change the speed at which a key repeats when held down, and customize the keyboard to make it easier to use for those with special needs. To customize the keyboard:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Keyboard.
  4. Select the tab for the setting you want to change.
  5. Point to the title-bar icon.
  6. Double-click.

Note: If the keyboard speed is set in Windows, when that WIN-OS/2 session is started, the keyboard speed for the entire system is reset and remains reset even after that WIN-OS/2 session is closed.

Select the Special Needs tab to change the settings to meet your special requirements. For example, you can make keys "sticky" so that you can press and release a series of keys (for example, Ctrl+Alt+Del) sequentially but have the keys operate as if the keys were pressed and released at the same time.

To enable sticky keys:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Keyboard.
  4. Select Special Needs.
  5. Select the Settings activation On radio button.
  6. For each key you want to act as a sticky key, press Shift three times;
     then press the key you want to stay stuck down.
  7. Repeat the previous step for each key that you want to operate as a sticky
     key.
  8. Point to the title-bar icon.
  9. Double-click.

To deactivate sticky keys, press and release each sticky key once.

Add Programs 71/2

Some programs do not place a program object in a folder or on the Desktop during their installation. Without the object, you cannot use the Workplace Shell to start the program. To correct this situation, you can use the Add Programs object. Add Programs uses a database to identify possible programs, set the correct DOS settings, and select an appropriate program object for the newly added OS/2, DOS, and Windows programs. You can create your own database to be used with Add Programs. For more information, see the OS/2 Tutorial, the help information provided with Add Programs or the Master Help Index. To add programs to the Desktop:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Add Programs.  The Add Programs to the Desktop window appears.
  4. Select Add new programs
  5. Select Ok.  A message is displayed when the process is complete.
  6. Select Ok.

The Add Programs program creates a DOS Programs folder, a Windows Programs folder, and a Windows Groups folder. Some Windows groups contain DOS programs. After you add them to the Desktop, these DOS program objects are placed in the WIN-OS/2 Groups folder and also in a DOS folder if you added DOS programs.

    Tip If your computer had a previous version of the OS/2 operating system,
    you might see a folder on your Desktop with the same name as one of your
    old groups.  This folder contains program objects that represent your old
    programs; however, Add Programs also puts these programs and program
    objects in new folders (DOS Programs or Windows Programs folders).
    Use the program objects in these new folders rather than the old group name
    folders because the preselected settings will work best for the performance
    of your program.

Mouse 72/2

The Mouse object is used to change the behavior of your mouse. You can:

  • Control the speed of the mouse pointer
  • Change the look of the pointer
  • Change the length, size and color of the pointer tail
  • Change the mouse for left-hand use
  • Customize the Alt, Shift, and Ctrl key combinations
  • Change the length and look of the mouse pointer tail

Note: You can change the speed of your mouse for your Windows sessions using the Windows Control Panel. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to customize mouse settings.

To change the mouse settings:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Mouse.

Use the Timings page to change the speed at which actions occur when you use the mouse. Use the Setup page to customize the mouse for left-hand use or right-hand use. If you change the setting, the button settings on the Mappings page are automatically updated; however, you also can use the Mappings page to customize them individually. Use the Comet Cursor page to change the length and look of the mouse pointer's tail.

Tip Using the Selective Install object in the System Setup folder, you can reconfigure the operating system to support another pointing device without having to reinstall the entire operating system (see Selective Install).

Scheme Palette 73/2+

The Scheme Palette contains many different predefined color schemes. Each scheme has a preset color for the following:

  • Desktop
  • Titles of the objects on the Desktop and in folders
  • Different parts of the windows such as push buttons, scroll bars, and the background.

You can use these schemes as they are, or you can change their colors. In addition, you can also use the Scheme Palette to change the width of the borders around the windows, and the font used.

Changing Color Schemes 74/3

To use a predefined scheme to change the colors of one folder or window:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Scheme Palette.
  4. Make sure that the folder or window you want to change is visible.
  5. Point to a scheme on the palette.
  6. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  7. Drag the color scheme to the window.
  8. Release mouse button 2. The window colors change to the new scheme.

Globally Changing Color Schemes 75/3

To use one of the predefined schemes to change the colors for all the folders that do not have their colors individually set:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Scheme Palette.
  4. Point to a scheme on the palette.
  5. Press and hold Alt.
  6. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  7. Drag the color scheme to the Desktop.
  8. Release mouse button 2.
  9. Release Alt. The colors change to the new scheme.

Changing the Colors on the Scheme Palette 76/3

To change the colors within a scheme on the Scheme Palette:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Scheme Palette.
  4. Select the scheme on the Scheme Palette that you want to change.
  5. Select Edit Scheme.
  6. Select the part of the window (in the Window area field) whose color you want to change.
  7. Select Edit Color. A window appears in which you can make adjustments to or change the color. (For more information about the choices available in this window, select the Help push button.)
  8. Adjust the color until the correct color appears in the box on the color bar in the window.
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
  10. Double-click. The selected window part changes to the new color on the Scheme Palette.
  11. When all the color changes have been made, point to the title-bar icon.
  12. Double-click.

Tip You can point to an area on the sample palette and click mouse button 2 to select the part of the window to be changed, instead of using the Window area field to select it. This reduces the amount of scrolling needed to find the correct window part.

Changing the Fonts in a Scheme 77/3

To change the font of text within the scheme:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Scheme Palette.
  4. Select the scheme on the Scheme Palette that you want to change.
  5. Select Edit Scheme.
  6. Select the part of the window (in the Window area field) whose font you
     want to change.
  7. Select Edit Font.
  8. Select the name, style, size, and emphasis that you want to use.
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
 10. Double-click.  The font of the selected window part changes on the Scheme
     Palette.  For more information about fonts, see Font Palette.
    Tip To display a colorful picture (bit map) on the background of your
    folder windows or the Desktop folder:
      1. Display the pop-up menu for a folder.
      2. Select Settings.
      3. Select the Background tab.
      4. Select the Image radio button in the Background type field.
      5. Select the arrow to the right of the Image File field.
      6. Select a file with a .BMP file-name extension.
    The image appears in the background of your folder.

Sound 78/2

The Sound object is used by an application to generate a warning beep. The beep can be turned off. You can indicate whether a beep should be heard when a warning message is displayed or an invalid key is pressed. To customize the sound settings:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Sound.

Note: If you install OS/2 Multimedia additional sound options are available.

For more information, see the online Multimedia book.

Spooler 79/2+

The Spooler stores jobs that are waiting for an available printer or port. OS/2 includes a spooler for printouts you request in OS/2, DOS, and Windows sessions (an instance of a command prompt or started program). When you print, the system creates a spool file which is held in place in the SPOOL directory. The SPOOL directory is created by the system during installation. You can use the Spooler object to change the location of the spooler path and to disable or enable the spooler.

Enabling the Spooler 80/3

To enable the spooler:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Spooler.
  4. Point to the title-bar icon.
  5. Click mouse button 2.
  6. Select Disable spooler
  7. Point to the title-bar icon.
  8. Double-click. (Spooling takes effect immediately.  You do not need to
     restart your system.)

Changing the Spooler Path 81/3

Use this procedure if you print often, or if you print large jobs and need a separate storage area, such as a large disk, for spool files. Be sure to wait until all your jobs finish printing, or delete any pending jobs.

To change the spooler path:

  1. Select all the printer objects.
  2. Select Hold from the pop-up menu of each printer object.
  3. Open OS/2 System.
  4. Open System Setup.
  5. Open Spooler. By default, the Spooler Settings notebook appears.
  6. Select Spool path.
  7. In the Spool path field, type the new path.
  8. Point to the title-bar icon.
  9. Double-click.

Changing the Print Priority 82/3

You can set the print priority higher or lower to adjust the speed at which spooled print jobs are printed.

To set the print priority:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Spooler. By default, the Spooler Settings notebook appears.
  4. Select the Print priority page.
  5. Move the slider arm to select priority.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.

Disabling the Spooler 83/3

You might want to disable the spooler to print jobs that have a high-security risk. Disabling the spooler prevents others from viewing your print jobs in a printer-object window. However, you cannot disable spooling to a network printer on a network server.

To disable the spooler:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Spooler.
  4. Point to the title-bar icon.
  5. Click mouse button 2.
  6. Select Enable spooler.
  7. Restart your system.

When the Spooler is disabled, your print jobs go directly to a printer. However, a printout might contain material from different jobs mixed together.

System 84/2+

The System object is used to change system defaults. You can select how you want a window that is already open to be displayed and where you want windows that you have minimized to be displayed. This notebook is also used to specify confirmation messages and to turn off the product information window. For more information about each tab, select the help push button provided on each page.

Confirming Delete Actions 85/3

To specify if you want a confirmation message displayed each time you delete an object or a folder:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open System.
  4. Select the Confirmations tab.
  5. Place a check mark next to each item you want a confirmation message for.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.

Directing Keyboard and Mouse Activity 86/3

To enable or disable the direction of any keyboard and mouse activity during the startup of any Presentation Manager program.

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open System.
  4. Select the Input tab.
  5. Place a check mark next to Enable type ahead or Disable type ahead. (The default is Enable type ahead.)
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.

Resolving Title Conflicts 87/3

To specify how the system is to respond to title conflicts if you create, copy, or move an object into a folder that already has an object with the same name:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open System.
  4. Select the Title tab.
  5. Select the choice that best describe how you want the system to respond when a title conflict appears.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.

Changing System Defaults 88/3

To change the system defaults for a window:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open System.
  4. Select the Window tab.
  5. Select the choices that best describe how you want the windows to behave.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.

Printing a Screen 89/3

To be able to print the information in an open window:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open System.
  4. Select the Print Screen tab.
  5. Select Enable.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.

To print the open window:

  1. Select the open window.
  2. Press Print Screen.

Displaying Logos 90/3

To specify if you want a logo to be displayed and how long to display it:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open System.
  4. Select the Logo tab.
  5. Select the choices that best describes how you want the system to handle product information and logos.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.

Changing Screen Resolution 91/3

To change the screen resolution for an XGA display adapter:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open System.
  4. Select the Screen tab.
  5. Select the resolution you want to use.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.

Note: The Screen tab will not appear if you are using the VGA, 8514, or SVGA driver.

Tip After changing screen resolutions from a higher resolution to a lower resolution, some applications might open windows that are partially off the screen. If this occurs:

  1. Press Alt+Spacebar.
  2. Select Move.
  3. Use the mouse or the arrow keys to move the window.
  4. Click mouse button 1 or press Enter.

or:

  1. Point to an empty area on the Desktop.
  2. Click mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the same time.
  3. Point to the name of the program.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  5. Select Tile or Cascade. The window will now appear on the screen.

System Clock 92/2

The System Clock object is used to set the system date and time or to set an alarm. You can display the clock in either analog or digital mode.

To set the system clock:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Select System Clock.
  4. Display the pop-up menu for System Clock.
  5. Select Settings.
  6. Select the tab for the setting you want to change.
  7. Select View; change to the View page if necessary. (To view a different View page, use an arrow at the lower-right corner of the window.)
  8. Point to the title-bar icon.
  9. Double-click.

WIN-OS/2 Setup 93/2

The WIN-OS/2 Setup object is used to select a public or private clipboard or dynamic data exchange (DDE). The clipboard and DDE are features that allow data exchange between programs. You also can use this object to preselect WIN-OS/2 settings for all Windows programs before you start them. Use the Fast load setting to automatically start a WIN-OS/2 session when you start OS/2. If you change a setting, the change affects only subsequent Windows programs that are started. Programs that are currently running are not affected.

If you are using Windows programs that can share information using the clipboard or Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) feature, then you can change the way these features work in all WIN-OS/2 sessions.

Note: Be sure you check with the instructions that came with your program to determine if these features are supported.

The clipboard is an area that temporarily holds data. Data is placed in the clipboard by selecting cut or copy from a menu. You can cut (move) or copy data from one document and paste it into another document, even if the other document is in a different program. For example, you can place a spreadsheet from one program into a document from another program.

The DDE feature enables the exchange of data between programs. Any change made to information in one file is applied to the same information in an associated file. In the example above, if changes are made to the original spreadsheet, corresponding changes are made to the spreadsheet in the document. If changes are made to the spreadsheet in the document, corresponding changes are made to the original spreadsheet.

The clipboard and DDE can be set to Public or Private. When DDE is set to Public, information can be shared with OS/2 and WIN-OS/2 sessions. Information cannot be shared with DOS sessions. When the clipboard or DDE is set to Private, sharing data between sessions is restricted. This means that only information for those programs running in that single session can be shared.

When OS/2 is installed, the clipboard and DDE are set to Public. Windows programs that have the clipboard or DDE feature are set up during installation of the OS/2 operating system to use a Public setting for all WIN-OS/2 sessions. You can use the WIN-OS/2 Setup object to set these features to private. You can further customize the way you use these features by using the Settings notebook of the program object.

Note: Changing the clipboard and DDE features to Private will not affect the performance of your Windows programs.

To change the clipboard or DDE feature to Private:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open WIN-OS/2 Setup.
  4. Select Data Exchange.
  5. Select Private for Dynamic Data Exchange or Clipboard.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.

Note: If you change the settings for the clipboard or DDE while a program is running in a WIN-OS/2 session, the settings for the program will take effect immediately.

For related information about the clipboard, DDE, WIN-OS/2, and Windows Programs, see the Windows Programs in OS/2 located in the online Information folder or the Master Help Index.

Power 94/2+

The Power object manages and tracks power consumption in battery-powered computers that support the Advanced Power Management (APM) standard. The APM standard defines the way the hardware and software work together to reduce power consumption and help extend battery life. If your computer supports the APM standard, the Power object might be automatically installed during the OS/2 installation process. If it was not installed, you can install it by using Selective Install and selecting Advanced Power Management. For information about Selective Install, see Selective Install.

Note: This power management feature is not available if your computer does not have APM BIOS or a device driver that emulates APM BIOS.

OS/2 APM support relies on the power status information returned from the BIOS on your computer. You might notice incorrect battery life or status within the Power icon on your computer. If this occurs, rely on the LEDs on your computer for accurate power status information.

Turning the APM setting to Off also turns off the BIOS power management. If you want to turn off APM, but not the BIOS power management, place REM before the APM device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file, and then restart your system to invoke the change.

For example:

REM DEVICE=C:\OS2\APM.SYS

Power Object 95/3

To open the Power object:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Power.

To display the Power pop-up menu:

  1. Point to the Power object.
  2. Click mouse button 1 or 2.

Power Settings 96/3

To set power management support:

  1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
  2. Select Settings. The Power - Settings notebook appears.
  3. Select Power.
  4. Set Power management to On or Off. If set to On, power consumption will be reduced and power status will be tracked. If set to Off, the suspend mode, power status, and battery status features are disabled.
  5. Set Confirm on power state changes if you want to confirm requests to go to suspend mode. (See Suspend Mode.)

To set the default status view of the status window:

  1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
  2. Select Settings. The Power - Settings notebook appears.
  3. Select View.
  4. Select Full status or Battery only for Default status view.
  5. Set Refresh (of the status window) to On or Off.
  6. If you set Refresh to On, select the number of minutes (from 1 to 30) for Refresh rate. The system will automatically update the status window at the intervals you specified.

You can also update the status window by selecting Refresh Now from the Power object pop-up menu.

Power Status 97/3

To display the power status:

  1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
  2. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
  3. Select Full status or Battery status. A full-status Power window or a power-gauge Power window is displayed, depending on your selection.

Note: You cannot change the size of the Power window.

A full-status Power window displays the following information:

  • Battery life. This information is displayed as a power gauge that shows the power level of the battery compared to the capacity of the battery. When the power gauge indicator is completely shaded, the battery is at full power. The shaded area of the gauge moves up or down as the battery power level increases or decreases. When the power gauge indicator is dimmed, there is no battery in the computer or the computer cannot provide battery information.
  • Power source for the computer. If the system cannot determine the power source, no power source information is displayed.
  • Battery state, which is the charge state of the battery. Battery state information is displayed as follows:
High        Battery charge is OK; continue using your computer.
Low         Recharge the battery or switch to another power source
            such as another battery or AC power.
Critical    Battery charge is depleted.  Recharge the battery or
            switch to another power source immediately to avoid a
            system failure or data loss.
Charging    System is restoring the battery charge.
Unknown     System cannot determine the battery state or there is no
            battery in your computer.

Suspend Mode 98/3

To set the suspend mode:

  1. Display the Power object pop-up menu.
  2. Select Suspend.

When suspend mode is activated, battery power is conserved by dimming the display and turning off devices that are not in use. If Confirm on power status changes is set in the Power - Settings notebook, a message is displayed that asks you if you want to continue before switching to suspend mode.

Note: Different computers have different procedures for exiting suspend mode and resuming operation. Refer to the documentation that came with your computer for information about its suspend mode features.

After you exit suspend mode, you will notice a startup delay before you can resume operation of your system. This delay might be a few seconds, depending on your system.

Selective Install 99/2+

The Selective Install object is used to add features that you did not include when you originally installed the operating system. You also can use the Selective Install object to change the mouse, display adapter, or country information for your system.

Note: You will need the OS/2 installation diskettes for each of the procedures that follow.

Adding Options after Installation 100/3

To add options after installation:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Selective Install.
  4. Select from the System Configuration window any of the choices that you want to change or add.
  5. Select OK.
  6. Place a check mark to the left of any feature you want to add. (For more information about a feature, press F1.) If a More push button is displayed to the right of a feature, select it to see additional choices.

Adding Online Documentation after Installation 101/3

To add online documentation after installation:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Selective Install.
  4. Select OK when the System Configuration window is displayed.
  5. Select the check box to the left of Documentation.
  6. Select More to the right of Documentation.
  7. Select the check box to the left of any documentation units to deselect the ones you do not want to add.
  8. Select OK.
  9. Select Install.
  10. Follow the instructions on the screen.

Changing Display Adapter Support 102/3

To change the display adapter support after installation:

1. Open OS/2 System.
2. Open System Setup.
3. Open Selective Install.
4. Select Primary Display or Secondary Display from the System Configuration
   window.
5. Select the display adapter that you want from the list provided.
6. Select OK.
7. Follow the instructions on the screen.

Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation 103/3

To add PCMCIA** support after installation:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Selective Install.
  4. Select OK when the System Configuration window is displayed.
  5. Select the check box to the left of PCMCIA Support to display the Select
     PCMCIA system window.
  6. Select the appropriate system (this should either be a direct match with
     your target install system or a known compatible system).
  7. Select OK.
  8. Select Install.
  9. Follow the instructions on the screen.

PCMCIA 104/2+

OS/2 provides software support for Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) hardware. PCMCIA is the standard for PC card adapters associated with portable computers. A PC card is a small form-factor adapter about the size and shape of a credit card. You can use PC cards with laptops, notebooks, tablets, and other portable computer systems that are equipped with a PCMCIA slot.

Installing PCMCIA 105/3

PCMCIA can be automatically installed during OS/2 installation or it can be installed through Selective Install after OS/2 installation. To install PCMCIA support after installation, see Adding PCMCIA Support after Installation.

PCMCIA Components 106/3

PCMCIA consists of the following services and client device drivers (CDDs):

  • Card services - Provide an industry-standard interface layer between the Client device driver (CDD) and hardware-specific socket services.
  • Socket services - Provide an industry-standard interface layer across hardware platforms for specific chip-set support.
  • Resource Client - A special-purpose CDD that provides Card Services, detailing the resources in use and available at start up.
  • Modem Card Manager - A generic CDD that provides a Card Manager level of support for PCMCIA modem cards.

Plug and Play for PCMCIA 107/3+

Plug and Play for PCMCIA is an OS/2 application that displays PC card information, socket status, assigned resources, and card type. There are two basic types of PC cards:

  • Memory cards, which contain specific types of memory devices
  • Input/output (I/O) cards, which contain devices such as modems and disks

Both card types are assigned system resources, which are used to communicate with the card's devices.

Plug and Play for PCMCIA also allows you to start applications automatically when their objects (icons) are registered to a PC card type.

To open the Plug and Play for PCMCIA object:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Plug and Play for PCMCIA.

Socket and Card Information 108/4

The Plug and Play for PCMCIA window displays the following information:

No.           Socket number.
Card Type     Card-type icon and text.
Card Status   Card-status icon and text.

Card Types 109/4

o  Booted
o  Communication - for the following card types:
          3270          5250
          Ethernet      LAN
          SDLC          Token Ring
o  Hard Disk
o  I/O - for multi-function, parallel, and SCSI card types.
o  Memory
o  Modem, Serial

Card Status 110/4

o  Empty
o  Inserted
o  Ready
o  Not Ready
o  Inserted for Memory

Memory Card - Details View 111/4

To receive additional information about an inserted memory card:

  1. Select the memory card.
  2. Press Enter.

The Memory Card - Details View appears with the following information:

Card information
Vendor name and card description data retrieved from card.
Write protect
Yes or no.
Battery
Good, low, or dead.
Region
Region of card memory for memory devices such as SRAM.

I/O Card - Details View 112/4

To receive additional information about an inserted I/O-type card:

  1. Select the appropriate card.
  2. Press Enter.

The I/O Card - Details View appears with the following information:

Card information     Vendor name and card description data retrieved from card.
Assigned resources   System resources used by this PC card:
     IRQ    Interrupt request level.
     I/O    Input/output ports.

Options 113/3+

The Options menu bar choice has two selections, Customize and Register Object. The Customize option allows you to turn a beep on and off, display the Plug and Play for PCMCIA window when a PC card is used, and keep Plug and Play for PCMCIA visible when other applications are running in the foreground. The Register Object option allows you to register objects to be launched (started or opened) when a specific type of PC card is used. (It is not necessary to have a card inserted when registering objects.) If more than one object is registered to the same card type or the manual option is selected, the Object Launcher window is displayed where you can select which registered object to launch.

Note: Objects can be launched only after Plug and Play for PCMCIA is opened.

Customize 114/4

To use the Customize window:

  1. Select Options.
  2. Select Customize.
  3. To display the Plug and Play for PCMCIA window whenever a PC card is
     inserted, removed, ready, or not ready, select the appropriate check box
     under Display window.
  4. To hear a beep whenever a PC card is inserted, removed, ready, or not
     ready, select the appropriate check box under Beep.
  5. To keep the Plug and Play for PCMCIA icon or window in the foreground
     (visible) when running another application, select Yes.
  6. To return to the original default settings, select Defaults.
Note:  Plug and Play for PCMCIA must be open for your selections to become
active.

Register Object 115/4

To register an object:

  1. Select Options.
  2. Select Register Object.
  3. Click on the down arrow to the right of the Select a card type field to
     display a list of available card types.
  4. Select the desired card type.
  5. Drag a copy of each object that you want to register to this card type to
     the Object List field.  The name of the object appears in the list.  (If
     you have registered more than one object for this card type, see also
     Object Launcher.)
  6. Select Automatically or Manually to indicate how you would like the object
     to be launched.  (If you have selected Manually, see also Object
     Launcher.)
  7. Select any of the choices under When card is to indicate when you would
     like to launch the object.
     Note:  The Ready and Not ready choices work only with I/O card types.
  8. To return to the original default settings, select Defaults.

To deregister an object:

  1. Select the object to be removed from the Object List.
  2. Select Remove.
     Note:  Selecting Remove does not affect the original object.

Object Launcher 116/3

The Object Launcher is displayed when Plug and Play for PCMCIA is open and one or both of the following occurs:

  o  More than one object is registered for the inserted PC card type.
  o  Manually is selected under Launch Choices.

To launch an object:

  1. Select the object to launch.
  2. Select Launch.

Selective Uninstall 117/2

The Selective Uninstall program allows you to remove operating system files, programs, and device drivers from your hard disk. You might want to uninstall files to free hard disk space for other programs. Warning: Do not remove operating system files, programs, or device drivers from your hard disk unless you have backed up the operating system (as it was originally installed). Use the BACKUP.EXE program from the utility diskettes you created with "Create Utility Diskettes" program to back up your system. After system files, programs, or device drivers are removed, they are unavailable for future use. You can recover files, programs, or device drivers that you delete (as they were originally installed) only by using the RESTORE.EXE file from the Utility Diskettes you created.

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Locate the Selective Uninstall object inside the System Setup folder.
  4. Open Selective Uninstall.  The Selective Uninstall window appears.

For information about Selective Uninstall, press F1. Or, place the mouse pointer on the Help push button and click once. To close the Help window, press Esc.

  1. To make a selection, press the Tab key until your choice is highlighted;
     then press the Spacebar. A check mark (/) appears in the box next to your
     choice.  Or, place the mouse pointer on the check box beside a choice and
     click once.
  2. The More push button next to some choices indicates that a secondary
     window containing more choices associated with your selection is
     available. After you select a choice, the More push button is highlighted.
     Select More to display a list of items you can choose to remove.
     Warning: When you select More, all items in the associated choices l   ist
     are checked. Make sure you remove the check marks from those items that
     you do not want to delete from your hard disk.
     For information about the items in the window, press F1.  Or, place the
     mouse pointer on the Help push button and click once.
  3. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove operating system features
     from your hard disk.
    Adobe Type Manager
    Your hard disk contains the Adobe Type Manager program.  The program runs
    in the WIN-OS/2 environment.  Adobe Type Manager uses PostScript[**]
    outline font technology to produce the sharpest possible type on the screen
    and on the printed page.
    If you intend to use Adobe Type Manager, do not choose to uninstall Fonts.
    For more information about using Adobe Type Manager, see the online Windows
    Programs in OS/2 located in the Information folder on the desktop.

Create Utility Diskettes 118/2

The OS/2 operating system comes installed on your hard disk. Your computer has a program that creates diskettes called Utility Diskettes. Create these diskettes to help you correct problems if you cannot start your computer from the hard disk. The Utility Diskettes also allow you to start the procedure that backs up the operating system to diskettes. Backup diskettes allow you to restore OS/2 to your hard disk in the event of a computer problem. To complete this procedure, you will need three blank, high-density (2MB) diskettes for a 1.44MB drive, or one extended-density (4MB) diskette for a 2.88MB drive.

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Create Utility Diskettes. The Create Utility Diskettes window
     appears.
     For information about Create Utility Diskettes, press F1.  Or, place the
     mouse pointer on the Help push button and click once.  To close the Help
     window, press Esc.
  4. Select the drive where the Utility Diskettes will be created.  If you
     select drive A, insert a blank diskette into drive A.
  5. Type C.  Or, place the mouse pointer on the Create push button and click
     once.  Follow the instructions on the screen to prepare Utility Diskettes.
     Label the first diskette you create Utility Diskette 1, the second
     diskette Utility Diskette 2, and the third diskette Utility Diskette 3.
     Store the diskettes in a safe place.

Starting Objects Automatically 119/1+

The Startup folder contains objects that you want to automatically start every time the system starts. This chapter describes how to use the Startup folder to start objects. It also describes how to customize your system startup by placing variables in your CONFIG.SYS file.

Starting Programs Automatically 120/2+

You can start programs automatically at system startup using a Startup folder, a STARTUP.CMD file, or both. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to use the Startup folder.

Startup Folder 121/3

You can place objects of frequently used programs and batch files in a Startup folder so that every time you start your computer, the programs and batch files will start. The objects in the Startup folder are started when the Desktop folder is opened at system startup. You cannot specify the order in which the objects in the folder are started. You should place a shadow of the program objects in the Startup folder instead of the original object. This ensures that any changes made to the original object are applied to the object in the Startup folder. To create a shadow of an object and place it in the Startup folder:

  1. Point to the object.
  2. Press and hold Ctrl+Shift.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the object to the Startup folder.
  5. Release mouse button 2.
  6. Release the Ctrl and Shift keys.

STARTUP.CMD File 122/3

A STARTUP.CMD file is similar to the Startup folder in that it is used to automatically start programs and batch files at system startup. If a STARTUP.CMD file is present, it will be run prior to the starting of the Desktop. For more information about creating and running a STARTUP.CMD file, refer to the online Command Reference.

Preventing Automatic Startup 123/2

Programs located in the Startup folder or programs running at the time the computer was shut down will automatically start when the computer is restarted. To prevent these programs from starting:

  1. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart the computer.
  2. When you see the Desktop animation (similar to an exploding box), press
     and hold Ctrl+Shift+F1.
  3. Hold the keys for approximately 15 seconds, or until the Desktop appears.
     (If the hard disk light stops flashing during this time, your computer
     might be suspended.  Release the keys quickly, and then resume holding the
     keys until the Desktop objects appear.)

Customizing Your CONFIG.SYS for Startup 124/2

You can customize the way your Workplace Shell starts by changing the system variables at either a command prompt or in the CONFIG.SYS file. Precede each of the variables with the SET command. The system variables for the Workplace Shell are:

AUTOSTART            Determines the parts of the Workplace Shell that are
                     automatically started.  Eliminating any of the options
                     from the statement restricts the user from accessing
                     portions of the Shell.  For example:
                     SET AUTOSTART=FOLDERS, PROGRAMS, TASKLIST, CONNECTIONS
     FOLDERS           Allows a user to open additional folders after startup.
     PROGRAMS          Allows a user to open additional programs after startup.
     TASKLIST          Allows a user to open the Window List.
     CONNECTIONS       Recreates the network connections established during the
                       last log on.
     LAUNCHPAD         Creates a new LaunchPad on the Desktop.
OS2_SHELL            Sets the command processor for OS/2 sessions.  For
                     example:
                     SET OS2_SHELL=C:\OS2\CMD.EXE
RESTARTOBJECTS       Sets the objects that will be automatically started by the
                     Workplace Shell.  For example:
                     SET RESTARTOBJECTS=STARTUPFOLDERSONLY
     YES Starts all the objects that were running at the time of shutdown and
     all objects in the Startup folder.  This is the default.
     NO Does not start any of the applications that were running at the time of
     shutdown and does not start the objects in the Startup folder.
     STARTUPFOLDERSONLY Starts only those objects in the Startup folder.
     REBOOTONLY Starts objects only when the Workplace Shell is started by
     pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del or turning on the computer.
RUNWORKPLACE         Sets the interface that is started by the OS/2 operating
                     system. PMSHELL.EXE is the program for the Workplace Shell
                     interface.  For example:
                     SET RUNWORKPLACE=C:\OS2\PMSHELL.EXE
SYSTEM_INI           Determines the INI file to be used by the Workplace Shell
                     for system information about such items as default colors
                     and printer drivers. For example:
                     SET SYSTEM_INI=C:\OS2\OS2SYS.INI
USER_INI             Determines the INI file to be used by the Workplace Shell
                     for system information about such items as program
                     defaults, display options, and file options.  For example:
                     SET USER_INI=C:\OS2\OS2.INI
For more information about customizing the user interface, refer to the online
Command Reference.
The DISKCACHE statement in the CONFIG.SYS file is set up so that it
automatically runs the CHKDSK program upon startup if the system shuts down
improperly.  The CHKDSK program analyzes and fixes disk problems caused by the
improper shutdown.
If you add hard disk drives or partitions after the installation of the OS/2
operating system, you should edit the CONFIG.SYS file and update the AC:x
parameter to reflect the new additions. AC: starts the auto-check feature on
the specified drives when the system shuts down improperly.  The value x
represents the letters of the disks or partitions on the system that you want
to check.

For example, if you want to check disks C and D and your existing DISKCACHE statement is:

DISKCACHE=64,LW

Add the AC: parameter to the statement as follows:

DISKCACHE=64,LW,AC:CD

For more information about the DISKCACHE statement, refer to the online Command Reference.

Using Disk Drives 125/1+

This chapter describes how to use the Drives folder to access and use the different types of storage media installed in your computer. When opened, the Drives folder provides a view of all drive objects in the system. For example, the following drive types could be accessed from the Drives folder:

  o  Diskette
  o  Hard disk
  o  CD-ROM
  o  Tape backup
  o  Optical disc
  o  PCMCIA

To view the Drive objects:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Drives.

Note: Drive objects cannot be copied.

About Hard Disks and Diskettes 126/2

There are two kinds of disks:

Hard disk   A non-removable disk that is built into a hard-disk drive.  Hard
            disks come in a variety of capacities and can hold large amounts of
            information.  (Capacity is the maximum amount of information that a
            diskette or disk can hold.)
            Information can be stored on and erased from the disk over and over
            again.  The computer can write to and read information from the
            hard disk much faster than it can from a diskette.
Diskette    A removable disk that can be inserted in and removed from a
            diskette drive.  Diskettes come in a variety of capacities.
            Diskettes cannot hold as much information as a hard disk.
            Information can be stored on and erased from the diskette over and
            over again.  The computer cannot write to or read information from
            a diskette as fast as it can from a hard disk.  There are two sizes
            of diskettes, 5.25" and 3.5":
  o  5.25-inch diskettes are thin, flexible, and somewhat fragile.  A 5.25-inch
     diskette has a write-protect notch located on the right side. You can
     place a write-protect tab over the notch to protect the information stored
     on the diskette.
     To store information on or erase information from the diskette, you must
     remove the write-protect tab from the diskette.
  o  3.5-inch diskettes are protected by a hard plastic cover that makes them
     more durable.  A 3.5-inch diskette can be write protected by sliding a
     built-in tab to reveal the write-protect opening.
     To store information on or erase information from the diskette, you must
     slide the tab over the write-protect opening on the diskette.
            Note:  If a diskette does not have a write-protect notch or tab,
            the diskette is permanently write protected.  Many software
            manufacturers use permanently write-protected diskettes to prevent
            the information on the diskettes from being accidentally changed or
            deleted.
The capacity of a diskette and a hard disk is measured in bytes. A diskette
must be formatted at a capacity less than or equal to the capacity of the
diskette drive in order for the diskette and the drive to be compatible.  So
even though a diskette is the correct size physically, its capacity might not
be compatible with the diskette drive in the computer.
For example, a 3.5-inch diskette drive designed to work with 2.88MB diskettes
can use 1.44MB diskettes, but a 1.44MB diskette drive cannot use a 2.88MB
diskette.  The following terms are used to describe the capacity of disks and
the size of files:
Byte        Amount of space it takes to store a character.
Kilobyte    1024 bytes and is abbreviated as KB.
Megabyte    1024KB (approximately a million bytes) and is abbreviated as MB.
Gigabyte    1024MB (approximately a billion bytes) and is abbreviated as GB.
The following terms are equivalent:
1MB = 1024KB = 1048576 bytes
Each diskette drive and hard disk drive in a computer has a letter assigned to
it.  This letter is the name that both you and the computer use to identify the
drive.  For example, on many computers the diskette drive is called drive A and
the hard disk drive is called drive C.

Accessing Hard Disks and Diskettes 127/2+

You can use the Drives folder to access the information on your hard disk and diskette drives. This allows you to view disk information, display the files on the disks, and copy and move files. The files can be viewed as objects so they can easily be copied and moved with the mouse.

Tip For specific instructions on using the Drive A object, see Drive A.

Viewing Disk Information 128/3

To view the size of a disk:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Drives.
  3. Open the drive object you want information about.

Displaying Objects 129/3

The drive objects are used to display the contents of the drives on your computer. The contents of the drive can be displayed in three different views:

Icon view     Displays the contents of the disk as icons.  This is the default
              if the disk does not have folders (directories).
Tree view     Displays the contents of the disk in a tree.  This is the default
              if the disk has folders (directories).  A plus (+) sign to the
              left of a folder indicates that additional folders exist inside
              the folder.  By selecting the plus sign, you can see the other
              folders in the folder.  Pointing to a folder and double-clicking
              displays the contents of the folder in an icon view.
              Note:  When an additional folder is opened from a folder that is
              in tree view, if the default for the additional folder is also
              tree view, it is overridden and displayed in an icon view.  There
              is no need to open it again in tree view because it is already
              shown in the parent folder's tree view.
Details view  Displays the contents of the disk in a table with the following
              additional information:
  o  Icon
  o  Title
  o  Real name
  o  Size
  o  Last write date and time
  o  Last access date and time
  o  Creation date and time
  o  Flags
To display the contents of a drive as icons:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Drives.
  3. Point to the object that you want to display.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
  6. Select Icon view.
To display the contents of a drive in a tree view:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Drives.
  3. Point to the object that you want to display.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
  6. Select Tree view.
  7. If a plus (+) sign appears to the left of a folder, select it to expand
     the contents.
  8. To display the contents of a folder, point to the folder; then
     double-click.
To display details about the contents of a drive:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Drives.
  3. Point to the object that you want to display.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
  6. Select Details view.
  7. Select the scroll bars at the bottom and side of the window to scroll the
     information.

Copying Objects 130/3

Note: If you want to copy the object to a folder object or another drive object, the target object must be visible before you start the copy.

To copy an object from a drive to another location:
  1. Open the drive containing the object you want to copy.
  2. Point to the object you want to copy.
  3. Press and hold Ctrl.
  4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  5. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
  6. Release mouse button 2.
  7. Release Ctrl.

To copy an object from another location to a drive:

  1. Point to the object you want to copy.
  2. Press and hold Ctrl.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the object to the drive object.
  5. Release mouse button 2.
  6. Release Ctrl.

Moving Objects 131/3

There are times when you need to move an object (copy the object to a different location and delete it from the original location). Note: If you want to move the object to a folder object or another drive object, the target object must be visible before you start the move.

To move an object from a drive to another location:

  1. Open the drive containing the object you want to move.
  2. Point to the object you want to move.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
  5. Release mouse button 2.

To move an object from another location to a drive:

  1. Point to the object you want to move.
  2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  3. Drag the mouse to the drive object.
  4. Release mouse button 2.

Deleting Objects from a Drive 132/3

You can delete (erase) unwanted objects from a drive. To delete an object from a drive:

  1. Open the drive.
  2. Point to the object you want to delete.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the object to the Shredder.
  5. Release mouse button 2.

Formatting a Disk 133/2

You can format a disk. When a disk is formatted, it is checked for defects and prepared to accept data. During this process, all existing data is erased from the disk. Use the OS/2 Tutorial for an interactive demonstration of how to format a diskette. Note: Before you format a disk, make sure that it does not contain any information that is important.

To format a disk:
  1. Point to the disk you want to format.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Format disk.
  4. When the Format Disk window appears, type a Volume Label (name for the
     disk).
  5. Select the type of file system (FAT or HPFS) you want to use on the disk.
     (For more information about these file systems, see the Master Help
     Index).
  6. Select Format.
  7. When the format is complete, select OK.

Checking a Disk 134/2

You can check a disk for:

  o  Defects, which are errors in the file allocation table or directory on the
     disk.  If you select Write corrections to disk, any problems found will be
     fixed.
  o  Current usage, which is the amount of the disk used for directories, user
     files, and extended attributes.  It also indicates the amount of space
     that is reserved on the disk.
  o  File system type, which is the type of file system on the disk.
  o  Total disk space, which is the capacity of the disk in bytes.
  o  Total amount of disk space available, which is the amount of free space
     left on the disk.

Note: You cannot check a disk that is currently being used or is locked by another process (for example, the disk that OS/2 is running on).

To check a disk:
  1. Point to the drive that you want to check.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Check disk.
  4. Select Write corrections to disk.
  5. Select Check.  When the check is done, the Check Disk &dash. Results
     window is displayed.
  6. Select Cancel to remove the window.

Drive A 135/2+

The Drive A object provides quick access to the diskette drive in your computer referred to as A. You can use the Drive A object to:

  • Display the objects on a diskette
  • Display information about the objects on the diskette
  • Copy objects on a diskette to another location
  • Copy objects from another location to a diskette
  • Move objects on a diskette to another location
  • Move objects from another location to a diskette
  • Delete objects from a diskette
  • Format a diskette
  • Check a diskette for defects and fix it

Note: The Drive A object cannot be copied.

This chapter discusses only the Drive A object. For information about other drive objects and a discussion about disks and diskettes, see Using Disk Drives.

Displaying the Objects on a Diskette 136/3

To display the objects on a diskette:

  1. Place a diskette into diskette drive A.
  2. Open Drive A.

The Drive A window appears showing the contents of the diskette. The actual layout of the window that appears depends upon the contents of the diskette.

Tree view   Displays the objects on the diskette in a directory (tree)
            structure with folders representing the directories.  This view
            comes up when the objects on the diskette are placed in
            directories.
            To view the contents of a directory, point to a folder and
            double-click.
Icon view   Displays the objects on the diskette as pictures (icons).  This
            view comes up when all the objects on the diskette are in the root
            directory.

Displaying Information about the Objects on a Diskette 137/2

The tree and icon views give limited information about the objects on a diskette. However, the details view gives the following information about the objects on the diskette:

Title of the object   Name that appears below the icon that represents the
                      object.
Real name of object   Actual name of the object.
Size                  Amount of space in bytes that the object occupies.
Last write date       Date that the information in the object was last changed.
Last write time       Time of day that the information in the object was last
                      changed.
Last access date      Date that the information in the object was last viewed.
Last access time      Time of day that the information in the object was last
                      viewed.
Creation date         Date that the object was first created.
Creation time         Time that the object was first created.
Flags                 Characteristics of the file that allow it to be used in a
                      certain way.

To display detailed information about the objects on a diskette:

  1. Place a diskette into drive A.
  2. Open Drive A.
  3. Point to the title-bar icon.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  5. Select the arrow to the right of Open.
  6. Select Details view.

Copying Objects to or from a Diskette 138/2

There are times when you need to copy an object (duplicate the object and place it in a different location). Note: If you want to copy the object to a folder object or another drive object, the target object must be visible before you start the copy. To copy an object from a diskette in Drive A to another location:

  1. Place a diskette into drive A.
  2. Open Drive A.
  3. Point to the object you want to copy.
  4. Press and hold Ctrl.
  5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  6. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
  7. Release mouse button 2.
  8. Release Ctrl.
To copy an object from another location to a diskette in Drive A:
  1. Place the diskette you want to copy the object to into drive A.
  2. Point to the object you want to copy.
  3. Press and hold Ctrl.
  4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  5. Drag the mouse to the Drive A object.
  6. Release mouse button 2.
  7. Release Ctrl.

Moving Objects to or from a Diskette 139/2

There are times when you need to move an object (copy the object to a different location and delete it from the original location). Note: If you want to move the object to a folder object or another drive object, the target object must be visible before you start the move. To move an object from the diskette in Drive A to another location:

  1. Place a diskette into drive A.
  2. Open Drive A.
  3. Point to the object you want to move.
  4. Press and hold Shift.
  5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  6. Drag the object to a folder, the Desktop, or another drive object.
  7. Release mouse button 2.
  8. Release Shift.

Note: When moving an object from a diskette, the Shift key must be used with mouse button 2. To move an object from another location to the diskette in Drive A:

  1. Place the diskette you want to move the object to into drive A.
  2. Point to the object you want to move.
  3. Press and hold Shift.
  4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  5. Drag the object to the Drive A object.
  6. Release mouse button 2.
  7. Release Shift.

Note: When moving an object to a diskette, the Shift key must be used with mouse button 2.

Deleting Objects from a Diskette 140/2

You can delete (erase) unwanted objects from a diskette. To delete an object from a diskette:

  1. Place the diskette you want to delete the object from into drive A.
  2. Open Drive A.
  3. Point to the object you want to delete.
  4. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  5. Drag the object to the Shredder.
  6. Release mouse button 2.

Formatting a Diskette 141/2

You can format a diskette using the Drive A object. When a diskette is formatted, it is checked for defects and prepared to accept data. During this process, all existing data is erased from the diskette. To format a diskette:

  1. Place the diskette you want to format into drive A.
  2. Point to Drive A.
  3. Click mouse button 2.
  4. Select Format disk.
  5. When the Format Disk window appears, type a Volume Label (name for the
     disk or diskette).
  6. Select Format.
  7. When the format is complete, select OK.

Checking a Diskette 142/2

You can check a diskette for:

  • Defects, which are errors in the file allocation table or directory on the diskette. If you select Write corrections to disk, any problems found will be fixed.
  • Current usage, which is the amount of the diskette used for directories, user files, and extended attributes. It also indicates the amount of space that is reserved on the diskette.
  • File system type, which is the type of file system on the diskette. (All diskettes are formatted for the FAT file system.)
  • Total disk space, which is the capacity of the diskette in bytes.
  • Total amount of disk space available, which is the amount of free space left on the diskette.

To check a diskette:

  1. Place the diskette to be checked into drive A.
  2. Point to Drive A.
  3. Click mouse button 2.
  4. Select Check disk.
  5. Select Write corrections to disk.
  6. Select Check.
  7. After a few seconds, the Check Disk - Results window is displayed. Select Cancel to remove the window.

Using Command Prompts 143/1+

The Command Prompts folder contains objects that open DOS, OS/2, and WIN-OS/2 sessions. A session is one instance of a command prompt or started program. Each session is separate from all other sessions that might be running on the computer. To open the Command Prompts object:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.

OS/2 Command Prompts 144/2

The OS/2 Full-Screen and OS/2 Window objects are used to access an OS/2 command prompt. At these command prompts, you can start programs and enter OS/2 commands. For a description of OS/2 commands that can be used at these prompts, see the OS/2 Command Reference in the Information folder. To start an OS/2 command prompt session:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open OS/2 Full Screen, OS/2 Window, or both.

When you close a session, the session and its related windows are automatically closed. Make sure that you save all important data in the session before you close it.

To close an OS/2 command prompt session:
  1. Type Exit.
  2. Press Enter.

You can switch (temporarily leave without closing) from an OS/2 command prompt session to another running program. When you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then restored when you switch back.

To temporarily leave an OS/2 command prompt session:
  1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
  2. Point to a title on the Window List.
  3. Double-click.
or:
  1. Press Alt+Esc to switch to another open object.

DOS Command Prompts 145/2

The DOS Full-Screen and DOS Window objects are used to access a DOS command prompt. At these command prompts, you can start programs and enter DOS commands. For a description of DOS commands that can be used at these prompts, see the OS/2 Command Reference in the Information folder. To start a DOS command prompt session:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open DOS Full Screen, DOS Window, or both.

When you close a session, the session and its related windows are automatically closed. Make sure that you save all important data in the session before you close it.

To close a DOS command prompt session:
  1. Type Exit.
  2. Press Enter.

You can switch from a DOS command prompt session to another running program. When you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then restored when you switch back.

To temporarily leave a DOS command prompt session:
  1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
  2. Point to a title on the Window List.
  3. Double-click.
or:
  1. Press Alt+Esc to display the Desktop.

DOS from Drive A 146/2+

The DOS from Drive A object is used to start a specific version (3.0 or later) of DOS from a diskette. By using a specific version of DOS, you can use programs that will not run under the DOS provided with OS/2. Before you can start a specific DOS version from a diskette, you must create the diskette used to start the DOS version. This diskette is commonly known as a DOS Startup diskette or DOS bootable diskette.

Creating a DOS Startup Diskette 147/3

Note: If you already have a DOS Startup diskette, go to step 6 to make sure the diskette is set up to work correctly with the DOS from Drive A object.

To create a DOS Startup diskette:
  1. Boot your system with a version of DOS.  You can use a:
       o  DOS installation diskette
       o  Hard disk that DOS has been installed on
       o  Diskette that DOS has been installed on
  2. Type FORMAT A: /S
  3. Place a blank diskette into drive A.
  4. Press Enter.  This transfers the system files to the diskette.
  5. When the format is complete, remove the diskette.
  6. Start OS/2 by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.
  7. Select OS/2 System.
  8. Select Drives.
  9. Select Drive C.
 10. Open the OS/2 folder; then open the MDOS folder.
 11. Place the formatted diskette containing the system files into drive A.
 12. Copy the following data-file objects from Drive C to the Drive A object:
       o  FSFILTER.SYS
       o  FSACCESS.EXE You can copy as many additional DOS files to the
         diskette as you want.
 13. Open the Templates folder.
 14. Copy a Data File object to the Desktop.
 15. Point to the data-file object and double-click.  The OS/2 System Editor
     starts.
 16. Type the following information into the data file:
     DEVICE=FSFILTER.SYS
     DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\HIMEM.SYS
     DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\EMM386.SYS
     DOS=HIGH,UMB
     DEVICEHIGH=C:\OS2\MDOS\ANSI.SYS
     FILES=20
     BUFFERS=20
 17. Point to the title-bar icon of the OS/2 System Editor; then double-click.
 18. Select Save as; then type A:\CONFIG.SYS and press Enter.
 19. Point to the data-file object again and double-click.
 20. Type the following information into the data file:
     ECHO OFF
     PROMPT $P$G
     SET COMSPEC=A:\COMMAND.COM
     C:\OS2\MDOS\MOUSE.COM
     PATH A:\
 21. Point to the title-bar icon of the OS/2 System Editor; then double-click.
 22. Select Save as; then type A:\AUTOEXEC.BAT and press Enter.

Starting DOS from Drive A 148/3

To start a DOS from Drive A session:

  1. Insert the DOS Startup diskette in drive A.
  2. Open OS/2 System.
  3. Open Command Prompts.
  4. Open DOS from Drive A.
To close a DOS from Drive A session:
  1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
  2. Point to DOS from Drive A in the Window List.
  3. Click mouse button 2.
  4. Click on Close.
You can switch from a DOS from Drive A session to another running program.
When you switch sessions, your command prompt session is saved and then
restored when you switch back.
To temporarily leave a DOS from Drive A session:
  1. Press Ctrl+Esc.
  2. Point to a title on the Window List.
  3. Double-click.
or:
  1. Press Alt+Esc to display the Desktop.

WIN-OS/2 Full Screen 149/2

The WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen object is used to run multiple Windows programs in a full-screen session. For more information about WIN-OS/2, see the online WIN-OS/2 Book located in the Information folder. To start a WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen session:

  1. open the object.
To close a WIN-OS/2 full-screen session:
  1. Point to the title-bar icon.
  2. Double-click.
To switch to the OS/2 Desktop:
  1. Point to the OS/2 Desktop object in the lower left corner of the screen.
  2. Double-click.

Starting Multiple Sessions 150/2

You can have multiple sessions of any object open. To open more than one session of an object:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Copy one of the objects (for example, DOS Window) by holding down the Ctrl
     key and mouse button 2 and dragging the object to the same or another
     folder.  Then release the mouse button and the Ctrl key.
  4. Open the object to start the session.
  5. Repeat the steps to create and open another session.
Or, if you need multiple copies of objects often, you can alter the settings of
the object so that it creates another session every time you open it.  Do the
following:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Point to the object.
  4. Click mouse button 2.
  5. Select Settings.
  6. Select the Window tab.
  7. Select the Create new window radio button.
  8. Close the notebook by double-clicking mouse button 1 on the title-bar
     icon.  Now, each time you select the object a new session starts.

Starting and Exiting BASICA and QBASIC 151/2

To start the BASICA or QBASIC programs: Note: BASICA will only run on IBM computers.

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open OS/2 Full Screen, OS/2 Window, DOS Full Screen, or DOS Window.
  4. Type BASICA or QBASIC at the command prompt; then press Enter.
To exit the BASICA program:
  1. Type SYSTEM.
  2. Press Enter.
To exit the QBASIC program:
  1. Select File.
  2. Select Exit.
  3. Select Enter.

Cleaning Up Your Desktop 152/1+

The Minimized Window Viewer is where open objects are stored when they are minimized. This keeps your desktop organized but still allows you to have multiple objects open and running. To open the Minimized Window Viewer:

  1. Point to Minimized Window Viewer.
  2. Double-click.

Displaying an Object in the Minimized Window Viewer 153/2

The objects in the Minimized Window Viewer are still open, but they are running in the background (cannot accept user input). To display an object found in the Minimized Window Viewer:

  1. Open the Minimized Window Viewer.
  2. Point to the object.
  3. Double-click.
or:
  1. Point to an empty area on the desktop.
  2. Click mouse buttons 1 and 2 at the same time.
  3. Point to the title of the object you want to display.
  4. Double-click.
Note:  There may be more titles in the Window List than objects in the
Minimized Window Viewer, because hidden windows are also displayed in the
Window List.

Minimizing an Object to the Desktop 154/2

Some frequently used objects might be easier to re-access if they are minimized to the desktop instead of the Minimized Window Viewer. To make an object minimize to the desktop:

  1. Point to the object you want to minimize to the desktop.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Settings.
  4. Select the Window tab.
  5. Select Minimize button.  (If the choice is present.)
  6. Select Minimize window to desktop.
  7. Point to the title-bar icon.
  8. Double-click.

Minimizing an Object to the Minimized Window Viewer 155/2

Most objects by default are set up to minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer. However, some objects are not. To make an object minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer:

  1. Point to the object you want to minimize to the Minimized Window Viewer.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Settings.
  4. Select the Window tab.
  5. Select Minimize button.  (If the choice is present.)
  6. Select Minimize window to viewer.
  7. Point to the title-bar icon.
  8. Double-click.

Using the Shredder 156/1+

The Shredder object provides a quick and easy way to delete objects. It is located on the LaunchPad . To delete an object:

  1. Point to the object.
  2. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  3. Drag the object to the Shredder.
  4. Release mouse button 2.
  5. Respond to confirmation messages (if applicable).

Customizing the Delete Confirmations 157/2

You can change the settings of your desktop to specify when confirmation messages appear, if any, when you delete an object. The following confirmation choices are available:

Confirm on folder delete  Displays a confirmation message whenever a folder
                          object is deleted using the Shredder object or a
                          pop-up menu.
Confirm on delete         Displays a confirmation message whenever an object is
                          deleted using the Shredder object or a pop-up menu.
    Important Disabling the confirmation messages increases your chances of
    accidentally deleting an object.
To change the settings:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open System.
  4. Select the Confirmations tab.
  5. Make sure a check mark appears in each choice that you want to enable.  To
     add or remove a check mark, select the choice.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.

Preparing Your System to Recover Deleted Objects 158/2

Chances are that at some point you will accidentally delete an object that you need. You can recover a deleted object if the DELDIR environment variable is enabled in your CONFIG.SYS file prior to deleting the object. To enable DELDIR:

  1. Edit your C:\CONFIG.SYS file and remove the REM statement from the
     beginning of the DELDIR statement.
       a. Open OS/2 System.
       b. Open Drives.
       c. Open Drive C.  (If the OS/2 operating system is installed on a
          different drive, open that drive instead.)
       d. After the Drive C object opens, a tree view of its contents is
          displayed.  Open the Drive C entry in the tree.
       e. Open the C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
       f. Select Edit.
       g. Select Find.
       h. Type DELDIR (all caps) in the Find field.
       i. Select Find.  (If the DELDIR statement is not found, see the online
          Command Reference for instructions on how to add it.)
       j. Select the beginning of the DELDIR line.
       k. Delete REM from the beginning of the line using the Del key.
       l. Point to the title-bar icon.
       m. Double-click.
       n. Select Save.
       o. Select Type.
       p. Select Set.
  2. Shut down your system; then restart it.  Changes made to the CONFIG.SYS
     object are not initiated until the system is restarted.
The DELDIR statement specifies the size of the directory used to hold deleted
objects.  When the directory is full, the oldest files in the directory are
removed in order to make room for the new objects.
If you delete an object, recover it as soon as possible afterwards, or it might
be too late.  For more information about DELDIR, see the online Command
Reference.
Note:  To be able to recover objects deleted in a DOS session, repeat the
preceding procedure on the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

Recovering Deleted Objects 159/2

You can recover a deleted or erased object using the UNDELETE command. Note: The DELDIR environment variable must be enabled prior to the deletion of the object. For more information about DELDIR, see Preparing Your System to Recover Deleted Objects.

To recover a deleted object:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open a DOS or OS/2 window.
  4. Type UNDELETE /L and press Enter to see a list of file names associated
     with the recently deleted objects.
  5. Write down the complete path and file name.  Include the drive letter,
     directory names, and the file name.  For example:
     C:\OS2\SAMPLE.TXT
  6. Type UNDELETE followed by the complete path and file name.  For example:
     UNDELETE C:\OS2\SAMPLE.TXT
  7. Press Enter.
The file associated with the deleted object has now been successfully
recovered.  For more information about UNDELETE, see the online Command
Reference.
To place the object back on the desktop:
  1. Open Drives.
  2. Open the drive that contains the recovered file (object).
  3. Find the object on the drive.
  4. Point to the object.
  5. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  6. Drag the object to the desktop.
  7. Release mouse button 2.

Using Templates 160/1+

A template is an object that you can use as a model to create additional objects. When you drag a template, you create another of the original object, as though you were peeling one of the objects off a stack. The new object has the same settings and contents as the templates in the stack.

Creating an Object from the Templates Folder 161/2+

You can create new objects by using the objects in the Templates folder. To open the Templates folder:

  1. Point to the Templates object on the Desktop.
  2. Double-click.

Creating a Folder Object 162/3

To use the Folder template to create a new folder:

  1. Open Templates.
  2. Point to the Folder template.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag a copy of the Folder template to the Desktop or to another folder.
  5. Release mouse button 2.  An empty folder is created.
  6. Rename the folder (for example, "My new folder").  For information about
     renaming, see the OS/2 Tutorial.
You can drag any objects you want (for example, program objects and data-file
objects) to the new folder.
    Tip The operating system will add new templates when you install programs
    that support them.  The MMPM/2 application supports templates for digital
    audio, MIDI, and digital video files.

Creating a Data-File Object 163/3

To use the Data File template to create a data-file object:

  1. Open Templates.
  2. Move the mouse pointer to the Data-File template.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the Data-File template to any folder (including the Desktop folder).
     A new data-file object is created.
  5. Open the data-file object to begin editing the file with the System
     Editor.
  6. When you are ready to save the file, select File; then select Save.
     Respond to the system prompts (for example, in the Save notification
     window, indicate if you want a file type such as plain text).
  7. Double-click mouse button 1 on the title-bar icon to close the window.
  8. Rename the object currently titled "Data File".  Refer to the OS/2
     Tutorial.
Note:  If you use Save as on the File menu instead of Save, another object is
created with the new name. "Data File" remains an empty file.
If you open a data-file object that is not associated with any other program,
it automatically opens in the OS/2 System Editor.  If you prefer, you can
associate the data-file object with one or more program objects (for more
information, see the Master Help Index).  For more information about using the
OS/2 System Editor, select Help on the menu.

Creating a Program Object 164/3

A program object starts a program or a session. If you install a new OS/2, DOS, or Windows program, you might need to run the Add Programs program in the System Setup folder to create a program object. This is the recommended method of creating a program object. You also can create a program object using the Templates folder.

  1. Open Templates.
  2. Move the mouse pointer to the Program template.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the Program template to a folder or to the Desktop.
  5. Customize the program object using the Settings notebook.  For example,
     select the session type, name the program object, or set up the
     associations.

Creating a Template of an Object 165/2

You can create a template of an object when you have an existing object (such as a form letter with a company letterhead) and you need another one. For example, you could make the form letter a template and then customize it for different customers. The new object will have the same settings (such as associations) and contents as the original. To create a template of an object:

  1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by pointing at the object and then
     clicking mouse button 2.
  2. Select Settings.
  3. Select the General tab.
  4. Select the Template check box.
  5. Close the Settings notebook.
The object is now displayed as a template.
Drag a copy of the object from the template whenever you need a new copy.
Customize the new object to your preference.  For example, you can change the
name of the object and add a new icon (see the OS/2 Tutorial or the Master Help
Index).
If you want to move a stack of templates, rather than create an object from the
top template, press the Shift key while dragging the stack.

Creating Another Object 166/2

All objects that have a Create another choice in their pop-up menu have a cascaded menu that lists their templates. When you create a template of your own, it is added to the cascaded menu. The result of Create another is identical to creating an object from a template.

If you select Create another from the pop-up menu of an object, a new object

with the same default settings and data is created. If you select the arrow to the right of Create another, a cascaded menu is displayed. This menu contains a listing of all the template objects you created. You can select one of the choices to create another object from that template. For example, suppose you created a template and named it "Company letterhead." This template is listed as a choice on the cascaded menu. Whenever you need to create a similar letter, select Company letterhead. The new data-file object contains whatever was in the original "Company letterhead" and the same settings (such as associations). To create another object using a pop-up menu:

  1. Display the pop-up menu for the object by pointing at the object and then
     clicking mouse button 2.
  2. Select Create another if you want to use one of your templates, or select
     the arrow to the right of Create another and select a template choice.
Note:  The new object appears in the active folder; for example, if the object
is on the Desktop, the duplicate appears on the Desktop.

Setting Up Printers 167/1+

If you installed a printer when you installed OS/2, a printer object is on your Desktop. The printer object is used to print jobs (data files) and check their progress. If you want to add a printer object, see Installing a Printer. Note: The explanations and instructions in this chapter apply to printers and plotters. Each printer object represents a certain arrangement of hardware, software, and configurations, which simplifies the printing process. Printer objects can represent local printers and network printers. Local printers are connected to individual computers or individual workstations on a network. Network printers are connected to local area network (LAN) servers and can be used by workstations connected to the network. For more detailed information about printer and printing, see the OS/2 Tutorial and the online Printing in OS/2 book located in the Information folder.

Installing a Printer 168/2+

Even if you did not select a printer during the OS/2 installation, you still can add a printer to the system. There are several different procedures to choose from. From the following list, choose the procedure that best describes your situation, then follow the instructions to add the printer.

  o  Create a printer object but use a printer driver that is currently
     installed on the system.  See Creating a Printer Object.
  o  Create a printer object and install a new printer driver to use with it.
     See Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver.
  o  Install a new printer driver but use an existing printer object. See
     Installing a Printer Driver Only.
  o  Change the printer driver being used with an existing printer object.  See
     Changing Printer Drivers.
  o  Install a Windows printer driver for use with WIN-OS/2. See Installing a
     Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session.
  o  Install an OEM (Other Equipment Manufacturer) printer driver for use with
     Windows. See Installing a Printer Driver from Another Manufacturer for a
     WIN-OS/2 Session.
Note:  When you create an OS/2 printer object, you might be prompted to create
an equivalent Windows printer object.  If you choose to create the Windows
printer object, you also are prompted to install a Windows printer driver.

Creating a Printer Object 169/3

This procedure involves adding a printer object and selecting a printer driver. Use this procedure if you have existing printer drivers installed on your system and you want this new printer object to use one of them. To create a printer object to use with an existing printer driver:

  1. Open Templates.
  2. Point to the Printer template.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the template to a folder or the Desktop.
  5. Release mouse button 2.  The Create a Printer window is displayed.
  6. Type a name for the printer in the Name field.
  7. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
  8. Select the printer driver that corresponds to your printer model.
  9. Select Create.
 10. Respond to the "Do you want to install an equivalent WIN-OS/2 printer
     configuration" question; then follow the instructions on the screen to
     complete the installation.
A new printer object is on your Desktop.  If you want to customize the settings
for this new printer object, see Setting Printer Properties.

Creating a Printer Object and Installing a Printer Driver 170/3

This procedure involves creating a printer object and installing a printer driver. Use this procedure if you want to create a printer object and install a new printer driver.

  1. Open Templates.
  2. Point to the Printer template.
  3. Press and hold mouse button 2.
  4. Drag the template to a folder or the Desktop.
  5. Release mouse button 2.
  6. Type a name for the printer in the Name field.
  7. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
  8. Select Install new printer driver.
  9. Use the instructions in the following list to install your printer driver:
       o  If your printer driver came with the OS/2 operating system, follow
          the instructions for Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2.
       o  If your printer driver did not come with the OS/2 operating system,
          follow the instructions for Other Printer Driver.
Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2
  1. Select one or more printer drivers in the list.
  2. Select Install.
  3. Ensure that the information in the Directory field is correct.
  4. Select OK.
  5. Select create to create the printer object.
Other Printer Driver
  1. Select Other OS/2 printer driver
  2. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
     appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.
  3. Select Refresh.  Wait until the window fills with printer drivers.
  4. Select one or more drivers.  If the driver you need is not listed, insert
     another diskette or change the information in the Directory field and
     select Refresh again.
  5. Select Install.
  6. Select Create to create the printer object.
A new printer object is on your Desktop.  If you want to customize the settings
for this new printer object, see Setting Printer Properties.
    Tip Many printers have multiple printer drivers available.  For example,
    Hewlett Packard has several drivers for their LaserJet IIID printer. To
    ensure that you get the correct driver with the printer model you select,
    scroll the Printer Driver field to the right until you can see the name of
    the printer driver.

Installing a Printer Driver Only 171/3

Sometimes you have an existing printer object, but you do not have the correct printer driver on your system. This might happen if you add a different printer to your system. To install a new driver for an existing printer object:

  1. Point to the printer object.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Settings.
  4. Select the Printer driver tab.
  5. Point to one of the printer driver objects.
  6. Click mouse button 2.
  7. Select Install.
  8. Use the instructions in the following list to install your printer driver:
       o  If your printer driver came with the OS/2 operating system, follow
          the instructions for Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2.
       o  If your printer driver did not come with the OS/2 operating system,
          follow the instructions for Other Printer Driver.
Printer Driver Shipped with OS/2
  1. Select one or more printer drivers in the list.
  2. Select Install.
  3. Ensure that the information in the Directory field is correct.
  4. Select OK.
Other Printer Driver
  1. Select Other OS/2 printer driver.
  2. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
     appropriate drive designation and path in the Directory field.
  3. Select Refresh.
  4. Select one or more drivers.  If the driver you need is not listed, insert
     another diskette or change the information in the Directory field and
     select Refresh again.
  5. Select Install.
A new printer driver is installed.  If you want to customize the settings for
this new printer driver, see Setting Printer Properties.
    Tip Many printers have multiple printer drivers available.  For example,
    Hewlett Packard has several drivers for their LaserJet IIID printer. To
    ensure that you get the correct driver with the printer model you select,
    scroll the Printer Driver field to the right until you can see the printer
    driver name.

Changing Printer Drivers 172/3

You might already have both the printer object and the printer driver installed on your system, but you need to connect them. This might happen if you like to use different printer drivers with a printer object. To change to a different printer driver:

  1. Point to the printer object.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Settings.
  4. Select the Printer driver tab.
  5. Select the printer driver.
  6. Point to the title-bar icon.
  7. Double-click.
The printer object is now set up to use a different printer driver. See Setting
Printer Properties for information about setting the properties to match the
capabilities of the new printer driver.

Installing a Printer Driver for a WIN-OS/2 Session 173/3

Windows programs print directly to the OS/2 spooler. Therefore, multiple print jobs can be spooled from one WIN-OS/2 session or multiple WIN-OS/2 sessions. To install a printer driver in Windows:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen.
  4. Open WIN-OS/2 Main.
  5. Open Control Panel.
  6. Open Printers.
  7. Select Add and then select a printer driver in the list.
  8. Select Install.
  9. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
     appropriate drive designation and path in the Install Driver pop-up
     window.
 10. Select OK.
 11. Select Connect.
 12. Select LPT1.OS2, LPT2.OS2, or LPT3.OS2.
     Note:  You can select a COMx port, but no spooling to the OS/2 Print
     object will occur.  However, you will still be able to use the Print
     Manager in Windows.
 13. Select OK.
 14. Select the printer that you want to assign as the default.
 15. Select the Set as Default Printer pushbutton.
 16. Select Close.

Installing a Printer Driver from Another Manufacturer for a WIN-OS/2 Session 174/3

OS/2 has a wide variety of printer drivers available for use with Windows. However, there might be times when you want to use a driver supplied by another printer manufacturer. To add a Windows printer driver supplied by another printer manufacturer:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open WIN-OS/2 Full Screen
  4. Open WIN-OS/2 Main
  5. Open Control Panel.
  6. Open Printers.
  7. Select Add.
  8. Select Unlisted Printer from the beginning of the list of printers.
  9. Select Install.
 10. Insert the diskette containing the printer drivers in drive A or type the
     appropriate drive designation and path in the Install Driver pop-up
     window.
 11. Select OK.
 12. Select Connect.
 13. Select LPT1.OS2, LPT2.OS2, or LPT3.OS2.
 14. Select OK.
 15. Select the printer that you want to assign as the default.
 16. Select the Set as Default Printer pushbutton.
 17. Select Close.
    Tip If you also want to create an OS/2 printer object for use with the same
    driver, follow the instructions for Creating a Printer Object and make the
    following selections:
      o  Select the same port you selected for your printer, using the Windows
         Control Panel.
      o  Select the OS/2 printer driver, IBMNULL, as the default driver.
         (IBMNULL is installed during system installation.)

Setting Printer Properties 175/2

A printer driver has settings called printer properties. Printer properties describe the way your printer is physically set up. Examples of printer properties are:

  o  Type of paper feed (tractor or bin)
  o  Number and location of paper trays
  o  Forms defined for your printer
  o  Forms loaded in the paper feed or trays of your printer
  o  Font cartridges loaded on the printer
  o  Installed soft fonts
  o  Additional features installed, such as extended symbol sets and patterns
  o  Resolution
  o  Orientation
  o  Compression
Examples of plotter properties are:
  o  Number of carousels
  o  Active carousel
  o  Color type of each pen in a carousel
The number and kind of properties available depend upon the type of printer or
plotter you have.
To set the printer properties:
  1. Point to the printer object.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Settings.
  4. Select the Printer driver tab.
  5. Point to a printer driver.
  6. Click mouse button 2.
  7. Select Settings.
  8. Change the properties to match your printer setup.
  9. Point to the title-bar icon.
 10. Double-click.
Your printer object is now set up to print a job.  For information about how to
print a job, see the online Printing in OS/2 book located in the Information
Folder.

Using Productivity Tools and Games 176/1+

The Productivity folder provides programs that assist you in editing text and icons, searching for files or text and displaying system utilization., Each productivity program has a set of help menus to assist you with using the program. The Games folder provides you with games for your entertainment.

The Productivity Folder 177/2+

To open a Productivity program:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Productivity.
  3. Open the program you want to use.

For information about using a program in the Productivity folder, press F1 after the program is opened.

Clipboard Viewer 178/3

Clipboard Viewer is a program that enables you to view the contents of the OS/2 clipboard. The system clipboard is used to share information between programs in the same session or in different sessions (for information about sessions, see Using Command Prompts). It temporarily holds data being passed from one program to another. You can copy or cut information to the clipboard from a program in one session and then paste the information from the clipboard to a program in a different session. For more information about the clipboard, refer to the online book Windows Programs in OS/2

Enhanced Editor 179/3

Enhanced Editor is an editor you can use to create and edit text files. It also enables you to work on multiple files at the same time. You can start the Enhanced Editor by opening its object or by typing EPM at the OS/2 command prompt and pressing Enter. The Enhanced Editor has a number of features and functions. These features and functions are thoroughly explained in the Quick Reference help file located under the Help menu bar choice of the Enhanced Editor.

Icon Editor    180/3

Icon Editor is a tool that enables you to create, edit, and convert image files.

These files include icons, bit maps, and pointers.  An icon is a graphical

representation of an object or a minimized program. A bit map is a special type of image made up of a series of dots. (The OS/2 logo is an example of a bit map.) A pointer is a small symbol on the screen that reflects the movement of the mouse.

OS/2 System Editor    181/3

The OS/2 System Editor is used to create and edit text files. You can use the System Editor to edit your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT system files. The System Editor runs in a window. You can start several sessions of the System Editor so that you can edit several files at once. You can start the System Editor two ways:

  o  By selecting its object
  o  Opening a data file associated with the System Editor.  (All data files
     area associated with the System Editor by default.)
  o  By typing E (and pressing Enter) at an OS/2 command line If you want to
     edit a particular file, you follow the E with a space and then type the
     path and file name of the file.
Picture Viewer    182/3

Picture Viewer displays and prints metafile (.MET) and picture interchange format (.PIF) files. You also can view spooler (.SPL) files; however, the file must contain a picture in a standard OS/2 format. Note: Picture Viewer does not support multiple-page metafiles.

Picture Viewer lets you zoom in or zoom out of a picture after it is displayed.
 Move the mouse pointer to the portion of the picture you want to zoom in and
then double-click mouse button 1.
Pulse    183/3

Pulse is a system monitor. Use Pulse to see a graphic representation of how different activities affect the system and how much processor power is still available for other programs. You can change the colors of the graphic, adjust the graph line, and freeze the screen image.

Seek and Scan Files    184/3

Seek and Scan Files is a program that quickly searches one or more disks for files or text. When a file match is found, it is displayed in a selection list.

Then you can open (or run) the selected file.
The Games Folder    185/2+

The Games folder contains Klondike Solitaire, OS/2 Chess and Mahjongg. To start a game:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Games.
  3. Open the game you want to play.
For information about playing a game in the Games folder, press F1 after the
game is opened.
Klondike Solitaire    186/3

Klondike Solitaire is a popular card game for one person. The object of this game is to find the aces and build on them in suit and in ascending order. You use the mouse to move the cards to their new location.

OS/2 Chess    187/3

With OS/2 Chess, you can play a game of chess against another person playing on the same computer or on a network workstation. You also can play against the computer. The object of the game is to checkmate your opponent's king.

Mahjongg    188/3

Mahjongg is a popular version of the ancient Chinese tile game. The object of this game is to remove all the tiles by matching all the pairs.

Using the Information    189/1+

The Information folder contains information to aid you in using OS/2. To open the Information folder:

  1. Point to Information
  2. Double-click.
The Information folder contains all the online documents described in this
chapter.
Using OS/2    190/2

The OS/2 Tutorial is an interactive and animated look at the OS/2 Workplace Shell interface. It explains how to use a mouse, work with objects and folders, use windows, and get help. If you are new to OS/2, you should spend the 40 minutes (approximate) it takes to go through the tutorial. You will find that it is time well spent. To start the OS/2 Tutorial:

  1. Open Information
  2. Open Tutorial
Command Reference    191/2+

Before there were friendly operating system interfaces like the Workplace Shell, computer users communicated with a computer using a predefined set of instructions called commands. Users would type a command at a prompt, and the computer would perform the requested task. Some people still like to communicate with the computer in this way. For that reason, OS/2 supplies both DOS and OS/2 command prompts and the OS/2 Command Reference. The Command Reference explains each OS/2 and DOS command, graphically shows the correct syntax of the command, and gives examples of when and how to use the command. In addition, it explains the commands that can be used to create a batch file (a series of commands that are processed sequentially). Batch files are useful for automating the entering of commands that are used over and over again. To open the OS/2 Command Reference:

  1. Open Information.
  2. Open Command Reference.
To open the OS/2 Command Reference and get information about a specific
command:
  1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type HELP followed by the name of the command.
     For example:
     HELP COPY
  2. Press Enter.  The Command Reference is opened to the COPY command page.
Using the Contents Window    192/3

The Contents window is the first window that appears when the Command Reference is opened. Notice that some of the topics in this window have a plus (+) sign beside them. The plus sign indicates that additional topics are available. To expand the Contents and view the additional topics:

  1. Select the + sign.
To collapse the topics in the Contents:
  1. Select the - sign.
To open a topic:
  1. Point to the title of the topic.
  2. Double-click.
Obtaining Additional Information    193/3

When a topic is opened, the information for the topic is displayed in a window. Highlighted words and phrases in the window indicate that additional information is hidden "beneath" the word or phrase. To view the additional information:

  1. Point to the highlighted word or phrase.
  2. Double-click.
To return to the previous window of information:
  1. Select Previous.
Searching for Information    194/3

There might be times when you are using the Command Reference when you have an idea of what you want, but you cannot remember where it is. The search function can help you find the information you need. To search for a word or phrase in all the topics in the Command Reference:

  1. Select Search.
  2. Type the word or words you want to find.  You can also use the ? and *
     wildcard characters in the search field.
  3. Make sure that All sections is selected; then select Search.
A Search Results window appears containing a list of topics that have the word
or phrase that you were trying to find.  To open a topic, point to a topic and
double-click.
Sometimes, you have a general idea where the information is.  You can limit the
search to those topics by marking the topics.
To mark a topic:
  1. Press and hold Ctrl.
  2. Select the topics that you want to search.
  3. Release Ctrl.
To unmark a topic:
  1. Press and hold Ctrl.
  2. Select the topic.
  3. Release Ctrl.
To search for a word or phrase in marked topics:
  1. Select the + signs in the Contents window.
  2. Mark the topics you want to search.
  3. Select Search.
  4. Type the word or words you want to find.
  5. Make sure that Marked sections is selected; then select Search.
When the Search Results window appears, open the topics and read them.
Using a Bookmark    195/3

Information that you refer to frequently can be flagged using a bookmark. Setting a bookmark duplicates the topic in a bookmark window. To set a bookmark:

  1. Open the topic that you want to mark with a bookmark.
  2. Select Services.
  3. Select Bookmark.
  4. Change the name used for the bookmark (optional).
  5. Make sure Place is selected; then select OK.
To view bookmarked information:
  1. Select Services.
  2. Select Bookmark.
  3. Select View.
  4. Select the topic you want to open.
  5. Select OK.
To remove a bookmark:
  1. Select Services.
  2. Select Bookmark.
  3. Select Remove.
  4. Select the topic you want to remove.
  5. Select OK.
Printing a Topic    196/3

Some people prefer to read information in a hardcopy format. You can print a topic, some topics, all topics, the table of contents, and the index of the Command Reference. To print a topic:

  1. Open the topic you want to print.
  2. Select Print.
  3. Make sure that This section is selected; then select Print.
To print more than one topic:
  1. Press and hold Ctrl.
  2. Select the topics that you want to print.
  3. Release Ctrl.
  4. Select Print.
  5. Make sure that Marked sections is selected; then select Print.
To print the table of contents, index, or all the topics:
  1. Select Print.
  2. Select the item you want to print.
  3. Select Print.
Note:  The Contents and Index choices only print the entries; they do not print
the text associated with the entries.  The All sections choice prints the
entire Command Reference.  Before electing to do this, be aware that the
document is large and will take a long time to print.

Glossary 197/2

The Glossary is an alphabetic listing of terms used in the Workplace Shell interface and the online help system. To open the Glossary:

  1. Open Information.
  2. Open Glossary.

There are three ways to find a term in the glossary. You can type the first letter of the word you are looking for, scroll through the list or use the search function.

To scroll through the list to find a term in the glossary:

  1. Select the letter that the word begins with. If the letter is not visible, select the tab arrow until the letter is visible; then select the letter.
  2. Select the up or down arrow in the scroll bar until the term is visible.
  3. Point to the term.
  4. Double-click.

To use the search function to find a term in the glossary:

  1. Select Search topics.
  2. Type the term that you want to find.
  3. Select Search.
  4. When the list of matching entries appears, point to the term; then double-click.

REXX Information 198/2+

REXX is a procedures language designed to make basic OS/2 programs easier to write and debug. Both beginning and experienced programmers will find REXX easy to use because it uses common English words, arithmetic and string functions, and OS/2 commands within a simple framework. To view the REXX Information:

  1. Open Information.
  2. Open REXX Information.

For information about using the Contents window, searching, printing and getting additional information, see Command Reference.

Displaying Help for OS/2 Messages 199/3

You can get information to help you understand, correct, and respond to OS/2 messages. The way you request help depends upon how and where the message is displayed. To get help for a message that appears in a window with a Help push button:

  1. Select the Help push button.

To get help for a message that appears on a full screen and is enclosed in a box:

  1. Use the up or down arrow key to highlight Display Help.
  2. Press Enter.

To get help for an error message that has a message number, preceded by the letters SYS:

  1. At the OS/2 command prompt, type HELP followed by a space and the message number. (It is not necessary to type the letters SYS or the leading zeros.)
  2. Press Enter.

For example, if you received this message:

SYS0002:  The system cannot find the file specified.

To request help for this message, type HELP 2 and then press Enter. The following help appears:

SYS0002:  The system cannot find the file specified.
EXPLANATION:  The file named in the command does not exist in the current directory or search path specified.  Or, the file name was entered incorrectly.
ACTION:  Retry the command using the correct file name.

Mastering the Master Help Index 200/1+

The Master Help Index is an online, alphabetic list of topics available to help you while using OS/2. This index contains information about:

  • Things to consider before performing a task
  • Steps to take to complete a task
  • OS/2 concepts
  • DOS error messages

To open the Master Help Index:

  1. Open Information.
  2. Open Master Help Index

Tabs turn to the page in the index of the selected alphabet letter. Tab arrows scroll the tabs but do not scroll the index entries. Scroll bar arrows (vertical scroll bar) scroll the index entries one line at a time. Scroll bar arrows (horizontal scroll bar) scroll the index entries to the left or right so you can read information that does not fit into the window. Index entries are the online help for the OS/2 operating system.

To open an index entry for viewing:

  1. Point to the entry.
  2. Double-click.

Accessing Additional Information 201/2

When an index entry is opened, the information for the topic is displayed in a window. Some entries have highlighted words and phrases in the window, which indicate that additional information is hidden "beneath" the word or phrase.

To view the additional information:

  1. Point to the highlighted word or phrase.
  2. Double-click.

To return to the previous window of information:

  1. Select Previous.

Searching for a Topic 202/2

You can search the Master Help Index for an entry using one or more words that describe the topic. For example, to search for information about how to duplicate an object, you might search using the word "duplicate", "duplicates", or even "duplicating". The result of a search (using duplicate, duplicates, or duplicating) is "copying an object".

To search for a topic:

  1. Open the Master Help Index.
  2. Select Search topics.
  3. In the Search string field, type the word or words that describe the topic.
  4. Select Search.
  5. When the list of topics (matched items) appears, open the entry you want to read.

Printing a Master Help Index Entry 203/2

To print a Master Help Index entry:

  1. Open the index entry you want to print.
  2. Select Print topic.

For more information about using the Master Help Index, review the OS/2 Tutorial.

Part 4 - Troubleshooting 204/1

Solving Installation Problems 205/1+

This chapter provides information to help you solve problems you might encounter while installing OS/2*. It includes information about what to do if you have problems, plus specific instructions for recovering from error messages or problems with installation diskettes, screens, or CD-ROMs. Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the information dealing with a particular problem.

What to Do If You Have Problems 206/2

Installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most cases, you will not experience problems. However, if you do encounter a problem during installation, do the following:

  1. Read through this chapter to see if the problem you are experiencing is documented.
  2. If you received an error message (or error number), locate the message in this chapter and perform the suggested actions to resolve the problem.
  3. If your problem is not addressed in this section, refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions on how to get additional assistance.

When you report your problem make sure you include the following information:

  • The brand and model of the equipment you are using
  • The error message or number, if any, that appeared on your screen
  • The number of the installation diskette you were using when the problem occurred
  • The number for your fax machine, or the number of a fax machine to which you have access

Editing the CONFIG.SYS File on Diskette 1 207/2

A CONFIG.SYS file contains lines of instructions that control how your computer starts up and how it works with the devices you have attached to it. Diskette 1, which comes with OS/2, contains a CONFIG.SYS file. The file is added to your root directory during installation. There might be instances in which you will be instructed in this chapter to edit your CONFIG.SYS file in order to add a statement, "remark out" a line, or modify an existing line in the file. If you need to alter the CONFIG.SYS file before you install OS/2, you will need to make the changes to the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1. Note: If the CONFIG.SYS file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able to restart your computer. Be careful when editing the file.

To edit the CONFIG.SYS file that is on Diskette 1, use an ASCII text editor. If you do not have a text editor installed on your computer, use the editor that comes on the OS/2 installation diskettes. Follow these steps:

  1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
  2. Turn on your computer.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  3. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and
     insert Diskette 1.
  4. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to display the command
     prompt.
  5. At the command prompt, type TEDIT CONFIG.SYS and press Enter. The file
     will appear on your screen, and you can make any changes or additions to
     it.  (Press F1 if you need help using the editor.)
  6. When you are done working on the file, press F2 to save it.
  7. Press F4 to quit the editor.

Installation Error Messages 208/2

If you receive one of the following error messages on your screen while installing OS/2, try to resolve the problem with the suggested action. Only some files were copied. You may be out of disk space.

Explanation:  The installation program stopped transferring files because there
              was not enough hard disk space available.
Action:       Move non-OS/2 operating system files out of the installation
              partition.  You can store these files in another partition or on
              a diskette.  If you intend to format the installation partition,
              remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
              files.
An error occurred when System Installation tried to copy a file.
Explanation 1: The installation diskette might contain errors.
Action:       Request a replacement diskette from your place of purchase.
Explanation 2: The installation program stopped transferring files because
              there was not enough hard disk space available.
Action:       Move non-OS/2 operating system files out of the installation
              partition.  You can store these files in another partition or on
              a diskette.  If you intend to format the installation partition,
              remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
              files.
Explanation 3: The hard disk might contain errors.
Action:       Follow the CHKDSK procedure outlined in Recovering from Errors on
              the Hard Disk.
An error occurred when System Installation tried to transfer system files to
your hard disk.  Your hard disk might be unusable.
Explanation:  The installation program stopped transferring files because an
              error occurred while the boot record was being written.
Action:       Format the installation partition and restart the installation.
              Remember to first use the BACKUP command to save any important
              files.
System Installation failed trying to load a module into memory.
Explanation:  The installation program could not load a system module because
              there is not enough memory.  OS/2 requires a minimum of 4MB of
              memory.
Action:       Add more system memory (RAM).
An error occurred when System Installation tried to allocate a segment of
memory.
Explanation:  The installation program could not allocate a segment of memory
              because there is not enough memory.  OS/2 requires a minimum of
              4MB of memory.
Action:       Add more system memory (RAM).
FDISK unsuccessful.
Explanation:  Your hard disk controller might not be supported.
Action:       Make a copy of Diskette 1.  Locate the Device Support Diskette
              supplied by the manufacturer of your hard disk controller. Copy
              the OS/2 device driver from that Device Support Diskette onto the
              copy of Diskette 1.  Then add the statement BASEDEV=xxx.SYS
              (where xxx is the name of the device driver) to the CONFIG.SYS
              file on the copy of Diskette 1, and restart the installation.
An error occurred when System Installation tried to locate the dynamic link
library.
Explanation:  The installation program could not load the dynamic link library
              because there is not enough random access memory (RAM). OS/2
              requires a minimum of 4MB of memory
Action:       Add more system memory (RAM).
A disk read error occurred.
Explanation:  The BIOS level of the Future Domain** adapter is not compatible.
Action:       Contact Future Domain for a BIOS upgrade if you own the
              following:
  o  Future Domain TMC-850/860/875/885 with BIOS revision level 7.0
  o  Future Domain TMC-1660/1670/1680 with BIOS revision level 2.0
OS/2 is unable to operate your hard disk or your diskette drive.
Explanation 1: This might indicate some incompatibility between OS/2 and the
              diskette drive controller or hard disk controller in your system.
Action:       Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the diskette or hard disk from which
              you are starting OS/2.  Remove all lines with
              BASEDEV=xxxxxxxx.ADD (where xxxxxxxx can be any characters), and
              make sure the following two lines appear in the CONFIG.SYS:
              BASEDEV=IBMxFLPY.ADD
              BASEDEV=IBMINT13.I13
              (where x is replaced by a 2 if you are using a Micro Channel
              system, and a 1 if you are using any other system.)
Explanation 2: A diskette drive or a hard disk drive controller might have an
              additional device (such as a tape backup) attached to it.
Action:       Disconnect additional devices, if possible.
Explanation 3: There might be an interrupt request (IRQ) level conflict between
              the diskette drive or hard disk controller and other devices
              installed on your system.
Action:       Change IRQ levels to eliminate conflicts.
Explanation 4: The hard disk partition on which you are installing OS/2 was
              compressed with a DOS data compression program.
Action:       Use the data compression program to decompress the partition.
              Then restart the installation procedure.
TRAPxxx
Explanation:  In general, traps are symptoms of software-related problems.
              After you have pursued these symptoms from a software failure
              perspective, you should consider the potential of a hardware
              cause relating to caches and memory, such as the following:
  o  If your computer has an 80486 microprocessor, your computer might require
     faster RAM chips (60ns or 70ns).
  o  There might be a problem with the external (level-2) CPU memory cache or
     main memory system on ISA or EISA systems.
Action:       Try the following:
  1. From the setup/diagnostics diskette or the BIOS Setup program built into
     the computer, try disabling all shadow RAM and external (level- 2) CPU
     memory caches.
  2. If problems persist during the installation of OS/2 after performing the
     above action, turn off the turbo switch (if one is available) on your
     system and retry the operation.  Disable caching during installation or
     turn the turbo switch off.
Some of the more common traps are listed below.  If you receive a trap error
that is not listed, you can view help for the trap after OS/2 is installed, by
typing HELP followed by the trap number at an OS/2 command prompt.  For
example:
HELP 0002
If the trap error contains a letter, as in a TRAP D error you must convert the
hexadecimal number (D) to decimal then add it to 1930.  For example, TRAP D
converted would be 1943 because D hexadecimal is 13 decimal (13 added to 1930
equals 1943).  So you would type HELP 1943 at an OS/2 command prompt.
A list of the hexadecimal to decimal conversions are listed below:
A = 10       D = 13
B = 11       E = 14
C = 12       F = 15
TRAP0002
Explanation:  A TRAP0002 error is a hardware error and is usually related
              directly to memory.  Mismatched memory modules can often cause
              these kinds of errors.  Your computer might have a variety of
              single inline memory modules (SIMMs) that were produced by
              different manufacturers or that operate at different speeds.
              (For example, a 1 x 9 module cannot be used with a 1 x 3 module.)
Action:       Try the following:
  o  Have your computer checked by a service representative.
  o  If your computer memory is okay and the problem persists, make sure that
     your system BIOS is of a recent date (1991 or later). Refer to Chapter 17,
     "Special Hardware Considerations," for more information about BIOS, or
     contact the manufacturer of your computer BIOS to receive the latest
     version.
SYS0005
Explanation:  When you perform a redirected remote installation of OS/2 using
              SYSINST2 for panel installation, the error message SYS0005
              appears while the computer attempts to copy UNPACK2.EXE.
Action:       This Access Denied Error is caused by damage to the extended
              attribute data on the NetWare** Server.  To correct this problem,
              delete the old disk images on the server and create new OS/2 disk
              images.
SYS1200 and EC=00BF
Explanation:  The DOS environment cannot be created.
Action:       If you see the error message SYS1200 while attempting to use the
              Dual Boot feature to change to DOS, and you also see error code
              EC=00BF, check your CONFIG.SYS file.  Make sure your virtual DOS
              device drivers have not been remarked out of or removed from your
              CONFIG.SYS file.  If necessary, look at the CONFIG.SYS file in
              the OS2\INSTALL directory (the CONFIG.SYS file as it was
              originally installed) to see how the DOS device drivers should be
              listed.
SYS1201
Explanation:  A device driver specified in the CONFIG.SYS file cannot be found,
              is the incorrect device driver (ex. DOS device driver), or is
              specified twice within the file.
Action:       Make sure the correct device driver for the device is installed,
              and then check the CONFIG.SYS file to make sure the information
              specified is correct.
SYS1475
Explanation:  The file OS2BOOT cannot be found.  This is a hidden system file
              and must reside in the root directory of the drive from which the
              operating system is started.
Action:       Remove the diskette from drive A and restart the system.  If the
              problem was not caused by a diskette in drive A, then the OS2BOOT
              file might be missing.  Try the following procedure:
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
  2. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  3. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette and
     insert Diskette 1.
  4. Press Enter.
  5. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to display the command
     prompt.
  6. Reinsert the Installation Diskette.
  7. Type sysinstx c: and press Enter.  (If your operating system resides on a
     drive other than C, use the appropriate drive letter instead.)
              If this procedure does not correct the problem, it might be
              necessary to reinstall the operating system.
SYS1719
Explanation:  The file IBM386FS\HPFS386.IFS does not contain a valid device
              driver or file system driver.
Action:       Edit your CONFIG.SYS file and delete the following line:
              IFS=x:\OS2\HPFS.IFS
SYS2025
Explanation:  A disk read error occurred.  This might be a disk error or a
              damaged system boot record.
Actions:      Try the following:
  o  If this error occurred while the system was loading, follow the procedure
     in Recovering from Errors on the Hard Disk.
  o  If this error occurred when the system was reading the installation
     diskettes, there might be an error on the diskette.  If you already have
     an operating system installed on your computer, use the XDFCOPY command to
     make a copy of the installation diskettes.  Retry the installation with
     the newly copied diskettes.
  o  If your computer has BIOS supplied by AMI** or Phoenix**, you might need
     to upgrade the BIOS.  Refer to Chapter 17, "Special Hardware
     Considerations."
  o  If your system has a local bus IDE controller card, disable the BIOS on
     the 32-bit local bus IDE controller card and use the generic INT13 driver
     instead of IBM1S506.ADD.
  o  Make sure that there is not a hardware problem with your hard disk
     controller or your diskette drive.
SYS2026
Explanation:  The file OS2LDR cannot be found.  This is a hidden system file
              and must reside in the root directory of the drive from which the
              operating system is started.
Action:       Try the following:
              Make sure a non-system diskette is not in the diskette drive.  If
              a diskette is in the drive, remove it and restart the system.
              If the OS2LDR file is still missing:
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette into the diskette drive and restart the
     system.
  2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
  3. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to access a command
     prompt.
  4. Copy the OS2LDR file from the Installation Diskette to the root directory
     on the OS/2 partition.
  5. Restart the system.
SYS2027
Explanation:  This message usually accompanies messages SYS1475 and SYS2025,
              and means that the system must be restarted.  See the explanation
              and actions for these messages for more specific information.
Action:       Insert a system diskette and restart the system.
SYS2028
Explanation:  The system cannot find the OS2KRNL file.  This is a hidden system
              file and must reside in the root directory of the drive from
              which the operating system is started.
Action:       Try the following:
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette into the diskette drive and restart the
     system.
  2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
  3. When the Welcome to OS/2! screen appears, press F3 to access a command
     prompt.
  4. Copy the OS2KRNLI file from the Installation Diskette to the root
     directory of the OS/2 partition.  Type: A:OS2KRNLI C:\OS2KRNL and press
     Enter. (Where A: is the diskette drive containing the Installation
     Diskette and C: is the drive on which you are installing OS/2.) Notice the
     change in name of the OS2KRNL file.
  5. Remove the diskette from the drive.
  6. Restart the system.
SYS2029
Explanation:  The file OS2KRNL is damaged or not readable.
Action:       Copy the OS2KRNLI file from the Installation Diskette to the root
              directory of the drive containing the operating system.  Follow
              the instructions for error message SYS2028.
SYS2030
Explanation:  The system does not have enough memory to start the operating
              system.  OS/2 requires a minimum of 4MB of memory.
Action:       Add more memory to the system.
SYS3146
Explanation:  The system cannot find the OS2LDR.MSG file.  This is a hidden
              system file and must reside in the root directory of the drive
              from which the operating system is started.
Action:       Copy the OS2LDR.MSG file from the Installation Diskette to the
              root directory of the drive containing the operating system.
SYS3147
Explanation:  The OS2LDR.MSG file is not readable.  The file might be damaged.
Action:       Copy the OS2LDR.MSG file from the Installation Diskette to the
              root directory of the drive containing the operating system.
SYS3161
Explanation:  The system detected an 8086, 8088, or 80286 processor.  These
              processors are not supported by OS/2.
Action:       Upgrade your system so that your processor is compatible with the
              80386 processor.

Installation Diskette Problems 209/2

Following are solutions to problems that might occur while you are using the installation diskettes to install OS/2.

Diskette 1
If the installation procedure stops while Diskette 1 is in the diskette drive, there might be a problem with the features of the hard disk controller. If the controller has on-board disk caching, disable the caching. If the controller can do asynchronous memory refreshes, turn off that feature. Make sure that other IRQ settings do not conflict with the hard disk controller IRQ setting. If multiple hard disk controllers or hardcards are installed in the system, it might be necessary to remove one of them.
The following apply to machine-specific problems:
  • If you are installing on a system with an Allways** IN2000 SCSI adapter, and an IPE or FDISK error is displayed during the installation of Diskette 1. Upgrade your system to the current BIOS level of VCN:1-02. The Allways IN2000 SCSI adapter might require an EPROM upgrade to operate with OS/2. You might find that you have some problems when trying to install over DOS partitions. To correct these problems, you need to install the EPROM and reformat the hard drive.
  • If you are installing OS/2 on a Mylex** system, a TRAP0008 error occurs during the installation of Diskette 1. For more information on this error, contact Mylex.
  • If you are installing on a Compaq** 386/331 Deskpro system, a TRAP000D error occurs during the installation of Diskette 1. To correct this problem, do the following:
1. Make a copy of Diskette 1.  You will modify the copy.
2. Use a text editor to edit the CONFIG.SYS file that exists on the copy of Diskette 1.
3. Delete the following statement from the CONFIG.SYS file:
     BASEDEV=IBM2SCSI.ADD
4. Use the copy of the diskette during the installation process instead of the original.
Diskette 3
If the installation program continues to prompt you to insert Diskette 3, you have a 1.44 MB diskette drive that can work in either IBM* PC/XT* mode or IBM PCAT mode. Contact your service representative to determine if there are hardware-specific considerations.
Any Diskette
If several diskettes are successfully installed, then the system refuses a diskette and makes a beeping sound, your system might be infected with the Joshi virus. (This symptom usually appears after the first phase of the installation is complete and the system is restarted.) The Joshi virus is a DOS virus that interferes with OS/2 and causes random lockups. The Joshi virus:
  • Operates by trapping disk reads and writes. If the virus is active in memory, programs that try to locate the virus on diskette will have problems detecting it.
  • Is carried on the boot sector of an infected data diskette or system diskette. This virus originated in DOS but can survive in OS/2. When you start an infected system, the virus resides in memory and survives a Ctrl+Alt+Del startup. If you do not type Happy Birthday Joshi, the system will stop.
  • Is copied to the boot sector of every diskette. The virus will be transferred to any computer on which the user performed any diskette operation that included reading from, or writing to, the infected diskette.
  • Spreads from infected diskettes to DOS and OS/2 systems when the systems are started from diskettes.
  • Interferes with the startup from the hard disk of OS/2-based systems. The warning that OS/2 will give is that the IBM1FLPY.ADD file is bad or missing.

Many antivirus packages are effective at detecting this virus. In DOS, the Norton Antivirus Version 2.1 can both detect and clear the virus. In OS/2, Central Point Anti-Virus** can detect the virus. McAfee** Clean and Scan and IBM Anti-Virus/2* (AV/2) can both detect and clear the virus.

Installation Screen Problems 210/2

Following are solutions for problems you might have with your screen during the installation of OS/2.

White Screen during Installation

If the display screen is white during the installation of OS/2 and there is no system activity, set the video adapter to operate on an 8-bit mode and move the adapter to an 8-bit slot. Do the following:

  1. Turn off the computer and disable the autosensing capability of the video
     adapter.
  2. Modify the settings.  Refer to the documentation that came with your video
     adapter.
  3. Place the adapter in an 8-bit slot.  Then install OS/2.
  4. Return the adapter to the 16-bit slot and set back to the 16-bit mode.

White Screen with Disk Light On Constantly

If you are installing OS/2 on a fast 486 ISA-bus computer, you might encounter a white screen and the disk light constantly on. To correct this problem, try to reduce the speed of the computer by turning off the turbo mode of the computer. Refer to the documentation that came with your computer to find out how to change the mode.

Black Lines on an OS/2 Logo Screen

During the installation on a Gateway** 2000 with an 80486/66MHz processor, a local bus, and an ATI** Graphics Ultra Pro, the system will get to the screen with the colorful OS/2 logo, and then the installation will stop. The display screen shows horizontal bands of video separated by black bands that scroll horizontally across the screen. To correct this problem, do the following:

1. Start DOS.
2. At the DOS prompt, type CD \MACH32 and press Enter.
3. Type install and press Enter.
4. At the Main Selection screen, select Set Power Up Configuration.
5. Select Monitor Type and press Enter.
6. Select 1572 Monitor with 72Hz Refresh Rate and press Enter.
7. Select IBM Default (or 60Hz) as the new display.

Note: After OS/2 is successfully installed, repeat the steps to reselect the 1572 Monitor type.

Installation CD-ROM Problems 211/2

Cannot Access CD-ROM During Installation

If the device driver for your CD-ROM is not included in the OS/2 package, but is available from the CD-ROM manufacturer, you can modify Diskette 1 to add the device driver. Refer to "Chapter 17, Special Hardware Considerations" for instructions.

If you cannot access your CD-ROM drive during installation from a CD, but you can access the drive using DOS, you can install OS/2 using disk images. Disk Images are copies of the installation program that you put on diskette. You create disk images by using the XDFCOPY utility program to copy images from the CD to diskettes. You then use these diskettes to install OS/2.

Note: Installation diskettes are in a special format called XDF. The only command you should use with an XDF disketee is XDFCOPY.

Be sure to use formatted diskettes for this procedure. To find out exactly how many diskettes you will need:

  1. Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive
  2. Type: DIR X:\DISKIMGS\OS2\35 /W (where: X is the drive letter of your
     CD-ROM drive and 35 is the diskette size.)
  3. Press Enter.  A list of files will appear on your display.
  4. Count the files that end with the extension .DSK.  Each .DSK file will
     require a separate diskette.
Use the following command to create each disk image:
X:\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY
X:\DISKIMGS\OS2\size\diskname.dsk Y:
where:
X:                       is the drive letter of the CD-ROM drive.
\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY        is the location and name of the program used to create
                         the diskettes
DISKIMGS\OS2\size        is the location of the files containing the disk
                         images. Substitute 35 for the size parameter.  Use 35
                         for 3.5-inch 1.44MB and 2.88MB diskettes.
diskname.dsk             is the disk image file name (for example, DISK0.DSK).
Y:                       is the drive letter of your diskette drive.
For example, to create the Installation Diskette (DISK0.DSK) on a 3.5-inch
diskette, type the following and press Enter.
E:\DISKIMGS\XDFCOPY E:\DISKIMGS\OS2\35\DISK0.DSK A:
Where: E: is the CD-ROM drive and A: is the diskette drive.

Miscellaneous Installation Problems 212/2

Following are solutions to miscellaneous problems that might occur while you are installing OS/2.

Missing Device Driver Needed for Installation

If the device driver needed to install OS/2 on your computer is missing from the installation diskettes, obtain the device driver from either the device manufacturer or a bulletin board, then do the following:

  1. Make a backup copy of Diskette 1.
  2. Copy the needed device driver file (.ADD) to the backup copy of Diskette
     1.
  3. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the backup copy of Diskette 1 and change the
     BASEDEV= statement to include the file name and extension of the new
     device driver.  Example:  BASEDEV=IBM1FLPY.ADD
  4. Save the file, and use the updated copy of Diskette 1 to install OS/2.
Computer Beeps Constantly
If your computer beeps constantly while you are changing diskettes during
installation, you might have a defective diskette drive controller or cable.
Check the controller and cable for damage, and also check all their
connections.
Promise IDE Cached Controller
To install OS/2 on a system with a Promise IDE Cached Controller, you must edit
the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1 and change the following line:
BASEDEV=IBM1S506
to
BASEDEV=IBM1S506 /!SMS
ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Adapter
ATI makes various display adapters that are comparable with the IBM 8514/A
display adapter.  The ATI Graphics Ultra, 8514 Ultra, and Graphics Vantage can
all be treated as IBM 8514/A adapters for the OS/2 installation process.
However, if you have an ATI Graphics Ultra Pro, you must follow these steps
before you install OS/2.  The INSTALL utility program used in the following
steps will set your display to run as a VGA display so that OS/2 can be
installed.  After OS/2 is installed, you can run the INSTALL utility program
again to select the correct display attached to the system.
Note:  Following these steps incorrectly might cause your system to hang with a
black screen or distort your display with static.  Refer to the ATI
documentation if you encounter problems configuring the Ultra Pro memory.
To prepare your ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter for use with OS/2:
  1. Start your system using DOS, preferably from a diskette.  You will need to
     start DOS again after OS/2 is installed because the ATI INSTALL utility
     program runs only in DOS.
  2. Type INSTALL at the DOS command prompt.
  3. If your adapter has 1MB of video memory, select SHARED.  If your adapter
     has 2MB of video memory, ensure that the aperture is properly configured.
  4. Select Monitor Setup.
  5. Select Custom.
  6. Set the refresh rate for 640 x 480 to IBM DEFAULT (or 60Hz).
  7. Set the refresh of all other resolutions as appropriate for your display.
  8. Save the configuration.
  9. Install OS/2.  Make sure that during the installation of OS/2, you select
     8514 as the primary display type.
IBM PS/2* Model 30-286 Upgrades
OS/2 is not supported on IBM PS/2 Model 30-286 upgraded to a 386
microprocessor.
Aox** Systems
If your computer has an Aox add-in microprocessor adapter and you encounter
problems either installing or starting up your OS/2 system, call the Aox
Corporation and ask for the latest "flash-prom" code upgrade.
IOMEGA** PC Powered Pro 90
If you are using an IOMEGA PC Powered Pro 90, call the IOMEGA service number
and request OAD Driver Version 2.3.
IBM PS/2 Model 90 and 95 Computers
  o  If you are experiencing problems with your Model 90 or 95, ensure your
     system is at the latest engineering change (EC) level. Your IBM service
     representative can assist you.
  o  You must ensure that you have matched pairs of single in-line memory
     modules.  This means that each pair of single in-line memory modules, as
     described in your technical reference manual, must be matched in memory
     size and speed.  Mixing these modules can cause some computers to report
     memory errors.
All ISA, EISA, and PCI Systems
If you are installing OS/2 on a ISA, EISA, or PCI system, some CMOS settings
might need to be adjusted:
  o  Turn off ROM shadowing (system and video) if it is not essential to
     starting your system.
     Usually only extremely fast systems require ROM shadowing during a
     startup.  Do not turn ROM shadowing on again after installing OS/2.
  o  If you get a TRAP0002 error, add wait states (both read and write, if the
     option is given).  Add two wait states and see if the TRAP0002 error goes
     away.
     Note:  Take as few of the actions here as are necessary to prevent the
     TRAP0002 error, because you must retain whatever setting makes the system
     function.  If you added wait states, do not remove them later without
     adding faster (matched) DRAM to your system.
  o  If you experience other traps or complete system hangs while installing,
     turn off your external processor cache (internal cache is not a problem).
     If this corrects the problem, have the system board repaired or replaced
     before you turn on the cache again.

Solving Problems After Installation 213/1+

This chapter provides information to help you solve problems you might encounter after OS/2 has been installed. It includes information about what to do if you have problems, plus specific instructions for startup, memory, display, mouse, CD-ROM, hard disk, and Desktop problems. In addition, procedures are given for recovering the Desktop, CONFIG.SYS file, user INI file, hard disk, and memory state data. Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the information dealing with a particular problem.

What to Do If You Have Problems 214/2

OS/2 is a stable operating system and, in most cases, you will not experience problems. However, if you do encounter a problem while using OS/2, do the following:

  1. Read through this chapter to see if the problem you are experiencing is documented.
  2. If your problem is not addressed in this section, refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions on how to get additional assistance.

Before you call for assistance, make sure you call from a telephone that is near your computer and gather the following before you speak with the OS/2 specialist:

  • Your registration number (located in the Service and Support brochure in the US only)
  • The brand and model of the equipment you are using
  • The error message or number, if any, that appeared on your screen
  • Paper and pencil for taking notes
  • The number for your fax machine, or the number of a fax machine to which you have access

Editing the CONFIG.SYS File in Your Root Directory 215/2

A CONFIG.SYS file contains lines of instructions that control how your computer starts up and how it works with the devices you have attached to it. During installation, the CONFIG.SYS file is copied from Diskette 1 and added to your root directory. There might be instances in which you will be instructed in this chapter to edit your CONFIG.SYS file in order to add a statement, "remark out" a line, or modify an existing line in the file. If you need to alter the CONFIG.SYS file after you install OS/2, you will need to make the changes to the CONFIG.SYS file located in the root directory on the hard disk (usually drive C). Note: If the CONFIG.SYS file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able to restart your computer. Be careful when editing the file.

To edit the CONFIG.SYS file that is in your root directory (after installing OS/2), follow these steps:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Type COPY CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.OLD and press Enter.
  4. Type E C:\CONFIG.SYS and press Enter.
     where: E is the command used to start the System Editor that comes with
     OS/2
                C: is the letter of the drive where OS/2 was installed
                \ is the symbol for root directory
     The CONFIG.SYS file will appear on your screen, and you can make changes
     to it.
  5. When you are done working on the file, select File, then select Save.
  6. Select Type... in the Save notification window.
  7. Select Plain Text, then select Set.
  8. Press Alt+F4 to exit from the System Editor.
  9. Shut down your computer.  (You must restart your computer anytime you make
     changes to the CONFIG.SYS file in order for the changes to take effect.)

For more information about the statements that can appear in the CONFIG.SYS file, refer to the Command Reference that is located in the Information folder on the OS/2 Desktop.

Startup Problems 216/2

Following are solutions to problems that might occur when you try to start your system after installing OS/2.

Internal Processing Error Message Appears

The system stops and the screen displays INTERNAL PROCESSING ERROR at the top of a message. Record the information exactly as it displayed on the screen, and write a description of what you were doing when the trap occurred. Then, refer to the Service and Support information in your OS/2 package for instructions about calling for additional assistance. Boot Manager Menu Does Not Appear: If you installed the Boot Manager partition but the Boot Manager startup menu does not appear as expected when you start the system, you will need to make the Boot Manager partition startable. Do the following:

  1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
     screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.

System Will Not Start DOS from the Boot Manager Menu

On a system with a VESA** SUPER I/O controller and two disk drives, the system might not start from the Boot Manager menu. Instead, it will display a

non-system disk or disk error message.  For more information on this message,
check the VESA controller documentation or contact the manufacturer.
Dual Boot Does Not Work
If the BOOT command is unsuccessful when you try to switch from DOS to OS/2,
you might have one or more active terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) or DOS
cache programs.  If so, end the programs before you use the BOOT command.  For
TSR programs that are loaded from AUTOEXEC.BAT, you must deactivate the
programs before using the BOOT command.
Error When Using Dual Boot on a PS/1 System
On PS/1 systems preinstalled with DOS 5.0, using Dual Boot from OS/2 to DOS
might result in an error.  To correct this problem, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to
restart the system.

Memory Problems 217/2

Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with memory after installing OS/2. IBM PS/2 Model 90 or 95 Memory Parity Errors If your Model 90 or 95 is a 33 MHz system and you are having difficulty identifying intermittent memory parity errors such as TRAP0002, which force you to restart your system, then ECA053 might apply. If your microprocessor card has part number 84F9356, contact your IBM representative to assist you with a replacement. IBM PS/2 Model 90 Memory Errors If your Model 90 is experiencing intermittent memory errors, ECA084 might apply if the part number of your memory riser card is N33F4905 or 84F9356. Your IBM representative can assist you with a replacement.

Display Problems 218/2

Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with your display after installing OS/2. White Screen after Installation If the display screen is white after installation and there is no system activity, set the video adapter to operate on an 8-bit bus and move the adapter to an 8-bit slot. If possible, disable the autosensing capability of the video adapter. For information on modifying these settings, refer to the documentation that came with your video adapter. Blank Screen after Installation If the Desktop appears to be blank when you restart the system after the complete installation of OS/2, and you are using a ProComm** Micro Channel* SCSI adapter, do not attempt to run CHKDSK on the drive connected to the adapter. Contact ProComm to receive the device driver needed for the SCSI card. System Stops at Logo Screen If you have a Future Domain 16xx SCSI controller, you might have installed OS/2 successfully but then found a problem the next time you started OS/2. If the system stopped running with the logo screen displayed, there might be a conflict with the interrupt settings of your hardware devices. Check all interrupt request (IRQ) settings on all your hardware devices and make sure that each one is using a unique IRQ. Future Domain controllers are shipped from the factory preset to use IRQ5. However, IRQ5 is the interrupt that is normally assigned to LPT2. Also, it is common for IRQ5 to be used by sound or communications adapters. You might not see a problem immediately because of interrupt conflicts, but eventually a problem can occur. System Will Not Restart on a High-Resolution Display If you installed support for a high-resolution display adapter and your system will not restart, follow the procedure below. This procedure will set the adapter support to a lower resolution (VGA) but will enable your system to start.

  1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
     screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
  4. Use Selective Install to install support for another high-resolution
     display adapter.
Graphics Mode and Refresh Rates Incorrect for Hardware
Most video adapters are sensitive to the characteristics and capabilities of
the display attached to them.  The video BIOS on these adapters detects and
sets the hardware to support a desired graphics mode.
Some adapters have configuration dip switches to select desired vertical
refresh rates for high-resolution modes (800 x 600 and 1024 x 768).  Others are
shipped with DOS video-configuration utility programs that allow selection of
refresh rates. Usual refresh rates range from 56Hz to 72Hz non-interlaced or
88Hz interlaced.  The display has to be capable of synchronizing to this
frequency for proper mode set.
When the desired refresh rate has been set using either the dip switches or the
video-configuration utility program run the \OS2\SVGA.EXE utility program to
store the hardware setup in an \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI file.  At a DOS full-screen
session, type: C:\OS2\SVGA ON; then press Enter.
The Installation Program Installed VGA Support instead of SVGA
During the installation of OS/2, the installation program might have installed
only VGA support for your display.  To install the Super VGA (SVGA) drivers,
you can use Selective Install in the System Setup folder.  (System Setup is in
the OS/2 System folder).
Video Corruption or Stacked or Missing Icons
  1. Display the Desktop pop-up menu (click mouse button 2 on the OS/2 desktop
     background).
  2. Select Refresh to redraw the Desktop.
  3. If the screen goes blank, press Alt+Esc (to switch between the programs)
     to force repainting of the screen.
Synchronization Lost Under OS/2 But Not DOS
The resolution or refresh rate loses synchronization under OS/2 but not DOS.
To correct this problem, generate the \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI file under a specific
version of DOS using the following instructions:
  1. Start DOS.
  2. Type \OS2\SVGA ON DOS
  3. Press Enter.
  4. Type RENAME \OS2\SVGADATA.DOS \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI
  5. Press Enter.
  6. Restart OS/2.
If this does not fix the problem, try selecting a different vertical refresh
rate (refer to your adapter manual); then generate the PMI file again.
If your display remains out of synchronization or is stable and synchronized
after restarting the system but loses synchronization after a session switch,
this might be due to your video adapter's hardware implementation.
Note:  Some video adapter hardware cannot be fully saved and restored in all
graphics modes for all refresh rates.
Using After Dark** for Windows** with S3** Adapter
If you have an S3 adapter and are using After Dark for Windows, images that
move from left to right will not perform properly.
Switch to any resolution other than 640 x 480 x 16M.
Using Ventura Publisher** for Windows with an S3 Adapter
If you have an S3 display adapter and are using Ventura Publisher for Windows,
you might experience a General Protection fault when starting the program.
Switch to a 256-color resolution to avoid this problem.
Using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 with S3 Adapter
If you have an S3 display adapter and are using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 your
system might trap.
Switch to any resolution other than one using 16M colors.
Using Lotus** 1-2-3** for OS/2 or Lotus Freelance for OS/2
If you have an XGA or SVGA display adapter and are using Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2
or Lotus Freelance** for OS/2, your system might trap.
Switch to a resolution that uses 256 colors or less.
Using WordPerfect** 5.1 or 5.2 for Windows with S3 Adapter
If you have an S3 display adapter and are using WordPerfect 5.1 or 5.2 for
Windows you might experience a General Protection fault when the Print Preview
option is selected.
Use any resolution other than the 800 x 600 x 64K or 600 x 480 x 16 million
color modes.
Using Software Motion Video Feature with S3 Adapter
If you have an S3 display adapter and are using the software motion video
feature you might experience poor performance of video playback in 64K-color
modes.
Normally, the software motion video feature will take advantage of a 1MB
aperture on video adapters and systems where it is available. For those systems
with nonstandard locations, the actual physical address of the aperture must be
provided in the following CONFIG.SYS statement:
SET VIDEO_APERTURE=xxxh
where "xxx" is a hexadecimal value in units of 1MB, representing the actual
physical address to map to the aperture.  For example, the IBM PS/ValuePoint*
systems must have the statement:
SET VIDEO_APERTURE=400h
to use a physical address at 1GB.
Blank Screen on IBM ValuePoint system
If you have one of the following IBM ValuePoint systems, you might encounter a
blank screen while switching from one window to another.
PS/ValuePoint Display Models:   6314    6317    6319
PS/ValuePoint System Models:    6382    6384    6387
To correct or avoid this problem, make sure that the flash EEPROM level of your
system is 62 or later.
To check the EEPROM level:
  1. Begin the Configuration Utility program by turning the system off and then
     on again.
  2. During the memory count, press F1.  (The memory count appears in the upper
     left corner of the screen as numbers followed by KB.)
  3. When the Configuration Utility screen appears, look for the Flash EEPROM
     Revision Level.
  4. The fifth and sixth characters in the Flash EEPROM Revision Level
     represent the actual revision level.
  5. If the revision level is less than 62, you must install the ValuePoint
     Flash BIOS update.
To get the required ValuePoint Flash BIOS update do the following: Access the
IBM PC Company Bulletin Board System, then download the VP2FL62A.DSK file,
which is the Flash BIOS Update Level 62.
If you do not have access to a modem, you can call the IBM Help Center and
request this update on diskette.
Video Corruption with Video 7** Adapter
If you experience minor video corruption when switching from an OS/2
full-screen session to the Desktop using Alt+Esc, exit the OS/2 session and
restart it.
Video Corruption Using 8514/A Adapter with WIN-OS/2
If you are running a WIN-OS/2 full-screen session with an 8514/A adapter in a
high-resolution mode, do not switch to a different session while the program is
updating the screen or displaying an hourglass.  The actual problem you
experience (for example, video corruption, system hang) depends upon what the
display driver is doing at the time of the switch.
Color Icons and Bit Maps Improperly Drawn
Windows programs that use color icons or color bit-map backgrounds must run in
the foreground to be properly drawn.  Do not switch from a Windows program
while it is being started or before it completes drawing color icons and color
bit-map backgrounds.
Discolored Bit Map Using 8514/A Adapter
If you are using an 8514/A display adapter, 256-color bit maps might become
discolored. after you start a WIN-OS/2 window session.
This discoloration is due to the sharing of the 256-color palette and should
not affect the running of the programs.
Corrupted Graphics in DOS Programs
Some DOS programs with graphics use a non-standard VGA mode that the adapter
can support, but the operating system cannot.  The graphics in these programs
might be corrupted when displayed in a window.  To avoid this problem run these
programs in DOS full-screen sessions.
Corrupted Colors in DOS Programs
Some DOS programs experience color corruption when running in a window on the
Desktop in VGA mode.  This is a limitation of the VGA mode because the color
palette of the DOS session has to be translated to the Presentation Manager*
and the Desktop in VGA mode does not offer enough colors to do an optimal
translation.
The best solution is to use an OS/2 display driver that supports the 256-color
mode or run the program in a DOS full-screen session.
Corrupted DOS Full-Screen Session on IBM ThinkPad* 750C Series
If you are using a ThinkPad 750C Series, after installing OS/2, you might find
that your DOS full-screen session is corrupted.  To fix this problem you must
reinstall the video driver from the ThinkPad video features diskette.
  1. Restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.  Press Alt+F1 when the small
     white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your screen.
  2. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V to return to VGA mode.
  3. Restart your system, and then reinstall the ThinkPad 750c video drivers
     from the ThinkPad video features diskette.
WIN-OS/2 Fails to Start on IBM ThinkPad
If a WIN-OS2 window fails to come up on an IBM Thinkpad, make sure that your
CONFIG.SYS file contains the following statement:
DOS=LOW,NOUMB
Also, make sure that the WIN-OS/2 settings have DOS set to LOW and UMB set to
OFF.
Notebook Computers Using DOS Window
Some notebook computers get a trap D error or other problems when a DOS window
is opened.  This error is caused by improper video register shadowing. To
correct the problem:
  1. Edit your C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
  2. Change
     DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VVGA.SYS
     to
     DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VSVGA.SYS
  3. Save the C:\CONFIG.SYS file.
  4. Shut down and restart the computer.
Text Strings Clipped on Display
OS/2 uses a system proportional font that is designed to meet the International
Organization for Standards (ISO) 9241 standard and the German DIN 66234
standard when using certain ISO compliant hardware. If you do not want to use
ISO compliant fonts, you can modify the OS2.INI file to install fonts that are
not ISO compliant.  Font changes made in the OS2.INI file are global across all
programs.  If you have REXX installed, you can type the following information
into a CMD file and use it to change the font.
 call RxFuncAdd "SysIni", "RexxUtil", "SysIni"
 AppName = "PM_SystemFonts"
 KeyName = "DefaultFont"
 FontName = "10.System Proportional Non-ISO"
 call SysIni "USER", AppName, KeyName, FontName||"0"x
 exit
After the file has been run, shut down and restart the system.
Poor Performance of Windows Programs Using 8514/A Adapter
If your system has an 8514/A adapter, you can improve the performance of your
Windows programs by changing their settings.  Open the Settings notebook for
each Windows program and change the following WIN-OS/2 settings:
     VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP to OFF
     VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION to ON
Corrupted Desktop with the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Adapter
If your system has the 1MB version of the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter with
the memory set to SHARED, some DOS programs running in the background might
corrupt the Desktop.
To correct this problem, you must upgrade to the 2MB version of the ATI
Graphics Ultra Pro and set the VGA memory to 256K or greater.
Note:  If you are using the 1MB version of the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro adapter
with the OS/2 8514/A display driver, the VGA memory must be set to SHARED.
System Hang Using PM Debugger
To correct this problem, use an XGA* or 8514/A adapter with the debugger. An
access violation will occur when you exit the debugger, but you will not have
to restart your system and you will not have system problems as a result of
using the debugger.
Video Corruption on XGA Display Using Windows Screen Savers
A Windows screen saver program that starts while in a background session might
display a corrupted image being displayed when you switch back to the Windows
session.  The image can be refreshed by moving the mouse or pressing any key.
You can eliminate this problem by changing your WIN-OS/2 settings for the
screen saver program using the Settings Notebook.  Change the settings to:
     VIDEO_8514A_XGA_IOTRAP to ON
     VIDEO_SWITCH_NOTIFICATION to OFF
Using Dual Displays (XGA and VGA)
If you are using a dual display system with XGA as the primary display and VGA
as the secondary display, you might see some minor corruption when the XGA
display is set to a resolution with 65536 colors.
This corruption will be on the display that does not have focus and will not
interfere with the operation of the system.
Using Dual Displays with Windows programs in a Window Session
On dual display configurations with XGA-2 as the primary display and VGA as the
secondary display, the DOS full-screen session might be corrupted if a Windows
program is started in a window session.
To recover from this situation, shut down and restart the system.
Using XGA-2 Adapter with Dual Boot
If you are using Dual Boot with an XGA-2 adapter, you must modify the
CONFIG.DOS file:
  1. Edit the \OS2\SYSTEM\CONFIG.DOS file.
  2. Locate the line
     DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM 2048 X=nnnn-nnnn
  3. Change nnnn-nnnn to C000-CFFF.
  4. Save and exit the file.
Screen Corruption on IBM P75 Systems
On IBM P75 systems, there might be some corruption on the screen whenever
several icons are selected and moved together.
This corruption can be eliminated by selecting Sort from the Desktop pop-up
menu.
Limited Resolutions on IBM P75 Systems with External Displays
An IBM P75 system with an external display attached might only have the 640 x
480 x 16,772,216 resolution selection on the the System Settings Screen page.
If the external display is capable of displaying higher resolutions, use the
P75 Reference Diskette to disable the built-in plasma display.
Color Changes Behind Icons on XGA Displays
If you are using an XGA display, the diagonal lines behind the icons of open
objects might change color unexpectedly.
This does not interfere with the operation of the system.
Extra Lines on OS/2 System Clock on XGA Displays
If you are using an XGA display, extra lines might appear on the face of the
OS/2 System Clock between the quarter (:15) and half (:30) hour.
These lines do not interfere with the operation of the clock.
Display Power Management Signaling Not Enabled on XGA Displays
If you are using an XGA display, the XGA DMQS (\xga$dmqs\*.dqs) files in this
version of the operating system do not have DPMS (Display Power Management
Signaling) enabled for the DPMS supported displays.
You must use the DPMS OVERRIDE parameter provided with the Power Management
Utility program that is located in System Setup.
PS/ValuePoint System with Radius XGA Display Adapter
If you are using a Radius XGA display adapter on a PS/ValuePoint system, it
might not work correctly.
To correct this problem, you need to obtain and use the VPXGA.EXE utility
program. For a copy of this utility program, check your Radius Installation
Diskette or contact a service representative at Radius.
Zenith Data Systems** and Hewlett Packard Systems with Headland Adapters
Zenith Data Systems with Headland HT208 and Hewlett Packard systems with HT209
display a white half-screen whenever high-resolution modes are selected.
These systems do not support high-resolution modes even though you can
successfully install high resolution drivers and select the modes.  To correct
this problem, use Selective Install to install VGA.
ZEOS** Systems with Speedstar VGA
If you are using a ZEOS system with Speedstar VGA, the video display adapter
might not configure.
Use the VMODE utility program supplied with the system to configure the display
during the display driver installation.
Video Corruption with Sigma Legend** Adapter
If you have a Sigma Legend display adapter you might experience minor video
corruption on the Desktop when you switch between the Desktop and DOS if they
are running in different modes.
Use the DOS utility program that is packaged with this display adapter to set
the DOS session to the same mode as the Desktop.
System Hang with Sigma Legend Adapter
If you are using a Sigma Legend display in 1024 x 768 x 256 color mode, the
system might stop.
Use only 640 x 480 x 256 or 800 x 600 x 256 mode with this adapter.

Mouse Problems 219/2

The following information provides solutions to problems you might encounter with your mouse. Existing Mouse Not Working Correctly If the mouse you had connected to your computer before installing OS/2 now works improperly (movements appear "jerky" or the mouse does not respond when you move it), do the following:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open OS/2 Window.  If you installed OS/2 from a CD, continue with step 4.
     If you installed from diskettes, go to step 5.
  4. Type ATTRIB -R C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS and press Enter (where c is the drive
     where OS/2 is installed).
  5. Insert the diskette that came with your mouse into drive A (this diskette
     contains the mouse device driver).
  6. Type COPY A:\MOUSE.SYS C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS and press Enter (where C is the
     drive where OS/2 is installed).
  7. Shut down the system.
Mouse Not Working after Installation
If you installed a mouse during the installation of OS/2, or used selective
installation to install a new mouse and the mouse is not working, you will need
to edit your CONFIG.SYS file.  Do the following:
  1. Edit the C:\CONFIG.SYS file and press Enter (where C is the drive where
     OS/2 is installed).
  2. Delete the mouse device driver statements from the CONFIG.SYS file (there
     might be more than one such statement).  For example:
     DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS
  3. Shut down the system, and then restart it.
  4. Use Selective Install to install a different mouse driver.
Serial Mouse Not Working
If the serial mouse is connected to a serial port, make sure that the serial
port is configured for default settings.
Logitech** Mouse Not Working after Installation
If you have a Logitech mouse that does not work after installation, you might
have to select another mouse driver.  Before 1991, Logitech sold "C-Series"
serial mice. Since 1991, Logitech has sold only "M-Series" Microsoft-compatible
serial mice.  To determine which mouse you have, look at the bottom of the
mouse.  If it says "CA" or "C7," then it is a C-Series mouse.  If not, then you
have an M-Series mouse.  Use Selective Install to select the correct Logitech
mouse driver.
Logitech Mouse Not Working after Dual Boot from DOS
If your Logitech mouse is not working on a Dual Boot system after you run DOS
and switch to OS/2, your mouse might be running in a mode set by a DOS-based
mouse device driver.  To correct the problem:
  1. If COM2 port is being used, switch back to DOS and type the following at
     the DOS command prompt:
     MOUSE PC
     or
     MOUSE 2 PC
     This will reset the mouse to a mode that is recognized by OS/2.
     Note:  You must use the MOUSE.COM that came with the mouse, or the command
     will not work.
  2. Then type the following:
     C:\OS2\BOOT /OS2
  3. Press Enter.  OS/2 should start and your mouse should work.
  4. If this does not work, disconnect and reconnect the mouse.
  5. If these methods do not work, close your programs and turn off the
     computer.  Then, turn the computer on again.
Mouse Does Not Work on an IBM PS/2 Model 90 or 95
If your Model 90 or 95 has the Unattended Start Mode option set (through the
System Programs), the mouse driver will not load during startup.
To correct this situation, disable the Unattended Start Mode.
Mouse Does Not Work on COM3 or COM4
OS/2 supports connection only to COM1 or COM2, at the standard input/output
(I/O) address and interrupt request (IRQ) setting.
Mouse Pointer Does Not Move
When you move your mouse, the mouse pointer on the screen does not move.
Verify that each device on your computer that uses an IRQ setting is not
conflicting with another IRQ setting.
Mouse Statements in CONFIG.SYS
The mouse statements that should appear in your CONFIG.SYS depend on the type
of mouse connected to your computer.
The correct CONFIG.SYS statements for running a serial mouse are:
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\PCLOGIC.SYS SERIAL=COMx
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS TYPE=PCLOGIC$
Where:  C is the drive on which OS/2 is installed, and COMx is either COM1 or
COM2.
The correct CONFIG.SYS statements for running a Microsoft or IBM mouse are:
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MDOS\VMOUSE.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\POINTDD.SYS
DEVICE=C:\OS2\MOUSE.SYS
Where:  C is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.
Three-button Mouse Not Working Correctly
You have a 3-button mouse and error SYS1201 is displayed on the screen.
OS/2 supports only the 2-button mode on a 3-button mouse.  If your mouse has a
switch to change to a 2-button mode, change the switch.  If it doesn't, replace
the mouse with a 2 button mouse.
Erratic Mouse Pointer in WIN-OS/2 Sessions
If you have an erratic pointer in your WIN-OS/2 programs.
Set the following WIN-OS/2 settings:
  o  MOUSE_EXCLUSIVE_ACCESS to On
  o  IDLE_SENSITIVITY to 100
  o  IDLE_SECONDS to 20
Mouse Not Recognized on Non-IBM Computer
If your mouse is not recognized on a non-IBM computer that has a mouse port
with an attached mouse, the mouse might be incompatible with the mouse port
because of the chip on the mouse adapter.
Attach the mouse to a serial port.  If the mouse still does not work, try a
different mouse with the mouse port.
Mouse and Keyboard Stop Working
If you have AMI BIOS, you might have an old version.  Contact your computer
manufacturer for an updated BIOS level.

CD-ROM Problems 220/2

Following are solutions to problems you might encounter with your CD-ROM after installing OS/2. Philips** CM 205 CD-ROM If you have a Philips CM 205 drive and it doesn't work with OS/2, edit your CONFIG.SYS file and change the line containing LMS205.ADD to LMS206.ADD. If your CD-ROM drive is not working correctly (does not respond, or generates errors when trying to read a CD), do the following:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open OS/2 Window.
  4. Insert the diskette that came with your CD-ROM drive into drive A. (This
     diskette contains the CD-ROM device driver.)
  5. Type the following, pressing Enter after each:
     COPY A:*.ADD C:\OS2\
     COPY A:*.IFS C:\OS2\
     COPY A:*.DMD C:\OS2\
     where * represents the actual name of the file.
  6. Edit the C:\CONFIG.SYS file and press Enter (where c is the drive on which
     OS/2 is installed).
  7. Add the following statements to the CONFIG.SYS file (if not already
     there):
     DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
     IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
     BASEDEV=OS2CDROM.DMD
     BASEDEV=*.ADD
     where * represents the actual name of the .ADD file on the device driver
     diskette.
  8. If the following statement appears in the CONFIG.SYS file, change it from:
     DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDROM.SYS /Q /N:4
     to
     REM DEVICE=C:\OS2\CDROM.SYS /Q /N:4
  9. Shut down the system.
Problems with Sony, Mitsumi, or Hitachi** CD-ROM Drives
If you are using a Sony, Mitsumi, or Hitachi CD-ROM drive and cannot access it,
do the following:
  1. Copy the following files from Diskette 1 to the hard disk, as follows:
     COPY A:\OS2CDROM.DMD C:\OS2
     COPY A:\CDFS.IFS C:\OS2
  2. Edit your CONFIG.SYS file on the hard disk and add the following
     statements:
     DEVICE=C:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
     IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
  3. Shut down the system.
Problems with Sound Blaster CD-ROM Drives
If you are using a Sound Blaster CD-ROM drive with the device driver SBPCD2.SYS
and cannot access the drive, restart your system and do the following:
  1. Copy the following file from Diskette 1 to the hard disk, as follows:
     COPY A:\CDFS.IFS C:\OS2
  2. Edit your CONFIG.SYS file on the hard disk and add the following
     statement:
     IFS=C:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
  3. Open OS/2 System.
  4. Open Selective Install from the System Setup folder.
  5. Select the icon next to CD-ROM Device Support on the System Configuration
     screen.
  6. Select OTHER from the bottom of the CD-ROM selection list; then select OK.
  7. When the selective installation is complete, edit the CONFIG.SYS file and
     delete the following line:
     DEVICE=C:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
  8. Shut down the system.

Hard Disk Problems 221/2

Following are solutions to problems you might have with hard disk drives after installing OS/2. Also refer to Recovery Procedures. Slow SCSI Support After installation, you might experience slow SCSI support. If this occurs, make sure that the hard disk and the controller card are both set for the ASYNCH mode or the SYNCH mode. Problem with Quantum Hardcard or IDE Controller Add the required switch settings (adapter number and IRQ level) to the IBM1S506.ADD device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS file. If you need assistance with the switch settings or need a BIOS upgrade (for certain Quantum Hardcards), contact a service representative at Quantum. Hard Disk Controller Problem

  1. Determine the controller manufacturer, model number, and type.  Then,
     determine which device driver is installed for the controller (for
     example, FD7000EX.ADD).
  2. Verify that the installed device driver is the correct one.
  3. Verify that the BASEDEV= statements are correct in your CONFIG.SYS file.
     Verify that the correct device driver is listed in a BASEDEV= statement.
     Also, verify that the correct device driver is the only device driver
     listed for that controller.  For more information about BASEDEV=
     statements, refer to the Command Reference in the Information folder.
Cannot Set Up a Primary Partition
If you have more than two hard disk drives and you cannot set up a primary
partition on one of the hard disk drives, your BIOS could be preventing the
setup.
With OS/2, you can have a primary partition on two hard disk drives; however,
the BIOS in your computer determines which two hard disk drives can have
primary partitions.
Cannot Access Entire Hard Disk
Your hard disk drive has more than 1024 cylinders, and you cannot access the
entire drive space, the device driver for your controller might not support
more than 1024 cylinders.
If you have a non-IBM controller and device driver, contact the manufacturer of
the device driver to ask if your level of the driver supports more than 1024
cylinders.

Desktop Problems 222/2

Following are solutions to problems you might have with your Desktop after installing OS/2. System Stops Working The system stops and the keyboard and mouse do not respond.

  1. Press Ctrl+Esc or Alt+Esc and wait a few seconds to see if the system
     responds.
  2. Determine if you can move your mouse but cannot select any object when you
     press mouse button 1.
  3. Press the Caps Lock and Num Lock keys to see if their status lights come
     on.
  4. Record a description of what you were doing when the system stopped.  If
     any messages were displayed on the screen, be sure to record the message
     text and number.
  5. Refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for
     instructions about calling for additional assistance.
Missing Icons
After restarting your system, some of your Desktop icons might be missing.
Check the documentation for the hard drive and the controller card to ensure
that their settings are both set for the ASYNCH mode or the SYNCH mode.
Stacked Icons
If the objects on your Desktop appear to be stacked on each other, you can
refresh your Desktop:
  1. Position the mouse pointer on a blank area of the Desktop.
  2. Press mouse button 2.  A pop-up menu appears.
  3. Select Refresh.
  4. If your screen goes blank, press Alt+Esc to switch between programs and
     force the "repainting" of your screen.
DOS and Windows Programs Not Added to the Desktop
During the installation of OS/2, your existing DOS and Windows programs are
automatically added to your OS/2 Desktop. However, the installation program
might not find all programs (for example, programs located on remote servers).
If this happens, restart the system, then run the Add Programs to Desktop
utility program.  (Add Programs to Desktop is located in the System Setup
folder which is located in the OS/2 System folder.)
OS/2 2.x Programs Not Added to the Desktop
If you installed OS/2 on a system that already had OS/2 2.x installed on it and
your OS/2 2.x programs were not added to your Desktop, do the following:
  1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
     screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
  4. Delete the DESKTOP directory.
  5. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.  The Desktop should be
     re-created.
  6. If the problem continues, re-create the INI files.  Follow the
     instructions in Rebuilding Your Desktop.
If you moved program groups off the Desktop and into a folder, you should move
them back on the Desktop before installing OS/2.  Otherwise, duplicate icons
could appear on the screen.  If you try to delete these icons, the original
icons will also be deleted.
Blank Desktop and Missing Objects
If the Desktop is blank, objects are missing, you cannot delete an object, or
you have another problem that involves objects, run the CHKDSK (check disk)
program until the results indicate there are no errors.  To run CHKDSK, do the
following:
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
     your system.
  2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
  3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
  4. Insert Diskette 2.
  5. Type: CHKDSK C: /F and press Enter (where: C: is the drive where OS/2 is
     installed).
For more information about CHKDSK, select Command Reference in the Information
folder.
Missing Objects in the OS/2 System Folder
Follow the instructions in Rebuilding Your Desktop.
Folders Open and Close Immediately
Follow the instructions in Recovering Archived System Files.
Missing, Empty, or Multiple Objects on Desktop
  o  The Desktop is missing objects or there is more than one icon for the same
     object.
  o  One or more Desktop folders are empty.
  o  After you shut down the computer and start it again, the objects on the
     Desktop are not displayed the same as when you shut down.
Recover the archived Desktop, using the procedure in Recovering Archived System
Files.
If that does not fix the problem, follow the instructions for Rebuilding Your
Desktop.
Object Cannot Be Deleted
If you cannot delete an object, do the following:
  1. Create a folder.
  2. Drag the object you want to delete to the new folder and drop it.
  3. Drag the new folder to the Shredder and drop it.
If you cannot shred the folder, do the following:
  1. At an OS/2 command prompt, type: CD DESKTOP and press Enter.
  2. After the DESKTOP directory opens, type: RD directory and press Enter.
     (Where: directory is replaced by the name of the directory (folder) that
     you want to delete.)

Recovery Procedures 223/2+

The procedures that follow provide information about recovering from Desktop problems and system failures, including:

  o  A damaged, unusable, or unstartable desktop
  o  An invalid CONFIG.SYS file
  o  A damaged INI file
  o  Hard disk errors
  o  A forgotten lockup password
Note:  Backing up your system regularly might help you avoid having to
re-create files in the event of a system failure.
If your Desktop becomes damaged, unusable, or unstartable, you can recover in
two ways:
  o  Use the Archive/Recover utility program to restore your Desktop to a
     previously saved state
  o  Rebuild your existing Desktop

Recovering Archived System Files 224/3

OS/2 has the capability of archiving key system files as well as the DESKTOP directory each time you start OS/2. The default setting for this feature is OFF. (The Archive function can be turned ON via the Archive page of the Desktop Settings notebook.) When the Archive function is turned ON, the state of the key system files and Desktop as they existed at the last three "starts" of OS/2 are saved. Each time you restart OS/2, the oldest set of archived system files is deleted and the current system files are saved. OS/2 also keeps a permanent archive of your Desktop and key files as they existed when OS/2 was first installed, so you can always restore your system to its original state. To use archived system files, do the following:

  1. Turn on your computer.  If your computer is already on, perform a shut
     down, then press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper-left corner of your screen
     (before the OS/2 logo screen appears), press Alt+F1.
  3. A screen appears, listing the three most recent archives.  Do one of the
     following:
       o  Type the number of the archive you want to use to restore your
          system.
       o  Type X to restore your system to its original state (as it was when
          you first installed OS/2).
       o  Type C to get an OS/2 command prompt (for example, if you want to
          edit your CONFIG.SYS file).
       o  Type V to reset your primary display to VGA (for example, if you
          think your Desktop is not damaged but cannot be seen because you need
          to reinstall your VGA device drivers).

Recovery Choices during Restart 225/3+

The Recovery Choices screen enables you to specify how the system is to restart while a restart is in progress. You can display the Recovery Choices screen during restart by pressing Alt+F1 when a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your screen. If you want the system to display the Recovery Choices screen each time it restarts, you can select Display Recovery Choices at every system restart on the Archive page of the Desktop Settings notebook. The Recovery Choices screen allows you to:

  o  Select the set of archived system files that the system is to use to
     restart
  o  Continue using the original installation files to restart, and go to a
     command line
  o  Continue using the current system files to restart, and reset your primary
     display to VGA
  o  Restart your system using a customized CONFIG.SYS file that you have
     created
Each set of archived files appears on the Recovery Choices screen with the date
and time when the files were archived. The files are numbered 1, 2, 3 or, for
the original installation files, X.  Select the files that you want the system
to restart with by pressing 1, 2, 3, or X on your keyboard.  The system will
continue to restart using the set of archived files represented by the number
you pressed.
To go to a command line without changing the system files, press the C key on
your keyboard.
To reset your primary display to VGA, press the V key on your keyboard.
The character keys that you press can be uppercase or lowercase letters.
To restart your system using a customized version of the CONFIG.SYS file, enter
an alphabetic character that corresponds to the name of a CONFIG.SYS file that
you have created. Creating Your Own CONFIG.SYS Files describes how to create
and name your own customized version of CONFIG.SYS.  Displaying Your CONFIG.?
Choices on the Recovery Choices Screen describes how to display your customized
CONFIG.SYS choices on the Recovery Choices screen.

Creating Your Own CONFIG.SYS Files 226/4

In some cases, you need different CONFIG.SYS files to create environments that are specific to the kinds of work you are doing. For example, when you use a laptop computer with a docking station, you might want a CONFIG.SYS file that supports your laptop computer and one that supports your regular machine. You can create different versions of the CONFIG.SYS file, and, during restart, specify from the Recovery Choices screen which version the system is to use. You can also customize the Recovery Choices screen to display your customized CONFIG.SYS file choices. The following steps describe how to create and use multiple CONFIG.SYS files. In these steps, ? is any unique single alphabetic character except: X, x, C, c, V, or v. These steps use C as the root directory. If you installed OS/2 on a drive other than C, replace the C in the path name with your own root directory.

  1. Save a copy of the current CONFIG.SYS file.
     You can save a copy of the current CONFIG.SYS file by copying it to a
     diskette.  Otherwise, you can copy the current CONFIG.SYS file to the
     C:\OS2\BOOT subdirectory, and rename it to CONFIG.?.  If you copy and
     rename CONFIG.SYS, be sure to make a note of the new name and directory so
     you can restore it later.
  2. On the C:\OS2\BOOT subdirectory, create a file called CONFIG.? and
     customize it with the modifications that you need.
  3. Copy your customized CONFIG.? file to the current CONFIG.SYS file.
     There are two ways to copy your CONFIG.? file. You can enter the copy
     command at the OS/2 command prompt, or you can create an OS/2 batch file
     that will run during restart after the system processes C:\CONFIG.SYS.
       a. Replacing Your CONFIG.SYS file with CONFIG.?
          If you have only one customized CONFIG.? file, or if you do not plan
          to change between CONFIG.SYS and CONFIG.? often, you might choose to
          copy over CONFIG.SYS with your customized CONFIG.? file. Copying over
          C:\CONFIG.SYS with your customized CONFIG.? file replaces CONFIG.SYS
          in the root directory, and makes your customized file the default
          CONFIG.SYS file.
          The command to copy your customized file to the current CONFIG.SYS
          file is:
          COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.? C:\CONFIG.SYS
          Using your customized CONFIG.? file as the default file allows you to
          restart without selecting a CONFIG.? file at the Recovery Choices
          screen.
          You can now restart your system. When you restart, the system will
          automatically use the file in the root directory named CONFIG.SYS.
       b. Creating a Batch File to Replace CONFIG.SYS with CONFIG.?
          If you have several customized CONFIG.SYS files, using the batch file
          allows you to specify the CONFIG.? you want to use without entering
          multiple copy commands.  You can simply change the ? character in
          your batch file, and enter that character at the Recovery Choices
          screen.
          Create a batch file on C:\OS2\BOOT, and name it ALTF1?.CMD, where ?
          is the character that you used in the name of your CONFIG.? file. Put
          the following COPY command in the batch file.
          COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.? C:\CONFIG.SYS
          Display the Recovery Choices screen by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del to
          restart your system and then pressing Alt+F1.
          At the Recovery Choices screen, press the key for the ? single
          character in the name of the CONFIG.? file you want to use.
          The system continues the restart using your customized CONFIG.? file.
          Note:  If you enter a character from the Recovery Choices screen for
          which there is no corresponding ALTF1?.CMD batch file, the system
          will use the CONFIG.? file that corresponds to that character.  If no
          CONFIG.? file corresponding to that character exists, the system will
          return to the Recovery Choices screen.
          Example
          The following example shows how to create a CONFIG.SYS file named
          CONFIG.A, and a batch file to copy it during restart.  The system is
          installed on the C drive.  Before you start, save a copy of your
          current CONFIG.SYS file.
            1. Copy the system version of CONFIG.SYS into a new file called
               CONFIG.A
               COPY CONFIG.SYS C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.A
            2. Change to the C:\OS2\BOOT directory
               CD OS2
               CD BOOT
            3. Edit CONFIG.A to customize it, and save your changes
               E CONFIG.A
            4. Edit a file called ALTF1A.CMD file
               E ALTF1A.CMD
            5. Put the following COPY command into ALTF1A.CMD, and save your
               changes
               COPY C:\OS2\BOOT\CONFIG.A C:\CONFIG.SYS
            6. Restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.  Press Alt+F1 when
               the small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of
               your screen.
            7. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press the letter A.

Displaying Your CONFIG.? Choices on the Recovery Choices Screen 227/4

You can customize your Recovery Choices screen to display the list of customized CONFIG.? files that you created. Customizing the Recovery Choices screen will help you to remember which character to enter for a particular version of CONFIG.?, by displaying your selections. To customize the Recovery Choices screen, edit the file C:\OS2\BOOT\ALTF1BOT.SCR. (If you installed OS/2 on a drive other than C, specify the drive on which OS/2 is installed.) You can add up to 6 lines of text to the bottom of this file. Each line that you add should represent a single CONFIG.? file that you created.

Each line should include the alphabetic character that identifies that CONFIG.?

file. You might also want to include a brief, one-line description of when to use that version of the CONFIG.? file. For example, to display the option for the CONFIG.A file on the Recovery Choices screen, you might add the following to the file C:\OS2\BOOT\ALTF1BOT.SCR: A CONFIG.A (file for laptop computer)

Rebuilding Your Desktop 228/3

Use the following procedure if the Archive/Recover procedure did not restore your Desktop, this procedure will rebuild the Desktop by making new INI files.

  1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
     screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
  4. Change to the OS/2 directory on your hard disk.  Type the following
     commands and press Enter after each:
     C:
     CD\OS2
  5. Type the following commands and press Enter after each:
     MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC
     MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC
  6. Delete the hidden file, WP?ROOT.?SF, from the startable partition.  Type
     the following commands and press Enter after each:
     ATTRIB -h -s -r \WP?ROOT.?SF
     DEL \WP?ROOT.?SF
  7. Restart the system.

Recovering the CONFIG.SYS File 229/3

The CONFIG.SYS file contains command statements that are used to configure your system during startup. If the file is changed incorrectly, you might not be able to restart the system or edit the file. (For example, some programs write information to the CONFIG.SYS file when they are installed. In some cases, this information can cause the CONFIG.SYS file to be unusable.) To recover the original version of the CONFIG.SYS file (as it was created when OS/2 was installed), you can use the following procedure:

  1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
     screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
  4. Type C: and press Enter (where C represents the drive on which your
     operating system resides).
  5. Rename the damaged CONFIG.SYS file.  For example, type:
     REN CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.BAD
  6. Press Enter.
  7. Copy the backup version of the CONFIG.SYS file to the root directory of
     the drive where your operating system resides.  (The CONFIG.SYS backup
     file was created during OS/2 installation).  Type:
     COPY C:\OS2\INSTALL\CONFIG.SYS C:\CONFIG.SYS
  8. Press Enter.
  9. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
As stated, this procedure reestablishes the original version of the CONFIG.SYS
file (as it was created during OS/2 installation).  If you made any changes to
the CONFIG.SYS file after that time, you will have to edit the newly copied
CONFIG.SYS file and add those changes.

Recovering the User INI File 230/3

The OS2.INI file, also referred to as the user INI file, is an operating system startup file that contains system settings such as program defaults, display options, and file options. The OS2SYS.INI file, also referred to as the system INI file, is an operating system file that contains information about installed fonts and printer drivers. If you receive a message that the OS2.INI file has been "corrupted", replace both the OS2.INI file and the OS2SYS.INI file on your hard disk.

Use the following procedure to replace these two files with versions containing

default values:

  1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
     screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
  4. Type C: and press Enter (where C represents the drive where your operating
     system resides).
  5. Type CD \OS2 and press Enter.
  6. Type ATTRIB -s -h -r OS2*.INI and press Enter.
  7. Type REN OS2.INI OS2.OLD and press Enter.
  8. Type MAKEINI OS2.INI INI.RC and press Enter.
  9. Type REN OS2SYS.INI OS2SYS.OLD and press Enter.
 10. Type MAKEINI OS2SYS.INI INISYS.RC and press Enter.
 11. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
You can protect your INI files by having them automatically backed up each time
you start your system.  For example, if you include the following statements in
your CONFIG.SYS file, a backup copy of your current INI files and a backup copy
of the INI files as they existed at the previous system startup will be made.
(Note that this example assumes that OS/2 is installed on drive C.  Use the
letter of the drive on which you have OS/2 installed.)
CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\*.INX C:\OS2\*.INY
CALL=C:\OS2\XCOPY.EXE C:\OS2\OS2*.INI C:\OS2\*.INX
By copying the INI files this way, you will always be able to recover a recent
version of these files in case the user INI file becomes damaged.

Recovering from Errors on the Hard Disk 231/3

The CHKDSK command with the parameter /F can be used to correct disk and directory errors. However, when you use the /F parameter, no activity can occur on the disk. Therefore, if you need to correct errors on the drive from which you normally start OS/2, you must use the version of CHKDSK that is on the installation diskettes (or installation CD) instead of the version that has been installed on the hard disk. You can also use the version of CHKDSK on the installation diskettes or CD if the disk is in use or locked by another process. To run CHKDSK /F using diskettes:

  1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
     your system.
  2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
  3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
  4. Insert Diskette 2.
  5. To correct the errors on your hard disk, type CHKDSK C: /F:2, then press
     Enter.  (Where: C: is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
  6. Remove the diskette from drive A.
  7. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your system.
To run CHKDSK /F from a CD:
  1. Insert the Installation Diskette in drive A. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart
     your system.
  2. When prompted, remove the Installation Diskette and insert Diskette 1.
  3. Press F3 in the Welcome screen to exit to the command prompt.
  4. Insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
  5. Type E: (where E is your CD-ROM drive) and press Enter.
  6. Type CD\OS2IMAGE and press Enter.
  7. Type CD DISK_2 and press Enter.
  8. To correct the errors on your hard disk, type CHKDSK C: /F:2, then press
     Enter.  (Where: C: is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
  9. Press Enter.
Recovering Memory State Data    232/3

The process OS/2 uses to recover the state of memory at the time of a failure is called a memory dump. A memory dump is performed when a problem is difficult to reproduce or other methods of problem determination do not identify the problem.

Memory dump information can then be analyzed by a team of technical experts and

determine the cause of the problem. Important Do not perform a memory dump unless your Service and Support Group has recommended this action. :enote. There are two types of memory dumps:

  o  Manual memory dump (used for system hangs and traps that cause the system
     to stop)
  o  Automatic memory dump (used for application programs, system traps, and
     internal processing errors)
A system memory dump can be placed on a FAT hard-disk partition or formatted
diskettes.
Different situations determine which type of memory dump is needed.  Refer to
the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for instructions about
calling for additional assistance.
Using TRACE in CONFIG.SYS File
Before you create the memory dump diskettes, you must use the OS/2 Event
Tracing Service to capture a sequence of system events.  To enable system
event-tracing, add the following statements to your CONFIG.SYS file:
TRACEBUF=63
TRACE=ON
The default for TRACE=ON is to trace all static system events.
Restart your system to activate TRACE.  Also, turn on two dynamic trace points
as follows:
  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open OS/2 Full Screen or OS/2 Window.
  4. Type the following at the command prompt:
     trace on kernel   (press Enter)
     trace on doscall1 (press Enter)
Performing the Memory Dump
If you are sending a memory dump to diskettes, you must use formatted
diskettes.  Generally, one 1.44MB diskette is used for each 2MB of RAM.  For
example, if you have a 16MB system, you will probably use eight 1.44MB
formatted diskettes.
If you are sending a memory dump to a hard disk, you must first create a FAT
partition labeled SADUMP and give it a size greater than the amount of physical
memory (RAM) in your system.  For example, if your system has 16MB of RAM, set
the size of the SADUMP partition to 17MB.
To run a memory dump, the Memory Dump facility must be started manually or
automatically as follows:
To start it manually:
Press and hold down the Ctrl and Alt keys, and then press the Num Lock key
twice.  After a few seconds, the screen clears; after a minute the system beeps
and one of the following messages is displayed:
When dumping to diskettes:
Insert a formatted diskette to commence dumping.
When dumping to a hard disk:
The memory dump is being performed.
The total amount of memory to be dumped is xxxx.
To start it automatically:
Type one of the following statements in your CONFIG.SYS file and restart your
system:
TRAPDUMP=OFF,drive letter:
TRAPDUMP=ON,drive letter:
TRAPDUMP=R0,drive letter:
where:
  o  TRAPDUMP=OFF,drive letter: indicates that no automatic dump is to be
     taken.  This is the default value; it is generally used when initiating a
     manual memory dump.
     If REIPL=ON is specified in the CONFIG.SYS file, the system will restart
     automatically and no dump will be taken when a system trap or internal
     processing error occurs.
  o  TRAPDUMP=ON,drive letter: specifies the drive to which system dump
     information is written for any access violations.  The system will restart
     after the TRAPDUMP process has completed.  The default drive is A if no
     drive is specified.
  o  TRAPDUMP=R0,drive letter: specifies the drive to which system dump
     information is written for system traps and internal processing errors.
     The system will restart after the TRAPDUMP process has completed.  The
     default drive is A if no drive is specified.
TRAPDUMP now initiates a memory dump, depending on which TRAPDUMP statement is
placed in the CONFIG.SYS file.
Warning: Setting TRAPDUMP to ON or R0 enables your system to automatically
initiate a memory dump.  Do not enable TRAPDUMP unless you need to troubleshoot
your system and have been instructed to do so by your technical coordinator.
Note:  If dumping to diskettes, complete steps 1 through 5.  If dumping to hard
disk, skip steps 1 through 5 and read step 6.
  1. When prompted, insert the diskette labeled Dump Diskette 1 and press any
     key to start the dump process.  The following message will be displayed:
     The memory dump is being performed...
  2. When the memory dump has completed or the current dump diskette is full,
     the following messages are displayed:
     The diskette is full.  Insert another formatted diskette in drive A.
     The storage address ranges on this diskette are:
     DUMPDATA.xxx       yyy - zzz
     Press any key to continue.
     where xxx is the dump diskette number, yyy is the beginning memory
     address, and zzz is the ending memory address on the disk.
     Note:  If you press Enter without changing the diskette, the system will
     prompt you once more before the dump process overwrites the contents of
     the current diskette in the drive. :enote.
  3. Insert the next dump diskette into drive A and press any key.  This action
     continues the dump process and displays the following message:
     The memory dump is being performed...
     Warning: Any data on the dump diskettes will be overwritten by the Memory
     Dump facility.
  4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the dumping is completed and the following
     message is displayed:
     Insert memory dump diskette number 1 to complete dump.
     The storage address ranges on this diskette are:
     DUMPDATA.xxx        yyy - zzz
     Press any key to continue.
  5. You must reinsert Dump Diskette 1 at this point to properly terminate the
     dump process.  The control program will write the dump summary record to
     Dump Diskette 1 and end the process.  After the process has ended, the
     following messages are displayed:
     The memory dump has completed.  Remove the dump diskette and restart the
     system.
  6. When a memory dump is initiated, the system begins writing the system
     memory to the dump partition.  When completed, the system restarts
     automatically.
Mailing the Dump Diskettes
Do not send dump diskettes unless instructed by the Service and Support Group.
Diskettes must be clearly labeled with the identification number (which is the
PMR number that is provided by the Service and Support Group) and your name.
Also, be sure to number the diskettes.
Send the dump diskettes to the address provided by the Service and Support
Group.  Refer to the Service and Support brochure in your OS/2 package for
instructions about calling for additional assistance.
Recovering from A Forgotten Password    233/3

If you forgot your lockup password, you must use the LOCK.RC file located in the \OS2 directory to reconfigure the OS2.INI file. To do this:

  1. Turn on the computer.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
     screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
  4. Change from drive A to the drive on which OS/2 is installed.  Type: C: and
     press Enter.
  5. Change to the OS2 directory.  Type CD \OS2 and press Enter.
  6. Type the following:
     MAKEINI OS2.INI LOCK.RC
  7. Press Enter.
  8. Restart the computer.

Video Procedures 234/1+

This chapter provides information to help you install and fine tune your OS/2 video. It includes supported chip sets and resolutions, instructions for changing video settings, plus specific procedures for SVGA, XGA, and LCD or Monochrome Plasma displays. Use the table of contents at the beginning of this chapter to locate the information.

Video Device Drivers for OS/2 235/2+

OS/2 contains video device drivers that support the chip sets found on many system boards and display adapters. The following table lists the supported chip sets and the video device driver that should be selected during installation.

Non-Accelerated Video Device Drivers 236/3

MANUFACTURER CHIP SET VIDEO DEVICE DRIVER
ATI Technologies ATI28800 256 color ATI Technologies ATI28800
Cirrus Logic CL-GD5422, CL-GD5424 Cirrus Logic
Headland Technologies HT209 256 color Headland Technologies HT209
IBM IBM VGA 16 color Video graphics adapter (VGA)
IBM IBM VGA256C IBM VGA256C
Trident Microsystems TVGA8900B, TVGA8900C 256 color Trident Microsystems TVGA8900
TSENG ET4000 TSENG Laboratories ET4000
Western Digital WD90C11, WD90C30, WD90C31 (in WD90C30 compatibility mode) 256 color Western Digital WD90C11, C30, C31 (C30 mode only)
NOTE: Use the Selective Install icon to change the resolution and number of colors for non-accelerated video device drivers.

Accelerated Video Device Drivers 237/3

MANUFACTURER CHIP SET VIDEO DEVICE DRIVER
IBM IBM 8514 Display Adapter 8514/A
IBM IBM XGA Extended graphic adapter (XGA)
S3 Corporation S3 86C801, 86C805, 86C928 S3 86C801, 86C805, 86C928
S3 Corporation S3 86C864 S3 864
Cirrus Logic Cirrus Logic 5426, 5428, 5430, 5434 Cirrus Logic 5426, 5428, 5430, 5434
Western Digital WD 90C24, 90C24A, 90C24A2, 90C31 WD 90C24 - 90C31
Western Digital WD 90C33 WD 90C33
ATI Technology MACH 32 ATI MACH 32
ATI Technology MACH 64 ATI MACH 64
TSENG ETW32, ETW32i, ETW32p TSENG ET4000/W32, /W32i, /W32p
Weitek Power 9000 Weitek Power 9000
NOTE: Not all system boards and display adapters that use these chip sets are supported. For more information about display adapter and chip set compatibility, select HELP from the Display Driver Install window in Selective Install or refer to the README file on the Installation Diskette.

These drivers will be installed in 640x480x256 colors by the OS/2 installation program. Use the system icon to change the resolution and number of colors if you are using any of the accelerated video device drivers except IBM 8514.

Supported Resolutions for Accelerated Drivers 238/3

The resolutions that can be set for a particular display adapter, are dependent on the:

  • Specific display adapter being used
  • Graphics accelerator chip set on the adapter
  • Video device driver being used
  • Amount of video memory on the adapter

The video device drivers shipped with OS/2 (see the previous table) support the following resolutions and number of colors. Not all of the device drivers support all of the resolutions. For more information about the resolutions supported by each adapter and device driver, select Help from the Display Driver Install window in Selective Install or refer to the README file on the Installation Diskette.

3 RESOLUTIONS     3 NUMBER OF       3 VIDEO MEMORY    3 NOTE
3                 3 COLORS          3 REQUIRED
3 640 x 480       3 256             3 1MB
3 800 x 600       3 256             3 1MB             3
3 1024 x 768      3 256             3 1MB             3
3 1280 x 1200     3 256             3 2MB             3
3 1600 x 1200     3 256             3 4MB             3
3 640 x 480       3 65,536          3 1MB             3
3 800 x 600       3 65,536          3 1MB             3
3 1024 x 768      3 65,536          3 2MB             3
3 1280 x 1024     3 65,536          3 4MB             3 2
3 640 x 480       3 16,777,216      3 1MB or 2MB      3 1,3
3 800 x 600       3 16,777,216      3 2MB             3 1,4,6
3 1024 x 768      3 16,777,216      3 4MB             3 1
3 1280 x 1024     3 16,777,216      3 4MB             3 1,2
3 1360 x 1024     3 16              3 1MB             3 5
3 NOTE:
3
3 1.  The Western Digital device drivers do not support
3     16,777,216 colors.
3 2.  Most adapter/chip set combinations do not support
3     these resolutions and colors.
3 3.  The amount of video memory required for this resol-
3     ution is dependent on the display adapter and the
3     video device driver installed.
3 4.  Display adapters with the TSENG W32p Rev A chip set
3     do not support this resolution.
3 5.  This resolution is supported only for XGA-2.
3 6.  Cirrus adapters require more than 2MB of video memory
3     for this resolution.

Installing a Video Device Driver 239/2

All display adapters must tailor their output to the capabilities of the display attached to the system. Unfortunately, there is no standard for communicating the capabilities of the display to the display adapter. The result is that many display adapters supply a program to define and select the type of display attached to the system. OS/2 responds to this situation by permitting the DOS display selection utilities provided by the manufacturers to be used to properly configure the system. OS/2 then configures the system in the same manner each time your computer is started. If no display is specified, many display adapters make an assumption about the type of display attached to the system. This default setting is designed to work with the widest range of displays possible; therefore, it is the safest choice. During this installation procedure, you will be asked to make a decision about whether you want to use the defaults for your display type, or use the display adapter utility program provided by the manufacturer of the adapter. You should use the utility program provided by the manufacturer if any of the following apply:

  o  Your display adapter is produced by Diamond Computer Systems, Inc..
  o  Your display supports non-interlaced operation only.
  o  Your display does not support VESA standard refresh rates.
  o  Your display adapter requires software configuration to function properly
     in DOS.
  o  You want to configure your system to take advantage of the full refresh
     capabilities of your display.
Note:  Using the utility program provided by the manufacturer requires exact
knowledge about the capabilities of your display.  If the wrong display type is
selected, your system might not start.
If you have an SVGA adapter in your system, you must restore it to work in VGA
mode before you can use the following instructions to install a different
adapter in your system.  See Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter
for instructions.
To install a new display adapter or video device driver:
  1. Install the display adapter using the manufacturer's instructions.
  2. Restart your system.
  3. Open OS/2 System.
  4. Open System Setup.
  5. Open Selective Install.
  6. Select Primary Display or Secondary Display from the System Configuration
     window.
     Note:  A secondary display is used for only DOS and full-screen sessions.
     Even if two displays are attached to the system only one is active at a
     time.
  7. Select the display driver that you want from the list provided.  (If you
     are unsure of which driver to choose, select Help.)
  8. Select OK.
  9. Follow the instructions on the screen.

Video Settings 240/2

To change video settings for a program:

  1. Point to the program icon.
  2. Click mouse button 2.
  3. Select Settings.
  4. Select the Session tab.
  5. Select the DOS settings or WIN-OS/2 push button.
  6. Change the settings (See the online documentation for detailed a
     explanation of these settings).
  7. Select the Save push button.
  8. Close the Settings notebook.

SVGA Procedures 241/2+

The following procedures provide instructions for enabling and disabling SVGA after OS/2 is installed.

Enabling SVGA in WIN-OS/2 Full-Screen Sessions 242/3

You can enable WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions to run in high-resolution (1024 x 768) mode while the OS/2 Desktop runs in VGA mode. To enable WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions for SVGA: Note: Follow the instructions very carefully. Otherwise, you could cause your WIN-OS/2 sessions to become inoperable.

  1. Use Selective Install to install VGA (640 x 480) support for OS/2.
  2. Back up the SYSTEM.INI and WIN.INI files as follows:
       a. Open OS/2 System.
       b. Open Command Prompts.
       c. Open OS/2 Full Screen.
       d. At the C prompt, do the following:
            o  Type: CD\OS2\MDOS\WINOS2 and press Enter.
            o  Type: COPY WIN.INI WIN.BAK and press Enter.
            o  Type: COPY SYSTEM.INI SYSTEM.BAK and press Enter.
  3. Check the OS2\MDOS\WINOS2\SYSTEM directory for the desired high-resolution
     display device driver.
       o  If the device driver is already on the system, go to step 4.
       o  If the device driver is not found, use your OS/2 or Windows
          installation disk to copy the driver to the \OS2\MDOS\WINOS2\SYSTEM
          directory.
          For example, to use the OS/2 diskettes and install the 8514.DRV
          high-resolution device driver:
            a. Search the OS/2 installation diskettes for the WIN8514 and
               *F.FON files and then do the following:
                 -  DIR A:WIN8514 and press Enter
                 -  DIR A:*F.FON and press Enter
                   After you find the files, you have to unpack them.  The
                   files are packed with their standard target directory coded
                   into the packed file.
            b. Copy the file to the system disk in the proper directory, using
               the UNPACK utility program:
                 -  Type UNPACK A:WIN8514 and press Enter.
                 -  Type UNPACK A:*F.FON and press Enter.
                   The SVGA driver and font files are now unpacked and in the
                   correct directory.
  4. Edit the SYSTEM.INI file and find the following line:
     FDISPLAY.DRV=VGA.DRV
     This line specifies the device driver used in WIN-OS/2 full-screen
     sessions.
     Note:  DISPLAY.DRV is the driver used for Microsoft Windows. FDISPLAY.DRV
     is the driver used for WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions. SDISPLAY.DRV is the
     driver used for WIN-OS/2 windowed sessions.
  5. Change this line to point to the high-resolution device driver that was
     unloaded in the steps above.  In this example, the device driver is
     8514.DRV.
     Note:  To install a different driver, substitute the name of your driver
     in the statement: FDISPLAY.DRV=8514.DRV
     The modified line should look like the following:
     FDISPLAY.DRV=8514.DRV
  6. Change the SYSTEM.INI font entries:
       o  In SYSTEM.INI, these entries are:
          FIXEDFON.FON=VGAFIX.FON
          OEMFONTS.FON=VGAOEM.FON
          FONTS.FON=VGASYS.FON
       o  For 8514/A, these entries must be changed to:
          FIXEDFON.FON=8514FIX.FON
          OEMFONTS.FON=8514OEM.FON
          FONTS.FON=8514SYS.FON
       o  Save the changes to the SYSTEM.INI file.
  7. Change the WIN.INI font entries
       o  In WIN.INI, the entries are:
          SYMBOL 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SYMBOLE.FON
          MS SANS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SSERIFE.FON
          MS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (VGA RES)=SERIFE.FON
          SMALL FONTS (VGA RES)=SMALLE.FON
          COURIER 10,12,15 (VGA RES)=COURE.FON
       o  For 8514/A, these entries must be changed to:
          SYMBOL 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SYMBOLG.FON
          MS SANS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SSERIFG.FON
          MS SERIF 8,10,12,14,18,24 (8514 RES)=SERIFG.FON
          SMALL FONTS (8514 RES)=SMALLG.FON
          COURIER 10,12,15 (8514 RES)=COURG.FON
       o  Save the changes to the SYSTEM.INI file.

The system is ready to run Windows programs in WIN-OS/2 full-screen sessions high-resolution mode.

Preparing to Switch to a Different Display Adapter 243/3

Because SVGA adapters are only compatible at the VGA level, the system must be restored to VGA in order to safely install a different display adapter. To set your system back to VGA:

  1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
     screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.

Your display adapter is restored and can work in VGA mode. If you want to install a new display adapter or video device driver, complete the steps under Installing a Video Device Driver.

Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection 244/3

If you performed the steps in Installing a Video Device Driver and selected an incorrect display driver you can recover by restoring to VGA mode. To restore to VGA mode:

  1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your
     screen, press Alt+F1.
  3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press V.
  4. Use Selective Install to install support for another high-resolution
     display adapter.  See Installing a Video Device Driver for instructions.

Capturing the Display Configuration 245/3

SVGA display and video mode configuration under OS/2 is controlled by the SVGADATA.PMI file. This file can be provided by the display adapter manufacturer or created using the SVGA utility program. The SVGA utility program gets information from the SVGA chip set to set each video mode and captures the current state of the display adapter. This information is stored in the SVGADATA.PMI file and used when the system is started. Both the SVGA.EXE and SVGADATA.PMI are located in the \OS2 directory. To create the SVGADATA.PMI file, type one of the following commands at a DOS command prompt and press Enter.

SVGA ON           Generates the SVGADATA.PMI file which enables OS/2 SVGA
                  support.
SVGA ON DOS       Generates PMI information when executed outside the OS/2 DOS
                  environment.  This generates an SVGADATA.DOS file that can be
                  renamed to .PMI and copied to the \OS2 directory.  This entry
                  might be required if your SVGA adapter uses DOS device
                  drivers to configure the display. Trident** adapters are an
                  example.
SVGA ON INIT      Generates default display information for some TSENG** and
                  Cirrus Logic** based display adapters.
SVGA OFF          Deletes the SVGADATA.PMI file, disabling OS/2 SVGA support.
SVGA STATUS       Returns your graphics chipset, as it appears to OS/2.
Note:  The SVGA utility program might be affected by video configuration
programs, Terminate Stay Resident programs (TSR), and switches and jumpers on
the display adapter.  Configure your video adapter properly before using the
SVGA utility program to create the SVGADATA.PMI file.

Switching to a Display with Less Capability 246/3

Switching to a lower capability display after installing high-resolution (SVGA) drivers might cause the system to start out of synchronization. Follow this procedure to switch to a display with less capability:

  1. Open DOS Full-Screen command prompt.
  2. Run the DOS display configuration utility program supplied with your SVGA
     adapter to properly configure your display adapter and display.
  3. Change to the \OS2 directory on your hard disk.
  4. Type SVGA ON.
  5. Press Enter to start the SVGA utility program.  This utility program saves
     the current state of your video configuration.
  6. Shut down your system.
  7. Restart your system to enable the new display.

Note: You can also use these instructions if you start a specific version of DOS. Substitute the following step for step 4. Type SVGA ON DOS and press Enter. When the SVGA utility program finishes, type:

RENAME\OS2\SVGADATA.DOS \OS2\SVGADATA.PMI

Press Enter.

XGA Procedures 247/2+

The following information relates to specific situations with high-resolution XGA displays.

XGA-2 Display Type Override 248/3

To correctly operate your display, OS/2 needs to determine the type and characteristics of the device by using a display identification number. Some displays have the same identification number but different characteristics. If OS/2 does not operate your display at the correct refresh rate or display mode, and you are running an XGA-2 adapter, do the following:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open System.  The System Settings notebook appears.
  4. Select page 2 of the Screen page.  (You can go to page 2 by selecting the
     right arrow in the lower-right corner of the notebook.)
  5. Select the appropriate display type using the list provided.
     Note:  If an incorrect display type is selected, your display might be
     unusable after you restart your system.
  6. Close the Settings notebook.

Recovering from an Incorrect Display Type Selection 249/3

If you performed the steps in XGA-2 Display Type Override and your display is not usable, you can revert back to the previous display type. To erase the display type override information:

1. Turn on the computer.  If the computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart it.
2. When a small white box appears in the upper left-hand corner of your screen, press Alt+F1.
3. When the Recovery Choices screen appears, press C.
4. Change to the C:\XGA$DMQS directory and delete the XGASETUP.PRO file.
   This erases all override information from your system.
5. Remove the diskette and restart your system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.
   Your display now operates using its default settings.

Note: If you plan to change or replace your display, first delete the file XGASETUP.PRO from the XGA$DMQS directory and then turn off the system. If your new display does not operate correctly, repeat the preceding procedure.

Changing Screen Resolution and Number of Colors 250/3

Note: You cannot use this procedure if you are using the VGA, 8514, or SVGA driver. To change the screen resolution or number of colors:

  1. Open OS/2 System.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open System.
  4. Select the desired resolution and number of colors from the list.
  5. Close the Settings notebook.
  6. Shut down and restart your system to make the new resolution and number of
     colors operational.

Note: The Microsoft Windows XGA full-screen driver does not support all the graphic modes handled by the OS/2 PM XGA driver. The full-screen Windows driver does not support 1024 x 768 x 16 color. If this mode is selected, the OS/2 Desktop will run at 1024 x 768 x 16 color, but the Windows full screen will operate in 1024 x 768 x 256 color mode.

Laptop LCD or Monochrome Plasma Displays 251/2

Laptop LCDs and computers with monochrome plasma displays use 16 shades of gray and operate like VGA displays. Note: If you run VGA DOS graphics programs on the OS/2 Desktop and your system does not have VGA support, your Desktop might be corrupted. You can optimize the color scheme for gray-scale usage, and also provide a good set of colors for a VGA Desktop presentation on a laptop LCD or monochrome plasma display. To change the color scheme and create a more readable display image:

1. Use your Reference Diskette or hardware Setup program to set your hardware
   to VGA color, if possible.
2. Open OS/2 System.
3. Open System Setup.
4. Open Scheme Palette.
5. Select the monochrome scheme in the right-hand column.
6. Close the Scheme Palette.

Part 5 - Advanced Installation 252/1

Using Advanced Installation    253/1+

This chapter provides examples of installing OS/2 on your computer using the Advanced Installation method. Advanced Installation is designed for experienced computer users who want to customize their installation in one or more of the following ways:

  o  Select specific software features of OS/2 to install, rather than the
     preselected group (see Examples 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)
  o  Install OS/2 on a drive or partition other than C (see Examples 1, 2, and
     3)
  o  Install OS/2 in a logical drive (see Examples 1, 2, and 3)
  o  Install OS/2 on a hard disk other than the first disk in the computer (see
     Example 3)
  o  Select the HPFS file system (see step 21 in Example 1)
  o  Install OS/2 so it can be used with Boot Manager (see Examples 1, 2, and
     3)
  o  Install OS/2 on a computer that does not have DOS and Windows on it (see
     Examples 4 and 5)
  o  Install OS/2 in one primary partition and delete all existing information
     on your hard disk (see Example 5)
If you have any problems during the installation, press the F1 key to view the
online help that is available whenever you see F1=Help at the bottom of a
screen. If you have problems with any of your hardware or if you receive error
messages, refer to Solving Installation Problems.
Planning for a Boot Manager Setup    254/2

During Advanced Installation, you will be asked to specify how you want to partition your hard disk. If you are installing more than one operating system, you will want to consider setting up multiple partitions to contain them. If you set up multiple partitions, you must install the Boot Manager feature. The Boot Manager helps you manage the selective startup of your operating systems. To find out more about partitioning your hard disk and installing Boot Manager, read Setting Up Your Hard Disk. before continuing with the Advanced Installation. For information about partition sizes, see -- Reference dpart not found --..

Installing the Operating System    255/2+

The sections that follow provide examples of typical installation setups.

  o  Example 1 shows how to repartition your hard disk to create a Boot Manager
     partition, a primary partition for DOS and Windows, and a logical drive
     for OS/2.
  o  Example 2 shows how to preserve an existing partition that already
     contains DOS and Windows, and create a Boot Manager partition and a
     logical drive for OS/2 on a hard disk that has available free space.
  o  Example 3 shows an installation on a computer with two hard disks.  In
     this example, a Boot Manager partition and a primary partition for DOS and
     Windows are created on the first hard disk. On the second hard disk, two
     logical drives are created, one to hold data (with drive letter D) and one
     for OS/2 (with drive letter E).
  o  Example 4 and Example 5 show how to install OS/2 on a computer that has no
     other operating systems already installed on it.  The Boot Manager is not
     installed in these installation examples.
     Note:  If you install OS/2 on a computer without Windows, you will not be
     able to use Windows programs.
To make the installation as easy as possible, select the example that most
closely resembles your system and the way you want to customize it.  If you
need more detailed explanations of the Boot Manager, the FDISK utility, the
file systems available in OS/2, or hard disk partitioning, please read Setting
Up Your Hard Disk.
Note:  Be sure you have read As You Begin before installing OS/2.
Example 1    256/3

Creating a Boot Manager Partition, a Primary Partition for DOS and Windows, and a Logical Drive for OS/2 and Data In the following example, a 120MB hard disk that contains one primary partition with DOS and Windows in it will be deleted and replaced with the following partitions:

  o  A 1MB Boot Manager partition
  o  A 20MB primary partition for DOS and Windows (drive C)
  o  A 99MB logical drive for OS/2 and data (drive D)
Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, you can
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
to be.  Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
hard disk.
  1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
     existing operating system to back up the data.)
  2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
  3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.  If you are installing OS/2
     from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
  4. Turn your computer on.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
     press Enter.  As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
     asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
  6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
     Then press Enter.
  7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
     specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
  8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
     continue with the installation.
  9. Delete the existing partition (which you have backed up):
       a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
       b. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete.
       c. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       d. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
       e. Repeat steps a through d for any other partitions you want to delete
 10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
       a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
       c. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
 11. Create the DOS and Windows primary partition:
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
       b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
       c. Type the size of the primary partition (in this example, 20) and
          press Enter.
       d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
       e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
       f. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
       g. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
       h. Type a name for this partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and press
          Enter.
 12. Create the logical drive for OS/2 and your data:
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
       b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
       c. Accept the size of the logical drive (in this example, 99) by
          pressing Enter.
          Note:  If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 99), you would also
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
          of free space or at the start of free space.
       d. Select Extended Logical Driveand press Enter.
       e. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
       f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
       g. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS2/DATA) and press
          Enter.
 13. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
     startup time):
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS2/DATA line (or whatever name
          you have given the logical drive) and press Enter.
       b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
       c. Select Default and press Enter.  The name you typed for the logical
          drive will appear next to Default.
          Note:  If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
          after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
          Display Time now. Then continue with step d.
       d. Press F3.
 14. Exit the FDISK screen:
       a. Press F3.
       b. Press any key to remove the message box.
       c. Select Save and exit and press Enter.
       d. When a message appears confirming that the hard disk partitioning is
          complete, remove Diskette 1from drive A. Do not insert the
          Installation Diskette.  Continue with step 15.
 15. Install DOS and Windows:
       a. Insert the DOS installation diskette into drive A, and then press
          Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
       b. Follow the instructions that came with DOS to install it. If prompted
          to do so during the DOS installation, format the partition and
          logical drive you created in the previous steps.
       c. After DOS is installed, the Boot Manager menu appears. Select the DOS
          partition and press Enter.
       d. Install Windows in the primary partition you created for it (in this
          example, it is drive C).  Follow the installation instructions that
          came with Windows.
          Note:   If you receive a message about the Windows swapper file, you
          should avoid putting the swapper file in the same partition or
          logical drive as OS/2.  However, if you put the Windows swapper file
          in the same partition or logical drive as OS/2, make sure you leave
          enough free space for OS/2, and create a temporary Windows swapper
          file.
 16. Continue the OS/2 installation:
       a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A and press Ctrl+Alt+Del
          to restart your computer.
       b. When the IBM logo screen appears, remove the Installation Diskette
          and insert Diskette 1into drive A.  Then press Enter.
       c. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option
          2, specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
       d. When the warning screen appears, press Enter to continue.
 17. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
       a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
       b. Highlight the OS2/DATA line (or whatever name you have given the
          logical drive) and press Enter.
       c. Select Set installable and press Enter.
       d. Press F3 to exit the FDISK screen.
 18. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
     Accept the drive, and press Enter.  (In this example, the screen will show
     drive D as the selected drive.)
 19. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
     2.  Then press Enter.  (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
     any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
 20. When a screen appears asking if you want to format the OS/2 partition, do
     one of the following:
       o  Select Do not format the partition if you want to use the FAT file
          system.  Then press Enter.  Continue with step 22.
       o  Select Format the partition if you want to use the HPFS file system.
          Then press Enter.  Continue with step 21.
         Refer to Selecting a File System for an explanation of the file
         systems.
 21. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
     with which you want to format the OS/2 logical drive.
 22. Follow the instructions on the screen.  If you are installing from
     diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
     installation progresses.
     After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
     and then reinsert Diskette 1   Follow the instructions on the screen.
     After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
     screen, followed by the System Configuration screen:
 23. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
     hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
     Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
     If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
     click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
     will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
     hardware device.  If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
     refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
     about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
     display, refer to Video Procedures
     Follow the instructions on each screen.   Click on Help if you need more
     information about any screen you see.
     If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
     OK.
     A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
     (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
     program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
 24. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
     or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
     names.  Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
       o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
          LPT3 button.  Then press Enter.
       o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
          COM3, or COM4 button.  Then press Enter.
         If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
         install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
         and Installation screen appears:
 25. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
     Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration in the
     menu bar at the top of the screen.  Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
     during Installation for more information.
 26. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
     features you want to install.  You will notice that some features have a
     check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
     The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
     right of the feature.
     Follow these steps:
       a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
       b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
       c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
 27. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
     want to select.  Then click on OK.
 28. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen.  If you are installing
     from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
     including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.  After inserting each
     diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
 29. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
     Configuration/Selection Utility screen.  Follow the instructions on the
     screen; click on Help if you need more information.
 30. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
     of the OS/2 installation.
 31. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one
     of the following:
       o  If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
            a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
            b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
            c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
               requested.
       o  If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
            a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
            b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
            c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
               type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.
               For example:
               e:\winsetup
               where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup
               is the directory that contains the Windows files.
 32. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and press Enter.
 33. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
     and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press Enter.
 34. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
your Desktop.  The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
Example 2    257/3

Creating a Boot Manager Partition, Keeping an Existing Primary Partition for DOS and Windows (without Repartitioning), and Creating Logical Drives for OS/2 and Data In this example, a hard disk of 120MB currently consists of a primary partition of 40MB (containing DOS and Windows) and a logical drive of 80MB (which might contain data). The DOS/Windows primary partition (drive C) will be preserved, but the logical drive will be deleted and replaced by:

  o  A 1MB Boot Manager partition
  o  A 39MB logical drive for data (drive D)
  o  A 40MB logical drive for OS/2 (drive E)
In this example, you will create free space on your hard disk and then put the
Boot Manager partition at the end of the free space. Of course, you can
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
to be.   Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on the
drive you are repartitioning.
  1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing logical drive. (Use
     your existing operating system to back up the data.)
  2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
  3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.  If you are installing OS/2
     from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
  4. Turn your computer on.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1  Then
     press Enter.   As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
     asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
  6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
     Then press Enter.
  7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
     specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
  8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
     continue with the installation.
  9. Delete the existing logical drive (which you have backed up):
       a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
       b. Highlight the line that contains information about the logical drive
          you are going to delete.  Then press Enter.
       c. Select Delete partition from the Options menu and press Enter.
 10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
       b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
       c. Select Create at End of Free Space and press Enter.
 11. Create the first logical drive (for data):
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
       b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
       c. Type the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 39) and
          press Enter.
       d. Select Extended Logical Driveand press Enter.
       e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
 12. Create the second logical drive (for OS/2):
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
       b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
       c. Accept the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 40  )
          by pressing Enter.
          Note:  If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 40), you would also
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
          of free space or at the start of free space.
       d. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
       e. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
       g. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS/2) and press
          Enter.
 13. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
     startup time):
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
          have given this logical drive) and press Enter.
       b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
       c. Select Default and press Enter.  The name you typed for the OS/2
          logical drive will appear next to Default.
          Note:  If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
          after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
          Display Time Then continue with step d.
       d. Press F3.
 14. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
          have given this logical drive) and press Enter.
       b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
 15. Add a name for the DOS/Windows partition to the Boot Manager startup menu:
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the line that contains information
          about the DOS/Windows partition.
       b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       c. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
       d. Type a name for this partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and press
          Enter.
 16. Exit the FDISK screen:
       a. Press F3.
       b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
 17. Continue with the installation.  You will be asked to reinsert the
     Installation Diskette and Diskette 1  Follow the messages on the screen.
 18. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
     Accept the drive, and press Enter.  (In this example, the screen will show
     drive E as the selected drive.)
 19. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
     2.  Then press Enter.  (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
     any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
 20. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
     want to use for your OS/2 drive.   (Refer to Selecting a File System)
 21. Follow the instructions on the screen.  If you are installing from
     diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
     installation progresses.
     After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
     and then reinsert Diskette 1   Follow the instructions on the screen.
     After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
     screen, followed by the System Configuration screen.
 22. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
     hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
     Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
     If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
     click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
     will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
     hardware device.  If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
     refer to the documentation that came with it. If you need information
     about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
     display, refer Video Procedures.
     Follow the instructions on each screen.   Click on Help if you need more
     information about any screen you see.
     If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
     OK.
     A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
     (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
     program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
 23. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
     or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
     names.  Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
       o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
          LPT3 button.  Then press Enter.
       o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
          COM3, or COM4 button.  Then press Enter.
         If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
         install default printer and press Enter or click on OK.  The OS/2
         Setup and Installation screen appears.
 24. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
 25. Click on Format on the pull-down menu.  Then indicate which file system
     you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold your data
     (in this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to Selecting a File
     System for an explanation of the file systems.  Click on Format when you
     are done.
 26. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
 27. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
     Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration on the
     menu bar at the top of the screen.  Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
     during Installation for more information.
 28. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
     features you want to install.  You will notice that some features have a
     check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
     The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
     right of the feature.
     Follow these steps:
       a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
       b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
       c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
 29. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
     want to select.  Then click on OK.
 30. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen.  If you are installing
     from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
     including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.  After inserting each
     diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
 31. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
     Configuration/Selection Utility screen.  Follow the instructions on the
     screen; click on Help if you need more information.
 32. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
     of the OS/2 installation.
 33. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
     and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press Enter.
 34. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
your Desktop.  The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
Example 3    258/3

Creating a Boot Manager Partition and a Primary Partition for DOS and Windows on the First Hard Disk, and Logical Drives for OS/2 and Data on the Second Hard Disk In the following example, a system with two hard disk drives (one 80MB in size with DOS and Windows on it, and the other 200MB in size with programs and data on it) will be reformatted and replaced with the following partitions and logical drives:

  o  The first hard disk:
       -  A 1MB Boot Manager partition
       -  A 79MB primary partition for DOS and Windows (drive C)
  o  The second hard disk:
       -  A 155MB logical drive for programs and data (drive D)
       -  A 45MB logical drive for OS/2 (drive E)
Notice that in this example, because only one primary partition (drive C) is
created on the first hard disk, no drive remapping occurs for your data drive
(drive D). That is, if your data files were previously in drive D on the second
hard disk, they will still be in logical drive D after repartitioning and
installing OS/2.  Of course, you must back up your data files before
repartitioning, and then restore the files to drive D when the OS/2
installation is completed.
You will also notice that when you create only logical drives on your second
hard disk, the FDISK utility program will automatically set up a small (usually
1MB) primary partition at the start of free space.  That is because it must
reserve space for the partition table at the start of the hard disk.  However,
this partition will not be assigned a drive letter, and will not cause drive
remapping or interfere with the use of the logical drives you create on this
disk.
Use the following steps to set up your hard disks this way. Of course, you can
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
to be.   Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
hard disks.
  1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partitions. (Use your
     existing operating system to back up the data.)  Be sure to back up data
     on both hard disks.
  2. If your computer is on, close all running programs.
  3. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.  If you are installing OS/2
     from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
  4. Turn your computer on.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  5. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
     press Enter.  As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
     asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.  Then a screen appears.
  6. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
     Then press Enter.
  7. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
     specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
  8. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
     continue with the installation.
  9. Delete the existing partition on the first hard disk (which you have
     backed up):
       a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
       b. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete.
       c. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       d. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
       e. Repeat steps a through d for any other partitions you want to delete
          on the first hard disk.
 10. Create the Boot Manager partition and install the Boot Manager:
       a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       b. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
       c. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
 11. Create the primary partition for DOS and Windows:
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
       b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
       c. Accept the size of the partition (in this example, 79) by pressing
          Enter.
          Note:  If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 79), you would also
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the partition at the end of
          free space or at the start of free space.
       d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
       e. At the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
       f. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
       g. Type a name for this primary partition (for example, DOS/WIN) and
          press Enter.
 12. Delete the existing partition on the second hard disk (which you have
     backed up):
       a. At the FDISK screen, press the Tab key to highlight Disk at the top
          of the screen.
       b. Press the Right Arrow key to display the FDISK screen for the second
          hard disk.
       c. Press the Tab key to highlight the first partition listed on the
          FDISK screen.
       d. Highlight the line that contains the partition you want to delete and
          press Enter.
       e. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
       f. Repeat steps a through e for any other partitions you want to delete
          on the second hard disk.
 13. Create the logical drive for OS/2:
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
       b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
       c. Type the size of the logical drive (in this example, 45) and press
          Enter.
       d. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
       e. Select Create at End of Free Space and press Enter.
       f. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       g. Select Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
       h. Type a name for this logical drive (for example, OS/2) and press
          Enter.
 14. Set up OS/2 as the default (the operating system you want preselected at
     startup time):
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you
          have given the logical drive for OS/2) and press Enter.
       b. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
       c. Select Default and press Enter.  The name you typed for the OS/2
          logical drive will appear next to Default.
          Note:  If you want to change any other startup values, you can do so
          after installation or you can use the steps under Setting the Menu
          Display Time now. Then continue with step d.
       d. Press F3.
 15. Create the logical drive for data:
       a. At the FDISK screen, highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
       b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
       c. Accept the size of the logical drive (in this example, 155) by
          pressing Enter.
          Note:  If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 155), you would also
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the partition at the end of
          free space or at the start of free space.
       d. Select Extended Logical Drive and Press Enter.
 16. Exit the FDISK screen:
       a. Press F3.
       b. Press any key to remove the message box.
       c. Select Save and exit and press Enter.
       d. When a message appears confirming the hard disk partitioning is
          complete, remove Diskette 1from drive A.  Do not insert the
          Installation Diskette.  Continue with step 17.
 17. Install DOS and Windows on the first hard disk:
       a. Insert the DOS installation diskette into drive A, and then press
          Ctrl+Alt+Del to restart your computer.
       b. Follow the instructions that came with DOS to install it.  If
          prompted to do so during the DOS installation, format the partition
          and logical drives you created in the previous steps.
       c. After DOS is installed, the Boot Manager menu appears.  Select the
          DOS partition and press Enter.
       d. Install Windows in the primary partition you created for it (in this
          example, it is drive C).  Follow the installation instructions that
          came with Windows.
          Note:  If you receive a message about the Windows swapper file, you
          should avoid putting the swapper file in the same partition or
          logical drive as OS/2.  However, if you put the Windows swapper file
          in the same partition or logical drive as OS/2, make sure you leave
          enough free space for OS/2, and create a temporary Windows swapper
          file.
 18. Continue the OS/2 installation:
       a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A and press Ctrl+Alt+Del
          to restart your computer.
       b. When the IBM logo screen appears, remove the Installation Diskette
          and insert Diskette 1into drive A.  Then press Enter.
       c. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option
          2, specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
       d. When the warning screen appears, press Enter to continue.
 19. Indicate which partition should be used to install OS/2:
       a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
       b. Press the Tab key to highlight Disk at the top of the FDISK screen.
       c. Press the Right Arrow key to display the FDISK screen for the second
          hard disk.
       d. Press the Tab key to highlight the first partition listed on the
          FDISK screen.
       e. Highlight the OS/2 line (or whatever name you have given the OS/2
          logical drive) and press Enter.
       f. Select Set installable and press Enter.
       g. Press F3 to exit the FDISK screen.
 20. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
     Accept the drive, and press Enter.  (In this example, the screen will show
     drive E as the selected drive.)
 21. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
     2.  Then press Enter.  (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
     any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
 22. When a screen appears asking if you want to format the OS/2 partition, do
     one of the following:
       o  Select Do not format the partition if you want to use the FAT file
          system.  Then press Enter.  Continue with step 24.
       o  Select Format the partition if you want to use the HPFS file system.
          Then press Enter.  Continue with step 23.
         Refer to Selecting a File System for an explanation of the file
         systems.
 23. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system
     with which you want to format the OS/2 logical drive. If a warning screen
     appears, press Enter to continue with the installation.
 24. Follow the instructions on the screen.  If you are installing from
     diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes as the
     installation progresses.
 25. After Diskette 6, you will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette
     and then reinsert Diskette 1   Follow the instructions on the screen.
     After you remove Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo
     screen, followed by the System Configuration screen.
 26. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
     hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
     Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
     If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
     click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
     will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
     hardware device.  If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
     refer to the documentation that came with it.  If you need information
     about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
     display, refer to Video Procedures.
     Follow the instructions on each screen.   Click on Help if you need more
     information about any screen you see.
     If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
     OK.
     A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
     (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
     program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
 27. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
     or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
     names.  Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
       o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
          LPT3 button.  Then press Enter.
       o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
          COM3, or COM4 button.  Then press Enter.
         If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
         install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
         and Installation screen appears.
 28. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
 29. Click on Format on the pull-down menu.  Then indicate which file system
     you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold data (in
     this example, the logical drive is drive D).  Refer to Selecting a File
     System for an explanation of the file systems.  Click on Format when you
     are done.
 30. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
 31. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
     Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration in the
     menu bar at the top of the screen.  Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
     during Installation for more information.
 32. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
     features you want to install.  You will notice that some features have a
     check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
     The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
     right of the feature.
     Follow these steps:
       a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
       b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
       c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
 33. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
     want to select.  Then click on OK.
 34. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen.  If you are installing
     from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
     including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.  After inserting each
     diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
 35. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
     Configuration/Selection Utility screen.  Follow the instructions on the
     screen; click on Help if you need more information.
 36. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
     of the OS/2 installation.
 37. When a screen appears asking you to insert your Windows diskettes, do one
     of the following:
       o  If you installed Windows from diskettes, follow these steps:
            a. Remove the OS/2 diskette that is currently in drive A.
            b. Insert the requested Windows diskette and press Enter.
            c. Continue removing and inserting your Windows diskettes as
               requested.
       o  If you installed Windows from a CD, follow these steps:
            a. Remove the OS/2 CD from the CD-ROM drive.
            b. Insert the Windows CD into the CD-ROM drive and press Enter.
            c. When prompted for the location of the Windows files on the CD,
               type the drive letter and directory name in the field provided.
               For example:
               e:\winsetup
               where e: is the letter of the CD-ROM drive, and where \winsetup
               is the directory that contains the Windows files.
            d. When prompted to do so, remove the Windows diskette or CD and
               press Enter.
            e. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to
               shut down and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press
               Enter.
            f. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on
               your screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
your Desktop.  The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
Example 4    259/3

Creating a Primary Partition for OS/2 and a Logical Drive for Data The following example shows how to set up your hard disk to install OS/2 in one partition and your data in another partition. It does not involve the installation of the Boot Manager. You can use this setup if you are installing on a computer that does not have DOS, Windows, or any other operating systems on it, or if you want to replace all existing operating systems with OS/2. In this example, an 80MB hard disk is replaced by:

  o  A 45MB primary partition in which OS/2 will be installed (drive C)
  o  A 35MB logical drive, which will be used to hold programs and data (drive
     D)
Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, you can
customize the partition sizes to accommodate the size you want your partitions
to be.   Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
hard disk.
  1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
     existing operating system to back up the data.)
  2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.  If you are installing OS/2
     from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
  3. Turn your computer on.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
     press Enter.   As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
     asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
  5. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
     Then press Enter.
  6. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
     specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
  7. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
     continue with the installation.
  8. Delete the existing partition (which you have backed up):
       a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
       b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       c. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
  9. Create the primary partition for OS/2:
       a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       b. Select Create partition and press Enter.
       c. Type the size of the primary partition (in this example, 45) and
          press Enter.
       d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
       e. Select Create at Start of Free Space and press Enter.
 10. Indicate that this partition should be used to install OS/2:
       a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
       c. Type a name for the partition (for example, OS/2), and press Enter.
 11. Create the logical drive for your data:
       a. Highlight the Free Space line.
       b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       c. Select Create partition and press Enter.
       d. Accept the size of the extended logical drive (in this example, 35  )
          by pressing Enter.
          Note:  If you had entered a number smaller than the remaining space
          on your hard disk (in this example, smaller than 35), you would also
          have to indicate if you wanted to create the logical drive at the end
          of free space or at the start of free space.
       e. Select Extended Logical Drive and press Enter.
 12. Exit the FDISK screen:
       a. Press F3.
       b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
 13. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove and insert diskettes.
 14. When the Welcome screen reappears, select Advanced Installation and press
     Enter.
 15. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
     Accept the drive, and press Enter.  (In this example, the screen will show
     drive C as the selected drive.)
 16. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
     2.  Then press Enter.  (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
     any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
 17. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
     want to use for your OS/2 partition.  (Refer to Selecting a File System.)
 18. When prompted to do so, remove and insert diskettes. After Diskette 6, you
     will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then reinsert
     Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screen.  After you remove
     Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo screen, followed by
     the System Configuration screen.
 19. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
     hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
     Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
     If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
     click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
     will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
     hardware device.  If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
     refer to the documentation that came with it.  If you need information
     about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
     display, refer to Video Procedures.
     Follow the instructions on each screen.   Click on Help if you need more
     information about any screen you see.
     If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
     OK.
     A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
     (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
     program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
 20. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
     or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
     names.  Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
       o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
          LPT3 button.  Then press Enter.
       o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
          COM3, or COM4 button.  Then press Enter.
         If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
         install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
         and Installation screen appears.
 21. Click on Options on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
 22. Click on Format on the pull-down menu.  Then indicate which file system
     you want to use to format the logical drive you created to hold data (in
     this example, the logical drive is drive D). Refer to Selecting a File
     System for an explanation of the file systems.  Click on Format when you
     are done.
 23. When a warning screen appears, click on Format to continue.
 24. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
     Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration on the
     menu bar at the top of the screen. Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
     during Installation for more information.
 25. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
     features you want to install.  You will notice that some features have a
     check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
     The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
     right of the feature.
     Follow these steps:
       a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
       b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
       c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
 26. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
     want to select.  Then click on OK.
 27. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen.  If you are installing
     from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
     including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.  After inserting each
     diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
 28. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
     Configuration/Selection Utility screen.  Follow the instructions on the
     screen; click on Help if you need more information.
 29. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
     of the OS/2 installation.
 30. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
     and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press Enter.
 31. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
your Desktop.  The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
Example 5    260/3

Creating One Primary Partition for OS/2 The following example shows how to set up your hard disk to install OS/2 in one primary partition (drive C). It does not involve the installation of the Boot Manager. You can use this setup if you want to reformat your existing hard disk and replace all the information on the disk with OS/2. You can also use this example if you want to reformat your hard disk with a different file system (for example, you now want to use the FAT file system on a computer that was previously formatted with the HPFS file system). In this example, an 80MB hard disk is replaced by:

  o  An 80MB primary partition in which OS/2 will be installed (drive C)
Use the following steps to set up your hard disk this way. Of course, the size
of your hard disk may be different from the size of the disk used in this
example.  Be aware that this procedure will delete all data currently on your
hard disk.
  1. Back up any data you want to save from the existing partition. (Use your
     existing operating system to back up the data.)
  2. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A. If you are installing OS/2
     from a CD, also insert the OS/2 CD into the CD-ROM drive.
  3. Turn your computer on.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  4. Remove the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert Diskette 1 Then
     press Enter.   As files are loaded into memory, you will see messages
     asking you to wait, followed by a black screen.
  5. Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight Advanced Installation.
     Then press Enter.
  6. When the Installation Drive Selection screen appears, select option 2,
     specify a different drive or partition, and press Enter.
  7. When the Modifying Partitions Warning screen appears, press Enter to
     continue with the installation.
  8. Delete existing partitions (which you have backed up):
       a. At the FDISK screen, press any key to remove the message box.
       b. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       c. Select Delete partition and press Enter.
       d. Repeat steps a through c for all partitions you want to delete.
  9. Create the primary partition for OS/2:
       a. Highlight the Free Space line and press Enter.
       b. From the Options menu, select Create partition and press Enter.
       c. Accept the size of the partition (in this example, 80) by pressing
          Enter.
       d. Select Primary Partition and press Enter.
 10. Indicate that this partition should be used to install OS/2:
       a. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
       b. Select Set installable and press Enter.
       c. Type a name for the partition (for example, OS/2), and press Enter.
 11. Exit the FDISK screen:
       a. Press F3.
       b. Select Save and Exit and press Enter.
 12. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove and insert diskettes.
 13. When the Welcome screen reappears, select Advanced Installation and press
     Enter.
 14. When the Installation Drive Selection screen reappears, select option 1,
     Accept the drive, and press Enter.  (In this example, the screen will show
     drive C as the selected drive.)
 15. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert Diskette
     2.  Then press Enter.  (If you are installing from a CD, you will not see
     any messages to remove and insert diskettes.)
 16. When the Select the File System screen appears, select the file system you
     want to use for your OS/2 partition. (Refer to Selecting a File System.)
 17. When prompted to do so, remove and insert diskettes. After Diskette 6, you
     will be asked to reinsert the Installation Diskette and then reinsert
     Diskette 1 Follow the instructions on the screen.  After you remove
     Diskette 1and press Enter, you will see the OS/2 logo screen, followed by
     the System Configuration screen.
 18. The System Configuration screen shows your country configuration and the
     hardware devices that the Installation program detected on your system.
     Check the choices on the screen to be sure they are correct.
     If any of the hardware listed on the screen is incorrect, use the mouse to
     click on the icon (the small picture) next to the device name.   A screen
     will appear where you can indicate the correct information about your
     hardware device.  If you are unsure about the hardware you are using,
     refer to the documentation that came with it.  If you need information
     about which device drivers to select for your primary or secondary
     display, refer to Video Procedures.
     Follow the instructions on each screen.   Click on Help if you need more
     information about any screen you see.
     If the information on the System Configuration screen is correct, click on
     OK.
     A special note about Super VGA displays: If your system has a Super VGA
     (SVGA) display, you will see a screen at the end of the Installation
     program where you can configure your computer for the SVGA display.
 19. When the Select System Default Printer window appears, use the arrow keys
     or your mouse to highlight the name of your printer in the list of printer
     names.  Then indicate the port to which your printer is attached:
       o  If your printer is connected to a parallel port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has pins), click on the LPT1, LPT2, or
          LPT3 button.  Then press Enter.
       o  If your printer is connected to a serial port (the connector on the
          PC end of the printer cable has holes), click on the COM1, COM2,
          COM3, or COM4 button.  Then press Enter.
         If you do not have a printer attached to your computer, select Do not
         install default printer and press Enter or click on OK. The OS/2 Setup
         and Installation screen appears.
 20. If you want to modify your CONFIG.SYS file, you can do so from the OS/2
     Setup and Installation screen.  Click on Software configuration on the
     menu bar at the top of the screen.  Refer to Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File
     during Installation for more information.
 21. The OS/2 Setup and Installation screen lets you select the software
     features you want to install.  You will notice that some features have a
     check mark next to them, which means they are selected for installation.
     The amount of hard disk space required for each feature is shown to the
     right of the feature. Follow these steps:
       a. Click on options you do not want to install to deselect them. By
          deselecting features, you will save hard disk space.
       b. If a More button appears to the right of an option, click on the
          button to see additional items you can select or deselect.
       c. Click on Install when you are done making all your selections.
 22. When the Advanced Options window appears, click on any options you do not
     want to select.  Then click on OK.
 23. Follow the instructions that appear on each screen.  If you are installing
     from diskettes, you will be asked to remove and insert diskettes,
     including one or more Printer Driver diskettes.  After inserting each
     diskette, click on OK or press Enter.
 24. If you have a Super VGA (SVGA) display, you will see the Monitor
     Configuration/Selection Utility screen.  Follow the instructions on the
     screen; click on Help if you need more information.
 25. When prompted to do so, insert the Display Driver diskettes that are part
     of the OS/2 installation.
 26. When the OS/2 Installation is complete, you will be prompted to shut down
     and restart your computer.  Click on OK or press Enter.
 27. When your computer restarts, the OS/2 Tutorial will appear on your screen.
Please view the tutorial to learn about the features of OS/2 and how to use
your Desktop.  The tutorial also provides information to help you make the
transition from DOS and Windows to OS/2.
Configuring Your Boot Manager Menu    261/2+

After installing OS/2 (and the Boot Manager), you can go back and make changes to the Boot Manager menu, such as how long the menu should be displayed and how information on the menu should appear. To do so, follow these steps:

  1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
  2. Open Drive.
  3. Press mouse button 2 to display a pop-up menu.
  4. Select Create partition.
  5. At the Fixed Disk Utility screen, make any changes you want to the
     setting.  Select Help if you need more information.
Setting the Menu Display Time    262/3

To indicate how long you want the Boot Manager startup menu displayed when you start your system, follow these steps:

  1. From the Startup Values menu, you can do one of the following:
       o  If you want the menu displayed for a certain period of time before
          the default operating system starts, accept the value of Yes.
       o  If you want the menu to be displayed indefinitely (until you
          explicitly select a choice from the menu), highlight Timer and press
          Enter to change the value to No.
  2. If you accepted the value of Yes, indicate how long you want the menu
     displayed before the default operating system is started. You can do one
     of the following:
       o  Accept the value listed next to Timeout.
       o  Change the value as follows:
            a. Select Timeout and press Enter.
            b. Type the amount of time (in seconds) that you want the menu
               displayed before the preselected operating system is
               automatically started.
            c. Press Enter.
Setting the Menu Mode    263/3

You can select either Normal or Advanced for the Boot Manager menu mode. If you select Advanced, your Boot Manager menu will include additional information about your partitions. To change the mode that is currently displayed, follow these steps:

  1. Highlight Mode on the Startup Values menu.
  2. Press Enter.
When you have finished configuring your Boot Manager menu, press F3.
Bypassing the Boot Manager Menu    264/2

After the Boot Manager is installed, you can use the SETBOOT command if you want to restart your computer to a specified drive without going through the Boot Manager menu. The SETBOOT command immediately restarts the system. The parameter for SETBOOT is /IBD:drive, where drive is the letter of a startable partition. For example, from the OS/2 command prompt, you can type: setboot /ibd:e to restart your system and start the operating system using drive E, without displaying the Boot Manager menu. See the Command Reference for more information about the SETBOOT command. (The Command Reference is located in the Information folder on your OS/2 Desktop.)

What to Do if You Have Problems during Installation    265/2

The installation of OS/2 is generally a straightforward process and, in most cases, you will not encounter any problems. However, if you do have problems either during the installation process or immediately afterwards, refer to Solving Installation Problems. Problems you might encounter include:

  o  A blank screen after installation.
  o  An error message with a number and, sometimes, text.
  o  A hardware device that does not work.  (This problem can occur if you are
     using hardware that is not supported by OS/2.)
Using a Response File to Install OS/2    266/2+

This section describes how to use a response file to install OS/2. It is intended primarily for people who will be setting up workstations for others to use.

Understanding Response File Installation    267/3

If you have installed previous versions of OS/2 or other operating systems, you are familiar with installation procedures that require you to insert and remove a series of diskettes and answer screen prompts. When you use a response file to install, it is not necessary to answer any screen prompts. All the answers are in a response file that you place on installation Diskette 1 The Installation program reads the file from Diskette 1instead of prompting you for the installation information.

Adding the Sample Response File to Your System    268/3+

A sample response file is included on the OS/2 installation diskettes. When you install the operating system, this response file (called SAMPLE.RSP) is placed in the OS2\INSTALL directory. The SAMPLE.RSP file and other files needed for a response file installation are not automatically installed on your system if you installed OS/2 using the Easy Installation method. You must add these files to your system in order to use them. Follow these steps:

  1. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
  2. Open System Setup.
  3. Open Selective Install.  The Software Configuration screen appears.
  4. Select Optional System Utilities.
  5. Select the More push button to the right of Optional System Utilities.  A
     window appears with a list of utilities.
  6. Place a check mark next to Installation Utilities; then select Install.
  7. When prompted to do so, insert the requested installation diskettes.
     Select OK when you are done.
Modifying the Sample Response File    269/4

After you install the SAMPLE.RSP file on your own system, you can modify the SAMPLE.RSP file and use it to install OS/2 on another workstation. Use an editor (such as the System Editor) to modify the sample response file. The following is an excerpt from the sample response file:

  • AlternateAdapter
  • Specifies secondary adapter for two display systems.
  • This should be a lower or equal resolution display since
  • the highest resolution display will be primary for PM.
  • Valid Parms
  • 0=None (DEFAULT)
  • 1=Other than following (DDINSTAL will handle)
  • 2=Monochrome /Printer Adapter
  • 3=Color Graphics Adapter
  • 4=Enhanced Graphics Adapter
  • 5=PS/2 Display Adapter
  • 6=Video Graphics Adapter
  • 7=8514/A Adapter
  • 8=XGA Adapter
  • 9=SVGA Adapter

AlternateAdapter=0

Copying the Response File to Diskette 1    270/3

Use the following steps to make changes to the sample response file. After making the changes, you will copy the file to a copy of Diskette 1. You must also make some modifications to the copy of Diskette 1to make room on it for the response file.

  1. Install OS/2 on a computer.
  2. Open OS/2 System on your Desktop.
  3. Open Command Prompts.
  4. Open OS/2 Window.
  5. Insert Diskette 1into drive A.
  6. Type diskcopy a: a: and press Enter.
  7. When prompted to do so, remove Diskette 1from drive A and insert a blank,
     formatted diskette.  (This diskette will be used to make a copy of
     Diskette 1)
  8. Make sure the copy of Diskette 1is in drive A.  Then type del a:\mouse.sys
     and press Enter.
  9. Type del a:\sysinst2.exe and press Enter.
 10. If you are installing from a CD, this step is not necessary; go to step
     10.  If you are installing from diskettes, type del a:\bundle and press
     Enter.
 11. To edit the CONFIG.SYS file on the copy of Diskette 1 type e a:\config.sys
     and press Enter.
 12. Change the following statement from:
     SET OS2_SHELL=SYSINST2.EXE to the following:
     SET OS2_SHELL=RSPINST.EXE A:\OS2SE30.RS                                 P
 13. Delete the following statement from the CONFIG.SYS file:
     DEVICE=MOUSE.SYS
 14. Save and close the CONFIG.SYS file. At the prompt, type the following and
     press Enter after each command:
     CD\OS2\INSTALL
     COPY SAMPLE.RSP OS2SE30.RSP
 15. Use an editor (such as the System Editor) to make your changes to the
     response file so you can use it for installing OS/2. Then save and close
     the file.
 16. At the prompt, type the following and press Enter after each command:
     COPY OS2SE30.RSP A:
     COPY C:\RSPINST.EXE A:\
 17. Remove the copy of Diskette 1from drive A.
 18. If you have a non-Micro Channel computer, go to step 20. f you have a
     Micro Channel computer and the Reference Diskette contains ABIOS.SYS and
     *.BIO files, you will also need to modify the Installation Diskette that
     came with OS/2.  Follow these steps:
       a. Insert the Installation Diskette into drive A.
       b. Type diskcopy a: a: and press Enter.
       c. When prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette from drive A
          and insert a blank, formatted diskette.  Then press Enter. This makes
          a copy of the Installation Diskette, which you will use in the next
          step.
       d. Make sure the copy you just made of the Installation Diskette is in
          drive A.  Type the following and press Enter after each command:
          DEL A:\*.BIO
          DEL A:\ABIOS.SYS
       e. Remove the copy of the Installation Diskette from drive A and insert
          the Reference Diskette.
       f. Type the following and press Enter after each command:
          COPY A:\*.BIO C:\
          COPY A:\ABIOS.SYS C:\
       g. Remove the Reference Diskette from drive A and insert the copy of the
          Installation Diskette.  Type the following and press Enter after each
          command:
          COPY C:\*.BIO A:\
          COPY C:\ABIOS.SYS A:\
          Note:  This Installation Diskette copy is now system-specific. You
          will need to create a modified Installation Diskette for each type of
          system on which you are installing OS/2.
       h. Use this copy of the Installation Diskette during the installation
          process.
 19. When prompted for Diskette 1during the installation, insert the modified
     copy you made of Diskette 1and press Enter.
     From this point on, the Installation program will prompt only for the
     insertion of diskettes.  No other installation actions are necessary.
 20. When prompted to insert Diskette 1again, insert the original Diskette
     1into drive A.
Response files can be used to install the same set of options on multiple
workstations.  However, be sure that the workstations are set up with the same
set of options and hardware.
Installing OS/2 from a Local Area Network Source    271/2

You can use a response file to direct the installation from a source other than a diskette in drive A. For example, in a local area network (LAN), you could direct the installation to a drive on the server. This type of installation requires additional software (such as a LAN support product). Be aware of the following requirements for remote installation of OS/2:

  o  The RAM requirements vary from 6MB to 10MB or more, depending on the
     installation variables.
       -  Redirected remote installation requires more RAM than disk
          installation because the SWAPPER.DAT file is not active.
       -  If you are doing a redirected remote installation without CID
          (configuration, installation, and distribution), you need only about
          6MB of RAM.
       -  If you are using CID, the RAM requirements usually range from 6MB to
          8MB.
       -  If you are using a process on top of CID, such as NVDM/2, 8MB to 10MB
          (or more) might be required.  The main variable with CID is the size
          of the REXX procedure and which dynamic link libraries it pulls in.
          With remote installation, the LAN connection utility programs are the
          main variables.  The version of OS/2 that you are installing is
          another variable.
  o  During remote installation, the SWAPPER.DAT file is not active because the
     disk partition containing the active swapper file cannot be formatted
     during installation.  The SWAPPER.DAT file can be made active, but the
     disk partition has to be a local partition and it has to be preformatted.
     To activate the SWAPPER.DAT file, you must edit the CONFIG.SYS file. To do
     this, replace the existing MEMMAN=NOSWAP statement with the following:
     MEMMAN=SWAP,PROTECT
     SWAPPATH=D:\ 2048 4096
  o  Personal computers might require more RAM because the network drivers
     might have to store more data in the RAM buffers until the processor is
     able to handle the data.
For more information, refer to the following IBM publications:
     OS/2 Version 2.1 Remote Installation and Maintenance
      (GG24-3780)
     NTS/2 Redirected Installation and Configuration Guide (S96F-8488)
     NTS/2 LAN Adapter and Protocol Support Configuration Guide (S96F-8489)
     Automated Installation for CID-Enabled OS/2 2.x (GG24-3783)
     Automated Installation for CID-Enabled Extended Services, LAN Server V3.0
     and Network Transport Services/2 (GG24-3781)
Setting Up Your Hard Disk    272/1+

This chapter provides a detailed explanation of the Boot Manager feature available in OS/2, as well as information about hard disk partitioning and the FDISK utility program. This chapter will help you plan the setup of your hard disk before you begin installing OS/2. In addition, this chapter provides detailed descriptions of some of the installation tasks that are outlined in Using Advanced Installation. If you want more information about an Advanced Installation task as you are installing, refer to the descriptions in this chapter.

What Is the Boot Manager?    273/2

When you install multiple operating systems on your computer, you can use the Boot Manager feature to manage the selective startup of those systems. The Boot Manager startup menu lets you select which operating system you want to be active each time you start your system. The following is an example of what the Boot Manager startup menu would look like if you installed the Boot Manager and three operating systems. This menu would be displayed each time you started your computer, so that you could select which operating system should start. You use the FDISK utility program during the installation of OS/2 to install the Boot Manager feature. FDISK is a program supplied with OS/2 that can be used to manage such tasks as creating and deleting the partitions on your hard disk. Partitions are divisions you create on your hard disk to use as separate storage areas. The following is a brief list of the steps you follow to set up your hard disk for multiple operating systems.

  o  You install the Boot Manager in its own partition (usually 1MB in size).
  o  You then create partitions for any operating systems (including OS/2) you
     are going to install.
  o  Next, you install the other operating systems in the partitions
      you created for them.
     (If you want OS/2 to work with DOS and Windows, you must install DOS and
     Windows first.  Otherwise, most operating systems can be installed after
     installing OS/2.)
  o  Finally, you install the OS/2 operating system.
Hard Disk Partitioning    274/2+

A hard disk can be partitioned in several different ways. For example, your hard disk can have one partition that takes up the entire hard disk. However, if you are going to install multiple operating systems on your hard disk (and install the Boot Manager feature), you must separate the hard disk into multiple partitions. During the Advanced installation, you will be asked how you want your partitions set up. The default choice is to set up one partition (if you are installing on a hard disk with no data) or to preserve the setup of an existing hard disk. If you choose to specify your own partition, the FDISK screen is displayed. From the FDISK screen, you specify the number and type of partitions that you want created. Your hard disk can be separated into a maximum of four primary partitions. You can create primary partitions, which are typically used for operating systems. Note: If a partition is going to contain an operating system, the partition must be within the first 1024 cylinders. You can also create logical drives in an area of the hard disk that is outside the primary partitions. This area is known as the extended partition. The logical drives within the extended partition are typically used to hold programs and data. You can have four primary partitions or three primary partitions and one extended partition. If you are going to install multiple operating systems on your hard disk, you must create one primary partition to contain the programs that manage the startup of multiple operating systems. (This partition is referred to as the Boot Manager partition.) After the Boot Manager partition is created, you can create up to three additional primary partitions (to hold three operating systems). An important aspect of primary partitions is the fact that, at any moment in time, only one of the primary partitions is active. When a given primary partition is active, any other primary partitions on the same physical disk cannot be accessed. Therefore, the operating system in one primary partition cannot access the data in another primary partition on the same physical disk. Another way of subdividing your hard disk is to create logical drives within an extended partition. Logical drives are typically used to hold programs and data.

However, you can also install OS/2  in a logical drive.

The extended partition takes the place of one of the primary partitions on your hard disk. In other words, if you create logical drives within an extended partition, your hard disk can contain only three primary partitions. If two logical drives have been set aside for data. That data can be shared by all the operating systems (provided the file system formats of the logical drives are compatible with the operating systems). All of the logical drives exist within one partition-the extended partition. You don't explicitly create the extended partition. The extended partition is created the first time you create a logical (non-primary) drive. One of the differences between a logical drive and a primary partition is that each logical drive is assigned a unique drive letter. However, all primary partitions on a hard disk share the same drive letter. (On the first hard disk in your system, the primary partitions share drive C). This means that only one primary partition on a hard disk can be accessed at one time. (Note that the Boot Manager partition is different from other primary partitions because it is never assigned a drive letter.) If you want OS/2 to be able to access the data in the partition of another operating system (for example, the DOS partition), install OS/2 in a logical drive. Notice the drive letter assignments in this illustration. The operating system that is active when you start the system performs a process known as drive mapping, in which partitions and logical drives are assigned drive letters. All the primary partitions are mapped first and all logical drives within extended partitions are assigned subsequent drive letters (up through Z). Important: Only one primary partition per hard disk can be active at a time. So, only one primary partition is actually assigned the letter C at any one time. The other primary partitions are not mapped. An operating system maps only those drives with a format type that it supports. For example, DOS does not support the installable file system (IFS) format. (The High Performance File System is an example of an IFS format.) Therefore, any partition or logical drive that is formatted with IFS is not mapped by DOS and is not assigned a drive letter. In the following figure, DOS is active in a primary partition. (The other primary partitions are not mapped.) Drive D is formatted for the File Allocation Table (FAT) file system, which DOS recognizes. However, the next drive is formatted with a file system that DOS does not recognize. Therefore, DOS ignores this drive. Some versions of DOS (such as DOS Version 5.0) will recognize the last partition on the hard disk (in this example) and assign it the letter E. In other versions of DOS, no drives beyond the HPFS drive are recognized. Therefore, no data in those partitions can be used by DOS. Because of the problems that can result when drives are remapped, you should avoid deleting logical drives that exist in the middle of your hard disk. For example, if you were to delete a logical drive from the middle of your disk, the subsequent drives would be remapped. (Drive F would become drive E, and so on.) Problems would result if any programs refer to the former drive letter. The important thing to remember when you are setting up your system is that only one primary partition can be accessible (active) on each hard disk at any system startup. On the other hand, all the logical drives within the extended partition are accessible (provided their file system formats are compatible with the starting operating system). For example, suppose you had DOS 5.0 in one primary partition and OS/2 in another primary partition. One of your logical drives is formatted for FAT and contains a variety of DOS programs. You could start the DOS programs from either of the primary partitions. It is also important to understand what happens to the drive mapping if you add a hard disk after you install OS/2. The logical drives on your existing hard disk will be remapped if your second hard disk has a primary partition on it. Now, assume that you add a second hard disk to your system. The primary partition of that second hard disk will be assigned D. The logical drives of your first hard disk will be remapped. The existing logical drive D becomes E, E becomes F, and so forth. Because OS/2 is now in the logical drive assigned as E, all references to the drive letter (for example, statements in your CONFIG.SYS and INI files) will have to change. For this reason, it is strongly recommended that you place only logical drives on the hard disk that you are adding.

Planning for a Boot Manager Setup    275/3

When you are planning your Boot Manager setup, be aware of the following:

  o  Use primary partitions for DOS systems or versions of the OS/2 operating
     system prior to 2.0.
  o  To prevent the loss of usable disk space, create all primary partitions
     contiguously, at the beginning or end of the disk free space area.
  o  Put all installable file systems (such as the High Performance File
     System) at the end of the disk configuration.
  o  Be aware of specific operating-system restrictions on the hard disk . For
     example, to run properly, DOS 3.3 must be installed in a primary partition
     that is within the first 32MB of the hard disk.
  o  If you are installing a primary partition for DOS and you intend to load
     that version of DOS into a DOS session of OS/2, you will need to change
     the DOS CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files. (You do this after you finish
     installing the operating systems.) Refer to specific DOS version in the
     starting topic of the Master Help Index.  (The Master Help Index is
     displayed on your screen after the OS/2 operating system is installed.)
  o  You can install both DOS and a version of the OS/2 operating system in the
     same primary partition if you want to use the Dual Boot feature within
     your Boot Manager setup. However, if DOS and OS/2 1.3 are in the primary
     partition, you will have to copy the BOOT.COM file from the OS/2 partition
     to the primary partition after you install OS/2.
  o  If you are using the IBM DOS 5.00 Upgrade to update your DOS 3.3 or DOS
     4.0 system, you should be aware that some versions of the upgrade will not
     recognize the DOS partition unless it is the only partition on the hard
     disk.  You might have to do the following:
       1. Make sure that the DOS partition is the only primary partition on
          your hard disk.
       2. Install the DOS 5.00 Upgrade.
       3. Add the Boot Manager partition and install OS/2.
  o  If you have a system with a VESA SUPER I/O controller and two disk drives,
     the system will not start DOS from the Boot Manager menu.  Instead, it
     will display a non-system disk or disk error message.  For more
     information on this message, check the VESA controller documentation or
     contact the manufacturer.
The FDISK Utility Program    276/2+

When you install OS/2 with the Advanced Installation method, yo u use the FDISK utility program to install the Boot Manager feature and to set up the partitions on your hard disk. During Advanced Installation, the FDISK screen appears so that you can see how the partitions are currently set up on your system.

The Options Menu    277/3

When you press the Enter key from the FDISK screen, the Options menu appears. The following list describes each of the choices on the Options menu. Some of the choices are available only under certain conditions. (They appear in black on the menu.) If you try to select an unavailable choice, the system will respond with a warning beep.

Install Boot Manager This choice is used only once--when you create the
partition for the Boot Manager.  It is unavailable thereafter.
Create partition This choice is used to create primary partitions and logical
drives within the extended partition.  You can use this choice whenever free
space is available on the hard disk.
Add to Boot Manager menu This choice is used to add the name of a partition or
logical drive to the Boot Manager startup menu.  You should use this choice for
any operating system that you want to be able to select when you start the
system.  When you select this choice, the New Name window is displayed. You use
the New Name window to assign a meaningful name to the partition or logical
drive.
Change partition name This choice is used to change the name that you have
previously assigned to a partition or logical drive.
Assign C: partition This choice is used to specify which primary partition you
want to be active (when more than one primary partition is installed on your
system).  The placement of the drive letter (C) tells you which primary
partition will be visible (or accessible) after you restart the system.
Set startup values This choice is used to specify the actions of the Boot
Manager startup menu.  For example, with Set startup values, you can specify
how long you want the Boot Manager menu to be displayed before the default
operating system is started. You can also specify which operating system you
want as the default.
Remove from Boot Manager menu This choice is used to delete a name from the
Boot Manager startup menu.  When you delete the name, you can no longer select
the operating system associated with that name from the Boot Manager startup
menu.
Delete partition This choice is used to delete information about a primary
partition or logical drive.  After you exit from FDISK, all the data in the
partition or logical drive is deleted.  (If you want to save any of the data in
a partition, be sure to back up the data be fore deleting the partition.)
Set installable This choice is used to mark a partition or logical drive as the
target for installation.  For example, during the installation of OS/2, you set
one primary partition (or logical drive) as installable. (This partition or
drive is the drive on which OS/2 is installed.)
After you install the operating system, the status of this partition will
change from Installable to Bootable.
If you use FDISK after the OS/2 installation (in preparation for installing
other operating systems), you can mark only primary partitions on the first
hard disk as installable.
Any partition that is set installable must reside within the first 1024
cylinders of the hard disk.  In addition, if you have more than two hard disk
drives, be aware that some adapter manufacturers  support the booting of
partitions on the first two hard disk drives only.
Also note that some SCSI drives that use removable media cannot be partitioned.
Make startable This choice is used to determine which primary partition is
activated when you start your system.  When you install the Boot Manager, it is
automatically marked as Startable.  This means that the Boot Manager is in
control when you start your system.  Only one primary partition on the first
hard disk can be made startable.  If you set any other primary partition
startable, the Boot Manager startup menu will not appear when you start the
system.
Creating a Boot Manager Setup    278/2+

The following sections describe in detail how to delete and create partitions, how and why to make selections from the Options menu, and how to specify options for how the Boot Manager will start up. Using Advanced Installation provides quick procedures you can follow to perform these actions. You can refer to the sections here if you need more detailed information.

Deleting Existing Partitions    279/3

To set up your system for installation, you must make sure there is enough room on your hard disk to accommodate the desired partitions. If you use the Advanced Installation method to install OS/2,

it might be necessary for you to delete some or

all of the existing partitions on your hard disk. For example, if your hard disk currently has only one partition that takes up the entire hard disk and you want to put OS/2 in its own partition, you must delete the existing partition. However, if your hard disk has ample free space for OS/2, you can keep one or more existing partitions and add to them. Important: All information you want to save must be backed up. Changing the size of a partition deletes all information in that partition, and the entire operating system must be reinstalled when the new partition is created. To delete an existing partition, you would follow these steps:

  1. On the FDISK screen, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight the
     partition you want to delete.
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  3. Select Delete partition and press Enter.  The information about that
     partition is deleted, and the words Free Space appear in the space
     formerly occupied by the partition information.
  4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for any other partitions you want to delete.
After deleting the partitions on your hard disk, you must create the Boot
Manager partition.
Creating the Boot Manager Partition    280/3

During the Advanced Installation method, you must create a Boot Manager partition. To create this partition, follow these steps:

  1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted on the FDISK screen.
      If it is not, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight it.
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  3. Select Install Boot Manager and press Enter.
  4. Specify whether the Boot Manager partition should be at the beginning or
     at the end of the available free space on the hard disk.
     Note:  The only restriction on the placement of the Boot Manager partition
     is that it be within the first 1024 cylinders of the first hard disk.
     Typically, the first 1024 cylinders is equal to 1GB (gigabyte), or 1024MB.
After creating the Boot Manager partition, you can create any other partitions
you need to install OS/2 and the other operating systems you want to use on
your computer.
Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems    281/3+

After you create the partition for the Boot Manager, you create primary partitions for any DOS or Windows versions or previous versions of OS/2 that you are going to install. At this time, you can also create any logical drives for data or programs or to install OS/2. Consider the following before you begin creating the partitions:

  o  If you prefer, and if you have sufficient free space on the hard disk, you
     can leave existing partitions intact until you have completely transferred
     data processing operations to OS/2.
  o  You can install OS/2 in its own partition and place your programs and data
     in a separate logical drive.  This arrangement makes it easier to back up
     those programs and data.
  o  If multiple types of file systems are needed, determine if you want them
     in a separate partition or placed on a logical drive.
  o  When determining how much space to allocate for the OS/2 partition,
     consider some of the tools and applications you will be installing and
     whether you want to install them in the OS/2 partition or on another
     logical drive.  For example, if you want to install the OS/2 Toolkit, you
     can install it on a separate logical drive instead of the default
     partition used for OS/2.
  o  Allow enough room in your OS/2 partition for the growth of a swap file.  A
     swap file contains segments of a program
      or data temporarily
     moved out of main storage.  The swap file (SWAPPER.DAT) requires at least
     2MB of hard disk space but might require much more.  You can include this
     space in your OS/2 partition, or you can set up a logical drive for the
     swap file.
  o  Some operating systems, such as AIX*, require that their own disk utility
     program create the installation partition.  The OS/2 FDISK utility program
     cannot create the partition for these operating systems. If you are going
     to install AIX, make sure you leave sufficient free space for it on the
     hard disk.
  o  If you have applications that require other operating systems, such as
     AIX, check the amount of storage space recommended by the supplier.
To create partitions and logical drives for your other operating systems and
for your programs and data, follow these steps:
  1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted on the FDISK screen.
      If it is not, use the Up or Down Arrow key to highlight it.
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  3. Select Create partition and press Enter.
  4. Type the size (in MB) of the partition you are creating.  Use the
     following table to help you determine a minimum size for the partition.
      For specific information about partition sizes, refer to the
     documentation
     that came with the product you will be installing.
     place=inline width=column frame=box id=dpart rules=horiz hdframe=rules
     hp='2 0 0
     0' split=yes expand.
     ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     ?
     3          Planning Table for Partition Sizes
     3
     CDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     4
     3 CONTENTS 3 SIZE     3 HARD DISK CONSIDERATIONS
     3
     CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     4
     3 DOS 3.3  3 2MB      3 Must be in a primary partition within the first
     32MB   3
     3          3          3 on the first hard disk.
     3
     CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     4
     3 DOS 4.0  3 3MB      3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
     disk. 3
     CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     4
     3 DOS 5.0  3 4MB      3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
     disk. 3
     CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     4
     3 DOS 6.x  3 8MB      3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
     disk. 3
     CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     4
     3 OS/2 1.x 3 20MB     3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
     disk. 3
     3 SE       3          3 Installs in less than 20MB, but segment swapping
     is    3
     3          3          3 inhibited.
     3
     CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     4
     3 OS/2 1.x 3 30MB     3 Must be in a primary partition on the first hard
     disk. 3
     3 EE       3          3 Installs in less than 30MB with reduced function.
     3
     CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     4
     3 OS/2 2.0 3 15-33MB  3 Can be in a primary partition or logical drive.
     If    3
     3          3          3 you choose a minimum size for the partition, you
     might 3
     3          3          3 want to place the swap file on another partition.
     3
     CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     4
     3 OS/2 2.1 3 20-40MB  3 OS/2 2.1 can be in a primary partition or logical
     3
     3          3 (Plus    3 drive.  If you choose a minimum size for the
     parti-    3
     3          3 10MB for 3 tion, you might want to place the swap file on
     another 3
     3          3 swap     3 partition.
     3
     3          3 file and 3
     3
     3          3 5MB for  3 If you want to install all the features and you
     want   3
     3          3 multi-   3 the swap file in the same partition, consider
     making   3
     3          3 media)   3 the OS/2 partition larger.
     3
     CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     4
     3 OS/2     3 25-45MB  3 OS/2 can be in a primary partition or logical
     drive.   3
     3 Version  3 (Plus    3 If you choose a minimum size for the partition,
     you    3
     3 3        3 10MB for 3 might want to place the swap file on another
     parti-    3
     3          3 swap     3 tion.
     3
     3          3 file and 3
     3
     3          3 10MB for 3 If you want to install all the features and you
     want   3
     3          3 multi-   3 the swap file in the same partition, consider
     making   3
     3          3 media)   3 the OS/2 partition larger.
     3
     CDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     4
     3 AIX      3          3 Partition size determined and built by AIX Disk
     3
     3          3          3 utility program.  Partition is created at the end
     of   3
     3          3          3 the hard disk.
     3
     @DDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
     Y
     Place system tools or common applications in a logical drive within the
     extended partition so that the data can be shared among the operating
     systems.
  5. Specify whether this is a primary partition or a logical drive within the
     extended partition.  Consider the following:
       o  All versions of DOS must reside in primary partitions on the first
          hard disk. Versions of OS/2 before 2.0 must also reside in primary
          partitions. (Remember that primary partitions cannot share data.)
       o  Logical drives within an extended partition are shareable.  This
          means that any data installed in the logical drive can be used by an
          operating system running from any other active logical drive on the
          system, if the file system formats are compatible.
  6. Specify the location of the partition or logical drive you want to create.
       Select either Create at Start of Free Space or Create at End of Free
     Space.  Note that the logical drives cannot be intermixed with primary
     partitions.
     Note:  This option is not available when the amount of free space equals
     the size of the request.
When you have set up the partition, you use the Options menu choices to specify
information about the partition.
Specifying Options for the New Partition    282/4

To specify options for the partition you just created, use the following procedure. Refer to The Options Menu for detailed explanations of the choices on the Options menu.

  1. From the FDISK screen, Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  2. Select Add to Boot Manager menu if you want this partition displayed on
     the Boot Manager startup menu.  If you do not select this choice for the
     partition, you cannot select the operating system that exists in this
     partition from the menu at startup time.
  3. If you selected Add to Boot Manager menu, you see the window in which you
     are asked to type a name for the partition. Type the name, and then press
     Enter.
If you have additional partitions to set up, follow the instructions outlined
in Creating Partitions for Other Operating Systems. Otherwise, continue to
Creating the Partition for OS/2.
Creating the Partition for OS/2    283/3

After you have created the partitions for the Boot Manager and for each of the other operating systems you plan to install, create the partition or logical drive in which you will install OS/2 OS/2 can be installed in either a primary partition or a logical drive within the extended partition. Remember that some operating systems, such as AIX, use their own disk utility program to set up partitions. The partitions for such operating systems are created when you actually install the operating systems. You must leave sufficient space on the hard disk to accommodate these operating systems. To create the partition or logical drive for OS/2, follow these steps:

  1. Make sure that the Free Space line is highlighted. If it is not, press the
     Up Arrow ( ) or Down Arrow ( ) key to highlight it.
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  3. Select Create partition and press Enter.
  4. Type the size (in MB) of the partition or logical drive you are creating.
     Note that the size of the swap file is based on the size of installed
     memory. The less memory you have, the larger the swap file. Thus, if your
     computer has a small amount of memory, you will need a larger partition.
     (You can also place the swap file on another partition.  To do this,
     select Software configuration from the OS/2 Setup and Installation window
     that appears during the Installation program. ) If you want to install all
     features and you want the swap file on the same partition, consider making
     the OS/2 partition large enough to accommodate all of those files.
  5. Specify whether this partition is a primary partition or a logical drive
     within the extended partition.
     If you have already marked three partitions as primary partitions, you
     might want to select Extended Logical Drive for OS/2. Your hard disk can
     be made up of a maximum of four primary partitions or three primary
     partitions and multiple logical drives within one extended partition. So,
     if you create a primary partition for OS/2 when three primary partitions
     already exist, you cannot create any logical drives.
  6. Specify the location of the partition or logical drive you want to create.
     Note:  This option is not available when the amount of free space equals
     the size of the request.
Specifying Options for the OS/2 Partition    284/3

During the Installation program, you can use the Options menu choices to specify information about the OS/2 partition or logical drive:

  1. From the FDISK screen, press Enter to display the Options menu.
  2. Highlight Add to Boot Manager menu and press Enter.
  3. Type the name you want to assign to this partition or logical drive, and
     press Enter.
  4. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  5. Highlight Set installable and press Enter.
     You must select Set installable for this partition or logical drive. By
     selecting Set installable, you indicate which partition or logical drive
     should be used for OS/2.
Specifying the Default Operating System    285/3

After you create partitions for all of your operating systems, including OS/2, you may specify which operating system should be started (by default) every time you start your computer. Follow these steps:

  1. Highlight the line on the FDISK screen that contains the information for
     the operating system you want preselected at startup time.  For example,
     if you want OS/2 to be the preselected choice on the Boot Manager startup
     menu, highlight the OS/2 Version 3 line.
  2. Press Enter to display the Options menu.
  3. Select Set startup values and press Enter.
  4. With Default highlighted, press Enter.  Notice that the name of the
     partition you chose is listed next to Default.
  5. Press F3.
     If you want to set the timer for how long the Boot Manager menu should be
     displayed and how information on the menu should appear, you can do so
     during the installation of OS/2 or you can do so after installation.  To
     set the timer and display mode now, continue with the sections that
     follow, "Setting the Menu Display Time" and "Setting the Menu Mode."
     Otherwise, go to step 6.
  6. Press F3
Setting the Menu Display Time    286/3+

To indicate how long you want the Boot Manager startup menu displayed when you start your system, follow these steps:

  1. From the Set startup values menu, you can do one of the following:
       o  If you want the menu displayed for a certain period of time before
          the default operating system starts, accept the value of Yes.
       o  If you want the menu to be displayed indefinitely (until you
          explicitly select a choice from the menu), highlight Timer and press
          Enter to change the value to No.
  2. If you selected Yes for Timer, indicate how long you want the menu
     displayed before the default operating system is started.  You can do one
     of the following:
       o  Accept the value listed next to Timeout.
       o  Change the value as follows:
            a. Select Timeout and press Enter.
            b. Type the amount of time (in seconds) that you want the menu
               displayed before 	the preselected operating system is
               automatically started.
            c. Press Enter.
Setting the Menu Mode    287/4

You can select either Normal or Advanced for the Boot Manager menu mode. If you select Advanced, your Boot Manager menu will include additional information about your partitions. To change the mode that is currently displayed:

  1. Highlight Mode on the Set startup values menu.
  2. Press Enter.
When you have finished configuring your Boot Manager menu, press F3.  Then
continue with the installation of OS/2.
Selecting a File System    288/2

If you choose to format an existing partition during the Installation program, you will be asked to select a file system. A file system is the part of the operating system that provides access to files and programs on a disk. You can select either the File Allocation Table (FAT) file system or the High Performance File System (HPFS).

  o  Select the FAT file system if you intend to share data in the partition
     with a version of DOS that is running independently of OS/2. (For example,
     if you occasionally need to start DOS from a diskette and access the data
     in the OS/2 partition, the partition would have to be formatted for the
     FAT file system.) DOS uses the FAT file system, and does not recognize
     files created by HPFS.  Although DOS does not recognize HPFS, this is not
     the case for DOS sessions that are part of OS/2.  If you plan to run you
     r DOS programs in the DOS sessions that are part of OS/2, you can format
     for either file system.  The only restriction for DOS programs running in
     these DOS sessions is that they will not recognize the longer file names
     in the HPFS partition.
  o  HPFS has features that make it a better choice for larger hard disk
     partitions.  It puts the directory at the seek center of the partition and
     is designed to allocate contiguous space for files.  This feature helps
     prevent disk fragmentation.  HPFS also handles write errors by writing to
     alternate space reserved for that purpose.
HPFS also supports file names up to 254 characters in length.
If you format an OS/2 partition for the FAT file system and the system memory
is less than or equal to 6MB, support for HPFS is not automatically installed.
You can add this support later (for example, if you want to format another
partition for HPFS) using the Selective Install utility program (located in the
System Setup folder).
If you are trying to decide whether to use HPFS, consider that it takes at
least 200KB of system memory.  If your computer has 6MB or less of memory, your
system performance will be adversely affected.
Changing System Options from the OS/2 Setup and Installation Window    289/2+

During Advanced Installation, the OS/2 Setup and Installation window appears so you can select the features of the operating system that you want to install. You can also use the menu bar at the top of the window to indicate an alternate drive for your swap file, and to modify your CONFIG.SYS file.

Installing the Swap File and WIN-OS/2 Support in a Logical Drive    290/3

If you use the Advanced Installation method, you can install the swap file and WIN-OS/2 support in another partition or logical drive to save hard disk space in your OS/2 partition. When you are setting up your partitions with the FDISK utility program, you can create a logical drive just for this purpose. When the OS/2 Setup and Installation window appears during the installation process, follow these steps:

  1. Select Software configuration from the menu bar of the OS/2 Setup and
     Installation window.
  2. Select Change OS/2 parameters.
  3. Make sure the cursor is in the SWAPPATH field by selecting the field with
     the mouse or the Tab key.  Replace the default location of the swap file
     with the desired location.  For example, to place the swap file in the
     root directory of logical drive D, type
      d:\.
  4. Select OK or press Enter.
  5. Select the More push button next to WIN-OS/2 Support.
  6. Select the Down Arrow in the Destination drive field to change the drive
     to the desired logical drive (drive D in this example).
  7. Select OK.
Modifying the CONFIG.SYS File during Installation    291/3

During Advanced Installation, you can customize your system by modifying the CONFIG.SYS file. To do so, follow these steps when the OS/2 Setup and Installation window appears during installation:

  1. Select Software configuration from the menu bar at the top of the window.
  2. Select either Change OS/2 parameters or Change DOS parameters.
     For example, if you want to change the MINFREE setting for the swap file,
     select Change OS/2 parameters.  Then specify the size on the window that
     is displayed.  The MINFREE setting is used to specify when the system
     should warn you about the growth of the swap file.
  3. Select OK when you have finished making all the selections in the window.
     The OS/2 Setup and Installation window will reappear.
  4. Make your selections in the OS/2 Setup and Installation window to continue
     with the installation of OS/2.
Special Hardware Considerations    292/1+

This chapter provides information to help you if you are installing OS/2 Version 3 on or using the following hardware:

     Gateway 2000
     A system with Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS
     ATI Graphics Ultra Pro display adapter
     An EISA system with an Adaptec 1742A controller card
     IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette
     IBM PS/2 Model 76
     IBM ThinkPad with a Docking Station
     A system with an Aox upgrade
     Quantum II Hard Card
     Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR, or Tandy
     non-SCSI CD-ROM drive
     Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination
     IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter
     Sound Blaster
     Pro AudioSpectrum 16
Using Gateway 2000 Computers    293/2+

If you have an early version of a Gateway 2000 computer that does not work properly, your BIOS might be an early version. The company suggests that you replace the system board. Contact Gateway 2000, Inc. for information about upgrading your computer.

486 Math Coprocessors    294/3

If you have a Gateway 2000 computer with a 486 processor and a revision E system board, you could experience a divide underflow error. The error can occur when you are running software that takes advantage of the 486 math coprocessor. If this error occurs, you can upgrade to a revision F system board by contacting Gateway.

TRAP0002 Errors on Boot or Installation    295/3

Gateway computers that cause a TRAP0002 error are caused by one of the following:

  o  A bad Read Ahead Cache on the system board
  o  Bad memory
When the problem is a bad Read Ahead Cache on the system board, press
Ctrl+Alt+Del to display a menu from which you can disable the external caching.
Refer to your Gateway documentation for more information. Contact Gateway when
this problem is encountered.
When the problem is bad memory, try moving each memory module to a different
memory controller.  If the problem is not corrected, determine which memory
module is bad and replace it.
Gateway Nomad Notebook    296/3

If you receive a message that OS/2 is unable to operate your hard disk or your diskette drive, your computer needs a BIOS upgrade. If a TRAP error appears when the system is started, or during installation, disable caching on the system board. If the problem persists, contact Gateway 2000, Inc.

Using Phoenix, AMI, or Micronics BIOS    297/2+

This section provides information about computers that require a BIOS upgrade to support OS/2 Version 3.

Phoenix BIOS    298/3

For questions about products that use Phoenix BIOS, call the computer manufacturer directly. If there are additional questions, contact Phoenix.

AMI BIOS    299/3+

The later BIOS versions from American Megatrends, Inc. (AMI) provide a screen ID code, which is visible at the lower-left corner of the screen during the initial random access memory (RAM) count. The code can be made to reappear if you restart the system by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del, or it can be frozen on screen by holding down the Ins key during system startup. This creates a keyboard error, which will stop the screen. On a system that uses AMI BIOS or AMI BIOS Plus, the message will be in the form: aaaa-bbbb-mmddyy-Kc On a system than uses AMI HI-Flex BIOS, the message will be in the form: ee-ffff-bbbbbb-gggggggg-mmddyy-hhhhhhhh-c If the screen ID code is in a form other than those above, one of the following is true:

  o  The BIOS is a very early version.  In this case, contact Washburn & Co.
  o  The BIOS was produced by a company with source-code license. In this case,
     the system board manufacturer will be able to provide further information
     or updates.  All Everex** 368 BIOS versions are in this category.
General Rules    300/4
  o  If an IDE-type hard drive is installed, the date mmddyy should be 040990
     or later for use with any operating system, including DOS. Special timing
     requirements of IDE drives were accommodated on the date noted.
  o  If you use any other drive type, such as MFM, RLL, ESDI, or SCSI, the OS/2
     operating system might install and operate correctly if mmddyy is 092588
     or later, provided that the Keyboard Controller revision level is suitable
     for the OS/2 version being used.  Also, in the case of SCSI hard drives, a
     driver compatible with the version of OS/2 operating system being
     installed might be provided by the controller manufacturer, and if so, a
     special installation procedure might apply.
  o  Keyboard Controller revision level F (represented by "c" in the previous
     screen ID code examples) is expected to produce proper installation and
     operation of OS/2 versions 1.3x and 2.x.
          OS/2 1.0 or 1.1:   8, B, D, or F
          OS/2 1.2x:         D or F
          OS/2 1.3x or 2.:   F
  o  If the Keyboard Controller revision level shows as 0 or M, the Keyboard
     Controller chip is not an AMI chip, even if an AMI license sticker was
     applied to it. If it is not an AMI chip, its performance under the OS/2
     operating system is unknown.  It might or might not work correctly.  For
     some revision levels (usually "M"), an AMI chip can successfully replace a
     non-AMI chip, but this is not a general rule.  Sometimes the nonstandard
     Keyboard Controller (usually "0") was used to combine system board
     functions not normally part of the controller. Substituting a standard
     chip causes the board to not function at all. In this case, there is no
     solution other than to replace the board. A revision level of 9
     accompanied by a nonstandard ID code also indicates a nonstandard
     controller (and BIOS). The system board manufacturer should be contacted
     for further information.
BIOS Updates    301/4

If a BIOS prior to the previously noted dates requires replacement, note the following:

  o  AMI BIOS and BIOS Plus series BIOS (16 character ID code) for cached
     system boards are customized for individual system board designs.  You can
     obtain updates only from the system board manufacturer, unless you have
     one of the following:
       1. A BIOS with "aaaa" = E307. This BIOS can be replaced with a standard
          type.
       2. A BIOS for Northgate** or Motherboard Factory** system boards, except
          the Northgate Slimline**.  This BIOS can be replaced by a standard
          type.  The Slimline BIOS has the VGA BIOS in the same chips. They can
          be updated to the 040990 release, provided they are identified as
          Slimline, and the speed is specified (20, 25, or 33 MHz).  The speed
          must be specified because different VGA code is required for the
          various speeds.
       3. A BIOS with "aaaa" = DAMI, DAMX, or EDAMI (usually for cached boards
          d  esigned or built by AMI). This BIOS can be updated.  Mylex or
          Leading Technology** boards with these prefixes can only be updated
          by the board manufacturer.
  o  The complete screen ID code is necessary to determine whether a BIOS
     update for other system boards can be provided. In the case of the HI-Flex
     BIOS, the complete second and third lines of the ID code are also
     necessary.  If not immediately visible on the screen, they can be viewed
     by pressing the Ins key during system startup.
  o  If you have a hard disk drive from another manufacturer, it must be dated
     092588 or later.  If your hard disk drive is an earlier version, contact
     the dealer at your place of purchase, or the hard disk manufacturer, for
     information about upgrading the drive.
Micronics BIOS    302/3

If you have revision E of a Micronics system board, you might receive a divide underflow message, or your computer might not work properly. This board contains an early version of BIOS. If you purchased the board from Gateway, contact Gateway 2000, Inc. request an upgrade to revision F.

Using the ATI Graphics Ultra Pro Display Adapter    303/2

If you have an ATI Graphics Ultra Pro, you must run the INSTALL.EXE utility program provided by ATI before you install OS/2 Version 3. Note that this is a DOS program and you must, therefore, start DOS before you run the program. Note: If you have a Gateway 2000 system, refer also to "Black Lines on an OS/2 Logo Screen" in Solving Installation Problems

  1. Start DOS on your computer.
  2. Insert the ATI diskette into drive A.
  3. Type a:install.exe and press Enter. The Set Power-Up Configuration menu
     appears.
  4. Select Custom for Monitor Type.
  5. Make sure that VGA Memory Sizeis set to Shared for 1 MB video memory
     boards.
  6. Make sure that the refresh rate for 640 x 480 resolution is set to IBM
     Default or 60 Hz.
     Note:  Later during the installation of OS/2 Version 3, be sure to select
     8514 as the primary display type.
Using an EISA System with an Adaptec 1742A Controller Card    304/2

If you have an EISA system with an Adaptec 1742A controller card, you must run the Setup Configuration program provided on the Adaptec Card Setup Diskette before installing OS/2 Version 3. To set up the Adaptec card in the configuration using the Setup Diskette, do the following:

  1. Set the Enhanced mode setting to OFF.
  2. Set the Standard mode setting to ON.
  3. Set the Hex Address setting to C800.
  4. Set the I/O Port setting to 230H.
  5. Set the DMA channel setting to 5.
  6. Set the Parity Check setting to OFF.
  7. Set the Synchronous Negotiation setting to ON. If CD-ROM is not
     recognized, set this setting to OFF.
  8. Set the Enabled Disconnect setting to YES.
  9. Set the IRQ setting to 11 (default is 2).
Using an IBM PS/2 with ABIOS on the Reference Diskette    305/2

As part of the setup of your computer, you might have been advised to create a Reference Diskette (sometimes called a "Hardware System Program Diskette"). The Reference Diskette contains BIOS information (code about how your diskette drives, hard drives, and keyboard interact). The OS/2 Version 3 Installation program may prompt you to insert this diskette. If you have not created the Reference Diskette, do so before you begin the installation of OS/2 Version 3. Refer to your PS/2 documentation for instructions on creating this diskette.

Using an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or IBM ThinkPad with a Docking Station    306/2

If you are installing OS/2 Version 3 on an IBM PS/2 Model 76 or an IBM ThinkPad 700, 700C, 720, or 720C attached to a 3550 Docking Station, you need to replace the ABIOS files on the OS/2 Installation Diskette with files from the Reference Diskette. Do the following:

  1. If you are using a ThinkPad, detach it from the Docking Station.
  2. Create a Reference Diskette by following the documentation that came with
     your computer.
  3. Make a copy of the Installation Diskette. Type diskcopy a: a: and press
     Enter. Remove and insert diskettes when prompted to do so.
  4. Remove the copy from drive A and insert the original Installation
     Diskette.
  5. Turn your computer on.  If your computer is already on, press Ctrl+Alt+Del
     to restart it.
  6. When you are prompted to do so, remove the Installation Diskette, insert
     Diskette 1, and press Enter.
  7. When the Welcome screen appears, press F3 to display the command prompt.
  8. Insert the copy of the Installation Diskette into drive A.
  9. Type a:\del *.bio and press Enter.
 10. Remove the copy of the Installation Diskette and insert the Reference
     Diskette you created into drive A.
 11. If your computer has more than one diskette drive, insert the copy of the
     Installation Diskette into drive B. In the next two steps, you will be
     prompted to insert diskettes into both drive A and drive B.
     If you computer has only one diskette drive, when you are asked to insert
     a diskette into drive A, insert the Reference Diskette into your diskette
     drive. When you are asked to insert a diskette into drive B, insert the
     copy of the Installation Diskette into your diskette drive.
 12. Type copy a:\*.bio b:\ and press Enter.
 13. Type copy a:\abios.sys b:\ and press Enter.
 14. Turn off your computer.  If you are using a ThinkPad, return it to the
     Docking Station.
Using a System with an Aox Upgrade    307/2

If you have a system with a 286 processor that has been upgraded to a 386SX with an Aox upgrade and you want to install OS/2 Version 3, you must start the system with DOS and run the AOX232.EXE. Contact the Aox Technical Support Group to request a copy of AOX232.EXE before continuing with the installation of OS/2.

Using a Quantum II XL Hard Card    308/2

If you have a Quantum hard card, you must make a modification to the BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file. To modify the BASEDEV statement, do the following:

  1. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file on Diskette 1.
  2. Change the BASEDEV statement to:
     BASEDEV=IBM1S506.ADD /A:1 /IRQ
     (The settings shown are the defaults for the Quantum hard card.)
  3. Save the CONFIG.SYS file.
  4. Install OS/2 Version 3.
Using a Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi,  BSR, or Tandy Non-SCSI CD-ROM Drive    309/2+

For the Sony, Panasonic, Creative Labs, IBM ISA, Philips, Mitsumi, BSR, or Tandy non-SCSI drives to be recognized by OS/2 Version 3, the base port address specified on the CD-ROM BASEDEV statement in the CONFIG.SYS file must match the base I/O port address specified on the CD-ROM host adapter card. Note: If you are installing OS/2 from a CD-ROM, you might first need to modify the BASEDEV statement for your CD-ROM device driver in the CONFIG.SYS file on the diskette labeled Diskette 1. See also the section called "Using an Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination."

Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-31A Device Driver    310/3

The Sony SONY31A.ADD device driver supports the following CD-ROM drives:

     Sony CDU-31A, CDU-7305
     Sony CDU-33A, CDU-7405
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Sony CD-ROM device
driver.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD
line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode from the default,
software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer.  The syntax for the
BASEDEV statement is as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD [/A:d][/AT:dd][/P:nnn][/I:nn][/V]
where:
[/A:d]    Identifies a specific adapter, d. The adapter is specified as a
          single-digit value which is zero based (for example, the first
          adapter is specified as /A:0).
[/AT:dd]  Sets the adapter type connected to the CD-ROM drive. Supported values
          are:
     00 = Sony CDB-334 (default)
     05 = Echo** Speech (with ESC614 chip)
                 Orchid** SoundWave 32
                 Orchid GameWave 32
                 Cardinal DSP16
     08 = MediaVision** Pro AudioSpectrum 16
[/P:nnn]  Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The port
          address is specified as a four-digit hex value.  Leading zeros should
          be specified. The value must be the same number as the port address
          selected by the jumper on the host interface card.
          If this parameter is not specified, the default port address for the
          host adapter is used.  For the Sony CDB-334 host interface card, the
          default is 0340. For the Media Vision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 card, the
          default is 1F88.
[/I:nn]   Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
          the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface card. If
          this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
          polling transfer.
          Note:  Some Sony CDB-334 host adapter cards do not include the
          plastic jumper switch to select the IRQ channel on the IRQ jumper
          block.  You must obtain and install the plastic jumper switch to
          enable the IRQ channel.
[/V]      Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
each CD-ROM drive.
Example 1:  The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony
CDB-334 host adapter.
The Sony CDB-334 host adapter supports base I/O port addresses of 320h, 330h,
340h, or 360h.  If the host adapter is set to its default port address of 340h,
the CONFIG.SYS statement does not need to be modified and should appear as
follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD
If the CDB-334 host adapter is set to any port address other than the default
of 340h, the CONFIG.SYS statement must be modified. For example, if the Sony
CDB-334 host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 360, the line in the
CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P
If, in the above situation, the driver is operating in interrupt mode at IRQ
channel 5, the line in your CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P:0360 /I
Example 2:  The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a
MediaVision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 host adapter.
In this case, the line in CONFIG.SYS must be modified and should appear as
follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /AT
Note:  The default port address for the CDU-31A when attached to the PAS-16
card is 1F88. The Sony Desktop Library model numbers CDU-31A-LL/L and CDU-7305
include the PAS-16 adapter.
Example 3:  The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to a Creative
Labs Sound Blaster Pro, Sound Blaster 16, or Sound Blaster 16 MultiCD host
adapter.
The port address specified on the BASEDEV statement in CONFIG.SYS should be 10h
above the base I/O port address specified on these adapter cards.  For example,
if the Sound Blaster card is set for a base I/O port address of 220h, the line
in CONFIG.SYS should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /P
Example 4:  The Sony CDU-31A or CDU-33A CD-ROM drive is attached to the Echo
Speech, Orchid SoundWave 32, Orchid GameWave 32, or Cardinal DSP16 host
adapter.
In this case, the line in CONFIG.SYS must be modified and should appear as
follows:
BASEDEV=SONY31A.ADD /A:0 /AT
Modifying the CONFIG.SYS for the Sony CDU-535 Device Driver    311/3

The Sony SONY535.ADD device driver supports the following CD-ROM drives:

     Sony 531 series (CDU-531, 6201, 6205)
     Sony 535 series (CDU-535, 6205, 7205)
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Sony CD-ROM device
driver.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD
line in the CONFIG.SYS file.  Also change the transfer mode from the default,
software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer.  The syntax for the
BASEDEV statement is as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD [P:nnn][/I:nn][/U:d,d...][/V]
where:
[/P:nnn]. Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The value
          must be the same number as the port address specified by the jumper
          on the host interface card.
[/I:nn].  Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
          the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface card. If
          this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
          polling transfer.
          Note:  Some Sony host adapter cards do not include the plastic jumper
          switch to select the IRQ channel on the IRQ jumper block.  You must
          obtain and install the plastic jumper switch to enable the IRQ
          channel.
[/U:d,d...]. Specifies the drive unit number which the Sony CD-ROM drive is set
          to.  The value of d must be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3.  If more than one
          Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to the adapter, this parameter must be
          specified.  If only one CD-ROM drive is attached to the adapter, and
          this parameter is not specified, then the default unit ID used by the
          driver is 0.
[/V].     Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
each CD-ROM drive.
Example 1:  A Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony CDB-240 series host
adapter.
If the Sony host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 360, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:360
Example 2:  A Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to a Sony CDB-240 series host
adapter.
If the Sony CD-ROM drive is attached to the Sony host adapter at a base I/O
port address of 360h, and the driver is operating in interrupt mode at IRQ
channel 5, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:360 /I:5
Example 3:  Multiple Sony CD-ROM drives are daisy-chained to a Sony CDB-240
series host adapter.
If two Sony CD-ROM drives are daisy-chained from the Sony host adapter with the
first drive set to drive unit 0 and the second set to drive unit 1, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SONY535.ADD /P:340 /U:0,1
Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Panasonic Device Driver    312/3

The Panasonic device driver (SBCD2.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:

  o  Panasonic CR-521, 522, 523, 562, 563
  o  Creative Labs OmniCD
  o  IBM ISA CD-ROM drive
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Panasonic CD-ROM
device driver.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file. Also change the transfer mode
from the default, software polling transfer, to software interrupt transfer.
The syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows: BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD
[/P:nnn][/T:n][/NS][/V]
where:
[./P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card.  The value
          must be the same number as the port address selected by the jumper on
          the host interface card.
[./T:n]   Sets the adapter type connected to the CD-ROM drive. The supported
          value is:
     Creative Labs CD-ROM interface card (not Sound Blaster)
[./NS]    Disables drive select scan.  Driver will not scan for more than one
          CD-ROM drive.
[./V]     Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
each CD-ROM drive.
Example 1:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a standard Panasonic or IBM ISA CD-ROM host adapter.
The standard Panasonic or IBM ISA host adapter supports base I/O port addresses
of 300h, 310h, 320h, or 330h.  For example, if the adapter is set to a base I/O
port address of 300, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:300
Example 2:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a Creative Labs Sound Blaster Pro, Sound Blaster 16, or Sound
Blaster 16 MultiCD.
If the Sound Blaster card is set for a base I/O address of 220h, the line in
CONFIG.SYS should appears as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:220
Example 3:  A Creative Labs OmniCD is attached to a standard Creative Labs
CD-ROM host adapter (not Sound Blaster).
The standard Creative Labs host adapter supports base I/O port addresses of
250h or 260h.  For example, if the adapter is set to a base I/O port address of
250, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:250 /T:2
Example 4:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a MediaVision Jazz 16 sound card.
If the MediaVision card is set for a base I/O port address of 300h, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:300 /NS
Example 5:  A Panasonic, Creative Labs OmniCD, or IBM ISA CD-ROM drive is
attached to a Reveal audio card.
If the Reveal audio card is set to a base I/O port address of 630h, the line in
the CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=SBCD2.ADD /P:630
Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Philips CD-ROM Device Drivers    313/3

The Philips device driver (LMS205.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:

     Philips CM205, CM225
The Philips device driver (LMS206.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:
     Philips CM205MS,CM225MS (multisession photo CD version of CM205)
     Philips CM206, CM226
Note:  If you have installed OS/2 and find that your CD-ROM drive does not
function, you  must copy the LMS206.ADD file from Diskette 1 to the \OS2
directory and add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file:
BASEDEV=LMS206.ADD
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Philips CD-ROM
device drivers.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the
BASEDEV=LMS205.ADD (or LMS206.ADD) line in the CONFIG.SYS file.  Also change
the transfer mode from the default, software polling transfer, to software
interrupt transfer. The syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows:
BASEDEV=LMS205.ADD [/P:nnn][/U:x][/M:y][/V]
where:
[./P:nnn] Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card. The value
          must be the same number as the port address selected by the jumper on
          the host interface card.
[/U:x]    Identifies a specific unit, x.  Valid values for x are 0, 1, 2, and
          3.  The default is zero.  LMS205 and LMS206 locate all CM250 and
          CM260 host adapters and assign unit numbers based on the order in
          which each was found. This parameter tells LMS205 and LMS206 which
          BASEDEV line it is currently processing.
[/M:y]    Indicates the number of 2500-byte CD frame buffers that should be
          allocated by the LMS205.ADD or LMS2056.ADD driver. Valid values for y
          are 8,...,26.  The default is 16. Any value below the minimum (8)
          will be assigned the minimum (8).
[/V]      Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
Modifying CONFIG.SYS for the Mitsumi CD-ROM Device Driver    314/3

The Mitsumi device driver (MITFX001.ADD) supports the following CD-ROM drives:

     Mitsumi CRMC-FX001D
     Mitsumi CRMC-FX001
     Mitsumi CRMC-LU005S
     Mitsumi CRMC-LU002S
     BSR 6800
     Tandy CDR-1000
This section lists the parameters that are supported for the Mitsumi CD-ROM
device driver.  The parameters can be changed by modifying the
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD line in the CONFIG.SYS file.  Also change the transfer
mode from the default, software polling transfer, to software interrupt
transfer.  The syntax for the BASEDEV statement is as follows:
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD [/P:nnn][/I:nn][/V]
where:
[/P:nnn]  Specifies the base I/O port address of the interface card.  This must
          be the same number as specified by the DIP switch on the interface
          card.
[/I:nn]   Specifies the interrupt request (IRQ) channel number. This must match
          the value specified on the jumper setting on the interface card.  If
          this parameter is not specified, the device driver will use software
          polling transfer.
[/V]      Instructs the device driver to display the device driver revision
          level and CD-ROM product information at startup time.
The examples that follow illustrate how this CD-ROM is attached to the most
common host adapters and indicate the required parameter switch settings for
each CD-ROM drive.
Example 1:  A Mitsumi CD-ROM drive is attached to a Mitsumi host adapter.
The Mitsumi host adapter supports I/O port address ranges from 300h to 3FCh.
If the Mitsumi host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of either 300h or
340h, the statement in CONFIG.SYS does not need to be modified and should
appear as follows:
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD
If the Mitsumi host adapter is set to an address other than those specified
above, the BASEDEV statement needs to be modified. For example, if the Mitsumi
host adapter is set to a base I/O port address of 320, the line in the
CONFIG.SYS file should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:320
Example 2:A Mitsumi CD-ROM drive is attached to a Creative Labs Sound Blaster
16 MultiCD.
If the Mitsumi CD-ROM port on the Sound Blaster 16 MultiCD is set to an I/O
port address of 340, the line in CONFIG.SYS should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:340
Note:    To enable interrupt transfer mode, which improves performance, the /I
parameter must be specified.  For example, to enable interrupt transfer mode
for IRQ channel 10 at I/O port address of 320h, the line in the CONFIG.SYS file
should appear as follows:
BASEDEV=MITFX001.ADD /P:320 /I:10
Using an Unsupported CD-ROM or SCSI/CD-ROM Combination    315/2

If you find that your drive or combination of CD-ROM drive and SCSI adapter is not supported by OS/2 Version 3, you can contact the manufacturer and obtain an OS/2 Adapter Device Driver (.ADD) file. Then, after you receive the .ADD file, use your current operating system and follow this procedure before you install OS/2:

  1. Make a copy of Diskette 1.  At a command prompt, type diskcopy a: a: and
     press Enter.
  2. Copy the .ADD file to the root directory on the copy of Diskette 1.  (The
     root directory is the first directory on the diskette.)  If there is not
     enough room, delete the following files from the copy of Diskette 1:
          For an ISA/EISA (non-Micro Channel) computer:  IBM2*.*
          For a Micro Channel computer:  IBM1*.*
     You will now have room to add device drivers to Diskette 1. However, if
     the .ADD driver is on a diskette, you might have to copy it to your hard
     disk before copying it to the copy of Diskette 1.
  3. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file located on the copy of Diskette 1:
       a. At the end of the file, add the appropriate BASEDEV= statement for
          your adapter.  For example, if your .ADD file is named T128SCSI.ADD,
          add the following BASEDEV= statement shown in capital letters:
               set cdrominst=1
               ifs=cdfs.ifs /q
               BASEDEV=T128SCSI.ADD
          The lowercase letters represent lines that already exist in your
          CONFIG.SYS file, and uppercase letters represent lines you need to
          insert.  This ensures proper placement and installation.
          Do not specify a file path for the .ADD file.
       b. Insert the letters REM before any lines in the CONFIG.SYS file that
          refer to the file you deleted in step 2 above.
  4. Begin the installation by inserting the Installation Diskette into drive A
     and restarting the system.  When prompted to insert Diskette 1, insert the
     copy that you modified.
  5. Install OS/2 Version 3, following the instructions in Using Easy
     Installation or Using Advanced Installation
When the installation is complete, you must make changes to the CONFIG.SYS file
located in the root directory of the OS/2 partition in order to make your
CD-ROM accessible.  You must also copy the .ADD that you put on the copy of
Diskette 1 to the \OS2 directory of the OS/2 drive.  The OS/2 Installation
program does not copy unsupported .ADD files automatically.  Do the following
(in the following examples, X represents the OS/2 partition):
  1. Open the OS/2 System folder on the Desktop.
  2. Open Command Prompts.
  3. Open OS/2 Window.
  4. At the command prompt, type cd\os2 and press Enter.
  5. Insert Diskette 1 into drive A.  Then type the following, pressing Enter
     after each:
     COPY A:\OS2CDROM.DMD
     COPY A:\CDFS.IFS
  6. Remove Diskette 1 from drive A and insert the manufacturer-supplied device
     driver diskette (which contains the .ADD file).
  7. Type the following and then press Enter:
     COPY A:\T128SCSI.ADD
     where T128SCSI.ADD represents the name of the device driver file.
  8. Using a system editor, add the lines shown in uppercase letters to the
     CONFIG.SYS file as shown below. (Lowercase letters represent lines that
     already exist in your CONFIG.SYS file; uppercase letters represent lines
     you need to insert.  This ensures proper placement and installation.)
     basedev=ibm1s506.add
     basedev=os2dasd.dmd
     DEVICE=X:\OS2\OS2CDROM.DMD /Q
     IFS=X:\OS2\CDFS.IFS /Q
     set bookshelf=x:\os2\book . . .
     codepage=437,850
     devinfo=kbd,us,x:\os2\keyboard.dcp
     BASEDEV=T128SCSI.ADD
     devinfo=scr,vga,x:\os2\viotbl.dcp
  9. Save the CONFIG.SYS file and exit the editor.
 10. Shut down your system.
The above procedure is not guaranteed to make your CD-ROM work properly because
the device drivers are made by manufacturers other than IBM.  For further
assistance, contact the manufacturer or your CD-ROM drive.
Using an IBM M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter    316/2

TheM - AudioadaptercanbeconfiguredtoautomaticallyrouteanyaudiosourceattachedtoitsLINE - INjacktotheLINE - OUTjack . ThismightbenecessaryifyourCD - ROMdriveisnotattachedinternallytotheaudiocardoutputs . ToenablethisfeatureoftheM - Audiocard ,addaPtotheendoftheDEVICE =statementforM - AudiointheCONFIG . SYSfile ,asinthefollowingexample : DEVICE=d:\MMOS2\ACPADD2.SYS A P where d represents the drive letter, which will already appear in your CONFIG.SYS file.

Using a Sound Blaster Adapter    317/2

Before you install the Sound Blaster adapter into your computer, you must know the interrupt level, I/O port address, and the DMA channels. These values were shown when you installed the adapter into your computer. If you do not know these values, you can do the following:

  o  On a Micro Channel computer, run the Reference Diskette and look at the
     system configuration.
  o  On an ISA/EISA (non-Micro Channel) computer, check the Dip switches on
     your Sound Blaster.
If your computer has a Token Ring Adapter or a SCSI adapter, you might have
problems if you set Sound Blaster to use I/O port address 220.  Choose a
different address if you have either of these adapters installed.  I/O address
240 is a good choice if 220 cannot be used.
ISA and EISA (non-Micro Channel) computers use Interrupt level 7 for the
printer (LPT) port.  If you have this type of computer with a parallel printer,
choose a different interrupt.
  o  This release of OS/2 does not support MIDI recording.
  o  Sound Blaster (non-SB PRO) does not support software volume control.  The
     MMPM/2 Volume Control application will, therefore, be ineffective for
     these adapters.
  o  If you have an older Sound Blaster (non-SB PRO) card, ensure that you
     upgrade the DSP module to Version 2.0 or higher.  Versions 1.0 and 1.5 are
     not supported by the Sound Blaster device drivers.
Using a Pro AudioSpectrum 16    318/2

The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 is conceptually two sound cards in one adapter. The adapter provides support for the MediaVision Pro AudioSpectrum 16 and the Sound Blaster 2.0. A Yamaha OPL-3 chip is included for FM MIDI synthesis. It is used by the OS/2 device driver for MIDI playback and for MIDI background sound when playing games. The FM MIDI hardware is the same as used in Creative Labs Sound Blaster adapters and is fixed to always respond at a single I/O base address. This commonality of hardware is the reason that multiple Pro AudioSpectrum 16 adapters and multiple Sound Blaster adapters cannot be used in a single computer. The OS/2 physical device driver does not use the Sound Blaster wave audio side of the adapter. This is left free for use by WIN-OS/2 sessions or by games running in DOS sessions. The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 side of the adapter requires one interrupt (IRQ), one Direct Memory Access (DMA) channel, and two I/O addresses. The Sound Blaster side also uses one interrupt (IRQ), one DMA channel, and two I/O addresses. The values for each side of the adapter must be unique just as those selected for other hardware adapters must be unique. I/O addresses 388 and 330 will not be seen in the device driver statement. The Pro AudioSpectrum 16 configurations (DMA and IRQ) are set via software at system startup, based on parameters specified on the DEVICE= line of the CONFIG.SYS file. The values are set by OS/2 Multimedia installation. An example of the DEVICE= line that should appear in your CONFIG.SYS file for the Pro AudioSpectrum 16 device driver follows: DEVICE=D:\MMOS2\MVPRODD.SYS /I:10 /D:5 /S:1,240,1,5 /N:PAS161$ where:

/N:xxxxx  Specifies the name of the driver.
/T:x      /T:1 = use on-board oscillator for OPL-3 (the default is /T:0).
/D:x      Sets the DMA channel.
/Q:x      Sets the IRQ channel.
/I:x      Sets the IRQ channel.
/B:xxx    Specifies HEX base board I/O location (the default is /B:388).
/W:x      If /W:1, enables warm boot reset (the default is /W:0).
/M:x,xxx  MPU [enabled,base address]
/F:x      FM synthesis (/F:1 is enabled by default).
/J:x      /J:1 causes a joystick to be enabled (the default is /J:0).
/S:x,xxx,x,x Sound Blaster [enable,base address,DMA,IRQ]
The Sound Blaster DMA is fixed at DMA channel 1. The I/O base address and IRQ
settings are set differently based on the version of the Pro AudioSpectrum 16
adapter. Older adapters have these values set via jumpers on the card. The
current versions set the Sound Blaster settings via software on the command
line to MVPRODD.SYS (or MVSOUND.SYS for DOS).
As of this release of OS/2, the device driver MVPRODD.SYS does not know how to
set the Sound Blaster IRQ from software. Only the first two parameters of the
/S: parameters are used (enable and I/O location).
Keyboard and Mouse Use    319/1+

The following tables list some of the most common tasks you can do, using either the keyboard or a mouse. The plus (+) sign between key names means to press and hold down the keys in the order shown and release them together. When a column is left blank under the Mouse heading, it means that there is no equivalent mouse function. The keyboard must be used. The following terms are used to describe actions taken with a mouse:

Click         Press and release a mouse button.  Instructions explain whether
              you should click mouse button 1 or 2.
Double-click  Press and release mouse button 1 twice in quick succession.
Drag          Move an object across the computer screen with a mouse.
Open          Point to an item and double-click.  Instructions explain which
              item to point to.
Point         Move the mouse pointer.
Select        Point to an item and click mouse button 1.  Instructions explain
              which item to point to.
Note:  For a detailed list of specific key assignments, see the Master Help
Index.
System Tasks    320/2

ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD? 3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Get help. 3 F1 3 Select the word HELP. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Restart the system. 3 Ctrl+Alt+Del3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Switch to the next 3 Alt+Tab 3 Select the window. 3 3 window. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Switch to the next 3 Alt+Esc 3 Press both mouse buttons at the same 3 3 window or full-screen 3 3 time; open the window. 3 3 session. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Display the Window 3 Ctrl+Esc 3 Point to an empty area on the 3 3 List. 3 3 desktop; click both mouse buttons at 3 3 3 3 the same time. 3 @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY

Object Tasks    321/2

ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD? 3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move among objects. 3 , , , or 3 Point to the object. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Select an object. 3 Use the arrow keys to 3 Select the object. 3 3 3 move among the objects. 3 3 3 3 Press the Spacebar to 3 3 3 3 select an object. 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Select more than one 3 Shift+F8 to begin Add 3 Press and hold the Ctrl 3 3 object. 3 mode. Use the arrow keys 3 key. Select an object. 3 3 3 to move among objects. 3 Repeat as needed. 3 3 3 Press the Spacebar to 3 Release the Ctrl key 3 3 3 make each selection. 3 when done. 3 3 3 Repeat as needed. Press 3 3 3 3 Shift+F8 again to end 3 3 3 3 Add mode. 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Select all objects. 3 Press Ctrl+/ 3 Press and hold mouse 3 3 3 3 button 1; then drag the 3 3 3 3 pointer over every 3 3 3 3 object. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Deselect all objects. 3 Press Ctrl+\ 3 Select an empty area on 3 3 3 3 the desktop. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Open an object. 3 Select it; then press 3 Point to the object; 3 3 3 Enter. 3 then double-click. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Delete an object. 3 Select it; then press 3 Point to the object; 3 3 3 Shift+F10. Select 3 then press and hold 3 3 3 DELETE from the 3 down mouse button 2. 3 3 3 pop-up menu. 3 Drag the object to the 3 3 3 3 Shredder object. 3 3 3 3 Release mouse button 2. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Print an object. 3 Select it; then press 3 Point to the object; 3 3 3 Shift+F10. Select PRINT 3 then press and hold 3 3 3 from the pop-up menu. 3 down mouse button 2. 3 3 3 3 Drag the object to the 3 3 3 3 Printer object. 3 3 3 3 Release mouse button 2. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move an object. 3 Select it; then press 3 Point to the object; 3 3 3 Shift+F10. Select MOVE 3 then press and hold 3 3 3 from the pop-up menu. 3 down mouse button 2. 3 3 3 3 Drag the object to 3 3 3 3 another folder object. 3 3 3 3 Release mouse button 2. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Copy an object. 3 Select it; then press 3 Press and hold down the 3 3 3 Shift+F10. Select COPY 3 Ctrl key; then point to 3 3 3 from the pop-up menu. 3 the object. Press and 3 3 3 3 hold down mouse button 3 3 3 3 2. Drag the object to 3 3 3 3 where you want a copy 3 3 3 3 to appear. Release 3 3 3 3 mouse button 2; then 3 3 3 3 release the Ctrl key. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Change the name of an 3 Select the object; then 3 Press and hold down the 3 3 object. 3 press Shift+F10. Press 3 Alt key; select the 3 3 3  ; then press Enter. 3 name (title). Release 3 3 3 Select the GENERAL tab. 3 the Alt key. Edit the 3 3 3 Select the TITLE field; 3 name. Select an area 3 3 3 then edit the name. 3 away from the name. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Press Alt+Shift+Tab; 3 Point to an empty area 3 3 for the desktop folder. 3 then press Ctrl+\. Then 3 of the desktop folder; 3 3 3 press Shift+F10. 3 then click mouse button 3 3 3 3 2. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Select it; then press 3 Point to the object; 3 3 for an object. 3 Shift+F10. 3 then click mouse button 3 3 3 3 2. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Select the first choice 3 Home 3 Select the choice. 3 3 in a pop-up menu. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Select the last choice 3 End 3 Select the choice. 3 3 in a pop-up menu. 3 3 3 @DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDADDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDY ZDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDBDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD? 3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Select a choice using 3 Type the underlined 3 3 3 the underlined letter. 3 letter. 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Get Help. 3 Select and object; then 3 Point to the object; 3 3 3 press F1. 3 then click mouse button 3 3 3 3 2. Select HELP. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move between the object 3 Press Alt+F6. 3 Select the window or 3 3 and the Help window. 3 3 object. 3

Window Tasks    322/2

3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Get Help. 3 F1. 3 Select the word HELP; 3 3 3 3 then select the type of 3 3 3 3 help you want. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Display the pop-up menu 3 Alt+Spacebar 3 Point to the title-bar 3 3 for a window. 3 3 icon; then click mouse 3 3 3 3 button 2. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move a window. 3 Alt+F7; then use the 3 Point to the title bar; 3 3 3 arrow keys. 3 then press and hold 3 3 3 3 down mouse button 2. 3 3 3 3 Drag the window to the 3 3 3 3 new location. Release 3 3 3 3 mouse button 2. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Size a window. 3 Alt+F8; then use the 3 Point to the border; 3 3 3 arrow keys. 3 then press and hold 3 3 3 3 down mouse button 2. 3 3 3 3 Drag the border of the 3 3 3 3 window in any direc- 3 3 3 3 tion. Release mouse 3 3 3 3 button 2. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Set a default size for 3 Press Alt; then press S. 3 Press and hold the 3 3 a window. 3 Use the up, down, left, 3 Shift key; then point 3 3 3 or right cursor keys to 3 to a corner of the 3 3 3 adjust two of the 3 window border. Press 3 3 3 borders; then press 3 and hold mouse button 3 3 3 Enter. 3 1; then drag the border 3 3 3 3 to the desired size. 3 3 3 NOTE: If you press the 3 Release mouse button 1; 3 3 3 mnemonic key for 3 then release the Shift 3 3 3 Hide, Minimize, 3 key. 3 3 3 or Maximize, 3 3 3 3 instead of the S 3 3 3 3 for Size, the 3 3 3 3 selected choice 3 3 3 3 will become the 3 3 3 3 default size of 3 3 3 3 the window. 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Minimize a window. 3 Alt+F9 3 Select the Minimize 3 3 3 3 button. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Hide a window. 3 Alt+F11 3 Select the Hide button. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Maximize a window. 3 Alt+F10 3 Select the Maximize 3 3 3 3 button. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Close a window. 3 Alt+F4 3 Double-click on the 3 3 3 3 title bar icon. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move up through the 3 Page Up or PgUp. 3 Select the area above 3 3 contents of a window, 3 3 the slider box on the 3 3 one page at a time. 3 3 scroll bar. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move down through the 3 Page Down or PgDn. 3 Select the area below 3 3 contents of a window, 3 3 the slider box on the 3 3 one page at a time. 3 3 scroll bar. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move to and from the 3 F10 3 Select the menu bar or 3 3 menu bar. 3 3 the window. 3

Notebook Tasks    323/2

3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Get Help 3 F1 3 Select the HELP push 3 3 3 3 button. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move to the next page. 3 Alt+Page Down 3 Select a notebook tab. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move to the previous 3 Alt+Page Up 3 Select a notebook tab. 3 3 page. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move the cursor from 3 Alt+Up Arrow 3 Select a notebook tab. 3 3 the notebook page to a 3 3 3 3 tab. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move the cursor from a 3 Alt+Down Arrow 3 Select the notebook 3 3 tab to the notebook 3 3 page. 3 3 page. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move to the next field. 3 Tab 3 Select the field. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move to the next item 3 Up, Down, Left, or Right 3 3 3 within a field. 3 Arrow 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Select an item in a 3 Enter 3 Select the item. 3 3 single selection field. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Select an item in a 3 Spacebar 3 Select the button or 3 3 multiple selection 3 3 box next to the item. 3 3 field. 3 3 3

Help Window Tasks    324/2

These tasks only work from within a help window.

3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Switch between a help 3 Alt+F6 3 Select the window. 3 3 window and the object 3 3 3 3 or window for which 3 3 3 3 help was displayed. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Display General help. 3 F2 3 Select HELP; then 3 3 3 3 select GENERAL HELP. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Display Keys help. 3 F9 3 Select HELP; then 3 3 3 3 select KEYS HELP. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Display Help index. 3 F11 or Shift+F1 3 Select HELP; then 3 3 3 3 select to HELP INDEX. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Display Using help. 3 Shift+F10 3 Select HELP; then 3 3 3 3 select USING HELP. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Display help for a 3 Use Tab to move the 3 Double-click on the 3 3 highlighted word or 3 cursor to the high- 3 highlighted word or 3 3 phrase. 3 lighted word or phrase; 3 phrase. 3 3 3 then press Enter. 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Display the previous 3 Esc 3 Select the PREVIOUS 3 3 help window. 3 3 push button. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Search for a word or 3 Ctrl+S 3 Select SERVICES; then 3 3 phrase 3 3 select SEARCH. 3

Master Help Index Tasks    325/2

3 TASK 3 KEYS 3 MOUSE 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Open the Master Help 3 Enter 3 Double-click on the 3 3 Index. 3 3 Master Help Index. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move through the 3 3 Select the topic. 3 3 topics, one line at a 3 3 3 3 time. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Select the area above 3 3 3 3 the slider box on the 3 3 3 3 scroll bar. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move down through the 3 Page Down or PgDn. 3 Select the area below 3 3 topics, one page at a 3 3 the slider box on the 3 3 time. 3 3 scroll bar. 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move up through the 3 Page Up or PgUp. 3 3 3 topics, one page at a 3 3 3 3 time. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Move to the topics 3 Type the letter of the 3 Select the letter of 3 3 beginning with a 3 alphabet 3 the alphabet. 3 3 letter. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Switch between an entry 3 Alt+F6 3 Select the window. 3 3 and the Master Help 3 3 3 3 Index. 3 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Display related infor- 3 Use Tab to move the 3 Double-click on an 3 3 mation. 3 cursor to the entry 3 entry listed under 3 3 3 listed under related 3 related information. 3 3 3 information; then press 3 3 3 3 Enter. 3 3 CDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDEDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD4 3 Return to the previous 3 Esc 3 Select the PREVIOUS 3 3 help window. 3 3 push button. 3

Notices    326/1+

References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM's product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM's intellectual property rights or other legally protectable rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or service. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user's responsibility. IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood NY 10594, U.S.A.

Trademarks    327/2

The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in this publication, are trademarks or service marks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries:

AT                          IBM
IBMLink                     Micro Channel
Operating System/2          OS/2
PC/XT                       Personal System/2
Presentation Manager        Proprinter
PS/2                        Screen Reader
ThinkPad                    ValuePoint
WIN-OS/2                    Workplace Shell
XGA                         XT
The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk (**) in this publication, are
trademarks of other companies as follows:
Trademark                Owner
Adaptec                  Adaptec, Inc.
Adobe                    Adobe Systems Incorporated
Adobe Type Manager       Adobe Systems Incorporated
After Dark               Berkely Systems, Inc.
Allways                  Funk Software, Inc.
ALR                      Advanced Logic Research, Inc.
AMI                      American Megatrends, Inc.
Aox                      Aox Corporation
APM                      Astek International
ATI                      ATI Technologies, Inc.
Borland C++              Borland International, Inc.
Bubble-Jet               Canon, Inc.
Canon                    Canon Kabushiki Kaisha
Central Point Anti-Virus Central Point Software, Inc.
Central Point Backup     Central Point Software, Inc.
Cirrus Logic             Cirrus Logic, Inc.
Compaq                   Compaq Computer Corporation
CompuServe               CompuServe Incorporated
Echo                     Echo Speech Corporation
Everex                   Everex Systems, Inc.
Flexview                 Nutmeg Systems
Freelance                Lotus Development Corporation
Future Domain            Future Domain Corporation
Gateway 2000             Gateway 2000, Inc.
Graphics Ultra Pro       ATI Technologies, Inc.
Helvetica                Linotype Company
Hewlett-Packard          Hewlett-Packard Company
Hitachi                  Hitachi Ltd.
HP                       Hewlett-Packard Company
Intel                    Intel Corporation
IOMEGA                   IOMEGA Inc.
LaserJet                 Hewlett-Packard Company
Leading Technology       Leading Technology, Inc.
Legend                   Sigma Designs Inc.
Logitech                 Logitech, Inc.
Lotus                    Lotus Development Corporation
McAfee                   McAfee Associates
Media Vision             Media Vision, Inc.
Micronics                Micronics Electronics, Inc.
Microsoft                Microsoft Corporation
Mitsumi                  Mitsumi Denki Kabushki Kaisha
Motherboard Factory      Motherboard Factory
Mylex                    Mylex Corporation
NetWare                  Novell, Inc.
Nomad                    Gateway 2000, Inc.
Northgate                Northgate Computer Systems
Orchid                   Orchid Technology Inc.
Panasonic                Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
PCMCIA                   Personal Computer Memory Card International
                         Association
Philips                  Philips Electronics N.V.
Phoenix                  Phoenix Technologies, Ltd.
PostScript               Adobe Systems Incorporated
Pro AudioSpectrum        Media Vision, Inc.
ProComm                  Datastorm Technologies, Inc.
Quantum                  Quantum Corporation
Reveal                   Reveal Computer Products, Inc.
SlimLine                 Northgate Computer Systems
Sony                     Sony Corporation
Sound Blaster            Creative Labs, Inc.
Stacker                  Stac Electronics
S3                       S3 Incorporated
Times New Roman          Monotype Corporation, Limited
Trident                  Trident Microsystems, Incorporated
Toshiba                  Toshiba Corporation
Tseng                    Tseng Laboratories Inc.
Ventura Publisher        Ventura Software, Inc.
VESA                     Video Electronics Standards Association
Video 7                  Video Seven, Inc.
Weitek                   Weitek Corporation
Western Digital          Western Digital Corporation
Windows                  Microsoft Corporation
WordPerfect              WordPerfect Corporation
Zenith Data Systems      Zenith Electronics Corporation
ZEOS                     ZEOS International Ltd.
1-2-3                    Lotus Development Corporation

Glossary 328/1+

A    329/2+


archive    330/3

archive (1) A flag of files and directories that OS/2 uses to determine which files are new or modified. Files with this flag are included when a backup copy is made or when all the files are restored on a hard disk. (2) A copy of one or more files or a copy of a database that is saved for future reference or for recovery purposes in case the original data is damaged or lost.

attribute    331/3

attribute A characteristic or property of a file, directory, or object; for example, its size, last modification date, or flag. See also setting.

audio    332/3

audio Pertaining to the portion of recorded information that can be heard.

AUTOEXEC.BAT    333/3

AUTOEXEC.BAT A batch file whose main purpose is to process commands that set up the operating system for DOS sessions.

audio    334/3

audio Pertaining to the portion of recorded information that can be heard.

audio processing    335/3

audio processing In multimedia applications, manipulating digital audio; for example, by editing or creating special effects.

audio segment    336/3

audio segment A contiguous set of recorded data from an audio track. An audio segment might or might not be associated with a video segment.

audio track    337/3

audio track (1) The audio portion of a program. (2) The physical location where the audio is placed beside the image. (A system with two audio tracks can have either stereo sound or two independent audio tracks.) (3) Synonymous with sound track&per.

AudioVisual Connection (AVC)    338/3

AudioVisual Connection (AVC) An IBM product that enables a user to develop and deliver professional-quality audio-visual shows on a PS/2 computer.

authoring    339/3

authoring A structured approach to combining all the media elements in an interactive production, assisted by computer software designed for this purpose.

authoring system    340/3

authoring system The software tools necessary to integrate computers and peripherals, such as CD-ROMs and laser videodiscs.

B    341/2+


background    342/3

background In multiprogramming, the conditions under which low-priority programs run when high-priority programs are not using the system resources. A background session runs one program step at a time. It does not run interactively with the user; processing continues on other sessions in the foreground.

back up    343/3

back up To copy information onto a diskette or hard disk for record keeping or recovery purposes.

batch file    344/3

batch file A file that contains a series of commands to be processed sequentially. A batch file can have either a CMD or a BAT extension.

baud rate    345/3

baud rate A number representing the speed at which information travels over a communication line. The higher the number, the faster communication occurs.

bit map    346/3

bit map A representation of an image by an array of bits.

bookmark    347/3

bookmark A menu choice in online books that is used to save your place in the document that you are viewing, by marking the topic that is displayed.

border    348/3

border A visual indicator of a window's boundaries.

button    349/3

button A mechanism on a pointing device, such as a mouse, or an area on the computer screen, used to request or initiate an action. See also maximize button, hide button, push button, radio button, and restore button.

byte    350/3

byte A group of eight adjacent binary digits that are treated as a unit, and that often represent a character.

C    351/2+


cache    352/3

cache A storage buffer that contains frequently accessed instructions and data; it is used to reduce hard disk access time.

cascade    353/3

cascade A choice in a menu that arranges the secondary windows so that each window is offset on two sides from the window it overlaps. The windows appear to be stacked, one behind the other.

cascading choice    354/3

cascading choice A menu choice that has an arrow to the right of it. If this arrow is selected, a cascaded menu appears. A three-dimensional arrow indicates that a cascaded choice is preselected and is the default action when you select the main choice.

A one-dimensional arrow indicates that additional choices are available;

however, there is no default action. See also cascaded menu.

cascaded menu    355/3

cascaded menu A menu that appears when the arrow to the right of a cascading choice is selected. It contains a set of choices that are related to the cascading choice. Cascaded menus are used to reduce the length of a menu.

case-sensitive    356/3

case-sensitive A condition in which entries for an entry field must conform to a specific lowercase, uppercase, or mixed-case format in order to be valid.

CD-ROM    357/3

CD-ROM High capacity, read-only memory in the form of an optically read compact disc. See also compact disc.

character    358/3

character A letter, digit, or other symbol that is used as part of the organization, control, or representation of data.

check box    359/3

check box A square box with associated text that represents one choice in a set of multiple choices. When you select a choice, a check mark appears in the check box to indicate that the choice is in effect. You can clear the check box by selecting the choice again. Contrast with radio button.

check mark    360/3

check mark A symbol that shows that a choice is currently active. This symbol is used in menus and check boxes. See also checkbox.

chip set    361/3

chip set An integrated circuit or a set of integrated circuits which provide hardware support for a related set of functions, such as generation of video.

choice    362/3

choice Any item that you can select. A choice can appear in a selection field, in a menu, or in text (a list of selectable choices), or it might be represented by an icon.

circular slider control    363/3

circular slider control A knob-like control that performs like a control on a TV or stereo.

click    364/3

click To press and release the select button on a pointing device without moving the pointer off the choice. See also double-click.

clip    365/3

clip A section of recorded, filmed, or videotaped material.

clipboard    366/3

clipboard An area of memory that temporarily holds data being passed from one program to another. Data is placed on the clipboard by selecting from a menu.

close    367/3

close A choice in Window List and in those programs that have a system menu. This is also a cascading choice from the Windows choice on a pop-up menu. This choice ends highlighted programs and objects and their associated windows.

command prompt    368/3

command prompt A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands.

compact disc    369/3

compact disc A disc, usually 4.75 inches in diameter, from which data is read optically by means of a laser.

CONFIG.SYS    370/3

CONFIG.SYS A file that the operating system adds to the root directory during installation. This file contains statements that set up the system configuration each time you restart the operating system.

configuration    371/3

configuration (1) The manner in which hardware and software of an information processing system are organized and interconnected. (2) The arrangement and relationship of the components in a system or network.

configure    372/3

configure To describe to a system the devices, optional features, and programs installed on the system.

container    373/3

container An object that holds other objects. A folder is an example of a container object.

copy    374/3

copy (1) A reproduction of an original. (2) To make a reproduction of an object in a new location. After the copy action, the original object remains in the original location and a duplicate exists in the new location. A menu choice that places onto the clipboard a copy of what you have selected. This choice is also used to make copies of objects from a pop-up menu.

cut    375/3

cut A choice in a menu of a program that removes a selected object, or a part of an object, to the clipboard, usually compressing the space it occupied in a window. Removes a selected object or a part of an object to the clipboard, usually compressing the space it occupied in a window.

D    376/2+


data    377/3

data The coded representation of information for use in a computer. Data has certain attributes such as type and length.

database    378/3

database A collection of data with a given structure for accepting, storing, and providing, on demand, data for multiple users.

data-file object    379/3

data-file object An object that represents a file in the file system. The primary purpose is to convey information, such as text, graphics, audio, or video. A letter or spreadsheet is an example of data-file objects.

default    380/3

default A value, attribute, or option that is assumed when another is not explicitly specified.

default action    381/3

default action An action that is performed when you press Enter while pointing at an object, double-click the selection button on an object, or perform a direct-manipulation operation. The default action is intended to be the action that you would most likely want in the given situation.

default choice    382/3

default choice A selected choice that a program provides for the initial appearance of a group of selection choices.

deselect    383/3

deselect The process of removing selection highlighting from one or more choices. Contrast with select.

desktop    384/3

desktop A folder that fills the entire screen and holds all of the objects that enable you to interact with and perform operations on the system.

device driver    385/3

device driver A program that contains the code needed to attach and use a device, such as a display, plotter, printer, or mouse. The driver might also include data such as help information.

device font    386/3

device font A font particular to, and loaded in the memory of a device such as a video display or printer. Some device fonts have size and language-support restrictions.

device object    387/3

device object An object that provides a means of communication between a computer and another piece of equipment, such as a printer or disk drive. See also printer object.

digital    388/3

digital Pertaining to data in the form of numeric characters.

digital audio    389/3

digital audio Audible information that has been converted to and stored in digital form.

digital video    390/3

digital video Visual material that has been converted to digital form.

direct manipulation    391/3

direct manipulation The action of using a mouse or another pointing device to work with objects, rather than through menus. For example, changing the size of a window by dragging one of its edges is direct manipulation. Moving or printing an object by dragging it to the printer is another example. See also drag.

directory    392/3

directory (1) A list of the files that are stored on a disk or diskette. A directory also contains information about the file such as size and date of last change. (2) A named grouping of files in a file system. See also folder.

directory tree    393/3

directory tree An outline of all the directories and subdirectories on the current drive.

disk    394/3

disk A round, flat, data medium that is rotated in order to read or write data. See also compact disc, hard disk, and diskette.

diskette    395/3

diskette A removable magnetic disk enclosed in a protective cover used to store information. See also diskette drive.

diskette drive    396/3

diskette drive A mechanism used to seek, read, and write data on diskettes.

DOS command prompt    397/3

DOS command prompt A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands. The DOS command prompt is displayed in a DOS window or DOS full screen. Contrast with OS/2 command prompt.

DOS session    398/3

DOS session A session created by the OS/2 operating system that supports the independent execution of a DOS program. The DOS program appears to run independent of any other programs in the system.

double-click    399/3

double-click To press and release the select button on a pointing device twice in rapid succession while the pointer is over the intended target of the operation. See also click.

downloaded font    400/3

downloaded font A soft font copied (downloaded) to the memory of a printer.

drag    401/3

drag To use a mouse or another pointing device to move an object. The following are examples: (1) pointing to an object; then pressing and holding mouse button 2 while moving to a new location, or (2) pointing to a window border; then holding down mouse button 1 or 2 while moving the border to change the size of the window. Dragging ends when the mouse button is released.

dynamic data exchange    402/3

dynamic data exchange The exchange of data between programs or between a program and a data-file object. Any change you make to information in one program or session is applied to the identical data created by the other program. For example, with the dynamic data exchange (DDE) feature enabled, you can select the duplicate of a spreadsheet that is embedded in a report. Then, if you make changes to the spreadsheet copy in the report, the same changes are made to the original spreadsheet file.

E    403/2+


enable    404/3

enable (1) To make functional. (2) The state of a processing unit that allows the occurrence of certain types of interruptions. (3) To initiate the operation of a circuit or device.

environment variables    405/3

environment variables A series of commands placed in the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files that dictate the way the operating system is going to run and what external devices it is going to recognize. These commands also can be specified as settings of DOS programs.

extended attributes    406/3

extended attributes Additional information that the system or a program associates with a file. An extended attribute can be any format, for example text, a bit map, or binary data.

F    407/2+


field    408/3

field An identifiable area in a window used to contain data. Examples of fields are: an entry field, into which you can type text; and a field of radio buttons, from which you can select one choice.

file    409/3

file A collection of related data that is stored and retrieved by an assigned name. For example, a file can include information that starts a program, program-file object, can contain text or graphics data-file object, or can process a series of commands such as a batch file.

file allocation table (FAT)    410/3

file allocation table (FAT) A table used by DOS to allocate disk space for a file. It also locates and chains together parts of the file that may be scattered on different sectors so that the file can be used in a random or sequential manner. Contrast with High Performance File System (HPFS).

file name    411/3

file name (1) The name used by a program to identify a file. (2) When referring to the file allocation table (FAT) file system, the file name is the portion of the identifying name that precedes the extension. When referring to the high performance file system (HPFS), the file name includes an extension (if there is one). If you are using the HPFS, the file name can be up to 254 characters and can include any number of periods. The following is an example of a path and file name in the HPFS file system where C: is the drive, the first \ is the root, INCOME is the directory, and SALES.FIGURES.SEPTEMBER is the file name:

   C:\INCOME\SALES.FIGURES.SEPTEMBER

If you are using the FAT file system, the file name can be up to eight characters and can be followed by an optional three-character extension. The following is an example of a path and file name in the FAT file system where C: is the drive, the first \ is the root, INCOME is the directory, TAX is a subdirectory, and SALES.TXT is the file name and extension:

   C:\INCOME\TAX\SALES.TXT
flag    412/3

flag A characteristic of a file or directory that enables it to be used in certain ways. See also archive, hidden, read-only, and system.

folder    413/3

folder A container used to organize objects, programs, documents, other folders, or any combination of these. The folders on the desktop represent the directories in the file system. For example, a folder can have other folders within it. This is similar to a subdirectory within a directory.

font    414/3

font A particular style (shape), size, slant, and weight, defined for an entire character set; for example, 9-point Helvetica italic bold. When applied to outline or scalable character sets, which can be scaled to any size, font refers to style, slant, and weight, but not to size.

foreground    415/3

foreground In multiprogramming, the environment in which interactive high-priority programs run. These programs run interactively with the user.

format    416/3

format To check a hard disk or diskette for defects and prepare it to hold information.

Format 0 MIDI file    417/3

Format 0 MIDI file All MIDI data is stored on a single track.

Format 1 MIDI file    418/3

Format 1 MIDI file All MIDI data is stored on multiple tracks.

H    419/2+


hard disk    420/3

hard disk A rigid disk in a hard disk drive that you cannot remove. The hard disk can be partitioned into storage areas of variable sizes that are subdivided into directories and subdirectories. See also partition.

Help    421/3

Help A choice on a pop-up menu that gives you assistance and information; for example, general help about the purpose of the object. (This information is the same as highlighting the choice and pressing F1.) If you select the arrow to the right of Help, a cascaded menu appears from which you can request further help. The Help choice also can appear in those programs that have a menu bar.

Help Index    422/3

Help Index A choice in the Help cascaded menu that presents an alphabetic listing of help topics for an object. The Help index choice also can appear in those programs that have Help on a menu bar.

Help push button    423/3

Help push button A push button that, when selected, provides information about the item the cursor is on or about the entire window.

hidden    424/3

hidden A flag that indicates that a file or directory should not be displayed in the directory tree or the directory window.

hide    425/3

hide To remove a window from the desktop. Hidden windows are displayed in the Window List.

hide button    426/3

hide button A small button located in the right-hand corner of the title bar of a window that, when selected, removes all of the windows associated with that window from the screen and are displayed in the Window List.

highlighting    427/3

highlighting Emphasizing a display element or segment by modifying its visual attributes.

high performance file system (HPFS)    428/3

high performance file system (HPFS) An installable file system that uses high-speed buffer storage, known as a cache, to provide fast access to large disk volumes. The file system also supports the coexistence of multiple, active file systems on a single personal computer, with the capability of multiple and different storage devices. File names used with HPFS can have as many as 254 characters.

I    429/2+


icon    430/3

icon A graphical representation of an object, consisting of an image, image background, and a label.

image file    431/3

image file A file that is created from a DOS startup diskette. The image file is a copy of the information on the startup diskette. Just as a DOS session can be started from a DOS startup diskette, a DOS session can be started from an image file of that same diskette.

inactive window    432/3

inactive window A window you are not currently interacting with. This window cannot receive input from the mouse or keyboard. Contrast with active window.

install    433/3

install (1) To physically copy the files from the shipped diskettes of an operating system or program to specified areas (directories) of a hard disk. (2) Installing a printer driver, queue driver, or port means adding the driver to the INI file (and copying to the hard disk only if required). Deleting a printer driver, queue driver, or port removes the entry from the INI file, but leaves the program file on your hard disk.

interrupt request (IRQ)    434/3

interrupt request (IRQ) A request for processing on a particular priority level. It may be generated by the active program, the processing unit, or an I/O device.

IRQ    435/3

IRQ See interrupt request (IRQ).

J    436/2+


job    437/3

job A data file sent to a printer to be printed.

K    438/2+


kernel    439/3

kernel (1) The part of an operating system that performs basic functions such as allocating hardware resources. (2) A part of a program that must be in main storage in order to load other parts of the program.

keys help    440/3

keys help A choice in the Help cascaded menu that presents a listing of all the key assignments for an object or a product. This choice also can appear in those programs that have Help on a menu bar.

kilobyte (KB)    441/3

kilobyte (KB) A term meaning 1024 bytes.

L    442/2+


LAN    443/3

LAN Local Area Network. (1) Two or more computing units connected for local resource sharing. (2) A network in which communications are limited to a moderate-sized geographic area, such as a single office building, warehouse, or campus, and that do not extend across public rights-of-way.

list box    444/3

list box A vertical, scrollable list of objects or settings choices that you can select.

log in    445/3

log in (1) To begin a session with a remote resource (2) The act of identifying yourself as authorized to use the resource. Often, the system requires a user ID and password to check your authorization to use the resource.

log out    446/3

log out (1) To end a session or request that a session be ended. (2) The act of removing access to a remote resource from a workstation. Contrast with log in.

M    447/2+


M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter (M-ACPA)    448/3

M-Audio Capture and Playback Adapter (M-ACPA) An adapter card (for use with the IBM PS/2 product line) that provides the ability to record and play back high quality sound. The adapter converts the audio input (analog) signals to a digital format that is compressed and stored for later use.

mark    449/3

mark A menu choice of a program that you select to highlight text or graphics that you want to perform clipboard operations on. The clipboard operations are cut, copy, paste, clear, and delete.

Master Help Index    450/3

Master Help Index An object on the desktop that, when selected, presents an alphabetic listing of operating system tasks and topics.

maximize    451/3

maximize A menu choice available from the Windows choice on a pop-up menu. Select this choice to enlarge the window to its largest possible size.

maximize button    452/3

maximize button A large, square button located in the rightmost corner of the title bar of a window that, when selected, enlarges the window to its largest possible size. Contrast with hide button. See also restore button.

megabyte (MB)    453/3

megabyte (MB) A term meaning approximately 1000000 bytes.

memory    454/3

memory (1) The storage on electronic chips; for example, random access memory, where your programs and data are held while you use them, or read-only memory where information is stored that your system can refer to but not change. (2) Program-addressable storage; the locations by which the operating system and your programs can locate information that is temporarily held in memory. With the OS/2 operating system, program-addressable memory might be larger than the electronic chip memory in your computer.

menu    455/3

menu A displayed list of available items from which you can make a selection. See also popup menu.

menu bar    456/3

menu bar The area near the top of the window, below the title bar and above the rest of the window, that contains choices that provide access to other menus.

MIDI    457/3

MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface.

MIDI Mapper    458/3

MIDI Mapper Provides the ability to translate and redirect MIDI messages to achieve device-independent playback of MIDI sequences.

migrate    459/3

migrate (1) To move to a changed operating environment, usually to a new release or version of a system. (2) To move data from one hierarchy of storage to another.

minimize    460/3

minimize To remove a window (using the minimize button) to one of the following:

  o  Minimized Window Viewer
  o  Window List
  o  Desktop Folder.
See also hide.
minimize button    461/3

minimize button A button, located next to the rightmost button in a title bar, that when selected, reduces the window to its smallest possible size and removes all of the windows associated with that window from the screen. Contrast with maximize button and hide button.

Minimized Window Viewer    462/3

Minimized Window Viewer A folder that contains icons of minimized windows. See also minimize button and minimize.

mix    463/3

mix The combining of audio or video sources during postproduction.

mixer    464/3

mixer A device used to simultaneously combine and blend several inputs into one or two outputs.

modem    465/3

modem A device that converts digital data from a computer to an analog signal that can be transmitted on a telecommunications line and that converts the received signal to data for the computer.

mouse    466/3

mouse A pointing device that you move on a flat surface to position a pointer on the screen. It allows you to select a choice or function to be performed or to perform operations on the screen, such as dragging or drawing lines from one position to another.

mouse button    467/3

mouse button A mechanism on a mouse that you press to select choices or initiate actions.

move    468/3

move To change the location of an object. After the move action, the original exists in its new location and no longer exists in its original location. Contrast with copy.

Move    469/3

Move A choice on the pop-up menu of objects that you select to move the objects to other containers. Select to position a window on the screen.

multimedia    470/3

multimedia (1) The combination of different elements of media (for example, text, graphics, audio, and still images) for display and control from a personal computer. (2) Material presented in a combination of text, graphics, video, image, animation, and sound.

multimedia system    471/3

multimedia system A system capable of presenting multiple types and formats of material in their entirety.

multiple DOS sessions    472/3

multiple DOS sessions A system service that coordinates the concurrent operation of separate DOS sessions.

multiple virtual DOS machines    473/3

multiple virtual DOS machines

See multiple DOS sessions.

multitasking    474/3

multitasking A mode of operation that provides for concurrent performance, or interleaved execution of two or more tasks.

Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI)    475/3

Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI) A protocol that enables a synthesizer to send signals to another synthesizer or to a computer, or enables a computer to send signals to a musical instrument or to another computer.

N    476/2+


network    477/3

network A configuration of data-processing devices and software connected for the purpose of sharing resources and for information interchange. See also LAN.

network administrator    478/3

network administrator The person responsible for the installation, management, and control of a network. The network administrator gives authorization to you for accessing shared resources and determines the type of access those users can have.

network group    479/3

network group A folder representing a Local Area Network or a group of objects that you have permission to access.

notebook    480/3

notebook A graphical representation that resembles a bound notebook that contains pages separated into sections by tabbed divider-pages. It contains a mechanism that you can use to turn the pages. For example, you can select a tab to turn the page to the section identified by the tab label.

O    481/2+


object    482/3

object Something that you work with to perform a task. Text and graphics are examples of objects. See also data-file object, folder, program object and device object.

open    483/3

open To create a file or make an existing file available for processing or use.

operating system    484/3

operating system Software that controls the processing of programs and that may provide services such as resource allocation, scheduling, input/output control, and data management. Although operating systems are predominantly software, partial hardware implementations are possible.

OS/2 command prompt    485/3

OS/2 command prompt A displayed symbol that indicates where you enter commands. The OS/2 command prompt is displayed in an OS/2 window or OS/2 full screen. Contrast with DOS command prompt.

P    486/2+


parallel    487/3

parallel Pertaining to the simultaneous transmission of individual parts of a whole. When a printer is connected to a parallel port, it receives an entire byte (character) at a time. See also serial.

parameter    488/3

parameter A variable used in conjunction with a command to affect its result.

parity check    489/3

parity check A mathematical operation on the numerical representation of the information communicated between two pieces. For example, if parity is odd, any character represented by an even number has a bit added to it, making it odd, and an information receiver checks that each unit of information has an odd value.

PARSEDB    490/3

PARSEDB A utility program that creates a similar database to the Migrate Applications default database (DATABASE.DAT). The Migrate Applications program uses information in this database when migrating programs. The database you create with PARSEDB contains similar information to the default database, but for different programs.

partition    491/3

partition A fixed-size division of storage. On a personal computer hard disk, one of four possible storage areas of variable size; one might be accessed by DOS, and each of the others might be assigned to another operating system.

password    492/3

password A string of characters that you, a program, or a computer operator must specify to meet security requirements before gaining access to a system and to the information stored within it.

paste    493/3

paste (1) A choice in the menu of a program that, when selected, moves the contents of the clipboard into a preselected location that you can select in a window. (2)Move the contents of the clipboard into a preselected location that you can select in a window.

path    494/3

path A statement that indicates where a file is stored on a particular drive. The path consists of all the directories that must be opened to get to a particular file. The directory names are separated by the backslash (\). The first backslash represents the root directory. For example, a file named things that is located in the EDIT directory of drive C has a path of:

    c:\edit\things

A path is sometimes followed by a file name and a file name extension (if there is one). It is sometimes preceded by a drive letter and a colon (:).

path and file name    495/3

path and file name The path and file name make up a statement that indicates where a file is stored in a particular drive. It consists of all the directories that must be opened to get to a particular file. The backslash (\) separates directory names and the file name; the first \ indicates the root. File names in the HPFS file system can be up to 254 characters and can include any number of periods. The following is an example: \INCOME\SALES.FIGURES.FOR.SEPTEMBER File names in the FAT file system can be up to eight characters and can be followed by an optional three-character extension. The following is an example: \INCOME\TAX\SALES.TXT

plotter    496/3

plotter An output device that uses multiple pens to draw on paper or transparencies.

pointer    497/3

pointer The symbol displayed on the screen that you move with a pointing device, such as a mouse.

pop-up menu    498/3

pop-up menu A menu that, when requested, is displayed next to the object it is associated with. It contains choices appropriate for a given object or set of objects in their current context. The menu is displayed by clicking mouse button 2 on an object or on the desktop.

pop-up window    499/3

pop-up window A movable window, fixed in size, in which you provide information required by an application so that the application can continue to process your request.

port    500/3

port A connector on a computer to which cables for devices, such as display stations and printers, or communications lines are attached. Ports can be parallel or serial.

port designation    501/3

port designation A 4-character identifier (such as LPT1 or COM1) assigned to a printer, plotter, or communications device so that the system has a unique way to refer to the resource.

printer driver    502/3

printer driver A file that describes the physical characteristics of a printer, plotter, or other peripheral device, and is used to convert graphics into device-specific data at the time of printing or plotting. A Presentation Manager printer driver allows you to print or plot from an application program that creates printer-independent files.

printer-independent file    503/3

printer-independent file A file in a format that is independent of a particular printer type. For example, with a Presentation Manager spooler, a file in the metafile format is printer-independent. See also printer-specific file.

printer object    504/3

printer object An object representing a physical printer or plotter, its printer driver, queue, and other settings. See also device object.

printer-specific file    505/3

printer-specific file A file that can be printed on only one type of printer. See also printer-independent file.

private    506/3

private When the WIN_CLIPBOARD setting is set to Off, this disables (makes private) the sharing of clipboard information among DOS, OS/2 and Windows programs. When the WIN_DDE (dynamic data exchange) setting is set to Off, this disables (makes private) the sharing of data among OS/2 and Windows programs.

program    507/3

program A sequence of instructions that a computer can interpret and process.

program-file object    508/3

program-file object An object that starts a program. Program files commonly have extensions of &per.EXE, .COM, .CMD, or .BAT. Contrast with data-file object.

program object    509/3

program object An object representing the file that starts a program. You can change the settings for this object to specify how you want the program to start or where the files related to the program are stored. For example, you can specify that an editor always starts with the NOTABS option. See also program-file object.

program title    510/3

program title A name that you type for a selected program. It is displayed with the icon. It can be any name you want to use to refer to the program. For example, My Favorite Editor could be used as the program title for an editor whose actual title is ABC.

program type    511/3

program type See session.

property    512/3

property (1) Synonym for setting. (2) Like a setting, but used by the OS/2 operating system to refer to printer, plotter, or print job set up.

public    513/3

public When the WIN_CLIPBOARD setting is set to On, this enables (makes public) the sharing of clipboard information among DOS, OS/2, and Windows programs. When the WIN_DDE (dynamic data exchange) setting set to On, this enables (makes public) the sharing of data among OS/2 and Windows programs.

push button    514/3

push button A rounded-corner rectangular control containing text or graphics, or both. Push buttons are used in windows for actions that occur immediately when the push button is selected.

Q    515/2+


queue    516/3

queue A line or list formed by items waiting to be processed; for example, a list of print jobs waiting to be printed. See also spooling and spooler.

queue driver    517/3

queue driver A software processor that takes a print job from a queue, and sends it to the appropriate printer driver to prepare it for printing.

R    518/2+


radio button    519/3

radio button A round button on the screen with text beside it. Radio buttons are combined to show you a fixed set of choices from which only one can be selected. The circle is partially filled when a choice is selected. Contrast with check box.

read-only    520/3

read-only A flag that prevents a file from being modified. The file with this flag set can be viewed, copied, or printed.

refresh    521/3

refresh An action that updates changed information to its current status.

remote    522/3

remote Pertaining to a system, program, or device that is accessed through a telecommunication line.

resolution    523/3

resolution (1) Density or sharpness of an image. For bit-map material, resolution is expressed in dots-per-inch, with higher quality output having more dots-per-inch. Resolution can be adjusted for some printers. Low-resolution images are printed faster, but appear coarser than high-resolution images. A printer's memory size can limit the resolution you can choose. (2) The number of lines in an image that an imaging system (for example, a telescope, the human eye, or a camera) can resolve. Higher resolution makes text and graphics appear clearer.

resource    524/3

resource Any facility of a computing system or operating system needed to perform required operations; includes disk storage, input devices, output devices (such as printers), a processing unit, data files, and programs.

restore button    525/3

restore button A button that appears in the rightmost corner of the title bar after a window has been maximized. When the restore button is selected, the window returns to the size it was before it was maximized. See also maximize button and hide button.

root directory    526/3

root directory The first directory on a drive in which all other files and subdirectories exist, such as C:\.

S    527/2+


scroll    528/3

scroll To move a display image vertically or horizontally to view data that is not otherwise visible in a display screen or window.

scroll bar    529/3

scroll bar A part of a window, associated with a scrollable area, that you interact with to see information that is not currently visible. Scroll bars can be displayed vertically and horizontally. The scroll bar can be selected only with a mouse.

select    530/3

select To use the selection button to highlight or choose an item such as an object or a menu choice. When you make a selection, there is a subsequent action that will apply. Contrast with deselect.

serial    531/3

serial Pertaining to the sequential transmission of one element at a time. Serial ports pass one bit at a time. If a port has word length 7, it must pass seven separate elements before the receiver can assemble those elements into a single recognizable whole unit (character). See also parallel.

server    532/3

server (1) On a local area network (LAN), a workstation that provides facilities to other workstations. (2) A computer that shares its resources with other computers on a network. An example of a server is a file server, a print server, or a mail server.

session    533/3

session (1) A logical connection between two machines on a network. (2) One instance of a started program or command prompt. Each session is separate from all other sessions that might be running on the computer. The operating system is responsible for coordinating the resources that each session uses, such as computer memory, allocation of processor time, and windows on the screen. The session types are OS/2 window, OS/2 full screen, DOS window, DOS full screen, WIN-OS/2 full screen, WIN-OS/2 window, and WIN-OS/2 window separate session.

setting    534/3

setting A unique characteristic of an object that can be changed or modified. The setting of an object describes the object. The name of the object is an example of a setting.

Settings    535/3

Settings A choice that defines characteristics of objects or displays identifying characteristics of objects.

shadow    536/3

shadow A link between duplicate objects. The objects can be located in different folders. If you make a change in either the duplicate or the original, the change takes effect in the other as well. Or, suppose you have a program on a drive other than drive C and want to use it from the desktop. You can make a shadow of the program for the desktop. The program is not physically moved or copied, which means you save space on your hard disk, but you can use it from the desktop.

shutdown    537/3

shutdown The process of selecting the Shut down choice before the computer is powered off so that data and configuration information is not lost.

slider    538/3

slider A control that represents a quantity and its relationship to the range of possible values for that quantity. In some cases, you can change the value of the quantity.

soft font    539/3

soft font Optional fonts shipped as files. Soft fonts must be installed onto the hard disk before they can be selected from programs. See also downloaded font.

source diskette    540/3

source diskette In a diskette-copying procedure, the diskette from which information is read. Contrast with target diskette.

source drive    541/3

source drive The drive from which information is read. Contrast with target drive.

specific DOS    542/3

specific DOS An actual DOS program product that is purchased independently of the OS/2 operating system. Examples include IBM DOS Version 3.x, Microsoft DOS Version 3.x, Digital Research** Version 5.0. Some programs are dependent on the internals of a specific DOS version. You can run these programs with the OS/2 operating system by starting a DOS session with a specific DOS version. Contrast with DOS session.

spooler    543/3

spooler A program that intercepts data going to a device driver and writes it to disk. The data is later printed or plotted when the required device is available. A spooler prevents output from different sources from being intermixed.

spooling    544/3

spooling The process of temporarily storing print jobs while waiting for an available printer or port. Spooling jobs frees system resources from waiting for a relatively slow device to provide output, and keeps the contents of each print job separated from the contents of every other print job.

sticky keys    545/3

sticky keys An input method that enables you to press and release a series of keys sequentially (for example, Ctrl+Alt+Del), yet have the keys behave as if they were pressed and released at the same time. This method can be used for those who require special-needs settings to make the keyboard easier to use.

system    546/3

system A flag that indicates that a file or directory is part of the operating system.

system font    547/3

system font One of the fonts available for screen display and printing. You can specify any size for this font, and it supports any language. Contrast with device font.

T    548/2+


tab    549/3

tab (1) An action, achieved by pressing the Tab key that moves the cursor to the next field. (2) A graphical representation of a book-like tab on a notebook that, when selected, turns the notebook page.

target diskette    550/3

target diskette In a diskette or storage copying procedure, the diskette onto which information is written. Contrast with source diskette.

target drive    551/3

target drive The drive to which information is written. Contrast with source drive.

template    552/3

template An object that you can use as a model to create additional objects. When you drag a template you create another of the original object, as though you were peeling one of the objects off a stack.

tile    553/3

tile A choice in a menu that modifies the size of each window and arranges them so that they appear side-by-side and top-to-bottom.

title bar    554/3

title bar The area at the top of each window that can contain the window title and a title-bar icon. When appropriate, it also contains the hide, maximize, and restore buttons.

title-bar icon    555/3

title-bar icon The mini-icon in the upper-left corner of the title bar that represents the object that is open in the window. You can use the object to display the pop-up menu or close a window.

U    556/2+


user interface    557/3

user interface The hardware, software, or both that allows you to interact with and perform operations on a computer.

Using Help    558/3

Using Help A cascaded choice on the Help menu that gives you information about how the help function works. This choice is also available on those programs that have Help as a choice on a menu bar.

V    559/2+


value    560/3

value A quantity assigned to a constant, a variable, or a parameter.

videodisc    561/3

videodisc A disc on which programs are recorded for playback on a computer (or a television set); a recording on a videodisc.

view    562/3

view The appearance of the contents of an open object (for example, a folder can be displayed in icon view, tree view, settings view or details view.

virtual device driver    563/3

virtual device driver A type of device driver used by DOS programs running in a DOS virtual machine, in order to access devices such as the screen or mouse which must be shared with other processes in the system. The virtual device driver maps DOS device commands to the normal (physical) device driver under OS/2 Version 3.

virtual DOS machine    564/3

virtual DOS machine See DOS session.

W    565/2+


waveform    566/3

waveform (1) A graphic representation of the shape of a wave that indicates the wave's characteristics, such as frequency and amplitude. (2) A digital method of storing and manipulating audio data within a computer. (3) A series of digital samples of the audio input stream taken at regular intervals over the duration of the audio event.

wildcard character    567/3

wildcard character Either a question mark (?) or an asterisk (*) used as a variable in a file name or file name extension when referring to a particular file or group of files.

WIN-OS/2*    568/3

WIN-OS/2* WIN-OS/2 is a feature of OS/2 that enables OS/2 to run supported Windows programs. See supported Windows programs.

WIN-OS/2 session    569/3

WIN-OS/2 session A WIN-OS/2 session created by the OS/2 operating system that supports the independent processing of a Windows program. The Windows program can run in a WIN-OS/2 full-screen, WIN-OS/2 window, or WIN-OS/2 window separate session.

window    570/3

window An area of the screen with visible boundaries within which information is displayed. A window can be smaller than or the same size as the screen. Windows can appear to overlap on the screen.

Window List    571/3

Window List A menu choice that displays a list of all of the open windows in a product. Use the Window List choice to switch to an active program, to tile or cascade open program windows, to surface hidden windows, or to close a program.

Windows program    572/3

Windows program A program written for the Microsoft Windows application programming interface.

workarea    573/3

workarea A folder setting that enables you to organize your desktop by grouping together objects for a specific task. For example, you could group a plotter object with data-file objects that contain charts and documents.

working directory    574/3

working directory A specified directory that becomes the current directory when a program is started. The current directory is the first directory in which the operating system looks for programs and files and stores temporary files and output. Some programs require a working directory.

Workplace Shell    575/3

Workplace Shell A graphical user interface that makes working with your computer easier. The Workplace shell lets you manage your work without having to learn the complexities of the operating system.